€ KAR€R€
Wahanga 35 Hanuere, 1941 Nama 1
j*
m <e$
TE TAU HOU, 1941
mmntittism*ma&
#
*V
4 P-cayec foe- tAe Hew Ifeac
By Solveig Paulson
Oh Lord, in this new year, May I be strong and quick to see The graces You have planted deep In all creation, tenderly.
I would be wise to see the things worth
while, And generous with Thy gifts to me, Have ready hands for heavy toil, And bear misfortune buoyantly.
I would have healthy, friendly thoughts, Clean swept, like rocks beside the sea, And wit to find life's crevices Packed full of mirth and jollity.
Oh, Lord, may all the days that come Just find me sweet and pliable and free, Like grass that yields itself to wind Then rises, after, gracefully!
— Improvement Era.
1 5«_ sd m. sd m. .
R£5F
ff
Te Karere
w
Established in 1907
Wahanga 35
Hanuere, 1941
Nama 1
Matthew Cowley Kelly Harris Hohepa Meha Eru TV Kupa Waimate Anaru
Tumuaki Mihana
Nga Etita
Kaiwhakamaori Kaiwhakamaori
"Ko tenei Pepa i zvhakatapua hex hapai ake i te iwi Maori ki roto i nga whakaaro-nui.'
"Te Karere" is published monthly by the New Zealand Mission of the Church of Jesus Cnrist of Latter-day Saints, and is printed by TE KARERE PRESS, No. 2 Scotia Place, Upper Queen Street, Auckland, C.l, N.Z. Subscription Rates: 3/- per six months; 5/- per year; £1 for five years; £2/10/- for life. (United States Cur- rency: $1.00 per year; $4.00 for five years; $10.00 for life.)
Address Correspondence, Box 72, Auckland, C.l, New Zealand.
L^
CONTENTS
Editorial — Page
"A Day of Warning" 522
Special Features —
Te Kirihimete, na Hori Hooro 502
He Rongo Korero Mo Te Whawhai, na Paepae Witehira 503
Pakiwhara, na Waimate Anaru i Whakamaori 504
He Mihi Kia Ta Apirana Ngata 507
"The Eastern Orthodox Church," by John T. Georges 518
"The Health of the Maori Race," by Wi Pere Amaru, A. P.., M.A. 526
"What to do with Your Genealogy," by Mark E. Petersen 529
"Are Poets Inspired of God?" by Elder H. W. Kirkham 532
Church Features —
Mahi Kura Hapati 510
News from the Field 513
Sunday School 516
Statistics 517
Branch Teacher's Message 531
"From the Desk of the General Superintendency," In Elder
Wallace F. Bennett " 533
( renealogy I department
Primary 536
Mutual hupp j\ uncut Association 541
f
502 TE KARERE Hanmn . 1941
TE KIRIHIMETE
Na Hori Hooro
TIMATA mai ia Molii tae mai ki nga whakapaparanga Poropiti o muri iho i koa katoa ratou i te koa o te ra Kirihimete. Ahakoa e whia mano tau, ran tan rand te tawhiti atu ia ratou, o te ra whanau ai te Ariki i whiwhi tonu te hunga whakapono o nehera ki te koa, ki te rangimarie o te Kirihimete Na ratou nei hoki i whakaatu nga tohu o taua ra ki te ao.
Ko ta Ihaia kupu whakaari i rangona i te \va e po atarau ana te hitori o Iharaira; i roto i te kino, i te whakaheke toto e takatu ana; i raro ano hoki i nga taumaha-tanga o te ture; ka homai enei kupu hei taanga manawa mo ratou. Heaha te he o te kii ahakoa i roto i te hohonutanga o nga mano tau o nga whakatupuranga tangata o mua i koa tonu te hunga whakapono i te koa o te Kirihimete? i wai- ata ano ratou i te waiata Atua, o te maungarongo ki te whenua o te whakaaro pai ki nga tangata. I roto i o ratou koringa, kahore he hoaketanga ko tenei anake; pumau tonu te whakamau atu a o ratou mata ki te wa, ki te ra me te haora e tatu ai nga waewae o te Mihaia ki runga ki te whenua — te "Tino Kirihimete."
E tata ana tenei te eke ki te rua mano tau e Kirihimete ana ia tau, ia tau. Tena ra e hoki a tatou mahara ki te takoto o nga kupu whakaari e tutuki tonu nei i tenei ra. Te Kirihimete i mahue ake nei me te Kirihimete e tumai nei kei roto i te po atarau He mano tini nga whaea ka uhunga kia ratou tamariki e whakaeke atu ra i nga maunga o te riri i nga raorao o te mate; ka whakangaro atu ki roto i te mura o te ahi e rauna nei i te ao
He ra pouri enei ki te ran o te ropu tangata pera me te ra ia Rahera me ona tamariki kua turakina e te hoari a Herora
No reira whakatapatahi atu o tatou manawa ki to tatou Atua, kia whakatauria te wikitoria ki tana i pai ai, kia tau iho te tomairangi o Tona aroha kia hohoro mai te Kirihimete o te Maungarongo, kia awhinatia te hunga e pouri ana, e mamae ana i te mata o te hoari.
Ahakoa i roto i te pouri me Meri Kirihimete tonu tatou, me man hoki nga whakaaro ki te tau hou kia tika, kia toa.
HE POWHIRI HUI PARIHA
He panuitanga tenei ka tu te Hui Pariha o te takiwa o Here- taunga nei ki Waipawa, a te Ratapu tuatoru o Hanuere, 1941, ara, i te Hatarei me te Ratapu, te 18 me te 19 o nga ra.
Haere mai tatau ki konei : he wa pai tenei kia tutaki, kia kite kia rongo hoki i te Timuaki Mihana.
Na te Timuakitanga o te Takiwa.
Hanuere, 1941 TE KARERE 503
HE RONGO KORERO MO TE WHAWHAI
Na Paepae Witehira
Kei te horapa haere tonu te whawhai ki etahi a.tu motu ara ko te hoa o Tiamani ko Itari kua takahi i te whenua o nga Kariki.
E rua rau mano nga hoia o Itari kua whakaeke atu ki runga o taua whenua a kei te kaha nga Kariki ki te tu atu ki aua taua. Ka nui te kaha o te whawhai a tenei hunga engari e haere raru ana i Itari inaianei.
Ka nui te parakura o taua iwi i nga Kariki ara (Greece). E haere kaha ana te whawhai a tenei iwi a e pera ana ano hoki ta te Ingarihi raua ko Tiamana. Kahore te whawhai e ahu mai ana ki te mama engari e ahu ke atu ana ki te taimahatanga. Kahore ano i ruarua noa te whakaaro a tetahi taha me tetahi taha engari kei te tapatahi tonu te whakaaro a te tokorua kia haere kaha tonu te riri. Kei te titaritaria tonutia nga taonga nga whare nga tangata me nga mea rere rangi.
Ka tokowha inaianei nga iwi kei te haere kaha te whawhai. Ko Tiamana raua ko Ingarangi me Itari raua ko Kariki. He nui te parekura o te tangata o nga mea rere rangi me era atu o nga mea o enei whenua e wha.
Ko nga mea rere rangi kua pakaru e 5058 o te Tiamana e 1648 o te Inarihi e 299 o Itari e whitu tekau o nga Kariki. Na kei te kaha te haere o nga wheketere ite ao ite po kei te hanga i nga mea wha- whai atetahi taha me tetahi. Kei te u tonu te whakaaro o Amerika kite hanga me te tuku i nga mea whawhai ki Ingarangi.
Ko tu ano te Timuaki a Ruhiwhera (Roosevelt) ki taua turanga i te toru o nga wa. He tangata tuatahi tenei ki pera te hikoi. Kote kaupapa tuturu kia rua ano wa ka mutu ai ka riro i tetahi atu. He nui te koa o tenei taha mo te tunga ano o tenei tangata ko te take ko tona kaha katoa e whakapaua ana ki te awhina i a Ingarangi.
He ripoata poto mo te motu nei. Kua haere te ture mum inaianei mote pakeha kia uru ki te whakareri mote whawhai a. ka rua putanga o te tono. Kua puta te tono a te Kawanatanga ki nga kura katoa Maori, pakeha kia kohia he moni hei whakatu whare hokohoko ma nga hoia ite whawhai, ko nga kura Maori mo nga hoia Maori nga kura Pakeha mo nga pakeha. Kati mo tenei wa. Kia ora te iwi kua haere me te hunga kei te kainga. (Taria te Roanga)
BOUND VOLUME OF " TE KARERE," 1940
A limited number of hound volumes of the 1940 issue of Te Karen' will soon be available. Place your orders as soon as possible with Te Karere, Box 72, Auckland.
SW TE KARERE Hanuen-. 1941
PAKIWHARA
Tona takenga mai, tona horapatanga ki etahi atu mc tona taeatanga te mahi kia ora.
No Waimate Anaru i Whakamaori
He mate wehi rawa tend mate. Ko tona timatanga i aim i roto i nga ahuatanga paruparu o te tane raua ko te wahine. T puta ake i enei ahuatanga he ngarara ririki rawa kahore e kitea ana e te
kanohi maori, ma te karaihe anake ka kitea. E kia ana lie spirochete. E rere ana tenei mate i tetahi ki tetahi atu. Tera noa ake ko te tane e pa atu ana ki te wahine- kei tetahi nei o raua tenei mate, tera ano etahi e pangia ana i nga kihinga, taoretanga ranei i nga taore o nga mea pera, me nga inumanga i te kapu, karaihe ranei i inu ai ana hunga e pangia ana e tenei ahua mate. E hara i te mea kotahi anake te mate nei, engari he maha noa atu ahua rere ki tetahi i tetahi me nga ngarara ano hoki rereke ano tetahi i tetahi.
Ko te mate "pakiwhara" he tino kai kohuru tangata. Kei etahi taone o Amerika nuku atu i te 100,000 e mate ana ia tan ia tan i tenei mate, e 40,000 e mate ana ia tau i te mate a ngakau. Na tana mate ano e 25,000 pepi e mate ana ia tau no te mea he paki- whara nga matua. Kei taua takiwa ano nuku atu i te 10,000,000 nga mea kua pangia e tenei mate. Nui atu hoki nga tamariki e kapotia ana. E wha nga ahuatanga o tenei mate. I te 10 ra ki te toru wiki katahi ano ka kitea kua puta ki waho, ahua penei me te hakihaki nei me he komaoa nei. Ko nga tane e kitea ana nga tohu ki runga i te kirimatamata, ko nga wahine e kitea ana nga tohu ki te wahanga o te aroaro me te takotoranga tamariki. Tera nga tohu nei e kitea ki etahi wahi atu o te tinana, ki nga ngutu, ki te arero, nga matimati waewae ranei. Nga wahi i pa ai nga ngarara mate nei kua pa ki taua wahi ka hari te tangata e tae wawe ana ki te "takuta" e wa tuatahi ana. E ngawari ana hoki ki te rongoa ina tere te mahi.
Wahi tuarua : e timata tenei wa i te toru wiki ki te ono wiki. He nui nga tohu o te mate nei e puta i tenei wa. Ka komaoa katoa te tinana. Ko te tikanga kahore e rekareka ana. Ka komaoa a roto o te mangai, a muri o te te kauae me nga tako ano nei he kainga na te piwa me te makariri. Ka puta he pukupuku ririki ki runga i te wahi ngaro o te tinana a ka horapa atu ki nga wahi katoa o te tinana. Tera nga huruhuru nga ngakuru, tera e mamae te korokoro me he piwa. Ko te wa tenei e mohiotia ai te mate ina whaka- matauria nga toto o te tangata. Kia mau ki nga tohutohu ka ora.
Te wahi tuatoru : He maha nga tangata e pangia ana e tenei mate kahore e mohiotia ana, tera pea kihai he tohu o waho, kahore hoki he mamae o roto e mohiotia ana, ma te whakamatau anake i nga toto ka mohiotia ai koia kei roto nga ngarara nei e ngau ana. Ka puta tenei ahua o te mate pakiwhara nei ki te hunga kahore
Hanuere, 1941 TE KARERE 505
nga toto e tirohia ana, otira nga ngarara nei e tae atu ana ki nga paipa toto ki te aho turuturu, ki te ngakau me era atu wahi o te tinana,
Te wahi tuawha : e rima tau ki te tekau tau. A 20 ki 30 tau i muri iho i enei mahinga katoa me he mea kahore i tino ora ka waiho hei whakore kaha i te tinana me nga waewae. Ka matapotia te tangata a he nui etahi atu mate me he mea ka mohiotia koia nei te mate he toenga mai na te pakiwhara nei. Ma te hoki anake ki nga tohutohu nei ka ora ai, na reira me whakamatau nga toto ia tau ia tau, kia mohiotia ai kahore tenei mate i roto i nga tangata me nga wahine ano hoki.
"Ko te pakiwhara he mate kaha ki te hopu tangata/'
I roto i te wahi tuatahi me te wahi tuarua o tenei mate koia nei te wa kaha o te mate nei ki te rere ki tetahi atu. Ma te mea e mate ana e tupato ka puta ake i tenei wa nga tohu o enei wahi e rua. E ma ana a runga o nga mate e pararahi ana a runga o nga mata. Kia tino tupato kei whara i nga mata o te pu nei. Waiho hei tauira me penei te ahua. Kauarawa te tane me te wahine kei a raua nei tenei mate e tutu ki etahi atu no te mea ka riro tonu atu taua pakiwhara i tetahi atu. Kaua e kihi ki nga mangai pera. Kaua e taore i nga taore o etahi atu. Kaua e inu i te karaihe e inu ai etahi atu, karaihe niho ranei, paipa me era atu mea e riro ai nga ngarara mate. Ina mutu te raweke i to wahi e mate ana me horoi rawa o ringa ki te hopi.
"Ko te pakiwhara i roto i te ha puta nga."
E kaha ana te mate nei ki te rere atu i te whaea ki te pepi i roto i te takotoranga tamariki. E rima ra i roto i te ono o nga wahine kahore e rongoatia ana e kokiri ana te pepi e mate roto ana. Ko nga mea i puta ahua pararuki noaiho te ahua o te ora. Ko tenei ahuatanga he mea kore noaiho ina rongoatia te whaea i te wa tonu e noho ai te pepi i roto iaia hei awhina i te whaea me tona pepi.
Ko etahi wahine kahore e tino mohio ki te ahua o te huringa o tona wa ara te whakaaturanga o te tamingi i roto i te wahine. Nga wahine katoa e hapu ana kia tere tana haere kia tirohia ana toto kei raru te pepi i tenei mate. Ki te kitea kei roto tenei mate i nga toto me timata tonu atu te mahi i mua atu i te taenga o te kopu ki te rima marama, ki te timata te rongoa i muri i te rima marama e toru ano tamariki e ora i roto i te rima.
Ko te mea nui inaianei ko te oranga o tenei mate i nga takuta mohio kei te ao nei. Ko ta ratou whakahaere he mea penei. Ko te pakiwhara ka ono marama te panga mai, ka nui te tere o te mahinga kua mutu te kai o nga ngarara ki roto i te tinana, ko nga mea i pangia i raro mai i te 11 tau e 70 nga papunga e 30 e
506 TE KARERE Hanuere, 1941
mapua ana he spirochet ki nga ringaringa hei patu i nga ngarara i
roio 1 nga toto. E 40 enei mapunga (bismuth compound) ki te hunui o te tangata. Ko tend alma mahi me mapu tonu kotahi i
roto i te wiki. Kanaka e mutu ai pau noa nga wiki e 70. Kaua e taoki i muri iho i nga mapunga tuatahi ka kore haere atu nga tohu kei runga i te tinana e man ana. Kaua e haere ki nga whare mahi rongoa rongoa ai ia koutou. Heoi ano ta ratou e whakaaro ana ko a koutou moni me te tere ano hoki o te ora, engari e kore e roa kua hoki mai ano tana mate kia koutou.
Me mahara mau ki enei maharatanga o te "pakiwhara."
1. Me whakamatau nga toto i nga tan katoa.
2. E kite i te takuta i te \va ano e pa a.i tenei mate kia koe. Kaua e haere ki nga whare rongoa.
3. Kua whakamaramatia e runga ake nei ki 70 mapunga katahi ano ka ora pai tenei mate i roto i te tinana.
4. Te spinal fluid me tirotiro i te wa e mania ana tenei mate hei mohiotanga mo te takuta mo te ahua o nga roro me nga nana haerenga toto. Tera pea kua. he te takotoranga i te mate nei.
5. Ko nga wahine katoa kua pangia e tenei mate haere kia tirohia nga toto e te takuta mo te whai tamarikitanga e kore e pangia e tenei mate kino. Kia tino noho tatou i runga i te whai whakaaro mo enei mate kikino o te ao nei hei peehi i nga whakaaturanga c heke mai nei kua homai e te Atua he tangata mohio ki tenei ao hei awhina i aia i waenganui i nga tamariki a te tangata. Kei whaka- whirinaki tonu tatou ki te whakamahi i te Atua mo nga mate e taea e taiou te mahi nga rongoa tae atu hoki ki nga takuta mohiotanga kei te ao nei kua homai hei painga mo tatou katoa.
HE MAHI WHAKAMIHARO
I tu he marena ki roto i Takahiwai i te 26 o nga ra o Oketopa i raro i te whakahaere o Hirini T. Heremaia. T tana wa i hou he wairua uiui ki roto i nga matua o te tane, a i riro na Hirini i whakamarama nga whakahoki me te kauwhau hoki i te Rongopai. He wairua ora ia matou katoa i roto i tenei ra. I whakapono te whanau a Te Reweti Penehia me tana wahine, a i konei ka vvhakae- tia kia iriiringia eta.hi o nga tamariki a ko etahi i manaakitia. Ko nga mea i hou ki roto i te wai o te iriiritanga ko Ra.ngi Marama Te Reweti Pendiia me Iritana Te Reweti Penehia, a ko nga mea i manaakitia ko Hemi, Mereana me Tui Penehia. Ko nga matua o '"nei tamariki ko Te Reweti Penehia me Pira Te Reweti Penehia. He tika he mea whakamiharo tenei.
— Tuwharerangi Hcnare.
Hanuere, 1941 TE KARERE 5^7
HE MIHI KIA TA APIRANA NGATA
TENA ra koe Ta Apirana Ngata e whai kupu nei ki to iwi Maori. Te matua o te Iwi tena koe. Kia nui nga manaaki- tanga a te Kai-hanga kia koe e whakahua nei hoki koe i te Tiriti o Waitangi me te whakanuinga o te huri rau tau ia Pepuere te 6 o te tau nei. I taua ra i whakaaro pehea tatou? Kei te whaka- aro pehea tatou inaianei?
I tenei ra kua kore he whenua, a ko te kaute o te Maori i te 1914 piki ake i te 50,000 a inaianei e tata ana ki te 80,000, a e 3 miriona (3,000,000) eka tonu e toe ana.
Tuatahi — Kia mail ki to Maoritanga, te reo Maori kia mau, akona a koutou tamariki i runga tonu i nga turi o o ratou whaea ki te reo. Kaua e tukua ki nga kura ako ai i te reo. Kia mau ki nga tikanga Maori, mahi Maori, mahi a ringaringa me era atu.
Tuarua — Tukua a koutou tamariki ki nga kura ki te ako mai i nga matauranga katoa o te Pakeha a kia mau ki te Maoritanga, ahakoa pehea to haere tahi i te pakeha e kore koe e kiia he pakeha.
Tuatoru — ko te tono ki te Kawanatanga kia riteriie te Maori ki te Pakeha i roto i nga turanga whakahaere mahi, ara (equality of opportunities) i te mea e pehia ana te Maori ki raro ano i te Pakeha.
Tuawha — Me tono ki te Kawanatanga ko tana hoko whenua mo te Pakeha me ahu mai ano mo te Maori, tena rawa ia i te mea kua haere nei a tatou tamariki ki te awhina i roto i te pakanga nei. Te take mutunga hei maimai mini kia koe e hoa kia inoi te iwi mo a tatou tamariki i te pakanga.
— Tokc Watene.
RIPOATA HUI PARIHA
la Noema te 23 me te 24 o nga ra ka tu te Hui Pariha o Hau- raki i te Wairoa, Tauranga. He tino kaha nga tangata whenua ki te manaaki, ara nga mea i eke mai o Whatawhata, Mangere, Akarana me Hauraki. I te mea ko tenei te Hui Pariha tuatahi i muri iho o te hokinga atu o nga kaumatua he nui nga mi hi ki te iwi mo tenei Hui Pariha pai.
I te po o te haterei ka timata te Hui i raro o te whakahaere o te Paraimere, na Marjorie Bryan i whakahaere. He tino pai nga waiata, poi me nga haka a nga tamariki, a i muri iho na Hohepa Kohu o te ropu Miutara i whakahaere. lie nui nga mea pai o tenei karakia. Ko le purei he mea whakataetae na teiahi tangata ko "Nicotine" ki tethi atu ko "Alcohol" mo runga i te ahua o ta raua whakamate i te tangata i te nui o te paihana i roto ia raua.
Nga karakia o te Ratapu i timta lie "kura rongopai" me nga patai me nga whakahoki. I te 8 o nga haora ka. hui te Tohungatanga me te llui Atawhai. I korerotia nga mahi a nga apiha o te Tohunga- tanga me etahi patai e pa ana mo ana main. ko te korero a te Timuaki Mihana, kia kaua e pehia e te Tohungatanga nga mahi a te
Miii Atawhai no te mea he ropU whakahaere ano ta nga wahine.
508 TE KARERE Hanucre, 1(M1
Te karakia Kura Hapati i timata i te hapahi o te 10. Na te koea o Huria i raro i te whakahaere o Roy Matthews i waiata te nuinga o nga himene, a na Oriwa Omipi i whakahaere te karakia. 1 timata te karakia kauwhau i te 2, na Timuaki Toke Watene o Hauraki i whakahaere. T tautokona i tenei karakia, Ilui hoki, te Timuaki Mihana me ana kaiawhina katoa me te hoatu hoki i nga ingoa lion mo nga turanga i mahue iho i nga kaumatua, a Ilori Watene hei teputi hekeretari mo te Mihana, a Kelly Harris me Hohepa M. Meha hei Etita mo "Te Karere." Ko nga kai korero mo tenei Hui e whai ake nei — Tangatai Teito, Timuaki o Mangere, nga Te Hira (brothers) o Waikato, Hare Piahana, Sister Kewene, Eru Nikorima me te Timuaki, a Matin Kauri. Te karakia mutunga na te Ilui Ata- whai i timata i raro o te whaka.haere a Sister Rosie Watene a na Hori Watene i whaka haere te waahi mo te Tohungatanga.
Na Rosie Wat cue.
HE PANUITANGA
Ka tu he hui Tohungatanga me he Hui Atawhai me nga Timua- ki tanga o nga ropu awhina o te Takiwa o Hauraki ki HUKIA, Tau- ranga a te 26 o Hanuere 1941. Kua tae tenei ki te mutunga o te Tan 1940. Tenei ra matou ka tuku atu i ta matou mihi ki nga Hunga Tapu katoa o te Takiwa me nga Apiha whakahaere o nga ropu awhina ia matou i mama ai nga mahi o te Takiwa. Ma te Atua koutou katoa e manaaki, kia kaha, kia ora hoki i roto i te Tau 1941. Waiho enei take hei whakamaunga ma te whakaaro, i roto i te tau hou. — "Te inoi i te ata i te ahiahi, te kupu o te matau- ranga, te kohi ohaoha o nga wiki nohopuku, whakatekau, me nga mahi i o tatou whakapapa, a ko tenei hei kupu pepeha ma tatou — 'Mahia te mahi i te mea e ao ana, me ake ko te po e kore ai e taea te mahi.' " — Hoani 9:4. "Mo reira nei hoki me whakapu rawa o koutou uaua a honoa iho te pai ki runga i to kautori whakapono : ki runga hoki i te pai, ko te matauranga ki runga i te matauranga, ko te pehi i te hiahia, a ki runga ki te pehi i te hiahia, ko te manawanui ki runga ki te manawanui, ko te karakia pai ki runga ki te karakia pai, ko te atawhai ki nga teina ki runga i te atawhai ki nga teina, ko te aroha ki te mea kei ia koutou enei mea a e nui ana, ka meinga koutou kia kaua e mangere." — 2 Pita 1 : 5-8.
Hapi Xu Ia . . . Na te Timuakitanga o Hauraki.
HE MATENGA
Utaina atu ra enei kupu ki runga ki te tuara o to tatou Karere maana hei waha atu ki nga marae o nga motu o te ao hei titiro ma nga iwi i te matenga o ta matou tamaiti o Mairepuhangahau Day- mond i te ra horoi, 30 o nga ra o Noema, 1940. E 18 noahio ona tau, a he tamaiti kaha ki te whakarite i tona karangatanga Rikona o te Peka o Manaia. He nui ra te aroha.
— Turake Hana, Timuaki Peka.
Hanuere, 1941 TE KARERE 509
E Te Karere,
Mau e panui atu te matenga o te kotiro a Robert Miljak raua ko te Aurere Miljak. No te ahiahi ka pa mai te mate, ao ake ka mate i te 13 o Noema, 1940.
Ko tona mate ki te korero a te Rata he niumonia. I mauria mai e ona matua kia manaakitia e au i mua atu o te taenga ki te rata. Otirawa te manaaki ka mauria ki te rata, heoi e rima meneti te taenga ki reira ka mate. Koia ano enei ko etahi o nga mate uruta e korerotia nei.
Ko tona papa he tino pakeha engari he mea tuku ano ana tama- riki katoa ki roto i te hahi o te Hunga Tapu. Ko ia anake kei waho. He Hunga Tapu ano hoki tona hoa wahine. Kia ora,
* * * Hirini T. Heremaia.
Ki nga Etita o Te Karere,
E hoa ma tena korua. Panuitia atu te matenga o Renata Komene i te 15 o nga ra o Noema, 1940.
Ko tona mate he mate rereke, ara, i moe, kore tonu atu i korero. E kore e haere. I etahi taima ka korerotia atu ka tungou, hoi ano tino kore e kiki. E waru nga ra ka mate. Kihai ana tamariki me te iwi i mohio ki ona whakaaro. Ka tutuki nga kupu whakaari ka puta nga mate uruta ; koia enei ko aua mate uruta.
Ki te korero a te rata he pararaiha. He nui ona iwi i taemai kia kite i tona matenga. Ko 17 o nga ra ka nehua atu ia ki te wahi tapu o te wharekarakia o te peka o Kaikohe. Na Hemi Whautere i whakatapu tona rua. Kia ora ra,
Na Hirini T. Heremaia.
No te 25 Noema, 1940, ka mate a Keita Kereama (Tungane Kingi) ki te Napier Hospital. E waru marama ia e oke ana i te taumaha o tona mate. I whanau ia ki Te Aute i te tau 1861, he mea tapa tona ingoa a Keita e Archdeacon Samuel Williams he ingoa no to na tuahine no Kate Williams. Ko tona matua tane a te Kereama Hupata ko ia te tahi o nga kaumatua na ana i whakanoho a Arch- deacon Samuel Williams ki Te Aute i wehea ai a Te Aute College, Hawke's Bay. No taua takiwa ka whakaritea taua kaumatua he Reimana (Layman) mo te Hahi Ingarangi. I piri pono taua kau- matua ki te Kawanatanga o Niu Tireni ite whawhai kia Te Kooti i raro ia Major Henare Tomoana. Ko tona Hapu ko Ngai- Terangikoianake, Ngai-Tewhatiapiti, he wahanga no roto o Ngati- Kahungunu ki roto o Heretaunga, he uri rangatira no roto i nga Hapu i whakahuatia ake nei. He mea iriiri te kuia nei ki Papawai takiwa o Wairarapa 25 Aperire 1897, e Elder II. Lee Bradford. E rima ana tamariki e rua kua mate ko nga una kei te ora ko Teao Wirihana (hekeretari o te mahi whakapapa o te Mihana), Tareha Kingi, me Ereatara Kingi. I te wahine kaha ki nga main o te rongopai i roto ite Peka o Heretaunga. Nga karakia whakamutunga me te whakatapu i tona urupa na Eriata Nopera Timuaki takiwa o I laki Pei, i whakahaere. He mea tanu tona tinanai te 26 Noema 1940.
510 TE KARERE Hanuere, 1941
MAHI KURA HAPATI
RATAPU TUATAHI:
AKORANGA 37
Ta Te Tangata Whakaaturanga. Upoko 2.
I te mea ko te oranga he whakamutungakore no reira kaore ona timatanga kaore rawa hoki ona whakamutunga, i tetahi ahua tena wahi me tena wahi o te hanganga ake he timatanga ano tona a i roto i nga tu ahua katoa o te oranga e whakaaturia na e tena ropu me tena ropu o nga mea kuahanga kaore nei hoki e taea te tatau he tuatahi ano tona, a he whakamutunga hoki; ahakoa hoki ko nga whakamutunga me nga whakaotinga o nga mea o te ao (nature) he timatanga atu ano. No reira, na to te tangata matauranga i kite he mea hei whakaatu hei whakamarama hoki mo nga tukunga iho i tu ai te whenua mai i tona turanga korekore noa iho ki tona ahua inaianei, he wahi e pai ana hei nohoanga i runga. Otira, na runga i enei tirohanga ka kitea ko tenei ao he wahi titohea i mua. Ko nga mea hoki e ora nei i runga inaianei kaore i te ora i runga i mua. No reira i runga i enei whaka- aturanga e ahei ana kia timata he oranga i runga i te whenua, e ahei ai tenei timatanga ma tetahi hanganga, tipunga noa ake ranei, he homaitanga ranei i waho atu o te whenua. Mehemea ki te whakaaetia he mea homai nga mea e ora nei i runga i te whenua no tetahi atu ao tawhito atu i tenei ka horapa whanui ana kimikimi mo te timatanga o te oranga ; e kore hoki e ahei kia kiia te roohi e tipu nei i roto i ta tatou kaari putiputi i te mea he mea tango mai i tetahi atu roohi, a koia tera te timatanga mai o te roohi. Ko te matauranga o te tangata e mea ana he timatanga o nga mea kei runga i te wrhenua a he wa mutunga mo te whenua i roto i nga mea e tupu haere nei ; a ki te pera te whenua ka pera atu ano hoki era atu tinana penei i raro i te rangi. Te mutunga kore o te oranga kaore i konei ake i te mutunga kore o te huringa o te ahua o ia mea no te mea ia ahua he timatanga he whakamutunga e whakaatu katoa ana i te Kai-whakahaere mau tonu.
Te putake o nga mea kua hanga, te timatanga o te ao kua topu he pakeke rawa te whakamarama i tona ake kaha ki te whakawhiti i tona ahua e mohiotia atu nei te hua noa ake ranei o te whakamahi ona mea. Nga Patai:
1. He aha i noho ai te timatanga me te whakaotinga o nga mea o te ao, hei timatanga mo tetahi atu mea?
2. He pehea te ahua o tenei ao i mua atu i te nohoanga e te tangata?
3. Pehea nga mea e ora nei i runga i mua atu?
4. Me pehea e ahei ai he timatanga mo te whenua i te mea kaore he oranga i runga i te tuatahi?
5. Te roohi i tupu ake he mea whawhati mai na tatou i tetahi atu roohi e ahei ana ranei kia kiia ko ia tera te timatanga mai o tenei mea o te roohi?
RATAPU TUARUA
AKORANGA 38
Te Atua me te Tokoturu Tapu. Upoko 2.
E kore e taea e te tangata ake i roto i ana wananga te whakaatu pono mo te mohiotanga ki te Atua i te mea e he noa ana ia i roto i nga mea ngawari ake; otira te whakamahinga i tana wananga hei awhina iaia i roto i ana rapurapunga hei whakakaha hei whakapuman hoki i te mohiotanga e tupu nei i roto i aia mo tona Kai-hanga. "E ki ana te kuare i roto i tona ngakau kaore he Atua" I roto i tenei rarangi korero pera ano i era rarangi karaipiture, ko te kuare he tangata tutu, tona matauranga kua kauparengia e ana mahi he riro mai ana ko te
Hanuere, 1941 TE KARERE 511
pouri hakere, kaore hoki he maramatanga ki tona hinengaro, kua riro te mohiotanga i te kore mohio. Na tenei ahua ka he haere te hine- ngaro kua kore e ahei te hapai ake i nga mea tautoko i roto i nga mea
0 te (nature). Te tangata totohe tonu kia hara ia ka tupu haere te turi ki te reo o te mohio e tupu nei i roto i aia me te whiriwhiri marama i roto i nga mea tapu, na konei ka makere atu i aia te wahi hei kohimuhimu atu ki tona Kai-hanga, a na konei ka tino kaupareatu e ia te tino huarahi e whiwhi a tinana ai ia ki te mohiotanga ki te Atua.
Nga Patai:
1. He aha i kore ai e tino taea e te tangata ake te whakaatu pono mo te Atua?
2. Pehea ta te kuare korero mo te Atua?
3. He aha te tangata kuare, pehea hoki te ahua mo taua tu tangata?
4. Na te aha i kore ai e whiwhi a tinana ia ki te mohiotanga ki te Atua?
RATAPU TUATORU
AKORANGA 39
Te whakakitenga e whakawhiwhi ana i te tangata i te mohiotanga tuturu mo te Atua. He maha nga whakaaturanga karaipiture ara o Ihowa, e whaka- mohio ana i aia ki ona poropiti i nga wa o mua tae mai hoki ki nga wa o muri mai. Kua kitea iho e tatou, hei kaupapa mo nga kupu maha tuku iho o nehe, e pa nei ki te oranga me te tangatatanga o te Atua, ko nga whakakitenga a te Atua i aia ano kia Arama me era atu peteriaka o mua atu o te waipuke; tuku iho hoki kia Noa, kia Apera- haraa, kia Ihaka, kia Hakopa tae noa kia Mohi. Hei tauira tera he whakaaturanga poto kei a Kenehi mo Enoka te matua o Metuhera; mo ona kua korero ra tatou i tona whakaaturanga i haere tahi ia me te Atua; a tera atu ano i tino whakaatu marama mai te Atua i aia ano ki tenei poropiti tika, me te whakakite mai ki aia nga mea e tupono tae noa mai ki te wa i whakaritea ai a te Karaiti ki tana mihana i roto i te kikokiko, te tauira o te whakaoranga ma roto i te whakahere o Tana Tama Kotahi tae noa ki nga mea e whai ake ana i enei ki te whakawakanga ra ano. Nga Patai:
1. He aha i whakaatu tuturu ki te tangata te mohiotanga ki te Atua?
2. He maha ano ranei nga whakaatu-ranga karaipiture mo nga whakakitenga a te Atua i Aia ano ki te tangata?
3. He aha hei kaupapa mo nga kupu tuku iho o nehe e pa na ki te Atuatanga me tona oranga?
4. Whakaaturia te whakaaturanga mai mo Enoka, a kei hea taua whakaatu?
RATAPU TUAWHA
AKORANGA 40
Nga whakakitenga mai mo Mohi kua korerotia e tatou i rangona e ia te reo o te Atua. i korero mai ki aia i waenganui o te ngahere e mura ana i maunga Horepi, e mea mai ana "Ko Ahau te Atua o to matua, te Atua o Aperahama, te Atua o [haka me te Atua o Hakopa."
1 hunaia e Mohi tona inata; u<> to mea i wohi ia ki to titiro atu ki to Atua. Kia Mohi me Iharaira e huihui ana, ka puta mai te Atua i roto i te kapua i runga hoki i te haruru whakawehi, te whatitiri me te uira i Hinai. "Kia penei tan kupu ki nga tama a iharaira, ka kite koutou kua korero ahau i te rangi kia koutou." E mea ana i
512 TE KARERE Hanuere, 1941
tetahi whakaaturanga o muri mai "Na ka piki ake a Mohi ratou ko Arona, ko Natapa, ko Apihu me nga kaumatua e whitu tekau o Iha- raira. Na ka kite i te Atua o Iharaira, kei raro ano i ona waewae me te mea ko te hapira i hanga hei whariki he rite tonu ano ki te tino rangi te marama.
Nga Patai:
1. Kei hea te whakaaturanga mo te korerotanga mai o te Atua kia Mohi i maunga Horepi?
2. He aha te korero mai kia Mohi a he aha hoki a Mohi i huna ai i tona mata?
3. Pehea te ahua o te whakaputanga kia Mohi me Iharaira e huihui ana?
4. Pehea te whakakitenga kia Mohi me nga kaumatua o Iharaira?
HE POWHIRI HUI PARIHA
Ki nga iwi, ki nga reo ki nga huinga tangata ; He panui atu tenei kia tae a tinana mai ki ta tatau Hui Pariha ka tu ki Porirua, takiwa o Wairarapa me Manawatu i te 25 me te 26 o nga ra o Hanuere, 1941. Haere Mai. Haere Mai.
Na to koutou pononga, Timuaki Takiwa. Eruera Taurau. * * *
Some people mistake license for liberty. The freest man is he who walks with a still and quiet conscience. Happy is the man who walks humbly with his God with a daily testimony that he is pleasing the Almighty. This is the man who enjoys the sweetest and most lasting liberty. — Elder Charles A. Callis.
Our mission is to every nation, kindred, tongue and people, no matter what their faith or nationality. Our mission is unique. We recognise no competitors and yet we recognize men doing good in all churches, insomuch as they teach men to honour Christ, to be- lieve in God and attempt to live up to some at least of the teachings of the Master. — Elder Melvin J. Ballard.
The prime, indeed the sole, responsibility for starting a child along the right way, rests upon the parents. This responsibility is the inescapable result of bringing children into the world. It cannot go unheeded, nor can it be cast off or shifted to another. It is a re- sponsibility that comes by divine decree. — Pres. J. Reuben Clark, Jr.
If we would succeed in developing true leadership within our own groups, then let us remember that the first essential is to follow willingly the advice and counsel of those who preside over the Church. — Elder Samuel O. Bennion.
Hanuere, 1941
TE KARERE
513
3\ews from the Cfield
NGAPUHI
Reported by Patrick Wi Hongi,
and Lois Going
A very successful Hui Peka was held at Awarua from November 30 to Decem- ber 1st, 1940. Much credit is due the young people who were responsible for the direction of the marae activities, especi- ally Koni Tari and his co-workers. The auxiliary organizations each presented their messages, and throughout them all the spirit of the Gospel permeated. Presi- dent Cowley presided at all meetings and with him were Sister Cowley and Bro. George Watene, Mission Secretary. The Genealogical Presidency of the district were very busy with the many visitors, who were shown the new office of the Society and had many questions explained to the inquirers. Through the generosity of Bro. William Mannering, numerous volumes of the Polynesian Society Journal are available to the Society.
The reorganization of the Tautoro Branch occurred October 27th, 1940, where both Presidents Hohepa Heperi and Henare Pere Wi Hongi attended. The occasion was a Hui Peka, which com- menced with a Primary programme, with the M.I.A. following. The Sunday meet- ings began at 6 in the morning, and at 9 o'clock Priesthood, with the Sunday School at 10.30. The Genealogical meet- ing commenced at 12.30 and the General Session at 2 o'clock, which ended in the evening with the Relief Society and Priesthood. A worthwhile contribution to the success of the Hui were the render- ings of the choir under the leadership of Bro. Rangi Wharemate, particularly so when the majority of the members were non-Mormons. This same choir were in- vited to attend the Church of England Conference which was to be held at Kai- kohe.
The newly-organized personnel of the branch are: — Branch Presidency: Rangi Pere Wharemate, President; Tuhiwai Wharemate, First Counsellor; Hone Wa- hapu, Second Counsellor; Matekino Pere Wharemate Secretary. Sunday School: Aperahama Pere Wharemate, Hone Ka- nuta, Rangi Whaikawa and Wiremu Te- whata. Relief Society: Tewakeroa Whare- mate, Henrietta McOnie, Ngarangikahui Wharemate and Heeni Wharemate. Y. M.M.I. A.: Matekino Pere Wharemate, Tame Tai Rakena, Petu Tuhiwai and Teaorewa Whaikawa. Y.W.M I. A.: Tewa- keroa Wharemate, Rehuwairua Hawea, Ngarangikahui Wharemate and Ngairo
Komene. Primary: Maud Wha renin I e,
Nj-rairo Komem, Heeni Wharemate ami Rehuwairua Hawea.
The Saints and friends of the Takahi- wai Branch have contributed approxi- mately £30 to the Patriotic Fund and have sent parcels, 12 in number, forces overseas. A lett< • of appreciation
was received from Egypt, from Driver W.
Robertson, formerly of Christchurch.
Ani Pirihi, daughter el Mr and Mrs. Friday Pirihi, is at present sitting tor
her school teacher's certificate, and all her friends wish her the best.
The Whangarei Branch is carrying on its meetings with Bro. R. H. Osborne as leader. The Sunday School and Cot- tage meetings are held weekly. A visit by Bro. and Sister Ray Going was en- joyed by all. The Primary, under the leadership of Sister G. A. Jones, had a "Bring and Buy" afternoon party, and the children responded very happily.
Reported by Kate Ngakuru.
During the past two months Brother Hohepa Heperi has been kept busy visit- ing the different branches and reorganiz- ing them. Many changes have been made with the aim in view of making year 1941 a bigger and better one as far as this part of the vineyard is concerned. Brother Katuhi Ngakuru is visiting vari- ous branches in the Whangarei district and then up to the far north on Gene- alogy Research work.
To our gain and to swell our numbers, the Kaikohe Branch welcomes Sister Pare Ngakuru of Waimamaku. We can use you, Sister Pare, so be like the boy scout and "be prepared."
The Elders mail box in Kaikohe has not been claimed, as yet, by anyone. The Postmaster misses the Elders' smiling faces as well as their "iron horses" pushed up against the fence. He also enquires if the Elders have all reached home safely.
AUCKLAND DISTRICT Reported by Rona V. Attenborough
The Auckland Branch M.I.A. closed for the year, with a fanfare of trumpets — so to speak — on Tuesday, November 26. Present were some very distinguished people, and Bro. William O. Brosnan (I don't know what the "O" stands for), who by the way was in charge of the very classical programme.
Bro. William R. Perrott has been called to the office of District President for the Auckland District — good for Auckland.
A new personality has been presenting itself on Queen Street of late, and it is no less than the youngesl edition of the Cowley household, in effect. Master Ton\ . He stands, and with one hand on the Signboard on the front lawn (just to add a little dignity to the occasion) inspects all and sundry who come and go. and after silently "O-kayinr" the lot. he
pass, a on probably to see what pos- sibilities tin- kitchen holds. You can'1
fool this little man he knows what time it is.
The "Love-bug" has paid another \i>it
to Auckland, and this time the victims
are Bro. [van Reid ami Sister Gladys Boyne, n\1io mi Saturday, December 7. became Mr. ami Mrs. Congratulations
and hest w [|heS
Bro. Hemi Paki i - still a pat lent at t he
Auckland Hospital, and we rev ret to re- port thai there li:i • been no mipro\e-
m, -nt in his condit [on.
514
TE KARERE
Hanuere, 1(M1
We take off OUT hats to Bro. Matthew
Tarawa, of 0n< bunga I aged 1 6
who, last Sunday, baptized two children.
The first child Bubmitted easily to the immersing, but the Beeond one persisted
in Boating on top of the water, and so
our youthful baptizer had to have assist- ance in order to fully immerse the candi- date. However, we are glad to reporl that the ceremony concluded and the bap- tisms are now on record. Kia Kaha, Matthew.
A silent but steady worker in Auck- land is Bro. George Watene, who is as- sisting President Cowley in the office. We are happy to have Bro. Watene with us, and hope he will enjoy his stay.
Since the departure of the Elders few changes have taken place in the Mangere Branch. The activities of the Priesthood are now centered on regular visits and "teaching" in the homes of the people. Tracts are distributed by the brethren and from reports to hand favourable hopes are brought to pleasant realities. Brother Taikehu Mateono and his family have come to swell the membership of our branch, and he with Matthew Tarawa have been ordained priests along with Tema P. Kewene, Jnr.
A Hui Tau Social Committee has been organized and has already gone into action. Brother Tema P. Kewene, Snr., former Branch President, is the chairman.
Many Saints in the New Zealand Mis- sion will be interested to hear the com- ings and goings of some of our American friends who throughout the past have been very dear to us.
The Woods family are the most out- standing in their recent contributions to the hirth rate in the United States of America: Charlene Davis has a bonny baby boy; Roger Woods is a proud father of a cute little daughter, and v asper Woods also proudly boasts of a blonde beauty (I'm referring to his daughter) .
Our own little Janet has certainly had a hectic time since returning to the States, what with having her appendix • d, filling an important position as dental nurse to Dr. Petty of Ogden and at the same time trying to keep all her beaus happy, she hardly has time to ' . so maybe that accounts for that streamlined figure.
Family News. — Here's a line-up that's hard to beat:
Elder B. Holey Bigler — daughter.
Elder Crawford — daughter.
Elder Wayne Jensen — daughter.
Elder Cannon Q. Lambert — daughter.
In the matrimonial circles we have Elder Clarence S. Johnston, Elder Richard Lambert, Elder Mark Wheeler, Elder Garn Dastrup, and we hear that Mr. and Mrs. Rushby C. Midgeley have just moved into their new home.
We hear that Elder Barry T. Wride is having a hard time to decide whether to he a farmer or a cop.
Since Elder Glenn Rudd has returned to the States we hear the chicken busi- ness has picked up 100 per cent.
Elder A. Harper Wallace, after much meditation and thought, has decided to qrive the prirls a break and is now attend- ing the University of Utah, where he is in popular demand. Elder Richard Evans
is bo tied up in his new garage thai lie
can't take time out to go to classes (that's his story and he's going to stick
to it I.
Well, ta-ta, more news next time. That's all. folks!
MAHIA Reported by Elsie Loader Members of the Nuhaka Branch have been working very diligently in improv- ing our marae— the hedges and lawns
are expertly manicured, with llower-heds cleaned and newly planted. Several meet- ings have been held to make preparations for the coming Hui Tau at Easter. The Saints of the district are eager to give of their best. We will he very happy to welcome you all.
Sister Molly Tengaio and Bro. Oranoa Tengaio are inmates of the Wairoa Hos- pital, where both are improving. We hope to have them home for Christmas.
Fay Loader has been set apart as as- sistant teacher to the Primary S.S. class, and she has also joined the staiF of the local post office. We hope she will be very happy in both callings.
The District Presidency with the Re- lief Society and Primary Hoards have been very active in the district and are happy to report that the organizations are all working hard. Baptisms were performed by Pera Tengaio, with Barney Brown a convert and Joyce Hapi and William Walker as candidates. Brother Joe Pilmer and his wife with their family returned to Nuhaka from Matewai, Gis- borne, to spend their holidays with his mother, Newa Tuahine.
The Saints of the Mahia District send New Year Greetings to President Cowley, his wife and family, to all Zion Elders and the Saints throughout the Mission. May the year 1941 bring peace and happiness to us all.
At Tahaenui, a double marriage cere- mony was performed by Eru Tengaio at the home of the late Wi Smith on November 3rd, 19^0. unifing David Smith to Ripeka Raureti, and Harney Brown to Bernice "Tusk" Smith.
WAIKATO
Reported by Douglas Whatu and Percy Hill
October and November have been two particularly busy months for Percy Hill (Tetana Te Hira), President of the Dis- trict Genealogical Committee, where he has traversed the entire district, sitting up boards in the various branches, which are as follow : —
Aria: James Heperi, Here Tangihaere, Wanihi Tangihaere and D. Tangihaere as Secretary and Mipi Tangihaere Assistant Secretary. Address, Mahoenui, via Te Kuiti. Hamilton: Tupana R. Te Hira and Dave Ormsby. Address, Whatawhata. Puke Tapu : Ngaha Rotana, Kio Tarawhiti and Ivan Noda. Address, Box 24 Huntly. Hoeotainui : Rei Tuhua, Tatana Arona, Hami Pohutuhutu and John Apiti. Ad- dress, Hoeotainui, via Ohinewai. Puke- kohe and Wairoa: Teawe Whareponpra. Address, Pukekohe. Wairoa and Wha- ngape: Henry Marshall. Address, Ra- ngiri. Kopuku : Wiremu Tauira H. Paki. Address, Kopuku, via Pokeno. Indica-
Hanuere, 1941
TE KARERE
515
tions are that this very important work will move forward in the Waikato.
The Sunday School District Presidency have been going through their district and have received more than £6 for the "Sixpenny Fund."
Of interest to Maori visitors to Hamil- ton and those who have sick friends and relatives in the hospital, is the erection of a hostel for their use. This is the culmination of the tireless efforts of Sis- ter Whatu of Frankton who, as a member of the Hostel Administrative Body, has found justifiable cause to agitate to the extent that brought about the desired effect.
An innovation that will be of added interest to the activities of the Mata- kowhai Branch and especially to the M.I. A. is the opening of a new tennis court, which was set for the 7th Decem- ber, 1940. Both young and old alike are looking forward to wielding a rac- quet that day, and as there are no pro- ficient players to provide an exhibition it should be an interesting, if not a mirth-provoking day from the spectators' viewpoint.
Kahunumu Nuihaere Paki was bap- tized by John Paki and confirmed by Douglas Whatu on December 1st, 1940.
A competition for the best review on past concert recitations for the year 1940 ending November 24th, was won by Myrtle Paki, the prize being "Te Karere" subscription for one year, commencing January, 1941. The competition was open to all and any not already "Te Karere Wise" and was sponsored by the branch Sunday School officers.
MANAWATU Reported by Polly Wi Neera
Olive Elkington Hippolite, daughter of Brother and Sister James Elkington, has been transferred from Nelson to Welling- ton to continue her training in the St. Helen's Hospital. In an amazing short time she has been able to adapt herself to nursing life, performing her duties without trouble. Visiting during her days off included going to Porirua among rela- tives and the Saints.
Brothers Tony Walker and Bob Hippo- lite have left the Madsen Branch, sail- ing from the Wellington Harbour for overseas service. Friends and relatives bade them bon-voyage and "Haere ra."
Elder George Katene, Jnr., on active service overseas reports that "The Mor- mon Battalion" have come in contact with the Saints in London and attended several meetings, which have helped them much. Sister Madeline Hill, president of the Y. W.M.I. A. in London, has taken it upon herself to see that the boys are well cared for — now, mothers, your troubles are over.
WELLINGTON Reported by Alice Scott
June Taylor was baptized by Elder D. Curtis, October 17th, 1940. June lias been investigating the Gospel for the lasl year, and it is wild miirli pleasure and happiness we welcome her into the Wel- lington Branch.
Bro. Charles Billman of the Auckland Branch Presidency visited us on Sunday evening . I >ec< tnber Lst, l 9 1 0, and grave
interest inc. thOUghtfl and ene. mi i a r i nr
words to the Saints. Visits like these are really appreciated, and we look for- ward to them with great interest. Church and Cottage meetings are carried on with the same amount of enthusiasm and success.
TARANAKI
Reported by Zena Stent and
C. Arthur Stinson
Since the Elders left we have man- aged to keep our regular attendances, and still more investigators coming. "Mick" Arthur Stinson seems to be the one upon whom most of the work has fallen, and with his previous experience as Mission- ary in Dunedin things are doing well. He has, however, mentioned something about "going grey." Who knows ? Bro. William Katene is also contributing his portion, which is very, very useful.
His daughter Esther, who for some time past has been making a name for herself in Wellington, returned to us on Sunday, December lst. 1940, to bid fare- well to her friends and relatives before leaving for Sydney, where she endeavours to climb higher. We sincerely wish Esther the best there is.
POVERTY BAY.
Reported by Bros. Tipi Kopu and
Hixon Hamon.
Funeral services were held on Novem- ber 30 for Lily White, 17-year-old daugh- ter of Brother Pat White of Tokomaru Bay. The funeral service was conducted by Brother Kopua as was also the dedi- cation of the grave. Lily had been a student at Hukarere School, Napier, whence she was taken to the Napier Hos- pital. Her body was brought back to Tokomaru by Brother and Sister Sid Crawford of Korongata. Our apprecia- tion and thanks go to them for their kindness and generosity.
HAWKE'S BAY.
Reported by Taylor Mihaere and
Tuheni Pohatu.
We have large attendances at our regular Sunday meetings of the Te Hauke Branch, in spite of the fact that the people are all away at the shearing sheds. They all return at the week-end in order to attend to their church duties.
On Sunday morning, November 17, Sis- ter Makere Tangaroa passed away at the Dannevirke Public Hospital. A very im- pressive service was held in the Taho- raiti L.D.S. Chapel, Brother Whati Mi- haere conducting. Sister Makere is sur- vived by her husband Winae and five children. Sister Makere is well known throughout this mission and was a stead- last worker in this branch. The mem- bers of this branch who are no1 oul shearing are helpins wholeheartedly with the patriotic work. Sgt. Karens of Hast- itationed at Dannevirke with the ii. is. Regiment. He is Bergeanl in com- mand of the Mami platoon. The
B03 Scouts of this branch are also .,
Ina differ* m organ! at Ions In t he *\r\\ a
for raising funds for patriotic purp
Brother Tapsell BCeha bas been trans- ferred from the public bospital to the Pukeors Sanatorium) where he is pro- ■ i . in- satisfactorily Brol her x- PaewsJ has returned home from Dunedin on his summer vacal ions.
516 TE KARERE Hanuerc, 1941
Sunday £chool
Hohepa M. Meha, Superintendent Eru T. Kupa, Assistant Superintendent
James R. Elkington, Assistant Supt. James V. Hasiam, Secretary
Lessons compiled by Hohepa M Meha and Eru T. Kupa.
PRELUDE
Adapted from Handel, Slowly. by Edw. P. Kimball.
SACRAMENT GEM
Prepare our minds that we might see The beauties of Thy grace ;
Salvation purchased on that tree For all who seek Thy face.
POSTLUDE
eres. f
a i a-i
£_■' uS^
a r. 4 s 4 •> I U '
CONCERT RECITATION
Acts, Chapter 1, Verse 11.
"Ye men of Galilee, why stand ye gazing up into heaven? This same Jesus, which is taken from you into heaven, shall so come in like manner as ye have seen him go into heaven."
KORERO A NGAKAU
Nga MM a nga Apotoro, te TaJii o nga Upoko, te tekau ma tahi o nga rarangi. "E mea ana, E nga tangata o Kariri, he aha ta koutou e tu, e matakitaki atu na ki te rangi? ko tena Ihu kua tangohia atu na i a koutou ki te rangi, ka pera ano tona haerenga mai me ia i tirohia atu na e koutou e haere ana ki te rangi."
Hanuere, 1941
TE KARERE
517
SINGING PRACTICE
No. 171. "Accept the Tribute of Our Hearts"
KAI WHAKAHAERE O NGA HIMENE
"Kurangia Ou Mahara"
Please Note. — For the month of January Superintendents of the Branch Sunday Schools choose your own subjects for the Two- and-a-half Minute Talks and make your assignments. The subjects need not be doctrinal or scriptural, so long as they contain a lesson or a moral.
STATISTICS.
BIRTHS.
WIHONGI — To Mr. and Mrs. Te Ahu Wihongi, a son, November 13, at Kaikohe.
SOLOMON — To Mr. and Mrs. Rutene Solomon, a daughter, July 15, 1940, at Hastings.
ROHE — To Mr. and Mrs. Whaingakau Rohe. a daughter, August 1, 1940, at Pukehou.
MATAIRA — To Mr. and Mrs. Ratu Mataira of Nuhaka, a son, February 12th, 1940.
MATENGA — To Mr. and Mrs. Karepa Matenga of Nuhaka, a daughter, Septem- ber 20th, 1940.
WINIANA — To Mr. and Mrs. Winiana (Joseph) of Nuhaka, a son, August 4th, 1940.
WINIANA— To Mr. and Mrs. William Winiana of Nuhaka, a son, April 5, 1940.
PEAKMAN— To Mr. and Mrs. James Peakman of Wairoa, a son, September 9th, 1940.
HARMER — To Mr. and Mrs. Noema Harmer of Hastings, a daughter, October 28th, 1940.
RAKENA— To Mr. and Mrs. Tame Tai Rakena, a daughter, August 28th, 1940.
KOMENE— To Mr. and Mrs. Pereha- tara Komene, a son, July 13th, 1940.
PAREKURA— To Mr. and Mrs. Erueti Parekura, a daughter, September 15th, 1940.
TE NAMU — To Mr. and Mrs. Te Kapo Te Namu, a daughter, August 4th, 1940.
KANUTA— To Mr. and Mrs. Hone Kanuta, a son.
APITI — To Mr. and Mrs. John Apiti, Hoeotainui, a son, October 18th, 1940.
TITO— To Mr. and Mrs. Kepa Tito, Hoeotainui, a daughter, August 31, 1940.
RYAN — To Mr. and Mrs. John Ryan, Tahuna, a son, November 14th, 1940.
ONEHI — To Mr. and Mrs. Tahi Onehi, Parawera, a daughter, October 30th, 1940.
DEATHS.
MILJACK — Claire Hazel Miljack, B months, November 18, 1940, at Kaikohe.
KOMENE -Renata Komene, 58, No- vember 15, 1940, at Kaikohe.
MOON Kahi Moo... November 29th. 1940.
SMITH Ariria Smith al YVairoa Hospi- tal, October 13th, 1940.
HAPUKU Oriwia Hapuku, B6, Octo- l.cr 21st, at Napier
ERUETI — Tiaina, Mereana Erueti, 51, October 23rd, at Waipukurau.
TE HIRA — Parewhakarongotai Te Hira at Aramiro, September 29th.
MARRIAGES
SMITH— RAURETI — David Smith to Ripeka Raureti at Tahaenui, November 2nd, 1940.
BROWN— SMITH — Barney Brown to Bernice Smith at Tahaenui, November 2nd, 1940.
REID— BOYNE — Ivan P. Reid to Gladys Boyne at L.D.S. Chapel, Auck- land, December 7th, 1940.
CURTIS — BAKER — Patumona Curtis to Merehana Baker, November 23, 1940, at Hastings, by Elder Te Ao Wirihana.
BAPTISMS.
ASPINALL — Micky Aspinall, 8, of Tokomaru Bay, was baptized by Elder Phil Aspinall.
HAWKINS — David Tamati Hawkins, 29, of Mohaka, by Elder Robert L. Card- well.
TIMU— Ropata Timu, 13, of Te Hauke, by Tamanohorakau Timu.
TIMU— Noel Timu, 12, of Te Hauke, by Tamanohorakau Timu.
TIMU — Rex Timu, 10, of Te Hauke, by Tamanohorakau Timu.
TIMU — Wiripina Timu, 9, of Te Hauke, by Tamanohorakau Timu.
CAMPBELL — Faith Arohanui Camp- bell of Opoutama, October 13th, by Ruka Rarere.
WALKER— William Parker Walker of Nuhaka, November 3rd. by Pera Tengaio.
BROWN — Barney Brown. November 3rd, by Pera Tengaio.
HAPI — Joyce Hapi of Nuhaka. Novem- ber 3rd, by r* r;i Tengaio.
IHAIA -Adelaide ("Bubbles") Hams H.a.a of Nuhaka and T« Hauke, October 1st. by Benjamin Christy.
RANGIAWHA Ta Ropiha Niho Rangi- awha by Tupana Te Hira.
ORMSBY Bfanawarewa Dave Ormaby, by Dave Ormaby.
ORMSBY Tipiwhenua Dava Ormaby, by Dava Ormaby.
JONES Valerie M. M. Jonei of wh.i- ngarei, bj Bldi r Clyda B. Jonea, October 6th, 1940.
518
TE K KRERE
Hanuere, 1941
THE EASTERN ORTHODOX CHURCH
(Second Instalment) By John T. Georges
ACCORDING to the teaching of the Eastern Orthodox Church, Jesus Christ the Lord, is the only begotten Son of God, the King of kings and Lord of lords, who with the Father and the Holy Ghost is glorified. Hence the Church acknow- ledges and confesses one God in three persons glorified, the Father, the Son and the Holy Ghost, but in one nature and substance, in one «lory and kingdom undivided. He then is in three persons one God, without beginning and without end, eternal and everlasting,
uncreate, inco r- porial, invisible, in- finite, incomprehen- sible, alone and righteous, immut- able, who h a s created all things whether visible or invisible.
This God, first He made the hea- venly and invisible powers, the count- less multitudes im- material and bodi- less ministering spirits of the ma- jesty of God. Then visible world, the He created our
The first instalment of this very interesting article appeared in the Hurae (July) issue of "Te Karere."
A personal friend of President Cowley, the writer, John T. Georges of Salt Lake City, was born in Tur- key of Greek parents. Specially written for "Te Karere" these articles are exception- ally interesting and we would recommend all readers to read the first instalment in order to appreciate all subsequent instalments. — The Editors.
heaven and earth
sea. which also 1 [e made glorious with 1 i g h t and richly adorned it. The heavens with the sun. the moon and the stars, and the earth with all man- ners of herbs and divers living beasts, and the sea in turn with all kinds of fishes. "He spake the word and all these were made ; He commanded and they were created." Then with his own hands He created
the man, taking dust of the ground and breathed into his nostrils the breath of life, giving him a reasonable and intelligent soul, which, as it is written, was made after the image and likeness of God. The man made after the image of God, because he was endowed by his creator with reason and free will ; after His likeness, because of the likeness of virtue in its degree to God. He endowed the man with free will and immortality and appointed him sovereign over everything upon the earth; and from man He made woman to he his helpmate.
Then He planted a garden eastward in Eden, full of delight and all heart's ease, and there He put the man whom He had formed, and commanded him to eat freely of all the heavenly trees therein, except of the tree of the knowledge of good and evil, thus saying : "In the day that ye eat thereof ye shall surely die."
Hanuere, 1941 TE KARERE 519
But one of the angel powers, the marshall of one host, though he bore in himself no trace of natural evil from his Maker's hand, but had been created for good, yet, by his own free and deliberate choice turned aside from good to evil, and has stirred up by mad- ness to the desire, to revolt against his Lord God, as a consequence of which he was cast out of his rank and dignity, and instead of his former blissful glory and angelic name received the name of the devil and "Satan" for his title, for which offense God banished him from heaven as unworthy of the glory above. And, by completely renouncing the good and assuming an evil nature, the devil had con- ceived a spite and evil design against the man, whom he could not tolerate to see being raised to such an honour and glory, and there- fore, he schemed to oust him from that blissful state. To accom- plish this, he took the serpent, the most subtle of all the beast of the field, for the workshop of his own guile, and through it, he con- versed with the woman and persuaded her to eat of that forbidden tree, which is in the midst of the garden, in the hope of becoming as God, and through her he deceived Adam also. So Adam ate of the fruit of the tree and for his disobedience he was banished by his Maker from that pleasant and resplendent garden and in lieu of those happy and blissful days that he and his wife were enjoying and the immortal life which was their heritage, they fell alas! into this life of misery and woe, and at last they received the sentence of death. The devil, from there on became strong and boastful for his victory, and, as the race of man multiplied, he prompted them in all manner of wickedness.
But, God, wishing to cut short the growth of sin brought a deluge on the earth and destroyed every living soul, with the excep- tion of one righteous man whom He found in that generation and whom He ordered to build an Ark and save himself and his wife and children. But when the human race again began to multiply, they forgot God, and ran into worse kind of wickedness, 1 icing in subjection to divers sins and strange delusions thus wondering apart into many branches of error. Some of them deemed that every- thing they saw in the Universe moved by itself by a mere chance, and taught, as yet some men they do to-day, thai there was no Providence, since there was no master to govern. Others brought in the theory of fate, and committed everything to stars at birth. Others worshipped many evil deities subject to many passions, to the end thai may'have them to advocate their own passions and shameful deeds. They builded For their false deities magnificenl temples and enclosed therein the dumb figures and senseless idols they set Up, and rendered homage to them, serving the creature more than the Creator. Some worshipped the sun, the moon and the
stars, which the Almighty God has placed upon the firmament to
give lighl to our earthly planet things without soul or sense, en-
520 TE KARERE Hanuere, 1941
lightened and sustained by the providence of God, and unable to accomplish anything of themselves. "And there was none that did understand and seek after God."
So when the human raee had sunk once more to the depth of the new disobedience, misery and misfortune, God, in his mercy for the human race, did not suffer his own handy work utterly to perish. By the good pleasure, therefore, of our God and Father, and the co- operation of the Holy Ghost, the only begotten Son, even the Word of God, which is in the bosom of the Father, being ol one sub- stance with the Father and with the Holy Ghost, He that was before all worlds, without beginning, who was in the beginning, and was with God. and was God, was made perfect man, of the Holy Ghost, and of Mary the Holy Virgin and Mother of God not of the seed of man, nor of the will of man, but of Holy Ghost conceived a perfect God and a perfect man with an intelligent soul, and preserved undefiled, even after birth, the virginity of her that bore him. He being made of like passions with ourselves in all things, yet without sin, took our infirmities and bare our sicknesses. For, since by sin death entered into the world, need was that He, that was destined to redeem the world, should be without sin.
For thirty years He lived among the men, and was baptized in the Jordan river by John, a holy man and a great prophet, and there came a voice from heaven, from God the Father, saying: "This is my beloved Son, in whom I am well pleased," and the Holy Ghost descended upon him in the likeness of a dove.
Soon after that, Jesus began to do great things and wonders, raising the dead, giving sight to the blind, casting out devils, healing the lame and maimed, cleansing lepers, instructing men both by word and deed, and teaching the way of virtue, turning men from destruc- tion and guiding their feet toward life eternal.
And, in order to propagate His Ministry, Jesus chose twelve disciples whom He called Apostles, and commanded them to preach the Kingdom of Heaven, which He came upon to declare, and to make heavenly the men who are low and earthly, by virtue of His incarnation.
But, because of envy of His marvellous and divine conversation and endless miracles, the chief priests and rulers of the Jews, in their madness forgetting all, condemned Him to death, having seized one of the twelve to betray Him. And, when they had taken Him, they delivered Him to the Gentiles, Him that was the life of the world, for of His free will consenting thereto, because He came for our sake to suffer all things, that He might free us from suffer- ing. But when they had done Him much despite, at the last, they condemned Him to the cross. All these He endured in the nature of that flesh which He took from us, His divine nature remaining free of suffering ; for being of two natures, the divine and that which
Hanuere, 1941 TE KARERE 521
He took from us, His human nature suffered, while His Godhead con- tinued free from suffering and death.
So our Lord Jesus Christ being without sin was crucified in the flesh, for He did no sin, neither was guile found in his mouth. He was not subject unto death, for by sin only, as I said before, came death into the world. But, for our sake, our Lord Jesus suffered death in the flesh that he might redeem us from the death. Thenr He descended into Hell, and having harrowed it, he delivered thence many souls that had been imprisoned therein for ages. He was buried and on the third day He rose again, and by vanquishing death, He granted to us victory over death and immortality. He was seen of His disciples, and bestowed upon them peace, and through them peace on the whole human race.
Forty days after, He ascended into heaven and has taken His seat on the right hand of the Father. But, He shall come again to judge the living and the dead, and shall reward every man accord- ing to his works. After His glorious ascension into heaven, He sent forth upon His disciples the Holy Ghost in likeness of fire, and they began to speak with other tongues as the Spirit gave them utter- ance. And from thence by His grace, the Apostles were scattered among all nations and they began preaching the true faith, baptizing them in the name of the Father, and of the Son and of the Holy Ghost, and teaching them to observe all the commandments of the Saviour.
From thereon, the Apostles conscious of the importance of their divine mission not only faithfully discharged that which was in- structed of them to do, but they began giving to others their divine power and priestly authority by ordaining in the name of the Lord and appointing in Holy Ghost deacons and presbyters, and in that man- ner, establishing permanent successors to their Apostolic diaconate.
As a result of the propagation of the Christian faith the first established churches were that of Jerusalem, Antioch, of Halep and Damascus, and those that believed in the new faith were called Christians. In a short while, due to the rapid dissemination of the New Faith, many Christian churches were established in almost all the Greek territories of Asia Minor, especially in Thrace, Macedonia and Greece proper. The most important of these- ancient churches are the Church of Antioch of Damascus, and Hale]) in Syria, the Church of Laodicia, of Ceasaria, of Smyrna, of Ephesus and Nico- media in Asia Minor, the Church of Byzantium and of Andrinople in Thrace, and the Churches of Philippi, Thessalonica, Verria in Macedonia, and the Churches of Athens, Corinth. Crele and Cyprus.
As a visible fellowship, the Eastern Orthodox Church is a self- governing system exercising the threefold mission of the Lord, by preaching of the gospel, by administering the Lord's priestly office through the performance of the sacraments and by governing the f ( Out i iiucd on tone 524)
TE KARERE
Hanuere, 1(M1
idliodat
A DAY OF WARNING
This is a day of warning and not a day of many words, for I . the Lord,
am not to be mocked in the last days. (Doc. & Cov. 63: $5)
Since the date upon which the foregoing statement was given in a revelation through Joseph Smith, the Prophet (August, 1831) many additional warnings have been given to the people through Church leaders.
Tn view of conditions in the world to-day. it is well for Latter-day Saints to consider seriously the advice and admonitions which have been given, and to prepare them- selves against the time when the prophecies will be fulfilled. From an article by Elder Joseph Fielding Smith in the Dcscrct News Church Section, February 10, 1940, the fol- lowing quotations have been taken:
President Joseph Smith said:
Look to the Presidency and receive instruction. Every man who is afraid, covetous, will be taken in a snare. The time is soon coming, when no man will have any peace but in Zion and her stakes. . . .
These things are at our doors. They will follow the Saints of God from city to city. Satan will rage, and the spirit of the devil is now enraged. I know not how soon these things will take place; but with a view of them, shall I cry peace? No! I will lift up my voice and testify of them. How long you will have good crops, and the famine be kept off, I do not know ; when the fig tree leaves, know then that summer is nigh at hand.
President Brigham Young gave this warning- Do you think there is calamity abroad now among the people? . . . All we have yet heard and all we have experienced is scarcely a preface to the sermon that is going to be preached. When the testimony of the Elders ceases to be given, and the Lord says to them, "come home ; I will now preach My own ser- mons to the nations of the earth," all you now know can scarcely be called a preface to the sermon that will be preached with fire and sword, tempests, earthquake, hail, rain, thunders and light- nings, and fearful destruction.
President Jedediah M. Grant added this comment:
Consequently, when we see nation stirred up against nation, and on the other hand see other nations exerting a powerful influence to bring about negotiations of peace, shall we say they can bring it about ? Do we expect they can stay the outward course of war ?
Hanuere, 1941 TE KARERE 523
The Prophet of God has spoken it all, and we expect to see the work go on — and see all things fulfilled as the prophets have declared by the spirit of prophecy in them.
President John Taylor's statement :
Were we surprised when the last terrible war took place here in the United States ? No ! Good Latter-day Saints were not, for they had been told about it. Joseph Smith had told them where it would start, that it should be a terrible time of bloodshed and that it should start in South Carolina. But I tell you to-day the end is not yet. You will see worse things than that, for God will lay His hand upon the nations, and they will feel it more terribly than ever they have done before ; there will be more bloodshed, more ruin, more devastation than ever they have seen it before. Write it down! You will see it come to pass, it is only just starting in.
President Wilford Woodruff, more recently, said :
I heard the Prophet Joseph bear his testimony to these events that would transpire in the earth. . . . We cannot draw a veil over the events that await this generation. No man that is inspired by the Spirit and power of God can close his ears, his eyes, or his lips to these things.
The warnings from the Lord, Himself, are clear. He says :
The Lord's scourge shall pass over by night and by day, and the report thereof shall vex all people ; yea, it shall not be stayed until the Lord come ; for the indignation of the Lord is kindled against their abominations and all their wicked works.
But the promise has been made to Zion and the pure in heart, that they shall escape if they "observe to do all things whatsoever I (the Lord) have commanded."
The Doctrine and Covenants (45:38-41) reads:
Even so it shall be in that day when they shall see all these things, then shall they know that the hour is nigh. And it shall come to pass that he that feareth Me shall be looking forth for the great day of the Lord to come, even for the signs of the coming of the Son of Man. And they shall see signs and wonders, for they shall be shown forth in the heaven above, and in the earth beneath. And they shall behold blood, and fire, and vapours of smoke.
The Bible (St. Luke 21 : 36) gives this admonition:
Watch ye therefore, and pray always, that ye may b< accounted worthy to escape all these things thai shall come to pass, and to
stand before the Soil of Man.
All Latter-day Saints should give heed to the counsel of the servants of the Lord. We should prepare ourselves by observing the teachings of the Gospel and the command- ments of the Lord, by refraining from evil practices, by observing our prayers, and by showing brotherly love in our
dealings With each other.
524 TE KARERE 1 lanuere, 1941
(Continued from page 521)
faithful. In order to realize this divine purpose, our Lord selected the twelve and the seventies to whom He gave Mis own authority
and power, and endowed them with the power of the Holv Ghost. (Math. 10: 1 ; John 6: 71 ; Acts 2: 1.) Thus the Church has been divided into two classes, the clergy and the lay — the Hierarchy in the hroad signification of the word, and the flock.
The existence of hierarchy is plainly manifested in various places of the Holy Scriptures (Heb. 5:4), and that what is stated there does not in any way conflict with the salutation of Peter to the Christians (2:9) because he plainly tells them that the privileges enjoyed by the Jewish people referred to in the Old Testament were simply transferred to them. We know from the Old Testament that the chosen people of God had its own priesthood — the Aaronic Priesthood, so that when the King of Israel refused to burn incense, and those of the tribe of Rheuben and Levi disputed the connection of the priesthood with the house of Aaron, were punished severely for their disobedience, the king was afflicted with leprosy, and the others were swallowed by the earth. (Numbers 16:32.) Peter in his salutation to the Christians does not intend to designate them, according to the orthodox interpretation, as priests, a theory so held by the protestants, neither does it deny the existence of a proper priesthood. It is in justification of this theory that John says: "The anointing that you received from him dwells in you and you have no need so that anyone to teach you." (Epist. 2: 27.) This admoni- tion, however, does not imply the omission of a teaching priest- hood, but merely aims to safeguard them. The existence of the priesthood is also shown by ancient ecclesiatical monuments, and it is also evidenced by the writings of Clement of Alexandria, who, reprimanding the Corinthians for their acts of disloyalty to the faith and the Church, he is accusing them for having dethroned presbyters ordained by the Apostles with the approval of the entire Church. (2 Cor. 43-44.)
This divinely constituted hierarchy is a special order founded by our Lord, and it comprises three degrees consecrated by a proper service of the Church called ordination.
This Bishop, ordained by three bishops, is the centre of the spiritual authority of the local church, its visible head and the indis- pensable pillar of the church in whom alone resides the power and authority to ordain the presbyters and the deacons.
The deacons aid the pastors in the discharge of their threefold office, and the presbyters since they receive from the bishop the authority to exercise their spiritual authority over the flock, they administer the Church by performing some of the duues of the bishop, save the ordination and the consecration of myrr, which is exclusively reserved to bishops. The priest, however, is permitted to make use of the anointing with myrr, a practice which differs from
Hanuere, 1941 TE KARERE 525
that of the westerners. They are called priests, because of the offer- ing of the Eucharist — a sacrifice in reality.
Regarding the above mentioned three degrees of hierarchy, there is an ample evidence in the Bible. It is stated in the Bible that the deacons were selected by the Apostles and ordained to that office by the laying of the hands, and are mentioned as the firm ministry of the church. (Ph. 1:1; Tim. 3:8. 12.) The presbyters are re- ferred to as presiding over the church by the authoritv of the Apostles. (Rom. 12:8; Cor. 16:16; Thes. 5:12; Heb. 13:7, 17, 24.) It is stated in the Acts that Paul with Barnabas, ordaining presbyters in various cities (Acts 14:23) he sent to Ephesus from Militus and called to him the elders of the church (Acts 20:17), and James likewise commands that the sick may be anointed with oil in the name of the Lord, by the elders of the church. (James 5 : 14.) From a careful and diligent study of the New Testament, one may safely conclude that at the formative period of the church the names elder, or bishop (presbyteros) were used interchangeably. Thus we find that the presbyteries of Ephesus and Philippians 1:1, Acts 20:28 are called bishops. But it is noteworthy in this instance that the presbyteries and the bishops were distinguished from the Apostles, who, evidently, were the first bishops of the Christian Church, the successors of whom were the laterly ordained Seven Bishops. Ac- cording to the testimony of a good authority the name of the Apostle was given exclusively to the first founders of the Christian Church. John Chrysostome "First Address to the Philippians." Also, we learn from the same source that Paul ordained Timothy a bishop and stationed him in Crete, and Titus in Ephesus with the authority to ordain priests and deacons under their jurisdiction. (Titus 1:5; Tim. 3:2-8.)
From the foregoing Biblical facts, and as a consequence of the divine authority vested upon the bishops, they are of equal degree and dignity among themselves. But in the early days, on account of administrative purposes and territorial jurisdictions in the exercise of their authorities, a distinction in the ranks of the bishops has been made. For instance, the bishop of a Metropolis has been called Metropolitan; but following the separation of the Eastern from the Western Church, upon the four thrones of the Christendom, the Eastern Orthodox Church has elevated the four Patriarchs, namely, the Patriarch of Constantinople, of Jerusalem, of Antioch and of Alexandria. Also, there is the Autoccphalus Orthodox (lunch, which is governed by its Holy Synod independently, but acknowledg- ing the spiritual authority of the Patriarchate of Constantinople in matters pertaining to the interpretation of dogmatical questions. In the Eastern Orthodox Church tin- bishop is the highest rung in the ladder of Hierarchy established directl) l>\ die Lord and the Apostles. He is the highest pastor of the ehnreh under whose spiritual authority remain the clergy and the laity.
526 TE KARERE Hanuere, 1941
THE HEALTH OF THE MAORI RACE
( Fourth Instalment) By Wi Pere Amaru, A.B., M.A.
(Brigham Young University, U.S.A.)
Since the beginning of the white man's regime in New Zealand our Maori people have looked upon the pakeha ways of life with pre- judice because of their belief in the superiority of the old Maori order over civilization. In all probability that may have been true five or six generations ago, when our people were still living according to the statutes of the "wharewananga." However, with the passing of this ancient order and its tohungas had gone the "mana" and foundation of Maori economic and social life, and in its transition from the savage to the civilized life the race lost the art and science of good living and good health which was the lot of our illustrious ancestors.
Indeed the pakehas introduced disease when they invaded the serenity of our snores, but the pakehas also brought the only possible means by which disease may be overcome — the medical profession. Now, consider the statistics quoted in a previous article and it is obvious that the rate of infant mortality, although four times greater than that for the pakehas, had been appreciably reduced. We can help the medical profession and the Plunket Society to rebuild our race, but first we must forget the prejudices and superstitutions of the past and look forward with more confidence and faith in the medical science of to-day, accepting the counsels and advice of our doctors and nurses in all matters of health, particularly in regards to the rearing of our children.
In order to have a healthy baby, the mother must generally be healthy. An untreated syphilitic mother will definitely give birth to a syphilitic child, and likewise, a mother suffering from "con- sumption" will almost certainly infect her baby with that dreaded disease. If a mother (or expectant mother) is suspicious of having either one of these diseases, she should consult a doctor immediately and submit herself to the treatment prescribed, because both of these diseases are quite curable in their early stages. So give the doctor a chance by consulting him as soon as any sort of sickness or physical disorder is noticed. The mother who ignores this timely advice will be guilty of a grave sin and crime, because the child born to a diseased mother is doomed to an early death.
A few Maori mothers still, perhaps, insist on visiting a "tohunga" instead of a doctor, but it must be remembered that the "mana" of our ancestors went with the passing of the "wharewananga," and the cure and treatment for these new diseases can only come through the hospitals and doctors which are the "wharewananga" and "tohungas" of the pakeha.
Hanuere, 1941 TE KARERE 527
The parents of to-day should submit themselves for complete medical examination each year and thus be assured of a perfect physical condition, because it is only through healthy parents that healthy babies may be born. The usual fee of a medical examina- tion is only one guinea ; however, this one guinea seems to be a very sore point with Maoris. But one guinea of prevention is better than ten guineas of cure.
The teeth of the Maori mother should receive daily attention and care. The condition of the teeth seriously affects the health of an individual, and a healthy mouth generally means a healthy person. There are only two people in the whole world who can keep your mouth healthy — you and the dentist. You brush your mouth at least once a day, and see your dentist at least once a year.
Taking it for granted that the Maori mother is quite healthy, here are a few rules she should observe during pregnancy (te wa o te haputanga) : —
l.Take proper daily exercise, of which walking is perhaps the best. Not just walking around the house, but taking leisurely strolls of at least a mile.
2. Eat good and nourishing food with plenty of green vegetables, fruit, and cereals (foods made from wheat, barley, oats, rice, and corn — but definitely not "kaanga pirau").
3. Drink plenty of milk, cocoa and water, for the pregnant mother requires more liquid than a normal person. Avoid tea and coffee because of the harmful alkaloids — tannin in tea and caffeine in coffee.
4. Get plenty of sleep, remembering to keep the room well ven- tilated and the windows kept open summer or winter.
5. Bathe regularly, but with most of our Maori homes dependent on rainwater stored in tanks, bathing becomes a luxury in the summer months when rain is so scarce. But try to have at least a sponge to cleanse the tiny pores of the skin.
6. Don't drink alcohol in any form. Foods taken into the body are converted into substances which are assimilated into the bloodstream to be utilized by the tissues and eventually elimin- ated as something entirely different from the original. But alcohol enters the body as alcohol and goes through the system — even passing into the child within the womb — and ultimate]} passes out of the body as alcohol.
7. Do not over-eat. The baby within the womb of a fat mother is congested by the fat of the abdomen. Delivery becomes difficult, and the chances for the baby endangered.
8. Do not smoke, as the harmful effects of the nicotine inhaled by the mother will definitely affect the unborn child.
9. Do not over-work during confinement. .Maori husbands should see that their wives refrain from doing an} strenuous work around the home
528 TE KARERE Hanuere, 1941
10. ])o nut fast or diet unless under a doctor's supervision, be- cause babe within the womb might be starved or ill-nourished.
Most Maori mothers nurse their own babies, and this is indeed the best thing to do, as mother's milk is nature's food for the child. Mothers who do not make every effort to nurse their babies do them a great wrong. Statistics have shown that of children horn healthy and \vd on the breast, very few die in the early years of life. On the other hand children fed on bottles and patent foods die before they are a year old, it being ascertained that about ten bottle-fed babies die to one that is breast fed.
When baby arrives, here are a few things to remember outside of the usual routine prompted by a mother's instinct: —
1. Train the baby to sleep at the same time every day and all night.
2. The baby should sleep outdoors as much as possible summer and winter, and when indoors the windows should always be open and the baby warmly wrapped.
3. The baby should be fed at regular hours. Sometimes when baby cries it is only thirsty, give her plenty of cool boiled water to drink. Don't over- feed baby because too many babies die from this cause.
4. If baby is on a bottle, don't change her food every day of the week. Babies sometimes die because the food is changed too often. Let the doctor direct any such changes.
5. Do not give baby a "dummy," because "dummies" are unclean. Thumb-sucking is the same as sucking a "dummy."
6. Do not take baby to the Maori huis and dances. The best place for baby is at home.
7 . Keep all of baby's soiled napkins away from flies. In fact keep flies away from anything that belongs to baby.
8. If baby appears sick call a doctor immediately. It is better to pay him ten shillings and find that baby is quite well, than to save ten shillings and risk losing baby.
These few hints that I have listed are only a few of the ones I consider most important. However, don't hesitate to call your district nurses and ask for advice regarding the welfare of your children. Give your babies a better chance of surviving the first few years of life and the only way to do this is by constantly acquainting yourselves with the problems of to-day, and learning what you can from books, from the Women's Institute, from the Hui Atawhai, and from the Plunket nurses.
NEW YEAR BIRTHDAYS
JANUARY
Marjorie Efne Wilson (23rd) ; Edith Wilson (24th) ; Rangi Wilson (27th).
Hanuere, 1941 TE KARERE 529
WHAT TO DO WITH YOUR GENEALOGY
By Mark E. Petersen, Deseret News
How should genealogical data be compiled and prepared for use after it has been collected?
Careful consideration must be given this question by every Latter-day Saint, for unless it is wisely used, what doth it profit?
In preparing our data, we must keep in mind the object of all our work — the salvation of our dead through vicarious ministration of the Gospel ordinances in the Temples of the Lord.
These ordinances are to provide baptism and the gift of the Holy Ghost to the dead ; to provide the higher ordinances of the House of God, including the sealing blessings by which families are united for eternity under the power of the priesthood.
Then if families are to be preserved as units through Gospel ordinances, we must arrange our names in family groups, and deter- mine accurately the relationship of every individual in our family tree.
Our first task after gathering our data then is to arrange it in correct order. To accomplish this, we will use pedigree charts and one of the family group sheets spoken of in the early part of this series of articles.
To assure correct linking of each generation, showing where, in our family tree, each person belongs, we will commence with our- selves, placing our own name on our chart first. Then we will record the names of our father and mother. This ties these two generations together for record purposes. But our father had parents, and so did our mother. Then in our pedigree we will record the names of the parents of our father and mother ; that is, the names of our four grandparents. Going back after this manner we will record the names of those who make up each generation in our descent, showing clearly how we are related to every person on our gene- alogical line. We carry this line or chain of parentage back as Ear as our information will permit.
Now let us look at this chart. We notice that each father and each mother appear side by side, in pairs. Each pair represents the nucleus of one family group. We say nucleus, because we must list the names of the children with the parents. I towever, because there is insufficient space on the pedigree chart for this information, we will arrange the data for each family group separately on a sheet specially prepared for this purpose. This sheet is known as the One Family Group Record, because it provides spaces only for Lhe information on a single family a father, mother and their children.
On the pedigree chart, under each name we list the vital statistics
for that individual. ( >n the one family group sheet we list this same
information for each individual, only more completely. This sheet provides that the names of the parents, together with all necessary
530 TE KARERE Hanuere, 1941
information regarding their dates and places of birth, marriage, death and parentage, be written in the upper part of the sheet. Below, with separate spaces for each, the names of the children are listed, with data on their birth, marriage and death.
If we follow this plan for each family in our record, we have an orderly array of information, well classified, with each family grouped as a unit. In other words, we have prepared our informa- tion in such a way that it will most easily lend itself to orderly ordinance work.
The first ordinance is that of baptism. We must place the names of all the dead who make up our ancestral record, on specially pre- pared sheets for this purpose. The sheet is known as the baptism and endowment sheet, since it is used for both these types of ordinances.
These sheets require that we copy upon them not only the names of our ancestry as they appear on our pedigree and one family group sheets, but also that we write in spaces supplied, sufficient informa- tion (as we have written it on our one family group sheets) to identify beyond question, the individuals for whom those names stand. The baptism and endowment sheets ask for the names of parents and wife or husband of each person listed ; also the dates and places of their birth and death, and the relationship of the dead to the person in the Church who is known as the heir to the record. The selection of an heir to the record is required in establishing correct relationships, and does not mean that the heir is the only one who has a right to work on that record, or that he alone obtains credit for work accomplished. The naming of the heir is merely for convenience in record keeping. The heir should be the oldest male member of the family to join the Church. The name of the heir is retained even though he be dead, since, as we say, choice of the heir is for convenience in record keeping. A space is provided at the top of each baptism and endowment sheet for the name of the heir.
After the baptism and endowment sheet is filled out, one more step is needed before temple work can be performed. The names on the sheet must be checked at the central clearing house for all temple work — the Temple Index Bureau, 80 North Main Street, Salt Lake City, Utah. This is required to prevent duplication of temple work, since various members of families often do research simultaneously, without either knowing that the other is so engaged. No temple work is permitted in any temple of the Church, without the names on the baptism and endowment sheets being first checked at this bureau. Names which are approved are so indicated, and the sheets are returned to the individual in charge of the family work. Then they may be sent to the temple for ordinance work.
Hanuere, 1941 TE KARERE 531
Arrangements must be made for the ordinance work, each person being responsible for seeing that the work is accomplished for his ancestors on both father's and mother's sides of the family.
After the baptism and endowment work is completed, then "seal- ing" work is in order. Two types of sealing must be done — the wife must be sealed to the husband, and the children must be sealed to the parents, thus uniting the family as a group for all eternity.
Special sheets must be used for each of these sealing ordinances. Information to identify each individual must be supplied for sealings, as for baptisms. WJjen the sheets are properly filled out, following performance of all necessary prior ordinances, the sealings may be performed, preferably by relatives of the dead, in the temples.
It is advisable that these permanent records be preserved in a safe place, and for further protection against loss of these records, it is urged that copies of all records thus obtained be placed in the Archive of the Genealogical Society of Utah, 80 North Main Street, Salt Lake City, Utah.
BRANCH TEACHERS MESSAGE
The Sacrament
Latter-day Saints should be urged to make attendance at Sacra- ment meeting a regular habit. It is the one meeting of the Church which the members are directed, by commandment, to attend. It has been considered so important, so necessary to spiritual welfare, and so helpful in strengthening faith and fortifying against tempta- tion that the Lord has commanded his people to attend.
Section 59 of the Doctrine and Covenants contains the following : And that thou mayest more fully keep thyself unspotted from the world, thou shalt go to the house of prayer and offer up thy sacraments on my holy day; for verily this is a day appointed unto you to rest from your labours, and to pay thy devotions unto the Host High; nevertheless thy vows shall be offered up in righteousness on all days and at all times; but remember that on this, the Lord's day, thou shalt offer thine oblations and thy sacrmaents unto the Most High.
Nothing could be more direct. The command is clear. Atten- tion should be called to the fact that observance of the Sabbath day is very closely associated, also by commandment, with attendance at Sacrament meeting. It is evidently the desire of our Heavenly Father that the Sacrament meeting shall be a spiritual benediction to the Sabbath day. Glorious promises are made to those who obey these commandments. See Doctrine and Covenants, Section 59, verses L4-24. One of the best resolves a Latter-day Saint can make is to determine to keep the commandments of the Lord and attend Sacrament meetings regularly.
(Teachers should read all of Sec. 5(> and call attention to the obligation placed upon all members by the Lord.)
532
TE KARERE
Hanuere, 1941
ARE POETS INSPIRED OF GOD?
By Elder H. W. Kirkham
''The wind bloweth where it listeth, and thou hearest the voice thereof, but knoweth not whence it cometh and whither it goeth ; so is everyone that is born of the Spirit." — John 3 : 8.
To the man who is in tune with spiritual things the voices of the spirit come from many different sources. As varied as are the ever-changing sounds of the wind, even so varying are the voices of inspiration to those who have ears to hear and minds and hearts to understand. Think from how many different sources religious inspiration comes to men.
Poetry, for example, and poetic prose have been religion's ministers. All the truly great poets are religious teachers. They give us more noble impulses and more divine inspiration. They make us feel that we are heirs of pure delights, but have not yet entered into our inheritance. In the best English poetry the highest ideals of right living are grandly and inspiringly set forth. He who neglects Shakespeare and Browning, Mil- ton and Tennyson, and many others, does so at the risk of loss to his spiritual life. He misses certain rich formative influences that strengthen faith, purify conscience, and show us how to make our human life more divine. And this is true also of the sacred writings of Isaiah, the Book of Job, the Psalms and the sublime poetry of the Old Testament.
Here are a few verses from poems of poets whom I believe were inspired of God.
Montgomery expressed the desire of immortal life in these words :
Who that hath ever been
Could bear to be no more? Yet who could tread again the scene He trod through life before?
The poet Wordsworth obtained an inspirational glimpse of the eternal doctrine of pre-existence when he wrote the following : Our birth is but a sleep and a forgetting;
The soul that rises with us, our life's star, Hath had elsewhere its setting,
And cometh from afar; Not in entire for get fulness,
And not in utter nakedness, But trailing clouds of glory do we conic
From God who is our home.
Elder Kirkham
Hanuere, 1941 TE KARERE 533
Then there is Robert Browning's "Prospice," which was written six months after the death of his beloved wife, Elizabeth Barrett Browning, in 1864. Here are the last two lines of this poem: O thou soul of my soul. I shall clasp thee
again, And with God be the rest. Another thought from Browning: "Life is probation and the earth no goal but starting point of man."
Space will not permit me to use other poems of inspired poets. But my hope is that these few will make you dig and delve into these religious riches of which we have such an abundant source to read from.
Someone has said : "Too much of our reading is on a low level. We chatter with clowns when we might talk with kings."
FROM THE DESK OF THE GENERAL SUPERINTENDENCY
WHY GO TO SUNDAY SCHOOL? By Elder Wallace F. Bennett
Every man or woman who grew up in a Mormon family and a Mormon community spent most of his childhood Sunday mornings in Sunday School. There he learned much of what he knows to-day about the Gospel. There he acquired those habits and attitudes to- ward the Church which mark him to-day as a Latter-day Saint. Among the useful habits so developed was the obvious one of going to Sunday School, and even after many years of irregular attendance, that old habit gives a little tug every Sunday morning when Sunday School time conies around. No matter what else we may plan on Sunday morning, somehow that old habit seems to remind us, often in a voice too faint to be clearly heard, that we should be in Sunday School. Next Sunday morning, when the ghost of your childhood says, "I wonder if you shouldn't be in Sunday School? I suggest that you answer "Yes," and reach for your hat. I can give you several interesting reasons why you should.
The first three of my reasons are personal. When you spend the morning in Sunday School, you create an attitude of worship; you create, within your own soul, and by your influence on others, an atmosphere of well-being that will last through the whole day. The Sabbath is a day Eor worship, and we cannot turn it to any other purpose without robbing ourselves of the week's greatest satisfac- tion, and if we start the day with worship, the sense of j<>\ ml well- being we achieve is carried through, to reach its climax in the wor- ship of the Sacrament Meeting at the Sunday's close, and if we give up the day to worldly things, even attendance at Sacrament Meeting fails to make up Eor <>nr lost opportunity.
534 TE KARERE Hanuere, 1941
Our early leaders must have realized the importance of the Sun- day School in establishing this Sabbath atmosphere, because they provided a place in its programme for the administration of the sacrament — that ceremony which gives tangible expression to our relationship with the Deity, and when we can have the sacrament at the beginning and the end of the day, it stands, both as a promise and a fulfilment, through tn.tr, opportunity on the Sabbath, to live closer to Him whom it commemorates.
In addition to the privilege of morning worship, the Sunday School offers us all a practical opportunity to teach and be taught the truth of the Gospel. Its scope is so broad, and its beauty so deep that none of us can comprehend it, even in a lifetime of study. Sunday School offers us a continual weekly privilege of discovering and rediscovering the many facets of its glory.
All these reasons why we should go to Sunday School are per- sonal. There are others outside ourselves equally important. The first of these is based upon our membership in the family. Most of us, who grew up as children in the Sunday School, are determined that our own children shall have the same privilege of learning the Gospel, so we arrange our schedules at home for them to attend. How much better if we go with them, not only setting an example for attendance by our presence, but testifying to our friends and neighbours that our love of the Gospel is a family possession, in the pride of which our family is united.
But there are other reasons yet why Sunday morning should find you in your place in Sunday School, not the least of which expresses the demand your religious community has on you as a member. The very nature of our Church organization gives each of us a share in the responsibility for the success of all branch activities. If the Sunday School in your branch is the kind of Sunday School that can give your children the intelligent understanding of the Gospel you wish them to have, it will be so because yours is the kind of branch that is made up of men and women who have a keen and liv- ing interest in its success. That interest cannot be expressed con- vincingly except through your personal participation in the affairs of the Sunday School, whether as officers, teachers, or simply as loyal students in an adult class. The officers and teachers cannot succeed without your understanding and co-operation, and you can't give that by absent treatment.
From another point of view, your branch — your religious com- munity— is greatly enriched in fellowship and understanding when you go to Sunday School. There you meet your neighbours and friends in an atmosphere of spiritual understanding — an atmosphere which brings them out in their best light, in which prejudice and fault- finding have all disappeared. Your branch will be a happier place
Hanuere, 1941 TE KARERE 535
in which to live, and your share in it will bring more happiness to you if you will meet your neighbours often in Sacrament Meeting and in Sunday School.
Why should you go to Sunday School? To all these reasons, you can add many personal ones of your own ; in fact, your reasons will multiply with your attendance until you regain the old habit of going to Sunday School on Sunday morning.
A FULL VISION NEEDED.
In order to appreciate the value of the Sunday School in its entirety one needs more than a fragmentary acquaintance with its genious and power. It has a history and a record of achievement recognized as worthy by those who are most familiar with its develop- ment. It has been more than an institution — it has been and is a movement. One needs to realize its potency in order to evaluate its contribution to the church and the nation. This fact is strikingly revealed in such gatherings as the World's International and State Conventions, in which widespread activities of the Sunday School are apparent. Attendance upon these conventions is often an eye opener to even the most intelligent.
The late Dr. F. B. Meyer, president of the World's Sunday School Convention in 1907, said : "I received at the World's Sunday School Convention at Rome a new vision. If the world is ever to be saved it must be saved through its childhood." To judge the value of the Sunday School by the local school — however large or efficient — is like evaluating the worth of public education from an acquant- ance with one district or town school. A full vision is needed, and that is secured only from a study of the movement-in-the-large.
— The S.S Executive.
GENEALOGY
Cottage Meetings for the month of January.
Jan. 9 — Lesson 12, "The Dream of Yellow Face." ,, 1(5 — Lesson 13, "A White and Blessed People." ,, 23 — Lesson 14, "Our Indian Brethren." „ 30 — Lesson 15, "The Noble House of Salazar."
An Urgent Appeal.
As general officers of the Genealogical Society of the Mission, we feel that a heavy and urgent responsibility is resting upon us. To you as our representatives we are passing the duty that is right- fully yours to yon and your workers pertaining to "Whakapapa." With a world trembling on the brink of total war and devastation
We are appealing to yon to aet swiftly and decisiveh aboul acquiring
and working for your ancestors.
"E moe ana te matahi tnna, e ara ana te matahi-tana."
536 TE KARERE Hanuere, 1941
^Primary
Elva T. Cowley, President Rona V. Attenborough, Second Counsellor
Waima Davits, First Counsellor and Secretary
Lessons compiled by Rona V. Attenborough
MEMORY GEM:
"If a thing is worth doing, It is worth doing well."
— Selected.
LESSONS:
FIRST WEEK
DAVID THE SHEPHERD BOY
Objective:
To help the child to feel that the Lord knows the thoughts of our hearts, even though we do not express them.
Suggestions for Teaching:
That the children may fully understand and appreciate this story, they should know a little about the shepherds, of the East. Pictures will help. It will be interesting for them to know that shepherds have small flocks; that they lead the sheep instead of driving them; that the sheep know the shepherd's voice and will come at his call.
The shepherd is very kind to his sheep. He leads them to green pastures and sees that no harm comes to them while feeding. He knows where fresh water is to be found, and here he takes his sheep to drink. At night he leads them to his sheep fold. At the door of the fold he stands with his crook and, as the sheep pass in one by one he looks at each carefully: If any aie bruised or scratched they receive his special care. If one little lamb has strayed away during the day, and has not been missed the loss is known as soon as the sheep are brought into the sheep fold for the night.
You can enrich your lesson by making a sheep fold. Add interest also by cutting from cardboard several sheep and lambs. A little white cotton, or wool, if available, and some mucilage will make them white and woolly. You may care also to include the shepherd with his crook.
A large box lid will make a very good base for the cut-outs. Song:
"Can a Little Child Like Me," No. 6 Primary Songs for the Missions. Prayer:
Let the children say the following verse before the prayer is said by the teacher.
"Father of all in heaven above,
We thank Thee for Thy love;
Our food, our homes and all we wear
Tell of Thy loving care. Amen."
Story:
THE LITTLE LOST LAMB
Long ago, in a country far across the big, wide ocean, there lived a shepherd. Such a good kind man he was! Everyone who knew him well loved him.
This good shepherd kept his sheep in a beautiful meadow. There was nice soft grass for miles around, and running right through the centre of the meadow was a brook where the sheep and lambs could drink whenever they were thirsty. In one corner of the meadow the shepherd made a sheep-fold. Every night this good kind shepherd '
Hanuere, 1941 TE KARERE 537
let his sheep through the gate into the fold. While they were going through he would stand and watch them. He knew every one and loved them so much that he wanted them safe for the night.
Big tall mountains stood around this beautiful meadow, and some- times the shepherd let the sheep climb up on the sides of the moun- tains. One day while they were climbing on the mountain sides, a big storm came up. The shepherd called to the sheep. It was the call they all knew and they started home. The wind blew, and the rain came down, but they hurried on. Soon they came to the sheep- fold. The shepherd, wet and cold, stood there to watch them, but there was one little lamb he could not find. It must have been back in the mountains. It was dark. The shepherd loved his sheep. He couldn't let even one be in trouble and alone. So he went back to the mountains, calling in his kind, gentle voice. Soon he heard a weak little voice saying, "Baa, baa," just as if it were trying to say "Here I am, here I am. I climbed too far, and could not get back." The good shepherd hurried to the place and in between two rocks, he found the little lamb with his leg hurt and his coat all black with mud and rain. The shepherd knelt down and picked the little lamb up in his arms and carried him home. He took him into the sheep-fold, where he was safe with the other sheep.
Conversation After the Story:
Compare the love of our Heavenly Father with the love of this shepherd and let the children relate any experiences which will show how our Heavenly Father cares for His children.
SECOND WEEK
THE JOY OF BROTHERS AND SISTERS Objective:
To help the children to be grateful to Heavenly Father for brothers and sisters and for the joy they give.
Lesson Story:
TWO SISTERS
Janet and Margie were two sisters who helped each other and played together every day. Janet was eight but Margie was just five and was a rolly-polly little girl. She was a good sister and liked to help Janet. One night Janet was taking her dolls to bed. She had five in her arms and couldn't turn the light on.
"Wait a minute," said Margie. "I'll turn it on for you." She couldn't reach the switch so she pushed a chair to the wall, climbed up, and on went the light.
One day when Janet and Margie went to school, the sun was shin- ing, but when they started home the wind was blowing. "Woo-oo," went the wind, and both little girls buttoned their coats up tight. Soon Mr. Wind came harder. "Woo-oo, woo-oo," he said, blowing right into their faces.
"That hurts my cheeks and nose," said Margie.
"It goes right through my coat," said Janet. "Let's try walking backwards."
They tried that a little way but Margie stumbled.
"Oh dear!" she cried, "we can't get home."
"Yes we can," said Janet. "Come, I'll take your hand."
Then Mr. Wind became fierce. "Woo-oo, woo-oo, woo-oo." be shrieked. He pushed so hard that Margie's little feet just couldn't STO, and she began to cry. Janet felt like Crying too. hut she thought, *'I mustn't. T must get Margie home." So she said "\ow just duck your head like this so the wind won't hit your fare so hard. See wo are nearly to the corner. When we turn up the next street niayhe the wind won't, bo so strong."
538 TE KARERE Hanuere, 194]
So they went on, one step, then another, then another, until they reached the corner. The wind wasn't nearly so bad on that block, and then, they were home.
Mother had them sit by a nice warm fire and gave them warm milk to drink. Soon they were feeling; fine again.
"I wonder," said Margie, "what the other children did, the ones that don't have a sister like Janet to help them home?"
SPECIAL MEMORY GEM (For This Week Only)
We thank Thee, Lord, for all good things;
For Sister, and for Brother, For life, for health; for food and friends;
For Father and for Mother.
— Janet Tooke.
THIRD WEEK
THANKSGIVING IS THANKS LIVING Objective:
To help the children to know that we can give thanks to God for plenty by snaring with others. Suggestions for Teaching:
If we would help the children to develop a thankful attitude our own hearts must overflow with gratitude for all God's gifts. Thankful- ness strengthens faith and courage. We can acquire this invaluable treasure by counting our blessings — not once in a year only, but every day and often during the day. There is no finer method of increasing our own joy than by giving someone else a cause for gratitude.
Read the ninety-fifth Psalm for your own inspiration and comfort.
Lesson Story:
"THE PIE THAT GREW"
"There," his mother said to Bobby as she packed the little mince pie in a box, "it isn't a very large pie but I know how Mrs. Murphy will manage to make it go around among the little Murphys. It is too bad that Mr. Murphy is out of work and so they can't have a fine dinner like us. Take your bicycle, Bobby, and hurry."
Bobby tied the box which held the mince pie to the handlebars of his bicycle and started off in the direction of the lane where all the little Murphys lived, but on the way he met his friend Polly.
"What have you in that box, Bobby, and where are you going?" she asked.
"A small mince pie for Mrs. Murphy's dinner," Bobby told her. Polly's eyes shone. "Wait a moment," she said. Then she ran into the house and came out with another box. "Molasses taffy!" she said. "I just made it but I want it to go to the little Murphys with your mince pie."
Bobby tied the second box to his bicycle and started on, but he was in such a hurry he almost ran over his grandmother who was sweeping up leaves from her front walk.
"Where are you going with those boxes, Robert?" she asked him.
"I'm taking a small mince pie and some taffy to the Murphys for their dinner," Bobby told her. Grandmother's eyes twinkled.
"Thev will need more than that," she said. "Wait a second!" Grandmother went in the house and came out with a basket of sugar and potatoes. "It isn't much," she said, "but I want it to keep the mince pie company."
Bobby hung the basket to the handlebars of his bicycle underneath the two boxes and went on, but he had not gone very far when he almost ran into an old gentleman who looked severely at him over his spectacles. The old gentleman's arms were full of parcels and he had not been looking where he was going any more than had Bobby.
Hanuere, 1941 TE KARERE 539
"What are you doing;, young- man?" asked the old gentleman, "blocking the sidewalk with your bicycle that has so many bundles on it that you can't see the passerby?"
Bobby got down and took his hat off politely as he explained. "I am taking: a small mince pie and some taffy and a basket of sugar and potatoes to Mrs. Murphy, sir. They are for the little Murphys' dinner."
"Well, well!" said the old gentleman, "and how about some oranges. Here I am taking home a larger bag of oranges than I could carry or use, since I live alone. Could you manage, do you think, to tie a bag of oranges to the seat of your bicycle?"
Bobby could and he did. The old gentleman was quite jovial as he helped him and then watched him ride off. There really seemed to be some kind of magic in the little mince pie, and Bobby wondered what would happen next. He did not have long to wait. The butcher's boy stopped him.
"Won't you help me deliver these parcels?" he asked Bobby. "You can leave your parcels here in the shop, but I won't be able to get all the orders out if I can't have some help."
Bobby knew the butcher's boy in school, so he wanted to help him. He delivered parcels for an hour, and when he finished and was tying: on the Murphy's dinner once more the butcher's boy spoke to him.
"What are all those bundles?" he asked Bobby.
"A small mince pie and some taffy and sugar and potatoes and oranges for Mrs. Murphy's dinner," Bobby said.
"But no chicken?' asked the butcher.
Bobby shook his head and the butcher went into his shohp and brougrht out a fine roasting chicken in a bag.
"Can you tie this on, too?" he asked. "I am sure you have earned it."
Indeed Bobby could! He raced off to the lane where th^ Mur- nhys lived. How that little mince pie had grown into a whole dinner! It had spread itself into a dinner from the chicken to the dessert, as all kind deeds grow into something- larger and better. — Carolyn S. Bailey. (Courtesy Albert Whitman & Co., Chicago, 111.)
FOURTH WEEK
LET'S KEEP CLEAN Objective:
To help the child to feel that God gave him his beautiful body. Lesson Approach:
Show a picture of a bathroom. (There are very many beautiful ones in the magazines.) Let a child point to the bathtub. What is it for? What other kinds of baths may we take? Which kind do you like best? We like to swim and we like to shower but a nice warm soapy bath makes us feel fine, doesn't it? We found out many reasons why we should have clean hands, now let us write down some good reasons why we should bathe.
THE SPICK AND SPAN TWINS
In a bright, clean town not very far from here live1 a boy and a girl who are twins. Their names are Keith and Kay. Their fairs are so bright and rosy that people love to see them coming down the street. Keith always wears a clean suit and Kay wears a spotless dress. They wear smiles instead of frowns and help everybody they can.
One day the twins heard some children who were called in from play to take their baths say thai (hey did not like to bathe. The twins thought this was very odd, because they liked to get into the I > i u" tnb
540 TE KARERE Hanuere, 1941
and scrub and scrub and scrub. One little girl said, "Oh, mother, I want to stay out and play. Anyway it's too late. The water is always too hot, or else it's too cold. The soap gets in my eyes."
So the twins talked to Mary and the other children and said, "Why, we take a bath all over at least twice a week. We just love nice warm water and soap-suds. We wash our faces and necks and ears every morning- and we don't even count how many times a day we wash our hands. We always wash them before eating." So Mary decided she would like to be sweet and clean too, so that she would look like Kay.
Soon they went into a house and found a little girl scolding be- cause she had played so hard and she was too tired to take a bath. Kay told her about a poor little girl who didn't even have a tub to bathe in. Every time she wanted a bath, she had to put buckets of water on the stove to heat. Then she would go outside and bring in a wash- tub in which she put the warm water so that she could be bathed and be sweet and clean. The little girl who was scolding was surprised, because she had a nice white tub to bathe in, and didn't have to worry about getting nice, warm water.
A little girl called Sunny was the next child they saw. She was washing her hair, and then she dried it in the sunshine. Keith and Kay told her what a fine thing it was to keep the hair bright and shining by washing it often and brushing it well.
Then they saw a little girl called Careless Carrie who always had unclean finger nails. She just could not remember to clean them and keep them clean. So the twins thought of a plan to help her. They took a piece of paper, put their right hands, palms down, and drew around each finger and thumb with a pencil. This made a picture of a hand, and on it they wrote, "I will clean my nails."
Keith and Kay saw so many children and talked to them about clean bodies and hair and finger nails, that before they knew it, it was time for them to go home and bathe. So home they skipped, happy because they had helped someone else to be clean, and the last thing they said was:
"When you have had a nice warm scrub, Always remember to clean the tub."
We can't hope to be always on the crest of the wave. Deep shadows but serve to accentuate the high-lights of life. And though we arise to a day shattered with disappointments, let us remember that even the darkest day has its to-morrow — a to-morrow that may restore our lost yesterdays. — Leila Marler Hoggan.
Though justice be thy plea, remember this, that in the course of justice none of us should see salvation. We do pray for mercy ; and the same prayer doth teach us all to render the deeds of mercy. — Shakespeare.
* * *
A man's true wealth is the good he does in this world. When he dies, mortals will ask what property has he left behind him, but angels will inquire, "What good deeds hast thou sent before you?" — Mahomet.
Hanuere, 1941 TE KARERE 541
^Mutual improvement Association
Y.M.M.I.A. George R. Biesinger, President Tapsell Meha, Secretary
Gleyre C. Frederickson, First Counsellor
Y.W.M.I.A. Una Thompson, President Wiki Katene, Second Counsellor
Hene T. Ngaio, First Counsellor Annie W. Meha, Secretary
"Wherefore be not weary in well doing for ye are laying the foundation of a great work and out of small things proceedeth that which is great. Behold the Lord requireth the heart and a willing mind."
Greetings to you all. As most of you are aware, the Elders have been released and returned to Zion, and we want to encourage the M.I. A. workers to continue diligently in building and spreading the Mutual ideals among the people of our land. Be not too worried by the changes in the present march of events, but let us take heed of the Lord's counsel — "stand ye in holy places" — and show our respect and love to those who have sacrificed so much in bringing the light of truth to the people here, by emulating their faithfulness to service. Let us not be weary in well doing.
May the Lord bless you all for every righteous effort that you have put forth during the past season and pray continually for strength to carry on in the year to come.
ORGANIZATION
Officers, we request that you organize your Associations properly, as set forth in the Manual, and study the prescribed lessons as closely as possible. Let us endeavour to incorporate the open programmes that are so prevalent in some of the districts, even though one class only may be available.
LESSONS
We do not know, as yet, when the new Manuals will be sent from Zion, however we advise you to continue studying last years lessons, viz. —
Adults: "Way to Perfection."
M-Men and Gleaners: "Youth and Its Religion."
Juniors: "Happy Landing."
Explorers: "Scouting." (Proceed to your nearest Scout Depot; have yourselves registered and follow out their lesson work.)
MEMBERSHIP CARDS
Money for all Membership Cards must accompany the orders for same. The fee is one shilling per card or member. Every branch should make an endeavour to increase its membership over last year's. Remember each membership fee will be credited to your Hui Tau Queen.
OPENING DATE
Mutuals will commence on the last Tuesday in January, and officers should plan a very attractive opening programme to encourage mem- bers to attend. It is surprising what fust impressions can do.
HUI TAU
1. Each M.I. A. Group shall be allowed one entry in each event
excepting the Cooking and Sewing, when each entrant may enter as many articles as she may wish to <h». However, only one entry point will be allotted in each particular group or class.
2. All members of the Mission Hoard are ineligible for competition.
3. In order to compete in Hui Tau Competitions, a person must:
542 TE KARERE Hanuere, 1941
(a) Be a financial member of the New Zealand M.I. A.
(b) Be prepared to show his or her Membership Card upon re- quest of judges or officials.
(c) Attend at least three Mutual "lesson meetings" in 1941.
(d) Reside in Branch to be represented for at least one month before Hui Tau.
4. All entries to be sent to Tapsell Meha, Box 61, Dannevirke, H.B. Closing date will be given in a later issue of "Te Karere."
5. Those living away from organized Branches or are unable to abide with above regulations who wish to compete at Hui Tau must present their case through the mail to the M.I. A. Board, Box 61, Dan- nevirke. Permission will be granted providing the request is a legiti- mate one.
ACTIVITIES Mixed Contest.
1. Parade. Judged according to Interhouse Standards.
2. One-Act Play, "Jean's Awakening." Copies now available.
3. Dance, "Senorita Mia." Music copies available.
4. Tennis (Men and Women) — Singles, Doubles, and Mixed. Entry Fee, 2/6 each group.
5. Haka and Action Song.
6. Wood Chopping Competition. Entry Fee, 7/6.
7. Horse-shoe Pitching. M. Men:
1. Oration. Theme, Proverbs 6:20-22. Time limit, 8 minutes.
2. Vocal Solo. Own Choice. Sacred or Secular.
3. Chorus, "Pale Moon." No less than 8 or more than 16 members.
4. Quartette, "Sweet Sabbath Eve."
5. Athletics.
Explorers:
1. Quartette, "Abide With Me." Age limit, 17 years.
2. Hand Craft. Leather purse.
3. Athletics.
Ladies (Adults and Gleaners):
1. Oration. Theme, Proverbs 6:20-22. 18 years and upwards.
2. Vocal Solo. Own selection.
3. Chorus, "The Prayer Perfect." (9 to 15 contestants.)
4. Trio, "In a Green Cathedral."
5. Poi. Three rows — Long, Short, Double-short.
6. Basketball. (5 a side.)
7. Athletics. Adults:
1. Rongopai, "Nga Apiha o te Hahi."
2. Embroidered Cushion Cover in Wool. Gleaners:
1. Cooking.
2. Sewing. (1) Knitting Bag made from sugar bag and embroidered in wool. (2) Three-piece Dressing Table Set. Hairpin work as demonstrated at Hui Tau.
3. Athletics.
Junior Girls:
1. Cooking.
2. Trio, "Stars of the Summer Night." Age limit, 17 years.
3. A Maori Story (Legend).
4. Elocution.
5. Sewing. (1) Embroidered Apron (Maori design). (2) Knitted Scarf. (Own design and choice of colours)
6. Athletics.
Hanuere, 1941 TE KARERE 543
Scouting:
1. Handicraft Work — Models, etc.
2. Aerial Runway. (1) Own blocks and tackles and ropes. (2) Not less than 20ft. span.
3. Signalling. Morse and Semaphore (sending and receiving the greatest number of words within 4 minutes).
4. Fire Lighting and Boiling the "Billy." Own materials.
5. Flagpole Raising. Use any number of guide ropes.
Note. — All Scout Units must be registered with the New Zealand
Council at your nearest Depot. Queen Voting (Queen Entry Fee, 10/-) :
|
Votes |
Votes |
||
|
Marae Ticket . . |
100 |
"Te Karere" Subscrip |
|
|
Contest Ticket |
5 |
tion — 1 Year |
100 |
|
1st Place |
50 |
5 Years |
300 |
|
2nd Place |
25 |
Life . . |
500 |
|
3rd Place . . |
15 |
Queen Entry . . |
200 |
|
Membership . . |
100 |
Elocution (Junior Girls) :
"HOMEWARD BOUND" By Una Thompson
1. As I gazed at the sea at sunrise,
I thought of the ship that was homeward bound, And prayed in my heart that she would reach port safely, That there might be nothing to run her aground.
2. I thought of the noble souls aboard her,
The missions they had fulfilled so well, Of hundreds of miles they had come to our homeland With the Gospel Message to tell.
3. Oh, Lord! in your tender mercy, watch o'er them,
Till that ship reaches the other shore, To deliver them safely in the arms of their loved ones, To travel the seas no more.
4. Thankful am I for their guidance,
And the gospel they had brought, Of the many trials and hardships That they so bravely fought.
5. And may I always be found worthy
Of the sacrifices they made, Doing my part, cheerfully, In valleys, hills or glades.
6. I looked again at sunset,
At the close of another day, And knew that ship was somewhere, Riding the crest of a wave.
7. With her load of precious cargo,
Sailing o'er the mighty main, Oh, Father — protect our brothers Until we meet again.
COOKING EVENTS FOR NEXT HUI TAU
Try these recipes out on your families. Start your training now. You might even serve them for supper after this month's social evening.
ADULT CLASS Sultan Cake: ', lb, Sultanas
1 lb. Butter 1 cup Sugar
4 Eggs 2J cups Flour
I cup Milk 2 teaspoon Baking Powder
544 TE KARERE Hanuere, 1941
Cream butter and sugar, add eggs well beaten; lastly dry ingredi- ents: flour, fruits and milk. Blackberry and Banana Jam:
6 lbs. Blackberries; 2 lbs. Bananas; 6 lbs. Sugar.
Mash up the fruits and boil for 20 minutes without water. Then add the sugar and boil for about 15 minutes longer. Test as usual and seal when cold.
GLEANERS
Sponge Sandwich with Butter (Own choice of filling): 3 Eggs 3 cup Sugar
3 tablespoon Boiling Water 1 dessertspoon Butter
1 cup Flour I small teaspoon Soda
1 small teasn. Cream of Tartar Beat the eggs lightly for 20 minutes, then add sugar, flour and
powder. Then add melted butter and water.
Rolled Oat Shortbread:
6 oz. Butter 2 cups Rolled Oats
i cup light brown Sugar 1 teaspoon Baking Powder
1 cup Coconut
Mix dry ingredients well together, melt butter and add to dry
ingredients. Press into well buttered tin and bake II to 2 hours in a
slow oven. Cut into shapes while hot.
JUNIOR GIRLS
Plain Sponge Sandwich. (Own choice of filling. Same as Gleaner recipe
without butter.) Afgans:
6 oz. Butter 4 oz. Sugar
6 oz. Flour 6 oz. Cornflakes
1 tablespoon \ teaspoon Salt
1 small teaspn. Baking Powder
Cream together butter and sugar, add other ingredients. Corn- flakes last of all.
DANCE
1. Originality of Figures 5. Introduction and Finale
2. Execution of Figures 6. Rhythm and Time
3. Poise and gracefulness 7. Execution of Steps
4. Dress and Manner
COMBINED ACTION SONG AND HAKA
Ladies in front and men at back for action song — leader must be a lady, and men must confine themselves to action song, not haka. Party must not retire from platform, nor should the curtain be drawn at the end of the action song. The men must advance to the front and the ladies retire to the rear immediately. The haka is then executed under the leadership of a male. The ladies must haka in the rear, otherwise it is not a combined action song and haka.
The music for an action song must come from the performers, although help may be allowed from anyone else not necessarily a parti- cipant in the action song. Instruments may be used in the wings or off stage.
Notice. — Will all associations which have contributed towards the National War Fund through their Gold and Green Ball efforts please send the name of the Branch and the amount of the sum donated. We would like to have this data on our records.
The Board Officers stand united in extending heartfelt thanks to all Mutual Members and friends who have co-operated so splendidly to make last year's work so outstanding.
— M.I.A. Board.
ff
Te Karere
•)•)
Established
1907
Wahanga 35
Pepuere, 1941
Nama 2
Matthew Cowley Kelly Harris Eru T. Kupa Waimate Anaru
Tumuaki Mihana Etita
Kaiwhakamaori Kaiwhakamaori
"Ko tenei Pepa i zvhakaiapua hei hapai ake i te izvi Maori ki roto i nga ivhakaaru-uuL'
"Te Karere" is published monthly by the New Zealand Mission of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, and is printed by TE KARERE PRESS, No. 2 Scotia Place, Upper Queen Street, Auckland, C.l, N.Z. Subscription Rates: 3/- per six months; 5/- per year; £1 for five years; £2/10/- for life. (United States Cur- rency: $1.00 per year; $4.00 for five years; $10.00 for life.)
Address Correspondence, Box 72, Auckland, C.l, New Zealand.
Contents
Editorial — Page
The Sacrament Service, by Matthew Cowley 562
Special Features
Hohepa Mete, na Rawiri Kainau 550
! !e Mihi, na Kemi \Y. Witehira 552
Ala Nga Kaiwhakaako — Zion Back Cover
Branch Teachers' Message — Zion Front Cover
To a World at War. by First Presidency 561
Special Greetings, by President Rufus K. i tardy 564
I Sack- Picture Competition 576
Church Features
Mahi Kura I tapati 5?7
Ripoata Hui Pariha 554
( renealogy 556
M.I. A. . ' 565
Hui Tan 566
Sunday School 55°
Primary 571
News ?<)7
Statistics 57'>
I Unclaimed I on p ndeno 560
550 TE KARERE Pepuere, 1941
HOHEPA METE
Poropiti Pono, Tika Hoki
" Taku tautoko i aia " ¥ Na RAWIRI KAMAU
HE MIHI — Ki nga Etita o Te Karere, e hoa
ma tena ra koutou katoa, nga memo zchakahaere o
tenet "Mann Tangi Pax." E mihi ana mo te pai, mo te
marama o nga ripoata me nga mahi katoa e whaka-
aturia ana, mahi Kara Hapati, Hui Atawhai, Miu-
tara, nga korero o te Ao me nga korero Rongo Paka-
nga. E mihi atu ana hoki ki nga Hunga Tapu otc Rawiri Kamau
Mihana i roto i te Tan Hon, a lie mahara hoki ki te
ra o te Kirihimete — ki ta te ao — te ra whatum o te Ariki, lac noa hoki te ra
whanau a tona pononga o Hohepa Mete, te 23 o Tihema. He mihi aroka hoki
ki to tatou Timuaki — to tatou matua — kia Kauri me tona whanau, ara ki ton i
wahine me a raua tamariki, a Jewell me X opera Takana Meha.
Na Nga Etita:
He Timuaki Peka a Rawiri Kamau o Korongata i mua atu o tona teina o Hamiora e Timuaki ana i naianei. He tangata kaha tenci i roto i te Rongopai —he kaha ki te kawc korero mo te pono o tenci mahi. Tirohia ana korero pai i roto i nga wharangi o nga "Karere" o nga tan kua mutu, me nga "Karere" e haere ake net.
ETE HUNGA TAPU, i te mea kua hokihoki o tatou tuakana kua tae ki te wa — ki te haora i mohio ai te Atua hei karanga-
tanga i nga Kaumatua kia hoki atu . . . kua noho rite tatou ; kua oti ke o tatou "pa tuwatawata" me o tatou whare tapu, te tohunga- tanga tapu o Merekiherika me to Arona, te mana tapu o te Atua i tohutohu ai o tatou Timuaki Mihana katoa : "E tu i runga i o koutou turanga tapu" kaua hei whakawhirinaki ki runga i tetahi tangata hei pou whakawhirinakitanga, kei whati, na kua hinga koe — ka mate. Kahore tatou i te kuare ki nga whakaaturanga a nga pononga a te Atua — nga kaumatua, "kei te haere mai te ra e karangatia ai matou kia hoki atu ki Hiona."
E te Hunga Tapu, kua tutuki tenei korero panga whakamua a o tatou Timuaki, no reira e aku hoa mahi puta noa te Mihana — kia man whakawhirinaki ki runga i to Tohungatanga me nga ture o te Hahi. Te Kupu o te Matauranga — utua o whakatekau — me utu hoki nga moni ohaoha. Koia nei ra nga ture i whakatakotoria hei pupuri ma tatou. Ki te puta mai te wa o te mate-kai, penei kei te rite ia tatou enei ture te whakarite — e noho rite ana tatou. Ko taua wa o te mate-kai kei te kitea atu i naianei. Kei te tata mai kia tatou. Kei te mate ra te ao. E miriona ana nga tangata e mate ana o nga whenua e pakanga ana, a kei te horapa haere ki te ao katoa. Ki
Pepuere, 1941 TE KARERE 551
te pa kia tatou tenei mate e hara i te Hahi te he, no nga Kaumatua ranei. Nuku atu i te 50 tau inaianei e korerotia ana tenei take. Nuku atu i te 100 tau i korero a Hohepa Mete i enei ture, noreira kihai tatou i waiho kuaretia e nga pononga a te Atua. Ki te a.hua, akuanei pa ai tenei mamae kia tatou ki te Hunga Tapu — he kore kaore i tautoko, ko nga mea anake i whakarite i te ture noho-puku me te utu i nga ohaoha e whiwhi a taua ra — penei e pera ana kei te pai, e tika ana hoki — no wai te he?
Kaati mo enei wahi hei matakitaki ma o tatou whakaaro puhoi ki te whakarite i nga whakahau a te Hahi.
E whai ake nei etahi o nga kupu panga whakamua a Hohepa Mete mai te tau 1832 mo nga whawhai. I tohungia e ia i mua atu o te whawhai nui ki Amerika ara te Civil War, ka timata ki Kararaina (Carolina), ka pakanga katoa a Amerika ki aia ano, ara te tonga ki te nota, a i muri iho ka karanga tetahi taha kia Ingarangi ki te awhina i aia. I rite katoa enei kupu panga whakamua. Me titiro i roto i te hitori o Amerika ka kitea te pono o tenei poropititanga. I pa hoki ana korero i roto i tana poropititanga. mo nga iwi taurekareka o Amerika, ara, nga mangu-mangu. Kaati i roto i taua pakanga (Civil War) ko tera tetahi o nga take nui o te whawhai.
I puta hoki i te Poropiti, ara, ia Hohepa, etahi korero mo nga pakanga nui i pa ki te ao i muri iho o te pakanga i Amerika (Civil War). I ahu ki te pakanga nui o te tau 1914-18, ara mo te nui o nga mea kikino o taua wa, tae noa ki te mate "Flu" i horapa ki te ao katoa i muri iho o te whawhai-nui "World War." I korero whaka- tupato ia ki tona iwi, ki te Hahi mo aua ra, tae mai ki enei ra, ki nga ra o tenei pakanga kino e mahi nei i tana mahi, nga tohu e tata ana te wa o te "Hokinga tuarua mai o te Tama o te Atua." Ko enei nga korero nui kaha a Hohepa Mete hei matakitaki ma tatou i roto i tenei wa o te whawhai. Kia man mahara Hunga Tapu ma. Tirohia te Akoranga me nga Kawenata, wahanga 45, kei reira e hoa ma nga tino korero mo enei ra. E marama ana i reira nga ahuatanga kei roto nei tatou i naianei tonu.
Kei te tino tautoko ahau, me te whakapono hoki i roto i ahau lie Poropiti pono, tika hoki a Hohepa Mete. He pononga tapu ia na te Matua me te Tama i roto i tenei ritenga wa. E kore ahau e whakama ki te tautoko i nga main' me nga korero a tenei tangata tapu, a Hohepa Mete.
|
BOUND VOLUME OF "TE KARERE," 1940 |
||
|
A limited number <>i bound volumes of the L940 issue |
of |
|
|
Te |
Karcrr will s<«>n lie available. Place your orders as m |
on |
|
as |
possible with Te Karere, Box 72, Auckland. |
552 TE KARF.RE Pepuere, 1941
HE MIHI
Na Hemi //'. Whautere Kite Te Karere :
Tena koe te kai waha i nga tikanga me nga mahi o te Mihana o Niu Tireni whiti atu ki te whenua o te Kupu Whakaari. Te Tumuaki o te Mihana me tona hoa wahine me ta korua kotiro, kia ora ite tau hou.
E nga Etita o te Karere me te Hekeretari o te Mihana, ko kou- tou nei nga Maori kua whiriwhiria hei mahi i ena mahi nui o te Mihana, e tuku atu ana ahau i aku mihi kia koutou. Kia ora i te tan hou. Panuitia atu enei kupu e whai ake nei.
Tuaiahi he mihi ki te iwi Maori o te motu. Tena koutou e nga rangatira e noho mai na i o koutou marae waihotanga iho a o koutou matua kua poto kite po waiho iho ko koutou hei waihotanga iho i muri i a ratou. E nga mate o te motu, haere koutou ki nga iwi e pai ana koutou i takoto ki te whare i tangihia, i tanumia ; no reira haere i te rangimarie, moe pai i te moenga mo te katoa.
Tena ko te mano e hinga mai ra i tera taha o te ao, e kore e taea te whakaaro atu te kino. Kore he tangi, kore he tanumanga, kahore he takotoranga. Aue, te nui o tenei pouri e hipoki nei ki nga iwi katoa o te ao. Me pehea ra he whakaaro ake i enei ahuatanga? E te iwi Maori, taku titiro tenei pakanga mo nga tauiwi, mo nga kingi e hara mo taua mo te Maori. Heoi ano na te mana o Ingarangi me te Tiriti o Waitangi hei tirohanga, ae pea, kua tika. E te iwi Maori e hoki ki to Atua i arahina mai ra koe i Ihipa ki Kenana, te whenua whakaari. Kua wareware koe ki to Atua: me hoki ano koe kia ara- hina ai koe ki te Whenua Whakaari mo Hohepa. Kei nga puke- puke tu tonu te whenua e rerengia ana e te miraka me te honi. Tirohia a Amerika e rerengia ana e te miraka me te honi, e te koura e te hiriwa, e te matauranga o runga o raro.
E te whanau ma e haere nei ki te pakanga e mail ki te whaka- pono hei whakangungu rakau e taea ai e koutou nga mana whaka- muramura a te wairua kino e inu ai i te wai whakama. E te Hunga Tapu e tino tika ana kia ataahua ta tatou haere, kia kite ai nga tangata i a tatou hanga pai ka whakakororia te ingoa o to tatou Matua i te rangi, ina rite i a tatou nga tikanga o te Rongopai.
Ko te kai tupeka, rama, hikareti, piriota, pai ke te hoatu hei whakatekau, te tuku ranei mo te pakanga hei awhina i nga hoia. E kitea ana te raruraru o te ao kua kore e mohio pehea e tika ai. I penei ai na te kore whakapono. Nui ke te whakaaro ki te whaka- mate i te whakaora. I enei ahua ka tino pohehe nga whakaaro. Kua whakaporopiti etahi o nga Maori.
Pepuere, 1941 TE KARERE 553
Taku titiro kua tino tika te karaipiture inaianei. Kua huna te matauranga ite hunga nunui, i te hunga whakaaro. Kua huri ki nga kohungahunga me nga kahore noa iho e mea e whakama ai te hunga nunui me te hunga whakaaro.
Kati nei ra e nga taitamariki mohio ki nga mea pakeha. Panuitia nga mea o te ao ki te reo Maori hei titiro ma nga Maori kia mohio ai ki te pai o to panui me to matauranga ki nga mea o te ao.
Ki ora nga kaituhi korero. Ma te Atua e homai nga pai mo tatou i tenei tau.
JANUARY "TE KARERE" FRONT-COVER PICTURE
For the information of "Te Karere" readers who are not acquainted with the young man whose picture appears on the front-cover of the January (Hanuere) Karere, let us introduce you to Nopera Takana Meha Kauri, adopted son of Presi- dent and Sister Cowley.
Better known as Tony, this young mem- ber of the Cowley family has been a resi- dent at the Mission Home since he was eleven months old. He has endeared him- self to all who have met him, and nobody on these islands has more "uncles" than Tony. Every Elder who has laboured in this Mission since President and Sister Cowley acquired him has claimed Tony as his nephew. And is he proud of it? Just ask Tony.
A trait of his Maori ancestors is betrayed by the fact of his gift of oratory. With his hands gesticulating and the expression on his face equalled only by a seasoned campaigner, Tony's ances- tors, to put it colloquially, " has got nothin' " on Tony. Of course his sister, Jewell, is proud of him as we all are who have lived with this young man.
HE WHAKAATURANGA
Te whakaahua o te tamaiti e kite nei koutou i runga i te whare (outside front cover) o te Karere o Hanuere ko te tamaiti whangai a te Timuaki Mihana raua ko tona wahine, ko Sister Cowley.
I te Kirihimete nei ka taemai te powhiri a Eriata Nopera me tona iwi katoa e nohomai ra i Porangahau, Haki Pei, kia tae atu te Timuaki me tona whamere katoa ki taua Kirihimete. Heoi ra i tae atu te Timuaki ki reira. I te po o te Kirihimete ka mana- akitia te tamiti nei e Eriata Nopera huaina ana te ingoa ko Nopera Takana Meha Kauri.
Tekaumawaru marama te pakeke o ta raua tamaiti whangai. E peepi tonu ana ka riro niai ta raua whangai a kua riro pu t<>nu naianei i a raua. He tamiti Maori a Nopera a tino whakahihi raua ki ta raua whangai. He tamiti matau rawaatu hoki to tangata nei — kua akona ki te ru ki te hongi hoki.
554 TE KARERE Pepuere, 1941
HE RIPOATA HUI PARIHA
Pei Whairangi-Ngapuhi
Na Hirini T. Heremaia
Te ripoata tenei no te hui pariha i te Takiwa o te Pewhairangi i tu ki Puhimoana-Ariki, Kaikohe, i te 21 me te 22 o nga ra o Tihema, 1940.
Ko nga manuhiri i taemai ko te Timuaki Mihana, me tona hoa wahine me ta raua kotiro ; Te Ao Wirihana, Hekeretari o te Mihana mo nga mahi Whakapapa me tokowhitu, no Tauranga.
Te huihuinga tuatahi o tenei hui i tu i te 1.30 p.m. i te Ra horoi i raro i te whakahaere a te Ropu Whakapapa, ara, na te kau- nihera Tuarua o tenei Takiwa na Hone Paea i whakahaere. Tino pai tenei huihuinga. Ko te Kaupapa o tenei karakia ko te whaka- marama i nga kororia o nga ao : te wahi i haeremai ai nga wairua, te ahua o te hokinga me era atu tini kupu pai. I whaikorero hoki a Paepae Witehira, he korero tino pai.
Ko te karakia tuarua na te Paraimere i te 7 o nga haora i raro i te whakahaere a Keita Ngakuru. He nui nga mahi a tenei ropu ; he haka, he waiata, he korero. No te Ngawaha etahi o nga tamariki. Mutu mai ta te Paraimere ka hurihia te taima kite Miutara. Note Ngawha ano etahi, no Waimamaku hoki etahi. I roto i tenei hui- huinga ka poi te tiima tane, tino maia hoki taua tiima. Na Hoana Rapatini i ako enei tane ki te poi. Heoi he Ratana ia ko ia tetahi o nga apiha wahine o te Miutara o te Pei. I whai kupu te wahine a te Timuaki a he nui ana kupu ki nga tamariki me nga matua, ki te Hunga Tapu me te hunga o waho.
I te Ratapu te 22 o nga ra i te waru o nga haora ka tu nga karakia a te Hui Atawhai raua ko te Tohungatanga. Na Hemi Whautere i whakahaere te Tohungatanga. I konei ka tukuna ma Hirini Heremaia e karanga nga ingoa o nga kaikaiwhau o nga marama e toru kua pahure kia homai i a ratou ripoata. Ka nui te kaha o nga kaikauwhau ki te haere kite whakarite i o ratou karangatanga.
I roto i tenei huihuinga toko ono nga tangata i whakaritea hei kaumatua, kotahi i whakaritea hei kai whakaako. I tono etahi o Ngapuhi ki te Tumuaki kia homai te Hui Tau kia Ngapuhi a tera tau. Ka mea te Timuaki kia tae kite Hui Tau ki Nuhaka whiriwhiri ai. I roto i nga kupu a te Tumuaki ka mea ia ahakoa kua hoki nga kau- matua he kaumatua ano kei konei, no reira kaua e awangawanga. He tini nga patai marama katoa i te Timuaki.
I te 10.30 o nga haora ka tu te Karakia a te Kura Hapati. Na Hare Nehua i whakahaere, Timuaki takiwa o nga Kura Hapati ote Pei. I roto i tenei karakia ka tu te mahi whakataetae mo te pere koura ate Timuaki Mihana me te kapu mo te Waiata Rongopai. Ko te whakataetae mo te pere koura ma nga taitamariki e waru tau
Pepuere, 1941 TE KARERE 555
ahu iho ki raro me korero e ratou te Korero a ngakau mo Tihema i roto i te reo Maori i te reo pakeha ano hoki. Tokoiwa nga tama- riki i urn ki te whakataetae — 1 no Awarua ; e 4 no Tautoro ; e 2 no Kaikohe he 1 no Mangamuka. Ko te mea i wiini no Kaikohe, a Meriana Heremaia. E toru nga Peka i tomo ki te Waiata Kura Rongopai whakataetae mo te Kapu ia Awarua e pupuri ana. Nga ropu i uru no Awarua, Tautoro me Kaikohe. I roto i nga whaka- taetae nei na te Timuaki Mihana i tohu, a i roto i tenei whakataetae i wiini ano ia Kaikohe. I roto i nga korero a te Timuaki i mihi ia ki nga matua o nga tamariki e kaha nei ki nga mahi o te Rongopai. Na Hone Paea i whakahaere te karakia Whakapapa i te 12 o nga haora. I kauwhau a Teao Wirihana i runga i nga mahi whakapapa. a i muri iho ka whakamarama ia i etahi take nui. I korero ano te Timuaki Mihana i roto i tenei karakia. I tu te karakia kauwhau
0 te 2 i raro o te whakahaere o Hemi W. Witehira, a i roto i tenei huihuinga na te Timuaki Mihana i whakahaere te pootitanga o nga Apiha o te Hahi me te Mihana. I te 7 i te po i timata te karakia mutunga i raro i te whakahaere o te Hui Atawhai, na Keita Xgakuru i whakahaere i muri iho na te Tohungatanga i whakamutu i raro ia Hirini T. Heremaia. He nui ra nga mihi mo tenei Hui ataahua i roto i nga ahua maha, i nga waiatatanga a nga Koea o Kaikohe me Tautoro, nga whakahaere o te marae me nga mea katoa. Ki te Atua te kororia me te honore mo tenei Hui pai.
NGA HUI PARIHA
Auckland.
Ka tu te Hui Pariha o te Takiwa o Akarana ki te taone a te
1 me te 2 o nga ra o Pepuere 1941. He powhiri tenei ki nga iwi kia mahara ki enei ra, haere mai ki te tautoko i tenei Hui Pariha i raro i te whakahaere a te Timuaki Takiwa hou, a William R. Perrott.
Poverty Bay.
Ki nga huihuinga tangata. He karanga tenei. "Haere mai" ki te marae hou— te POHO-O-RAW I R I. Gisborne, i te 8 me te 9 o nga ra o Pepuere. Katahi ano tenei marae ka ekengia e te Hahi, no reira — HAERE MAI — mauria mai nga kupu ora ki nga morehu a te Kani-a-takirau, rangatira nui o te Tai-rawhiti nei. Haere mai.
I [enare I [anion Tipi Kopua I Mn'l Aspinall
Timuakitanga Takiwa.
Waikato.
Haere mai ki te Hui I'anhaka in ki Puke TapU, MnnlK West,
ate 22 me te 23 o nga ra o Pepuera, 1941. Haere mai e hoa ma
ki te matakitaki i nga malii e tika ana mo tan mi i roto i enei ra.
Iluirx .Marshall.
Timuaki Takiwa.
556 TE KARERE Pepuere, 1941
KO NGA KAI-KAUWHAU MO NGAPUHI MO NGA MARAMA O PEPUERE, MAEHE ME APERIRA
WIKI TUARUA
Hare Nehua me Pita Nehua Mangamuka
Tiata Witehira me Pane Herewini Matauri Bay
Rangi Wharemate me Pane Herewini Ngawha
Rehopoama Heke me William Palmer Mangakahia
Wiremu Tamihana me Hohepa Tanu Whangaruru
Tirarau Renata me Waimate Wihongi Kaikou
Marore Piripi me Wi Wharekura Heta Whangaroa
WIKI TUATORU
Pere Hereroa me Haki Paewhenua Waiomio
Hemi Joyce me Mahuika Otene Kaikohe
Em T. Kupa me Huiki Kupa Waimamaku
Hori Ruwhiri me Hare Herewini Mataraua
Pita Pene me Hirini Pita • . Waikare
Frederick Beezley me Iraia Palmer Mokau
Rangi Te Haki me Remana Heke Mangakahia
Ray V. Going me Paepae Witehira 59 Kamo R., Whangarei
WIKI TUAWHA
Hirini T. Heremai me Wehi Heta Whare karakia Mihinare
me te Ratana, Kaikohe
Mairangi Ngakuru me Katuki Ngakuru Whirinaki
Manihera Kauwhata me Whakaita Kauwhata Utakura
Wiremu Te Whata me Tamatai Rakena Mataraua
Aperahama Wharemate me Tuhiwai Wharemate Kaikohe
Taite Rewi me Henare Hoterene Takahiwai
Wiremu Peihopa me Hone Peepe Ruatangata
Hepi Haika me Wi Hetaraka Punaruku
Koroniria Tari me Hono Wihongi Tautoro
Ngaro Tia me George Telford Awarua
Riki Reihana me Tane Heringitana Te Horo
Hare Pita me Haehae Taniora Whananaki
— Na nga Timuakitanga Takiwa.
GENEALOGY
By Teao Wirihana
Cottage Meetings for the month of February.
Feb. 6 — Lesson 16, "Other Children of Lehi." „ 13 — Lesson 17, "Ancestry of Hyrum De Fries." „ 20 — Lesson 18, "Maori Traditions and Genealogies." „ 27 — Lesson 19, "The Gathering of the Nations-Pagent."
Home Teaching.
Mahia nga whakapapa, kua noho mokemoke te Mihana, ite kore kaumatua. Te whakahau mai o Hiona ki te Poari Mahi Whakapapa kia nuku atu te kaha, no te mea kua waiho te mahi ki te Iwi Maori. Awhina-tia te Timuaki Mihana kia teretere nga whakapapa "Ko wai kahua ko wai ka tohu." Ka hoki te Timuaki ka noho tonu ra nei. Whakatauki.
"Mauri mahi mauri ora, mauri mangere mauri mate."
Pepuere, 1941 TE KARERE 557
MAHI KURA HAPATI
RATAPU TUATAHI:
AKORANGA 41. Upoko 2
Te Atua me te Tokotoru Tapu:
Tae noa ki te wa o Hohua me nga kai-whakariterite, a i te wa hoki o nga Kingi kua whakaatu tonu te Atua i Tona mana me la hoki kia Iharaira. I kite a Ihaia i te Ariki e noho ana i runga i te Torona i waenganui i tetahi ropu whai kororia, na ko tana kianga ake "aue te mate moku ka ngaro hoki ahau, he tangata ngutu poke hoki ahau e noho ana i waenganui i te iwi nugutu poke, kua kite nei oku kanohi i te Kingi, ia Ihowa o nga Mano." I tetahi wa i muri mai i te puea- tanga ake o te Karaiti i nga wai o te iriiritanga rumaki, i rangona te reo o te Matua e mea ana "Ko taku Tama tenei i aroha ai, ko Taku i ahuareka ai." Ia Tipene e ngaua ana e te mamae i aia i mate i raro i nga ringa o tona iwi tutu, matapo hoki i runga i o ratou whakaaro ake, ka tuwhera nga rangi a ka kite ia i te kororia o te Atua, me Ihu e tu ana i te ringaringa matau o te Atua.
Nga Patai:
1. Tae noa ki tehea wa te whakaatu tonu o te Ariki ki te whanau o Iharaira?
2. He aha te take i aue ai a Ihaia?
3. Pehea te reo i rangona i te wa o Tona iriiringa?
4. He aha te whakakitenga kia Tipene i te wa i whakamatea ai ia?
RATAPU TUARUA
AKORANGA 42
Kii pu te Pukapuka a Moromona i nga mea e pa ana mo nga korero, take hoki i waenganui i te Atua me tona iwi, ko te nuinga he kitenga a nga minitatanga o nga anahera me te whakaatu tonu mai ano hoki o te Atua i Aia ake. Na, kua korero tatou mo tetahi iwi i mahue atu nei ia ratou te pourewa o Papera a ahu atu ana ta ratou haere ki te tuawhenua ki te hauauru i raro i te whakahaeretanga o tetahi o ratou, e karangatia nei i roto i nga tuhituhinga ko te teina o Iarere. I aia e takatu ana mo te haere a moana ka inoi taua tangata ki te Ariki kia whakapa mai ki tona ringa ma reira hoki e marama ai etahi kohatu e whiwhi ai te hunga haere he maramatanga mo roto i o ratou kaipuke. Te whakahoki mo tenei inoi . . . ka totoro mai te ringa o te Ariki, ka pa ki nga kohatu kitea atu ana Tona ringa, whaka- miharo tonu taua tangata i te kitenga atu i te ringa ano no te tangata, katahi te Ariki, i te ahuareka ki te nui o te whakapono o taua tangata ka whakakite mai i Aia, a ka whakaatu mai ki te teina o Iarere, ko te tangata he mea ata hanga ki te ahua ake o te Kai-hanga.
Ki nga Niwhai i noho nei ano ratou ki te tuawhenua ki te hauauru ka whakakitea e te Karaiti a Ia ano kia ratou i muri mai i tona ripe- katanga me te kakenga atu. Ki enei hipi o te kahui ki te hauauru i whakaatu tuturu Ia mo Tona mana i raro mai Ia i te Matua.
Nga Patai:
1. He whakaaturanga ano koi te pukapuka a Moromona mo to ahua i waenganui i te Atua me Tona iwi?
2. Ko wai tetahi tangata i korero, i kite hoki i te Atua no te wa o te Pourewa o Papera?
3. He aha i ahuareka ai te Atua ki aia?
4. He aha te una i tono ai ia ki te .Atua a he alia hoki to mea i miharo ai ia?
5. I roto i te whakautu Ki tona inoi mo nga whakakitenga ki aia.
he aha to maramatanga nui i puta kia tatou?
558 TE KARERE Pepuere, 1941
RATAPU TUATORU
AKORANGA 43
Nga whakakitenga i tenei wehenga o nga wa. Kua whakakite te Atua i Aia ano ki tona iwi. Na te whakapono me te whakaaro pono ka whiwhi a Hohepa Mete i aia ano e tu tamarikitia i te whakakitenga mai a te Atua i Aia, me te whiwhi nui kia kite tonu i te Matua Ora- tonu me Ihu Karaiti ;Tona Tama. Ko tana whakaaturanga mo Te Matua kaore i tuaina ki runga ki nga kupu tuku iho o nehe. Ki ana whiriwhiri i roto i nga akoranga e whakamohio ai ia ki te ao — "e ora ana Raua tokorua, te Matua me te Tama, i te mea kua kite ia i o raua tinana, kua rongo hoki i o raua reo." Hei tapiri ki tenei whaka- aturanga kua tuhia ake nei tera ano a Hohepa Mete me Hirini Riki- tana ia Pepuere 16, 1832, i kite raua i te Tama a te Atua, i korero tahi hoki me Ia i roto i tetahi whakakitenga. "I a maua e whaka- aroaro ana ki enei, i meinga e te Ariki o maua kanohi kia kite i te maramatanga, e kanapa ana te kororia o te Ariki, a i kite ano mua i te kororia o te Tama kei te ringa matau o te Matua,. i wtawhi hoki ki tona raneatanga, a i kite hoki i nga anahera tapu, nga tangata hoki kua whakapaua nei i mua i Tona torona, e karakia ana ki te Atua raua ko te Reme, a ka koropiko hoki ratou ki Aia mo ake ake tonu atu. Ko tenei, ahakoa ra he maha nga whakaaturanga kua oti noa te whaka- atu mona ko tenei te mutunga o nga whakaaturanga katoa te hoatu nei e maua Mona, ara, kei te ora Ia, no te mea i kite maua i Aia, kei te ringa matau hoki o te Atua, i rongo hoki maua ki te reo e whakaatu mai ana ko Ia anake te tamaiti a te Matua i roto i te kikokiko., Nana hoki, na roto i Aia e tu nei nga ao, Nana hoki i hanga, a ki nga iwi o te ao Nana hoki i hanga, a ko nga iwi o te ao nei kua oti te karanga he tamariki na te Atua." . . . (Ako. me nga Kawe, 76: 19-24)
Nga Patai:
1. He aha te kaupapa o nga korero mo tenei wahanga?
2. He pehea te whakaaturanga a Hohepa Mete?
3. He aha ia i whiwhi ai ki tenei whakaaturanga?
4. He aha te whakaaturanga hei tapiri mo te mea kia Hohepa Mete?
5. Ko wai ma hoki i whiwhi ki tenei whakaaturanga?
6. Korerotia nga wahi nunui o taua whakaaturanga?
RATAPU TUAWHA
AKORANGA 44
Ia Aperira 3, 1836, i roto i te temepara i Katarani, Ohaio, ka whakaatu mai te Ariki i Aia ano kia Hohepa Mete me Oriwa Kautere, i mea ia i taua wa, "I kite maua i te Ariki e tu ana i runga i te papa- rewa, i mua ia maua, i raro i Ona waewae, tetahi mahi whakamiharo, koura para kore tonu, rite ki te ngarehu wera, Ona kanohi ano he mura ahi, Ona huruhuru ma tonu ano he hukarere, Tona mata whiti tonu, kei runga ake i te maramatanga o te ra, Tona reo ano ko te harurutanga o nga wai maha, ko te reo o Ihowa e mea ana — "Ko Ahau te Tuatahi me te Mutunga, ko Ahau ano e ora nei, i mate ano Ahau, ko Ahau ta korua kai-whakaatu ki te Matua."
Nga Patai:
1. No tehea wa tenei whakaaturanga kia Hohepa Mete me Oriwa Kautere?
2. Ko wai ta raua i kite ai?
3. Pehea hoki Tona ahua i to raua kitenga atu?
4. He aha te reo i rangona e raua?
5. Pehea nga kupu mai a taua reo kia raua?
Pepuere, 1941
TE KARERE
559
Sunday £chool
Hohepa M. Meha, Superintendent Eru T. Kupa, Assistant Superintendent
James R. Elkington, Assistant Supt. Kelly Harris, Secretary
Lessons compiled by Hohepa M Meha and Eru T. Kupa.
Andante.
After Co wen.
i -0- •&-
SACRAMENT GEM
Hush, hush ! be ev'ry sound subdued, They may not softly harmonize
With faith and trust and gratitude, For Christ's atoning sacrifice
The matchless love betokened thus
Claims most sincere response from us.
POSTLUDE
Soft 9ft stop
is «, a no in CONCERT RECITATION
Matthew 4: 18-19.
"And Jesus walking by the Sea of Galilee, saw two brethren, Simon, called Peter, and Andrew, his brother, casting a net into the sea; for they were fishers. And he said unto them, Follow me and T will make you fishers of men."
„, . f ',n KORERO A NGAKAU
Matin 4: 18-19.
"A i a Ihu e haere ana i te taha o te moana o Kariri, ka kite la i etahi tangata tokorua, he tuakana, he teina, i a Haimona, tona ingoa nei ko Pita, raua ko tona teina, ko Anaru, e tnaka ana i te Inip'enga ki te moana; he kai hao hoki raua. Na ka mea ia ki a raua. Arumia mia ahau, a maku korua e mea hei kaihao tangata."
HYMNS
"Te Kupu a te Atua, te Reo Poropiti" Page 10
"The Joy and the Song" Page 1 I »*>
560 TE KARERE Pcpucrc. 1941
UNCLAIMED CORRESPONDENCE
N.B. Anyone knowing the whereabouts of the persons given
hereunder kindly forward the correct addresses to "Te Karere." Numerous issues of "Te Karere" have been returned unclaimed and we are endeavouring through this column to better serve all Readers.
Editors.
Since July.
Graham Kauwhata, unknown. Since September.
Rosina Watene, Pukekohe.
Henry M. Davies, Rotorua ; also Air Training Base, Hobsonville
Wikitoria Poutu, c/o Wi Taylor, Kawakawa.
Since October.
Patukohuru Paraha, Waiomio, Kawakawa.
Hone Kapa, Pokere, via Kawakawa.
Rebecca Smith, Nuhaka, P.O.
Rangi Te Haki, R.M.D., Mangakahia, Whangarei and Kaikohe.
Kohi Moon, R.M.D., Awarua, Whangarei and Kaikohe.
Wahangu Neho, R.M.D., Awarua, Whangarei.
Jimmy Kemp, Box 16, Waharoa.
Since November.
Ada Hira, 19 Second Ave., Wairoa, H.B. Mrs. Wiki Aramakutu, Te Araroa P.O. Tamati Ngatoro, Te Araroa P.O. Kathleen Williams, P.O. Kaikohe.
Since December.
Miss Betty Aubrey, Thames Public Hospital, Thames.
Hori Eramiha Neho, R.M.D., Awarua, Whangarei and Kaikohe.
Marjory Bryan, Box 72, Auckland.
Grace Haratua, Box 72, Auckland.
Again let us remind all who can be of service to their neighbour to communicate with "Te Karere" as soon as possible about the above names. Perhaps it would be to our mutual good if proper postal address is given along with rural address, viz.: Awarua, via Whangarei, which by the returned mail has been changed by P.O. officials to read, Awarua, Kaikohe. Editors.
AUCKLAND DISTRICT CONFERENCE
President William R. Perrott of the Auckland District is pleased to announce that during the week-end February 1st and 2nd, 1941, a Conference (Hui Pariha) will be held at the L.D.S. Chapel, Queen Street, Auckland, and the Manchester Hall, corner of Hobson and Victoria Streets, Auckland. All are cordially invited to partake of the spiritual good that bless those who attend.
Pepuere, 1941
TE KARERE
561
TO A WORLD AT WAR
The meeting of the Saints in this General Conference finds the world still war-torn. Millions of the Lord's children are suffering and mourning. All the woes and misery that attend armed conflict are spending their force upon them.
From these afflicted peoples comes the prediction that the approaching winter will bring famine. If famine shall come, the history of the past shows it will likely bring plagues with it.
Our brethren and sisters are found on both sides of this terrible struggle. On each side they are bound to their country
by all the ties of come to aim at the
blood, relationship A statement t0 all complete subjugation
and patriotism. men from the First or extermination of
As always happens Presidency of the the other, in such cases each S"f*^"ffl . This would be an side claims to be- presented at the open- inhuman and un- lieve it is in the right. ing session of the righteous purpose. Each claims to feel }}lt]?> semi-annual Gocps requires
• , • r t,- r -x Conference, October 4, ,. , . J . 1,,
it is fighting for its 194q that nations shall live
very existence. As Taken from the De- m peace and amity, the war progresses cember, 1940, issue of one with another, in its cruelty and The Improvement Era. The Master's corn- horror, each may mand was :
"Love your enemies, do good to them which hate you. Bless them that curse you, and pray for them which dcspitefullx use you." —Luke 6 : 27-28.
The Saints on either side have no course open to them but to support that Government to which they owe allegiance. But their prayers should go up day and night that God will turn the hearts of their leaders towards peace, that the curse of war may end.
God is not pleased either with war, or with the wickedness which always heralds it. When He uses war, it is to wipe out sin and unrighteousness. The hearts of all the Saints arc torn with grief over the sufferings of their brethren and sisters who are taking part in this struggle. So, for the Saints this is a fratricidal conflict. They so mourn over it. Their prayers ascend to our Heavenly Father that the war may come to a speed) end.
To those Saints who are stricken by this great tragedy, we say live righteously, pray constantly, and the Lord will answer as your faith and works and I lis all-wise purposes allow Mini.
To those whose wickedness lias brought this strife and turmoil,
we say repent lest the I «ord shall smite you in I lis wrath. He Will not hold you guiltless of the innocent blood of your fellow nun.
To all the nations, we say adjust your differences b) peaceful means. This is the Lord's way.
"Blessed are the peachtnakerss for they shall be called the child- ren of God" Matt. 5:9. (Continued on page 564)
562 TE KARERE Pepuere. 1941
&lutx\uil
THE SACRAMENT SERVICE
"Wherefore whosoever shall eat this bread, and drink this cup of the Lord, unworthily, shall be guilty of the body and blood of the Lord.
"But let a man examine himself, and so let him eat of that bread and drink of that cup.
"For he that eateth and drinketh unworthily, eateth and drinketh damnation to himself, not discerning the Lord's body.
"For this cause many are weak and sickly among you, and many sleep." (1st Cor. 11:27-30.)
The most sacred service of religious worship is that of the sacrament. Through this service the religionist is brought into proximity to the spiritual force and exalting power of the perfect character of the Son of God.
The law of the sacrifice instituted in the days of Adam was filled in the death of the Saviour. The greater law, that of the sacrament, is fulfilled only in the eating of the bread and the drink- ing of the cup, worthily, during the sacrament service of the Church.
There is no substitute for this divine ritual in God's plan of redemption and regeneration.
Adam and his posterity, down through the ages, offered the firstlings of their flocks and the best of their fruits in anticipation of the fulfilment of the law of sacrifice in the death of "The Lamb without blemish," which fulfilment would bring to them a redemp- tion from transgression of divine injunctions.
Only the best was acceptable to the Lord as a sacrifice. The excellence of the sacrificial offering was a convincing reminder that a redemption from sin should come only through the supreme sacri- fice of one possessed of the attributes ascribed to Jesus the Christ.
As the day approached for the fulfilment of the old law the new law of the sacrament was instituted. Christ, as the days of the earthly ministry drew to a close, called His disciples together and administered unto them the "Sacrament of the Last Supper." He blessed the broken bread and the cup, and as He passed to each
Pepuere, 1941 TE KARERE 563
the sanctified emblems, He admonished the disciples to "do this in remembrance of me, for as often as ye eat this bread and drink this cup, ye do shew the Lord's death till He come."
In showing the Lord's death by obedience to this holy ordinance, the partaker of the sacrament solemnly reaffirms the baptismal covenant to take upon himself the name of the Son, and always remember Him, and keep His commandments which He has given him.
The Lord, being aware of man's tendency to transgress the law, and that "it is human to err" has enjoined His Church to "meet together often" and partake of the emblems of His redeeming sacri- fice, and to offer up their sacraments that they may more fully keep themselves unspotted from the world.
The administration of the sacrament as a component of religi- ous worship is so essential that the words in the prayer of sanctifica- tion have been given by direct revelation from God for this specific purpose. Words other than those contained in the revelation will fail to sanctify the bread and the cup to the souls of those worthy to partake of them. In the blessing pronounced upon the sacred emblems of the Master's great sacrifice the Priest repeats God's own words — words which carry inspiration to the heart and soul of every participant in this holy ritual.
The sabbath is the day appointed for sacrament service. In the religious worship of this day every member of the Church is ex- pected to present himself before the sacrament board and renew his covenants with his Redeemer. For those who neglect this duty there is no covenant renewal and the Lord will not hold them blameless.
The vitality of the Church lies in the obedience of ils members to the divine plan and this vitality comes Erom the frequent com- munion ol" the Saints — meeting together often, and with contrite spirits, partaking of the sacrament of the Lord's Supper.
"But remember that on 1 1 1 i -> the Lord's day, then shalt offer thine oblations and thy sacraments unto the M<>^i High, confessing thj sins unto thy brethren, and before the lord."
— Mai rii k\\ t o\\ i i \
564
TE KARERE
Pepuere, 1941
Special !
CHRISTMAS GREETINGS to President Cowley's Family, Saints and Friends from President RUFUS K. HARDY
Received after the Christmas holi- days the following cablegram from former Mission President Rufus K. Hardy, of the Council of Seven Presi- dents of Seventies, reads thus : —
"Salt Lake City, Utah. President Matthew Cowley, Box 72, Auckland, New Zealand: Merry Christmas. The Lord's blessing upon you, wife and daughter and all Saints and Friends whom we love in your beloved land. — Rufus K. Hardy."
President Cowley regrets that this message has been so late in reaching the Saints and Friends, but owing to the Christmas holi- days its arrival at Headquarters was delayed. Suffice to say, how- ever, the thoughts and spirit of Timuaki Ruwhara was not far away from us, and this, we feel sure, more than compensates its late arrival to the Saints and Friends in the Mission.
— The Editors.
(Continued from page 561)
How infinitely greater it is to lead nations to peace, than to sub- due a nation to chains. Let America put her house in order, for- sake selfishness, greed and avarice, abolish unrighteousness, wipe hate from her heart, hold in loyal friendship the good and upright of all nations and peoples. Then to her shall come the high destiny of the peacemaker.
We humbly pray our Heavenly Father, that He will send to the earth His messengers of peace, that this terrible war shall afflict no more nations and spread no farther over the face of the land, that fear and frenzy shall be driven out from their place among the peoples, that hate shall be banished from the souls of men, for where hate abides, there righteousness cannot live, that sanity shall again assert its sway, and that love shall fill the hearts of men even to overflowing.
THE FIRST PRESIDENCY.
Pepuere, 1941 TE KARERE 565
^Mutual improvement ^Association
Y.M.M.I.A. Tapsell Meha, Secretary Y.W.M.I.A. Una Thompson, President Wiki Katene, Second Counsellor
Heni T. Ngaio, First Counsellor Annie W. Meha, Secretary.
HUI TAU M.I.A. ATHLETIC PROGRAMME
(Some of the events are in January issue of "Te Karere") ACTIVITIES continued from page 542, January, 1941 Mixed Contest.
8. Tug-o-War — 8 a side.
9. Dance, "Valeta Waltz." Fifty years and upwards.
M. Men.
5. 100 Yards Sprint.
6. 220 Yards Sprint.
7. 440 Yards 4 men Relay.
8. 880 Yards Dash.
9. Hop, Step and Jump.
10. High Jump.
11. Javelin Throw.
12. Throwing the Discus.
13. Shot Put.
Gleaners.
3. 75 Yards Sprint.
4. 100 Yards Obstacle Race.
5. 400 Yards 4 Gleaners' Relay.
Explorers.
3. 75 Yards Sprint.
4. 100 Yards Sprint.
5. 440 Yards 4 Explorers' Relay.
Junior Girls.
6. 50 Yards Sprint.
7. 220 Yards 4 Junior Girls' Relay.
8. 75 Yards Skipping. Bring own rope.
9. Basketball. (7 players.) Rules same as last year for both Gleaner and .Junior Girls. Each .M.l.A. MUST Bupply own ball and provide a competenl referee.
Ladies (Adults and Gleaners):
i. Trio, "There's a Home in the Heart of the Hills" instead of what was announced in January "Te Karere."
{Cooking:
N.B. On page 6 i I of the Hanuere Issue of "Te Karere" th< a recipe r<>r the Junior Girl cooking with which there i- an added correction. The item winch reads "i tablespoon" should be completed and Its correcl reading Is "i tablespoon of Co<
566 TE KARERE Pepuere, 1941
HUI TAU
The New Zealand Mission of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints announce that during the "Easter 1941" the HUI TAU will be held at Nuhaka, Hawke's Bay.
President Cowley invites all peoples to avail themselves of this opportunity of witnessing" the work of God among this people.
President Hirini Christy of the Mahia District Presidency and Nuhaka Branch President welcome you all and will assure you that everything possible will be done for your temporal well-being during this great Conference of the Church.
President Rahiri Harris as Chairman of the Hui Tau Board and on their behalf extends their "Haere mai ki to tatou Hui Tau" to all.
On the Front Cover of this issue are composite pictures which were taken at Nuhaka during the Hui Tau of 1940. People who attended last year will remember the good that was to be had. Come this year and renew acquaintances, hear the Word of God, enjoy the spirit of the people, listen to your leaders, and mingle your hearts and hopes in prayer for the cause of the righteous in the conflict that is about us. Let us as Latter-day Saints be united in praying for the peace of the Saviour to fill the hearts of men.
The following poem is for us all —
IT'S YOU !
If you want to work for the kind of a branch
Like the kind of a branch you like, You needn't slip your clothes in a grip,
Or start on a long, long hike. You'll only find what you left behind
For there's nothing that's really new. It's a knock at yourself when you knock your branch.
It isn't the branch — it's you !
Real branches are not made by men who are afraid
Lest somebody else gets ahead, When everyone works, and nobody shirks,
You can raise a branch that is dead, And if while you make your personal stake,
Your neighbour can make one, too, Your branch will be what you want it to be.
It isn't the branch — it's you !
— From Ka Elele O Hazvaii.
HUI TAU MUSIC
All M.I. A. and Choir Music may be obtained by writing immediately to Walter Smith, 16 Turner Street, Auckland, and ordering your requirements. The cost will be very small and a small charge will be made per copy and sent you when price is determined. Write now for your copies to Walter Smith for ALL Hui Tau Music, M.I.A. and Choir.
Pepuere, 1941
TE KARERE
567
rjA(ews from the Cfield
CORRECTION.— In the last issue deal- ing with this "column," news from over- seas was inserted in the Auckland re- port, which should have been captioned "Overseas." We apologise to Miss Jean Porteous, who was specially asked to contribute the information, for our ne- glect and oversight in the matter. The Overseas news in the last issue was reported for you by Jean Porteous. — Editors.
AUCKLAND DISTRICT Reported by Rona V. Attenborough
On December 23, the Auckland Chapel was a scene of much gaiety and frolic, when the children of the Sunday School were entertained by their usual Christmas Tree and Party. Fun was rampant and all voted the evening tops. President and Sister Cowley attended the Hui at Kai- kohe on December 21, 22 and 23, and re- turned to Auckland in time to leave again for Porangahau, where they spent Christmas. We believe that they had a very enjoyable holiday, but we are glad that they are back in Auckland.
There has been an almost general exo- dus of Saints from Auckland, but only on vacation, and on the other hand we are entertaining some visitors from down under — namely, good old Hswke'a Bay (refer Hepa Meha). The visitors include Hine and Ruth Meha, who are hou Headquarters, and Api Meha who is shar- ing his big brother's lot. We understand that- Sister Mabel Meha is still in Hawke's Bay — knowing Hepa we are in- clined to think that the one-way ticket was not merely coincidental we 11 watch him, Mabel.
Seen on Queen Street, escorted by a very handsome policeman — Sister Cecily Pentecost, who is convalescing. \V< are not quite sure whether (he escort was Cecily's d->'- ehoiee, <>r whether the law .nitially caught up with her, but this we do know, that her eonvalt exercises take her looking at and for bon es. Oh-ohl Cecily, bake care, for the
Auckland Love-DUg bites awful hard
when it bites.
The Auckland Saints have sincerels
mi ed t in pink-cheeked, beaming, little
i ».,\ i a bo u ed to frequent I be e
pari . bul Auckland's loss is Idaho's
>a \ is now h i" Sister Hollingsworth ma] be dl among I be Bainl In Zion. Qui p
>'ii i v t boui b. i n. ei si more mei 11 ed
the opportunitj than did tins little lady, and o v, ,■ .-.ii Join In a i bins. h< i all t be j"v and bappins t" i"- obtained
Two i la nd* > ouni man
are rallying t-. the tandard ir. . Brol h< i H« pa M< ba * Auckland on
...i. and w,- win wiafa
linn : d luck and < k>d p- ad I hi i e and
i . : i . i again Broth o n n B i 1
Into Papah ura Militar] I lam] Januarj
8, and t0 blm, tOO hand
of f.dluw |hip a nd .mi \ I w i In
Sister Billman, inmate of the Auck- land Hospital, is making very satisfac- tory progress, as also is Brother Hemi Paki, in the same hospital.
Saints, beware! There are a goodly number of sleepless nights ahead for both young and old — Brother Harold Stokes has taken a position manufactur- ing matresses. Well, we still have the park benches.
Here endeth the report.
HORO HORO BRANCH Reported by Edward K. Kiel.
The Horo Horo Orchestra played for a dance held by the Saints of Ohaki to raise funds towards the "Maori Battalion Mobile Canteen." The dance was an out- standing success. Elder Dave Moore of our branch is perhaps one of the proudest fathers in the Dominion. He has eight sons in khaki. Bill is serving with the Australian Forces in Egypt, Arthur in England, Gordon gone away with the Third Echelon, and Henry in the Fourth. The remaining four sons are in training. All these boys are members of the Church. A farewell karakia and party was given Brother Henry M. Davis, mem- ber of the Royal New Zealand Air Force, who is shortly to go overseas, at Waikuta Pa, Ngongotaha. It was a most im- pressive gathering and there were few- dry eyea seen at the end of the speeches. Elder Dave Moore presented Brother Davis witli a pocket edition of the Bible with air force blue cover, also a carved walking cane carved by Brother Tom McKinnon. Brother and Sister Amadio of Auckland were presenl and their talks were very much appreciated by
Relief Society is doing marvellous work among the poor and the sick of t!,
trict. Member or aon-member, the Re- lief Society sisters have been visiting the
hospital giving succour to thoSI Who are
iii need. Con i< I. 1:1 1 ■ le amount ha- heen s| ent in this direction and ha\. greatl] appreciated by thoBC Who
aided.
NGAPUHI Reported by Patrick WIHoa
and Kate NgaJrUI u.
Brother Hetaraka '
bar oi the Mi Ion M I \ and P of the D
where thej v. ill reside Indefln
Genealogical Commil vited to the home
I aai ■ h and d
and Dl
568
TE KARERE
Pepuere, 1941
have been interesting, a fact testated to by the visitors upon their return.
All the district books and records for Whangarei were removed from their pre- vious office to the new Genealogical office in Awarua by the district secretaries. This action is due to the generous atti- tude of the Genealogical Committee in allowing a portion of their building to be used for district purposes.
Many thanks to the Zion Elders who have recently returned to the States for their many expressions of "Christmas Cheer" sent to us. We make special mention of Elder Ted R. Kindred. May the New Year bring much to you too.
Morgan Clark, accountant in the Social Security Office, Auckland, spent his Christmas and vacation with his parents. Auckland Saints, this man is a Church member.
People representative of both Maori and Pakeha paid their last respects to Tautohe Paki of Takahiwai, who passed this life on the 16th December, 1940.
Mrs. Ellen Hulme and her daughter Patricia spent several days in the North with her folks, and on her return to Auckland visited Mr. and Mrs. Cyril Go- ing, but had to cut that short because Mr. Hulme was expected to go into camp for overseas training. Perhaps it would interest many to know that before leav- ing for camp Mr. Hulme was baptized in Auckland under the supervision of President Matthew Cowley.
WAIKATO DISTRICT Reported by Douglas Whatu.
Under the direction of President Cow- ley, members of the Waikato Priesthood gathered at the Puketapu Recreation Hall, Saturday, December 14th, 1940. Here we received wonderful counsel and advice and encouragement in our duties in the Church from our beloved Mission Presi- dent. All Branch Presidents present re- ported their activities and all pledged continued support and renewed vitality in Church work. Brothers William Man- nering, James Heperi, Tupana Te Hira and George Watene, Mission Secretary, were also called to speak. Out of it all President Cowley called Brother Henry Marshall to be President of the Waikato District, into which office he was sus- tained by the priesthood.
Elders Percy Hill and Douglas Whatu visited all Maori and Hunga Tapu patients of the Waikato Hospital at Hamilton, and we are happy to report everyone as cheerful as can be. Sister Maisie Turi- nui, with her guitar and proficient fingers strumming haunting melodies which sometimes break out into "swing" music, does much to help her "companions-of- the-realm" patients, as well as visitors enjoy themselves. Among the others there are Huia Paki, Ani Wini Kerei, Janie Ryan, Dave Honetana and Whei Te Hira, daughter of Brother and Sister Tupana Te Hira. Administrations were performed to Ani Wini Kerei and baby Whei
The first meeting of the Waikato Genealogical Committee was held at the home of Percy Hill at Whatawhata on the 29th of December. The response and interest in this important work is very heartening indeed.
Another Sunday School has been organ- ized in the district by the District Super- intendency. Gordonton now becomes a regular Sunday School stronghold. The new superintendency are Hare Puke superintendent, Ray Puke 1st assistant, Keita Puke 2nd assistant and Hare Puke, Jr., secretary, and their meeting place is at the Puke home.
Reihana Gilbert Paki of the Matako- whai Branch was ordained a Deacon by John Paki on December 16th, 1940, which day is also a birth anniversary for Ray. Congratulations and birthday greetings are in order. Heoi ra.
MAHIA DISTRICT Reported by Sister Elsie Loader.
On Sunday, December 1, Brother Perea Smith was ordained a Priest by Elder Eru Tengaio. Brothers Tamahau Haro- nga and William Christy visited the Saints at Mahia on December 15th and held a meeting at the home of Brother Hare Taumata. The Saints were happy to receive these brethren and all enjoyed the spirit of this meeting. Four babies were blessed during this karakia. Nuhaka Scouts held a silver coin party on Decem- ber 16, to which a large number of young folks attended. They quickly put away all edibles in sight, much to the joy of the hostesses, Elsie Loader and H. Smith. Quite a gloom was cast over the district at the death of Walter McAneney, hus- band of Sister Maggie Brown, who met his death in an accident at Morere No. 2 Oil Wells. The Saints of the district and friends extend their heartfelt sympathy to Sister Maggie and her two children. The many friends of Violet Moana, daughter of the Rev. Wi Moana, will be pleased to know that she has accepted a good position in Gisborne. Violet has been very active in the Nuhaka M.I. A. Brother Parata Pirihi of the Wellington Branch was a visitor to Nuhaka. We were privileged to have him speak at our services, and his address was most inspirational. We trust that he enjoyed his visit with us as we enjoyed having him. Very dear friends of the Saints and Zion Elders, Mr. and Mrs. Kahutia Whaanga entertained over three hundred guests at a dinner and dance in the Unity Hall to celebrate the coming-of-age of their daughter, Kura. An interesting feature of the occasion was the cutting of the cake with a sword, presented to Kura's great-grandfather, Major Tu Ihaka Whaanga by Queen Victoria for services in the British (Colonial) Army during the Hau Hau wars fought in H.B., Mohaka and Waikaremoana districts. Kura is a very active member of the M.I. A., and we extend our heartiest congratulations to her. Visiting the Saints of the Wairoa Branch, Brothers Sydney and William Christy with Tamahau Haronga were in- deed pleased at the manner in which these people are carrying on. Although only a small branch in numbers, still they are very active and alive in their Church duties. They are now engaged in renovating their present meeting-house with the object in view of having it ex- clusively as a place for holding Church meetings only. Each member of the
Pepuere, 1941
TE KARERE
569
branch contributes a cash donation each week towards preparing their table for the forthcoming Hui Tau. "Be Prepared" is also their motto.
Brother Ora Tengaio has returned from the hospital, happy and ora. Just as well he wasn't named "Mate." Sister Mojly Tengaio, who has been confined to the Wairoa Hospital with rheumatic fever, is very much the same. Sister Mary Lewis is also there suffering with the same complaint. Sister Milly Tengaio is also in the same hospital. We trust and pray that these good Sisters will soon be well enough to return to their homes in the near future.
Nuhaka Branch Sunday School had a very splendid Christmas programme, and the large congregation present thoroughly enjoyed it. We are happy to report that the attendance of members of this S.S. is 75%, while 80'/ keep the Word of Wis- dom. Attendance of officers 97 '/< and 99% of the officers are tithe payers. Kia kaha Nuhaka. Let 100'/ be your aim for 1941-2000. The Genealogical Com- mittee held a special service on Novem- ber 29th, Brother Hohepa Te Kauru offi- ciating. Those who attended were full of praise for the lessons and things that were learned in this meeting. Kia ora Nuhaka.
The Relief Society Sisters are well ahead with their Hui Tau Handwork and should have a very excellent display. These good Sisters visited the sick in the hospitals and distributed Christmas pres- ents. Their kindness was greatly appre- ciate,!. Whakaki and Tahaenui Primaries held Christmas parties and presented each child with a gift and plenty of good things to eat. Kia ora the Sisters who were responsible for these functions. We
feel sure the kiddies more than appreci- ate your kind efforts. Brother and Sister
Moraro Walker have pleasure in an- nouncing the engagement of their daugh- ter Me sine to Bro. Richard I Barney > Holli . son of Mrs. G. Anderson I and the late Thomas Hollis of Hastings.
HAURAKI DISTRICT
Reported by George Watene and
Roy Matthews.
Before thl a lit t le older
t he Eiaurakl Disl rid
b 'I reader and wish i hem linable (among them "Te Karei • Ed I rhe old year ha
not fulls forgotten isn't thai right v Let It 111 and ...-rows be bu1
nt the path of better
and much m< : \\ e
• in our irea let 'I fill i hat page dailj w Ith pi
1 1 aural I, your , , i. , before w it h i h. re \\ Ml be ral conference oi th< Pri< thood, Bram h Pre Idem ie and
to i in. d. and I want to warn j ou
that lln | \.ar will I tl
methodical and v tematic In It
|d I Ion. Ml \\
bei "i thi Church
veritable tatl
tal ■ thi place of the Zion E d<
to Zion about oui ah i and i he
Mission. This will be our big task at the conference — to organize ourselves to enable all to partake zealously in the work. Your conference, as some of you might already know, will be at Judea (Huria), Tauranga, January 26th.
On Boxing Day the Huria Relief Society again held another "Haangi." The occa- sion was in conjunction with the local Regatta Committee, and all proceeds were donated towards the Tauranga Patriotic Funds. These Sisters are to be com- mended for their splendid efforts, as this is the third occasion upon which they have held "haangis" for such purposes.
Koi Tarawa and family paid us a visit which was certainly appreciated. Among the many things that transpired was the story told of the efforts of Matthew to immerse the little fellow who would not go under. The M.I. A. concluded a suc- cessful year with a closing social. The winners of the best attendance was Zella Tawa for the Junior Girls and Nau Tawa for the Boys.
That's all the news folks. I almost forgot, the news from Mr. Stork for the last of last year will be found in the "Statistics" column. Thank you.
HAWKE'S BAY Reported by Tuheni Pohatu.
President Stuart Meha of the H.B. District Presidency, visited the Te Hauke Branch, and during his talk to the Saints the spirit of the Lord was very much in evidence. The Saints were asked to live the Gospel more faithfully, particularly to pay tithing and fast offerings.
The Christmas Sunday programme al- lowed us to meet visitors from Welling- ton— Misses Miriama Heketa and Meri Black; Whaiepouri Heke from Otaiu and
Barria from Tamaki. The meeting
was conducted hy Tumanaku Kaihania id' the Sunday School Superint endency
with Branch President Lester II. [haia
presiding. The meetings were well at- tended and very well received, which
speaks much for preparation and the the Gospel. \ combined Sunday School and G logical Dana was held in the L.D.S. Hall on the evenini of the 26th December, 1940, with luother Wi "Bob" EU of ceremoniea. The funct li •
.11 pat roniaed and ended up \ cry
- torily.
TARANAKI
• i. (i by /> ni St« nt and hui S tin .ni
Street I with
ihe Reverend Niche
numbi i
Ma\ Cornl h and I
hoi) wedlock. Theln
help In t he m ■ > n know n In
Robbie, who hail from Pain • ton North,
i .in act h •■ membei ii,.- newlj w . •
n in \ hi k land and w ill Rnallj Ih a
\\ | m h thi
570
TE KARERE
Pepuere, 1941
man. The Christmas Sunday School Pro- gramme held December 22 was a won- derful meeting and was thoroughly en- joyed by the large congregation that at- tended. Thus, Brothers and Sisters, Wanganui continues onward.
WELLINGTON Reported by Alice Scott.
Parata Pirihi has returned from his holidays. Where he spent them isn't very clear, but wherever it was we are sure that Brother Pirihi seems to have really enjoyed himself. Arrangements were made at Porirua for a Hui Pariha to be held there during the week-end of 25 January, 1941. Among those who
have just come into the limelight is my own brother— Sid Scott — who has been very much praised for his work-outs with Boxer Maurice Strickland. It seems that fisticuffs isn't the only thing Sid is good at — no sir! The manly art of self- defense, "wrestling" — also lays claim to having made quite a stir in its semi- professional ranks last season.
It may be of interest to some to know that Elders Bodell and Kirkham had their names featured in Honolulu news-
papers upon their outstanding perform- ances in basketball. Elder Grant has been assigned to labour in the Japanese Mission and was out on the Island of Kauai to continue his missionary work.
DUNEDIN Reported by Beatrice Dalziel.
Sunday, 22nd December, 1940, marked the conclusion for the year of the Sunday School meetings, where every child in at- tendance received a gift in the form of an appropriate book for their attendance and diligence. The gifts were generously provided by the Saints of the Branch. Sister Grace Westlake during her stay here has helped us tremendously with her services as pianist for our meetings and we shall miss her very much, as she has now left us to reside in Auckland. The Dunedin Saints welcome into their midst with joy and thanks to our Father in Heaven, Evelyn May Paton Perriton, wife of William John Perriton of Christchurch and daughter of Mr. and Mrs. Robert Hislop of Brighton, Otago, who was bap- tised into the Church of the Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints by Elder Henry Murray on Saturday, December 28, 1940.
TRAINING AT LEVIN Editor Leaves for Air Force Training School
With the removal of Te Karere to Auck- land after the Hawke's Bay earthquake in 1931, Elder Hohepa M. Meha was soon after called by President Rufus K. Hardy to labour in Auckland with Elder Gibb as Assistant Editor until the release of Elder Gibb, when he became its first Maori Editor until 1938. Since that time Hepa has had much to do with Te Karere, and its life from then on has always benefited from his associations with it. With the release of the Zion Elders in October of last year, "Hepa" was again called to the Editor's chair in company with myself by President Cowley. Te Karere and I miss you, Hepa, but ser-
Hohepa Meha
vice and duty are trade marks that will always follow you, for your life has been one of unselfish service to your Church and fellow-men.
The only tribute that is yours is the reward of the faith- ful and obedient. Kia kaha e hoa. He leaves behind his good wife, Mabel, who will continue to reside in Auckland until more pleasant information is obtained about Elder's Meha's future. K.H.
Pepuere, 1941 TE KARERE 571
Primary
Elva T. Cowley, President Rona V. Attenborough, Second Counsellor
Waima Davies, First Counsellor and Secretary
Lessons compiled by Rona V. Attenborough
MEMORY GEM:
"Do unto others as ye would that They should do unto you."
— Adapted. LESSONS:
FIRST WEEK
THE JOY OF FRIENDS AND PLAYMATES Objective:
To help the boys and girls to know that if they want to have friends and playmates they must be kind and friendly.
Suggestions for Teaching:
Blessed are they who have the gift of making friends, for it is one of God's best gifts. It involves many things, but above all, the power of going out of one's self, and appreciating whatever is noble and loving in another.
— Thomas Hughes. Song:
"I Thank Thee Dear Father," No. 17, Primary Songs for the Missions.
Prayer:
Before the prayer by one of the children, repeat: When I run about all day, When I kneel at night to pray, God sees. When I'm dreaming in the dark, When I lie awake to hark, God sees. Need I ever know a fear? Night and day my father's near — God sees.
— Mary M. Dodge.
Song:
Teach the second verse of "I Thank Thee Dear Father," No. 17, Primary Songs for the Missions.
Lesson Approach:
With whom do you play, Mary? With whom do you play. John? What name do wo give to the boya and girls whom we play with? There is another beautiful name; can you toll me what it is? Which name do you like best, playmates or friends?
Some boys and girls have more friends than others, l><> you know- why?
Jane ran into Ikt home one morning. She was crying. She said to her mother, "Nobody likes me! None of the children will play
with mo."
Hor mother knew I be reason in a moment.
('an you guesf the rea on? This is what Jane's mother found out when she talked with her. When the other girli and boys said, "Lot's play ball," -lane would poul and lay, "No! I don't like to play ball." When they asked to play with any of hor toys she would tuck them
in hor arms and say, "No, you might break them.*' She wasn't at all
kind and friendly.
Whose fault d<> you think it was that .lam' was unhappy that morning? What do you think hor mother told hoi to do? fhat is exactly what .lam- did. and when he came in from hor playins that
day she had a hie; smile on her l'aee and was as ha|>p\ as eould he.
572 TE KARERE Pepuere, 1941
Jane found out that if you want to have friends and playmates you must be kind and friendly.
When you are ready, here is a story about Fred who knew how to be a good friend.
Lesson Story:
THE BIRTHDAY SLED
It was Fred's fifth birthday, and a great day to him. When he went down to breakfast he found beside his chair a bright, new, red sled — -just the very thing that he wanted more than anything else. He and his mother were going down town that morning to stay nearly all day, but he wanted so much to try the new sled that when breakfast was over she helped him to wrap up warmly, and let him go out with it for a little while.
The hill back of the house was short, but Fred liked it all the better for that, because he didn't have so far to haul the sled to the top, each time that he slid down. What fun it was to go flying over the ground!
He had gone down twice and was just starting up again when he noticed another boy, standing by the big oak tree, watching him longingly.
"Hello, Jack," he called, "see my new sled?"
Jack nodded. "It's certainly fine," he said.
Fred walked on up the hill. "It's my sled and my birthday, and I'll only have time for two or three more rides," he kept saying over and over to himself, trying to forget about the other boy.
All at once he turned and ran back. "Don't you want a ride?" he asked. Jack was too delighted to say a word, but how he did smile as he ran over and began helping Fred pull the sled up the hill!
"It's my birthday, and I'm five years old!" explained Fred.
"It's mine, too, and so am I five!" said Jack.
"Honest!" cried Fred. "What did you get?" and then he was sorry that he had asked, for Jack grew very red as he said in a low voice:
"Nothing. My mother didn't have the money to buy anything with for me."
But he was happy again in a minute as the gay sled went skim- ming down the hill with him. He put the rope over his arm and kept his hands in his pockets as he trudged up the hill with it. "I had some mittens, but I lost them," he said. "Your sled goes fine."
"We'll take turns till I have to go," said Fred. They did so, but soon his mother called him and he had to hurry into the house.
"Mother," he asked suddenly as he stood warming his hands and telling her about its being Jack's birthday, "couldn't we buy Jack a sled and some mittens?"
"Perhaps," said his mother. I'll see."
"I'll give a quarter out of my bank," he urged.
"Then I'm quite sure we can get them," she said, and she did — a red sled and red mittens.
If Fred's eyes shone when he saw his sled, I'm sure I don't know what to say Jack's did when he saw his and the warm mittens. He was as happy a boy as could be, and Fred was as happy as he was.
— Louise M. Oglevee. Conversation After the Story:
Let us name some of the things we can do to make our friends happy. (The teacher may have to give helpful suggestions — taking turns for rides; sharing toys; sharing play places; sharing good things to eat; giving kind words; helping playmates who are hurt; giving kind words instead of cross ones.)
Pepuere, 1941 TE KARERE 573
SECOND WEEK
SELF-CONTROL Objective:
To help the children to learn self-control that they may have strength and peace.
Song:
''Jesus, Friend of Little Children."
Prayer:
In concert, led by the teacher.
Song:
"I Think When I Read."
For the Teacher:
"Strength of character consists of two things — power of will and power of self-restraint. It requires two things, therefore, for its existence — strong feelings and strong command over them."
This very important truth to be developed in this lesson will need earnest study and prayerful thought.
Teachers, we begin our preparation of the lesson to be taught when we decide that the child needs our help in any given direction. Does he need self-control? His success in life depends upon his being able to control his thoughts, emotions, temper, words, actions, appetites, etc. Self-control means making one's self do the right or necessary thing. It means patience, too, to wait for what we want, until the right time. It is necessary often to make ourselves do things that are disagreeable in order to gain control, and be sure that one is master over one's self. It is an everyday necessity — it is needed every hour. It is the most important habit to acquire and fix.
A MAN WHO COULD SAY "NO"
Robert and David were having a hard time to decide whether or not they should go to a picture show on Sunday.
"If others can go I don't see why we can't," said David.
"What others do or do not do is not our business," said their mother. Everyone has a right to decide for himself what he thinks is right. The important thing for each of us to do is to have Strength enough to do what we think is right regardless of the decisions of others."
"I know the story of a man who was willing to risk his life to do what he thought was right," she said.
Ami as neither of the boys spoke, she continued. "The name was Daniel. He lived hundreds of years ago. Hf was one of the great prophets of Israel. When his people were conquered by the
Babylonians, Daniel was taken captive and went to live at the court <>!' the king.
"Because Daniel was a brave ami wise and | I man. the king
of Babylon thought very highly of him. And so did King Darius, the
king of the A1.mIi . !!<• thoughl BO well of Daniel that he set him in a very high place and gave him much power. This made the prinees and the rest of the king's advisers very jftJoUS. Ami they planned how to gel rid of Daniel.
"So they persuaded Kin- Darin to pan a law which aid that, for a certain time, everyone mu I wor tup and pray to the kii that anyone refu [xifl to do o would be cast Into a dm of lions, Daniel know it w a wrong to worship the kins a a Do, i, ami hf refused to do it. So he kept right on praying three timet a day to tin- one.
t riio ( rod, JUI t :i In- had a! v. :i\ done.
574 TE KARERE Pepuere, 1941
"Then the princes told King Darius about Daniel. The king felt very sad, for he loved Daniel dearly. And he was sorry indeed that he had ever passed such a law. But it was too late. For even though he was such a powerful king, he couldn't change this wicked law. So Daniel was cast into a den of lions.
"But Daniel wasn't afraid. He knew that his God, whom he had obeyed so faithfully, would take care of him. I remember having seen a beautiful picture of Daniel in the lion's den. Through a tiny window high up in the wall shines a bright light into the den. And standing in the light is Daniel, his face is lifted, his back to the lions. They are slinking back into the shadows, quite harmless. The next morn- ing, when King Darius went to the lions' den, he found Daniel as brave and as strong as ever. Not so much as a hair of his head had been hurt. The king was so pleased at this that he said that he, too, would worship the God that Daniel worshipped — the God who did such won- derful things for his obedient children.
Daniel is one of the great characters of the Bible, and we are very grateful for his example of courage and obedience.
The boys were silent for a few moments. Then David said, "My mind is made up. I don't go."
"I'm staying home, too, added Robert, quickly.
— Adapted.
THIRD WEEK
HOW DO YOU ACT? Objective:
To inspire the child to radiate happiness by seeking to improve his behaviour in the home. Suggestions for Teaching:
The final and sure test of the value of what we teach is how it finds expression in the lives of the children. Are they stronger to meet temptation, etc.? Do the lessons you teach find expression in the home? This and other lessons in this course should improve the child's behaviour.
The suggestions for the presentation is suggestive only. If you can find a more effective method by all means use it.
Song:
"The Light Divine," No. 18, Primary Songs for the Missions.
Prayer:
Concert prayer, led by the teacher.
Lesson Approach:
"My mirror is a tattletale." Who can finish it? Let us all say it. Has your mirror helped to remind you how to look your best? (Let the children report what they have done during the month to improve their looks. Take a few minutes to look at hands, hair, position. Compliment the. children as a group. It isn't safe to single any one child out on any account.)
Lesson Story:
" BUT THEN "
Have you ever heard the story of "But Then"? Her real name was Ann, out they called her "But Then," and I will tell you why. Her face was like a sunbeam and she was always looking for every bit of good she could find in everybody and everything. When Freddie came home and told, in a ridiculous way, the story of the new boy's first day at school, and how odd he looked in his brother's out-grown coat and trousers, little Ann began with her most earnest air, "Yes,
Pepuere, 1941 TE KARERE 575
but then I didn't hear him say one naughty word all day. And he helped poor little Kelly out of the mud when he fell down."
"That's the way with you, little "But Then," laughed Freddie. He always loved Ann more than ever after such a speech as that; he couldn't help it.
When the day for the picnic which Ann and Fred had planned dawned grey and cold, Freddie puckered up his mouth, ready to com- plain, but Ann soon snatched away all the frowns. "I know it's going to rain, Freddie, but then you know we can cut those paper chains and hang them all over the attic and eat our picnic dinner up there. And it will be nearly as nice as the woods."
"All right, little 'But Then'," said Freddie, cheering up. A play with little "But Then" was almost as good as a picnic, any day. When she fell down and broke her arm and had to have it bandaged for many days, she said over and over again to her friends, as they sympathised with her, "Yes, but then, it could have been worse, you know."
All the other children made fun of poor old Mosey Crosby, but not so little "But Then." "Of course I know he's queer," she said, "but then he has no one to love or care for him, and it makes him cross to have the boys tease him so. I took him flowers, and you ought to have seen him smile and thank me over and over for them."
And so it was by always trying to see the good and cheerful side of life that Ann came to be called "But Then."
Conversation After the Story:
How would you like Ann to live at your house? Couldn't you act like her? What does it mean to have a glad heart? When is it easv to be glad? When is it difficult? What kind of folk shall we try to be? Happy boys and girls say, "Please" and "Thank you"; have you noticed that?
FOURTH WEEK
Objective:
To give the children a happy hour of self-expression.
Suggestions for Teaching:
This period should be a happy hour for the boys and girls. Some one has said that play must make a child a better player, a better listener, a better loser, and a better comrade. This can only l>e done through thorough planning and careful preparation. The discipline for the day depends largely on a good beginning.
Song:
"Happiness,1' No. 'ix. Primary Songs for the Missions.
Inasmuch as this is the "Thank Y<m" month you might BUbstitute
the word thankful for happy in the tir t line.
Prayer:
By one of the children.
Song:
Sing all the song's learned thus tar this year.
Programme for the Hour:
Plan your own programme. The following
helpful th.it the children knew and enjoy play
: plan to follow an act i\ e game with a quiet one in
order to rive the children i
gam< while the children are enjoying it. Arrange the programme <>(
game o I hut the children cat ime that fol
t hout coiiin [on. Some! ime- ,-i i ong ma
M;i' I ut her u ho li\ ed
in Germany. When he was :i /ounji man he wa a carol inger in the
576
TE KARERE
Ptpuere, 1941
city where he lived. He loved music. He thought it made people more gentle and kind. He wrote many lovely songs for his own children. One tells the story of Christ's birth. It is called "Cradle Hymn" or "Away in a Manger." Children all over the world love to sing it. Would you like to learn it, too?
If there is time a short story unifies the group before dismissal.
The closing exercises should be the same as other periods. Song:
"Cradle Hymn." Prayer:
By one of the children.
STATISTICS.
BIRTHS
WAIRAU — To Mr. and Mrs. Rakato Wairau, a daughter, August 29, 1940, at Kaiuku, Mahia.
GEAR — To Mr. and Mrs. Herbert Gear of Opoutama, a daughter, November 2, 1940, at Kaiwaitau, Mahia.
KIEL — To Mr. and Mrs. Reginald Kiel of Opoutama, • a son, July 23, 1938, at Kaiwaitau, Mahia
KIEL — To Mr. and Mrs. Kiel of Opou- tama, a daughter, July 15, 1939, at Kai- waitau, Mahia.
McKAY — To Mr. and Mrs. Pamea Mc- Kay of Opoutama, a son, September 15, 1940, at Kaiwaitau, Mahia.
GREENING — To Mr. and Mrs. C. Greening of Opoutama, a son, December 14, 1940, at Wairoa.
MIKAERE — To Mr. and Mrs. George Mikaere, a son, September 9, 1940, at Te Puke, Hauraki.
ORMSBY — To Mr. and Mrs. Lambert Ormsby, a son, August 2, 1940, at Te Puna, Hauraki.
ORMSBY — To Mr. and Mrs. Robert Ormsby. a daughter, August 3, 1940, at Tauranga, Hauraki.
MARSH — To Mr. and Mrs. Dick Marsh (not the D. Marsh of H.B.), a son, No- vember 12, 1940, at Te Puke, Hauraki.
CHASE — To Mr. and Mrs. Geo. Chase, a son, September 13, 1940, at Taupo, Hauraki.
NGAHERE — To Mr. and Mrs. Winiata Ngahere, a baby, July 26, 1940, at Roto- rua, Hauraki.
TE WHAT A — To Mr. and Mrs. Tatiu Te Whata, a daughter, November 8, 1940, Tautoro, Ngapuhi.
McDONALD — To Mr. and Mrs. Gallo- way McDonald, a son, August 8, 19 10. at Waipukurau, Hawke's Bay.
NERI — To Mr. and Mrs. Nerata (Sham- rock) Neri, a son, December 2, 1940, at Hastings, Hawke's Bay.
HART — To Mr. and Mrs. William Hart, a son, December 12, 1940, at Hastings, Hawke's Bay.
POHATU— To Mr. and Mrs. Tuheni Pohatu of Te Hauke, a daughter, Decem- ber 13th, 1940, at Hastings, Hawke's Bay.
BAPTISMS.
PUKE — Pakete Te Amoana Puke, 10, of Hamilton, by Percy Hill, December 8, 1940.
GOODALL — Eric Tomoana Goodall. convert by George Chase, October 6, 1940.
PAKU — Rawhiti Paku, convert by H. R. Greening, October 27, 1940.
ORMSBY — Paul Ormsby, 8, by George Chase, October 6, 1940.
GREENING —Kauri Tamatea Greening, 8, by H. R. Greening, October 27, 1940.
MARRIAGES
TIMU — HAU — Irimatao Timu to Mere- ana Maria Hau at Hastings, December 1, 1940, by Elder Teao Wirihana.
ROBINSON— CORNISH. — Joseph R. Robinson to Thelma M. Cornish at Wa- nganui, December 21, 1940.
GARDINER— WIHONGI — Robert Gar- diner to Rose WiHongi, December 22, 1940, at Elder's Home, Kaikohe, by Presi- dent Matthew Cowley.
COFFEE— WILLIAMS— William Coffee to Kathleen Williams, December 22, 1940, at Elder's Home, Kaikohe, by President Matthew Cowley.
DEATHS.
RAP AT A — Matekino Puru Rapata, 4 3. December 10, 1940, at Tauwhare.
ARONA — Miringa Taiana Arona, 19, December 20, 1910, at Ploeotainui.
BACK PICTURE COMPETITION
The person sending in to "Te Karere" the most correct names of those contained in the picture on back of this issue of "Te Karere" before the 10th March, 1941, will receive a year's subscription to "Te Karere," beginning at Hui Tau.
There is only one rule you must follow. The winner must attend
Hui Tau and will be formally presented there in person with "A Year's
Subscription to Te Karere." This rule will be iron-clad. No "buts"
or "ifs" about it. e-j*..
— Editor.
C£
Te Karere
Established in 1907
H
Wahanga 36
Maehe, 1941
Matthew Cowley Kelly Harris Eru T. Kupa Waimate Anaru
Tumuaki Mihana Etita
Kaiwhakamaori Kaiwhakamaori
"Ko tenet Pepa i whakatapua hei hapai ake i te vwi Maori ki roto i nga whakaaro-nui.'
"Te Karere" is published monthly by the New Zealand Mission of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, and is printed by TE KARERE PRESS, No. 2 Scotia Place, Upper Queen Street, Auckland, C.l, N.Z. Subscription Rates: 3/- per six months; 5/- per year; £1 for five years; £2/10/- for life. (United States Cur- rency: $1.00 per year; $4.00 for five years; S10.00 for life.)
Address Correspondence, Box 72, Auckland, C.l, New Zealand.
Contents
Editorial — Page
"Support Your 1 lui Tau," by Matthew Cowley 595
"Awhinatia To Hui Tan," Matin Kauri 594
Special Features —
"Etahi <> Nga Whakaaro i Man." rta Wiremu Takana 582
"lie Kitenga i te Maraniatan.ua,-' na Mirini T. Ilemnaia 584
"Ik- Rongo Korero," na Witehira 585
"Nga Matenga" 586
"Health of tin- Maori Race," na Wipere Amaru 591
"Sing We Now At Parting," by Isabel Amadio 593
"Photo -i the Month" 596
Arc You With Us?" Karere Special 597
"Back Picture ( ompetition" 607
Church Features —
••Main Kur.i Hapati"
I lui Tau
( lenealogy
Sundaj School
I 'niii.ii \
New s from ' Statistic
583
i.l 603
582 TE KARERE Mache, 1941
ETAHI O NGA WHAKAARO I MAU
He Kupu Whakamarama enei na Wiremu Takana (kua mate) o Tahoraiti, Niu Tireni, Mo Runga i nga Mana Maori kua Ngaro, me te Whakaatu atu te huarahi e hoki mai ano Taua Tohungatanga Tapu o te Atua ki te Iwi Maori.
HE KUPU WHAKAATU. — Ko ia tetahi o nga Maori i lac ki Amerika. Ko te patai tenei, E Iwa, me pchca c kaha ai te iwi Maori ki te whakarite i nga tikanga e ova ai o ratou tinana, e inutu ai hoki tc wehi me tc mate c pitta mai ana kia ratou i roto i nga mahi Atua Maori katoaf Ko wai lie kai awhina ma ratou ? Ko enei ana kupu c whai akc nci. Na} c te iwi, tiroliia — he tangata aroha ia, lie tangata pai ano hoki. He nui tona mohio ki nga akoranga Pakclia me nga akoranga o nga Maori. Na tona matua ia i whaka- ako ki nga matauranga i puta mai i roto i nga whare IVananga o nga Tupuna.
Ko ana korero e whai ake nei :
Me marama tatou, E te iwi Maori, he iwi whakapono tatou, no te whare o Iharaira hoki tatou. . . Titiro ki te kaha o o tatou tupuna ki te whakapono. Kaore rawa o ratou ruarua ki te pono o nga mea kaore nei e kitea e te kanohi tangata, nga mea ra whaka- te-Atua. Kite tonu ana ratou i nga mahi merekara me nga mahi o te Atua Ngaro. I pera hoki a Iharaira i mua. Kaore rawa e rite ana nga Tauiwi, ara nga Pakeha nei ; e whakaaro ana te nuinga a ratou, e horihori ana te whakapono o nga Maori ki nga mea Atua, ara, nga mea e kore nei e kitea e te kanohi tangata. Ko te wehi ki nga mea Atua katoa, ko ia tetahi taonga nui o te iwi Maori i runga i ta ratou whakaaro. he pono ana mea. Na, ka kite tatou i konei, he taonga whakaheke mai tenei mea te whakapono no o tatou tupuna. E te iwi Maori, ehara i te mea hanga noa ake na te whakaaro, i te mea homai ranei, e te tangata, engari he mea tuku iho no onamata. Ehara ia i te mea whakaako, engari, he homaitanga ki a ratou, ina hoki, he aha te mahi, he karakia, he mahi tohunga, makutu, tohu aitua, moemoea, he ruru ranei, ngarara ranei, taniwha ranei, he whetu rere ahi ranei, he wairua tangata mate ranei, patu paiarehe renei, kehua ranei, ahi ranei, tae tonu mai te wehi ki a ratou i runga i enei mea ; na ta ratou whakapono hoki ki ana mea.
Na, he aha te take i pera ai? Ina te take. I mohio ratou he tino mana i o ratou tupuna i heke mai nei i Hawaiki. me to ratou mohio hoki e pono ana o ratou tupuna i a ratou aua mana tapu, e whakakitea ano hoki e o ratou tupuna nga kaha i roto i aua mana, koia tenei e whai ake nei. Ko nga rakau, ko nga kohatu, ko nga ngaru o te moana, ko nga ika, me nga whatitiri, me nga uira, me nga tupuhi, me nga hau, me era atu mea e rongo ana i a ratou i runga i a ratou karakia, i puta mai nei i roto i o ratou whare Wananga ; na, he tino tohu tenei ki a tatou, kaore o tatou kaha i waho atu i te whakapono. Kei te mohio tonu tatou, he kino te haurangi, te moe
Maehe, 1941 TE KARERE 583
tahae, te puremu, te petipeti moni, purei kaari, patu tangata, me era atu mea e rite ana ki enei. Kaore hoki he tangata e ahei te ki pono, he mea pai enei e ora ai te tinana maori. Engari, e whakaae ana. te katoa he kino ana mea. Otira, e kore e taea e te tangata te pupuri mai i a ia, kei pa atu ki ana mea. Na te aha koia? Na te kore kai awhina niona e taea ai e ia te whakakahore atn i ana mea kino, kei pa atn ia. Kei te mohio tonn tatou, koia tonu nga mea e tere ai to tatou ngaro atu i runga i te mata o te whenua. Ko te mea hoki tenei, ara, te mate o te tinana e tino wehinga ana e tatou katoa.
Tenei, ki te mahi koia. tatou i enei mahi ka ora koia o tatou tinana maori nei ? Kaore rapea, engari, ka mate rawa. Otira, kaore pea o tatou whakapono e mate ana te tangata i enei e whai ake nei, i te mea ehara enei i te taonga tuku iho no o tatou tupuna, ara, te kai waipiro, te kai paipa, te kai tii, te mau he i nga kakahu : ko nga huarahi hoki ia e putake mai ai nga mate Pakeha ki te Maori. e mate ai tona tinana.
Me hoki ana tatou ki te kupu ra, ko wai he kai awhina i a tatou, me te kupu ano, kaore o tatou kaha i vvaho atu i te whakapono. Hoki atu ra te whakaaro ki nga wa onamata. Na te whakapono o o tatou tupuna. i taea ai e ratou te u ki nga tikanga e ora ai te tinana tangata. Ka rereke koia o ratou uri? Kaore rapea. Kei roto hoki i o ratou nana e rere ana o ratou toto me te mana i homai ki a ratou, he tukunga iho ki tenei whakatupuranga, ki tenei whakatupu- ranga. I te mea kua araai tatou e nga mahi tinihanga, e nga mahi poka noa, e te ngakau kuare, ka puta tenei whakaaro i a tatou. kua kore o tatou hokinga atu ano ki ana mana tapu o 0 tatou tupuna. Mehemea, e tika ana tenei. kua. kore rawa e ora o tatou tinana no te una, na te whakapono o ratou i ora ai ratou i mua. ara. o tatou lupuna. No reira, me hoki ano tatou ki reira ki ta.ua whakapono ano e ora ai tenei tinana. Me whakapono tatou ki te Atua, ki te Kai Hanga o te whenua, o te Rangi, me nga mea katoa e hua nei ki roto, me Tana Tama hoki. me Ihu Karaiti; ko ia nei te Kai Whaka- ora o te ao, ara. tenei tinana maori, me tenei tinana wairua ano hoki. Me whakapono hoki ki te Wairua Tapu, me te mana o te Tohunga tanga Tapu o Merekehereke raua ko Vrona. Kei reira nei e man
ana nga kaha, nga mana o roto i te \tuataiiga. na reira nei, i taea ai te te Atua ana malii nunui.
( Tana /<• roanga >
|
BOUND VOLUME OF "TE KARERE,' |
1 1940 |
|
|
A limited number of bound volumes of the I |
940 issue oi |
|
|
Te |
Karere will soon l>e available. Place youi or |
lers as soon |
|
IS |
possible with Te Karen, Bo* 72, Auckland. |
584
TE KARERE
Maehe, 1941
HE KITENGA I TE MARAMATANGA
He Ripoata Kauwhau i te Rongopai
Me te Iriiritanga i Muri
No Hirini T. Heremaia
I te 26 o nga ra o Hanucre ka tonoa mai
ahau kia tae atu ki te kainga o tetahi tangata
L. hoa-aroha, i Pua Onetai, Kaikohe. Aku hoa
haere ko Ripeka Heremaia raua ko Moe Wi-
r: ' Hongi. la matou ka tae atu ki te kainga ka
kitea kua rite pu taua whanau mo te iriiri, te
matua me ana tamariki tokorua. He pani te
whanau nei, ara pouaru te papa.
Ka iriiritia rumaki e ahau ratou katoa, a Walter Ashby, Edward
Ashby me Marshall Ashby. I tino whiwhi ratou ki te wairua kia
tomo ratou ki te Rongopai, a i kite matou i te pono o te whakaaro
ki te Hahi.
I muri i te iriiringa ka tu he karakia kauwhau ki te whare. I tino whakamaramatia te nuinga o nga tikanga o te Rongopai i konei, i mutu tenei ra ora o matou i runga i te pai, i te manaaki hoki i te whare-hou, ara i te whanau o Walter Ashby. Ki te Atua ano te kororia me te honore mo enei mahi whakapono i roto i enei ra.
Hirini T. Heremaia
MO NGA MAHI KURA HAP ATI
Mau e kawe tenei ripoata ki nga Timuaki me nga Hekeretari o nga Kura Hapati o te Pei Whairangi, kia mataara i roto i tenei tau hou, tonoa mai a koutou ripoata i nga toru marama katoa. Me timata te ripoata mo nga Kura Hapati ia Tihema o te tau kua pahure, me Hanuere me Pepuere o tenei tau, ara ko enei nga marama toru tuatahi o te Tau Hou, a muri atu i tera me waiho kia tae tatou ki te Hui Tau ka homaingia te tino kaupapa ripoata mo tatou. Kaati te waiho i nga ripoata kia takoto roa, mehemea kei nga Hekeretari te takaware, rapua he Hekeretari hei mahi i te mahi. Kei te kaha te hoa-riri ki te whakangoikore i te hunga e hiahia mahi ana ki te Atua. Kia kaha Pei Whairangi kia koutou.
Ma te Atua koutou, ara tatou katoa e tiaki e manaaki i roto i • enei wa o te pakanga.
Na te Timuakitanga Kura Hapati o te Takiwa o Pei Whairangi. Timuaki, Hare Nehua. Kaunihera tuatahi, Kato Kauwhata. Kaunihera tuarua, Raniera Paora. Hekeretari, Hinehou Nehua.
Maehe, 1941 TE KARERE 585
HE RONGO KORERO MO TE WHAWHAI
Na Paepac JJritchira
He maha nga rongo hou o te whawhai i tenei marama, tuatahi ko te maha o nga mea rere rangi kua pakaru inaianei. Tiamana Ingarihi 1948, Itari 416 me te Kariki 120.
Nga tima whawhai kua ngaro-pakaru, nga manuao, mea ruku moana me era atu — Tiamana 34, Ingarihi 68, Itari 42, kahore he korero mo Kariki mo tenei wahanga. I penei ai te nui o te parekura
0 nga tima o Ingarangi no te mea ko te nuinga o te moana katoa kei aia, na ka whai wahi te hoa riri ki te tukutuku mai i ana maina, ara, men whakapahu tima. Tetahi he maha o ona tima i haere ki te awhina i nga inotu ke, ko te Tiamana i pakarukaruhia ona tima ki ona rohe ake, ara te nuinga. Ka nui tona wehi ki te puta mai ki waho i ona rohe kei pera te nui o te parekura me ona mea rere rangi.
Ka nui te haere mate o Itari, e rua ona taha e patua ana. ko te Ingarihi kei te patu mai i tetahi taha, ko Kariki kei tetahi. Kua nuku atu i te 90,000 nga tangata o Itari kua man herehere i tenei taha, lie tohu tenei kahore tera ivvi e aro ana ki te whawhai, heoi ano kei te mea kei raro ratou i te ture here e haere ana. Xa ahakoa tenei rongo mate o tetahi o nga hoa riri o te Ingarihi, kahore ano i marie noa te wahi tino kino rawa.
I te marama o Tihema nei ka whai korero a Timuaki Reuwhera (Roosevelt) ki te ao katoa mo tona whakaaro ki te whawhai nei. A, i whakaatu ano ia ka whakapaua tona kaha katoa me te iwi kei raro i aia ki te malii mea ma Ingarangi me ana hoa. I penei tana kupu whakarite, "ina torn te whare o tou hoa i te ahi ka tikina mai lie mea tine kia horo te lioatn, a kia pirau te alii hei muri whakahoki ai taua mea, whakariterite ai hoki i te utu." E pera ana tana huarahi inaianei
1 te mea kua toro a Ingarangi kia lioatn noa tana mea tine ahi a. kahore lie nini kia pirau ra ano te ahi hei reira whakariterite ai.
I roto lioki i tana w liaikorero ka whakaatnria e ia kia ron ao katoa me Tiamana me ona hoa katoa e kore a Tiamana e wikitoria i tenei whawhai, engari e mea ana ia ka hemanawa te ao i mua o te mutunga. E kore ia e whakaae kia man te rongo kia hinga ra ano a Tiamana. E kii ana ia ko t€ putake a Tiamana i tOtoro mai ai ia Mapani kia inn atu kia rana ko Itari hei huarahi e whawhai ai a Merika a e mutu ai hoki te tuku i nga mea whawhai ki Ingarangi.
Ina takoto penei e mohio ana a Tiamana ka alina iti tana mate i te hoa. Ko nga wheketere ( factor) i nunui katoa «> Amerika kua hurihia hei hanga mea whawhai. E kii ana te Timuaki <> ^merika kei reira te tangata, te taonga, te matauranga me te huarahi hei tautoko i te whawhai. Kaati mo kona. Mr whai korero iti mo te motu
Ko nga moni i pan ia Niu rireni mo te whawhai i te tan kua I aha ii< i e £37,000,000. I mea ana te Pirimia a Te Pereiha nuku atu nga moni e pan a tenei tau. b mea ana ia e hara tenei wa i t« w.i tautohe paremata engari he wa whakaaroaro kia horo te mutu o te w hawliai. i l .M ia te i oangra I
586 TE KARERE Maehe, 1941
NGA MATENGA
Te Aamihi Marc Gregory. la Hanuere te 11, 1941, i wehe atu a Te Aumihi Mare Gregory i tenei ao. Ko te Hohipera o Thames, Hauraki te wahi i ngaro atu ai, he mate whanau. Kei te whai ake nei etahi o nga ahuatanga o tona matenga. Na te moto-ka i mau ki te Hohipera i te 9 o nga haora o te ata, i te 12 ka whanau te peepi kotiro, i whanau mate mai, e toru haora i muri maika haere te wairua o te whaea.
Te Nehunga
Ko Kiri Kiri te marae i taungia e nga iwi, hui mai ana hapu maha ki te tangi ki aia me tona peepi. No Ngati-maru me Ngati- te-aute. Ona tamariki i pae mai ko nga mea i konei. Ko te 16 whanautanga tenei mona i roto i te 46 tau. I iriiritia ia e Elder Jesse McBride i te tau 1908, kaati i aia i moe tana tane ka riro hei Katorika, a na te Katorika ano i whakahaere te karakia mutunga mo raua i te 13 o nga ra o Hanuere.
Nga Tamariki
I tae mai enei o ona tamariki ki te tangi, a Ivan Gregory me tona hoa wahine, a Raharuhi Pururu o Horohoro, a Frances i Aka- rana e mahi ana, me Pauline Gregory Clark hoa wahine o Tom Clarke kua hoki nei raua ki Haaki Pei. Ko te whakatekau o ona tamariki i riro mai i ahau, a ko tenei anake kei roto i te Hahi ki taku mohio. Na Rose Watene
Meri Heperi Na te Piwa Rumatiki i mate ai a Meri Heperi o te Peka o Wai- hou i te 3 o nga ra o Hanuere nei. E 8 noaiho ona tau.
Te Karakia Whakamutunga
He kotiro aroha tenei no matou katoa, e ona hoa tamariki, me ona matua. Na tona tupuna matua, na Hohepa Heperi, i whakatapu te rua takoto o tona tinana maori i te nehunga, na Hare Nehua i whakahaere nga himene. Nga tangata katoa i tae mai i taua ra, i te 5 o nga ra o Hanuere nuku atu i te 200.
Haere e hine. Haere i nga haerenga o nga tupuna, matua, me era atu tini hunga kua hoki atu nei ki te kainga tuturu mo o tatou tinana kikokiko. Haere-haere. Na Hare Nehua.
Miring a Arona Matetaka. Te tamahine o muri a Tatana Arona, me te wahine aroha a Hohepa Matetaka, a Miringa Arona Matemate i mate ki te kainga o ona matua i te 19 o Tihema 1940. Na John Apiti
Hurae Hare Reihana. I mate ta matou peepi, a Hurae Hare Reihana i te 31 o nga ra o Hanuere. Haere e te uri. Haere ki te kainga tuturu o nga tupuna me te iwi. Haere hoki ki te Ringa Kaha o te Kai-hanga.
Na Mete Kingi Reihana.
Maehe, 1941 TE KARERE 587
MAHI KURA HAPATI
RATAPU TUATAHI: Whakaaturanga: AKORANGA 45. Upoko 2
Nga tikanga o te whakapono ki te Atnatanga. Te Tokotoru. Nga tangatanga e toru ko ratou nei te tino timuakitanga o te ao katoa kua whakakite mai ia ratou ano ki te tangata: (1) Ko te Atua Matua; (2) Tana Tama a Ihu Karaiti; (3) Te Wairua Tapu. Ko enei e toru he hunga wehe tonu tetahi i tetahi, motuhake tonu te tinana o tetahi i to tetahi, e whakaaturia ana e nga tuhituhinga kua whakamana nei e te tangata o nga mahi i waenganui i te Atua me te tangata. I te wa o te iriiringa o te Kai-whakaora, i kite a Hoani i t2 tohu o te Wairua Tapu, i mua i aia i roto i te tapenakara kikokiko a Te Karaiti nana nei na Hoani i whakarite te tikanga tapu o te iriiringa; i rangona hoki e ia te reo o te Matua. Nga tangatatanga e toru o te Atuatanga i reira, i whakaatu ia ratou rereke ake tetahi i tetahi, motuhake tonu hoki tetahi i tetahi. I muri mai i whakaari mai te Kai-whakaora ki Ana akonga ko te kai whakamarie ko ia nei ko te Wairua Tapu tera e tukua atu kia ratou e Tona Matua. Na ka kitea iho ano i konei nga mema e toru o te Atuatanga e whakaaturia wehewehetia ana. Ia Tipene i te wa o tona whakamatenga i manaakitia ki te mana o te kite atu i nga mea o te rangi a i kite ia i a Ihu Karaiti e tu ana i te taha matau o te Matua. A Hohepa Mete i aia e karanga ana ki te Ariki i roto i te inoi kaha, i kite ia i te Matua me te Tama e tu ana i waenganui o te maramatanga nuku nuku ake i to te ra, i mea mai tetahi o raua mo tetahi: "Ko Taku Tama tenei e arohatia nei e Ahua, whakarongo ki Aia." Tenei me tenei o nga mema o te Tokotorutanga e kiia ana ko te Atua ratou katoa e huia ana ko te Tokotorutanga.
Nga Patai:
1. Ko v/ai ma te Atuatanga?
2. E hia ratou?
3. Mehemea he wehewehe o ratou tinana, whakaaturia te rarangi karaipiture e tautoko ana?
4. Mehemea ranei he tinana kotahi tonu ratou e toru whakaaturia ano te tautoko?
5. Ko wai te mea i whakaaria mai e te Atua ki Ana akonga tera e tukua mai e te Matua kia ratou?
6. Pehea te ahua o te Matua mo te Tama i to kitenga a Hohepa Mete?
RATAPU TUARUA
AKORANGA 46. Te Kotahitanga <> te Atuatanga.
Whakaaturanga:
Nga tikanga o te whakapono. Te Atuatanga ho ahua kotahitanga i roto i nga paanga mana me nga whokamaunga atu o Ona mema. la Ihu i runga i be whenua a i Tona whakaaturanga i Aia ano ki Ona pononga Niwhai, e honotonu te whakaatu kia ratou i te kotahiti
waenganui ia raua ko t'- Maiua a i waenganui hoki ia ratOU ko te
Wairua Tapu. El kore hoki e ahei kia Kiia t»- tikanga o tenei n
lie kotahi tonu to tinana 0 to Matua mo to Tama mo to Wairua Tapu mo o ratou wahi hoki. E Imra hoki i to mea no to tinana kotahi ana
Ingoa i.i i roto i tetahi atu ahuatanga. Hei whakaatu i te he o enei whakaaro ko te whakaaturanga e whai ake nei. I muri tata iho i te tukinonga la te Karaiti, ka Inoi la mo Ana akonga, mo nga tekau ma rua, me era atu mema tahuri hou mai Ida purltia ratou i roto i te kotahitanga, kia kotahi ai ratou katoa pera me te .Matua raua ko te Tama e kotahi nei. E kore e ahei tatou ki te whakaaro penei e Inoi
aria a to karaiti kia makoio atu i aim .
588 TE KARERE Maehe, 1941
whakatoputia ratou ki roto ki te tinana kotahi, ahakoa hoki ko tenei whakarereketanga e poka ke noaatu ana i te ahuatanga kua whakata- kotoria. Ko te Karaiti e hiahia ana kia kotahi katoa o ratou ngakau o ratou wairua me a ratou mahi, he penei hoki te kotahitanga i wae- nganui ia raua ko te Matua i waenganui hoki ia ratou ko te Wairua Tapu.
Nga Patai:
1. Pehea te whakaaturanga nui a te Karaiti ki nga Niwhai?
2. I roto i aua rarangi ki nga Niwhai, he aha te mea e kore e ahei kia whakaarotia e tatou?
3. He aha te tikanga o te inoi a te Karaiti ki te Matua — "kia puritia ana akonga i roto i te kotahitanga pera me la me te Matua e kotahi nei"?
RATAPU TUATORU
AKORANGA 47. He roanga o te Kotahitanga o te Atuatanga.
Tenei kotahitanga he tauira no te pai mutunga, te whakaaro kau o tetahi o te Tokotoru he whakaaro pera ano no tetahi, a kite nei tenei me tenei o ratou ma te kanohi tino kite e kite ana e mohio tahi ana. Ahakoa he aha te tikanga e whakatakotoria ana e meatia e tenei me tenei o ratou i runga i te ahua kotahi he mea arataki ano na aua tikanga o te pono tuturu me te mahi tika. Te kotahi tonu o te Atua- tanga e tino maha nei nga whakaaturanga i roto i nga karaipiture e hara i te hononga ngaro no nga mea, e hara hoki i te huinga o nga tinana kia kotahi, he pokanga ketanga hoki tena i te tikanga. Te Matua, te Tama me te Wairua Tapu e wehe motuhake tonu ana te tinana me te ahuatanga o tenei me tenei o ratou penei ano me era tangata e toru i roto nei i te kikokiko. Ahakoa ra ko te kotahi o a ratou mahi me nga whakahaerenga kua noho he whakahaunga na ratou katoa a ko o ratou hiahia he hiahia no te Atua, tae noa hoki ki te ahua a tinana o te Matua e rite ana ano ki to te Tama, no reira e mea ana a te Karaiti i te honohono tonu o te uiui a Piripi kia whaka- aturia mai ki aia te Matua: "Ka mea a Ihu ki aia, roa noatu Taku noho kia koutou a kahore ano koe i matau noa ki Ahau e Piripi? ko ia kua kite i Ahau kua kite hoki i te Matua, a he aha koe ka mea ai, whaka- kitea mai te Matua kia matou? E kore ianei koe e whakapono ko Ahau kei roto i te Matua, ko te Matua kei roto i Ahau? Ko nga kupu e korero nei Ahau kia koutou e hara i te korero Naku ake, engari na te Matua e noho ana i roto i Ahau, ko Ia te mea ana i nga mahi. Whakapono mai ki Ahau kei roto Ahau i te Matua, ko te Matua hoki kei roto i Ahau."
Nga Patai:
1. He pehea te ahua o te Tokotoru i roto i o ratou whakaaro?
2. Kotahi tonu ranei to ratou tinana, e toru ranei nga tinana wehewehe?
3. I pehea te ritenga mai o te Atua ki te tangata?
4. Ko wai te mea i pono tonu te uiui kia te Karaiti mo te Matua?
5. Pehea te whakahoki a te Karaiti ki te patai a Piripi, a kei hea te rarangi karaipiture tautoko?
RATAPU TUAWHA
AKORANGA 48. Upoko 2
Te whakatangatatanga o ia mema o te Atuatanga. I nga whaka- aturanga kua oti nei te whakatakoto, kua marama ko te Atua he tangata kei Aia nei te tinana me ona wahi katoa me ona whakaaro. A Ihu Karaiti, ko Ia nei i te Matua i roto i te wairua i mua i te haere- nga mai kia noho i roto i te kikokiko, a nana nei i hanga nga ao, i noho Ia i waenganui i nga tangata penei ano me te tangata me te
Maehe, 1941 TE KARERE 589
kaha katoa a tinana o te tangata. I muri mai i tona kakenga atu i whakaputa mai la i roto i Tana ahua ano, i roto hoki i Tana ahua ka kake atu la ki te rangi, i Tana ahua ano i whakakite la i Aia ki nga Niwhai me nga poropiti o enei ra. E tino whakaae ana tatou ko te Karaiti i roto i te ahua motuhake o Tona Matua, i hanga hoki te tangata ki taua ahua ano. No reira e mohio ana matou tera ko te Matua raua tahi ko te Tama i roto i o raua ahua me te tupu he tino tangata pakari,he tinana tuturu to tenei me tenei o raua, he he-kore, e taiawhiotia ana hoki e te kororia e kore nei e matauria e te tangata tona kanapa, ahakoa ano ko Tana tinana he tinana whai kikokiko wheua hoki.
Nga Patai:
1. He aha te maramatanga kia tatou i roto i nga whakaaturanga mo te Atuatanga kua oti ake nei?
2. He pehea te ahua o Ihu Karaiti i mua atu i Tona whiwhi ki te tinana kikokiko?
3. Pehea Tona ahua i Tona kakenga atu ki te rangi?
4. I hanga te tangata kia rite ki te ahua o wai?
5. He pehea te kororia e taiawhio ana i te Matua raua ko te Tama.
RATAPU TUARIMA
Me hoki whakamuri ki nga akoranga o nga wiki e wha o mua atu. (Review.)
MAHIA DISTRICT MISSIONARIES
FOR THE MONTHS OF MARCH, APRIL, MAY
Second Week: MARCH
Munro Smith, Perea Smith Wairoa
L. T. Nelson, Ru Hoetawa Nuhaka
Third Week:
Tuehu Smith, Hohepa Te Kauru, Oranoa Tengaio,
Tearawhiti Smith Opoutama
Te Amo Tengaio, Pakimana Taurima, Sarah Whaanga. . . . Nuhaka
Fourth Week:
Sam Haronga, Taka Toroaiwhiti, Ellen Mataira,
Te Wai Haronga Opoutama
Runga Tengaio, Oranoa Tengaio, Rangi Tengaio,
Heni Tengaio Wairoa
Fifth Week:
All Whakapapa Committees to meet in their own branches.
APRIL
No \l<- lionaries other than the District Presidency to visit all branches.
First Week: Al A Y
Distrid Presidency Opoutama
Peter Campbell, Kui Campbell, Emma Brown Nuhaka
Second Wcclt:
District Presidency Waif. -a
Moraro Walker, Parae Walker, Ellen Mataira Opoutama
Te Amo Tengaio, Tihema Taurima Nuhaka
Third Wn-k:
Runga Tengaio, Tuati Whaanga, Tureiti Solomon,
aio N
Munro Smith, Taka Toroaiwhiti Opoutama
James Brov n, Emma Brown Nuhaka
Fourth W««kl
Tuehu Smith, Hohepa Te Kauru, Oranoa Tengaio w
llirini Campbell, Rai Opoutama
590
TE KARERE
Maehe, 1941
^unday ^chool
Hohepa M. Meha, Superintendent Eru T. Kupa, Assistant Superintendent
James R. Elkington, Assistant Supt. Kelly Harris, Secretary
Lessons compiled by Hohepa M Meha and Eru T. Kupa.
PRELUDE
A Uegreito.
A.rr. from 8CHUBEKT by T. Y. C.
p 8ft.
mm=m
# * . 5:: ■ *
Ei=^fe
SACRAMENT GEM
Prepare our minds that we may see The beauties of Thy grace;
Salvation purchased on that tree For all who seek Thy face.
POSTLUDE
Stately ivith expression. 8 ft
Tracy Y. Cannon.
wmmmmmmm
CONCERT RECITATION
1 Corinthians 2: 11.
"For what man knoweth the things of a man, save the spirit of man which is in him? Even so the things of God knoweth no man, but the Spirit of God."
KORERO A NGAKAU
1 Koroniti 2: 11.
"Ko wai hoki te tangata e matau ana ki nga mea a te tangata? Ko te wairua anake o te tangata i roto i aia ; waihoki ko nga mea a te Atua, e kore e matauria e tetahi, engari e te Wairua o te Atua."
HYMNS
"Let Us Treat Each Other Kindly" Page 146
"Kia Koa, E Iharaira" Wharangi 13
Maehe, 1941 TE KARERE 591
THE HEALTH OF THE MAORI RACE
Wi Pere Amaru, A.B., M.A.
(Fourth Instalment) THE MAORIS AXD THEIR TEETH
Where our race of a century ago was eulogized by the medical world for its superior physique and dental perfection, to-day, after only five generations of existence under this so-called civilization, the physical and dental health of our people has deteriorated deplor- ably until now every Maori home has its share of toothaches and dis- ease so uncommon in days of old. However, it is still within the power of the race to readjust our eating and living habits and finally re-attain perfection in physical and dental health.
The initial step towards this goal has already been instituted by the Government with dental clinics and a daily supply of milk to every schoolchild within the Dominion. The teeth of the children both Maoris and pakehas are now being well treated by these dental clinics, but all this work will amount to naught if we at home do not give our children the proper care and food required as a foundation for good healthy teeth.
Our teeth and mouth form one of the most important parts of our body. They can be sources of disease, or health, as we choose. This is so because it is by our teeth that the various foods that go to the nourishing of our 1 todies are first prepared for digestion by the stomach, and other digestive organs. Without our teeth the kinds of food we could lake would be limited to liquids and sop.
Our teeth are composed roughly of three substances. That por- tion which you sec in the mouth (the "crown") is made of enamel. The root or the body of the tooth is made up of a substance called "dentine." Inside these IS the "pulp" or the part which has the tiny blood vessels and tiny nerves which cause toothaches,
Nature gives us two sets of teeth which have to last through life. The fust set arc the "milk" or "baby" teeth numbering 20, and the second are permanenl teeth numbering 32.
Long before the baby comes into tin- world, the busines building its teeth is begun. About a month before the baby is
born, the enamelling of the crowns of these "milk" teeth is almost
complete, and there the teeth themselves are kept in little sacs until
the time is ready for their "cutting."
Xow the material for building these little teeth must come from
somewhere, for nature cannot build unless she has materials. Since the work is done before birth, it is easily seen that the materials must
come direcl from the mother, and so we gel our firsl facts about teeth. Good teeth depends firsl upon the health of the expectant
mother and not upon the child's first visit to the denial chuu The
expectant mother must therefore eat foods recommended b) the I 'lunket m dist i id nu
592 TE KARERE Maehe, 1941
The milk teeth upon which the child has to depend for at least six years cannot he looked after too carefully, because they have a great effect for good or ill upon the second and permanent teeth. The process of building the second teeth is the same as the first, with this great difference, that the materials for the building- come not from the mother (as is the case of the milk teeth), but from the child itself.
If the permanent teeth are to come out in proper order and arrangement, exercise of the jaws must take place right from birth. That is one of the reasons a baby should be breast-fed, because this makes the baby work for its food. The action of sucking brings a rush of blood to the jaws, which carries with it all the materials needed for building strong jaws and a roomy mouth. When the baby is weaned, its general food should contain a proportion of hard foods, so that it is compelled to chew and thus exercise its jaws. It is therefore necessary to give a baby at the age of nine months some hard, dry food, such as tough crust, hard, plain biscuits, and so forth.
It is very important that the mouth should be exercised because lack of it is one of the main causes of badly arranged second teeth, and badly arranged teeth are more liable to decay because nature is not permitted to cleanse the teeth properly. Nature alone cleansed the teeth of the old Maoris, but to-day because of our eating habits (and the type of food we eat) nature alone is not able to rid the mouth of the film formed on our teeth after each meal. Consequently we must rely upon the toothbrush and dentrice twice daily and visit our dentist at least twice a year.
Now, if we eat only such food as apples or raw cabbages, we will notice that no film is left on our teeth. But we cannot live on apples and cabbages alone. On the other hand let us eat bread and pudding and we shall readily discern a smudgy covering on our teeth after a couple of meals. This then is the type of food for which the toothbrush is needed to rid the teeth of this film which is a very suitable breeding place for those bacteria which will soon break through the enamel of the teeth to start their work of not only causing toothaches, but of causing germs and decayed matter to enter the digestive system.
Tartar is deposited on the teeth largely through the action of the saliva on some of the foods that we eat. This deposit cannot be removed by the toothbrush, although it is easily removed by the dentist. So don't neglect to see your dentist regularly.
Those of you with defective teeth in your mouths, go at once to your dentists. You are Latter-day Saints. You defile your bodies just as much as if you would if you were heavy smokers. Bad teeth cause bad health, and a body with bad health cannot expect to retain the spirit of God which will definitely not dwell within an unclean tabernacle.
Maehe, 1941 TE KARERE 593
" SING WE NOW AT PARTING "
By Isabel Amadio
I come to record the passing of Marge Whiwhikiterangi Waugh,
wife of Phillip Waugh of Tarukenga and daughter of Brother and Sister John Ormsby of Ngongotaha Valley, Rotorua.
If you will come with me we will watch the beauty and peace of her journey.
On Sunday, 29th December, 1940, we heard that she was very ill and visited her. In the cool room where she rested, supported In- ner husband and surrounded by her other dear ones, the quiet peace illuminating the fragile face was inspiring. She was quite con- scious, and we talked together of the Gospel, of the many testimonies of the help of the Lord which we both had. She listened eagerly, waiting ever to hear more of the Lord whom she loved, ever whis- pering "Did you hear that, daddy?" to her earthly father. She told me how happy she felt at this time, and particularly of leaving this earth to go when her Heavenly Father called her. I could see that it was genuine and took joy in the joy that was hers.
The Lord did call her, at 5 p.m. on New Year's Day. Before leaving she asked her family to gather with her in "family prayers," when she also said her own.
The following evening a large gathering of relatives and friends. Maori and Pakeha, were present to say farewell to the Marge who lay in her earthly casket outside under an electrically-lit awning.
How can I tell you of the impressiveness of that meeting under the stars? The hymns of the Saints (lowing on the night air, the majesty of the Gospel spoken in the presence of the dead, and the
Sweet voices of Sisters Thompson and Puku singing "Nearer My
God to Thee," and the courage of the bereaved mother bearing her testimony, I For one felt very humble.
At noon on Friday, Saints and friends met again to hold the
last service, which if possible was even more beautiful. The old favourite, "Come, Come Ye Saints," rung out in the wanning rays of a beautiful day, held new promise i<> all. The inspiring words of "Oh M \ Father" seemed to fill all the world, though the Saints were few. The speakers were blessed with inspiration that I felt and knew thai "death had no sting" and "grave no victory." \t the close of the meeting, when all the expressions of love which poured from our hearts for the departed Sistei had been voiced, we sang the song which she had asked to be sung, "Sing We Nov \i Parting. " Ai the graveside we ang ll again, dun we left oui M to sleep until that time when the Lord >hall come with the "Thousands" of I (is Saints.
594 TE KARERE Maehe, 1941
Edit
AWHINATIA TO HUI TAU
Kei te haere nga mahi katoa o te marae kia tino rite ko tenei te tino-o-nga Hui Tau — te Hui Tau nui ake — te Hui Tau mahi mo te katoa — te Hui Tau whaka-te-Atua o nga Hui Tau kua karangatia e te Hahi o Ihu Karaiti o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri Nei i Niu Tireni. A Nuhaka kua takatu noatu kia timata nga huihuinga i te Paraire, 11 o nga ra o Aperira.
E tuatahi ana tenei i roto i te hitori o tenei Mihana kia kore he "Kaumatua" o Hiona e takatu ana i tenei Hui Tau. E tika ana kia whakatapua, ae hoki, e whakatapua ana tenei Hui Tau ki te "mahara" o nga rau Kaumatua kua haere mai ki enei motu i roto i te 60 tau kua pahure ki te ako kia tatou te Rongopai i whakahokia mai nei. Tera te tini rau o enei tangata e whakaaro mai ana kia tatou i tenei wa, a e inoi ana hoki kia tautokongia tenei Mihana.
Whakahonoretia enei pononga a te Atua, ia tatou kia tae ki te Hui Tau.
Kei a koutou Takiwa nga tikiti whitu-hereni me te hiki- pene. Me mau mahara koutou katoa ko enei tikiti ma koutou e tango, a ko te moni he awhina-hoatu-noake na koutou mo te Hui Tau. Kahore tenei moni nei utu i to uru ki te Hui Tau, engari he awhinatanga i te haere, noho ranei. Ko te powhiri haere mai ki te Hui Tau, mo te katoa — awhina — awhina- kore ranei. Haere mai — Haere mai.
Ki te kore koe haere ki te Hui Tau, kahore tena he take kia kore koe e hoatu i to moni awhina. Ko te tikanga ke, ko nga mea kahore e haere kia awhina utu i runga i te ngawari, ko nga mea e haere ana kei te utu i a ratou haere ki te Hui me te hoatu ano i te awhina. He tono tenei kia koutou e nga Hunga Tapu me nga Hoa Aroha tautokongia tenei whakaaro. Me hoko katoa i te tikiti "whituhereni me te hiki-pene" kei nga tangata kua whakaritea i roto o ia Takiwa o ia Takiwa.
Tatou katoa e mohio ana ko nga moni o nga kanikani a te Miutara — "Gold and Green" — i riro mo nga "ropu-awhina- taha-whawhai" (Patriotic Funds). Nuku atu i te whitu-rau pauna te nui o te moni i riro i tenei ropu. Ka kite tatou i konei ka noho pohara te Miutara. Me pehea ta tatou whakaatu ki te Miutara i te whakamihi mo tenei mahi whakamiharo i mahia e ia i roto i te tau kua huri.
Koutou katoa e haere ana ki te Hui Tau me koutou katoa e noho ana i te kainga, ina hoatu koutou i te awhina ki nga moni mo te Hui Tau, tera ka ea nga raruraru katoa o tenei Hui me te toe ano tetahi wahi hei hoatu ki te Miutara.
A koutou moni awhina i te Hui Tau, ara, "whitu-hereni me te hiki-pene" me tuku mai ki te Tari o te Mihana, Box 72, Auckland, i naianei tonu mehemea kahore koe e haere ana ki tenei Hui Tau whakahonore i a tatou "Kaumatua."
" MANAAKITIA NGA ROPU E MANAAKI ANA IA KOE."
MATIU KAURI, Timuaki Mihana.
Maehe, 1941 TE KARERE 595
ial
y
SUPPORT YOUR HUI TAU
Preparations for the largest, most attractive and most inspirational Hui Tau ever convened by the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints in New Zealand, are now well under way. Nuhaka is alive with activity, and reports are coming in that all will be in readiness for the first meetings, which will commence on Friday, 11th April.
This will be the first Hui Tau in the history of the Mission at which there have been no Zion Elders present. This con- ference will be dedicated to the memory of the hundreds of Elders who have come to New Zealand during the past 60 years or more to teach the restored Gospel. There will be hundreds of these same men thinking about us on this occa- sion and praying for the continued success of the New Zealand Mission.
Let us honour these men by our presence at the Hui Tau.
Subscription tickets have been forwarded to the various districts and the campaign for the seven shillings and sixpence donations is now in full swing.
It should be kept in mind by everyone that this small con- tribution is not a charge for admission to the Hui Tau. Your attendance is desired whether you can afford the donation or not. All will be welcome.
Staying away from the Hui is no excuse for not supporting it with your donation. Indeed it should be much easier for those who do not attend to contribute the seven-and-six than for those who do attend and have the additional expens< transportation, etc.
As you all know the proceeds from the Green and Gold halls of the M.I. A. last year were given over to the Patriotic
Fund. The sum contributed amounted to more than Beven hundred pounds. As a result of this praiseworthy gesture,
however, the Mutuals of the Mission have been left without
funds with which to finance their activities for the current
year. What can be done to show th< .M.I. A. that We really
do appreciate their fine patriotic activities daring the past year?
If those who do not attend as well as those who do attend the Hui Tau, will make a voluntary contribution to the Hui
Tau fund, it will he possible to defray all Hui Tau expenses and still have seme money to turn over to the M.I. A.
If you do not go to the Hui Tau « ml \.uir -even and six
or other contribution t<> Box 72, Auckland.
BLESS THE ORGANIZATIONS WHICH BLESS Vol .
M \ ill 1 1;\\ COWLE1 . If] Ion President
596
TE KARERE
Maehe, 1941
PHOTO OF THE MONTH
We have before us another reminder of the joys and blessings that have come to us in this land because of the Gospel. These young men brought us the new hope in which we live — the Gospel of Christ. Theirs has been a task that only time and faith will bear witness. Here are 34 missionaries aboard the Mariposa en route to Zion at the call of the First Presidency to evacuate New Zealand.
This picture is taken from "Te Karere" — Haerere, Wahanga 1, Tihema 1940, Nama 1, published and edited by the 34 New Zealand missionaries aboard the s.s. Mariposa, and was printed at the Hawaiian L.D.S. Mission Headquarters, 1124 Kalihi Street, Honolulu, Hawaii.
N.B. — The only Elder not showing himself so well in the group picture is Elder Biesinger, therefore you see him at the left bottom. His picture was inserted in "Te Karere Haerere" as the result of win- ning a competition which, according to their own story, was only one of the many that they won from the Australian Elders and other passengers aboard.
HUI TAU— IMPORTANT !
All M.I A. contestants must be prepared to show Membership Tickets before entering any competition.
All winners of singing competitions will night M.I. A. programme with own selection, number. )
All M.I. A. competition entries must be in the hands of the M.I.A. Secretary, Box 61, Dannevirke, three weeks before HUI TAU. The entries from all sources whatever for any M.I.A. com- petition will not be allowed unless ENTRIES are sent to the Secre- tary with a post-mark not later than MARCH 22, 1941.
All District M.I.A. Officers are asked to come prepared to assist Mission M.I.A. Officers at Hui Tau. Please!
appear on Saturday (Other than contest
Maehe, 1941 TE KARERE 597
ARE YOU WITH US?
This is an appeal to Te Karere Correspondents to make them- selves available for an intensive campaign beginning March 15th until April 14th, 1941, to raise the subscription list to OXE THOUSAND. All members of the Church should keenly realize that the Mission President and his family, which includes Te Karere, are now the only missionaries we have. President Cowley has often said since the Elders left that Te Karere is the only missionary now. Are the people taking in to their homes this "missionary" ?
Correspondents, Te Karere is really grateful to you for your wonderful work. Your contributions of "news" has had much to do with the added appeal Te Karere now has for its readers. Your further assistance is needed to take our message to more people. If the Saints do not need to be visited regularly with the Gospel messages during this period of uncertainty and strife, then it is time that we knew it. This is the time when we are to live — "not by bread alone, but by every word that proceedeth out of the mouth of God."
Let us look at these figures, and then what are our hopes? Auckland district 450; Bav of Islands 800; Hauraki 850; Hawke's Bav 900; Mahia 750; Manawata 400; Otago 50; Poverty Bay 7?^\ Taranaki 200; Waikato 1,100; Wairarapa 300; Whangarei 1.5(H). and Wairau 200. These represent the districts in this Mission and approximate number of Saints in each. These will help you to gauge what should be done. Will you help?
Kindly notify this office before March 8th, 1941, of your willing- ness to assist in raising our subscription list, primarily to have more of the Church members particularly, receiving Te karere. Your names will be published in the April issue of Te Karere as well as in the llui Tau Programme, and special identification and apprecia- tion ribbons will be sent to you with our most grateful appreciation.
" Te Karere1'1 and its 11 orkers.
GENEALOGY
/>' v Teao Wirihana
Cottage Meetings for the Month of March:
March 6 Lesson 20, "Early Israelite Colonies." L8 — Lesson 1 1 . "Ancient Irish Pedigre<
20 — Lesson 22, "Who air t In- An-I" Saxims'.'"
27- Lesson 'j:;. "Earls Welsh Customs."
Home Teaching:
\ra kai torotoro o nga Peka haere l\i nga kail Hunga Tapu ki te whakahau Ida mahia nga "P< me nga "One Family Group Record."
WliaU.it auki :
"Ta Ice raumal i whakapiri Qgahuru."
598 TE (CARERE Mai-he, 1941
' Primary
Elva T. Cowley, President Rona V. Attenborough, Second Counsellor
Waima Davies, First Counsellor and Secretary
Lessons compiled by Rona V. Attenborough
MEMORY GEM:
"Little children, Love one another."
LESSONS:
FIRST WEEK
"STILLING THE STORM" Read Matthew 14: 23-32.
This story will help the children to feel that if they have faith in a kind Heavenly Father, they may be protected from danger. Choose songs and prayer in keeping with the story to be told. Point of Contact:
Have you ever looked into the water of a lake when it is perfectly still? Show a picture to illustrate. What does it remind you of? A mirror, because we can see the trees and birds and sky reflected in it. Does the same lake look the same in a storm? No, the waters seem angry and the smooth surface is changed to waves with white caps. (Show picture of an angrv sea with a ship on it.) How would you feel if you were sailing on such a lake or sea?
A large cardboard box lid or a cookie tin makes a very satisfactory sand board which may be held "on the lap. It might be interesting to use such a one with a little lake scene worked out on it. Paper boats would give a suggestion that would help you in telling the story.
Story:
"THE STILLING OF THE STORM." (Matt. 14: 23-32)
We have a wonderful story to hear now about a storm at sea. It happened many years ago when Jesus was living in Palestine.
Late one afternoon He stood by the seashore, surrounded by a crowd of people, men and women, boys and girls, whom He had been healing and comforting and cheering. He had been feeding them, too, with five bailey loaves and two small fishes. Do you remember the story of a little lad's offering?
After Jesus had helped all those people He was tired. So He told His disciples to take their little boat and sail to the other side of the sea, and He sent the crowd of people away. When He was all alone and the sun was setting over the water, what do you suppose He did? When we are tired we want to lie down and go to sleep. But when Jesus was tired He almost always went off alone into the country and prayed to God. That rested Him more than going to sleep. So this evening He climbed a mountain by the seashore, and there, with the stars shining over His head, He prayed to His Father in heaven.
While Jesus was on the mountain top what were His disciples doing? Sailing without Him across the sea. The wind was against them, the waves were high and rough, and they were having a hard time. Some of them were great, strong men who had rowed nearly all night, they were not more than half-way across the little sea. But some one was watching them. On the mountain alone stood Jesus. He had seen the storm come up, the great dark clouds, the howling wind, and the waves, high and black, crested with foam. As the moon- light struggled through a break in the clouds He saw the little boat tossing beneath Him on the great waves. Then, when it seemed to the disciples they could row no further, they saw a light in the darkness,
Maehe, 1941 TE KARERE 599
and a bright figure came towards them walking on the water. At first they were frightened; they did not know who or what it could be, but out of the darkness and above the noise of the wind and the waves they heard the beloved voice of their Master: "Be of good cheer," He said; "it is I, be not afraid."
At once Peter, one of the fishermen disciples, you know, wanted to go right to Jesus; he could not wait for Him to come to them. "Lord," he said, "if it be Thou, bid me come unto Thee on the water." So Jesus said: "Come," and over the side of the boat Peter sprang, and walked towards Him. While his eyes were fixed on his Master's face he was safe. The wind might toss his hair, the spray wet his clothes, but all was well. But when, becoming afraid, he glanced from Jesus to the high, fierce waves and the blackness underneath them, he began to sink, and cried in despair: "Lord, save me." At once, with a smile of pity, Jesus stretched out His hand and caught him. "0 thou of little faith," He said, "wherefore didst thou doubt?" Together they climbed into the boat, and then the wind stopped howling about them, the waves grew small and quiet, and above their heads shone the bright moon. The disciples fell upon their knees and worshipped Jesus. "Of a truth," they said, "Thou art the Son of God."
(Show a picture of Jesus walking on the water. Sing "Jesus Unto Thee I Pray" once more.)
The next time we are frightened about anything, about being alone in the dark or being out in a storm or anything else, let us remember this story. What did Jesus do when he needed to be brave? We can pray just as He did. What did Jesus say to His disciples that night?
Let us say it: "Be of good cheer, it is I, be not afrand."
Let the children make a paper boat and take it home. It will per- haps help them to remember the story so that they can tell it to mother.
SECOND WEEK
~. . . "GOOD POSTURE"
Objective:
To help the children form the habit of sitting and standing pro- perly. To make them aware of their responsibility to care for the bodies God has given to them.
To the Teacher:
The privilege of the Primary teacher is unlimited in directing, en- couraging and inspiring the right kind of growth; the most valuable habits, and the most healthful and helpful attitudes towards the care and growth of our bodies and minds. Deepen the children's apprecia- tion for God's gift of good health and help them to be aware that tiny must work with Him to be well and strong.
"The body is the temple of the soul."
Know ye not that ye are the temple of God, and that the spirit o God dwelleth in you? (1 Cor. 3:16.)
Lesson:
Old Scowly Spine Pack looked at all the hoys and girls who lived in the beautiful city. He chuckled to himself and said, "Good, good! I'll get every one of them."
"Whom will you get and how will you gel them?" asked Merry Brown Robin.
"The hoys and .u-irls, the hoys and .uirls," said Old Scowly Spine Pack." They sit bent over their hooks, or huddled in their chain. When they do thifl I make the little cushions between the hones of the hack all packed hard so that they can never he straightened out again."
"Oh," said Merry P.rown Robin, "that will make the boya and girls weak and hollow chested. Poor children! They will not he happy at all." And Merry BrOWH Robill did Like t" see everybody happy.
600 TE KARERE Maehe, 1«M1
"Happy?" said Old Scowly Spine Pack. "What's that? I like to see them all crooked, cross and crabbedy."
"Oh," said Merry Brown Robin in a little sorry voice. "Nobody likes to be near them or to play with them when they look all cross and crabbedy."
Merry Brown Robin flew to the west waving willow tree, perched among the branches on the sunny side and thought and thought.
"What can I do? What can I do? Whom shall I tell?" he chirped. "We do want our girls and boys to be happy. Wo want thorn to look straight and tall and brave. Maybe if they look strong and tall and brave they will grow to be that way."
Bui he could think of no way to help them, so he sang his even- ing song, tucked his head under his wing and went to sleep.
The next morning he saw some boys and girls going into a big building with many, many windows. (What was it.) He flew to a tree near one of the windows that was open and looked in at the boys and girls. Old Scowly Spine Pack was just outside looking very cross indeed.
Merry Brown Robin saw a sweet pretty lady talking to the boys and girls. They were listening eagerly to what she was saying. He saw her take a silk flag, hold it up before the children, and say: "This is the flag we love so well. This is the flag of our own country. Its colours say, be strong, be brave, be faithful. But no one can be strong who sits huddled over in school or at home. No one can be brave whose head is not erect, who does not try to sit straight and stand tall. No one can be faithful who does not try to grow strong and be brave.
"This is the message that the flag brings to you. Because you love it, we know you want to do what it wants you to do. This is not always easy but we know you will try. It means, every day, to sit erect, to stand straight, at home, at school, everywhere.
"It means washing your hands before placing food in your mouth or before preparing it for others, bathing often, brushing the teeth; eating wholesome food, breathing fresh air; getting sufficient sleep and being helpful to others. All this means hard work, but it makes you good looking, healthy and happy.
"To be all this, to do all this, shows better our love for our flag and our country and Our Heavenly Father than anything else can do."
How old Scowly Spine Pack did scowl. He knew that the boys and girls would learn the very things that would keep him away for ever and a day. But Merry Brown Robin sang a song. He sang so merrily that he tumbled head first off" the branch of the tree, and had to spread his wings very quickly to keep from falling right into the school room.
"Now I know who can help," he sang. "The mothers and teachers. They can drive old Scowly Spine Pack away because they are teaching boys and girls to form habits that will make them well and strong. But the boys and girls themselves must help. They must try every day to keep him away."
If Merry Brown Robin looked in our window to-day would he find somebody who is helping to keep Old Scowly Spine Pack away?
— Thresa Dansdill.
THIRD WEEK
"FEEDING FIVE THOUSAND" Text:
Matthew 14:13-21; Mark 6:32-44; Luke 9:10-17; John 6:1-14. Objective:
To help the children to know that Christ's understanding kindness extended to the physical needs of the people as well as to the spiritual.
Make the child aware that the Saviour taught by example many beautiful lessons and that all who try to do the things he preached and practised are better and happier people.
Maehe, 1941 TE KARERE 601
Lesson Story:
In this story we find Jesus in a little town on the east coast of the beautiful Sea of Galilee.
He had been travelling from place to place preaching to the people and healing their sick, and now His body was weary.
The Twelve Apostles, whom Jesus had sent two by two into other cities to preach, had returned from their missionary labours. They ""gathered themselves together unto Jesus, and told Him all the things, both what they had done and what they had taught." They were weary, too, and no doubt Jesus noticed it, for "He said unto them, come ye yourselves apart into a desert place, and rest awhile."
This, of course, the disciples were glad to do. They would cer- tainly enjoy a quiet rest with their Master. So they all went quietly down to the shore, got into a boat and sailed across the sea to the eastern shore.
It was only six miles across the Sea of Galilee and perhaps the little vessel with its load of weary passengers sailed very slowly.
When Jesus and His Apostles reached the shore they climbed a near-by grassy hill, below which was an uninhabited plain covered with grass and dotted with flowers. They wanted peace and rest for so many people constantly came to them that "they had no leisure so much as time to eat."
They thought that no one had seen them leave, but in this they were mistaken. Very soon on the plain below them a great crowd of people began to gather. These people when they saw Jesus and the Apostles leave, walked around the sea to meet them. As they passed through the villages, many more joined them until there was a mighty throng. And as it was the time for the Passover Feast in Jerusalem perhaps many people who were going there followed also.
Can you see two pictures: one, of Jesus and His Apostles at rest on the hillside, the other, a great crowd of people on the plain below?
When Jesus looked down upon the people who were waiting for Him He "was moved with compassion toward them." He could not rest when they needed Him. "So in His love and pity He came down among them and spake unto them of the Kingdom of God, and healed them that had need of healing."
Hour after hour passed as the charmed crowd listened to the v of the Master.
The day wore on until the sun was setting and still the great crowd listened, without a thought of leaving. Then the Apostles remembered how tired Jesus was and they also romemlx rod the people who were so far from their homes, without food. So they went to Jesus saying. "This is a desert place, and the time is now past; send the multitude away, that they may go into the villages, and buy themselves bread; for they have nothing to eat."
They were surprised when they heard His reply, which was, "they heed not depart ; give ye them to eat."
This seemed Btrange and impossible to them. They wondered what Jesus meant and how it could be done.
One Apostle asked, "Shall we go and l>uy food and give them to
eat?" To this Jesus replied: "How many loaves have ye? Go ami
Andrew, who was one of t ho Apostles, said: "There IS a lad here,
which hath five barley loaves and two small fishes; but what are they
among so many?"
When JeSUS heard this He told the disciples to bid the people
sit down by fifties and by hundred., in ;i short time live thousand
men. Inside- the women and children, were seated oil tfl
was springtime and tie >id green. What a beautiful
sight it must have beenl Someone has said that they must have looked like beaut iful flower bed in ,-t garden.
602 TE KARERE Maehe, 1941
When they were all seated, Jesus "took the five loaves and two fishes, and looking up to heaven, He blessed, and brake; and gave the loaves to the disciples, and the disciples gave them to the multi- tude. And likewise of the fishes as much as they would." The dis- ciples passed the food to the multitude, and when they were all fed "they took up the fragments that remained, twelve baskets full."
This miracle made a great impression on the people. Many of them said to each other, "This is of a truth that prophet that should come into the world." Others said, "This is the Christ."
They were ready to crown Jesus as their King. They were ex- cited and were planning to compel Him to do as they wished.
Jesus was grieved to think that they misunderstood Him and what was meant when He spoke of "His Kingdom." He urged the Apostles to leave the crowd and go back to the other shore. When th< gone and the multitude had gone away He went up into the mountain and there again he was alone with His Father in Heaven. Teach:
"Lett's Be Kind to One Another."
Prayer:
One of the girls.
FOURTH WEEK
„,. . "CHOOSING RIGHT OR WRONG"
Object:
To help the children to realise that there is a right way and a wrong way, and to help them to remember which is which. To help them to understand that every person has a right to act as he chooses, but he must abide by the consequences of his choice. We hope by pointing out the lasting peace and happiness that is found in right choice, and the suffering and unhappiness that comes from wrong choice, to create, in the hearts of the children, a desire to choose the right.
JACK'S CHOICE
Jack had done something that was wrong. His father had found out about it that morning and Jack had been worried and afraid all day. He had been puzzled too, because his father had said nothing about it. Now his father had asked him to go for a ride and he won- dered more than ever. His father said nothing about where they were going but talked of other things. At last they reached the city which was about twenty miles from their home, but instead of going down to the business district, as they usually did, his father turned, went up a long winding hill and stopped outside some huge gates which were set in a great stone wall.
Jack's heart almost stopped beating. He knew this was the penitentiary. They had passed it a number of times but they had never stopped before. He knew that this was the place where "bad men" were kept. For one wild moment he thought that his father had brought him here for the thing that he had done.
His father seemed to know what he was thinking because he put his arm around Jack's shoulders and said, "It's all right Jack. .I'm going in here for just a few minutes, do you want to come in with me or would you rather wait here in the car?"
Jack's voice trembled a little as he said, "I'll wait here, father."
As he was waiting a car drove up, and three men got out of it. Jack noticed that one of the men had handcuffs on his wrists.
After a few minutes Jack's father came out and they drove off to the city. This time they stopped in front of a big building. Jack had seen this building many times before. On the big plate-glass doors it said "First National Bank.'
Maehe, 1941
TE KARERE
603
"Come on Jack," his father said. They went in together and in a few minutes they went through a door marked "James Graham, President." Here Jack's father made him acquainted with a tall man with smiling blue eyes. This was Mr. Graham, but Jack noticed that his father called him "Jim."
On the way home Jack's father told Jack a story. It was about three boys: a boy named "Jim," who was now the president of the First National Bank, and a boy name "Frank," who had been in the penitentiary for five long years, and himself when he was a boy. He told how they played together when they were boys and some of the things they did as they became older.
When the story was finished Jack thought for a little while, then he said "Father, I'm going to try to be like you and Mr. Graham."
Why do you suppose Jack's father took him to these two places?
CHOIRS AT HUi TAU
On paper^this year's competition numbers are the best that we have chosen. Now it is up to the Branches or Districts send- ing competitors to practice and rehearse nightly, that they may have their choirs and choruses proficient.
In my opinion, the "Hallelujah Chorus," which is the choral test piece, is not difficult. The intervals in all the parts are easy and, what is better still, melodious. It is written purely for choir, and not one, and everyone has the melody. It is considered by critics the world over as the musical masterpiece of man's creation, and by many — a heavenly inspiration. I think that you will agree with me that the Maori translation enhances its beauty with added dignity and at the same time we will be making his- tory as it has never before been sung in Maori for a choral test.
The "b" number for the choirs is "Onward," an adaptation of "Onward Christian Soldiers," by Burnham, and is a very fine anthem. The book which contains these pieces includes last year's contest numbers "The Lord's Prayer," "Hangu Te Po" and a special arrangement of "I Need Thee Every Hour." Please look these over carefully for HUI TAU, and is it too much to ask that you look over "Hosannah"?
The M.I. A. numbers that arc in the same book are "Sweel Sabbath Eve," "Pale Moon" for men. male quartette and chorus, "A Prayer Perfect" and "In the Heart of the Hills" for women's trio and chorus. All are harmoniously and beautifully arranged. Truly a wonderful musical programme for any occasion. Th ! Explorer Boys' quartette is "Abide With Me," found in the Deserel Song Hooks, page 103, and the L.D.S. Hymns, page L80. The Junior Girls' trio is in the M.I.A. Song Polder, page 18, "Si the Summer Night."
NOTE. — Most of those numbers arc unprocurable in printed form, hence their value. LOOK AFTER Yuri; COPIES. Some copies may be a bit faint ami unreadable. 1 would ask conductors
to write in with ink the correct QOtefl :iml WOrdS. Send for the MINIMUM number of copies yen require, with sixpence in stamps to eover postage, and ymir order will he tilled immediately. A
small charge will be made t.» cover printing which will he
sent to you ill due time.
WALTER SMITH.
Director of Hui Tan Music.
604
TE KARERE
Maehe, 1(M1
rj\ews from the Cfietd
FROM FAR AND NEAR
By A. Dudley Amadio
During the early pari of December my
wife and I visited Bro. E. A. C. Scott, formerly of Auckland and Cleved his present home, Scotsman Vail whare, near Morrinsville. At a , i convened there, the family not only had strong testimonials hut also that the Lord was blessing them.
At Putaruru who should we meet hut Brother Hotaraka Anaru and another Brother whose name I did not hear plainly enough to he able to spell They, as were we, were glad to meet fellow- members of the Church.
Sunday, December 22nd, marks what I believe will be the beginning of much progress in the Rotorua district. The occasion served a double purpose. First and most important was the dedication of Brother T. McKinnon's home as a place for holding service. This will give the Saints a meeting-place close to Rotorua. Brother Rangi Greening offered the dedicatory prayer. The second part pertained to a farewell arranged for Elder Henry Davis, who expects to shortly depart overseas with the Air Force. Elder Davis fought in the last war and, before enlisting in this, has done much good work for the Church in Rotorua and Taupo. He was pr< with a carved and inlaid stick by Bro. Moore on behalf of the local Saints. The gathering was provided with a splendid dinner served on the grounds in front of the house.
It will be sufficient for me to mention here the passing of Sister Marge Whi- whikiterangi Waugh on Wednesday, Janu- ary 1st, 1941. (Further mention of this demise is included in this issue under an article by Sister Isabel Amadio. — Ed.)
MAHIA DISTRICT Reported by Elsie Loader 7 Brother L. T. Nelson, Superinti of the District Sunday School Board, visited the Nuhaka Branch, accompanied by his wife and daughter on Jaruary 5th. We appreciated the visit and the instructions which were given us.
Sister Maggie Winiana has been ap- pointed Second Counsellor and Secretary to the Tahaenui Neighbourhood Primary.
A week later Sydney Christy, Walker, Eru and B< tti Tengaio visited Kaiuku, Mahia, and attended the services which were thoroughly enjoyed, and the report is that the Saints there ar< faithful and working hard.
The following week many of our people went to Waipawa to attend the H.B. Hui Pariha, and among them were Sydney Christy, Stuart Whaanga, Haerengarangi Tengaio, Raiha Tengaio, Kapu Smith and Mana Mahanga. They rejoice in having the privilege of again meeting with Pre- sident and Sister Cowley and the many
people who came from far and wide to
t he Com', rence The N uhaka M.I. A.
Tennis Club played their first match in
the Short ('up competition on the 18th,
Saturday, againsl tin Nuhaka Club with
a comfortable tnai against four.
hers I'era Tengaio, Wheti Nohi
Nohi, Benjamin and Epaum;
now in Hastings. What is Nuba!.
is surely Hastings'
Our Nj e and Tohv
bands of I lie i ■
ters (M i have entered mili-
tary training at Trent ham. Since leav- ing for camp i ome I be proud father of a cute little baby girl, and Tohv has just as cute a daughter too. We lOd luck may follow them and that (heir return to their loved i'e assured. Sister: " Wpia and l'arae Walker visited Nuhaka Valley and held a Hui Atawhai meeting at the home of Brother John Campbell on Sunday,*^l9th January. where quite a number of Saints were pres- ent and showed their willingness to par- take in the work of the Hui Atawhai and regu lar monthly meeting he held among them. Kia kaha Sisters, we like to see the work go ahead. The Tahaenui Primary are to be commended for their untiring efforts in uplifting the work at Tahaenui. They held a "Bring and Buy" sale and have donated £1 out of the proceeds to assist the Mission Primary. We admin your spirit and ap-
preciate very much your help.
The n lency consists
of Sydney Christy, president; Eru H. Tengaio, 1st counsellor; [riparete Pomare, 2nd counsellor, and William Christy, has taken hold well and set things going by an- nouncing publicly through "Te Karere" local missionaries for the district for the months of March, April and May. Bro. Christy will also continue on as Branch President for the Nuhaka Branch. Saints of the district, find your assignments and fill them.
Mrs. Celia McKay ha- pleasure in an- nouncing tin engagement of her daugh- ter, Monica, to Leading-Aircraftsman Geoffrey S. Moore, son of Mr. and Mrs. Alfred Moore, Carbes Bay, St. Ives, Corn- wall. England.
Farewells were tendered to Ernie Nye,
who has hern home on final leave after
amp, at the homes of
Brother Ora and Sister Tengaio and Bro.
rlohepa Te Kaura and family. ■
WAIKATO DISTRICT Reported by Dave Ormsby
Teao Wirihana of the Mission Gene- alogical Society is now in the Waikato assisting in that important work. On the 2 5 th he, in company with Tetana (Percy) Te Hira, President of the Society
Maehe, 1941
TE KARERE
605
in Waikato, visited Te Awamutu, and there imparted needed information per- taining to the work. While there they also attended the funeral services which were held for Whei Te Hira, daughter of Tupana Te Hira. Our aroha and tangi so out to Brother and Sister Tupana Te Hira in their loss, and also to Tetana Te Hira and his family in the death of their six-month-old baby boy.
MANAWATU DISTRICT Reported by Polly Wineera
The Hui Pariha for the Manawatu and Wairarapa districts was held under ideal weather conditions at Porirua on the 25th and 26th of January. Visitors included many from Taranaki, Hawke's Bay, Wai- rarapa and near-by villages. The Pri- mary began the activities at 8.15 p.m., where the children gave fine perform- ances, which were followed by the Mutual programme, during which Sister Una Thompson, President of the Mission Y. W.M.I. A. passed on useful information pertaining to Mutual work. Sunday
morning dawned gloriously, and its " beauty and strength enhanced the spiri- tual saga that was enjoyed by all during the services of the day, commencing with the Priesthood, Relief Society, Sunday School, where the theme of "Clean Liv- ing" was inspiring to all. Brother Walker Enoka, superintendent of the District School, directed the meeting. The after- noon meeting at 2 p.m. was very well attended where, needless to say, much was received spiritually.
The kai, which was provided for all, apparently was quite the thing. (Did you notice Timuaki at the first and second sittings?) Appreciation is given to those responsible for providing the same, which is indeed a vital and im- portant part of most huis.
The genealogical meeting conducted by President Stuart Meha of the Mission Society preceded the evening meeting conducted by the Relief Society, where I lie portrayal of "Queen Esther" came as a fitting climax of the amount of work and activity that is being enjoyed by the
Pn lidenl Eruera Taurau of the district has selected as counsellors to him Eruha Kawana and Peneamine W i Neera and
Walker Enoka secretary, with I'arata I'irihi assistant secretary. The Relief Sociel y of I be listri ed wit h
Raiha Kawana pre idenl and M-
Maari and Paeroa VV i Neera as her able
eoun ellors. The Porirua Branch lias also undergone changes which we hope will put renew ed \ igour and | r< ng t h into our a< > I pre lidenl . Maker* 1 ■■ Hiko and Paeroa
r\ Ineeri in . Hoi and Kauhoe An bur
I of t be Branch R< lief Society. Honda] even! ranu
ii ied i o bonou i klatuai Hoi Eruera Rihia In farewell ..n tin.-. I lea> e befoi i • mba
"•■as. Pr< Rental included a
watch and money belt for ea< h of them.
M.in\ people "i i... 1 1
i.. wish i Ihiii i be \ .i \ i..- i under t be
circumstances. The following day they were again entertained by their parents at a dinner at Barrett's Hotel, where friends" and relatives again joined in the expressions of aroha and "bon voyage."
Just before Christmas Elder Arthur Elkington and his nephew, Herbert Elk- ington, passed through Wellington on their way to Papakura. where they are now training as members of the Maori Battalion. News has just reached us that Sam, the twin brother to Herbert, has taken to himself a wife in the holy bonds of matrimony. Is that right, Sam? Let's get back to Arthur again — the people in Nelson and Madsen are just wondering if "those buttons will do up?"
Mr. and Mrs. Claude Hawea (nee Ella Wi Neera) are vacationing here at Pori- rua, where their little daughter Hariatta has taken over the wrecking business and has established headquarters at her "grannies."
POVERTY BAY DISTRICT Reported by Tipi Kopua
January 19th found the District Presi- dency gathered and discussing and trans- acting business for the betterment of the work that is tantamount to being a living and workable memorial to the Zion Elders who have laboured in this land.
Sister Hine H. Potae, who is employed at Waipawa, H.B., by Dr. Allan, spent a few pleasant days with the folks and Saints on the coast.
Brother Wi Pere Amaru is definitely a useful one to have around. The latest development since a visit to his home in Tologa from Palmerston North, is thai he and Brother James Marino are dis- mantling an old meeting-house which they intend to ,U'o towards the erection of a proper place of worship for the Tologa Bay Saints.
HAWKE'S BAY DISTRICT Reported by Olive Edwards Mr. and Mrs. Mane "Monty" King] of Korongata entertained ;i numbi
friends and relatives at dinner in honour
"i' their nephew. Heber G. Smith, son of
the late Wi Smith of Xuhaka. who has entered 1'apakura Camp for service over- seas with the Maori Battalion. (I met "Nil" and Core,- Barney in Auckland on
Saturday. February 16th, and have In- vited them along with Ronny Kit
dinner at our hom, whenever th.\
in again. This Invitation is open i.. an
of the home hoys and anyone the\ would
long. Ed.)
I be Cotter family, with that neat fel- Chief, has I. ecu Iran
Kopuawhara with t he P.WJ wh, iv We hope that their ciai ion w ill I.,, ui [Used to the ut mi
ible ''ut hdaj pari v wa ■ held at tin- borne of Brother and Sister Sydnej
Ciaw ford in honour of I h.ir two I
kmelia, aged i i . and .i.-w , i |
;i . pal I Of I I I
Wh.ii Nohi Nohl and Pen Nuhaki
■ih. i of Porangahau and thi
006
I E KARERE
Maehe. 1941
haka Saints who were at the Waipawa Hui Pariha.
Mr. and Mrs. Kelly Harris of Auckland
(Ahem) arrived in time, Christmas Day, to take the wishbones from the man;. poultry pieces that graced his family's dinner table. With them were Thelma Pritchard and Mrs. Maria Bernard and her little baby Edward (remember Mac?), and during the evening much gaiet] was enjoyed by all, especially bo when the couple were disturbed in the wee hour of the morning to participate in "wel- coming celebrations" commonly known as "Tin-can."
A really fine Hui Pariha was enjoyed by the many Saints and friends who at- tended at Waipawa the third week-end of January. Much appreciation is extended to the Waipawa and Porangahau people who made the Hui the success it was.
The M.I. A. District Boards extend wishes and greetings for the continued success of Mutual activity and trust that our representation in all phases of M.I. A. work will speak volumes about our inter- est and desire and will to serve the Lord the Mutual way.
AUCKLAND DISTRICT Reported by Rona V. Attenborough
Greetings to all, from the Auckland District. Sounds like Christmas or some- thing, but it isn't, we just want to greet you.
During the past month, the climatic condition in Auckland has supplied us with so much liquid sunshine that the Mission Home lawn is now quite green again, and we have had to call for vol- unteers to hoe, scythe or, well anyway, cut it. Don't all speak at once.
The Auckland District held a very suc- cessful conference week-end February 1st and 2nd. The Saturday night meet- ing, under the auspices of the Mutual Improvement Association, featured the members of the Onehunga District in action songs, hakas and trios, and we enjoyed their performances. But they had nothing on the Auckland Branch action-song team. Watch for their next appearance at Hui Tau. The programme was conducted by Bill Brosnan, Presi- dent of the Y. M.M.I. A. On Sunday morn- ing the Sunday School had charge, and the District Presidency conducted the afternoon meeting and the evening Priest- hood session, while, of course, the Relief Society conducted the first part of the evening meeting. It was a grand con- ference, and well worth attending.
Sister Jewel Cowley spent two or three days in the Huia Hospital under observa- tion, but we are happy to report that she is back home again, and as perky as ever. You can't keep a good man down, can you Jewel?
Sister Billman is home again and out and about, and looking none the worse for her illness. Brother Hemi Paki is progressing very favourably, and we ex- pect to hear before very long that he has gone home.
Two quite disappointed souls are wan- dering around Auckland at the moment and they are Marjorie Jackman and
Jeanne Porteous, who could not get away by the Mariposa on January 18, as they had hoped, but youth is always hopeful and so are these two girls, who are planning to go to college in Zion. All
We can say is "keep at them, and th.y will give in," and then Auckland will
be losing two more of its membei
trouble is that such talent, etc.. etc.. etc. I mostly etc.) is hard to secure these
days, and I guess the authorities govern- ing this matter are reluctant to lose what they have. However, we wish these two young ladies — or something — success in their desires.
On December 28th, Sister Jean Bill- man discarded the name of her parents to accept that of Mrs. Frank Martin, and as such we sincerely wish her much joy and happiness.
Auckland Saints, meet Mr. David James McCIeary, who was baptised on Sunday, February 9, at Auckland by Kelly Harris. We welcome David among us while he is stationed at the Papakura Military Camp and hope he will enjoy his stay here. (For further information, please refer Sister Dorithy Scott, of Wellington Branch.)
I think this is all the news this time, but if there is any more, you'll hear about it next time.
That's all, folks!
NGAPUHI DISTRICT By Lois Going and her staff of Workers
November 8th was the occasion of a Monster Green and Gold Ball in the Eparaima Makapi Hall at Kaihou, directed by Hetaraka Anaru and his co-workers. The funds were for patriotic purposes. and the evening was certainly indicative of the feelings of the many people who attended. Queen activities for the even- ing's Queen honour were really interest- ing and worthwhile, netting over £100, which was handed over to the Patriotic Society. The coronation pageantry typi- fied the efforts of all to aid in the cause of liberty and freedom, and the queen candidates — Miss N. Timi Mau, Mrs. Erini Te Ropere, Miss Toti Hoterene and Miss Ellen Witute — are to accept the appreciations of everyone for their un- selfish efforts to assist in raising the desired quota. Due thanks and apprecia- tion is extended to Mr. Finlayson, who did the honours as a really excellent Master of Ceremonies. Too much can- not be said about those who were in charge of the supper arrangements. All in all a really wonderful and satisfactory evening's function was enjoyed by all.
Brother Hetaraka Anaru since arriving in Kaikou from Awarua has made things go along rapidly, and we here in Kaikou are keeping up with him. Functions are goinc on all the time under his direction to assist whatever just cause that needs help, and so far the Eparaima Makapi Hall funds are to be benefited by a Re- lief Society bazaar during the day and a dance in the evening. Another big fea- ture of the day's activities will be a "Haangi" and "live-stock" sale, where everyone is cordially invited to enjoy themselves.
Maehe, 1941
TE KARERE
607
BEAUTY COMPETITION WINNER
During the Christmas festivities held at the Napier Mardi Gras were various "beauty" contests at the Sound Shell, Marine Parade. Among the many beautiful "beauties" we are pleased to announce that in the contest for juve- niles Miss Mary Edwards of Korongata, daughter of Brother and Sister Peter Edwards, was awarded first place. Incidentally this is not the only contest to her credit, having won a "baby" contest previously.
STATISTICS
BIRTHS
WHAREMATE— To Mr. and Mrs. Rangi Wharemate a daughter, January 15th, 1941, at Moerewa.
GOING— To Mr. and Mrs. Cyril Going, a daughter, December 20th, 1940, at Kawakawa.
BROWN— To Mr. and Mrs. K. Brown (nee Marie Pitman), a daughter, Janu- ary 5th, 1941, at Picardy Maternity Hos- pital, Wanganui.
PEDERSON— To Mr. and Mrs. Lionel (Toby) Pederson of Nuhaka, a daughter, October 30th, 1940, at Wairoa.
PERE — To Mr. and Mrs. Arthur Pere, Nuhaka, a daughter, May 24th, 1940, at Gis borne
WHAANGA — To Mr. and Mrs. Tureia Whaanga, Nuhaka, a daughter, November 4th, 1940, at Nuhaka.
NYE — To Mr. and Mrs. Ernie Nye, Nuhaka, a daughter, January 8th, 1941, at Wairoa.
MAERE -To Mr. and Mrs. Tuehu Bfaere, Korongata, a son. January 13th, 1941.
RANDALL— To Mr. and Mrs. Paul Randall, Korongata, a son, January 13th, 1941.
PAERATA— To Mr. and Mrs. Te Ara Kaiha Paerata, a son, January 15th, 1941, at Waipiro Bay.
BAPTISMS
McCLEARY — David James McCleary. now in Papakura Military Camp, was baptised by Elder Kelly Harris, in Auck- land, January 9th, 1941. (Convert).
WHITE— Raymond Patrick White, 9, of Tokomaru Bay, by Elder Tipi Kopua.
DEATHS
HARVEY— Chris Harvey of Athol. Christchurch, according to information just arrived, has passe-d this life, and due to not many of the Saints of the South knowing, very few were present at his death.
TE WHIU--Ani Te Whiu. 87, February 8th, 1941, at Huntly West. Waikaio.
HOOK — James Ihaia Hook. son of Wirepine Hook, 11 weeks. January 9th, 1941, of pneumonia, at Hasting!
BACK PAGE COMPETITION
With /hi- last issue oj "Te Karere" a novel competition was begun which u hoped will be interesting as well as informative to all. We have replies which range from 'ten to twenty-five" names oj people in the grout. Old M.A.C. students and those who are famib'ar with missionaries shown would
do well to send in their "list of names" for this "I est Your Memory" Competi- tion. Don't forget the closing date for this comfetition is March Wth, 1941. I'h, picture on the back of this issue is really valuable, in thai ii comei from an ordinary paper print which is very easily damaged, and President ('<■:> fey, sensing its Historic value, has had it here reproduced. It is a g\ u
sionaries that many oj US have seen «. me On more than one mission. Xante tin
brethren and so let us know thai you do RECEIVE "Tc Karere.'
II v offet a Bound Volume of 1939 and i{>io of "Te Karere" fot the most correct information pertaining the group as to names, place and time, All con
teslauls must have Iheir replies in to this o/liee by Mai.h 31st, 1941, The rules
that apply to last month's competition are to be observed in this.
[ E K VRERE Madir. 1941
SUNDAY SCHOOL PREPARATION
The Mission Superintendency do thank you for your work dur- ing the past year. Our condition as indicated by your reports which have recently been compiled show a marked improvement over last year, particularly as to contributions of "Six-penny Fund" and making good use of the "Enlistment" roll to increase active*partici- pation by members who have in the past not taken part in your school work'. The number of schools show an increase over the pre- vious year. Under the circumstances the work has its detinue place in our lives.
The Sunday School is for EVERY member of the Church. Branches that are not progressing as well as they might, arc- asked to write their problems and conditions in the form of a questionaire, to he sent to the S.S. Secretary. Box 72. Auckland, where they may be considered and suggested helps given at Hui Tau. It is import- ant that all Sunday School officers be at Hui Tau this year. Much instruction as to the carrying on of your year's work will he available.
District Presidents ( Priesthood) are here asked to fully organize their districts with Sunday School workers that they might benefit from Hui Tau contacts. The same applies to Branch Presidents. Your Sunday Schools should he fully set up. There is no excuse for poor Sunday School organizations in any branch. Xumhers do not count. It is the good that may he accomplished that counts. Your failure to provide this "blessing" for people is a responsibility that you alone must bear. If there are no officers of your branch attending Hui Tau either he there yourself at the Sunday School meetings or appoint someone suitable to attend.
— SS. Superintendency.
PRINTING DEADLINE
Material for publication MUST be received at the Editor's Office not LATER than the 10th of each month. Regular Lesson MATERIAL, such as Primary, Sunday School, Mutual and Genealogical, are required on the FIRST of every month.
Your co-operation in this matter is urgently required. If your contributions are late, this is the result: "Your 'Karere' is late — it is small in size — it may even come to you with no lesson work for some organization." Those of you who are responsible for your organiza- tion work, send your material in on time.
FRONT COVER PICTURE
Through the kind permission of Dominion Museum and the co- operation of Tanner Brothers of Wellington, we give you "Whatahoro," scholar, writer, leader and champion of Maori culture, whose works are priceless gems in the field of true Maori literature. The information that was the constant companion of his travels during his life are at the call of officialdom.
The following issue, we hope, will give you a more intimate pre- sentation of this Maori, who is a proud and proper descendant of his ancestors, the "Ma-uri."
€ HAR€R€
Their I\\r«-llrm-i<»s, Sir Cyril and Lady Ncw.ill
gS^K^^?OS^C^>. -«>. -->. -->. --;-. -<j., -.-..
:
I
%
7)
BRANCH TEACHERS1 MESSAGE
// is important that you go about your work with the
intent to assist your people. With this in view we recom- mend your taking from the Pepuere, 1941, issue of "1 e Karere" the "Suggestions." Even use the information with
your Saints. They should be more conscious of what is required as Latter-day Saints.
SECRET PRAYER
The soul with a broken heart . on bended knees, with head bowed reverently, cannot long remain in the shadows or the night of spiritual blindness. To pray in secret to our Divine Father in Heaven brings solace to the aching heart, companionship to the lonely, assurance to the suppressed, light to the wayward, power to the weak, strength to the strong, and the calm conviction that God, our Eternal Father, lives and that Jesus is the Christ.
What a privilege to shut oneself away from the world and be with God alone in prayer! He knows us for what we really are and not for what we may appear to be. If we are righteous, He is happy. If we are sinful and we go he fore Him alone, and there in the language of the heart tell Him we love Him and we want His help in doing right, Ih- divine emotions well up within Him, and in His un- speakable majesty and unqualified mercy He takes us in I [is arms, as it were, and we feel the warmth and infinite love of His holy person. He awaits patiently, hut anxiously to breathe His divine essence into the human heart upon its con- trite imitation. Oh, that all men could have this experience.
Secret prayer is the prayer of the heart. Its language is bathed in simplicity. We kneel before our Heavenly Father, knowing that before, and as we speak, He knows our every weakness and our every secret desire. We pray to Him in the light of this knowledge. There is no mas- querade in secret prayer.
Upon the Mount of Olives, Jesus withdrew from among { llis disciples that He might pray in secret. His heart was heavy. His cross seemed unbearable, lie desired so much to he done with His Father. ^
Let the Saints everywhere pray in secret as well as in the 9 (U family circle, and so teach their children. Let God he the , A confidant of every member of the Church, "and thy Father ^ «J which seeth in secret Himself shall reward thee openly." 9
2 i
2
«V
1/
I
Te Karere I
Established in 1907 Wahanga 35 Aperira, 1941 Nama 4
3 $
Matthew Cowley Tumuaki Mihana
Kelly Harris Etita
Eru T. Kupa Kaiwhakamaori
Waimate Anaru Kaiwhakamaori
"Ko tenei Pepa i whakatapua hei hapai ake i te iwi Maori ki roto i nga whakaaro-nui/
"Te Karere" is published monthly by the New Zealand Mission of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, and is printed by TE KARERE PRESS, No. 2 Scotia Place, Upper Queen Street, Auckland, C.l, N.Z. Subscription Rates: 3/- per six months; 5/- per year; £1 for five years; £2/10/- for life. (United States Cur- rency: $1.00 per year; $4.00 for five years; $10.00 for life.)
Address Correspondence, Box 72, Auckland, C.l, New Zealand.
CONTENTS
Editorial — Page
"The Missions of Europe," by Matthew Cowley 614
"To New Zealand," by Kelly Harris 616
Special Features —
"Etahi o Nga Whakaaro i Man," na Wiremu Takana 617
"Nga Kai-Whakaako Mo Waikato" 621
"Travelling to Hui Tan"
"Bles ing Mother," by Wm Mannering 624
"A Discussion on Prayer," bj Phillip Peterson 626
"Picture of the Month" 628
Church Features —
"Mahi Knr.i I [apati" 619
Sunday School 629
Primary 630
Statistics
Mews From the Field
614 TE KARERE Vperira, 1941
Editorial
THE MISSIONS OF EUROPE
From the missions of the Church in war-stricken Europe come news of continued activities, regardless of blackouts, food rations, privations, mental anxiety, and physical suffering. "Here is the
news" : —
From Switzerland: "We have so much to be thankful for here in Switzerland since we have not had any battles as yet, and hope
our position will continue unchallenged. Food materials arc becom- ing scarce. Butter, cream, pork, oils and fats are rationed. Only a pound of butter a month is allowed each of us; there is no more white flour. A pound of rice a month is the ration while a kilo (a little over two pounds) of sugar must suffice. In spite of this." Elder Ringger reported, "it is cheaper to live in Switzerland than in any of the lands around. "We arc working unitedly and are willing to remain on duty even at the point of starvation as long as there is opportunity to do good,"
From Denmark: "Financially and spiritually the Mission is going well," reports Elder West. "Tithes have increased, although a num- ber of former tithe-payers are now unemployed. Since the war started the Aarhus Church grounds and buildings have been given a new appearance and modernized. Landscaping has made the Church yards into one of the most pleasant scenes in Aarhus. At the opening of Mutual Improvement Association work in Copen- hagen, recently. Elder West reported 200 young people present, most of them non-members."
I:roin Norway: Elder Olaf Soensteby, acting president of the
Norwegian Mission, has written of conferences held in Trondheim, Bergen and Oslo, all familiar names during the battle of Norway. Elder Soensteby reports that no Mormons lost their lives during the battle of Narvik. Members of the Church throughout Norway have collected clothing, money and other gifts to aid war victims. "Fuel is expensive in Norway and meeting-places difficult to maintain in winter, because we must heat our halls with wood, which is very costly."
From Sweden: "All the meeting-places except small branches in Sweden are being maintained for regular meetings," reports Elder
Aperira, 1941 TE KARERE 615
Johannson. "It is difficult to obtain speakers enough, however, as most of our male members have been drafted for national prepared- ness." He adds that tithes were encouraging and children and new members are being baptized.
From Czechoslovakia: Elder Josef Roubicek, presiding over the Mission, reports that the members missed a few hard-working missionaries. The German authorities in Prague have granted the members permission to hold meetings in their customary places. An order from Berlin said the Nazi regime had no objection to lec- tures on the Mormon religion. Before German approval was re- ceived, the members had held Sunday School in private homes.
From the Netherlands: Elder J. Schipaanboord, acting president of the Mission, has been successful in getting his monthly and quar- terly reports in good shape to Salt Lake City. "Tithing and fast offerings are holding up very well, but meetings are combined for lack of fuel."
From Germany: "Tithing has increased 15 per cent, and fast offerings have gained. General donations have doubled. There has been some increase in membership, with 55 baptisms in eight months. Sunday Schools are well attended. Wives and mothers have assisted in helping wounded and bereaved as well as doing work for the Kid Cross," reports Elder Herbert Klopfer, acting president of the Mission.
From France: "French-speaking members of the Church have held meetings when opportunity would permit, have baptized new members and have advanced men in the Aaronie Priesthood. Meet- ings have been reduced in number because of the shortage ^\ coal. The) have had to combine M.I.A. and Relief Society groups and hold Sunday School and Sacrament meetings together."
From England: All members holding the Melchizedek Priest- hood in the British Isles have been excused from military service by order of the Government. The order did not exempt bearers ^\ the Aaronie Priesthood, bu1 Left the British Elders available to serve the Church. Acting Presidenl Andre K. Anastasiou states that faith promoting reports from members throughout the Mission told ol miraculous escapes from air raids.
There are no national boundaries in the Church of God.
Matthew ( owley,
so^x m - '"- •->- •-;-. •->. •->. •-.-. •->- w
616 TE KARERE Aperira.194]
To New Zealand
Governor-General of New Zealand. Marshal] of the Royal Air Force Sir Cyril NTewall, G.C.B., G.C.M.G., O.M., C.B.E., and Lady Newall with their three children arrived at Auckland, New Zealand, February 21, 1941. Their stay in Auckland was not Ion- as they -••on left tor Wellington, where the formal swearing-in ceremony took place.
Te Karere, on behalf of its readers and particularl} the Maori people, welcomes Their Excellencies to Maoriland. Nau mai- Haere mai — Haere mai. The ties that weld us together arc more warmly appreciated in this daw Our new Governor-General and his Lady may he assured of our loyalty and willingness, yes, even to sacrifice. t<> serve the cause and realm they so ably represent. ( mce again we bid you welcome. May our life together result in bettered spirit and lasting progression towards the goal of true democracy.
Kelly II arris.
MO TE HAERE KI NUHAKA
E nga iwi — nga iwi. Tena ra koutou e takatu nei ki te haere ki ta koutou Hui Tau e tu nei ki Nuhaka a te 11 ki te 14 o nga ra o Aperira. E ahua pakeke ana nga huarahi haere mo tatou, engari i runga i te tono pera i nga tono o era tau ka haere tatou ma runga i te "tereina" (train) mo te utu hoki iho te rima o te utu tuturu. Penei — Mehemea te utu tuturu atu i Akarana he £5, ko te utu ma koutou he rima o tenei te hoki iho, ara, ka £4, to utu. Pataingia i nga teihana kei kona koe te utu tuturu a, e ahei ana koe kia hoki iho to utu i te rima o te utu tuturu (one-fifth less). I
Whakarongo mai! Ka tukua atu nga pukapuka (forms) j
j kua oti te hainatia e te Timuaki Mihana kia koutou. Ina i whiwhi koutou i enei pukapuka me mau ki te teihana, hainatia
I ano e koe, katahi ano ka hoatu ki nga apiha o te teihana. Mo te haere ki te Hui Tau anake tenei homaitanga.
Ka timata te haere ki te Hui Tau a te 8 o Aperira mai i |
♦ Kaikohe, Ngapuhi. Akarana me nga paanga atu o te tereina \ i te 9 o Aperira. Atu i Pamutana ki Nepia'ko te 10 o Aperira
| te ra haere.
! !
AN APOLOGY.
The Editor regrets very much the omission of the Genealogical Society's Lesson information. Due to the amount of work during the past weeks the Lesson material, which was handed in personally b Teao Wirihana, has been misplaced; sufficient information is to hand, however, to suggest using the next THREE Lesson chapters in the hook "Children of the Covenant."
Aperira, 1941
TE KARERE
617
Etahi o Nga Whakaaro i Mau
NA WIREMU TAKANA, PAKEKE KUA MATE. (He roanga tuatahi.)
Na te Etita. — / timatangia enei korero i roto i "Te Karere" o Maehe, a ko tenei te roanga tuatahi, a kei te whai ake ano etahi o ana korero.
Na, i hoatu tenei mana e Ihu Karaiti, ki nga tangata i whaka- pono ki a ia, a, whiwhi ana ratou ki taua mana; na, i to ratou whi- whinga i taua mana me te Wairua Tapu ano hold o te Atua, katahi ratou ka whiwhi ki te kaha i taea ai e ratou te whakakahore i nga mahi kino katoa kua korerotia ake ra, me te mahi ano i nga mana whakaora tinana, i nga merekara, me nga mea i taea ai e ratou te mahi i aua ra. Ehara i te mea, ko ratou anake i whiwhi ki tenei mana, engari, o ratou tupuna o te whare o Iharaira. Na, i te mea, he mea hoatu taua mana ki a ratou i runga i to ratou whakapono, ma te aha e kore ai e homai ki a tatou mehemea he whakapono ta tatou? Kaore he take. No te mea hoki e hoatu ai ki te tangata, ehara i te mea, ka riro noa mai, engari, me homai taua mana. Na, i te mea, ka whakapono tatou ki a te Karaiti, ka whiwhi ki tona Tohungatanga Tapu me tona Wairua hoki, hei kai tohutohu i a tatou, hei kai whaka- kaha, katahi ka taea ai e tatou enei mea kino katoa te whakarere atu. Tenei ano, ka kore to tatou wehi ki nga mea whakamate katoa, ara, ki nga makutu, ki nga kehua Maori, ki nga Atua whiowhio, ki nga patu paiarehe, ki ena ritenga Atua, i te mea, kua riro mai i a tatou te mana o te Atua nui atu i era atu Atua katoa, c rite ana ki te mana i whiwhi ai o tatou tupuna, i heke mai nei i Ilawa.iki. No te mea e mohio ana tatou ki tenei, i te mea, i a ratou taua mana kore rawa o ratou wehi i nga mea katoa. Tiro atu ki te moana nui a Kiwa, i hoea mai nei e ratou.
Kore rawa o ratou wehi i te aha, i te alia. Ko tatou ke, nga uri, kei te wehi ki nga mea katoa, na reira ra, me whiwhi tatou ki taua mana Tapu o to tatou Matua i te Rangi, ara, tona Tohungatanga,
kia kore ai to tatou wehi i te alia, i te alia, kia pera ki 0 tatou tupuna.
kia whai ora ai hoki o tatou tinana kikokiko nei, kia ora ai ano
hoki tatou a te wa ka hoki atu tatou ki to tatou Matua i te Rangi. Kati.
Xa konei ra, E te iwi, e ki ana to tatou Ariki a Ihu Karaiti, "Inoia, a ka hoatu ki a koutou; rapua, a ka kitea e koutou; patukia, a ka huakina ki a koutou; ka whiwhi hoki nga tangata katoa ina inoi; ka kite ina rapu; ka huakina hoki ki te tangata e patuki ana.'" Me rapu ki whea, ki nga whare Wanangai Kua kore ra he whare
WlREMU TAKANA
618 TE KARERE Aperira, L941
Wananga. Me patuki ki whea, ki nga tohunga Maori? Me Inoi ki whea, ki nga Atua whiowhio kia riro mai ai i a tatou? Kahore ra pea. Engari, me rapu i nga Karaipiture kia ki te kupu o to tatou AHki. \'a, ki te ki mai nga Karaipiture, me penei te mahi, kaua tatou c ki, kaore me penei ke, me pera ke, engari me rite ki tana i tohutohu mai ai ki a tatou. Ki te peneitia e tatou te rapu i roto i aua Karaipiture ka mohio tonu tatou kei whea e takoto ana taua mana Tapu, ara, tona Tohungatanga, na reira, e taea ai e la te mahi i nga mahi katoa o roto i tona Atuatanga.
Otira, he whakapono to te iwi Maori ki nga Karaipiture, e kore koutou e whakahawea mai ki end kupu atu. Kei roto i aua Karai- piture e man ana te tino tauira o te whakaoranga a te tangata. Kua kite ranei koutou i tenei? Mehemea, kaore. me tahuri ano ki te rapu. a kia kitea ra ano, no te mea kei reira e man ana ona ritenga katoa o te whakaoranga, i whakaritea nei e to tatou Kai Whakaora, ratou ko ana pononga; nana nei i tautoko nei ana mahi i muri iho i tona kakenga ake ki te Rangi. Xa, kua kite etahi o tatou, o te iwi Maori. Kua whakawhiwhia ano ki taua Mana Tapu o te Atua. Ko nga mea o ratou e u tonu ana ki f>na tikanga katoa, kua kore te wehi i roto i o ratou ki nga mea katoa e wehinga nei e tatou, e te iwi Maori, ara, nga mea kaore e kitea atu ana e te kanohi tangata. haunga ra te tangata e haere mai ana ki te patu i a ia.
Kua kite ano hoki ratou i aua tohu ano i korero ai to tatou Ariki. ka aru tahi i te tangata e whakapono ana ki tona ingoa. Tera noa ake ra, ko etahi o ratou i roto i taua whakapono kua tino tae rawa atu ki roto ki tona Whare Tapu. Kua tino ki o ratou ngakau i te hari, i te koa, a, rere ana te pouri me te aue. Otira, ehara i te mea, ko enei tangata anake kua tae atu nei ki reira. nga mea i whiwhi ki tenei koa nui, engari, ko te tokomaha noa iho o nga mea e u ana i roto i te whakapono tuturu o te Atua. Kua kaha hoki ratou ki te ki, kua whai kaha ratou ki te whakakahore i nga mea. kino, i korerotia ake ra, i runga i te mea e mohio ana ratou, ki te hoki atu ratou ki aua mea, mahi ai ano, ka uru ano ratou ki roto ki te whakangaromanga o tenei tinana maori.
Ehara i te mea pai, tenei tu ahua, ko etahi e kite, ko etahi e kore e kite, ko etahi e whiwhi ko etahi e kore e whiwhi, ko etahi ranei e rapu, ko etahi e noa iho, engari, me whiwhi katoa, me kite katoa, me rapu katoa, kia tae ai tatou ki roto i te kotahitanga o te whaka- pono, o te matauranga hoki, ki te Tama a te Atua, ki te tino tangata, ki te mehua o te tino kaumatuatanga e tutuki ai ki to te Karaiti.
(Taria he roanga)
REMEMBERING YOU
Sister Elline Shaw Woods and her family still think of you, and at this time they express their "aroha" and "tangi" which was con- tained in a letter written by Janet. "I want you to send my greetings along with Mother's and Charline's to all the Saints and friends in New Zealand and tell them we still think of them and love them very dearly."
Aperira, 1941 TE KARERE 619
Mahi Kura Hapati
RATAPU TUATAHI
AKORANGA 1. Nga Tikanga o te Whakapono.
Whakaaturanga:
Te Wairua Tapu e kiia nei ano ko te Wairua, me te Wairua o te Ariki, te Wairua o te Atua, te Kaiwhakamarie me te Wairua o te Pono, kaore ia i te kakahuria ki te tinana kikokiko wheua hoki, engari he tinana wairua, otira e mohio ana tatou kua whakaatu mai te Wairua i Aia i roto i te ahua tangata. Ma roto i nga whakahaere minitatanga a te Wairua ka ahei te Matua raua ko te Tama te whakahaere i a raua mahi mo te tangata. Ma roto i taua Wairua e whakaputa mai te mohio- tanga ma roto hoki i Aia e taea ai nga mahi a te Atuatanga. Ko te Wairua Tapu te pono o te Matau raua ko te Tama e whakaatu ana ki te tangata to raua ahuatanga, me te whakamohio tuturu mo era atu tangata o te Atuangata.
Nga Patai:
1. He aha etahi o nga ingoa e mohiotia ana te Wairua Tapu?
2. Pehea te ahua o to te Wairua Tapu tinana?
3. E whakaputa ana ano ranei Ia i roto i te ahua tangata?
4. Me pehea e ahei ai te Matua raua ko te Tama te whakahaere i a raua mahi mo te tangata?
5. He pono no wai te Wairua Tapu a heaha hoki etahi atu o ana whakaaturanga ?
(Nga zvhakaaturanga tautoko i te rchaiia nei.) 1 Niwhai 4:6, 11: 1-12, Mohia 13: 5, Maaka 1: 10, Hoani 1: 32, Nga Mahi a nga Apotoro 2: 4, 8: 29, 10: 19, Roma 8: 10, 1 Te Haronika 5: 19 (Te Wairua o te Ariki) Matiu 3:16, 12:28, 1 Niwhai 13:12 (Te Wairua o te Atua) Hoani 14:16-26, 16-7 (Te Kaiwhakamarie) Hoani 15:26, 16-13 (Te Wairua
0 te Pono) Akoranga me nga Kawenata 130:22 (He tinana wairua)
1 Niwhai 11: 11 (Te whakaputanga i te ahua o te tangata) — He maha noatu nga whakaaturanga hei tirohanga. Tirohia nga whakaatu-tere.
RATAPU TUARUA
Whakaaturanga: Nga Tikanga o te Whakapono.
Etahi o nga ahuatanga o te Atua. Te Atua kei nga wahi katoa. Kaore he wahi ahakoa pehea te pamamao o roto i nga mea i hangaa e te Atua, te kitea, te mohiotia e Ia. Ma roto atu i te Wairua e pa atu ana te Atua i nga wa katoa ki nga mea katoa, na reira kua kiia kei nga wahi katoa te Atua, otira, e tiara tenei i te mea e mea ana ko te tinana ake o tetahi o nga mema o te Atuatanga kei tenei wahi. kei te wahi i te wa kotahi. Ko nga wahi e kiia nei e rinia o to Tokotoru, he kaha-mutungakore, ara, to whakarongo, to kite, te whawha, to rongo liaunga me to rongo roka (hearing, sight, touch, smell ami I Ona whakaaro whanui (mind) kahore ho mutunga mai. Tona mana ki te whakawhiti i Aia mai i tena wahi ki tona wahi kalmiv Ona mutunga-mai. Me marama aim, k<> Tona tinana e kore 6 tatu ki nga wahi c rua i 1c wa kotahi. Ina whakaaotia o tatou ho tangata to Atua. o ahei ana hoki kia whakaaotia o tatou Tona w hakat inanat anga (materi- ality), ao ia. to tangata kore tinana (immaterial being) i raro nei i tenei ingoa kore take ko etahi e mea ana ko to ahua tera o to Atua, o kore rawa e ora, ma tenei ahua kore tonu e whakaatu. Bfehemea
ho wahi to to Atua (form) ho roan.ua ho w hanuit anga aim, a ho mutu- nga aim tona pohe i roto i to taldwa (limited extension in space), E
kore rawa o taea 8 la te Q0h0 i nga wahi maha i to wa kotahi i
TE KARERE Aperira, 1941
i Tana ahua. a noreira, kaore tatou e tika kia ohorere ki te ako i nga karaipiture e neke haere ana la i tona wahi ki tena wahi. Te korero o te pourewa <> Papera, "A ko Ihowa te Tama ka puta mai ki Apera- hama. a i Tona whakaaturanga ko la te Matua kaha rawa" — ka korero la ki taua petereiaka me te hanga ano he kawenata ki Aia a ka korero tatou e mea ana kua mutu Tona ki aia a haere atu ana te Atua ia Aperahama,
Nga Patai:
1. Pehea te ahua o te Atua ki nga wahi i hangaa e Ia?
2. Pehea te tikanga o tenei — Kei nga wahi katoa te Atua?
3. Pehea ana te ahua o te tinana o tena o tena o te Atuatanga?
4. Pehea nga wahi e rima o te Atuatanga?
5. E ahei ana ranei kia tatu te tinana o te Atuatanga i te wa kotahi?
RATAPU TUATORU
Whakaaturanga: Te mohiotanga ki nga mea katoa. Kei nga wahi katoa te Atua. Nga Tikanga o te Whakapono.
Kaore he wahi o nga mea i hangaa e te Atua ahakoa pehea te tawhiti kaore e kore te Atua te mohio. Ma roto atu i te Wairua o te Atuatanga, e pa ana hoki Ia ki enei mea i nga wa katoa. Kua kiia hoki kei te tata mai te Atua i nga wahi katoa otira, e hara i te mea o ratou tinana kei nga wahi maha i nga wa katoa. Kaore e mohiotia e te tangata Tona matauranga me Tona kaha — Nana hoki i hanga i whakahaere te kaha. I te mea ko Ia he mutunga-kore, he tika katoa hoki Ana mahi, no reira ko Tona mohiotanga he mutunga-kore — me whiwhi ano Ia i nga whakaaro mutunga-kore. Ma roto atu i te whaka- haerenga o nga anahera me te minitatanga o ana pononga, e whai wahi ana Ia ki te korero ki nga wahi katoa i hangaa e Ia, a ka tae hoki Ia ki te torotoro i Ana wahi e hiahia ana.
Nga Patai:
1. E mohio ana ranei te Atua ki Ana wahi katoa i hangaa ai ahakoa pehea te tawhiti?
2. Mehemea kei te tata mai te Atua pehea ai e mohiofia ai e Ia?
3. E pehea ana te ahua o Ana mahi?
4. Pehea atu e whai wahi ai Ia te korero atu ki Ana wahi katoa?
RATAPU TUAWHA Whakaaturanga: Te Atua he tino kaha. Nga Tikanga o te Whakapono.
E tika ana hoki te kiinga i Aia ko te Kaha-rawa. Ka taea e te tangata te kite i nga tohu o Tona kaha mutunga-kore i nga taha katoa i roto hoki i nga kaha e whakahaere nei i nga mea o te whenua me te whakahaere ano i nga mea o te rangi i runga i te huarahi kua whaka- takotoria mo ratou. Mehehema e kitea ana e Tona matauranga tetahi mea e ahei ana kia mahia e taea hoki e Ia te mahi, ahakoa ra e hara taua mea ra i te mutunga-kore i hangaa ra e Ia otira, ko te putake mai o te mana he mutunga-kore. Hei whakaarotanga mo te tika o Ana mahi me te mana mutunga-kore, ko te kaha ki te mahi i nga mea e hiahiatia ana e Ia kia meatia.
Nga Patai:
1. He aha te mea e tika ana te karangatanga i te Atua?
2. E kite ana ano ranei te tangata i nga tohu o tona kaha? C. Pehea nga mea e kitea ana e ia e ahei ana kia mahia?
Aperira, 1941 TE KARERE 621
HE MIHI
Tumuaki Cowley me to whanau e noho mai na i te tari o te mihana. Tena koutou katoa me te Hunga Tapu. J Tenei ka tukua atu te rima hereni mo taku Karere mo
♦ tenei tau hou. Kei te tumanako nuitia Te Karere i naianei e te tini o nga tangata i te mea e rite tonu ana koia te "kau-
I matua" hei torotoro i te hunga tapu me nga hoa aroha o ia
♦ kainga o ia whanau i roto i nga pekanga katoa o te Hahi.
Ka nui to matou tino ora i raro i nga manaakitanga maha t a te Atua.
I te me kei te whakatata haere atu ki nga ra o te Hui
j Tau "Whakamaharatanga" mo nga pononga pono, nga "kau-
« matua" me a ratou mahi papai i mahue iho nei ki runga i enei
J nga moutere o te Moana-nui-a-Kiwa, ka pupu ake te aroha mo
ratou me te tumanako kia tae atu ki to "ratou" Hui Tau.
Kei te Atua te tikanga, no reira kia ora mai ano te
Tumuaki.
Na to teina iti,
Pita R. Pene.
NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO MO WAIKATO
M A . WIKI TUATAHI
Marama o Aperira.
Awe Whare Ponga me Waka Huriwhenua Weraroa
Bob Beezley me William H. Paki Pukekohe
Ben Marshall me Wiremu Tamehana Kau Rangiriri
Dave Ormsby me Harry D. Marshall Gordonton
Ngaha Rotana me Ivan Noda Glen Murray
Hamiora Pohutuhutu me Haimona Honetana Patetonga
Rei Tuhua me John Apiti Morrinsville
Tupana Te Hira me James Forbes Te Awamutu
George Stockman me Darcy Tangihaere Te Kuiti
Tirua Tukiri me Puhi Harihona • Otorohanga
WIKI TUARUA Waikato Taniwharau Haere Katoa Ki Te Hui Tau — Nuhaka, H.B.
WIKI TUATORU
John Paki me Douglas Whatu Makomako
Hare Puke me Tetana R. Te Hira Hoeotainui
Ru Tarawhiti me Kio Tarawhiti Rangiriri
Joseph Berryman me Joe Kingi Waingaro
Arthur Hill me Joe Rapana Raglan
Charlie Hill choose his own companion ETorotiu
Mipi Tangihaere me Taiki Piopio
Tom Alfred \';ihu me Mapu Urutarewa Kopuku
Whare Hetaraka choose his own companion Glen Murray
Horoke Heke me Win. Mannering Tauwhare
WIKI Tl WVHA
James Heperi and family Piopio
Tatana Arona me Okeroa Honetana Maukoro
Tame Retl me Walter Turinni Te \wamutu
Tame Horotini me tana wahine Matakowhai
Ahikaka Pum me Tapahia Te Wheki Whatawhata
George Maihi me Niho Rangiawha ^.ramiro
TE KARERE Aperira, l'Ml
Peter Whatu me Horace Forbes Whatawhata
Here Tangihaere me Winiata Kapinga Taumarunui
Sister Rose Beezley me Sister Hine H. Paki Glen Murray
Charlie Marshall choose his own companion Aria Branch
Thomas Amoketi and family Puketapu
KORERO WHAKAHAUHAU
Kia kaha ki te whakarite i o koutou karangatanga. Kei te kau-
whautia tenei Rongopai puta noa i te ao i mua o te Mutunga. Ko
koutou te tote o te whenua ki te hemo te ha o te tote ma te aha e whai
tikanga tote ai. — Na Henry S. Marshall me tona Timuakitanga.
HE POWHIRI HUI PARIHA
Ki nga Iwi, ki nga Reo, ki nga Huihuinga Tangata; tena koutou katoa. He powhiri atu tenei na matou kia tae-a-tinana mai koutou ki ta tatou Hui Pariha tera ka tu ki Kirikiri, Takiwa o Hauraki, a te wiki tuatoru o Mei, te 17 me te 18 o Mei.
No reira haere mai tatou kite whakarongo i nga kupu whaka-te- wairua, me nga kupu hou o te Hui Tau, kia tataria, a kia whakatutu- kitia. Tena ano, haere mai nga mema o te Tohungatanga, nga Tumuaki Peka, nga Tumuaki o nga ropu Katoa o te Hahi i raro i te whakahaere a nga Tumuaki Peka. Kowai ka mohio ki nga whakahaere o enei ra
0 te pakanga. No reira haere mai kia kite, kia rongo ano hoki i nga kupu aroha, a to tatou Tumuaki o te Mihana. Heoi ano, kia tau tonu mai nga manaakitanga a te Matua i te Rangi ki a tatou katoa.
Tiki Reihana Tumuaki Peka. Toke Watene Tumuaki Takiwa.
NGA MATENGA
Winiata Hikairo Kewene
Tenei kua mate a Winiata Hikairo Kewene i te 24 o nga ra o Pepuere 1941. I mate atu ki te Hohipera o Akarana.
He qui nga iwi i tae mai ki te tangi ki aia — Pakeha, Maori.
1 puta etahi kupu papai, aroha hoki ia te Timuaki Mihana, ia Kauri, i a Hori Watene me William R. Perrott. Na te Mayor o Onehunga, a Mr. A. Garside etahi kupu mihi. Na Teito Tangataiti.
Francis Matthew (Kohu)
I mate a Fran. Matthew tamaiti tane tuatoru a Rihi Matthew (Hall) o Tauranga. No te 7 o nga ra o Pepuere i whara i tana mihini mahi (tractor) i aia e mahi ana i nga taru paahi i runga i te whenua o te Pakeha. E rua haora i muri o te aitua ka kitea e takoto ana i raro i tana mihini, kua maru te tinana. E mohio nuitia ana tenei tamaiti i waenganui o tona iwi, i pa mamae hoki tona matenga ki tona hapu kia Xgati-ranginui. E rua tekau ma rima tonu una tau. e toru ana tamariki.
Hei tohu tenei kia tatou, kore rawa tatou e mohio ki te haora e hau kotia ai to tatou haere i tenei ao, na reira kia. mau tonu o tatou ringaringa ki te tokotoko rino.
Haere e tama ki te Kai-hanga. O matou roimata hei whaka- mahara i o tika, i o he. Ko te Ariki to tatou piringa. Ko Ia he horoi atu i o tatou he. Na Hori Hooro.
Aperira, 1941 TE KARERE 623
HOANI TE WHATAHORO TIURI
Na Tuati Meha
Koia tenei tetahi o nga kaumatua i a ia te matauranga i heke J
! iho i nga Whare Wananga. Te whakapapa i a ia, nga korero |
\ o nehe i a ia, me te mita o te reo i a ia. Ka korero ana tenei ♦
! kaumatua i roto i nga hui, kore rawa e rangona he turituri, huri J
\ tonu atu te mata o te tangata ki a ia, me te taringa ki te whaka- |
♦ rongo. Ko te kohatu whakamaharatanga ki a ia, ko ana puka- ♦ j puka "Te Kauwae Runga" me te "Kauwae Rare"
I tu ia i etahi turanga nunui a te Kawanatanga, ara, i tu » Ateha ia i roto ite Kooti Whenua Maori.
I tona kitenga i te marama, i te tika, i te hangai o nga J
I tikanga o te Hahi e huaina hetia nei e te ao, ko te Hahi Momona, |
| ki nga whakaakoranga i roto ite Paipera, ka uru mai raua ko j
J tana wahine ki roto ki te Hahi. Koia tetahi tangata marama ki j
♦ te korero i ona tikanga. I
TRAVELLING TO HUI TAU
Due to the conditions that prevail it is our lot that our trans- port to Nuhaka shall in the majority be by rail.
Arrangements have been finalised with the Railways Department that all people travelling to Hui Tau will receive a reduction of 20 per cent, of the ordinary fare to Nuhaka from whatever station they leave.
The Ngapuhi people are leaving from the North on the 8th April, which is a Tuesday. They will spend that night in Auckland (probably at the Maori Hostel), and leave Auckland on the afternoon express at about three o'clock in the afternoon, Wednesday, 9th. All intending passengers from localities that connect with the Main Trunk line are advised to enquire at your nearest railway station about trains to connect with the 3 p.m. express from Auckland, Wed- nesday, April 9th. Special carriages are reserved for yon. These carriages will go right through to Napier from Auckland, where the first change will be made to another train.
Passengers who are not travelling by this train from PalmerstOE North to Napier are advised that the train from Napier to Nuhaka will not leave Napier until after the arrival of the Wellington-Napier Express, which is due in Napier at about 5 p.m.
Special certificates already signed by President Cowley will be made available to all who intend travelling by train to Hui Tau. These forms must be signed and properly tilled in by the person
going to the llui and then given in at vmir railway station. This
form entitles you to a 20 per cent, reduction in your fare return
to Nuhaka. Your fare to llui Tau will be one-fifth cheaper than the ordinary fare.
Don't miss the train. There won't be much waiting for anyone.
Be at the Stations on time. The main thing to remember not to miss the tram.
TE KARERE Aperira, 1941
" Blessing — Mother "
By Win. Mannering
We all, T think, arc apt to take- our greatest blessings for granted
and notice more the less important. Among our greatesl material blessings are such things as light, heat, water and numerous neces- sities that are ours from time to time — and good mothers. Being almost universal — good mothers — they are nol fully realised and appreciated until lost. Who, for instance, can realise the blessing of sight so well as he who lost it — the blind? Just so, no one realises the blessing of a good mother except he who has lost his.
Mothers themselves sometimes do not fully realise their own importance in the scheme of life or they would surely he more care- ful, hoth in regard to their own health and in their example to those over whom they exert such a great influence. This is perhaps the result of the humility that great love brings; and what love, save that of our Heavenly Father can exceed that of a mother. Paul's definition of charity (love) as given in Corinthians can seldom he fulfilled by any human love except a mother's, all others seem to he tainted with selfishness or mixed with gratitude in comparison.
There is no "give or take" in her love, it is all "give." Any other human love may he killed by ill-treatment, but that of a mother seems at times to he almost increased by it. We have probably all heard of fathers who have cast off their children for some reason or other. but seldom indeed do we hear it of a mother.
Did you ever wonder, as I have, when reading the parable of the Prodigal Son, what his poor mother thought of it all. There was evidently no need to mention her. We know how she must have felt about it.
Our Saviour yearning over His people in Jerusalem likened Himself to a hen wishing to gather her chicks under her wings for comfort and protection, but they would not. The hen. although a symbol of timidity will face and defy the invader and destroyer in defence of her brood. Such is all mother love. "By faith we are saved." and by faith we may move mountains, yet Paul says love is a greater thing and no earthly love is so pure and great as that of our mother's. Shall we not then try to appreciate it more and deserve it better; and love and honour and obey them while they are yet with us.
You who are daughters, treat your mothers as you would wish your children to treat you. Confide in them and trust them above all other humans ; there is no trouble or difficulty you can encounter that they cannot understand or sympathise with, for they were girls once themselves. We who are sons, let us treat our mothers as they deserve ; our best is not good enough for the worst of them. Treat all girls and women as you would wish other men to treat your
Aperira, 1941 TE KARERE 625
mothers and sisters or future wives. To the shame of our sex it has been truly said that "man gets and forgets," while "woman gives and forgives."
Let us do more of the giving and forgiving.
Remember, our mothers have gone to the very gates of death, some of them, alas, through those gates, that we might have our earthly bodies with all the opportunities that they afford us.
You who are mothers and future mothers, try to realise the responsibilities and privileges that you bear as mothers of the race. Your children are the "temples of the Lord" on earth and your influ- ence on them is greater than all other human influences added together. YOU build their foundations. You are the models, let us say into which the molten metal is poured and by the time they leave you, your imprint is there for good or ill. Other influences may modify or alter them a little, corners may be knocked off or rough places plastered over by environment, but the general shape and article is yours. "Train up a child in the way he should go and when he is old he will not depart from it."
SPECIAL— "Te Karere" Salesmen! !
♦
The response to the call issued in the last "Karere" did not measure up to expectations. However, kindly accept the » publishing of your names here as a "Call — Mission" for the period designated from March 15th to April 14th, 1941 — just { one month. Your assistance is urgently desired and our aim | is ONE THOUSAND paid subscriptions by the 14th April, 1941. We need every subscriber oossible. Seek the co-operation of the Branch Presidents, which it is their duty to extend in try- I ing to put "Te Karere" into every home of the Saints.
Your slogan is: "ONE THOUSAND SUBSCRIPTIONS BY HUI TAU." Now go to it.
Salesmen: Paepae Witehira, Wharepouri Heke, Miriata Karaitiana, Tetana Te Hira, Kate Ngakuru, Kura Ngakuru, Pat WiHongi, Lois Going, John Paki, Mita Watene, Roy Matthews, » Joe Kohu, Tipi Kopua, Wi Clark, Tuheni Pohatu, Taylor Mi- haere, Olive Edwards, Elsie Loader, Ruby Thompson. Polly Wi | Neera, Zena Stent, C. A. Stinson, Waaka Enoka. Rang] Haeata, ♦ Weringa Naera, Alice Scott, Emily Mark, Beatrice Dalziel, Don Ross, A. Dudley Amadio, Marjory Jarkman, Marie Tangye.
Begin your campaign now in your own branches. At llui Tau I would like to personally meet all "salesmen" at your
earliest convenience on Friday, April Llth, and will there give you detailed in format ion regarding our position as subscriptions
on our "One Thousand Mark Barometer" that we may all do more intensive campaigning during the Hui.
To the Saints and "Tc Karere" Readers: Please do H01 COme t<> Him Tan without the wherewith to assist us in this
campaign. Thank \<>u very much.
K. Harris,
626
TE KARERE
Aperira, 1(M1
A Discussion on Prayer
Elder Peterson
By Phillip Peterson
Elder Phillip Peterson arrived in New Zealand De- cember 23, 1938, and leas released October 22. 1940, when he left these shares in company with Elders who were asked to return to Zion. His fields of labour were ll'airau. Taranaki, Auckland, Wellington, Dunedin and Christ- church, working mostly with the Pakeha people, but also having in his heart the "aroha" for the Maori people.
Men who believe in God believe in prayer. It is man's oldest means of securing aid, inspiration, revelation and comfort from God. Prayer is not only the means of gaining help, but it provides the means of restoring contact with Deity after aliena- tion through disobedience and sin. Just as physical exercise is necessary for bodily health, so prayer is spiritual exercise that keeps man's soul in good health. As President Grant once said, "When men stop praying for God's spirit, they place their confidence in their own unaided reason, and they gradually lose the spirit of God."
As a Church, we cannot doubt the validity of prayer. The greatest proof of the efficacy of prayer is the existence of this, the restored Church of Jesus Christ. The organization of the Church has its incep- tion in the answer to the prayer of the fourteen-year-old boy, Joseph Smith. In a like manner was the knowledge of the Book of Mormon revealed. The Lord answered the prayer of Brigham Young by show- ing to him in a dream the goal of the westward trek of the Saints. So it was, when President Young beheld the Salt Lake valley, he said with absolute confidence, "This is the Place." We believe in continu- ous revelation, revelation given as it has always been given, in answer to the prayer of faith.
To-day, the world has need to follow the admonition "Return unto me, and I will return unto you saith the Lord of Hosts." Judgments that come upon the world are conditional. The people themselves are responsible for the calamities that befall them, but when they repent and turn unto the Lord, He hears their prayers. One of the most not- able instances of the efficacy of prayer by a nation occurred during the American Civil War. In the dark days of 1863, made terrible by defeats, heavy taxation, low government credit, and army desertions, a national prayer day was called on April 30, 1863. The turning point of the war came in July at the Battle of Gettysburg, and from then on, the war was almost a continual series of victories for the Union. In his proclamation, Lincoln said: "We have received the choicest bless- ings of heaven; we have been preserved in peace and prosperity these many years ; we have grown in numbers, strength, wealth and power as no other nation has ever grown. But the great difficulty of our nation is, we have forgotten God. And we have vainly imagined in the deceitfulness of our hearts that this unusual, outstanding success that has come to our country has been due to some superior wisdom or virtue of our own." I believe this quotation is equally applicable to us of this day.
Some look on prayer only in a crisis or when things go wrong. They remind one of the little girl who announced: "I'm not going to say my prayers to-night, nor to-morrow night, nor the next night. Then if nothing happens, I'm never going to say them again." Real prayer is more than a bedside "gimme"; more than something to turn to in emergencies. It is the spirit we infuse into our normal daily lives. That this spirit is lacking to-day is only too apparent and the
Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints
1941 HUI TAU
52nd ANNUAL CONFERENCE
Nuhaka, H.B., April 1144th, 1941
DEDICATION
To the men and women, numbering more than one thousand, who, during the past sixty years, have come to New Zealand from their homes in America to serve God by serving their fellow-men, this Hui Tau programme for 1941 is respectfully dedicated.
For the first time in the history of the Mission a Hui Tau will be convened without the attendance of Zion Elders. They will be missed by all, but not forgotten by any. The hearts of all of us will be turned to them on this occasion and their hearts will be turned to us.
For the salvation these missionaries have brought to our shores let us honour them by deeds of righteousness ; let us renew the covenants we have made, through baptism at their hands, to the Saints of the Most High God. God bless their memory.
— Matthew Cowley, Mission President.
HUI TAU BOARD
Matthew Cowley (Mission President), Rahiri Harris (Chairman), George Watene (Secretary), Tema Kewene, Hirini Christy, Henare I'. Wihongi, Henare Marshall, Wiremu Karaka, Eriata Nopera, Eru Kupa, Hohepa Heperi, Henare Hamana, Turi Ruruku, Tuati Meha, Tirua Tukiri, Whati Mihaere, Eruera Taurau, Hone Paki.
GENERAL AUTHORITIES
FIRST PRESIDENCY
Heber J. Grant, Prophet, Seer, Revelator and Presidenl of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints; .1. Reuben Clark, Jr., First Counsellor in the Firsl Presidency ; David 0. McKay, Second Coun- sellor 'm the First Presidency.
COUNCIL OF THE QUORUM OF THE TWELVE APOSTLES
Rudger Clawson (President), Reed Smoot, i Smith,
George F. Richards, Jo eph fnelding Smith, Stephen 1.. Richards, Richard li. Lyman, John A. Widt F. Merrill, Cha
Callii . Albert E. Bowen, \ Cannon.
ACTING PATRIARCH TO THE CHURCH
George F. Richards The Counsellors in the First Presidency, the Twelve Apostles, and the Acting Patriarch to the Church as Prophets, Seers and Revelators.
THE FIRST COUNCIL OF THE SEVENTY
Rulon S. Wells, Levi Edgar Young, Antoine R. Ivins, Samuel O. Bennion, John H. Taylor. Rufus K. Hardy, Richard L. Evans.
PRESIDING BISHOPRIC
LeGrand Richards, Presiding Bishop; Marvin O. Ashton, First Counsellor; Joseph L. Wirthlin, Second Counsellor.
NEW ZEALAND MISSION GENERAL AUTHORITIES
Matthew Cowley, President; Elva T. Cowley, Supervisor of All Women's Auxiliary Organisations; George Watene, Secretary; Kelly Harris, Editor of "Te Karere."
AUXILIARY ORGANIZATIONS
Sunday School. — Hohepa M. Meha, Superintendent; Eru T. Kupa, 1st Assistant Superintendent; James R. Elkington, 2nd Assistant Super- intendent; Kelly Harris, Secretary.
Relief Society. — Pare Takana, President; Ani L. Kamau, 1st Coun- sellor; Erena Hepere, 2nd Counsellor; Ida M. Smith, Secretary.
Primary Association. — Elva T. Cowley, President; Waima Davies, 1st Counsellor; Rona V. Attenborough, 2nd Counsellor and Secretary.
Y.M.M.I.A. — Wi Duncan, President; S. R. Tapsell Meha, Secretary.
Y.W.M.I.A. — Una Thompson, President; Heni Tengaio, 1st Counsellor; Wiki Katene, 2nd Counsellor; Annie W. Meha, Secretary.
Genealogical Society. — Tuati Meha, President; William R. Perrott, 1st Counsellor; Teao Wirihana, 2nd Counsellor and Secretary.
DISTRICT PRESIDENTS
Hohepa Heperi, Bay of Islands; Henare P. WiHongi, Whangarei ; William R. Perrott, Auckland; Henry S. Marshall, Waikato; Mane Taurau, Manawatu-Wairarapa; Toke Watene, Hauraki ; Eriata Nopera, Hawke's Bay; Hirini Christy, Mahia; Henare Hammon, Poverty Bay; Turi Ruruku, Wairau.
DAILY SCHEDULE
THURSDAY, April 10 ARRIVAL DAY. KAI— Noon.
M.I.A. Board Meeting time announced. DANCE — 9 p.m. (Sponsored by Hui Tau Board.)
FRIDAY, April 11
5.30 a.m.— MORNING KARAKIA.
7.00 a.m.— KAI.
8.00 a.m.— GENERAL M.I.A. COMPETITORS' MEETING. (L.D.S. Hall.) All M.I.A. competitors and members. No tennis to go on until after this meeting.
TENNIS COMPETITIONS commence immediately after above meeting and continue throughout the day; also Saturday and Mon- day. There must be no playing of tennis during any Session of Conference.
SPECIAL NOTICE — The events of this day may at any time be sus- pended at call of Mission President. The time that is lost due to such action will not in any way affect any other event unless Mission President so directs. The whole Conference Schedule is subject to change at any moment, the order for so doing being the responsibility of Mission President.
The following M.I.A. Competitions will commence at the time announced by M.I.A. officials: —
DRAMA, ELOCUTION, in L.D.S. Hall.
ORATIONS (Men and Women), RETOLD STORY in Chapel.
12.00 noon — KAI.
M.I.A. SINGING COMPETITIONS in L.D.S. Hall.
Quartettes, Trios, Choruses and Solos.
5.00 p.m.— KAI.
7.30 p.m.— PRIMARY PROGRAMME in L.D.S. Hall.
SATURDAY, April 12
6.00 a.m. — MORNING KARAKIA to be conducted in Sleeping Quarters.
7.00 a.m. — KAI.
8.00 a.m. — MISSION SECRETARY to meet with all Branch and Dis- trict Presidencies with their Secretaries. IMPORTANT. PRIMARY MEETING for Officers and Teachers of Branches and Districts.
10.00 a.m.— OPENING GENERAL SESSION OF CONFERENCE in L.D.S. Hall.
12.00 noon — KAI.
LOO p.m.— MUTUAL OFFICERS AND TEACHERS' Meeting with all Branch and District workers. All Presidents and Coun- sellors under direction of Y.M. and Y.W.'s Presidents.
Wi Duncan and Una Thompson. All Secretaries under
direction of Tapsell M< ha and Annie \Y. Meha. All
Teachers and Class Leaders under direction of Heni Te-
and w iki Katene. All Scout Leaders and Explorer
Teachers under direction of Richard Marsh, All Musical
Leaders UTl ler direction of Wi Pere Atnaru.
SfcZA^S?^^ ^^^?S^^
2.00 p.m.— SECOND GENERAL SESSION OF CONFERENCE in L.D.S. Hall.
5.00 p.m. — KAI.
6.00— p.m.— M.A.C. OLD BOYS' ASSOCIATION REUNION. All
former students are requested to attend.
7.30 p.m.— M.I.A. PROGRAMME in L.D.S. Hall.
M.I. A. Competitions to follow. Maori items, Action Songs, Pois, Hakas, etc.
SUNDAY, April 13
6.30 a.m. — MORNING KARAKIA in Sleeping Quarters.
7.00 a.m.— KAI.
8.00 a.m.— GENERAL PRIESTHOOD SERVICE in L.D.S. Hall. GENERAL RELIEF SOCIETY SERVICE in Chapel.
10.00 a.m.— THIRD GENERAL SESSION OF CONFERENCE in L.D.S.
Chapel. (Sunday School Programme with the Auckland District Choir in attendance.) Theme of the Sunday School: "Our Homes and Chapels shall be Beautiful."
12.30 noon— SUNDAY SCHOOL OFFICERS AND TEACHERS' MEET- ING in Chapel.
2.00 p.m.— FOURTH GENERAL SESSION OF CONFERENCE in
L.D.S. Hall. 4.00 p.m. — KAI. 7.00 p.m.— CONCLUDING GENERAL SESSION OF CONFERENCE
in L.D.S. Hall.
MONDAY, April 14— SPORTS DAY
6.30 a.m. — MORNING KARAKIA in Sleeping Quarters.
7.00 a.m.— KAI.
8.30 a.m.— GRAND M.I.A. SPORTS PARADE for all M.I.A. members in their Branch Colours. The Parade is an M.I.A. Competition.
COMPETITIONS—
Gleaners — 220Yds. Sprint.
Basketball (5 a-side). 440Yds. Relay (4 in team).
75Yds. Sprint. 880Yds. Dash.
lOOYds. Obstacle Race. Hop, Step and Jump.
400Yds. Relay (4 in team). High Jump.
Explorers— ^Velin ThJ?Wn-
75Yds. Sprint. Throwing the Discus.
lOOYds. Sprint. bhot-put.
440Yds. Relay (4 in team). Junior Girls —
Men 50Yds. Sprint.
Wood-chop. (Entrance fee 7/6) 220Yds. Relay (4 in team).
Horseshoe Pitching. 75 Yds. Skipping. (Bring own
Tug-o'-War (8 a-side). rope.)
lOOYds. Sprint. Basketball (7 in team).
Aperira, 1941 TE KARERE 627
reason is primarily the lack of family prayers in the home. In a survey among school children, it was found that only one child in eight came from homes that participated in daily family prayers and that in only 35 per cent, of the homes was a blessing asked upon the food. Church leaders have ever emphasized the necessity of family prayer. A sacred responsibility rests upon parents to see that this is carried out and to teach their children to pray. Parents must remember that before they can teach their children to pray, they must first have prayer in their own hearts. "Let your first good morning be to your Father in Heaven." A prayer is a condition of the soul and need not be audible. Secret prayer is a medium through which we can get help and com- fort at any time. Our lives should be such that we can ask God to help us in anything we are doing.
Prayer should be more than always asking for something, it also is an opportunity to offer thanks for past blessings. In human rela- tions, failure to express appreciation for a kindness rendered is almost unpardonable; it is more than fitting to express our appreciation to our Heavenly Father, our best friend. The spirit of prayer should ever govern our actions in the religious field. Through prayer we are promised a testimony of the Book of Mormon; that the "prayer of faith shall save the sick"; and "If any of you lack wisdom, let him ask of God." Prayer is the greatest aid to righteous living; as one man has expressed it, "Praying keeps us from sinning, sinning keeps us from praying."
There is no reason to leave the spirit of prayer out of the business world. The essence of prayer is essentially that of "love thy neigh- bour"; such a spirit would raise business transactions to the highest level. The prophet Alma says: "Cry unto him over the crops of your field, that ye may prosper in them; Cry over the flocks of your fields, that they may increase." But he goes on to say if we pray and then "ye turn away the needy and the naked, and visit not the sick and afflicted and impart of your substance, if ye have, to those in need, I say unto you, if ye do not any of these things, behold, your prayer is vain, and availeth you nothing, and ye are as hypocrites who do deny the faith."
Faith that God hears and answers prayers is a source of never- failing strength. Unless we have that faith it is useless to pray, for "He that cometh to God must believe that He is and that He is a re- warder of them that diligently seek Him." And that faith must be of the active type, we must put forth our own efforts as well as asking for the Lord's aid. It is unfortunate that the phrase "Thy will be done" has come to be associated with a sort of spiritual non-resistance. The emphasis should be placed on doing rather than being done to. This is the spirit of a Scotch preacher who once explained that he prayed as though everything depended on God and then worked as though everything depended on himself. Such a conception of prayer makes it a vital, dynamic force. "Thy will be done — and done by me."
In the world to-day, there is a definite need for a return to prayer and the prayerful attitude in life. Let us not forget the words of the Saviour: "Ask and it shall be given you; seek and ye shall find; knock, and it shall be opened unto you. For everyone that asketh receiveth; and he that seeketh findeth; and to him that knocketh it shall be opened."
* * *
"The Spirit of the Lord will no1 always strive with man. And when the Spirit ceaseth to strive with man then cometh speedy
destruction." — 2 Ncphi 26:11.
628
TE KARERE
Aperira, 1941
PICTURE OF THE MONTH
Among this assemblage are many familiar faces still constantly- seen at Auckland Branch meetings, however there are still many who have been absent. We are indebted to Sister Eva Hunt for this photo- graph, which brings back to memory the associations with President Jenkins and his family and a few others who have since migrated to Zion.
APPRECIATION
President Cowley and myself do sincerely appreciate the assistance given Te Karere staff since the Elders returned to Zion. Your efforts in personally helping in the publish- ing, posting and other necessary work that has made the publishing of Te Karere possible during the past months shall go down in the annals of this Mission as Te Karere workers, people to whom the Saints throughout the Mission are indebted, for your labour has been that of love and service.
Marie Tangye, Sybil Duckworth, Marie Harris, Harold Stokes, Marjory Jackman, Edward Reid, Matthew Tarawa, Mateen Jensen and the staff of Business Printing Works (Mr. Apperley, Jack, George and Geoff.), we sincerely thank you and say that what reward you receive will come from on High.
It is our pleasure and wish to also express our appre- ciation for the very good work of Te Karere correspondents and contributors.
Aperira, 1941
TE KARERE
629
SUNDAY SCHOOL
Andante.
PRELUDE
After Cowex.
gppppg-n
mmm
SACRAMENT GEM
While of these emblems we partake
In Jesus' name and for His sake,
Let us remember and be sure
Our hearts and hands are clean and pure.
POSTLUDE
Soft 9ft stop
mmm
m^m^mimm
CONCERT RECITATION
Doctrine and Covenants 84:106.
"And if any man among you be strong in the Spirit, let him take with him him that is weak, that he may be edified in all meekness, that he may become strong also."
KORERO A NGAKAU
Akoranga me nga Kawenata 84: 106.
"A ki te mea kei waenganui ia koutou tetahi tangata e toa ana i runga i te Wairua, mana e tango i te tangata ngoikore hei hoa mana kia whai pai ai ia i runga i te mahaki, kia manga ai ia he mea toa ano hoki."
HYMNS
"Beautiful Mountain I Ionic" I 'age U)2
"He Wa Tona" Wharangi 50
630 TE KARERE Aperira, 1941
PRIMARY
MEMORY GEM:
"In the night or in the day Heavenly Father hears us pray.'
LESSONS:
FIRST WEEK OUR HEAVENLY FATHER'S CARE
Objective:
Our Heavenly Father will protect us if we put our trust in Him.
Suggestions for Teaching:
One of the great opportunities which come to the teacher of small children is that of helping the child learn to pray. This she does by building an attitude of appreciation for the things near him that make him happy. The teacher should in a kindly way encourage the child to say the prayer by himself no matter how short and simple it may be. Having the child stand close to her with a loving arm pressed closely around him will give confidence and encouragement. Sometimes a timid child may be encouraged to respond if the teacher says, "If you'll try, I'll help you."
Prayer pictures will help in the approach.
Lesson Story:
DANIEL IN THE DEN OF LIONS
Ever and ever so long ago, there lived in Jerusalem a prince named Daniel. He had a dear mother who loved him. She taught him just what he should do. She told him about Heavenly Father and how He wanted every one to pray to Him three times a day — in the morning and at noon and at night. So Daniel did pray to Heavenly Father three times every day. His mother also told him what he should eat and drink to be strong and healthy.
You remember that Daniel was one of the four brave princes that was taken from his home in Jerusalem to Babylon by a king. Because Daniel looked so strong and well he was taken to the King's palace to live. He was among a strange people and in a strange land but he was a brave boy. He remembered what his mother had said and would eat only things to make him strong. He remembered his prayers, too; so that when he was a man he was strong and wise. It was the very strongest and wisest man in the kingdom that the king needed to help him rule the people. The king had set a great many princes over the people. Over these princes he set three presidents and he chose Daniel to be the first president. Daniel could do much more for the people because he asked Heavenly Father to help him. That made the princes and presidents angry, and they tried to find out something bad about Daniel to tell the king. But Daniel was honest and faithful and they could find nothing about him that was not good.
Then they made a wicked plan. They knew that every morning and evening and in the middle of the day, Daniel opened his window facing towards his old home, and prayed to Heavenly Father, just as he had done ever since he was a boy. So the presidents and the princes met together and went before the king. "King Darius, live forever," they said. "Will you make a law that whosoever shall pray to God or to a man, for thirty days, save to thee, 0 king, he shall be cast into the den of lions." It pleased the king to think that everyone would be praying to him, so he signed the wicked law.
Aperira, 1941 TE KARERE 631
Daniel read the new law and knew it could not be changed. It meant that if he knelt down to pray he would be put in the den of lions. What do you think he did? He went into his house and opened wide the windows facing towards the country where his home was. There he knelt down and prayed and gave thanks to God. That night he did the same thing and again the next morning. He could have left the windows closed, but he was not ashamed to have anyone see him pray, and he was not afraid. The presidents and the princes were watching and when they saw Daniel kneeling beside the window, and heard his prayer, they hurried to the king.
"0 king, hast thou not made a law," they said, "that every man who prays to any God or man for thirty days, save to thee, shall be cast into a den of lions?"
The king answered, "The thing is true."
Then they said, "Daniel obeys thee not. He is praying three times every day for we have seen and heard him."
The king was very unhappy when he heard this, for he loved Daniel. He wanted to save his friend but the law was made and he could not change it.
With a heart full of sorrow the king sent Daniel to the lion's den. The door was opened and Daniel walked in unafraid. The king was very sad when he said to Daniel, "The God whom thou serveth con- tinually, He will save thee."
The king went back to his palace, but he could not eat, nor listen to music, he was so unhappy. All night he lay awake and thought of Daniel. The next morning early he went to the lion's den and called, "Daniel, 0 Daniel, servant of the living God, is thy God, whom thou servest, able to deliver thee from the lions?" He listened for a moment. In a loud, strong voice Daniel said: "0 king, live forever. My God hath sent His angels, and shut the lion's mouths, that they have not hurt me."
The king was filled with gladness. He sent for his servants to come and open the door, and Daniel walked out. Then the king made another law. He sent word to all his people to pray, as Daniel did, to the Heavenly Father.
Conversation After the Story:
What did the king think of Daniel who had courage to pray be- cause he knew it was right? What will our friends think of us if we stand for the right? What is the very best way to begin our day right? What is the best way to close our day? What may we expect if we ask our Heavenly Father to watch over us and protect us?
SECOND WEEK
THE BEAUTIFUL WORLD Object:
To help the children to appreciate the beautiful things our Heavenly Father has made for us.
Let them look through the window and name the things they can see. The trees, the mountains, the ice and snow which give them sleigh- ing and coasting. In some places they may see trees, flowers, birds and beautiful gardens. If this is not possible use pictures or poems. Talk about the goodness of our Heavenly Father in giving us so many lovely things. Say the poem:
"All things l»right and beautiful,
All creatures great ami small.
All things wise and wonderful, The Lord God made them all."
632 TE KARERE Aperira, 1941
Lesson Story:
THE CREATION
What makes this great world so beautiful? The lovely sunshine, the rivers, the trees and flowers, the birds and animals — oh, I am sure you could tell me many more things. Long, long ago Heavenly Father knew He would need a place for His children to live, so He began to make the world.
Once there was no daytime. It was all night. Father in Heaven knew that the people would not be happy if it were always dark so He said "Let there be light," and there was light. And God called the light day and the darkness night.
Heavenly Father knew that His children would need rest, there- fore He planned to have the darkness come, so that they might have a long restful sleep and wake up bright and fresh the next beautiful day. Who else needs rest? Even the flowers wouldn't grow so well if the sun shone all the time. Some flowers close at night and wait for the sunbeams to awaken them. Can you tell me a flower that does this? Some leaves close at night also.
But Father in Heaven didn't leave it very dark all the time. What did He make to shine in the sky at night? The moonlight is so beauti- ful! Have you seen it sparkling on the snow, so brightly that there seemed to be diamonds shining on the ground? Heavenly Father was so good to give us the moon. Ask mother if you may go out of doors and see the moon when it is full. Or you may look through the win- dow and see it. And be sure to look at the lovely stars, too! How many stars did He make? More than we can count. When you look at the moon and the stars, will you remember to say these lovely words : "God our Father made the night, Made the moon and stars so bright."
Then Heavenly Father made the sun to give us light by day. Tell me some of the things the sun does for us.
Then Heavenly Father made heavens and earth and the great seas of water. (Have pictures to illustrate.)
In the earth there were many tiny seeds of all the trees and bushes and flowers. But they did not spring up because the ground was hard and dry.
So God caused a soft, warm mist to come up from the earth to water all the ground. The mist made the ground soft and warm and the seeds sent up little shoots which grew tall and green. There were trees and bushes and flowers and grass and all the lovely growing things. (Ask the children to name some of the trees and flowers they know; talk about their beauty and uses. Show pictures of beautiful places.)
When the flowers began to bloom, and the grass began to grow in the fields Heavenly Father made the fishes to live in the rivers and seas. Then He made the birds to fly in the air and then all the animals. (Let the children tell the names and uses of the animals. Show pictures.)
When the earth was all made and ready Heavenly Father sent the very first people to live on the earth. You see He made everything for His children that they might be happy.
Conversation After the Story:
Have you ever been to a very beautiful place with your father and mother? (Let the children tell of trips to parks, gardens, lakes or ocean.) Whom did you think of when you saw big mountains? Beauti- ful flowers?
Aperira, 1941 TE KARERE 633
THIRD WEEK
WHY PEOPLE LIKE YOU Objective:
The surest way of holding friends is through simple acts of kindness.
Suggestions for Teaching:
It will be well to review again the lessons given on the third week of the previous months. The last lesson "How Do You Act," should tie very closely with this one. These lessons should be helpful to boys and girls alike. Both need development along these lines. There is a lack of courtesy in many of our children that needs correction.
If in your preparation you find that there is too much material suggested for this lesson choose that which you like best and make your lesson plan accordingly.
Strive for interest, enrich your lessons with pictures and personal experiences and your problems in discipline will decrease in proportion.
Lesson Approach:
Think of some one whom you like very much. Don't tell his or her name. Now tell why you like that person. (Teacher write reasons on the board or large piece of paper. You will probably find that your list will include : cheerfulness, friendliness, cleanliness, unselfish- ness, a readiness to help, etc.) Think now of some one who is not so pleasant and whom people do not like so well. What makes them unpleasant? (Make another list and you will no doubt find that it will include : selfishness, untidiness, frowning, complaining, etc. Look at the lists with the children and you will observe that most children like cheerful boys and girls and do not a selfish one, etc.)
If you have been going around with a frown on your face, try to smile oftener. Little "But Then" made everyone happy because she was happy.
Let the children say:
"Be happy all day long Each day you'll find it true. That he whose heart has joy and song Gives joy to others, too."
Lesson Story:
THE SILVER SKATES
"Hurry up!" shouted Gretchen. "It's almost time to be there."
"Yes, yes," replied Hans, "I am coming soon; just wait until I can fmd my skates."
Soon the two children were scurrying through the streets of a little Dutch town toward the canals. Ice was everywhere that January day, and the daily papers had announced that it was thick enough for the thousands of people who were to look on at the skating contest, an annual event, in which only the children took part.
What a merry scene it was. Every yard of the three-mile run was lighted by crackling fires; banners waxed in the breezes, and little booths had been erected where the hungry and thirsty might find hot cakes and warm drinks.
The start for the race in which Gretchen and Hans were to take part lay opposite one of these booths, and the first bell had already rung
when they came t<> t he .anal.
634 TE KARERE Aperira, 1941
"Skates on!" rang out a loud voice, and a hundred children stooped and fastened on their skates.
How bright and excited they all looked, for was not the prize to be a pair of silver skates, the finest ever seen?
"Three miles and back," rang out the voice of the manager again. "Turn at the blue flag and skate back to the starting point."
"My, what a long distance," said an American who had come many miles to see the famous race of the children.
"O, that's nothing for a Dutch girl or boy," said a man standing near. "What would you think of twenty-five miles and back? That's something like; but they are brought up to it, you know."
"Hark!" Another bell, then the word, "go!" and off start the children, all clad in loose-knitted blouses, baggy trousers, with gay- coloured caps upon their heads!
With hearts beating rapidly, Gretchen and Hans began the return trip. Their round faces were red and glowing, and the sparks fairly flew from the irons of their skates. They turned not to the right nor left, but went straight to the mark, while the other skaters were far in the rear; in fact, most of them, had given up the race long ago.
Only a mile separated them from the booth where they had started — a half mile — a few yards — when suddenly with a crash, a fall, and poor, little Gretchen lay with her face to the cold ice.
"Just a yard more and she would have won!" exclaimed the Ameri- can again, as Hans turned to help his little playmate. Gretchen was a brave child, for had she not behind her a race of brave and hardy people? Although she had stumbled on the hard ice and was badly hurt, not a tear was shed.
"It is yours!" she cried, as she tried to rise. But Hans shook his head. "No, Gretchen," he said, "the silver skates are yours. You were ahead when you fell, I could not have won, anyway," and he helped her forward to the booth where lay the prize in its beautiful red velvet case.
"They are yours, my little man, and bravely won, said the manager to Hans, heartily.
Without a word Hans took the silver skates and handed them to Gretchen. Gretchen was so happy she didn't know whether to laugh or cry. As they walked away together the great crowd set up a shout for Hans who was so unselfish.
Conversation After the Story:
Do you think Hans really wanted the skates for himself? What proved that he did? When he gave them to Gretchen what did that prove? Could you have done it? You needn't answer aloud, just think about it.
FOURTH WEEK
COURAGE TO DO THE RIGHT Objective:
If we sincerely try to do right, our Heavenly Father will help us.
Suggestions for Teaching:
The truth to be taught through this lesson is one that should be impressed early in the life of the child. Consider it carefully and be sure that you believe it yourself. Perhaps you can think of personal experiences that will prove it. There are many heroes in the world, some have shown great courage in battle, some have risked their lives
(Continued on page 36)
Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints
MISSIONARIES from ZION . . .
since the arrival of Pres. Matthew Cowley
^1
Matthew Cowley
Eleanor J. Cowley Elva T. Cowley Don L. Cotterell
M . M . I'.Ai MGARTNER ( r. M . RAMSEV
\\ . M. Mali
?!S^^H^^S^^^%^^S^^^^^
^^^S^^p^^^^^,^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
J. R. Blackmore
L. F. Toronto
J. V. Haslam
E. Newman
R. A. LAMBERT
F. W. Aldous
R. L. Cardwell
C.R. Jones
T. P. Wheelwright
S^^H^^S^^^^^^^^^^^^^H^^^^^^r 1
M. J. Udy, Jr.
A. H. Lambert
G. P. Langtox
H. R. RURNINGHAM
J. M. BODELL
B. T. Wride
I). M. Evans
V. M. Bi
II. \\. KlRKU VM
C. B. Mason
W. .W. Goodwill
G. C. Fredkickson
W. D. Brown
L. G. Dastrup
C. R. Jones
R. L. Simpson
J. B. Grant
R. E. Crandall
s?
|
Kl |
Pi |
|||
|
SH m |
■fl |
Llk |
A. H. Wallace
I. J. Price
T. R. Kindred
L. D. Saunders
C. H. Felt
R..E. I! V.MAS
r
r 7 W «« r
I). V. Taylor
\\ . E. M \\\
^Hs^^S^^Hs^ \^
R. L. Beasley
W. J. Anderson
M. C. Wheeler
|
1 If— 1 y MB |
■mm M |
O. W. Owens
W. E. Smith
D. B. Crawford
■llllllllllllllllllllillllllllllillilllllllllllllflllll G. R. Beisinger
A&
,
C. D. Kirkland
W. Westenskow
Z. P. Murdock E. W. Campbell
W. Grange
E. B. Bigler R. C. Midgley Jr. K. C. Pendleton
A. B. F
M. .1. Smi
I). M. Handy
H. D. COBBLEY
M. E. Lewis
D. B EEC HER
C. S. Johnston
P. Peterson
H. HOLLINGWORTH
D. G. Parker
J. T. Later
E. A. Hutchinson
L. G. Whitney
C. T. Fawson
L. W. Lynn
f fc_
D. W. Curtis
A. J. Keddington
ill G. S. Henderson
■mffiiiiiiifliiniiiiii iiiiiiiiiiiiimiiiMiiiiiiM m^^^^
-.....:■■.:.;,■ ■...■.-..■. :;,
I). A. Harri:
W!»...
I.I. \lli N
^^#?
|
V^T griffe 4Mb *^J |
G. M. Acomb M. M. Browning J. B. Jam
H. D. Brown A. V. Stirling
L. D. Allen
^
C. L. McBride
L. W. Watts
W. S. Ottley
Aperira, 1941
TE KARERE
635
President M. Charles Wood, Ki.ii.m Wood, and Janei
BOUND VOLUME OF " TE KARERE," 1940
A limited number of bound volumes of the L940 issue of Te Karere will soon be available. Place your orders as soon is possible with Te Karere, Box 72, Auckland.
636 TE KARERE Aperira, 1941
(Continued from page 34)
to save others in floods, fires and storms, and have done it without complaint and without wishing for a reward. But there are greater heroes than these. The boy or girl who can do his or her daily duty in the right way, never afraid to do what is right, no matter what the result may be, and without complaining, is braver than those who do daring deeds. The very best kind of courage is that kind that never fears to do right. The only thing to be really afraid of, is doing wrong.
Lesson Story:
THREE PRINCES WHO SHOWED COURAGE
Our last Bible story was about Daniel, one of the four boys who was taken from his home to the country of the king who prayed to images of wood and stone.
This story is about King Nebuchadnezzar and Daniel's three friends, Meshach, Shadrach and Abednego. They had become great men now, and helped the king rule over the country.
Nebuchadnezzar was a very rich king and had princes and rulers for his servants. These servants wanted to please their King so they praised him and told him how great he was.
Nebuchadnezzar heard himself praised so much that very soon he began to think only of his own riches and power and forgot all about our Heavenly Father. Then he did just the same thing that many kings before had done. He built a gorgeous image of shining yellow gold. He set it on a plain, a field with no trees on it. Then he called all the most important people in the kingdom, the princes, the governors and the rulers, to come and see the image he had set up. From all the country round they came, and when they were gathered together they stood before the great image.
Among them were — whom do you think? Yes. Shadrach, Me- shach and Abednego. The Bible does not say that Daniel was there. He was probably in another part of the country.
On one side of the great image there wrere men with musical instru- ments. They were not playing, they were waiting and listening to hear what the king wanted them to do in honour of his wonderful image. Soon a messenger of the king came out before the people. He called in a loud voice that all might hear: "To you it is commanded, 0 people, that at what time ye hear the sound of any kind of music, ye fall down on your knees and worship the golden image that Nebuchadnezzar, the king, hath set up. And whosoever falleth not down and worshippeth shall the same hour be cast into the midst of a burning fiery furnace." The king gave the command. The musicians began to play, and as soon as the music was heard by the people, they all fell down and wor- shipped the golden image that Nebuchadnezzar had set up. I said "all," but there were three who did not bow down to the image. They stood up straight and looked before them. Can you tell their names? They heard the music and they knew the punishment which would come to those who disobeyed. But these good men would not obey the king for they loved God, our Heavenly Father, and would worship no other.
Some of the princes went near to the king and said: "O king, there are certain men thou hast set over part of thy kingdom, Shadrach, Meshach and Abednego. These men have disobeyed thee. They do not serve thy gods, nor worship the golden image which thou hast set up."
Then Nebuchadnezzar was angry and commanded that these three men be brought to him. He spoke to them and said: "Is it true, O Shadrach, Meshach and Abednego, that you serve not my gods nor worship the golden image I have set up? Now if you be ready when you hear the sound of music and fall down and worship the image
Aperira, 1941 TE KARERE 637
which I have made, all will be well with you. But if you worship not you shall be cast the same hour into the midst of a burning fiery fur- nace, and who is that God that shall deliver thee out of mine hands?"
But they trusted in their God and stood up boldly and answered, "Our God whom we serve is able to deliver us from the burning fiery furnace, and He will deliver us out of thine hand, O King. But if not, be it known unto thee, 0 King, that we will not serve thy gods, nor worship the golden image which thou hast set up."
When the king heard their brave answer he was very angry. He was so angry he commanded that the furnace be heated seven times hotter than usual. Then he commanded that the three princes be cast into the furnace.
In a few minutes Nebuchadnezzar called out to his men and said, "Did we not cast three men bound into the fire?"
They answered, "True, O King."
Then Nebuchadnezzar said, "Lo, I see four men walking in the midst of the fire and they are not hurt, and the fourth man is like unto the Son of God."
Nebuchadnezzar then went to the furnace and cried, "Shadrach, Meshach and Abednego, ye servants of God, come forth, come hither." And they came out from the midst of the fire.
Then the king and all the people who were gathered together, saw the three men as strong and well as they were before they were cast into the furnace. They were not hurt. Not a hair of their heads was singed, not even the smell of fire was upon them. Then Nebuchad- nezzar spoke and said, "Blessed be the God of Shadrach, Meshach and Abednego, who hath sent His angel, and delivered His servants that trusted in Him."
Then he sent forth a command that no one should speak against the God who delivered His children from the fiery furnace.
So the king gave even higher places to these three brave men who dared to do right.
STATISTICS
BIRTHS LOVE— To Mr. and Mrs. Luke Love,
WITEHIRA— To Mr. and Mrs. Paepae a daughter, August 17, 1940.
Whitehira, a son, February 2, 1941, at HAMMOND — To Mr. and Mrs. J. Ham-
Kawa Kawa. mond, a son, July 5, 1940.
SHORTLAND — To Mr. and Mrs. John WI NEERA— To Mr. and Mrs. Matae
Shortland, a daughter, at Pipiwai. Wi Neera, a son, January 4. 1941.
RETI — To Mr. and Mrs. Tom Reti, a OSBORNE — To Mr. and Mrs. Osborne
daughter, February 6, 1941. (nee Honoria Poananga), a daughter, Julv
TE HIRA — To Mr. and Mrs. Tupana Te 3, 1940.
Hira, at Horotiu, a daughter, February MARSH — To Mr. and Mrs. Watene
13, 1941. Marsh of Korongata. a daughter.
MURPHY — To Mr. and Mrs. Murphy CHASE — To Mr. and Mrs. George P.
of Kohunui, a son, January 11, 1941. Chase, a son, January 17, 1941, at Te
ARTHUR — To Mr. and Mrs. Karewa Hauke.
Arthur of Porirua, a son, November 3, SMITH— To Mr. and Mrs. Dave Smith,
1940. Jr., a son. December 10, 19 10.
CHOIRS TO SING DURING SESSION OF CONFERENCE
The Sessions of Conference which commence at 1 0 a.m. Saturday, 12th April, and again at 2 p.m., with three more on Sunday, will be the times when a choir will each provide the music for the Conference. The competition for the choirs will also take place when each has a Session.
The first choir to take the stand will be Nuhaka, then Korongata, Auckland District, Taniaki and Iluria or Ngapuhi.
Branch Presidents are here asked to be responsible \'ov your choir's music for these Sessions of Conference, The competition num- ber is the Hallelujah Chorus in Maori.
638
TE KARERE
Apcrira, 1941
NEWS FROM THE FIELD
AUCKLAND DISTRICT Reported by Rona V. Attenborough.
Visitors to Auckland during the last few weeks include Sister Isabel Amadio, who came in to visit her father, who has been ill. We were glad to see Sister Amadio again, but sorry that illness was the cause of her visit. We sincerely pray that her father will speedily recover. Another visitor, though a more or less permanent one, is Bro. Win Smiler from Gisborne, who is attending the Auckland University and studying law. I guess we had better watch our P's and Q's, what with a policeman (Bro. Cliff Pente- cost) and now a blooming — or should I say "budding" — lawyer in our midst. Bro. Smiler, by the way, is mansioned at the Mission Home, which has been under the new management of Messrs. Kelly Harris and Company for the last week or so, during the temporary absence of Presi- dent and Sister Cowley, who have been visiting the South Island — and I do mean South Island, seeing that Dunedin was their destination.
Lost, Stolen, or Strayed, or perhaps just missing from the precincts of the Auckland Chapel and the Mission Home — the cheery countenance of Sister Pente- cost, who is visiting her daughter Cecily in Wellington — we think. Have a nice time, Sister Pentecost, but don't forget to come back.
We are very happy to report that Sis- ter Gladys Reid is now well on the way to recovery after a nasty illness, and that Bro. Hemi Paki has returned to his home in Kopuku, Waikato.
The Auckland Branch Sunday School has been re-organised owing to the fact that Bro. Kelly Harris has been appointed to the Mission Sunday School Superin- tendency. and Brother Chas. Billman is Acting President, with Brother Rosser Pprrott and Brother Desmond Billman as Counsellors. These two young men are dividing their time between their mili- tary duties and the Sunday School, and we wish them success in both undertak- ings. Expected back in Auckland is Sis- ter Mar.iorie Jackman, who has been tour- ing on South Island. She has been away considerably longer than we think is ne- cessary just to see the sights, and we are wondering what the added attraction can be. However, all we can do is wait until this young lady returns and gives an account of herself. Auckland's loss is Nelson's gain, now that Brother and Sis- ter Bill Burge have been transferred from here. We would like to assure them that our prayers are for their safe keep- ing: and their happiness and prosperity in thiB new sphere.
Brother Hepa Meha, in training at Levin Air Force Camp, is reported to be doing well, but he misses Auckland, and we just cannot imagine why.
The Onehunga Branch of the Auckland District is certainly in full swing, and be- lieve me when I say that they are going
to give a very good account of them- selves at the coming Hui Tau. There is nothing quite so keen and enthusiastic as a "Mormon" when he gets going, and these "Mormons" have been going for some time — and they are not wearing out either.
Auckland is proud to announce the New Zealand premiere of the motion pic- ture "Brigham Young," which will com- mence at the Century Theatre on Friday, March 14. This should prove an excel- lent means of putting Church history into the hands of other folks, so, Saints, roll along and take your friends — if you are doubtful about talking to them, take them to see this movie, and it will talk for itself.
Bro. Ernest Montague (Monty to you) who has been in the Narrow Neck Terri- torial Camp since last August or there- abouts, has been transferred for overseas service, and though it will be some time before he actually leaves, we would like to assure him that we are proud of our boys in uniform who have answered the call of King and Country, and we wish him the greatest possible success and God-speed wherever he may go. Sister Nan Montague, however, will remain in Auckland — I'm afraid !
Well, I guess this is all this time, so adieu, kind friends, adieu.
MAHIA DISTRICT Reported by Elsie Loader
Nuhaka Mutual commenced on Febru- ary 4th with an opening social conducted by President Eru H. Tengaio. which was not attended as well as usual, due to so many of the young people accepting em- ployment away from home Practices for Hui Tau work have been going ahead. Jim Loader, second counsellor in M.I.A., was confined to the Wairoa Hospital for an appendicitis operation. He is now home again but a little disappointed at not being physically well enough to take part in the sporting activities of the Hui Tau.
Tahaenui Primary held another very successful bazaar, which further strength- ened their position financially. Sister Te Wai Haronga received appointment as Teacher of Arts and Crafts for this Primary. Kopuawhara officers held a New Year gift party for their Primary children, where the children really en- joyed themselves as well as being happy over the gifts. All Primaries in the dis- trict are working hard with their Hui Tau responsibilities.
Greetings to the Zion Elders. Hui Tau is here and your presence will be greatly missed, but we know that you will be with us in thought and prayer. Your letters and messages to the Saints of this district have been greatly appre- ciated. Keep up "our" fine missionary spirit for we are expecting to hear good tidings of you. That is how you will continue to help us most.
Aperira, 1941
TE KARERE
639
The following were honourably released from their positions in the Nuhaka Branch Sunday School. Pera Tengaio as first assistant superintendent, Taka To- roaiwhiti second assistant super., Perea Smith as teacher of the deacon's class. Appointments were Taka Toroaiwhiti to first assistant super., Perea Smith second assistant super., Te Wai Haronga teacher of deacon's class, Mereaira Whaanga as- sistant teacher to the Kindergarten class, William Winiana assistant teacher to the Gospel doctrine class (Maori) and Sister Louie Mataira assistant organist. Sister Ata Pedersen has been appointed first counsellor in the Nuhaka Primary.
We are thrilled to have another active Hui Atawhai in the district. The Ta- haenui group are working under the supervision of the Nuhaka Branch. Their memberships include many non-Mormons, but display definite interest and enthusi- asm in their work, having already com- pleted two quilts and are enjoying their lesson work. The Nuhaka workers in the Belief Society are very busy with their own Society work as well as doing their share, and perhaps more, of the Hui Tau preparation work. Visitors to the Hui are assured of comfortable places for their rest while at the Hui. The men have been out gathering in the wood re- quired for Conference, having spent over a week in this project.
Brother Eru Tengaio is to be heartily congratulated on his selection and ap- pointment to the Mission M.I. A. Board.
Sister Molly Tengaio, who has been suffering in the Wairoa and Gisborne hospitals with inflamatory rheumatism, has now been transferred to Rotorua Sanatorium, where we hope she will re- cover speedily.
HAWKE'S BAY DISTRICT
Reported by Olive Edwards and
Taylor Mihaere
March 6th was spent in farewell at Korongata to honour Heber "Nu" Smith, who is home on final leave. A large gathering from the surrounding villages and relatives from Nuhaka really enjoyed themselves in honouring Nu.
This is to Mutuals in the district: Please forward all reports to Olive Edwards at the end of each month. Your co-operation is eagerly sought this year. Kindly help us.
Another farewell party was held at Paki Paki in honour of Ronald Eria, who was also on final leave. People from Korongata also did the honours there.
The M.I. A. Sports Committee, compris- ing George Randell, Pu Edwards, Mane King] and Pera Tengaio, convened on the 9th March to finalise the Hui Tau sport- ing activities. The report points to a very satisfactory meet.
Sister Harriet Reid is a patient of the Napier Hospital after an operation , for peritonitis. At present her condition is favourable. (We are praying for your speedy r. -co very , Harriet. Sell] and Man'.', the same goes tor yon loo. Ka.)
Brother Eta Puriri was rushed to the
Memorial Hospital, Hastings, on March 8th for an appendicitis operation.
Luxford Walker of Tahoraiti gained a University Scholarship while attending the Dannevirke High School, which has enabled him to attend 'Varsity at Dun- edin, incidently Nitama Paewai, his cousin, gained the same scholarship a year ago from Dannevirke and is in his second year at Dunedin. Nitama, while at Dannevirke High School, gained the honour of being the first Maori to be Head Prefect of the School. Luxford was also a Prefect. Both of these young men attained very high scholastic hon- ours, and we wish them continued attain- ment in their various fields of learning. A farewell for Luxford was well attended by his many friends and relatives, where all enjoyed the many items that were given. Among the presentations made was one on behalf of the Branch by Bro. Wi Duncan.
The Tamaki choir is working so well that they may be represented at Hui Tau under the direction of Richard Marsh, as- sisted by Wi Duncan. We are also pleased that our "Wi" Duncan has been ap- pointed Mission M.I. A. president for the men.
The Tahoraiti Maori Scout Troop at- tended the memorial service at Danne- virke for the late Lord Baden Powell, World Chief Scout, on February 23rd. March 1st was spent picnicking with the Primary and School children. The suc- cess of this day will be remembered by all who attended. We do thank and ap- preciate the efforts of the School Com- mittee and teachers, along with Primary officers, for making such a day possible.
Another farewell was held March 6th in honour of Smiler Nikora, John Tatere, Ron Chase, Barney Rautahi, Claude Nicholson and Bob Hoterini, who were on final leave before service overseas. The evening's entertainment was under the able supervision of Karauria Wirihana as M.C. Wiremu Mihaere made suitable presentations to the "boys" from the people.
WAIKATO DISTRICT Reported by Dave Ormsby and Douglas Whatu A very successful Hui Pariha was re- cently held at Puketapu, Huntly, where the new District President, headed by Henry S. Marshall, was to supervise the work. It was regrettable, however, that President Marshall was unable to he in attendance and personally conduct his Hui, this responsibility fell upon the
shoulders of Tetana R. Te Hira and
George Stockman, his counsellors, with
Bro. Tetana conduc ! inn:.
Many visitors blessed ns with their presence. The Hawke's Hay people were certainly appreciated, among them were Eriata Nopera, Stuarl Meha. Teao Wiri- hana, Wiremu Mihaere. Tare Takana. Kma
Nopera. Taratl Pera, Huihul Pera and
Sister Hapiiku, while many came from I In rlaurakl and Auckland districts.
The meetings of the Hui were very Well carried out. The Saturday evening.
meetings commenced with Sister Scotl In
640
TE KARERE
Aperira, 1941
charge (Primary), then followed the Mutual with Sister Mihi conducting. The Sunday services were the same as is usual in most Hui Pariha(s).
The people who attended were certainly rewarded for their attendance in hearing the various speakers, particularly so with messages given by President Cowley.
Greetings are not necessarily associated with the ushering in of a New Year, no reira, the Editor of the "Messenger" of good tidings — Kia ora mai koe — Greet- ings. Readers take note, you are not left out in the cold — come in and share the greetings.
The next three months should see the completion of a modern, well-equipped hostel for visiting Maoris to Hamilton, particularly those who may travel long distances to see people who may be in hospital. All preliminary preparations are well nigh completed, and when erected the hostel will serve as a testimony to the tireless efforts of the principal mover of the project — Sister Whatu of Frankton.
The call to the country's service is still taking away the young men of the district, among whom are many church members. We trust they will accept our sincere hopes and wishes for their safe return.
Brother John Paki of Matakowhai has recently been confined to bed as the re- sult of an abscess in the leg which was timely taken in hand, and we are glad to report that he is now back with his family after spending his bed-ridden days — weeks in Hamilton.
Dr. Stork of the "realms" never misses his yearly visit to the family of Brother and Sister Tom Reti. Congratulations are in order.
While we are on this subject, any who might be interested in matrimony are advised that the district is now provided with an agent with ability and power to join in holy wedlock. Don't be bashful in your aspirations and give this agent plenty of time to allow him travelling from place to place in the performance of his duties.
CHRISTCHURCH Reported by Ruby Thompson
Christchurch has been silent since the return of the Elders. There were no
meetings until last Wednesday, March 5th, when members of the Relief Society met at the home of Mrs. McMillan, who is a friend of Church members. We de- cided to continue our Relief Society work and try and keep in touch with members and friends of the Church. We are all pleased to have Sister Evelyn Perriton (recently baptized in Dunedin) here with us and hope that she will be as happy here as we are to have her.
We rejoice in having our young secre- tary, Anita Wilson, with us again. Anita was in hospital for quite a time and we are happy to see her looking so well.
I understand Nitama Paewai, who was in Burnham near this city undertaking military training, has now returned _ to Dunedin to continue his medical studies.
There isn't much more to tell, as our numbers are so few, but it is the wish of us all to keep this branch of the Church active.
TARANAKI DISTRICT Reported by Zena Stent and M. Morgan
February 9th marked the beginning of her days as member of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints for Betty Stent, who was baptized by Elder C. Arthur Stinson, who also performed the confirmation. Her membership among the Saints is certainly appreciated, and we hope that everyone will just help everyone else to enjoy each others asso- ciation better.
The N.Z. Ladies' Baseball Champion- ships for the Dustin Cup were held at the Cook's Gardens, where three of our young women — Betty Gowan, Zena Stent and Betty Stent, all of Southern Aces participated — where, in the final re- sults, they were runners-up to Amazons. Betty Gowan was chosen from the Southern Aces to play in the representa- tive team travelling to Christchurch.
Early in February Gerald Stinson re- turned to his parents in Wellington after spending some time with us here in Wanganui. We hope he is doing well.
The Manaia Branch of the district is still holding their Sunday School meet- ings and has just begun Mutual work, where the opening night was enjoyed by all.
The Manaia Branch president, accom- panied by his daughter Shirley, reported upon his return from the South Island that the Hui Pariha he attended at Pori- rua was certainly worth while
WAIRARAPA
Reported by Polly Wi Neera and
W. T. Enoka
Sister Moehau Haeata has been set apart as Secretary for the Relief Society of the District. Relief Society meetings in the Porirua Branch are held every Wednesday afternoon and on the first Sunday of each month. A knitting class has been organised, with Molly Martin as teacher, where the members have de- cided to knit socks, etc., for the boys serving in the Maori Batallion overseas.
Sister Wiki Katene visited Auckland last month to attend a Hui Pariha, and reports having had a very enjoyable time.
During January we were visited in Wairarapa by Sister Pare Takana in the interests of Relief Society work. Her visit with us has awakened a new hope in this work among the womenfolk. The Glad- stone Branch has a newly organized society, with Sister Hineteuirangi Naera as president. Accompanied by Sister Wai- tokorau Tamihana another Relief Society was organized in the Kohunui Branch, with Sister Parekura Saunders as presi- dent. We feel that these visits by Sister Duncan and Sister Tamihana have created the spirit that has always fostered co- operative action.
MA NGA KAIWHAKAAKO £
"A ki tc mca kei waenganui ia koutou tetahi tangata c toa ana i runga i tc JJTainta, niana c tango i tc tangata ngoikorc hex hoa niana kia what pai ai ia i runga i tc niahaki, kia mcinga ai ia he mca toa ana hoki. No rcira nic tango c koutou nga tangata kua oti nci tc whaka- ritc ki tc Tohungatanga iti . . ." Ako. vie nga Kawe 84: 106-107.
Hei Whakaaro Ma Nga Kaiwhakaako
Me tino pono to whai-whakaaro mo to iwi. Me torotoro i nga wa e mauiwi ana ki nga matenga hoki. E tika ana kia mohio koutou ki nga ahuatanga whaka-te-\vairua, kikokiko hoki kia rite ai nga rongo- atanga mo te wairua, tinana mate me te mate kai.
I roto i nga whakakitenga mo nga mahi a nga "kaiwhakaako" kahore e he i te wa e torotoro ana koutou ki te patai ki ia mema o nga whanau nga patai e ahu ana mo nga whakaaro e whai ake nei : —
1. Kei te noho tautoko awhina koe —
(a) I to hoa tata me o hoa awhina katoa?
(b) I nga Apiha whakahere o te Peka, Takiwa me te Mihana?
2. Kei te mahi ano koe i o mahi o te Hahi ? —
(a) He Mema koe — Kei te haere ano koe ki o huihuinga, noho puku me te utu i to noho puku, utu whakatekau me te awhina mahi i nga whakahaere-a-ngahau o to Peka?
(b) He Apiha koe — Kei te pai ano koe hei tirohanga atu ma o mema, a kei te haere ano koe ki o huihuinga apihatanga?
3. Kei te uru ano koe ki roto i nga karakitanga ia ata ia po a to whanau, me te inoi koe anake i te wahi ngaro ?
"I\TOI NGARO" Te wairua ngakau maru e tuturi ana me te piko hopohopo ano o te matenga, kihai e roa te noho i roto i te pouri me te po o nga mea whaka-te-wairua. Ina inoi ngaro ki to tatou Matua i te Rangi ka whiwhi ora to ngakau maru, hoa te mea kotahi, pumautanga ki te mea e pehia ana, maramatanga ki te mea-haere-ke, mana ki te ngoikore. kaha ki te kaha me te mohio tuturu tera te Atua to tatou Matua e ora ana, ko hoki Ihu te Karaiti.
He honore kia noho ko koe ki te taha o te Atua i roto i te inoi. E mohio ana Ia kia tatou ake, kahore kia tatou mohio-a-waho noaiho. Ki te pono tatou e koa ana Ia. Ki te he tatou a ka haere ki a Ia i roto i te ngaro, a i reira i roto i te reo o te ngakau whakapuaki i to tatou aroha ki a Ia me te hiahia kia awhinatia tatou e Ia, ka pupu ake te aroha Atua i roto ia Ia, a ki te korero ka penei, i roto i Tana kingi- tanga me Tana tohu atua ka awhitia tatou, a ka whiwhi i konei i te mahana me te aroha o Tana tinana tapu. He manawanui Tana tatari me te awangawanga ano hoki kia homaingia e Ia te ha o Tana atua- langa ki roto i te ngakau o te ripeneta. Aue, kia whiwhi katoa tatou ki tenei ahua.
Te inoi o te ngakau he inoi i te wahi ngaro. Tana reo he reo iti. Ia tatou e tuturi i mua ia Ia e mohio ana Ia ki a tatou hiahia katoa me a tatou ngoikorenga. 10 inoi ana tatou i runga i tenei marama- tanga, kahore he pohehe i roto i te inoi ngaro.
E tika ana nga Ilnnga Tapu katoa kia inoi i te wahi ngaro me te inoi ano i roto i te maha 0 te whanau kia mohio ai nga tamanki. ^ Meinga ko te Atua he hoa-korero 0 nga mema katoa «. te Mahi. "ko
"Y\ to Matua e kite nei i roto i te ngaro ko la ano ka ntu ia koe i wae-
*-/ nganui i te maha."
i
€ HAfi€R€
Wahanga 35
Mei, 1941 Nama 5
Elder Reed Smoot passed this life February 9, 1941. I \ 4 ■ ■■■■■■■■■■ ^ P ■ lllllll
WE REMEMBER-
PRIL 6th, 1830. the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter- & dav Saints was organized at the home of Peter ®w
A
Whitmer, in Fayette, New York. The following six men were the charter members of the organization — Joseph Smith, Jr., Oliver Cowdery, Hyrum Smith, Peter Whitmer, Jr., Samuel H. Smith and David Whitmer. The ceremonies (? connected with the organization of the Church were simple. Y\ The meeting was opened with "solemn prayer." Then the Prophet asked the men present whether they were willing to accept him and Oliver Cowdery as their spiritual head. An affirmative vote resulted.
Before the services adjourned Joseph received a revela- tion in which he was designated a "seer, prophet and an apostle of Jesus Christ." — Selected.
Dl
«
4
UE to the efforts and love of Mary Towles Sassen and
Anna Jarvis in creating a nation-wide sense of appre- (^
ciation to do honour to MOTHER, we have the pri- % V vilege and sacred honour of paying respect and homage to
\^ our Mothers on this the second Sunday in May of every year. \A
T\ In your honour. Mother, we dedicate all that we ever hope ~V\ a to he. It is fitting that we bring you this thought from the
pen of Mary Towles Sassen: "This pamphlet is sent forth in U
the hope of awakening on the part of the child a deeper appre- J\
ciation of her who is the central figure of the home. May it X
strengthen the family bonds, making them more beautiful yL
and tender. May it breathe a hope of the future where Ian- J\
guage is music, thought is light and love is law." A
* * * -^
IN HARMONY, Susquehanna County, Pennsylvania, *^ U.S.A., May 15th, 1829, John the Baptist appeared to G Joseph Smith, Jr., and Oliver Cowdery, laid his hands upon their heads and ordained them to the Aaronic Priest- hood, saying these words : ^) "Upon you my fellow-servants, in the name of Messiah,
Ag, I confer the Priesthood of Aaron, which holds the keys of ^L the ministering of angels, and of the gospel of repentance, ^) and of baptism by immersion for the remission of sins; and (Q this shall never be taken again from the earth, until the sons ^ of Levi do offer again an offering unto the Lord in righte- gy ousness." (Doc. & Cov. 13.) 2
i
i
/-*)
Te Karere
Established in 1907 &
J) Wahanga 35 Mei, 1941 Nama 5 ^
Matthew Cowley Tumuaki Mihana
Kelly Harris Etita
Eru T. Kupa Kaiwhakamaori
Waimate Anaru Kaiwhakamaori
"Ko tenei Pepa i whakatapua hei hapai ake i te izui Maori ki roto i nga whakaaro-nui.'
"Te Karere" is published monthly by the New Zealand Mission of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, and is printed by TE KARERE PRESS, No. 2 Scotia Place, Upper Queen Street, Auckland, C.l, N.Z. Subscription Rates: 3/- per six months; 5/- per year; £1 for five years; £2/10/- for life. (United States Cur- rency: $1.00 per year; $4.00 for five years; $10.00 for life.)
Address Correspondence, Box 72, Auckland, C.l, New Zealand.
CONTENTS
Editorial — Page i "Reed Smoot," by Matthew Cowley 646
Special Features —
"Kaikauwhau Mo Waikato" 648
"America," by President J. Reuben Clark, Jr 651
"Hirini Whaanga and His Work" 654
"Woman — Mother," by Leah D. Widstoe 656
"From the Leaves of an Old Family Bible," by Walter Smith . . 658
Church Features —
"Mahi Kura Hapati" 649
Sunday School 650
M.I.A 661
Fifty-second Annual Conference 663
Primary 666
646
II KARERE
Mr,. 1941
Editorial
REED SMOOT
For forty years Reed Smoot was an oracle of God in the Council of Twelve. For thirty years he was an oracle of the Nation in the council- of Congress. In each capacity he lived his sermons and his ideals. He was religiously patriotic and patriotically religious. In his allegiance to both In- God and his country he was adamant. In his politi- cal career there was no chicanery and in his religious minis- try there was no sham. In the Church he inspired loyalty
to the ( Jovernment, and in tin- ( lovernment he inspired respect
for the ( hurch.
In speech in the halls of Congress and in sermon in the chapels of his Church his voice carried a ring of convic- tion and sincerity. His deeds, however, were more eloquent than his speech, and his exemplary character more inspira- tional than his spoken word, lie was straightforward and honest in public utterance and private conversation. < >ne was never left in doubt as to his position on any question. In political matters he adhered inviolably to the ethics of his office, and in religious matters he was strictly orthodox.
lie accepted without reservation the revelations from his God to his Church and never tampered with the tenets of his faith. The institutions of the government he regarded as sacred, and believed them to he founded upon divine inspira- tion. Indeed his Church mid his Nation was tin- Kingdom of his God.
ddie efficacy of the saving power of his religion, and the
truthfulness of its concepts he tested by obedience. The result convinced him beyond any question or shadow of doubt. ddie testimony of his convictions will long he remembered by
all who observed his conduct while he lived among nun.
With the election of Reed Smoot to the- United States Senate, JUSl after the turn of the century, came a "hlit/krci.^" of persecution and calumny which focused the eyes of the world on the man and his Church. I lis right to sit as a mem- ber of the Senate was challenged. The charges against him were Founded entirely upon falsehood and yet his accusors were legion. The winds of hatred whirled about him. and the rains of abuse heat heavily upon him; hut his faith never failed. With each new tempest the roots of his faith struck
Mei, 1941 TE KARERE
deeper into the soil and added strength and beauty to his character.
Throughout the long months of this disgraceful inquisi- tion he maintained a magnificent dignity — a dignity that could stand fire. Both cheeks he turned to the enemy. "An eye for an eye, a tooth for a tooth" had no part in his defense. Patience, tolerance, charity and dignity were his weapons of both defense and attack. Indeed, throughout his life when- ever an attempt was made to sully his name he never changed weapons.
At long last came victory and with it the inauguration of thirty years of service to his country. By his industry, which was prodigious, he reached a position of influence and power which but few have attained unto in the history of the Senate. His knowledge of the business of government was profound, and sound economy in the administration of Government business was an obsession with him. His word on matters pertaining to Government appropriations and finance was never questioned He "spoke as one having authority." Eventually he became the dean of the Senate.
Whatever he set his hand to do, either in the Church or the Senate, he did with all his might. He knew that salva- tion, whether spiritual, physical or temporal, could never be achieved except by obedience to the gospel of work. He abhorred idleness. Every day of his life was crowded with strenuous work, and when he sought relaxation he did more work. He worked to live and he lived to work.
In private enterprise he was honest and dependable ; in public office he was the soul of honour and integrity ; in ecclesiastical positions he was humble and reverent, and in his home he was a devoted, considerate and gentle husband and a kind and loving father. In all suroundings and under all circumstances he was controlled by the principles of his faith. Into whichever period of his life the probe may be applied it will always be found that his habits invariably were consistent with his ideals ; his practice consistent with his preaching.
Not the least of his contributions to his people was the assistance he rendered to hundreds of young men and women, through senatorial patronage, which made it possible for them to receive college education and win degrees qualifying them for professional careers. As a beneficiary of this patronage the writer will eternally bless the memory of Reed Smoot.
— Mat i hew Cowley.
TE KARERE Met, 1941
Kaikauwhau Mo Waikato
Mo nga Marama 0 MKI me HUNE Wiki Tuatahi.
Wanihi Tangihaere me Darcey Tangihaere ki Piopio — Walter Turinui me John Paki ki Pirongio — Ben Marshall me Dick Marshall ki Weraroa — Willie Paki me Bob Beazley ki Clevedon — Ru Tarawhiti me Pehi Tarawhiti ki Rangiriri — Peter Whatu me Horace Forbes ki Gordon- tOD — Sam Pohutuhutu me Rei Tuhua ki Tauhei — Tonga Paiaka me tana family ki Manunui — Koroheke me tana family ki Cambridge — Arthur Hill me Joe Rapana ki Waingaro.
Wiki Tuarua.
Te Awe Whareponga me he hoa mana tonu e rapa ki Kopaku Landing — Tatana Arona me Haimona Honetana ki (iordonton — George Stockman me tana Tama ki Mahoenui — Tirua Tukiri me Motutara Te Hira ki Owairaka — Tetana Te Hira me Tapahia TeWheld ki Morrinsville — Ngaha Rotana me Joseph Berryman ki Te Hoe — Howard Osborne me Victor Osborne to anywhere they decide — Dave Ormsby mo Harry Mar- shall ki Puketapu — Mipi Tangihaere me Taiki ki Te Kuiti — John Puru me Rapata Puru ki Matangi.
Wiki Tuatoru
James Heperi me tana family ki Piopio — George Ngaronoa Mate me tana family ki te home o George Stockman — Hare Puke me Rei- hana Puke ki Frankton — James Forbes me Horace Forbes ki Horotiu — George Maihi mo Tamo Horotini ki Matakowhai — Kio Tarawhiti me Kare Martin ki Glen Murray — Niho Rangiawha mana e rapu ho hoa mona ki Motakotako — W. Jury me tana family ki Glen Murray — Here Tangihaere me Winiata Kapinga ki Otorohanga — Thomas Amoketi me Koti Amoketi ki Puketapu.
Wiki Tuawha.
Fred Rawiri me tana family ki Puketapu — Percival Rowe, Roy and Albert Osborne to Taumarunui — Ivan Noda me Joe Kingi ki Taupiri — Puhi Harihona me tana family ki Parawera — Tame Koti mo Douglas Whatu ki Makomako — E. A. C. Scott and family to choose their place of visit — John Apiti me Mapu Urutarewa ki Morrinsville — Henare Nga- whika me Okeroa Honetana ki Patotonga — Wiremu Kawharu mo tana family to choose their place of visit — William Mannering mana e rapu he hoa mona ki Maunga Tautari.
He Kupu Whakamarama. — I to marama o MEI me haere ki nga Hunga Tapu. I te marama o HUNE torotoroa nga Hoa Aroha.
Na te Timuakitanga o te Takiwa o Waikato. Henare Marshall me tana Timuakitanga.
\2
BOUND VOLUME OF " TE KARERE," 1940
A limited number of bound volumes of the 1940 issue of Te Karere is now available. Place your orders as soon as pos- sible with Te Karere, Box 72. Auckland. Price 8/-.
Mei, 1941 TE KARERE 649
Mahi Kura Hapati
RATAPU TUATAHI
Whakaaturanga: Upoko 2 "Nga Tikanga o te Whakapono."
1. He awhina te Atua, he atawhai, he aroha, he ngohengohe, he whai-whakaaro me te manawanui, e ata hanga ana ki nga ngoikore- tanga o ana tamariki. E mahi tika ana la, he aroha hoki kei roto i Tana whakawa, ahakoa ano tenei whakaaro ngohengohe Ona e u tonu ana Tana pehi i te he. E puhaehae ana ano la ki Tana ake mana. Ko la ra te kaiwhakahaere mo to tatou oranga, e ahei ana tatou ki te whakatata atu kia la, ki to tatou Matua. Ka tupu haere to tatou whakapono kia la ina nuku haere to tatou mohiotanga kia la.
Tirohia enei raranga karaipiture tautoko — Tiuteronomi 4:31; Eko. 20: 6; Tiute 7: 21, 10: 17; Hohua 24: 19.
Nga Patai:
1. Pehea nga painga o te Atua kia tatou?
2. Pehea te ahua o Tana whakatau?
3. Kei hea te tauira nui tautoko i Ana mahi?
4. Ko te Atua he aroha, he ngohengohe, he atawhai, pehea Tana mo nga mahi he?
5. Me pehea e tupu haere ai to tatou whakapono kia la?
RATAPU TUARUA
Whakaaturanga: Upoko 2 "Nga Tikanga o te Whakapono" me Ekoruho 20:23. 1. Te karakia whakapakoko — me te Atua kore. I te maha o nga pono o te oranga o te Atua, e pera ana hoki te whakaaro o te nuinga o nga tamariki a te tangata he wahi iti ma te tangata e whakapono kore ai ki te Atua. I te maha hoki o nga whakaaturanga mo te ahua ata- whai me Tona tapu hoki, kahore rawa he wahi hei kotiti ketanga ki te karakia ki nga mea he noaiho, otira, ko te hitori e whakaatu ana mo nga tangata e whakamarama ana ko te whakapono Atua, ara, ko te whakaakoranga mo te whakapono me te whakaaetanga ki te Atua, e haukotia ana e nga whakahaere maha o te hunga Atua kore, e paheke ana taua tangata ki te huarahi teka i te mea he tangata whiriwhiri tika ia e karakia ke ana ki te aata o nga Atua whakapono. Ko te whaka- pono kaore he Atua i tupu haere noa ake i nga wa o muri, ko te karakia whakapakoko ia kua tupu noa ake, he hara matamua no te ao. I te wa o te putanga mai o te whanau o Iharaira i te whenua o Ihipa i whakaarotia e te Atua e tika ana kia whakahau a ture Ia: "Kaua etahi Atua ke atu mou i mua i Ahau," ahakoa na ia Ia ano e tuhi ana i aua kupu ki runga i nga papa kohatu e whakapoke ana Tana iwi ia ratou i mua i te whakapakoko kuao kau, he koura, na ratou nei ano i hanga he mea tauira ki nga Atua whakapakoko o Ihipa.
Nga Patai:
1. He aha i nuku ake ai te maramatanga o te whakapono ki te Atua i to te tangata Atua kore?
2. He aha te whakamarama a nga hitori mo tenei take?
3. He pehea te ahua o te tangata kaore e whakapono ana ki te Atua?
4. No tehea wa ki te whakaaro i tupu ake ai tenei alma te koiv e whakapono ki te Atua?
5. No tehea wa te karakia ki nga Atua whakapakoko?
II KARERE Mo. i«Ml
RATAPU TUATORU . .
Whakaaturanga: He roan^a 0 te (Jpoko 2 "Nga Tikan^a 0 t6 Whaka- P«.n<>." Ko te mohiotanga i tupu ake i roto i te tangata he karakia. 0 ana tona ngakaa e rapu ana hold i tetahi mea hei whakanuinga
ma ana. I te \va kua taka atu ia ki te pouritanga i t€ hono t<mu 0 tuna uru ki te hara a ki wareware i aia tona Kaihanga nie tf Atua o ona niatua na ka rapu ia i etahi atu Atua. Ko etahi i whakaaro ko tera ahuatanga 0 te runga rawa. i te whitinira mai 0 te ra ka koro- piko atu kia ia. ko etahi i whiriwhiri ko etahi 0 Dga mea kei te whenua
hei atua mo ratou. I miharo nui ratou ki tenei mea ki te ahi he aha
i ka ai. na ka karakia atu ratou ki tona nmra. Ko etahi atu e whakaan. ana e kite ana ratou i roto i te wai te whakaaturanga mo te he kore me te tika a ka whakahaeretia to ratou karakia i Dga waJ rere.
Nga Patai:
1. He aha te mea nui i tupu ake i roto i te ngakau 0 te tangata?
2. Na te aha i wareware ai i te tangata tona Kaihanga?
RATAPU TUAWHA
Whakaaturanga: He manga o te Upoko 2 "Nga Tikanga 0 te Whaka- pono." Ko te whakapono kore ki te Atua he whakakahoie he Atua ano kei te rangi. Ahakoa ra te tangata tuturu kaore ona whakapono ki te Atua e pa mai ana ano pera me te nuinga te hiahia ki tenei mea ki te karakia. ahakoa kaore ia e whakaae ana ki te Atua Ora Tonu. Pono hoki. Otira, e whaka-atua ana ia i etahi ture, etahi tikanga, etahi ahua ranei i pupo ake i roto i te ngakau. Kahore rawa he tangata tuturu e whakakahore ana ki te Atua.
Nga Patai:
1. Rhea te ahua o te tangata whakapono kore ki te Atua?
SUNDAY SCHOOL
SACRAMENT GEM
In memory of the broken flesh
We cat the broken bread,
And witness with a CUp afresh ( lur faith in Christ our I lead.
( < INCERT RECITATH »X
Poet riuc and Covenants 60: 13.
"Thou shall not idle away thy time, neither shalt thou bury thy
talent that it may not be known."
K< IRERO A NGAKAU Akoranga me nga Kawenata 60: 13.
"Kaua to taima e moumou noatia iho, kaua ano to taranata e kopehutia iho kia kore :i e mohiotia."
HYMNS
-What Prize Shall Be Your Reward" Page 84
• i: Te Ariki, E Ihn" Wharangi 70
Mei, 1941 TE KARERE 651
AMERICA
"A Chosen Land of the Lord"
From the beginning even to the end of the Earth
By President J. Reuben Clark, Jr. Of the First Presidency
Concerning Zion and its Destiny and Liberty and its Price
You youth of the Church — with these God- given promises and prophecies before you, do not let yourselves be stampeded into this panic of fear. . . . If subjugation shall come, it will come because we have reached a "fullness of iniquity," and not because we fail to take on the horrors of this war. It is righteousness, not the hates of human slaughter, of which this nation stands now in need.
J. Reuben Clark, Jr.
I speak to the youth of the Church. Out of the ancient past has come to us the wisdom for the next year:
My son, keep thy father's commandment, and forsake not the laiv of thy mother (Proverbs 6: 20.)
Your presiding officers have asked me to say something to you about that particular aspect of these words of wisdom which touches us in our association together as a civil government.
While the scriptural text itself comes from ancient Israel and Palestine, yet it has a deep and vital meaning to and for us of this land — the land of Zion, the American hemisphere.
THE LAW OF THE HEMISPHERE
From the very beginning of man's life on earth, there have been commandments for our fathers and laws for our mothers that were basic to the peace, prosperity, happiness, and indeed existence, of those who possess the Americas.
One of the great motifs running through the whole Nephitic and Jareditic records is that this land of ours "is a land which is choice above all other lands," consecrated to the blessing of those dwelling thereon while they shall live righteously, but plagued with a curse for them when they shall become ripened in iniquity. This is the law by which God measures His bounties and metes out His punishments to the peoples dwelling in this land.
A first great consecration for blessing came when God planted hereon the Garden of Eden, and placed therein our first parents. The primal curse came to it when "Adam having fallen that man might be" (2 Nephi 2: 25), God said to him: ". . . cursed shall be the ground for thy sake." (Moses 4:23.)
A MIGHTY LAND
This has always been a mighty land in God's plan. It was in the valley of Adam-ondi-Ahman that Adam, prior to his death, called the great High Priests together and there bestowed upon them his last, blessing. The Lord appearing there, his posterity proclaimed Adam to be Michael, the Prince, the Archangel. (D. and C. 107: 5;>, 54.) It is to that same spot that Adam, as the Ancient of Days, shall come to visit his people (D. and C. 1163, when judgment shall be set and the books opened. (Daniel 7:1) ff; Revelation 20:4.)
IT KARERE \k,. 1941
h i- here on this land that the NVu Jerusalem shall be built "unto the remnant of the seed of Joseph" i those oth< i
literal descendants of Lehi. (Ether IS: 6 ff; l Nephi 14:1, 2; 2 Nephi Ind finally, it is here on this hemisphere that Zion shall be built. (Tenth Article of Faith.) It is this fact and this purpose, the building of Zion en this hemisphere, which is Zion. whi< I to be tin- dominant elements in all <T God's dealings with them who
this land, for Isaiah, speaking more than two thousand five
hundred years ago, declared that "out of Zion shall go forth the law. and tin- word of the Lord from Jerusalem." (Isaiah 2 :
AMERICA'S DESTINY
Thu ultimate God-given destiny, planned by the Cr<
and testified by ancient and modern prophecy and revelation, is that
out of her shall go forth the law.
Time and time again, God has brought to this land His el, >eed and has tried to raise up from them a people that would worship Him and would not depart from the ways of His righteousness — a people that would work towards this God-given destiny. For thousands of years Satan has impeded this purpose. Bu1 God's plan will finally prevail.
After the Flood and "the waters had receded from off the face of
this land." the Lord declared through His prophel His dedication that
this had become a "choice land above all other lands, a chosen land of the Lord; wherefore the Lord would have that all men should serve Him who dwell upon the face thereof." (Ether L3: 2.)
THE JAREDITIC CIVILIZATION
The first attempt to set up a righteous people after the Flood, tame when, at Babel (Omni L'lM. the Lord "swore in His wrath that they should he scattered upon all the face of the earth." (Ether 1: 33), and Jared and his brother, he to whom the Lord said, "for never has man believed in me as thou hast" (Ether •'! : 1 5 ) , were guided to these shores. They came with a blessing and an overhanging judgment. The promised blessing was this:
THE BLESSING
Behold, this is a choice land, and whatsoever nation shall possess it shall from bondage, and from capthnty, an<l from all other nations under heaven, ii they will hut serve the (iod of the land, who is Jesus Christ. . . . (Ether 2: 12.)
The overhanging judgment was this:
THE JUDGMENT
Wherefore, he that doth possess it shall serve (iod or shall he swept off; for it is the everlasting decree of (iod. . Ind it is not until the fullness of iniquity among the children of the land, that they are swept off. (Ether 2:10.) From that day until now, the price of the promised blessing has always been, and will ever he. the serving of Jesus Christ, the God of this land. There is no other way to get the blessing nor to escape the judgment. This fact must never lie forgotten.
While -Jared and his brother were among them, their families and posterity lived for the promised blessings. The land was tamed; the herds and flocks multiplied; the earth yielded its riches: the people "did wax strong in the land" (Ether (5:18), they became exceedingly rich. (Ether 10: 28.)
" FULLNESS OF INIQUITY " Then came dissension, then wars, then wickedness, and finally a "fullness of iniquity." The record recites:
And HOW there began to he a great curse upon all the land hecause of the iniquity of the people, in which, if a man should lay his tool or his srvord
Mei, 1941 TE KARERE 653
upon his shelf, or upon the place whither he would keep it, behold, upon the morrow, he could not find it, so great was the. curse upon the land.
Wherefore, every man did cleave unto that which ivas his own, with his hands, and would not borrow, neither would he lend; and every man kept the hilt of his sivord in his right hand, in the defense of his property and his own life, and of his zvives, and children. (Ether 14: 1, 2.)
The prophet Ether warned them that if they did not repent, all but the leader should be destroyed. (Ether 13:20 ff.) Repentance did not come.
We are not given the step-by-step backsliding of this Jareditic civilization till it reached the social and governmental chaos the record sets out, but those steps seem wholly clear from the results. Put into modern terms, we can understand them. First there was a forsaking of the righteous life, and the working of wickedness; then must have come the extortion and oppression of the poor by the rich; then retali- ation and reprisal by the poor against the rich ; then would come a cry to share the wealth which should belong to all; then the easy belief that society owed every man a living whether he worked or not; then the keeping of a great body of idlers; then when community revenues failed to do this, as they always have failed and always will fail, a self -helping by one to the goods of his, neighbour; and finally when the neighbour resisted, as resist he must, or starve with his family, then death to the neighbour and all that belonged to him. This was the decreed "fullness of iniquity."
Then came the end; the Jaredites were wiped out in accordance with "the everlasting decree of God." A nation had been born; it had grown to maturity; then to a powerful manhood; had then gone on to sin, decay, and destruction, and all because its people had refused to heed the promises and commandments of Him who is their Creator and Father, all because the people who possessed the land had failed "to serve the God of the land, who is Jesus Christ." (Ether 2: 12.)
Before God's first effort had come to its final tragedy, He had begun His second.
In the reign of Zedekiah, king of Judah, and just before the great Babylonish captivity, two groups left Jerusalem, under the Lord's direction, to escape the fate then pending for Israel, and to make a new effort to build a righteous people in the promised land. Of one — that which founded the people of Zarahemla — we know little, save that they were later absorbed by the people of Mosiah. (Omni, verses 14-19.) We do not have their records. (Omni, verse 18.) But of the other, the family of Lehi and their descendants, the bulk of the Book of Mormon gives us a full account.
THE LEHI COLONIZATION
Lehi, with Ishmael, and their families, came to this "a choice land above all other lands, a chosen land of the Lord," with the same prom- ised blessings and the same overhanging judgments that were made to Jared and his brother.
Beginning with an angelic rebuke to Laman and Lemuel, who were smiting their younger brethren with a rod (1 Nephi 3:28, 29), down through a thousand years of recurring days of righteousness and boundless blessings, intermixed with repeating days of sin, turmoil, war, even to final destruction, the Lord took every occasion to show these peoples the proper way, to lead them back to a repentant life, to bring them to righteousness. In one of their moods of righteous- ness, prepared thereto by a prophet of God, the Master Himself, having finished His work in Palestine, visited them and in person taught and ministered unto them. Over and over again He Messed them when they were righteous. Over and over again He warned them of the evils and destruction that followed unrepented sin. Over and over again He punished their wickedness. Bui to no avail. | To be continued)
654 II. ICARERE Mn, 1941
Hirini Whaanga and His Work
A Special Presentation Ceremony during the
Fourth General Session of Conference at
Nuhaka, II ui Tan. April I3t 1941
President Matthew Cowley during the
Fourth Genera] Session of Conference unveiled
a life-like colour picture of Hirini Whaanga,
Bet in a gold frame and mounting resting
*r~~-- on a flood-lit pedestal, which brought forth a
■9k spontaneous expression of surprise and admira-
. ^^ BE tion from the large gathering at the life-like
rf, I likeness of the picture to the man.
^^ ^^j^^^Mm This ceremony in honour of Hirini Wha-
. 4 I I anga was performed 36 years after his death,
./ I 48 years after his emigration to Zion, 59 years
\ *** I after his baptism and over 100 years after his
On the platform during the Session was JliKixi whaanga hjs on}y surviving brother, Matene Whaanga,
who spoke most feelingly and respectfully of his "tuakana" and his work for and among his people; Mihi and Ka, his only living children; and Sidney Christy, Walter Smith and Ihaia Whaanga, three of the original emigrants. The speeches were all indicative of the occasion which significantly blended with the spirit of the Hui Tau.
The musical renditions were supplied by the Korongata Male Chorus, "Pale Moon"; the Nuhaka Women's Chorus, "Prayer Perfect," and a Hawaiian Musical Fantasia by a trio of Old M.A.C. boys and B.Y.U Maori boys.
From the inscriptions on the picture, President Cowley read the following: — "Hirini Whaanga, son of Ihaka Whaanga, soldier and pat- riot of Queen Victoria, beloved Church leader in this country and in America. Baptized into the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints in 1882. Emigrated to Utah, U.S.A., in the good ship 'Manowai' in 1893 with his wife Mere and their children Hirini, Watene and Edna, also Apikara his sister-in-lay, with her two sons Ihaia and Isaac. Died October 17th, 1905, and is buried in Salt Lake City, Utah, U.S.A."
Ko ia te matua, te matamua o te iwi Maori ki roto i te Temepara Tapu a te Atua. Nana i whakatutuki te poropititanga a Maraki : "A ka whakatahuritia e ahau nga ngakau o nga matua ki o ratou tamariki me nga ngakau o nga tamariki ki o ratou matua, kei haere atu ahau a patua iho e ahau te whenua ki te kanga."
Presented to the Nuhaka Branch, to be hung in the Chapel, by those who will always love him and revere his memory.
It is fitting that Sydney, son of Hupa and Mihi Christy and grand- son of Hirini and Mere Whaanga, on behalf of the "iwi," should be the recipient of the Holy Bible, containing a written history of which this occasion brings to mind, and the picture our forbear, as he, in this troublous year of 1941, like his grandsire in 1893, the President of the Nuhaka Branch. May the Bible and the painting ever remain insepar- able, one a source of information, the other inspiration, that the two may bring consolation to all who believe as did Hirini Whaanga in the truth of the Gospel of Christ.
Mei, 1941 TE KARERE
PICTURE OF THE MONTH
655
Potahi Ranana — Mother and Grandmother
Message from the First Presidency
Under date of March 26th The First Presidency of the Church addressed a letter to President Cowley as follows: We are happy to learn that you and your family are all enjoying good health, and that the work of the Lord is pro- gressing so favourably in far-off New Zealand.
We have no doubt but that the stalwart native Elders of the Church in New Zealand will loyally support you in the present crisis, and will carry on the work ably, as the Lord will give them strength and guidance. Please extend to them our commendation and blessing, and tell them to rally to the standard even with more fervour and faith than they have had heretofore. If they do, there is no doubt but that the New Zealand Mission will maintain its high efficiency. We appreciate your willingness to carry on under any circumstance.
We pray the Lord to guide you, and to grant unto vou and yours health and contentment, -and to the Saints through- out your Mission prosperity and peace.
Sincerely your brethren, Signed — Heber J. Grant
J. Reuben Clark, Jr. Pari,! 0. McKay
The First Presidency
TE KARERE Wei, 1941
Woman — Mother
( Excerpts from Leah D. Widstoe's "Women and Marriage Among the Mormons." )
Woman's status in the home, in society, and before the law may be considered a fair standard by which t<> judge the advancement of any people or nation. By that test the "Mormon" Church will be found to rank among the great institutions of all time. For nowhere on earth is woman more- greatly honoured, or her independence more completely accepted and acknowledged.
During the period of "The Dark Ages," women were shackled as n> outward expression and became little more than slaves to their husbands or lords, who actually had power to pet and lovti, to beal or torture or destroy, to suit their pleasure or their will. A man's wife ranked as a part of his property; and woman was virtually a bond servant to her father until passed <>n by marriage to her husband or master. For ages she lived under conditions a little less than com- plete thralldom.
The moral equality of the sexes was a yet more startling result of the ministry of the Prophet. In the "Mormon" Church boys are taught at mother's knee t<> guard virtue and strength as care* fully as arc- their sisters. Chastity of thought and dc-e<l are enjoined upon each alike, and violation being deplored for one as for the other. A single standard of mdrality must always he an integral part of the true Gospel, and has been maintained by the people of this Church for one hundred years. An unpreiedented family joy and peace as well as physical strength and purity has resulted from ohedience to this fundamental law.
Family relationships are everlasting among eternal intelligences. Family life on earth is hut a type of life before and after earth exig- ence. Parenthood did not begin with this world else how can man he the spiritual child of his Heavenly Father? Much less, then, may that priceless relationship end with this life. The scriptures teach that things earthly are hut typical of thin-- heavenly. Therefore. marriage in the restbred Church is "for time and for all eternity."
The family is the unit of earthly and heavenly existence, and the rearing of a noble family, the source of earth's greatest, most experience. Parenthood becomes the ideal of every memher of the restored Church of Christ; for in that responsible work they most nearly approach their Heavenly Father. Because of that understand- ing, marriage becomes truly a sacrament, and parenthood, an act ot partnership with the Lord. Naturally, race suicide is not practiced nor tolerated by those who truly understand the glorious truths of the Gospel of Jesus Christ.
Mei, 1941 TE KARERE 657
WOMAN'S SPHERE
Woman does not hold the Priesthood, which is held by all righte- ous men in the Church, but as a partaker of restored truth, she shares with father or husband in all the blessings derived therefrom. Her gift is that of motherhood, with its accompanying privilege of moulding the plastic souls of children in their most impressionable years, and thus she shapes largely the destiny of mankind. Indeed, this privilege is so great and engrossing that if she magnifies her life work, she has no time and less inclination to assume any priestly responsibility, even were it possible. She realizes so well the vast importance and responsibility of her glorious privilege of "mothering" the race and moulding the minds and souls of men, that she is humbly and gratefully content to live within her own sphere and magnify its possibilities.
A beautiful teamwork results from this righteous relationship of man and woman : He bears the responsibility of acting for his Heavenly Father in all the public demands of the Church, as well as being the responsible head of his own family, providing for its eco- nomic care and maintenance; she assumes the privilege of intelligent motherhood and home-making, as well as active participation in all organizations for woman's advancement which the Church so gener- ously provides. There is never a question of superior or inferior — it is a question of organization for the greatest possible human betterment.
WOMAN'S RIGHTS
One hears much discussion about woman's rights and woman's sphere. Woman's right is to stand shoulder to shoulder with her husband or brother in the good game of life, bearing her full share of all life's burdens and responsibilities, halving his cares, sharing his joys and triumphs.
The truly happy woman is she who fills the full measure of her creation by nobly bearing and rearing a family of healthy children, doing her part to make of them good citizens for God and country. When, through no fault of hers, she fails to reach this highest achieve- ment of womanly happiness, she puts in a full working day, for the improvement and uplift of others; then she shares recreational hours and truly "plays the game fair." These are they who have found and who fill completely woman's sphere.
It could not be claimed that "Mormon" women are perfect, but that they may constantly climb the road toward perfection is the aim of their leaders.
So long as women cling to the simple ideal of home and a joy- ous family life, so long as the) Till the measure of their creation as home-makers, magnifying to the full the greal gift mi" iheir Creator for their own and others' children, so long is the Church and the nation safe no longer. In this role may be found the "Mormon" women to daw and we hope foivwr.
TE KARERE
Mei. 1«M1
From the Leaves of an Old Family Bible
"The First Maoris to Emigrate to Zion" By WalTEB Smith
(Condensed by Kelly Harris)
* M
I I \Y -*:<^ I Saints left their homeland for the land of %J I America, Zion. Hirini Whaanga, Mere his wife,
I Hirini (Sid Christy, grandson), Watene (Walter v\ j& _*** I Smith, nephew), Edna Pomare (adopted daugh-
ter), a raua tamariki (their children), Apikara, Hirini Whaanga his sister-in-law (wife of his younger brother Ihaka, and her two sons Ihaia and Isaac, eight na in all. The long journey from Auckland to San Francisco was made aboard the s.s. Manowai under the supervision of some returning Elders, the only one whose name I can recall was Wiremu Takarehi I w am Douglas).
A few days in San Francisco sufficed to impress us with the won- ders of a large city, where I believe the things that intrigued us most were the horseless cars, underground cable cars, which went up hill and down without any apparent reason, so it seemed to the young and untutored native mind.
Salt Lake City was our next stop after travel- ling by train amid snow-capped mountains, through long dark tunnels and rugged country. There we had our first ice cream and. thinking it butter, my fust act was to spread it upon bread, whereupon a much-amused waitress kindly corrected me, and to this day I cannot remember whether that ice cream was hot or cold.
Our future home in southern Utah was reached alter many days' travel in covered wagons over miles of wild western wasteland, the home of the coyote, jack-rabbit and rattlesnake.-. Kanab was home to us for about eighteen months. It was a little township containing two stores, Bowman's and the Elephant Stores. It was here that Hirini in- '1 in the Elephant Stores and some mining
Stocks, which ultimately left us financially ruined. Brother Benjamin Goddard urged that the family be moved back to Salt Laks, which the Church Authorities were pleased I. however, stayed with Brother Hamblin herding sheep for the next fifteen months on the Buckskin Mountains, now known as the Kaiabab Forest of the Grand Canyon, Government Reserve, one of the beauty spots of the world, after which I went back to Salt Lake to school. From this period on, many interesting things will always be re- membered by us all, and myself particularly, especially on the occa- sion when Sid took me to see the first moving picture that was ever taken for public entertainment which, if I remember correctly, was the record of the prize fight between Jim Corbett and Bob Fitzsimmons. Due to the severe cold and wet weather then prevalent, I contracted a severe dose of rheumatism which confined me to bed for three years. My time while ill was spent in learning to play the guitar, mandolin and banjo from C. D. Schettler, one of the best guitarists in the United
Mere Whaanga
Mei, 1941 TE KARERE 659
States. In this condition I was able to assiduously study music, and spent eight hours daily for a period of three years practicing and play- ing my instruments. You can well imagine the progress one would make with such close application. I wish to pay tribute here to the goodness and kindness of those men who paid for all my medical and musical fees. When I was well enough to walk with a cane (which I have done ever since) I was sent to the B.Y.U. at Provo for a course in commercial training and at the same time study choral music, theory and harmony under Professor Lund.
Hawaiian music at this time was taking the American public by storm, and taking advantage of my training joined Ed. Montgomery's Royal Hawaiian Quintette, which travelled the country, playing at Los Angeles, Ocean Park, San Francisco and all over, coast to coast and north to the south.
The New Year of 1910 was still in its infancy when I fell in love and married Ida M. Haley of Sacramento, California. Elder Chris- tiansen of Colorado performed the ceremony. Our lives from this time on were travel, travel, travel.
While travelling with our own troupe, the Hawaii-Maorian Quintette, we met many interesting personalities, including William F. Cody (Buffalo Bill), John Phillip Sousa, John L. Sullivan, Jack Johnson, Sir Maui Pomare and Queen Liliouakalani of Hawaii. At the meeting with Liliuoakalai, she had quite a tangi with me.
While playing an engagement at Highland Park, Quincy, Illinois, I received a letter from Brother Goddard to come home and make pre- parations to go to New Zealand to teach music at a school recently built for the education of Maori boys. Upon our return to Salt Lake we met Wiremu Takana and his wife Takare, Takerei Ihaia and his wife Emma, and the other members of their party, which travelled to Salt Lake City to enter the Temple of the Lord.
Our arrival in Wellington aboard the ship "Willochra" was at a time when wharf labour was striking, which delayed our departure from Wellington for Hawke's Bay. President Romney met us in the capital, where we visited the House of Parliament and there had the privilege of meeting Sir James Carroll, which was the beginning of a friendship that lasted until his demise.
November of 1913 we arrived at Korongata, to take up our duties at the M.A. College. Our first Christmas was spent at Nuhaka during a hui nui. Here I met my mother, whom I could not remember, but the instincts of aroha and blood kinship so sensitive in Polynesia soon burst the barriers of Pakeha influence, and mother and son were shed- ding tears of aroha for one another. My wife was baptized into the Church during this great gathering by President Romney at Hirere Creek, the same place where I was baptized twenty years or more before.
Our work at the M.A.C. has been the most pleasant of our whole career. At no time have we had any feeling of regret, and if there be any at all, it is that the good work has not gone on and on.
After leaving Kanab and settling in Salt Lake City, Hirini Whaanga and Mere and Apikara opened and begun the work for their dead ances- tors in the Temple. This work they kept up to the end of their days. Hirini was sent back to New Zealand for some months on a mission where he did a tremendous amount of good among his people. With his return to Zion his work in the Temple continued until his death on October 17th, 1905, after an operation for appendicitis. With his death, Mere returned to New Zealand on a mission where she accom- plished much among the people, after which she returned to the States. Edna Pomare came to New Zealand, and since have not heard about her, Apikara and her younger son Isaac are buried Bide by side with Hirini Whaanga in the City Cemetery in Salt Lake City. A very handsome monument has since been erected to the memory of this grand old man, Hirini Whaanga.
\LLLL
1
Just after the Great War. Mere Whaanga and her family of grand- children, which included Sid Christy and his wife Kate with their grow- ing family, returned to New Zealand. The old lady was never satisfied ind was always Longing to be with "te koroua ra." When Presi- dent Hardy came i mission just recently she urged him to ask the Church Authorities to let her go back again to Zion. She is tin re now.
Ihaia. the older son of Apikara. took up randy-making as hi- work,
in which he became quite proficient as a chocolate-maker. Having
never married he also returned to Now Zealand. Sid Christy, the old man's favourite grandson, possessing a pleasing voice, travelled far. and often entertaining until the need- of his family required his persona] attention. Throughout his stay in the State-. Sid was acclaimed one of the best athlete- in the country, excelling in running, basketball and football. He married Kate Welsh, a sister of the present Mrs, Hon* pa lleperi of Ngapuhi. She and Rawiri, a son of Rawiri M. Kamau of Korongata, were adopted by President Magleby and taken to tie with him after his second mis-ion to New Zealand.
Although there have Ween many of our Maori people go to America and Honolulu to work in the Temples of God, Hirini and Mere Whaanga are the pioneers of our people, the Maori, in Temple work.
Zion Remembers Her People
Hui Tau Greetings ami Best Wishes
from President Rufus K. I lardy ami
many of the Elders.
Matthew Cowley. Xuhaka. X.X.
Our thoughts and hearts are with you in your glorious Hui Tau. We love you all. Fervently we pray God's choic- est blessings upon you. Your assembly is unique. One Zion Elder only in your midst. Mere sends greetings. God bless you all and grant us p< ..
— Rufus K. Hardy.
Matthew Cowley, Mormon Community,
Xuhaka. X.X.
Kia ora te Hun.ua Tapu. Kia pai to
Hui Tau. Kia ngawari tonu, arohanui.
Aldous. Henderson, Simpson. Wallace,
Smith. Curtis. Crandall. Acomb, Rudd. Drown. Allen. Langton, Later. Baum- gartner, Lambert, Biesinger, Price, Evans, Toronto, Wride, Johnston. Wheeler, Dastrup, Bigler, Mason Ott- Rupus K. Hardy 1('>\ Stirling, Burningham.
Th one —
"OUR HOMES AND CHAPELS SHALL BE BEAUTIFUL" "For Zion must increase in beauty and in Holiness: her borders must he enlarged; her stakes must be strengthened; yea verily I say unto you. Zion must arise and put on her beautiful garments.'
I Do, trine a I ovenants &2: 14.)
Mei, 1941
TE KARERE
661
The M.I.A. at Hui Tau
t
By S. R. TapscII Meha and Annie W. Meha
The competitions this year reached a very high standard. Thanks to the wonderful efforts put forth by the branches. Special men- tion is here made of this year's winner — Xuhaka — whose all round display placed them at the top, equalling the best efforts of any branch in the past and excelling this time in the spirit of Mutual accomplishment and spirit of Hui Tau.
The many defaults in the contests only show [the amount of effort put into M.I.A. We are hoping j and trusting that what was witnessed at this Hui Tau will be sufficient stimulus and challenge for more complete participation in M.I.A. activities for the coming vear, culminating in fuller and better displavs Tapsell Meha next prui Tau.
Preparation is what counts. Officers and teachers are here advised to better prepare their organizations and themselves for the next day of "reckoning" — next Hui Tau. By active participation in all our M.I.A. activities we grow, we gain something and, above all, we give something.
We regret very much that circumstances pre- vented the Queen Coronation. Plans are under way to / have the coronation locally. We congratulate Nuhaka] on attaining this signal honour of winning this Queen \ Contest as well as gaining the victory in the aggregate points contest.
It is fitting to remember the work of the Zion Misionaries. Our work this day, be it good or bad, ANNtE **. Meha owes its beginning and growth to the efforts of the brethren and sisters from Zion. We remember them and pay tribute to their memory by quoting from President Cowley's dedicatory remarks as found in the Hui "Fan Programme in the April issue of Te Karere.
"To the men and women, numbering more than one thousand, who, during the past sixty years, have come to New Zealand from their homes in America to serve God by serving their fellow-nun. this Hui Tan programme for 1941 is respectfully dedicated.
For the first time in the history of the Mission a llni Tan will be convened without the attendance of Zion Elders. They will be missed by .all, hut not forgotten by any. The hearts of all i^i us will be turned to them on this occasion and their hearts will he turned to US.
For the salvation these misionaries have broughl to our shores
let us honour them by deeds of righteousness; let us renew the Covenants we have made, through baptism at their hands, to he the
Saints of the Most High God. God bless their memory."
TE KARERE
Ma, 1941
M.I. A. Results
|
Numbei |
of N |
umber of Is |
umber of |
KinKlt" |
|||
|
Branch Firsts |
Jeeoadi |
Thirds |
Kntries |
Totals |
|||
|
Nuhaka |
29 |
11 |
11 |
431 |
|||
|
Korongata |
10 |
19 |
8 |
17 |
273 |
||
|
Tftinaki |
14 |
9 |
13 |
12 |
273 |
||
|
Takitinui |
2 |
7 |
3 |
3 |
79 |
||
|
Etotoraa |
3 |
4 |
2 |
2 |
67 |
||
|
A warn a |
2 |
3 |
3 |
0 |
52 |
||
|
Huria |
1 |
2 |
2 |
7 |
38 |
||
|
Auckland |
1 |
1 |
2 |
0 |
26 |
||
|
Mangamuka |
1 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
11 |
||
|
Te Hauke |
0 |
1 |
0 |
4 |
10 |
||
|
Mangere |
0 |
1 |
0 |
1 |
7 |
||
|
Kaikou |
0 |
0 |
1 |
0 |
4 |
||
|
Te Hapara |
0 |
0 |
1 |
0 |
4 |
||
|
Possible Score |
= 660 |
||||||
|
N.B. — A first counting the one point |
for entry |
= 11 |
|||||
|
A second counting the |
one point for entr> |
t = 6 |
|||||
|
A third counting the |
one point for entr> |
' — 4 |
|||||
|
An entry |
= 1 |
||||||
|
QUEEN CONTEST |
|||||||
|
Nuhaka . . |
47,215 |
Votes |
|||||
|
Korongata |
20,125 |
Votes |
|||||
|
Tamaki . . |
14,940 |
Votes |
|||||
|
Mange re |
10,555 |
Votes |
|||||
|
Ngapuhi |
10,000 |
Votes |
GENEALOGY
/> v Teao II 'irihana
Cottage Meetings for the Month of May
May 8 — Lesson 27, "A Daughter of Kings." 15 — Lesson 28, „ 22 — Lesson 29,
"Winning Religious Freedom." "A Convert from Spain."
29 — Lesson 30, "Peopling the New World."
Home Teaching
E nga komiti whakapapa o ia Peka o ia Peka, mahia nga rehana i nga po Taite.
Whakatauki
"Ka haere atu ano ra.
whakapipiri."
Ka hoki mai ki roto i nga kapua
Mei, 1941
TE KARERE
663
Matthew Cowley
52nd Annual Conference
By George Watene, Mission Secretary
Nuhaka, a thriving village centrally located in the Mahia District, again welcomed and served the gathered Saints and friends attending the 1941 Hui Tau of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints in the New Zealand Mission. The familiar grounds and buildings of the marae demonstrated most pleasantly the care and preparations entailed by the home people in providing for the ade- quate needs of comfort and facilities for the activities of the Conference.
Historically, this conference is unique, Presi- dent Matthew Cowley being the only Zion Elder present, the only occasion of such an event in this Mission, incidentally, this is the ninth Hui Tau attended by President Cowley. Although the Zion Elders have returned home, the Mission is ade- quately supported under the leadership of Presi- dent by 5 High Priests, 1 Seventy, 402 Elders, 328 Priests, 157 Teachers and 528 Deacons. The main body of visitors to the Hui arrived en masse by special train from as far north as Okaihau, and Dunedin in the south, on Thursday evening, 10th. People were gathering to the marae all that day even until Saturday morning, coming by bus and automobile from everywhere.
Friday dawned beautifully to commence Hui Tau activity with M.I.A. competitions. Of importance to the conference, and the Maori people particularly, was the arrival and participa- tion of Sir Apirana Ngata, M.P., and his party, which included Turi* Carroll and Lady Ngata. The honoured guests were fittingly welcomed, and at the special service, where speeches were made, Sir Apirana remarked at the work of the Church among the Maori people, commenting also on the fact that as a Church we were conspicuous in that we had no Maori carved whare wananga in the Mission where our people could preserve Maori arts and culture, further commenting very favourably on the remarks of President Cowley pertaining to the struggle now ravaging the nations of the earth as it came from a minister of the Church. The M.I.A. then continued their various contests throughout the day. The Primary programme commenced at 7.30 p.m. under the direction of Sister Elva T. Cowley, where the children impressively portrayed by song, scriptural quotations and tableau the theme, "Gospel of Peace." This programme was definitely one of the highlights of the Conference.
The meeting of the Mission Secretary with all District and Branch Presidencies and their secretaries was convened in the Chapel Saturday morning, where matters pertaining to District and Branch were dis- cussed and settled. At this time also, the Primary Association officers and teachers were receiving their instructions and suggestion under the supervision of Sister Elva Cowley. Here lesson work was ably demonstrated, new games and songs were also given. A special drive for the "three-penny fund" was inaugurated, stressing particularly the need for co-operation of parents in this campaign. It is as well to mention here the results of the Handwork displays of the Primary. "Jumpers" — Whakaki and Nuhaka tied for first place, both
Sir A. T. Ngata
I I KARERE
Mn. 1«M1
belong to the Mania District. "Scarves" Whakaki winning first and second pla< Handwork"- Tah'aenui The
Primary offering the most entries was Opoutj All of these award winners are from the Mania District Well done.
The first Genera] Session of Conf< menced at h> a.m. Daring this period the Tamaki and Korongata choirs rendered the "Hallelujah Chorus" in Maori, which was the choir tt st : ' p.m. the Becond General S<
nference was convened, where the Nuhaka and Huria choirs participated. The first business trans- : during the morning session was the presenta- tion of the names of the General Authorities i Church, the General Officers and Authorities of the New Zealand Mission for the vote of the Confer- ence, they were unanimously sustained. Here also was honoured the memory of Elder Heed Smoot of Kj*rf|
lined of the Twelve Apostles, w i -JTsLMflflEfltT"
died.
The reunion of the M.A.C. Old Boys took the r •■
form of a concert, which was staged in the L.D.S. ",KV
Hall, of special interest on this programme was the appearai
lldentS t(» attend the College, and only re- turned after 1 1 years' touring, visiting India. Africa. Spain. France. Japan. China and many other coun- tries of Europe and Asia. His talk of travels and experiences were really flights into the realm of ad- venture. The evening's programme for the day was sponsored by the M.I. A., where many of the winning competitive events were well received. A further continuation of contest work was also a feature of the evening, which took the form <■:' hakas. action BOngS, DOis and dan<
Priesthood and Relief Society began the Sab- bath when each conducted general meetings. Presi- dent Cowley conducted the Priesthood, where much work was accomplished. The attendance showed 5 High Priests, l Seventy, 1 LO Elders, 9 Pries! Teachers, 9 Deacons and 10 visitors. The Relief Society, under the direction of Pare Takana. offered instructions to officers and teachers for the coming year's activities. The general message of the gather- ing was very aptly presented by Sister Eava T. Cowley, stressing the heautification of homes and chapels, and assisting the Priesthood in the Welfare Project which was officially launched dur- ing the afternoon session on Saturday by President Cowley, naming Wipere Amaru as Supervisor. Sister Ani I.. Kamau demonstrated the
handwork for the coming year. As it pertains the work of the women of the Mission, the marquee containing the handwork of the Relief Societies and Primaries presented the many interested visitors a glimpse Of what these organizations are endeavouring to foster and teach. The beautiful quilts, aprons Of various typo. Maori art of many kinds, ind the many other displays typified the wonderful patience, culture and thrift of the women and children in the M
The Sunday School meeting at 10.30 a.m. was conducted by Sydney Crawford, Superintendent of the Hawke's Bay District Sunday Schools, at the request of Kelly Harris, Mission Sunday School Secretary, where the theme, "Our Homes and Chapels shall be Beautiful," was the essence of the programme. Particular emphasis was given the "theme" when President Cowley spoke to the conference. Before concluding the
Wipere Amaru
Mei, 1941
TE KARERE
665
meeting, in as much as the Auckland District choir participated in the choir contest during this meeting, Walter Smith, adjudicator for the choral contest, attested Korongata first, Tamaki second, and Nuhaka third. Following was the instruction meeting for the benefit of the Sunday School officers and teachers, which was very well attended and so worthwhile in its purpose of unifying all phases of the work, 'particularly the record keeping. General questions were clarified. All reports by branches to be made in triplicate, one for own use, one to District, and the other to the Mission S.S. Secretary every quar- ter. The need to have every member of the branch active in Sunday School work was the high spot of the proceedings, and following in this vein, more contributors to the "six-penny fund," which will be required half-yearly.
The afternoon Session of Conference was of special interest to the Mahia District people. Par- ticulars of this meeting will be found elsewhere in this issue. The European Saints attending the Hui Tau, met in the Chapel under the direction of President W. R. Perrott of the Auckland Branch and District. The number who attended were few, but certainly they were well rewarded.
In concluding the General Sessions of Con- ference the Relief Society began the evenin's ser- vice with speeches, ending with a very impressive "Books of the Bible" as its theme. The Priesthood
|
■- |
i 1 . |
|
|
^v\ * |
||
|
z |
||
|
i |
Rangi. Puriri
pageant, with the
then assumed control and, in the speeches, blessed the people and re- membered to thank our Heavenly Father for His. blessings to us all. The gems of thought and inspiration presented by President Cowley during the entire Conference and taken up by the speakers of the Hui will live spiritually with the Saints and friends, lifting them to heights of spiritual hope and practical application. This Hui Tau was decidedly the most spiritual in recent years. In concluding this report of such a memorable conference, the underlying current of spiritual vigour that was peacefully felt by all was the knowledge that Missionaries from Zion who have since returned are remembering this land during this Hui Tau, that their labour of salvation among us were sincerely appreciated.
The Monday was given over to sports, which were expeditiously concluded in the forenoon. From Thursday afternoon until Monday afternoon the Lord blessed the Hui with ideal weather. Warm sun- shine during the day and lovely cool evenings were blessings vividly appreciated in view of the fact that at approximately noon a cold wind warned the coming of a storm. A storm it was. Rair and wind at gale ferocity necessitated vacating all large and small marquees and tents. The people were moved with all their belongings into the Chapel and Hall, where unfortunately the Coronation Ball, which was to take place in the Hall, had to be suspended. At the height of the storm the unity of the people under one roof in the Hall set a seal of strength and courage upon the gathered Israelites that compensated in measure the forfeiting of the crowning M.I. A. achievement of the Hui Tau. the coronation of the winning queen and the presentation of awards.
Of noticeable interest during the Sessions of Conference was the appearance on the stand with President Cowley of Rangikawea Puriri of Korongata, Hastings. This young man, nearing the century in years, was accorded this signal honour by President Cowley at the last Hui Tau, 1940, and Brother Rangikawea Puriri will have B place on the stand at every meeting at all future Bui Tains) during his Life.
Tena koutou te hunga kainga. Special blessings are yours for your labours and sacrifices to give us such a Hui Tau. Kia ora koutou katoa.
666 TE KARERE Ma l'Ml
PRIMARY
SLOGAN FOR 1941
"And they shall also teach their children to praj and to walk uprightly before the Lord." I Doc & Gov. 68:28.)
RESOLUTION FOR EACH CHILD "I will help to keep m\ home, my chapel and my marae beautiful."
PROJECT '*I will learn the 'Articles of Faith.' "
LESSONS:
FIRST WEEK
Objective:
The truest happiness comes from serving the Lord.
To the Teacher:
In the preparation of this lesson it will be well to read the Bible text carefully. Talk with the children about temples and show pictures of one or more, that they may understand the reference to the temple where Hannah prayed. Help the children to understand that Samuel's service in the temple brought him near to our Father in Heaven. Take advantage of the splendid opportunity to instill in the minds of the children that there is joy in service. Our task this month is to help boys and girls fill well the place in which they now find themselves and qualify for a greater service that they may receive greater joy.
Lesson Story:
A BOY WHO LIVED IN THE TEMPLE
Hannah was a woman who lived long ago. Her home was in the hill country. In spring time it was a delightful place to live. The hills about Hannah's home were beautiful with grass and flowers. Han- nah had a good, kind husband who loved her, but she was often sad and lonely because the Lord had given her no little boys and girls.
Every year Hannah and her husband went to a place called Sheloh to worship God.
Once when they went to Sheloh to the beautiful temple there, Hannah went away by herself and prayed to Our Heavenly Father that He would send her a son. She promised the Lord that if she had a son she would lend him to the Lord all the days of his life. She meant that she would take the child to the temple when he was old enough and let him stav there and work for the Lord instead of living at home with her.
God heard Hannah's prayer and sent a little son to her. She named him Samuel. Oh how happy Hannah was! She was very thankful, too, to her Heavenly Father and sang songs of praise to Him. Sometimes she was just a little sad for she wanted to keep her little boy always with her, but she remembered her promise to lend him to the Lord and she kept it.
When little Samuel was old enough to leave his mother she took him to the Temple.
She went to Eli, the high priest in the temple and said: "I prayed to the Lord for this child and He gave me what I asked for; now I bring him back that he may serve the Lord here."
Mei, 1941 TE KARERE 667
So Hannah left her little boy in the temple with Eli. She kissed him goodbye and went back to her home, which was a long way from the temple. Eli, the priest, took charge of Samuel and treated him as if her were his own child. He provided a little bed for him in the holiest place in the temple. When he grew to boyhood, Eli gave him certain duties to perform in the temple. The Bible says "he ministered before the Lord" which means that he helped Eli in the temple in a quiet gentle way. All the men who came to the temple loved Samuel, and the Lord loved him and was pleased with him.
No doubt Hannah was often lonely for her little son. She thought about him every day though she could go to see him only once a year. Every time she went to see him she gave him a beautiful white linen coat.
She was very happy when she found that all the people loved little Samuel, but more happy to know the Lord also loved him.
One night when Samuel was lying asleep on his little bed in the temple he was awakened by a voice calling "Samuel, Samuel!" He arose immediately and went to Eli and said, "Here am I, You called me?"
The old priest said, "No I did not call you, Samuel. Go and lie down and go to sleep."
Samuel went back to his bed, but no sooner had he lain down than he heard the voice again calling, "Samuel."
Again he went to Eli and was very much surprised when the priest told him that he had not called him. Samuel returned to his bed. Then for the third time, the voice called, "Samuel." The boy arose and went to Eli, saying, "Here am I; for thou didst call me."
Eli knew now that it was the Lord who had spoken, so he told Samuel to go back to bed and if his name were called again to say, "Speak, Lord; for thy servant heareth."
Samuel went and lay down and again he heard the voice.
The boy answered as he had been told by Eli. Then the Lord told Samuel that he was displeased with Eli, because he had allowed his sons to do wicked things and had not prevented them.
In the morning Samuel went about his work. The priest saw that Samuel looked very sad, so he called him to him and said, "Samuel, my son, what did the Lord tell thee last night? Do not fear to speak; I wish to know the truth. Tell me all."
Then Samuel told him all that the Lord had said. Eli knew it was the Lord who spoke and was not angry with Samuel. Samuel grew and the Lord blessed him and all the people knew he was chosen to be a prophet in Israel.
Conversation After the Story:
Show the picture, The Infant Samuel. Help the children to feel that true joy comes by doing what is right. In your conversation help the children to see the difference between the joy that came to Samuel who served the Lord because he loved Him and the sorrow that came to Eli's sons who did not serve the Lord. How can you serve the Lord? When is the proper time to begin?
SECOND WEEK
DOING ONE'S SHARE Objective:
To help the children to be aware that there is joy in helping others.
Suggestions for Teaching:
The successful teacher is one who feels and lives the truth she is teaching. Happiness may come to all, if they are thoughtful and try to help. There are many ways a child can help father, mother, brother, sister, teacher, or playmates. Help him to rind ways.
TE KARERE \ln, 1941
Lesson Approach:
It seemed that one day an old clock that lived in Katie's house started to talk. It said impatiently:
"I have been running for a hundred years, let me rest now. Have I not served people long enough to deserve a rest?"
"It shall be as you say," replied Katie's father, laying aside the key and shutting up the glass door that enclosed its tarnished face. In a few hours the clock stopped ticking. Its hands stood still and the pendulum no longer flashed from right to left. The day ended, tin- long night passed, and morning came. The same stirring sounds as on other mornings were heard in the street; the other clocks within and without went on striking as usual. The family arose for the duties of the day, each striving to help each other in some simple way. But as they came down to breakfast each one stopped on the stairs and looked at the old clock, saying:
"How we miss it! How strange it seems not to hear it ticking!"
"I lay awake last night," said Katie's mother, "listening for it to strike."
"I cannot tell you the time now, mother," said little Katie.
And so the second day passed. But toward evening, as the father came in sight, suddenly the clock cried out:
"Come, wind me up and set me going again, for I would rather not be at all than exist without being a blessing to someone.
Conversation:
When our feet become tired and do not feel like running errands. what can we remember? How will the story help us? Let the chil- dren name two ways that little hands like their's may bless others at home each day. What other places may they be of service? What can you do at Primary to help?
Lesson Story:
TWO SISTERS
Janet and Margie were two sisters who helped each other and played together every day. Janet was eight, but Margie was just five ami was a rolly-polly little girl. She was a good sister and liked to help Janet. One night Janet was taking her dolls to bed. She had five in her arms and couldn't turn the light on.
"Wait a minute," said Margie; "I'll turn it on for you." She couldn't reach the switch so she pushed a chair to the wall, climbed up and on went the light.
One day when Janet and Margie went to school, the sun was shin- ing, but when they started home the wind was blowing. "Woo-oo," went the wind and both little girls buttoned their coats up tight. Soon Mr. Wind came harder, "Woo-oo, woo-oo," he said, blowing right into their faces.
"That hurts my cheeks and nose," said Margie.
"It goes right through my coat," said Janet. "Let's try walking backwards."
They tried that a little way, but Margie stumbled.
"Oh dear!" she cried, "we can't get home."
"Yes we can," said Janet. "Come, I'll take your hand."
Then Mr. Wind became fierce. "Woo-oo, woo-oo, woo-oo," he shrieked. He pushed so hard that Margie's little feet just couldn't go, and she began to cry. Janet felt like crying, too. but she thought, "I musn't. I must get Margie home." So she said "Now just duck your head like this so that the wind won't hit your face so hard. See, we are nearly to the corner. When we turn up the next street maybe the wind won't be so strong."
Mei, 1941 TE KARERE 669
So they went on, one step, then another, then another, until they reached the corner. The wind wasn't nearly so bad on that block, and then, they were home.
Mother had them sit by a nice warm fire and gave them warm milk to drink. Soon they were feeling fine again.
"I wonder," said Margie, "what the other children did, the ones that don't have a sister like Janet to help them home?"
THIRD WEEK
GOOD POSTURE Objective:
To help the children form the habit of sitting an standing properly. To make them aware of their responsibility to care for the bodies God has given to them.
Suggestions for Teacher:
The privilege of the Primary teacher is unlimited in directing, encouraging and inspiring the right kind of growth; the most valuable habits, and the most healthful and helpful attitudes towards the care and growth of our bodies and minds. Deepen the children's apprecia- tion for God's gift of good health and help them to be aware that they must work with Him to be well and strong.
Lesson Story:
In a corner of a field on Mr. Green's farm, there stood a tall, straight Oak tree, and on either side of it tiny twin Maples. The three trees were great friends, and the beautiful stately Oak watched over the baby Maples, and told them what they should do in order to grow tall and straight and strong, and useful as well as beautiful.
"You must send your roots down into the earth," he said, "and take all the nourishing food and water that you can; but, above all you must stand very straight and firm when the North Wind blows, and not bow and bend before him." And each little Maple said, "I will try."
But the wind was strong and the little Maples were weak, and it was very much easier to bend and bow before the wind than to stand firm when he blew so hard.
"Be careful," warned the Oak. "Stand straight, little trees, your tiny trunks are growing larger and harder every day, and if you bow before the wind they will grow crooked and you will not be able to straighten them."
For a time each little Maple said bravely, "I will try."
But after a time the great Oak felt sad, for when he said, "Stand straight and firm, little friends," he often heard an impatient and peevish little voice answer, "O dear, I can't stand straight all the time, it is too much trouble. The North Wind is so strong I must bend and bow before him. When summer time comes and soft breezes blow it will not be hard, and then I will straighten my back. And, besides, what difference does it make?
The wise Oak sighed and sighed for his little friend. He spread out his arms and tried to protect the Maple, but North Wind swept through them and made the Maple bend.
Time passed and one day Farmer Green, showing a visitor over his farm, paused beside the three trees in the field.
"What a beautiful oak tree," said the visitor.
"Yes," said the farmer, "and as useful as it is beautiful. The children love to play under its shade; they use the acorns for CUDS and saucers, and they try to reach around its big trunk. They call it 'their'
TE K \\<\ \<l. M,,. I'M!
tree. The animals. tOO, love it; they seek its shade when the sun grows hot, and its shelter when the rain falls, and people for miles around it knew and low it. it is BO Straight and strong. A beautiful tree is
a joy to everyone. Then his face changed as he pointed to the twin
maples.
those maples?" he aaked. "When I planted them, they seemed equally strong and sturdy, hut look at the difference now. That straight little fellow will some
day l>e as Strong and beautiful as the old oak. hut the wind must have been tOO much for the Other one; see how the trunk is twisted and bent and gnarled; it can never be straight now. for its trunk Is too hard. We will have to cut it down for firewood."
"It is a pity," the visitor agreed. "Do you know what those trees remind me of? Twin hoys who live near me. One is the straightest little fellow I ever saw. and he walks with his head high and his shoulders squared. He is a handsome lad. The other slouches along:, shoulders bent and head down. One cannot help but feel that their minds are like their bodies, and that the one will become a fine strong- man doing worthwhile things, a man everyone is glad and proud to know; and that the other one will never be good for anything."
"That's it." said the farmer. "If you could only make them under- stand when there is yet time — when they are young; that would be fine. But boys are all alike, I fear. They will not listen to the advice of older and wiser people. They want to go their own way. and when they get there, it is usually too late to turn back."
When the farmer and his friend had left the field, the crooked little Maple cried in despair: "Oh, Friend Oak, why did I not listen to you. why did I not try to stand straight and firm even though it was hard? Now it is too late, too late."
The Oak and the Brother Maple sighed in sympathy for him, hut they didn't know a thing they could do. Through the long, long winter this careless little tree had bent and swayed with the North Wind. And when the summer breezes blew and everything was turning green, he found he could not straighten his crooked back. He did not straighten himself when he could, and only he could keep himself straight.
As he waited through the night for the next day, when the men were to cut him down and he was to die, he thought of the boy who was growing weak and crooked, and he longed as he never had longed for anything before, for the power to speak to him — to tell him the lesson that had come to him from the wise Oak — the lesson he had not heeded:
"Don't wait, don't wait until it is too late. Don't let your body grow bent and crooked until you cannot straighten it no matter how hard you try. Stand straight and strong and firm, so that your body and your mind will grow straight and strong and firm. Don't wait until it is too late — too late!"
That night the boy had a strange dream. He dreamed he was the crooked little tree in Farmer Green's field. When it was winter and the winds blew hard and cold, he did not mind being crooked. But by and by, spring came, warm, gentle spring, and he wanted to stand erect and draw deep breaths of its soft air. But try as he would, he could not straighten out his trunk and his crooked limbs.
Cold with terror, the boy awoke to find himself in his little white bed, all twisted and cramped into a ball. Cautiously at first he stretched his legs out straight and threw his rounded shoulders back flat and erect against the bed.
"How fine to be straight again," he said to himself in the dark- ness. I'm going to try to keep this way always, and not be bent and ugly like Farmer Green's tree."
Conversation:
Talk with the children about what it means to have good posture.
Mei, 1941 TE KAREKE ^^^S
FOURTH WEEK
JESUS FEEDS THE FIVE THOUSAND Text:
Matthew .4:13-21; Mark 6:32-44; Luke 9:10-17; John 6:1-14.
Objective:
To help the children to know that Christ's understanding kindness extended to the physical needs of the people as well as to the spiritual.
Suggestions for Studying the Objective:
Because Thy loving kindness is better than life, lips shall praise Thee. — Psalms 63: 3.
"It is the little acts of kindness the little courtesies, the disposition to be accommodating, to be helpful, to be sympathetic, to be unselfish, to be careful not to wound feelings, to be considerate of others — these are the little things which added up at night are found to be the secret of a happy day."
Make the child aware that the Saviour taught by example many beautiful lessons and that all who try to do the things he preached and practiced are better and happier people.
Suggestions for Teacher:
The picture, Christ Feeding the Five Thousand, would make a good introduction. If you cannot procure a picture, make a simple drawing on the blackboard or, if a board isn't available, a large sheet of paper will answer the purpose.
Lesson Story:
JESUS FEEDS THE FIVE THOUSAND
In this story we find Jesus in a little town on the east coast of the beautiful Sea of Galilee.
He had been travelling from place to place preaching to the people and healing their sick, and now His body was weary.
The Twelve Apostles, whom Jesus had sent two by two into other cities to preach, had returned from their missionary labours. They "gathered themselves together unto Jesus, and told Him all the things, both what they had done and what they had taught." They were weary, too, and no doubt Jesus noticed it for "He said unto them, come ye yourselves apart into a desert place, and rest awhile."
This, of course, the disciples were glad to do. They would cer- tainly enjoy a quiet rest with their Master. So they all went quietly down to the shore, got into a boat and sailed across the sea to the eastern shore.
It was only six miles across the Sea of Galilee and perhaps the little vessel with its load of weary passengers sailed very slowly.
When Jesus and His Apostles reached the shore they climbed a near-by grassy hill, below which was an uninhabited plain covered with grass and dotted with flowers. They wanted peace and rest for so many people constantly came to them that "they had no leisure so much as time to eat."
They thought that no one had seen them leave, but in this they were mistaken. Very soon on the plain below them a great crowd of people began to gather. These people when they saw Jesus and the Apostles leave, walked around the sea to meet them. As they passed
II K tRERE Mn. 1«M1
a the villages, many more joined them until there was a mighty
t»- >ng. And as it was the time for the Passover Feast in Jerusalem perhaps many people who were going there followed also.
Can you Bee two pictures: one, of Jesua and His Apostles at rest on the hillside, the other, ■ great crowd of people on the plain below.
When Jesua locked down upon the people who were waiting for Him He "was moved with compassion toward them." He could not rest when they needed Him. "So in His love and pity He came down among them and spake unto them of the Kingdom of GrOd, and healed them that had need of healing."
Hour after hour passed Rfl the charmed crowd listened to the words of the Master.
The day wore on until the sun was Betting and still the great crowd listened, without a thought of leaving. Then the Apostle- re- membered how tired Jesus was and they also remembered the people who were so far from their homes, without food. So they went to Jesus saying, "This is a desert place, ard the time is now past ; send the multitude away, that they may go into the villages, and buy them- selves bread; for they have nothing to eat."
They were surprised when they heard His reply, which was. "they need not depart; give ye them to eat."
This seemed strange and impossible to them. They wondered what Jesus meant and how it could be done.
One Apostle asked, "Shall we go and buy food and give them to eat?" To this Jesus replied, "How many loaves have ye? Go and see."
Andrew, who was one of the Apostles, said: "There is a lad here, which hath five barley loaves and two small fishes; but what are they among so many?"
When Jesus heard this He told the disciples to bid the people sit down by fifties and by hundreds. In a short time five thousand men besides the woman and children were seated on the grass. It was springtime and the grass was long and green. What a beautiful sight it must have been! Someone has said that they must have looked like beautiful flower-beds in a garden.
When they were all seated, Jesus "took the five loaves and two fishes, and looking up to heaven, He blessed, and brake; and gave the loaves to the disciples, and the disciples gave them to the multitude. And likewise of the fishes as much as they would." The disciples passed the food to the multitude and when they were all fed "they took up the fragments that remained, twelve baskets full."
This miracle made a great impression on the people. Many of them said to each other, "This is of a truth that prophet that should come into the world." Others said, "This is the Christ."
They were ready to crown Jesus as their King. They were excited and were planning to compel Him to do as they wished.
Jesus was grieved to think that they misunderstood Him and what was meant when He spoke of "His Kingdom." He urged the Apostles to leave the crowd and go back to the other shore. When they had gone and the multitude had gone away He went up into the mountain and there again he was alone with His Father in Heaven.
Teach:
"Let's Be Kind to One Another." Prayer:
One of the girls.
%
§
NOTICE £
We have a number of the April issue of "Te Rarere" on hand which contains the pictures of the Missionaries from Zion since the arrival of President Cowley. These copies are available at 6d. each.
i
The fallowing quaint notice zvas posted on a church door: —
MISSING Last Sunday, some families from church.
STOLEN Several hours from the Lord's day, by a number of people of different ages dressed in their Sunday clothes.
STRAYED
Half-a-score of lambs, believed to have gone in the direction of "No Sunday School."
MISLAID
A quantity of silver and copper coins on the counter of a public house, the owner being in a state of great excitement.
WANTED Several young people. When last seen were walking in pairs up Sabbath Breakers' Lane, which leads to the City of No Good.
\ LOST
A lad, carefully reared, not long from home, and for a time promising. Supposed to have gone with one of two older companions to Prodigal Town.
Any person assisting in the recovery of the above shall in nowise lose his reward. — Selected.
For use in home Sunday Schools, with the family, and very suitable for congregational singing at Hui Pariha(s) are a limited number of Song Books containing 30 hymns with music for 25 of them. The price per copy is 6d. V^
I
HUI PARIHA — MOTHER'S DAY — PARI PARI, HASTINGS <f The Hawke's Bay District Hui Pariha will be held at Paki
( v*> Paki, Hastings, May 10th and 11th, which will be the occasion I
SK of celebrating Mother's Day and remembering the restoration )K
*Y\ of the Aaronic Priesthood. ?
0®
^>i#ov<^ ■•->. '-•>. '-:>. '->. '->. '->. '->.
BRANCH TEACHERS1 MESSAGE
"FAST OFFERINGS — CHURCF WELFARE PLAN"
OUR Church is now engaged in a great programme designed for the present, the future and the permanent welfare of all the members of the Church. For the first time in more than a hundred years, a plan ha- hern provided which will demonstrate to the world the effectiveness, the brother- hood, and the divinity of the Gospel plan.
The world is in chaos. The prophecies are being fulfilled. Regardless of what others think and do in times like these, our
Church has chartered a positive course, has provided a definite
plan, and calls upon all members t<» join in making it successful.
There should he no mistaken notion harhoured hy anyone that the Church Welfare Plan is temporary. Such is not the case. It is a permanent plan which has been Set up hy inspira- tion at a time win n the need is apparent. It is designed to help our people meet the conditions which every thoughtful person recognizes are ahead. In addition, it is designed to emphasize in the church the true spirit of brotherhood, as re- vealed through Joseph Smith, and eventually to end forever suffering, humiliation, and distress among the Latter-day Saints.
This can all be accomplished through the CO-operatiOl] and un- selfish participation of all faithful and loyal members of the Church.
The foundation of the Welfare Plan is the system of Fast Offerings instituted by the Lord for this very purpose. This sound, practical and effective plan, if accepted and followed hy all members of the Church, will make possible the accomplish- ment of every objective of the Welfare Plan: and. in addition, will benefit and hies- those who give, as well as those who
receive.
Every member of the Church who desires to keep the com- mandments of the Lord, and assist in carrying <»n His work
here on the earth, should accept and follow in its true spirit the Fast 1 >ay plan of the Church.
To give money on Past Day for the benefit of others will bring blessings to the giver; to give of yourself, in addition, through fasting and prayer, following the true spirit of the
Day will multiply those blessings.
The desires of the Lord for Hi- people are clear. He has asked that we refrain from two meals on the first Sunday of
each month, and give the equivalent of their cost to those in distress. That plan has never been rescinded, changed or
modified. It stands to-day as the law of the Church. When it i- accepted ami followed hy all members of the Church. tin- Welfare Plan will provide for all who need, and will make possible both the temporal and spiritual growth and pro{ in the Church far beyond what has been accomplished in the past.
"As for me and my house, we will serve the Lord."
Wahanga 35 Hune, 1941
Nama 6
Maori Display in front of Fresno Chapel in California. (See inside)
1««.VJ 1I1IIHMU7.
HOHEPA METE MEHA
WITH THE ROYAL N.Z. AIR FORCE OVERSEAS
To be the first Maori Editor of Te Karere was the honoured lot of Elder Hohepa ^lete Hepa, who. when this reaches you, will have left New
Zealand's shores for overseas service with the Royal New Zealand Air Force.
The October, 1932. issue of Te jA ^^ Karcrc proudly hears his name on the
BL / . editorial stall as Assistant Editor to
Ml %\ i Elder Gerald J. Gibb. Six months B^ JH^ | later he assumed the Editor's chair with the March, 1933. issue of Te Karere when Elder Gibb returned to his home land in Canada. From this time on Elder Meha laboured dili- gently and faithfully alone for more than two years guid- ing the life of Te Karcrc. In this work his efforts will live to honour and bless his memory.
Associated with his literary work in the Church. Brother Meha assumed the leadership of the Mission Sunday Schools two years after his arrival in Auckland, when Harold Fred Davis left for America in September, 1934. Since then the Mission Sunday Schools and the name Hohepa M. Meha have become as one, each syn- onymous with the other.
[n his work as man, member of the Church, officer in any of the Auxiliaries, and as a unit defending demo- cracy. Elder Hohepa Mete Meha has always and will always give of his best, humbly and conscientiously, with the happy smile of joyfully appreciating the companion- ship of all about him. There was nothing he couldn't do for anyone. If a fault there is about him, it is that one thing — trying his best to do something for everyone else, in so doing fail to remember something he promised to do either for himself or another. Because of this Hepa (Continued on Inside Back Cover)
Te Karere I
Wahanga 35
Established in 1907 Hune, 1941
Nama 6
&&i-sj&Z -*j&>i&>£&Z -^F« b&>»&>£&
Matthew Cowley Kelly Harris Eru T. Kupa Waimate Anaru
Tumuaki Mihana Etita
Kaiwhakamaori Kaiwhakamaori
"Ko tenei Pepa i zvhakatapaa hex hapai ake i te izvi Maori ki roto i nga zvJiakaaro-nui.'
"Te Karere" is published monthly by the New Zealand Mission of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, and is printed by TE KARERE PRESS, No. 2 Scotia Place, Upper Queen Street, Auckland, CI, N.Z. Subscription Rates: 3/- per six months; 5/- per year; £1 for five years; £2/10/- for life. (United States Cur- rency: $1.00 per year; $4.00 for five years; $10.00 for life.)
Address Correspondence, Box 72, Auckland, C.l, New Zealand.
!.
CONTENTS
bv Matthew Cowley
Page
.. 678
Editorial —
Church Welfare Plan,
Special Features
Hohepa A'lete Meha Inside Front G >ver
He Hoa, E Tangihia Ana, by Rawiri M. Kamau 680
681
690
693
Etahi o Nga Whakaaro i Mau, by Wiremu Takana . . .
America, by J. Reuben Clark, Jr
Priesthood, by Howard Osborne
The Saints— The World, by Hohepa M. Meha
Church Welfare Programme, by Wi Pere Amaru, A.B,
M.A
Church Features —
Mahi Kura Hapati I i84
To the Sunday Schools 694
Sunday School 696
Primary 697
News from tin- Fields "(M
COVER MOTIF—
j. the return of the Zion Elders many of them were assigned to lab< u Elders Biesinger, Henderson and Burningham
have continued their work in the Cal i
permitted to display Maori programmes and arts We Bee them here honouring their labours in Maoriland.
TE KARERE
1 1 uno. 1041
Editorial . .
CHURCH WELFARE PLAN
The Welfare Plan of the Church is getting under wax- in the Mission. Already several of the branches have started welfare projects, and under the direction of \\ i I 'ere Amaru instructions will be sent out and committees will be organized for carrying on the work.
For all who are interested in this worthwhile activity the following remarks by Elder John A. Widstoe are timely:
"Eternal principles must guide us in our efforts, else the results will be temporary. That is the firsl and most im- portant consideration.
"WORK, or industry, is the basis of economic safely. True wealth is produced by the intelligent application of human labour to the resources offered by the earth, and in
no other way. All that we have to sustain our lives and to give us comfort is the product of human labour. The first step in any programme for economic welfare must In' to put every person to work to produce wealth from existing natural resources. It is the beginning and the end of any sound economic system.
"None should he exempt from work, if able-bodied. Idleness at any period of life invites uselessness, unhappiness and evil. Productive labour, with opportunity for ample
leisure and rest, should he the' desire of all — men and women. young and old. The conservation or use of human energy lies at the bottom of spiritual as well as material welfare.
"THRIFT is a companion principle to WORK. Wealth, won by intelligent industry, whether much or little, should he used with discriminating care, with economy in view. It must he cherished as die product of life's best -ion-, which are: Opportunity for industry, strength to labour, and time in which to work. Wealth must not be wasted or spent in useless pursuits. Waste is an evil second, only to idleness.
"A third principle completes the supporting pillars safe economic structure. Men must live within the means obtained by their productive labour. That is. DEBT must he avoided. It should he abhored. The burden of repay- ment is always heavier than that of production. He who contracts a debt enters into partnership with an cnenr .
Hune, 1941 TE KARERE
Economic prosperity requires that men go without things rather than to go into debt for them.
"Add to these principles FAITH and trust in the Lord, OBEDIENCE to His commands, and PRAYER to Him for help, and we may be certain that success will smile upon our efforts to raise all Church members into positions of economic prosperity. Let it ever be remembered that only the Lord can give security to human kind. Man can only advance one another's welfare. Therefore, the name CHURCH WEL- FARE PLAN is preferable to CHURCH SECURITY PROGRAMME.
"Undoubtedly, if all men feared God, used their energies in productive labour, were thrifty, and lived within their in- comes, there would and could be no economic depressions. Any other procedure of living causes financial panics, breeds poverty, and makes charity necessary.
"These principles of economic security and progress must be applied by each individual for himself in his life's endeavours. SELF-EFFORT is the key to self-develop- ment and personal progress. There must be no needless leaning on others for support. The only dependence should be self-dependence, under God's will. Self-help brings greatest happiness.
"To prevent an economic depression or to rise out of one is the personal concern of every individual, not of a central agency, however rich and powerful. The long history of the race shows that individual self-effort, coupled with self-reliance, is always victorious. If it does not yield great wealth, it makes big men."
"The call to service in the Church Welfare Plan merely means that we bring into renewed and more vigorous action external, conquering principles. In no other way can we secure certain progress or enduring happiness. In no other way can we solve the problems of this or any other daw Every Latter-day Saint should understand, respect, and prac- tice these principles, upon which the material happiness of the world depends," (Improvement Era, June. 1938.) The Church Welfare Plan is the greatest religions movement of modern times. In the New Zealand Mission the welfare of every member of the Church should be the concern of ever) other member. There is no place in God's plan of econom}
for either idle hands or idle lands. Let US begin this plan by
honouring the 1 ,ord with our substance.
— Matthew ( 'owiey.
TE K VRERE Hum, 1W1
.-**"
He Hoa, E Tang;ihia Ana
Te Matenga <> [rimana Raeana (Edmond Lyon)
\(,A AWHINA I TE HUNGA TAPU
Na Raxviri M. Kamou
I a ia e ora ana e manaaki ana ia me tona whanau katoa, ara, ona taina, ia matou o Koro- ngata nei. He tino hoa pono kia matou i roto i a matou ahua hiahia katoa. I te tu he hui. kanikani ranei, mahi nui mo te Hahi i waenga- nui i to matou iwi, tae tonu mai ta ratou awhina hei tautoko, whakatuturu hoki i te kupu ra — - "aroha tetahi ki tetahi." I te wa o te maka- riri ko tona whenua te ora mo matou, ara, mo nga wahia kia ka ai te ahi, kia maoa hoki te kai. Ko wai, ko wai o matou e haere ana ki Rawiki M. K.wiai a ia he tono awhina mo enei wahi he homai.
noaiho tana. Noreira te aroha ki a Irimana Raeana (Edmond Lyon) o Greenhill, Hastings, i aia i mate e 61 ona tau. He tangata nui i waenganui i tona iwi i te Pakeha, ara, he whenua nui tona. He hipi, he kau ona taonga maha i runga i te 2000 eka. Te nui o tona whare me te ataahua o nga whakapaipai te miharo o nga kainga o te takiwa kia matou.
Te mate nana nei ia i mau he huango. E 20 nga tau e mauiwi ana i tenei mate, a i te ata i hemo ai ia, e rua haora i nuiri mai i tona aranga ake i te ata.
I runga i te aroha, mamae ngakau, ka tono mai nga taina me te pouaru kia tae atu matou nga pekeke ki tona whare, e 20 nei nga ruuma (rooms) kia kite whakamutunga matou i a ia. I te po ka tae matou, ka tangi, heke noaiho nga roimata aroha ki ana mahi me te hua o tona aroha ki te tangata. He maha nga Pakeha rangatira o te takiwa i reira. I mua atu o to matou hoki ka inoi mai te whare-mate mehemea ka waiata te koea i te karakia whakamutunga mo te tupapaku, a whakaetia ana.
Te 2.30 o nga haora o te titahatanga o te ra i te Wenerei ka timata te karakia ka rewa ake nga reo o te koea i nga waiata e tika ana mo tenei ahau. Nuku atu i 200 i hui ki te hui-koha ki tenei tangata. I te koea e waiata ana, ka patapatai te Pakeha no hea tenei mea reka, ataahua? I konei ka whakamohiotia atu no nga iwi e kiia nei e ratou — Mormons! Te ingoa tika, no te Hahi o Ihu Karaiti o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri Nei i Korongata. Tino nui nga mihi ki tenei taonga a tatou. Kei ia ratou ano a ratou korero pakeha whakapaipai mo te reka o nga reo waiata.
Te ropu haere ki te- urupa nuku atu i te 500 i runga i nga waka 100 me nga pahi (buses) e rua. Te roa o te huarahi haere e 9 maero a i konei ka tino kitea te nui o nga tangata i hui ki te mihi whaka- mutunga ki to matou, ara, to tatou hoa, kia Irimana Raeana.
BOUND VOLUME OF " TE KARERE," 1940
A limited number of bound volumes of the 1940 issue of Te Karere is now available. Place your orders as soon as pos- sible with Te Karere, Box 72, Auckland. Price 8/-.
Hune, 1941
TE KARERE
681
Etahi o Nga Whakaaro i Mau
NA WIREMU TAKANA, PAKEKE, KUA MATE
(He roanga tvtarua)
Na te Etita. — Kei roto i "Te Karere" o maehe o tenei tau te timatanga o enei korero, whaingia te roanga tuatahi i roto i nga wharangi o "Te Karere" mo Aperira, a ko tenei te roanga tuarna.
Kati ra. E te iwi whakarongo ki tenei. Ko te mana i riro mai i o tatou tupuna i ngaro tonu atu i o ratou whare Wananga, kaore kia kotahi wahi i mau mai o taua mana i te iwi Maori. Pera ano hoki te titiro atu ki te mana i tukua iho e te Karaiti, e ana Apotoro, i mutu tonu atu i aua ra ano i a ratou. Ina hoki ra, kua kore nga mana whakaora, nga mahi merakara, nga kitenga, me nga mahi poropiti ano hoki, me nga whakapakanga ringaringa mo te whakaoranga o nga turoro, me te whakapakanga ringaringa hoki, hei ho- maitanga a te Wairua Tapu o te Atua. Koia tonu te kaha i riro mai i a ratou i te ra o te Petekoha, e kite ana inaianei i roto i nga akoranga o te ao.
Engari, ko te ki anake, me whakapono, ka ora ai. E ora ana, koia, o tatou mate i runga i tena ki? Kaore ra pea. No te mea, ma nga mahi me te whakapono, ka tika ai. He aha nga mahi e tika ai te whakapono? Ko nga mahi ra o roto i taua Tohungatanga Tapu o te Atua. Mehemea, kaore enei mea e kitea ana inaianei ka tika te ki i mutu atu taua mana i aua wa o nga Apotoro ratou ko nga Poropiti. wahi i mau mai i etahi tangata, i tetahi, i tetahi tangata ranei, no te mea, kahore rawa e rangona ana aua ahuatanga i enei nga ra o muri nei, no reira hoki, te tangata i atiutiu haere ai ki te kimi i aua mana whakaora i roto i nga tino whakaakoranga o tenei ao ; heoi, kaore e kitea. Na, mehemea i ngaro atu, me pehea tatou e whiwhi ai ano? E penei ana nga tikanga o te whare Wananga o o tatou tupuna. Ma te tangata kei a ia taua mana e tuku atu ki tetahi atu tangata, ma tetahi atu tangata e tuku atu ki tetahi atu i roto i te ture o taua mana.
T pera ano te mana i homai e to tatou Ariki a Ihu Karaiti ki ana Apotoro ratou ko nga Poropiti, he mea hoatu, ehara i te una. ka riro noa mai i te tangata e whakapono ana.
E ki ra hoki a Paora, "E kore ano hoki tetahi e tango i tenei honore ki a ia ano, engari te tangata e karangatia ana e te Atua. e peratia ana me Arona," ara, he mea whakapa nga ringaringa o Mohi ki a ia. Na reira, i riro mai i a ia te mana a te Atua. Na. me pehea ra tatOU, 1 te mea, kaore he tangata kei a ia nei tenei mana i
WlREMU TAKANA
Kahore hoki tetahi
682 II". K \\<\.\<\ Hunc. 1941
te whenua nei, mc pehea tatou e whiwhi ai, i te mea kaore he tangata
c ki ana kei a ia tan.'! mana pera me Mohi i whakahaua nei e te Atua kia hoatu te mana ki toria tuakana ki a Arona? Na, mc pehea i at «>u ?
He pono tenei ki. me hoki mai ano aua Langata i hoatu nei e te
Atua taua mana ki a ratou, hei whakahoki mai tana mana ki a tatou ki nga tamariki a te tangata. Titiro atu ki te \va i a te Karaiti me ana Akonga tokotoru i runga i te maunga. I puta mai ai ki a ratou a Iraia raua ko Mohi, i whakahoki a mai ai te Tohungatanga Tapu o Merekehereke. Na, mc pera ano enei tangata ki a tatou, ma ratou ano e whakahoki mai taua mana tapu ki o te Atua tangata i whiri- whiria ai i runga i te mata o te whenua nei.
E niea ra hoki, a Amoho, "He pono e kore te Ariki a [howa e malii i tetahi mea; engari, ka whakakitea e la tana whakaaro puku ki ana pononga, ki nga Poropiti." Na, E te iwi. E tino mohio ana tatou ki tenei, kahore he tangata i ki mai ko ia ta te Atua Poropiti i enei nga ra. Heoi ano ra. ko nga tangata kei a ratou nei nga Atua whiowhio e ki ana he tohunga ratou. he poropiti hoki, engari, kaore ano ratou i ki mai. "Tenei te whakaaro puku a te Atua." Me penei hoki, kua rite tonu ta ratou whakahaere ki ta nga Poropiti, ki ta nga Apotoro o to tatou Ariki a Ihu Karaiti? Tirohia atu he tauira, kia mohio ai tatou. Ko Rua, kei a ia ano tana whakahaere. Ko Te Whiti raua ko Tohu, kei a raua tikanga i a raua. me era atu tohunga Maori kei a ratou ano a ratou whakahaere. Kahore rawa he mea e rite ana ki nga tauira o nga Apotoro ratou ko nga Poropiti i a ratou nei te mana a te Atua. Tera noa ake, kaore hoki ratou i ki mai, na aua Karere Tapu o te Atua i homai te mana o te Atua, engari ko o ratou mana he mea riro noa mai e ai ki te titiro atu, pera atu ano hoki era atu akoranga i runga i te mata o te whenua, kaore a ratou kupu, he mea homai te mana ki a ratou, e aua Karere Tapu.
Na, K te iwi Maori. Ehara i te- mea ko tatou anake te iwi o te ao nei kua kotiti ke. I roto i nga whakaakoranga maha o tenei ao, ka timata tetahi tangata, he tino taitamariki ia, i waenganui i te tekau ma wha, te tekau ma rima tan, ka rapu haere, mehemea, kei whea taua mana i roto i nga whakaakoranga maha o tenei ao, i te mea, e karanga mai ana ratou ki a ia, "Na tenei ! ra tera! haere mai." Ka ohorere tona ngakau, ka kore mohio hoki me ahu atu ia ki tehea o ratou. Heoi, i a ia e whakaaroaro penei ana, katahi ia ka timata te rapu i nga Karaipiture. Ko tehea te huarahi mana e ora ai ia? Ka tupono ia ki tenei Karaipiture e mea nei, "Ki te hapa tetahi o koutou i te matauranga, me inoi ia ki te Atua e homai nui nei ki te katoa, kahore ana tawai mai ; a, ka homai ki a ia." I konei, tino whakaae tonu atu ia, ko ia taua tangata e hapa ana i te matauranga, ina hoki, kahore ia e mohio me haere ia ki ewhea o enei e karanga mai nei ki a ia, "Haere mai." Xa, whakaae tonu atu ia, me inoi ia ki te Atua, kia whiwhi ia ki taua matauranga, kia mohio ai ia ki te huarahi, hei tomokanga mana.
Hune,1941 TE KARERE 683
Ka kite tatou i konei, kaore tenei tangata i hiahia kia tu ia, he tohunga, he poropiti, he aha ranei, engari, tino whai ia i te oranga mo tona tinana. No konei ia ka haere atu ki te wahi ngaro inoi atu ai ki tona Matua i te Rangi. I a ia e inoi ana, ka puta whakarere mai he maramatanga i te Rangi, kei runga ake i te tiahotanga mai o te ra, tu ana nga tangata tokorua i tona aroaro, e mea mai ana tetahi ki a ia me te tohu ki tera, "Ko Taku Tama tenei i aroha ai, Taku i ahuareka atu ai, whakarongo ki a ia."
Ka mea atu ia ki a ia, "Me uru atu au ki tewhea o nga akoranga nei ?"
Ka mea mai tera ki a ia, "Kauaka, kahore hoki he mana kei a ratou, ko te ahua o te karakia kei a ratou, ko te kaha, me te mana, kua whakakahoretia. Kaore hoki te Rongo Pai pono i a ratou, engari ki te u koe, tera koe ka mohio ki te huarahi e haere ai koe." Katahi ia ka ohorere i te titiro atu ki te Atua, he tinana ano tona, he wahi kikokiko, he wheua hoki, no te mea, ki tana whakaaro i runga i nga akoranga o te ao, he tinana kore to te Atua.
Na, i tona hokinga atu ki te kainga, tutaki tonu atu ia ki tetahi o nga minita i mea mai ki a ia i mua atu, "Haere mai, kei konei te ora." Ka korero atu ki a ia, kua kite ia i tetahi kitenga. Mea tonu mai ana taua minita, "Ehara, te kitenga he whakaaro pohehe no tou ngakau. Kua kati ake hoki te Rangi, kua mutu noa atu tenei mea te kitenga i nga wa o te Karaiti ratou ko nga Apotoro." Mea atu ana taua taitamariki, "Ahakoa pehea, e kore rawa e taea e au te whakakahore, i te mea kua kitea nei e au." Na, i timata nga whaka- toinga ki tenei taitamariki i taua ra ano, pau noa nga tau e toru. He ahakoa i u tonu ia ki taua kupu. I te nui o tona tangi me tona hiahia kia mohio ai ia ki taua huarahi i whakaaria ai ki a ia, ka whaka- paua e ia tona ngakau ki te inoi ano ki te Atua mo taua huarahi e ora ai ia.
Na ka puta mai k o tetahi o nga Poropiti o te iwi Maori ona- mata ki a ia, he maha ana take i ko rero ai ki a ia, ko te mea nui rawa o aua take ko etahi papa koura, kei reira nei te maramatanga o te huarahi e ora ai ia, me nga whakahekenga iho o te mana Atua ki tetahi iwi kua ngaro.
Na, ka tangohia tetahi arai i a ia, a, kite tonu atu ia kei reira nei aua papa e huna ana. He po tenei ; i te aonga ake o te ra, ka haere tonu atu ia ki taua wahi i whakakitea mai ra ki a ia. Heoi, tutaki ana ia ki taua Poroiti, nana hoki i whakakite mai te wahi i takoto ai nga papa koura, me tetahi mea potakataka, me nga papa paraihe, me tetahi hoari.
Na, ka rere atu ona ringaringa ki aua papa koura, katahi ka mea mai taua Poropiti ki a ia, "Kaore ano kia rite te wa kia riro enei mea i a koe. Engari, me hoki mai koe ki konei, ia tan, ia tau, mo nga tau e wha, ko reira pea ai enei mea riro ai ki ou ringaringa. Ma tou u hoki ka riro, ki te kore, kahore."
( Turin //<• roanga >
TE KARERE Hune, 1941
Mahi Kura Hapati
RATAPU TUATAHI
Whakaaturanga: Nga Tikanga o te Whakapono — "Te Mohiotanga ki te Atua." Te whakaaro ki te Atua he ahuatanga i tupu ake i roto i te tangata, e matau ana te tangata mohio, e ahei ana kia penei i roto i ana whiri- whiringa mo te oranga. Ahakoa tumeke mai ia ki te whakaatu watea i tona whakaetanga he tinana tangata te Atua, otira e whakaae ana e ora ana tetahi mana whakahaere, o tetahi mana nui kaore ano nei kia mohiotia e te tangata. Te kore e mohiotia, te kore e taea te wha- nganga tona whanuitanga, ko te kahore e mohio ake. E koe, e te tangata e ako tonu ana kaore nei e eke ki te matauranga, he aha i whakahoretia ai e koe nga homaitanga kia koe e te tangata kei a ia katoa nei te mana me te mohiotanga ki nga mea katoa, kei a ia nei e pupuri ana tou oranga, kaore nei koe e whakaae ki tona ingoa. He wehi, he whakanui ta te tangata e whakatata ana kia Ia, iaia e hura- hura ana i te kaha nui me te tika o a te Atua mahi. Ina whakaaro atu kia Ia he Kai-hanga he Atua hoki, ka whakama tatou ia Ia; otira, kua homai e Ia te mana ki te whakatata atu kia Ia i te ahuatanga ho tamariki tatou Nana, me te karanga atu kia Ia i te ingoa Matua "E Pa." Ahakoa te hunga whakakahore ki te Atua, i nga wa o te whaka- aro hohonu i roto i tona oranga, e hotu ana te ngakau ki totahi Matua Wairua pera ano me tona aroha ki tona Matua o to kikokiko nei ka tahuri atu ia ki reira. Noreira ko te tangata kore whakapono ki te Atua o naianei, he ahua kau no te tangata karakia Atua whakapakoko.
Nga Patai:
1. I tupu ake i hea te whakaaro ki te Atua?
2. He aha te mea kaore e tumeke ki te whakaatu, te tangata kore Atua?
3. Na te aha i whai wahi ai tatou ki te whakatata atu ki te Atua?
RATAPU TUARUA
Nga whakaarotanga a nga hahi mo te Atuatanga.
Te whakaakoranga ngawari, whai mana hoki mo te ahuatanga o te Atua me Ona wahi, i akona nei e te Karaiti me nga Apotoro, ka taka haere i te wa kua mutu nga whakakitenga, i te panga mai hoki o t" pouritanga hakere ki runga i te ao i te kore whai mana mai i te Atua i te peinga atu hoki i nga Apotoro me te takanga atu o te tohunga- tanga i runga i te mata o te whenua, ka riro nei tona turanga i nga whakaarotanga maha me nga akoranga whakapono a te tangata, he maha hoki aua akoranga e tino kore ana te marama i te tika kore me te akoranga e whiwhi ana te tangata i te kupu mai i te Atua ma roto i te ngakau o te tangata.
Nga Patai:
1. No tehea wa te takanga haere i nga whakaakoranga me te mana i homai nei e te Karaiti?
2. Na te aha i pa mai ai tenei ahua?
3. He aha te mea nui i pa ki te mata o te whenua i taua wa?
RATAPU TUATORU
Whakaaturanga: Nga Tikanga o te Whakapono — "Te Kaunihera i Nairn." I te tau 325 i muri mai ia te Karaiti, ka te i te Emepara Kanatini (Constantine) te Kaunihera o Naihi, i rapua e ia ma roto i tenei ropu
Hune, 1941 TE KARERE 685
he whiwhinga ki tetahi whakaaturanga o te whakapono Karaitiana e noho hei kaupapa whai mana mo te whakapono, hei pehi hoki i nga raruraru e tupu nui haere ake ana mo te ahuatanga o te Atuatanga me era atu putake o te whakapono. I whakahengia hoki e taua Kau- nihera etahi o nga whakaarotanga o taua wa, kei roto i taua whaka- henga te whakaarotanga a Ariuha, ara, ko te Tama he mea hanga na te Matua, no reira e kore e mutunga kore tahi me te Matua. I whaka- haere nuitia hoki, i panuitia te whakapono e mohiotia nei ko te Whaka- pono Naihirini, i muri tonu mai ka puta ko te whakapono a Ttanatiu, i ara hoki he tautohe mo tenei whakapono. Koia tenei te whakapono e whai ake nei: "E karakia ana matou ki te Atua kotahi iroto i te Tokotorutanga me te Tokotorutanga i roto i te Kotahitanga. Kahore hoki e whakararu ana i nga tangatanga e wehe ana ranei i nga tinana, no te mea he tinana kotahi to te Matua, me te Tama me te Wairua Tapu, otira ko te Atuatanga o te Matua o te Tama me te Wairua Tapu, he kotahi katoa, e rite ana te kororia, to ratou mana nui he mutunga kore. I te mea e pera ana te Matua e pera ana ano te Tama, e pera ana ano te Wairua Tapu. Kahore i hanga te Matua, kaore i hanga te Tama, kahore i hanga te Wairua Tapu. He ora tonu te Matua, he ora tonu te Tama, he ora tonu te Wairua Tapu, ahakoa ra kaore i toru nga ora tonu kotahi ano. Kahore ano hoki i toru nga kore he mutunga mai, kaore hoki i toru nga kahore i hanga, otira kotahi ano te kahore i hanga, kotahi ano te kahore he mutunga mai, no reira ko te Matua he Kaha Rawa, ko te Tama he Kaha Rawa, ko te Wairua Tapu he Kaha Rawa. He pakeke rawa ki te whakaro iho te maha o nga kotahitanga o nga taupatupatutanga i roto i nga kupu tino iti. Nga Patai:
1. He aha te kaupapa i whakatakotoria e Kanatini? Korerotia hoki nga take nui i pu£a i raro i tana whakahaere?
RATAPU TUAWHA
Etahi atu o nga whakaakoranga.
E whakaako ana te Hahi Ingarangi i ta ratou i kite tuturu ai o. naianei mo te Atua, ara, "Kotahi ano te Atua e ora ana, te Atua tuturu, mau tonu, kahore ona tinana, ona wahi, kahore te mamae e pa kia la, he kaha mutunga kore, he matauranga, ht painga. Nga kahore- tanga o te Atua e whakaaturia nei i enei whakaaturanga o nga whaka- pono o nga hahi e tino poka ke ana i ta nga karaipiture a e tino whakahengia ana e nga whakakitenga mai o te tinana ake o te Atua kua whakaaturia ake i nga wharangi kua mutu ake nei. E mea ana matou te whakakahore i te tuturutanga o to te Atua tinana e whaka- kahore ana i te Atua, no te mea ko te mea kahore ona wahi e hapa ana tona whakaotinga, a te tinana kahore ona wahi kahore ano ona oranga. Ko te Hahi o Ihu Karaiti o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri Nei e whakahe ana ki te Atua penei, kahore e mohiotia, kahore ona tinana, kahore ona wahi, kahore te mamae. Ko ratou e tautoko ana i tona whakapono e piri pono ana hoki ki te Atua pono ki te Atua ora o roto i nga karaipiture me nga whakakitenga mai.
Nga Patai:
1. Pehea te whakaaturanga a te Hahi Ingarangi mo te Atua?
2. E eke ana ranei enei whakapono a nga hahi ki la nga karai- piture?
3. Korerotia te whakapono a te Hunga Tapu mo enei take?
RATAPU TUARIMA
Me patapatai i runga i nga kaupapa korero <> nga rchana 0 tenei marama. (Review.)
(,M
TE KARERE
Ilune. 1<M1
AMERICA
"A Chosen Land of the Lord "
From the beginning even to the cud of the
Earth.
By President J. Reuben. Clark, Jr. Of the First Presidency
Concerning Zion and its Destiny and Liberty
and its Price
(Continuation from page 653
Editor's Note. — This summary of the Past and admonition for the future of . Imeriea and its people |_ REUBEN Clark, Ik. was presented by President Clark to the closing
Session of Forty-fifth Annual Conference of the Young Men's and Young Women's Mutual Improvement Associations, in the Tabernacle, Salt Late City, I '.S.. I., at 7 p.m., Sunday, June 9, 1940.
The beginning of this address is contained in the last issue of "'/<• Karere" Page 651. President Clark, in speaking to the youth of the Church, brings to the fore the wisdom born from the past, using as a motif, "My son, keep thy father's commandment, and forsake not the laze of thy mother." He speaks of the land of Zion, beginning with the "Law oj the Hemisphere," then "A Mighty Land," "America's Destiny" "The Jareditic Civilisation" "The Bless- ing" "The Judgment," "fullness of Iniquity," and the "Lehi Civilization."
ANOTHER ''FULLNESS OF INIQUITY"
The recounting of the history of this people is unnecessary, be- cause you know it. Beginning with mere disputes, there grew bicker- ings, then quarrelings, then ruptures, then two peoples, then one cursed for its iniquities, then wars and counterwars, while this people marched steadily towards their "fullness of iniquity."
Finally there had come to all the people the same wickedness that was among the Jaredites. Mormon says:
And these Gadianton robbers, who were anion;/ the Lamanites, did infest the land, insomuch that the inhabitants thereof began to hide up their treasures in the earth; and they became slippery, because the Lord had cursed the land, that they could not hold them, nor retain them again.
And it came to pass that there were sorceries, and witchcrafts, and magics; and the power of the evil one was wrought upon all the face of the laud. . . . (Mormon IAS, 19.)
. . . Tor behold, no man could keep that which was his own, for the thieves and the murderers, and the magic art. and the witchcraft which WOS in the land. (Mormon 2A0.)
And there never had been so great wickedness among all the children of Lehi, nor even among all the house of Israel, according to the words of the Lord, as was among this people. (Mormon 4:12.)
And if they perish it zcill be like unto the Jaredites, because of the wilful- ness of their hearts, seeking for blood and revenge. (Moroni 9:23.)
Then came the final war and one people was exterminated on the same spot that had witnessed the extinction of the Jaredites — the hill Ramah to the Jaredites (Ether 15:11), to the Nephites, Cumorah (Mormon 6:6). For the utter beastiliness of the final struggle, I refer you to the record. I should shock and horrify you if I were to recount it, but it matches God's decrees to the last word and act, in every jot and title.
Hune, 1941 TE KARERE 687
Through their whole record, every word of it, through their whole history, every day and hour of it, there had run the mastery of the divine decree: Serve God or be swept off — which it may be again said is the law of this land. The record shows that whenever God was served, He showered upon them such a richness of His blessings as taxed them to gather and enjoy; whenever they sinned, He warned them with afflictions.
So a thousand years after the colony of Lehi had been founded, the Nephitic branch had been wiped out because of their iniquities as had been revealed to Lehi while the colony was founding. The Lamanitish branch remained, but under a condemnation that has fol- lowed them now for more than two thousand four hundred years.
Choice peoples have thus been tried twice and each failed to live the law and obey "the everlasting decree' governing this land.
The Lord took every precaution to see that nothing might inter- fere with this posterity of Joseph in working out their God-given destiny and the destiny of America. He provided, and so told Lehi at the very beginning of his settlement, that:
. . . it is wisdom that this land should be kept as yet from the knowledge of other nations; for behold, many nations would overrun the land, that there zvould be no place for an inheritance. (2 Nephi 1:8.)
The Lord so kept the land for a thousand years after Lehi landed. He so kept it in His wisdom for another thousand years after the Nephites were destroyed, perhaps to give the Lamanitish branch another chance.
"CHOICE LAND" AND "LAND OF LIBERTY"
But the Lord knew beforehand the outcome of the Lehi migration and informed Nephi, even before :Lehi and his family left the home shores. He declared to Nephi an era of the Gentiles who should flee their captivity and come to this land (1 Nephi 13), that the Gentiles should here scatter the seed of Nephi's brethren (ibid. 13: 14), that the Gentiles had come out of their captivity because "delivered by the power of Gcd out of the hands of all other nations," (ibid. 13:19), that they had "been lifted up by the power of God above all other nations, upon the face of the land which is choice above all other lands, which is the land that the Lord God hath covenanted with thy father that his seed should have for the land of their inheritance; . . ". (abid. 13:30, 31) ; and that the "wrath of God was upon all those that were gathered together against them (the Gentiles) to battle" on this land (ibid. 18). The Lord further declared to Lehi:
And it shall come to pass, thai if the Gentiles shall hearken unto the Lamb of God. . . .
And harden not their hearts against the Lamb of God, they shall be num- bered among the seed of thy father; yea, I hey shall be numbered among the house of Israel; and I hey shall be a blessed pen pie upon the promised land forever; I hey shall be no more brought down into captivity; and I he house of Israel shall no more be confounded.
Therefore, woe he unlo the Gentiles if it so be that thev harden their hearts against the Lamb of God. (I Nephi 14:1, 2, 6.) Just before Lehi died, he declared :
Yea, the Lord hath covenanted this laud unto me. and to my children forever, and also all those who should be led out of other countries by the hand of the Lord.
. . . that there shall none come into this land sure they shall be brought by the band of the Lord.
Wherefore, this hunt is consecrated unlo him whom lie shall bring. hut
i! it so be that they shall serve him according to the commandments which
he hath (given, it shall be a land of liberty unto them; wherefore, they shall
brought down into captivity; if so, it shall be because of iniquity; lor
TE KARERE Hune, 1941
it iniquity shall abound cursed shall be the land for their sokes, but unto the righteous it shall be blessed forever, <J Nephi 1:5-7.)
Later Lehi's son, Jacob, teaching the people, declared:
Hut behold, this land, said God, shall be a land of thine inheritance, and the G entiles shall he blessed upon the land.
. Ind this land shall he a land of liberty unto the Gentiles, and there shall he no kings upon the land, who shall raise up unto the Gentiles.
And I will fortify this land against all other nations.
And he that fight eth against Zion shall perish, saith God.
For he that raiseth up a king against >nc shall perish, for I, the Lord. the king of heaven, will be their king, and I will be a light unto them forever, that hear my words. (2 Nephi 10:10-14).
Wherefore. I will consecrate this land unto thy seed, and them who shall he numbered among thy seed, forever, for the land of their inheritance, for it is a choice land, saith God unto me. above all other lauds, wherefore I wUl have all men that dwell thereon that they shall worship me, saith God. (2 Nephi 10:19.)
PANIC OR FEAR
You Youth of the Church! With these God-given promises and prophecies before you, do not let yourselves be stampeded into this panic of fear that is now sweeping over the country, deliberately pro- pagated by those who wish to get us into the war on any pretext — this fear that if we do not enter this war we face subjugation by a foreign foe. If subjugation shall come, it will come because we have reached a "fullness of iniquity," and not because we fail to take on the horrors of this war. It is righteousness, not the hates of human slaughter, of which this nation stands now in need.
COLUMBUS AND SETTLEMENT OF AMERICA
A thousand years after the Nephites were destroyed, Columbus came, and the existence of America became known among the nations. For a hundred years thereafter the Lamanites, who had never climbed upward from the plane where the destruction of the Nephites and the horrors of that conflict had left them, were plaqued by the Spanish conquistadors, who did "afflict the seed of Lehi" (2 Nephi 10:18). Tli" visions and prophecies of Lehi, Nephi, and Jacob were fulfilled. Then in the seventeenth century came the English, the French, and . and the actual settlement of America by the Gentiles began. Soon commenced the actual scattering of the Lamanites which those same ancient prophets saw and predicted, a scattering which may not fully finished. (1 Nephi 15: 17.)
These Gentile settlers, many of whom came to the New World either to escape religious persecution in the Old or to have liberty of *:ce and freedom of worship in the New — the Puritans in New England, the Quakers in Pennsylvania, the Catholics in Maryland, the Huguenots in Virginia and the Carolines, the Lutherans in Georgia rnd other colonies — these Gentile settlers and their asociatcs began to prosper in this "chosen land of the Lord"; the land became indeed to them a "consecrated" land. They prospered financially, they grew religiously, but they went farthest and fastest in the development of their political doctrines. As if driven forward by an unseen Power, they planned and worked towards making this just what Jacob of old had said it was to be, "a land of liberty unto the Gentiles." (2 Nephi 10: 11.)
God Himself was moving the minds and souls of those whom Lehi said would be "led out of other countries by the hand of the Lord" (2 Nephi 1:6), moving them towards unmeasured blessings.
Hune, 1941 TE KARERE 689
OUR COLONIAL EXPERIENCES
I shall not attempt to trace the history of Colonial America; every- one of our youth and maidens knows that out of our embroilment in the Colonial French and Indian wars — fought over here without any other reason and excuse than that our mother countries in Europe were fighting for something purely European and wholly foreign to America — out of these came later the wisdom of Washington and Jefferson that we had no business mixing in European affairs — wisdom as vital to-day as when they first uttered it. We had been brought out, separated from, the Old World, to build a mighty nation, a land of liberty; we had come to a land consecrated to this purpose; how vain for us to join with those against whom we are to be fortified, with those who shall perish if they fight against us.
INDEPENDENCE
Militarily trained in the Colonial wars, we fought and won, with the aid of France, our War of Independence. Thus we of the United States were, as Nephi foretold and saw in vision, "delivered by the power of God out of the hands of all other nations." (1 Nephi 13: 19.)
This prophecy was to have a complete fulfilment later, but God was moving us towards our ordained destiny, towards unnumbered blessings.
WASHINGTON AND KINGSHIP
At the end of the Revolution, guided by the principle of which he had no conscious knowledge — I speak of Jacob's prophecy, "there shall be no kings upon this land" (2 Nephi 10:11) — Washington declined a crown that might have been his for the reaching out, thus setting the God-ordained precedent that there should be no kings here.
God had pushed us forward another step in our destiny. Another blessing had come to us.
From then till now kings and emperors have not prospered on this land.
Then came a period of near-chaos under the Confederation,, a period that until now was the most critical period in our national life.
THE CONSTITUTION
We had won our freedom but we were near to losing it. The Con- stitutional Convention met, and out of it came our God-inspired Con- stitution— "the most wonderful work," said Gladstone, "ever struck off at a given time by the brain and purpose of man."
The Lord Himself has declared as to this great document of human liberty, "I established the Constitution of this land by the hands of wise men whom I raised up unto this very purpose," and He added, re- ferring to the war it cost to gain us our liberties: "and redeemed the land by the shedding of blood." (D. and C. 101:80.)
The Lord declared the purpose of this Constitution when He said that it "should be maintained for the rights and protection of all flesh." (D. and C. 101: 77.)
Thus we had set up, under the guidance of God Himself, a govern- ment that made of this land the kind of land Lehi and Jacob had fore- seen and prophesied — "a land of liberty."
Again the Lord had moved us forward towards our destiny. He had bestowed upon us another blessing.
What was this plan of the Lord which had been established by the hands of wise men whom He had raised up for this very purpose'.' May [ tell yen a few of the elemental principles.
690 TE KARERE Hum-. 194]
THREE BRANCHES OF GOVERNMENT
It £ave us, for perhaps the first time in all history, a republic with the three basic divisions of government — the legislative, executive, and julicial — mutually and completely independent the one from the other, under which it is not possible for any branch of government legally
to set up a system by which that branch can first conceive what it wants to do, then make the law ordering- its doing, and then, itself, judge its own enforcement of its own law, a system that has always brought extortion, oppression — a system that every dictator has employed and must employ.
( To be continued)
Priesthood
By Howard Osborne
And God said unto them: ". . . Replenish the earth and sub- due it and have dominion over every living thing." What is the implication contained in these words? [mmediately preceding tin- words given above we read. "And God blessed them." That was the blessing of a loving Father, and in blessing Adam, the first man. God bestowed upon him the Holy Priesthood, the onl) power by which he could control the creations of God, the power by which all things are created and made. What joy must of necessity enter into the heart of man in the knowledge that this power and authority has again been restored to earth and consideration of all that this restoration implies. Let us review it briefly. Priesthood is the Power of God, therefore it is eternal. Priesthood is the key of the doorway to perfection. Priesthood is the power by which all things re. or will be, or indeed can be, created. Priesthood leads to kindness, courtesy, chivalry, etc. Priesthood, when exercised, com- mands respect.
The development of priestly powers leads in a knowledge of Theology, Astronomy, History. Mineralogy, Geology, Soil Cultiva- tion, Prophecy, Politics, Wars, Kingdoms and Judgments. Priest- hood brings happiness into the home life and incidentally Moses the community of which the hearer is a part. That a high standard of living, high temporal and spiritual qualities are required of those holding this exalted and holy calling is self evident. This embodies tlie Following ideals. Physical health, intellectual activity, vocational and financial efficiency, proper conduct and spiritual growth, love and justice. Such a. high standard of life is not acquired instantly, hut no sooner is knowledge of lesser things gained than new fields of investigation are unfolded to the mind, made active 1>\ the Spirit of Truth/
Priesthood is without beginning and without end. it is eternal, knowing no harrier except that raised by iniquity, which harrier will, in due time he vanquished. The spiritual condition of a man is; deter- mined by the decree to which he honours the Priesthood.
Hune, 1941 TE KARERE 691
The Saints— The World
NEED TO LIVE THE WORD OF WISDOM By Hohepa M. Meha
Through the channels afforded me by Te Karcre, I would like to draw the readers' attention to the Word of Wisdom, and the blessings which we receive through living this sacred and divine principle.
The Book of Moses in the Pearl of Great Price reveals a con- versation which took place between Adam and an angel of the Lord shortly after our first parents were banished from the Garden of Eden. Adam had been commanded in the Garden "to be fruitful and multiply and replenish the earth and subdue it." After the transgression he and Eve were banished from the Garden into the world with the commandment that they should "eat their bread only by the sweat of their faces" all the days of their lives. They were also commanded to offer sacrifices to the Lord — sacrifices that were without spot or blemish from among the sheep, goats and cattle. Adam obeyed this command. After many days the angel of the Lord came to Adam and asked why he was offering these sacri- fices. His answer was: "I know not, save the Lord commanded it." Adam had sufficient love and respect for his Heavenly Father that he was confident God would not ask him to do anything contrary to the laws of his own happiness and development. He was willing to take the advice, counsel and greetings of the Lord as sufficient persuasion to convince him that the opportunity to know and obey God's commandment was a great blessing and honour. This, my brethren and sisters and friends, is the type of obedience and the level of response on which the Lord desires his children to live in relation lo the will of God laid down in the Word of Wisdom.
In this great "Code" there are positive and negative teachings. Certain things are pointed out as not being good for man, either physically, mentally, morally or spiritually, included in this are alcoholic beverages and tobacco.
Al the time when this revelation was given to ihe Prophet Joseph Smith, little was known of the harmful effects of these two com- modities. However, as the years wenl by, medical science endorsed and corroborated the truth of this revelation, staling emphatically
thai these two tobacco and drink are not good for the body. The
truth of this has been brought to my notice since my period o\ train- ing as a member of the Royal New Zealand Air Force. Among other requirements expected of an Air Force trainee, physical timess is most essential and is demanded most rigidly b\ those iii authority.
TE KARERE Hone, L941
The requisites of a good airman arc to be able to think, decide and act quickly without hesitation. This can only be done by an active, clear-thinking brain which is found only in a body that is
physically and mentally fit. In the word of the medical officer, "Leave the booze alone and do not smoke to excess. Better still,
leave both entirely alone, for they are the means of dimming the eyes and the brain, the slowing up of the muscular reactions. The machines you will he handling are highly powered and most sensi- tive, the enemy are just as brave as von. Hence it is necessary that you he in a state of perfect physical fitness in order that you might come out on top."
From the above remarks from one who is in a position to give an unbiased and honest, if not professional opinion, the use of tobacco and strong drink is strongly taboo. The great majority of humanity to-day indulges in taking into their bodies, in dangerous amounts, one, if not both, of the above evils. One thought should he- stressed at this point. God never asks his children to do any- thing that is contrary to the laws that govern their own develop- ment and eternal progress. Neither dors God ever ask any man to refrain from doing anything that would secure for him the above- mentioned blessings. The Gospel is not a joy-crushing philosophy of life, hut a joy-producing plan of salvation. "Men are that they might have joy." If then, in this life only we are concerned about joy and happiness, then living the Word of Wisdom is the secret by which this might be attained.
The empire to-day needs men and women who are physically and menially alive. We, the Latter-day Saints people, should be outstanding above all other people. But are we? Every boy who is a member of the Church should pass the high standard of medical fitness required by the Air Force. And we can be. if we but live the simple law which our kind and gracious Heavenly Father has given Mis people whereby they might be a delightsome people.
In bidding you farewell and an revoir, I would like to say — lie prayerful, for many wonders are wrought by prayer; be merci- ful, for they that are merciful shall obtain mercy; let all thy deal- ings with thy fellow-men be tempered with mercy and charity and your cup of joy will overflow.
Assist Te Karere', assist your district officers; assist your mis- sion president and you will be happy.
God bless you all. May He hasten the day when Peace shall envelop die earth as the waters cover the deep. I want to thank you all for your help during my term as Editor of Te Karere and Superintendent of Sunday Schools. I appreciate your kindnesses to me and mine.
Kia ora ra koutou katoa. God bless and help you all. members and non-members alike, is the wish of your brother and servant.
— H.M.M.
Hune, 1941
TE KARERE
693
Wipere Amaru
Church Welfare Programme
By Wi Pere Amaru A.B., MA. (Mission Welfare Supervisor)
Although welfare work among the Saints is the expression of a philosophy as old as the Church itself, it was not until April, 1936, that the Church Welfare Programme was introduced by the First Presidency.
The main objective of the Welfare Pro- gramme, after meeting the emergency relief needs of orphans, widows, worthy poor and dis- lodged workers within the Church, is raising" the level of economic and social welfare of the Saints.
If the Church Welfare Programme is to succeed in the Mission, it is because it suc- ceeds in every Branch. In order that this may be, immediate organization within the districts and branches is vitally necessary. The District Presidency, District Relief Society President and a Welfare Work Director (to be chosen by the District Presidency) shall constitute the District Welfare Council. The District President (or any other nominated by him) shall act as chairman with full responsibility for the success of the Welfare Programme in the district.
The Branch Presidency, Branch Relief Society President and the Branch Work Director (to be appointed by the Branch Presi- decny) shall automatically become the Branch Welfare Committee. The Branch President (or any other appointed by him) shall assume chairmanship with full responsibilty to the District Welfare Council for the success of the Welfare Programme in the branch.
Where two or three branches may find it more to their advan- tage to work together may do so as a Regional Unit, each branch being represented on the Regional Unit by the Branch Welfare Committee.
The question of storehouses shall be left to the District Welfare Councils who may institute District, Regional or Branch storehouses to suit the conditions that exist.
Each district and each branch may promote projects for the rais- ing of the living standards of the Saints, but the first project for the Mission is —
"The Six-months' Plan for the Beautification of all Latter- day Saint I Ionics and Chapels (places of worship).
Concurrenl with this programme for the beautification is another project which has been preached to the people incessantly. This second project for the Mission is —
""4 TE KARERE Hune, l'Ml
". / Six-months' Plan to have Ei>ery Enrolled Branch Member Pay Tithing and Fast-offering"
Tithing money is used for the building and maintenance of temples, meeting-houses and other Church edifices; for the support of the educational and missionary systems; for the care of the sick and indigent, and for any and every Church activity — in short, the tithing is used for the welfare of the Church and its peoples. With- out that spirit by which the Saints pay their tithes and fast offerings we cannot uphold the Church Welfare Programme, hecau.se its very success depends upon the spirit of sacrifice and giving and of co- operative effort.
May the Lord bless the Priesthood that it may direct the adminis- tration of the Church Welfare Programme in our midst.
(A detailed plan for the Church Welfare Programme will be forwarded to each District, but start your operations using the information in the above.)
To The Sunday Schools
You are here reminded to forward your Quarterly Reports Eor the- periods ending February and May. Reports are to be done in triplicate, that is. three copies — one Eor Branch use. one to the Dis- trict and the other to the Mission Secretary of the Sunday Schools, Box 72, Auckland.
Sixpenny Funds within the I .ranch Sunday Schools are due half-yearly — with the Second Quarterly Report and with the Final Quarterly Report. Your Sixpenny Fund is to be sent to the Dis- trict and at the same time attach to your Quarterly Report forwarded to the Mission Secretary the amount sent to the District.
This issue of Te Karere will bring to you the Suggested Les- son ( Outlines to be followed in your classes. We realize thai what you may already be studying and teaching in your Schools are more interesting and that you are well on the way to completing your courses; however, we would appreciate your acceptance of the out- lines as soon as is practicable without disrupting your work.
KINDERGARTEN. (For children 4 and 5 years of age.)
Bible Stories
June 8, 1941.
"Abraham An Unselfish Leader''
Genesis 12: 1-8 and 13. "Objective" — God rejoices in our unselfish- ness towards others.
June 15, 1941.
"A Promise Fulfilled"
Genesis 14, 15, 17: 19-22 and 21: 1-3. ''Objective" — Willing obedience to God's commands brings great blessings.
June 22, 1941.
"Jacob, Beloved of God"
Genesis 28 and 33. "Objective" — Sincerity and purity of life are steps leading to God.
Hune, 1941 TE KARERE 695
June 29, 1941.
"Thy Faith Hath Made Thee Whole
Mark 5:25-34; Matt. 9:20-22 and Luke 8:43-49. "Objective" — Im- plicit faith together with earnest work bring the blessings of heaven.
PRIMARY. (For children 6, 7, 8 and 9 years of age.) Bible Stories
June 8, 1941 — "Daniel's Three Friends in a Furnace" (Dan. 3). Objec- tive : Courage to do right wins the favour of God and man.
June 15, 1941 — "Daniel in the Lion's Den" (Dan. 6). Objective: Courage to do right wins the favour of God and man.
June 22, 1941 — "Brave Queen Esther" (Book of Esther). Objective: Great blessings come through fasting and prayer.
June 22, 1941 — "God Sends Food and Drink to Israel" (Exodus 15: 23-27 and 16). Objective: The Lord blesses those who keep His commandments.
CHURCH HISTORY. (For children 10 and 11 years of age.) Study the Book of Mormon.
INTERMEDIATE. (For pupils 12, 13, 14 and 15 years of age.)
June 8, 1941— "The Birth of Jesus" (Matt. 1:18-25); Luke 2:1-20. Objective: To emphasize the fact that Jesus, the Redeemer of Mankind, the Lord of this earth, was born under conditions of poverty and humility.
June 15, 1941 — "The Escape from Herod" (Matt. 2:19-23). Objec- tive: To show that when a person has been given an especially important mission to perform, the Lord will help him to accom- plish it.
June 22, 1941 — Jesus In The Temple" (Luke 2: 41-52). Objective: To impress upon pupils the fact that the age of twelve years was — and still is — a turning point of very great importance.
June 29, 1941 — "Jesus Shows His Love for Little Children and Blesses Them" (Mark 10:13-16; Matt. 19:13-15; Luke 18:15-17). Objective: To teach that mothers and children are loved of God, and that the faith of a child is necessary for those who would enter the Kingdom of God.
A & B DEPARTMENTS. (For pupils 16, 17, 18 and 19 years of age.)
June 8, 1941 — "The Story of the Creation" (Gen. 1 and 2). Problems: Discuss scientific and religious views of the creation. Who created the earth? What do we learn concerning the likeness of God and man from the story of the creation? What do you understand by the word creation?
June 15, 1941 — Continue with previous lesson.
June 22, 1941 — "The Story of the Garden of Eden" (Gen. 2: 8-25 and 3). Problems: Theories of the location of Eden. State Adam's place in the new home. Could the purposes of the Lord have been accomplished in any other way than the way they were? What is our debt to Adam and Eve?
June 29, 1941 — Continue with previous lesson.
C. & D. DEPARTMENTS. (For pupils 20 to 25 years of age.)
June 8, 1941 — "The Greatness of Thy Boy of Nazareth" (Mall. 1:
1-17; 3:17; Mark 1:11; Luke 1. 2:41-52, 3:28-88, 4:16).
Problems: What is a birthright? What arc the advantages el'
n KARERE Hone, 1941
being well horn? Why is Jesus often called the Son of David? Do you Bee any relationship between a person's birthright, his
use of opportunities and his sun. June 15, L941 — Continue with previous Lesson.
June 22, 1941 — "Missionary Work of John the Baptist in the Wilder- ness of Judea" (Matt. 3:1-12; Mark 1:1-8; Luke 3:1-18). Problems: Make a list of the gospel principles John taught. H"w do they compare with the first principles of the (iospel? Why should John receive his authority from special messengers; What special preparation or fitness did John's parent- | that made them worthy to rear such a great character? Wherein did John reject the opportunity for popularity among Jewish leaders?
June 29, 1941 — Continue with previous lesson.
ADULT GOSPEL DOCTRINE. (For all others not assigned.)
Continue with present studies until a more complete report is received of what is being used throughout the Mission.
MAORI CLASS— As printed.
SUNDAY SCHOOL
Theme— j
"OUR HOMES AND CHAPELS SHALL BE BEAUTIFUL"
"For Zion must increase in beauty and in Holiness; her borders I must be enlarged; her stakes must be strengthened; yea verily I say unto you. Zion must arise and put on her beautiful garments."
< Doctrine & Covenants *2: 14. |
SACRAMENT GEM
lie lives, all glory to His name.
He lives, my Jesus, still the same; () sweet the joy this sentence £ives,
1 know that my Redeemer lives.
CONCERT RECITATION / Peter 3: 10.
"For he that will love life, and see good days, let him refrain his tongue from evil, and his lips diat they speak no guile."
KORERO A NGAKAU
1 Pita 3: 10.
'*Ki te mea hoki tetahi kia aroha ki te ora, kia kite i nga ra pai, me pehi e ia tona arero kei kino, ona ngutu hoki kei korero tinihanga."
HYMNS
"Choose the Right" Page 86
"To Tatou Kainga" Wharangi 71
Hune, 1941 TE KARERE 697
PRIMARY
MEMORY GEM
"Politeness is to do and say The kindest thing, in the kindest way." This is the regular memory gem, but if another appears at the end of a lesson, it is for that lesson only.
LESSONS:
FIRST WEEK
WATCH US GROW Objective:
To create interest in health activities and establish the daily prac- tice of right health habits.
Suggestions for Teaching:
The health lessons that will be developed during the remainder of this quarter will be based on the subject, "Watch Us Grow." Pictures and charts will be useful in giving this lesson.
Song:
"We Pray" No. 13, Primary Songs for the Missions.
Prayer:
Led by the teacher. Lesson Approach:
Each teacher may develop her own approach to this lesson. The following are suggestive:
1. Show a picture of two children measuring to see who is the taller. Discuss.
2. Measure each child, if the group is small, and keep the record for future use.
3. Review last week's lesson with the health objective in mind. When the children are interested in the idea, tell the following
story : —
Lesson Story:
JANE LEARNS THE VALUE OF FOOD
Have you ever felt tired just before dinner? Did you feel more rested after you ate? Do you know why?
Have you ever seen a little girl or boy very thin and white? I knew a litttle girl who was very pale and I also knew that this same little girl would not eat the lovely food her mother prepares in their nice clean kitchen.
Jane was this little girl's name and she was just six years old. How many of you are six? Often Jane was not hungry. She didn't like to drink her milk. She wouldn't eat many vegetables and she never wanted her oatmeal or cream of wheat.
One day Jane was too tired to play. She came into the house and lay down. Her Aunt Mary, who was visiting her mother, explained why she was so tired.
"Have you ever watched a locomotive pull a long train el" cars?" asked Aunt Mary. (Show a picture of a locomotive and let the chil- dren talk about it.) What do you think Jane answered her Aunt'.' "Oh, yes!" said Jane. "I love to watch a train."
TE KARERE Hunc,l941
"Do you know why the engine can pull the load so easily?" asked Aunt Mary.
"No, I never thought about that," said Jane.
"Well," explained Aunt Mary, "it's because it burns fuel. The fireman puts coal in the fire-box of the engine. When the coal burns, it heats the water in the boiler. This then turns water into steam. The steam makes the engine go.
"If the engine does not get enough fuel, it will not have power to run. If the body does not get enough food, it will not have strength.
"If the engine gets too much fuel, the fire will be smothered and will not burn. If you eat too much, your body will be clogged and you will have no energy."
"Do you have to know what to eat as well as how much?" asked Jane.
"Yes, Jane," answered Aunt Mary- "Our Heavenly Father has told us what foods to eat. He has promised us many blessings if we eat the right foods. Men have studied all about it, too. If you will follow their advice, you will be more likely to keep well and grow strong."
"Tell me what Heavenly Father says about right foods, Aunt Mary."
"I'll tell you a few things if you wish," replied Aunt Mary. And here is a thing to remember, Jane : doctors and men who have studied about foods agree with what Heavenly Father says. "You must eat sugar, bread and cereals to give you energy. Fish, milk, eggs, cheese, and Father in Heaven says not very much meat will help make you grow. Fresh vegetables and fruits are necessary to help take care of the wastes. Then certain foods, such as oranges and milk give us vitamins."
"Why, those are the foods mother is always wanting me to eat!" exclaimed Jane. "She says I need them."
"Yes, and if you eat them, you will be a healthier little girl. Then you can play harder and enjoy the games more.
SECOND WEEK
FOUR PRINCES IN THE KINGS PALACE Objective:
By keeping the laws of health we gain in physical and spiritual
strength.
Lesson Approach:
Show some pictures of foods that are good for people, or, have a bag of fruits and vegetables with you. Call a child to stand in front of you with back turned and hands behind him. Place one of the objects in his hands and let the child try to name the object.
After several children have had a turn, continue the discussion. Why has Heavenly Father caused all the good fruit and vegetables to grow? Every one of yc^u wants to grow big and strong, don't you? Here are some pictures of boys and girls who eat foods that make them grow strong. (Show pictures.) Tell me how they look. What do their happy smiles tell?
This is a story about four boys who lived in a king's palace.
Lesson Story:
DANIEL AND HIS COMPANIONS
Ever and ever so long ago there lived a great and powerful king named Nebuchadnezzer. He had a mighty army and fought many battles. This king did not know about our Heavenly Father. He prayed to idols made of stone or wood. (Show picture of an idol and explain briefly.)
Hune, 1941 TE KARERE 699
Once Nebuchadnezzer sent his great army to fight against a people who believed in God. The king's army won the victory because the people had not been doing the things their Heavenly Father wanted them to do.
After the battle the king sent one of his servants to bring to him four boys from among the people he had conquered. "They must be sons of princes," said the king. "Children who are strong and fine looking and clever in their studies."
The king wanted the very finest boys that could be found because he was going to take them back to his own country. He wanted them to be fine looking because they were going to live in the king's beautiful palace with him. He wanted them clever, because they would have to learn a new language which was very hard to learn. He wanted them strong and brave, so that they would not get homesick and want to go back to their own homes.
The servant went about among the people, and finally found four very brave young princes. They were taken miles and miles away to the country of the king. You will want to know their names because we are going to have such fine stories about them. Their names were Daniel, Shadrach, Mishach, and Abednego. Shall we all say their names together?
This story is about the boys while they lived in the king's palace.
The City of Babylon, where the king lived, was a very beautiful city. And the palace which was his home was very beautiful too. He rode in chariots drawn by fine white horses. He wore fine clothes, and when he sat down to eat, the table was spread with food that was rich and sweet. And there were many kinds of wine for him to drink. The dishes were gold and silver and the cups were set with jewels.
The king wanted the four boys to keep strong and well, so he sent them the same kind of rich food and wines that he ate and drank. Is that the kind of food which makes boys and girls well and strong? What foods are the best to help children to grow strong and big? And what is the very best things to drink?
Daniel knew this, and so did the other three boys. Perhaps their own mothers gave them good, simple food, and that was the reason they were well.
The king's servant, whose name was Melzar, brought rich food in gold and silver dishes and wine in jewelled cups. Daniel spoke up bravely to the servant and said, "Please, sir, we would rather not eat that kind of food. We are not used to it and it is not good for us."
The servant Melzar loved Daniel very dearly and would gladly have brought other food, but he was afraid the king would be angry with him. He said, "It is the best food in the land. The king wants you to eat so that you can grow strong and wise. I fear my lord the king. If he sees your faces growing thin, he may punish me by cutting off my head." Daniel knew they wouldn't grow thin so he said, "Only try us for ten days, I pray thee. Give us pulse to eat, and water to drink." (Pulse is food like our peas and beans.)
Because Melzar loved the boys, he did as Daniel asked. At the end of the ten days when the king's servant looked at the four boys, and then at the other children who had eaten the king's rich food; what do you think he found? Yes. You are right, the Tour primes were fairer and stronger than the other princes who had been eating the rich food and drinking wine
They did something else that helped them to keep strong and beautiful. They used to open the windows of their rooms, and. Facing
toward their old home, they prayed to Heavenly Father to help then to do always what would please Him.
'I I. ECARERE Hune, L941
At the end of three yean the king had all the boys brought be- fore him, and among them were Daniel. Shadach, Mishach, and Abed- nego. To the king's Burprise be Pound that Daniel. Shadrach, Meshach, and Abednego were taller and stronger than all the other boys. He found, too, that they not only answered the questions far better, but that they knew ten times as much as the wisest men in the kingdom.
THIRD WEEK
"THOU SHALT LOVE THY NEIGHBOURS" Objective:
In order to be truly happy we must love and help our friends and neighbours.
Suggestions for Teaching:
Call to the children's remembrance the fact that Jesus is our Guide. That He came to the earth to teach the people how to do right. Impress again the thought that our Heavenly Father loves all His chil- dren on the earth. Because He loves us we should love Him and serve Him. He has asked us, too, to love one another.
In telling the lesson story enlarge upon the text, and make each incident stand out. The following may help:
"Jericho is about fifteen miles north-east to Jerusalem. The road is a very dangerous region for the traveller, as robber bands are con- stantly on the watch."
Lesson Approach:
To introduce your lesson tell the following beautiful legend :
Once upon a time, so runs the legend, there lived, in the far Judean Hills, two affectionate brothers, tilling a farm together. One had a wife and a houseful of children; the other was a lonely man.
One night in the harvest time, the older brother said to his wife: ''My brother is a lonely man. I will go out and move some of the sheaves from my side of the field over to his, so that when he sees them in the morning, his heart will be cheered by the abundance." And he did.
That night the other brother said to his workman: "My brother has a houseful of children and many mouths to fill. I am alone and do not need all this wealth. I will go and move some of the sheaves over in his field, so that he shall rejoice in the morning when he sees how great is his store." And he did.
And they did this that night and the next, in the sheltering dark. But on the third night the moon came out, and they met face to face, each with his arms filled with sheaves.
On that spot, says the legend, was built the temple of Jerusalem, for it was esteemed that there earth came nearest to heaven.
Conversation:
Why did each brother try to help the other? Why did each try not to let the other know that he was trying to help? etc.
One of the important lessons that Jesus taught was that we should love one another. He said: "Thou shalt love the Lord thy God with all thy soul, and with all thy strength, and with all thy mind; and thy neighbour as thyself.
I'm going to tell you a beautiful story about neighbours which Jesus told. This is the way the story is told in the New Testament, Luke 10: 30-37.
Hune, 1941 TE KARERE 701
Lesson Story:
THE GOOD NEIGHBOUR
A certain man went down from Jerusalem to Jericho, and fell among thieves, which stripped him of his raiment, and wounded him, and departed, leaving him half dead.
"And by chance there came down a certain priest that way; and when he saw him, he passed by on the other side.
"And likewise a Levite, when he was at the place, came and looked on him, and passed by on the other side.
But a certain Samaritan, as he journeyed, came where he was; and when he saw him, he had compassion on him.
"And went to him, and bound up his wounds, pouring in oil and wine, and set him on his beast, and brought him to an inn, and took care of him.
"And on the morrow when he departed, he took out two pence, and gave them to the host, and said unto him, 'Take care of him: and whatsoever thou spendest more, when I come again, I will repay thee.'
"Which now of these three, thinkest thou, was neighbour unto him that fell among the thieves?"
Conversation After the Story:
Who is your neighbour? Does it mean necessarily, the one who lives next door? How should we treat our neighbours? The Samaritan treated the wounded man as he would like to be treated. He was kind to him, even though a stranger. He remembered the command: "Thou shalt love thy neighbours as thyself." Who was it who told us to do this?
Have the children repeat it.
What would happen if we all loved our neighbours as ourselves? Would anyone steal? Why not? Would anyone be unkind to another? Why not?
Read or recite to the class the following verses: Who is thy neighbour? He whom thou
Hast power to aid or bless, Whose aching heart or burning brow
Thy soothing hand may press. Thy neighbour? 'Tis the fainting poor,
Whose eye with want is dim;
0, enter thou his humble door,
With aid and peace for him!
— William B. 0. Peabody.
FOURTH WEEK
THE BEAUTIFUL FLOWERS Objective:
Flowers are Heavenly Father's gifts to beautify the world. Let us give thanks for them.
Suggestions for Teaching:
"The child who has been trained that the constant presence oi' God is a sure conviction can be trusted anywhere.
"He has a talisman of protection and strength which no amount of moral teaching can give him. He has been given a spiritual endow- ment which will make him rich as long as he lives."
Ask the children to tell sonic of the thing8 for which they are thankful and then let one oi the other children say the prayer,
HE TE KARERE rlune,l941
Lesson Approach:
Show pictures of children working in gardens, or use cut-out pic- tures oi gardens set up in your Lapboard.
Talk about the flowers that our kind Heavenly Father has given us. Call attention to the many kinds of flowers, their colour, per- fume, etc. (Show pictures and as you do so say a few lines of poetry about each.)
"The red rose says: 'Be sweet/ The lily bids: 'Be pure.' " "Dear little violet. Don't be afraid; Lift your blue eyes
From the rock's mossy slade ; All the birds call for you
Out of the sky; 'May is here waiting And here too am I,' "
Lesson Story:
A LITTLE BOY AND HIS GARDEN
One afternoon in the spring, father came home from the office early to make a garden. Danny followed him out in the yard and watched him spade up the ground and rake it until it was as smooth as the floor. Then he planted the seeds.
After dinner that night, Danny climbed upon father's knee and whispered in his ear so that no one could hear, "Daddy, could I please have a garden?"
"Well," said father, "we'll see about it."
The next afternoon when father came home, he called Danny. He had a long package. "Danny," said he, "I believe that you might like to see what we have here."
Then father cut the string with his pocket-knife, and inside the package Danny found a little spade and rake and hoe.
"0, Daddy!" cried Danny, "I'm going to make a garden."
Father gave Danny a little piece of ground beside his big piece, and Danny spaded and raked his ground until it was as smooth as the floor. Then father took him down to the seed store and let him buy some of the packages with bright coloured pictures. He bought his favourite flowers. He wanted them for mother. When Danny had planted his seeds, father got the hose and watered his garden, and Danny took the hose and watered his garden.
Every evening, unless it rained, father and Danny worked in their gardens. When the bowers began to grow, Danny was so happy that he danced an Irish jig — at least that's what father called it. Then by and by there came the day when the first bud opened on one of the plants. It was a lovely red flower. Danny could wait no longer; he picked the flower and gave it to — whom do you think? And mother said it was the prettiest flower anybody had ever given her. — Adapted.
Conversation After the Story:
Mrs. Dee has a beautiful rose garden. The roses are so big and so fragrant! She says they grow big because she loves them and cares for them. Some people think it's because she shares them with her friends. What do you think?
One day at Primary the teacher asked the boys and girls if they could help Heavenly Father to care for the sick, and that was enough to make them all think of Jack. Jack was a little crippled boy who had
Hune, 1941 TE KARERE 703
to stay in bed all the time. He was a bright, happy fellow and all the children loved him. They thought of many kind things they might do for Jack, but Bob's plan was the best. Bob said, "It's Jack's birth- day soon. Let's make him a present that will last a long time and make him happy every day. Let's make a big box to fit right in Jack's window, and keep flowers planted in it all the year round."
So the boys got their fathers to help make the box, and they took it to Jack's room, put it in the window, and filled it with rich, soft earth. They got some daffodil bulbs and planted them about an inch apart. Every day Jack watched for the green shoots to come up above the earth. By and by they came up and soon began to bloom. The box was a glory of yellow flowers, and Jack was a very happy boy.
His friends came every day to see them and to talk to Jack.
"I have a beautiful garden," said Jack, "all filled with golden suns that shine on me every day. I don't see why you fellows are so good to me."
Bob said, "Well, Jack, you make us happy, too, and besides, we like being Heavenly Father's helpers."
Memory Gem:
For flowers that bloom about our feet ; For tender grass, so fresh and sweet; Father in Heaven, we thank Thee!
— Emerson. For the Children:
Fold a piece of paper book fashion, any convenient size will do. Write the memory gem on the inside and let the children draw a flower or flowers with wax crayons on the outside. This may be taken home to mother.
r
GENEALOGY
By Teao Wirihcma
Cottage Meetings for the Month of June
June 8 — Lesson 31, "The New Race of Israel."
12 — Lesson 32, "Be True to Your Birthright."
19 — Lesson 33, "The Spirit of Temple Building."
26 — Lesson 34, "A Night of Temple Pictures."
Home Teaching
Nga komiti whakapapa o ia Peka o ia Peka me hui i nga Ratapu katoa — nga apiha me nga kai-whakaako, ki te ui ui mehemea kei te mahi nga Hunga Tapu i o ratou whakapapa.
Whakatauki \
"He rangai maomao i huri ki tua o Nukutaurua kaore he hokinga." 1
SPECIAL NOTICE FOR PIONEER DAY
President Cowley has intimated his wish 1 hat a suitable competi- tion be had to climax at the Pioneer Celebrations held at Hawke's Bay. The competition to take the form of a "Beard Raising" contest, start now. Rupert Willongi says he'll be there and is going to commence aa
soon as his wife will let him. Watch the next issue of "Te Karei
the minor details that concern the contest, hut start your beards new'
7W TE KARERE Hune, 1941
NEWS FROM THE FIELD
HERE AND THERE, by "Now and Again."
The MANAWATU-WAIRARAPA District Presidency in i general travel
and overhaul tour has imparted new energy to the many activities and people of the circuit. Of particular interest was the re-organization of the Rangiotu Branch with Ngawhiro Fitzgerald, Rangi Paki and Tom Paki as President and ( oun- sellors and Sister Rangi Paki Secretary. At Porirua new officers were installed
to assist in the work there, Polly Wincera being sustained as Assistant District Relief Society Secretary. Visitors to the capital included people from as far north as Xuhaka. It seems that the storm which was experienced at Hui Tau washed a few of their people down that way, among whom we are pleased to mention were W'heti, Boy Mataira, Joe Smith and quite a few others. Have a good time. The war has hrought to light many little-known and interesting things that are happening to our people, among which we are proud to inform thai Xgahuka Love of Otaki has five sons serving in His Majesty's Forces. We salute this family with prayers of honourable service, asking God to keep them safe. "Killed in Action" was the tenor of .-, cablegram received 1>> Charlotte Parata as regards her hrother Peehi Parata of Waikanac.
In the MAI II A District prior to the Hui Tan much work was done t<, pre- pare for the great occasion; now that that is over the normal activit) is still keeping the people very busy in the various Branches. Honourable releases were given Ella llawea from the District Primary Board, Eru and Jane Tengaio from the Xuhaka Y.M. and Y.W.M.I.A.s respectively. Perea Smith. Taka Toroaiwhiti, William Winiana and Angus Christy to the Y.M. M.I. A. Presidency with Heni Christy chorister, Louisa M;itaira organist, and Ata Pedersen as President of the Young Women's M.I. A. All other workers in the are here urged to keep the good work going. During the special campaign d by Te Karere for the One Thousand Subscriptions the Mania District sent in over one hundred subscriptions, which is definitely a credit which we are pleased to acknowledge and he grateful to Elsie Loader. The other one hun- dred, subs, are spread out among all the other district- of the \!
WELLINGTON reports tin- loss of Pearl Scott, who sailed in company with Marjorie Jackman and Jeanne Porteous aboard one i f the Matson liners about a week before Hui Tau. Pearl is now Mrs. Bodell, and we wish them the happiness that is rightfully theirs.
AUCKLAND happenings since the departure of the College Kids, Jeanne and Jackie, has kept things moving. First we had the Blessed Event, when Mrs. Kelly Harris and her baby daughter were both reported as doing fine at 8.45 p.m. Monday, April 7th. Is Kelly proud of his daughter? Ask him. The first Sunday of the month she was blessed and given the- name of Kellani Ramarihi Harris by President Cowley. Joyce Billman had scleral p her honour when her engagement and forthcoming marriage was announced. The ceremony of binding the happ jether in the holy bonds of matri-
money was performed in the I..D.S. Chapel by Elder William R. Pel ning of Saturday, 17th May. 1941. To Mr. and Mrs. Napier W< Oh. oh! Another member to enter the waters . Mr. I). Fraser, who has been a regular attendant at all Church functions and
- for more than the past year. We welcome Doug., and i we appreciative of his contacts with the Billman famliy.
The many friends and acquaintances of Hohepa Mel al the
Lewis Eady Hall in Queen Street on Tuesda:
irior to his embarkation for service overseas. The hall was the home of gathering under the leadership Rupert' WiHongi. President Cowley at
the party, were heartily endorsed in their action by the Branch, the Auxiliaries, the District and firm of Lewis Eady Ltd. Every* ne enj< yed thei included. We p^v trikre here to l-:s dear w'fe, Mabel, in her courageous atti- tude, and pray G'cd's blessing on all whom she loves.
HOHEPA METE MEHA — Continued from Inside Front Cover.
will always be endeared to the hearts of his numerous friends and relatives, here and abroad.
With his honourable release from the Editor's chair of Te Karere in 1935, Hepa spent his time in Auckland with the firm of Lewis R. Eady Ltd., when on the last day of August, 1940, marriage with Mabel Ngawaka added yet another rung reached in the ladder of life. This wedded bliss was all too short for the happy couple. A call to fill the Editor's chair of Te Karere when the Elders evacuated New Zealand was gladly ac- cepted, only to be terminated three months later by his acceptance of the call to serve his country, when he en- tered training camp for overseas ser- vice with R.N.Z.A.F.
In leaving these shores Elder Meha will be terribly missed by his dear wife Mabel, who will soon mother their child. As much as we honour and pray for you, Hepa, we do as much if not more for your wife, Mabel Meha. Because of you we shall cherish her and try to lighten the sadness that weighs at your leaving — for her- self and your unborn child we hope to do more, so please remember us for these thoughts and hopes.
Our hearts are heavy in the grief that comes from a parting prompted by war. Our only armour is that of righteousness in this struggle when death claims us. The Gospel will be your shield as it will be ours only if we remember the God above, the God Whose Cause you have so long and faithfully adhered to, the Father to Whom you believe, and I believe we have every right to cling to. to speak with and to. His teaching to obey.
We bid you farewell and pray God's protecting hand to be with you. Te Karere and Kelly will always remem
ber you both. ( rod bless VOVL,
— Kelly Harris
^^S^^^^S^^H^^9S^^^ s
BRANCH TEACHERS'
SUGGESTIONS FOR BRANCH TEACHERS
Teachers should be actively interested in their people. They should visit them in times of illness and death. They should be aware of the spiritual, physical, and temporal status of their people to such an extent that distress and want may be reported at once, and appropriate assistance to the worthy be provided without delay.
In keeping with the duties assigned to teachers by revelation, it is highly appropriate, where making a formal visit, to ask each member of the family questions containing the following import :
1. Are you in harmony —
(a) With your neighbours and associates?
(b) With branch, stake, and General Authorities of the Church ?
2. Are you attending to your Church duties —
(a) As a member
Attending meeting, fasting once each month and paying Fast Offering, paying tithing, and participating in branch social functions ?
(b) As an officer
Setting proper example, attending council meetings etc. ?
3. Are you attending to secret and family prayers ?
RESPECT FOR THE PRIESTHOOD
Those who respect and honour the Priesthood and who qualify as worthy members of the Church will have an influence constantly operating in their lives that will bring happiness, satisfaction, and promised blessings.
They will yearn for righteousness and follow such a well- ordered course of life that all who are eligible may receive the Priesthood with all its power, authority, and blessings.
They will exercise the power of God which comes to them through receiving the Priesthood by performing faithfully and well all they are appointed to do in the Church.
They will be kind, generous, and forgiving to all, and exercise authority under appointment in the true spirit of love.
They will govern and direct in their homes in keeping with the order of the Church and the will of God, and yield willing, intelli- gent obedience to those who are called to God to direct in spiritual affairs.
Women and children who are entitled to the blessings and benefits of the Priesthood through their husbands and fathers will receive those blessings and benefits through honouring, respecting, and obeying the Priesthood.
No greater blessing ever has been, or could be, given to any people than has been given to the Latter-day Saints in the Priest- hood. It is such a precious and valuable gift that every member of the Church, young and old, male and female, should honour, respect, and obey the Priesthood, its leaders, and its authority in every possible way.
A suitable resolution for any Latter-day Saint is this :/ will show that I honour and respect the Priesthood by that which I do in the daily contacts of life.
|
i i |
|
|
n § |
|
|
ril |
Ml |
€ KAR€R€
Wahanga 35 Hurae, 1941 Nama 7
RULON S. WELLS PASSES (See Page 717)
fsammm^.
mm^&Z£&.
LOYALTY
One of the most desirable and ennobling traits of char- acter is loyalty. The person in whose life loyalty has been made a cherished virtue is fortunate indeed.
Loyalty, too frequently, has been associated only with respect to the nation or the country in which a person lives. Considered as a broad general principle it includes far more than that.
Loyalty to our Father in Heaven should be the begin- ning point. Surely every Latter-day Saint understands that our first obligation is to our Creator and that loyalty to Him is expected of us all.
Loyalty to the Church and its teachings should be, and logically is, closely associated with loyalty to the Lord. One follows the other in natural sequence.
Loyalty to those whom the Lord has appointed to pre- side over us in the Church, in the district and in the branch, is essential to our own progress and the progress of the Church.
Loyalty to our own ideals and standards will, of course, include loyalty to all to whom loyalty is due, and should form the basis of all expressions of this soul-developing characteristic.
Loyalty to our friends and associates, to our families, to employers, and to others whose relationships with us en- title them to our allegiance will be a matter of course if we have thoroughly established in our lives the priceless prac- tice of loyalty to our own ideals and standards.
Loyalty to country, the most frequently associated with considerations and discussions of this indication of faithful devotion, will follow only if and when we have established loyalty to our own ideals and standards as a definite guide in our lives.
People depart from the paths of virtue and right living, only when they disregard their own standards. People be- come untrue to Church, country, employers, and friends only when they lay aside their own convictions of right and wrong.
As long as any Latter-day Saint remembers his own ideals and standards and follows them religiously the ques- tion of loyalty to all to whom loyalty is due, including our Father in Heaven, to whom our first devotion should be given, will never arise.
Loyalty is a glorious virtue. In all that it implies, it should be a guiding principle in the life of every Latter-day Saint.
Te Karere
Established in 1907 &.
Wahanga 35 Hurae, 1941 Nama 7 ^
Matthew Cowley Kelly Harris Eru T. Kupa Waimate Anaru
Tumuaki Mihana Etita
Kaiwhakamaori Kaiwhakamaori
"Ko tenet Pepa i whakatapua hex hapai ake i te iwi Maori ki roto i nga zvhakaaro-nui/
"Te Karere" is published monthly by the New Zealand Mission of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, and is printed by TE KARERE PRESS, No. 2 Scotia Place, Upper Queen Street, Auckland, C.l, N.Z. Subscription Rates: 3/- per six months; 5/- per year; £1 for five years; £2/10/- for life. (United States Cur- rency: $1.00 per year; $4.00 for five years; $10.00 for life.)
Address Correspondence, Box 72, Auckland, C.l, New Zealand.
CONTENTS
Editorial — Page
Dominion Reconstruction Conference 710
Special Features —
He Takahanga o o Tatou Hoia, na William Mannering 712
Nga Rongo Korero Mo Te Whawhai, na Paepae Witehira ...
Kai Kauwhau Mo Waikato
The Passing of president Rulon S. Wells
America, by J. Reuben (lark. Jr
A I )ay "i Warning
To-day's Heritage, by William l\. Burge
713
714 717 71S
Church Features —
Mahi K ura I [apati 715
Reports and Six-penny Funds 726
Sunday School
Primary
Mutual [mprovemenl Association
Mews from the Field
TE KARERE Hurae, 1941
Editorial . . .
DOMINION RECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
"In company with similar activities in other parts of the world, especially in Britain, a conference of leaders, officers and members of the moral and spiritual movements in New Zealand is being convened to find now the foundations on which the Christian reconstruction of the Dominion should be based.
"The Conference has the patronage and active support of many of our Church leaders. They have signed the con- vening order and circular-letter to all who are thought able and willing to contribute to its deliberations. The date and place of the Conference have yet to be arranged.
"Like the Malvern Conference recently held in England under the presidency of the Archibishop of York, the assembly will discuss freely and frankly all moral, social and economic problems, the discussions being led by men and women who have made a study of their respective subjects.
"The Dominion Conference, however, will be wider in its scope than the Malvern discussions, for those taking part will include representatives of all churches and schools of thought.
"It is expected there will be frank discussions of the present social and economic order, but, unlike many similar discussions, it will be directed to a frank examination of faults with the desire to find out and put into efTect the necessary remedies.
"This Dominion Reconstruction Conference is designed to show the great degree of unity and common purpose existing in the minds of moral and spiritual leaders and in the hearts of our people.
"It will therefore refrain from discussions on party politics and detailed technical methods but will positively and constructively outline the fundamental Christian Principles which alone can provide a true basis for the people's welfare and a better order.
"As guiding principles for the Conference, the signa- tories of the convening order believe that the wars and social
Hurae, 1941
TE KARERE
and economic ills which afflict the nations are due in the first instance to passive, and in some cases active, resist- ance to God's plan for the development of the world and that this plan is available to those who seek it. They believe, also, that the prayers for the safety and well-being of our nation must be regarded as hyprocrisy unless they are accompanied by a sincere intention to find God's will for the individual and nation as a whole and to give effect to that will whatever may be the apparent costs.
"In calling the Conference at a time when the Empire is engaged in a struggle for its very existence, the conveners take the view that to defer deliberation on a plan for recon- struction until peace comes would be disastrous. They point out there are many visible signs of militant atheism which has plans for the post-war period and that if these are the only ones available to a war-weary world they will find a fair chance of being accepted. The Christian body must therefore get ready now. Christianity, being what it is, inevitably must be accepted. What can and will happen unless advantage is taken of the present opportunity, is that the extension of God's Kingdom on earth may be re- tarded, thus creating more wars and social and economic evils."
The foregoing announcement has been received from the Acting Director of the Dominion Reconstruction Con- ference and is published herein as an Editorial because of the necessity, in these days of anxiety, For all Christians and Church leaders everywhere to square themselves and their creeds to the Gospel which Christ taught and obeyed — the Gospel of "One Lord, one Faith, one Baptism"; the Gospel which bestows the Comforter to lead men by prin- ciples of truth; the Gospel which would bring all to a "Unity of Faith"; the Gospel which would make of all nations one people under ( rod.
If the proposed convention will be conducted along the lines suggested in the announcement "positively and constructively outline the fundamental Christian Principles which alone can provide a true basis for the people's wrl
fare and a better order" the results should be \o\
encouraging.
—Matthew Cowley.
712 TE KARERE Hurae, 1941
He Takahanga o o Tatou Hoia
Na William Mannering
I te mea kua tae mai nga rongo parekura i te whenua o nga Kariki, e kore e tawhiti i nga mahara o tenei iwi nga ingoa o nga takiwa o reira. Tata kore he tangata o tenei motu, kahore ona hoa, whanaunga ranei, kua tae ki taua whenua ki te kawe i te ingoa toa o Aotearoa. Ko ratou kua rongo ano i te karanga i puta kia Paora i te po: "Whiti mai ki Makeronia, whakaaro mai kia matou." Kua hoki pea nga mahara o etahi ki te tira iti i tae atu ki reira ki te mau i ta ratou pakanga ki te he, e rima tekau tau i muri i te whanautanga o to tatou Ariki. No taua wa i u ai a Paora ki Uropi, ratou ko ona hoa, ko Hira, ko Ruka me Timoti. I rere ratou i Toroa i te puwaha o te Dardanelles, i te whenua o Taake, a ka u ki Neapori, tona ingoa i tenei wahi ko Kavala. E iwa maero ki uta atu i tu tetahi taone ko Piripai, he pa nui i taua wa, he koroni na nga Romana. No reira a Riria te mema tuatahi o te Hahi i iriiria ki Uropi, a ko tetahi o nga pukapuka a Paora i tuhia ki te iwi o reira. Heoi ko taua pa i kia (Nga Mahi 16:12) "ko te pa nui ia o tena wahi" kua mahue noa atu i te tangata ko ona kohatu anake e takoto ana ki te whenua.
Ka haere a Paora ma i Piripai, ka tae ki Teharonika, tona ingoa i tenei wahi ko Salonika, 70 maero te tawhiti atu i Piripai. He maha nga Hurai o tenei pa i aua taima tae mai hoki ki tenei wa. I karapotia e te Taake i te tau 1430 a he mea poro na ratou te paipa wai o reira i horo ai te pa. Ko Kemal Ataturk, te tangata nui o Taake i whanau ki Salonika. I runga i te riri o nga Hurai o reira ka haere a Paora i Salo- nika ki Peria, ko Karaferria ki etahi ko Verria ki etahi i tenei wahi ka rongo nga hoa riri o Paora kua kauwhautia e ia te Rongo Pai i Peria ka haere ano ratou ki reira ki te whakararuraru, ka haere a Paora i konei ki Atene (Athens) ma te moana. He taone nui tenei i mua atu i te wa o nga Romana.
No te tau 200 ka mutu te kitea o te ingoa o Atene i roto i nga hitori. I te wa e 5000 ona tangata, tau 1840, i te putanga i raro ia Taake, ka meatia ano ko Atene he taone nui o Kariki. I te wa o te pakanga nui nei nuku atu i te 450,000 ona tangata.
Ka haere atu a Paora i Atene ki Koriniti, 50 maero whaka-te- hauauru. Ko Megara, te tauranga i eke ai etahi o o tatou hoia ki o ratou tima, kei waenganui i enei taone. Ko Koriniti he taone hou i te wa ia Paora, kahore ano i rau tau te tawhito, ahakoa, he taone nui pera ano i Atene; he taone na nga kai-hokohoko, he moni tona ranga- tiratanga. I tino mate taua taone i te ru, 146 nga tau i mua i te whanautanga o te Karaiti, a mahue atu mo te 100 tau. Ka hanga ano he taone hou i runga i nga kohatu o te mea tawhito, a i te tau 1858 ka horoa ano i te ru, ka horoa ano te hangaanga hou i te tau 1928. Ko te awa-keri o reira (te wahi i tu ai nga hoia o N.Z. ki te paahi i nga Tiamana) i timatatia i te wa ano ia Paora.
Ko tetahi o nga tikanga o tenei iwi te Kariki, mahara tonu ahau i taku kitenga ki to tatou iwi Maori, ara, to ratou hahu tupapaku. E toru tau i muri i te tanumanga o o ratou tupapaku ka hahungia, ka horoia nga whenua ki te waina, a ka kohia ki te pouwaka, ka kawea ki tetahi whare e whakatungia ana ki te wahi tapu ano hei takoto- ranga mo aua mea. Hore atu pea he iwi mahi penei ki tua atu i te Maori me te Kariki.
|
Mr. and Mrs |
Ale |
xander |
|
|
Wishart |
of the Auckland |
||
|
Branch |
are |
the |
proud |
|
parents |
of a |
son |
born |
|
Monday, |
June |
2nd, |
1941. |
Hurae, 1941
TE KARERE
713
Nga Rongo Korero Mo Te Whawhai
Na Paepae Witehira
Kua roa inaianei kihai ano i panuitia nga rongo korero o te whawhai i te nui o nga take kia taangia i te tuatahi. Tenei ra ka tiraata ano.
Kei te tino kaha rawatu te haere a te whawhai i naianei. Kua riro te whenua o nga Kariki, ara, kua whakatahangia nga hoia o te Ingarihi. Tino nui te parekura o te hoa riri i taua whenua, a i mate hoki etahi o o tatou tamariki, o tatou hoia o Niu Tireni ki reira. I kitea te tino toa o Niu Tireni i reira. Tetahi o nga mea whakamiharo i kitea i enei wiki tata nei ko te rerenga mai o tetahi o nga tangata nui o Tiamana ki Ingarangi. Kahore ano i matauria he aha te tino putake o tana haere mai. He maha nga whakapae mo taua tangata. E mea ana etahi o nga whaka- pai i haere mai ia no te mea kua kite ia ka mate tana iwi. Ko etahi e mea ana i haere mai ia ki te rapu tikanga e pai ai te rongo marie ki te ao. Ko etahi atu o nga whakapae mona e meinga ana he titiro-tahae (spy).
Kahore ia e tukua ana kia korero nupepa, whakarongo ranei ki nga korero a-rangi-nei (radio).
Ko Hitara e mea ana he mate porangi to taua tangata, otira, e he ana, no te mea he aha ia i tohu ai i tera tangata hei hoa mona mehemea he pera? Ko te tuunga o taua tangata ara, o Hess kei raro tata iho ia Hitara. He nui ano hoki.
He nui ano hoki te parekura o nga mea rere rangi. Kua nuku atu i te 4000 o te Tiamana kua pakaru, o te Ingariki kua nuku atu i te 1000.
Kei te kaha te haere o te whawhai i te takiwa, i te moana, i te tuawhenua hoki. Kahore ano i anga mai ki te pai, engari e anga ke atu ana.
Wanganui Dis- trict Presidency or- ganized at Manaia Hui Pariha, June 14 and 15, 1941, by President Cowley, areTukino Hakopa, Turake Manu and William Katene.
GENEALOGY
By Teao Wirihana
Cottage Meetings for the Month of July.
July 3 — Lesson 35, "Temple Work in the Future." ,, 10 — Lesson 36, "A Chain <>f Families." „ 17 — Lesson 37, "What Youth Can Do." ,, 24 — Lesson 88, "A M<>m Glorious Principle." ,, 31 — Lesson 89, "The Promise t<> the Fathers." Kia teretere mai nga whakapapa hei tuku ki Hiona, te whakatauki nei: "Ka tore raua ka tere Pipiwhakao."
714 TE KARERE Hurae, 1941
Kai Kauwhau Mo Waikato
Mo nga marama o HURAE me AKUHATA
Douglas Whatu me Teoti Rungaterangi ki Kawhia. — Turinui Rau- roha me Ted Reti ki Makomako. — Winiata Kapinga me Wanihi Tangi- haere ki Mahoenui. — Ben and Dick Marshall ki Puketapu. — Ru Tara- whiti me E. A. C. Scott ki Whatawhata. — Hare Puke me Reihana H. Puke ki Whatawhata. — Arthur Hill me tana family ki Miro St., Manu- nui. — Charlie Hill me Puhi Harihona ki Tainui Matangi. — Kio Tara- whiti me Ivan Noda ki Taupiri. — Tonga Paiaka me tana family ki Miro St., Manunui.
Wiki Tuarua.
Rose Beazley me Hine Hemi Paki ki Glenn Murray. — Tatana Arona me Okeroa Honetana ki Gordonton. — Hami Pohutuhutu me Charlie Ngare ki Puketapu. — Henare Ngawhika me Haimona Honetana ki Mor- rinsville. — Whatu Apiti me Tetana Te Hira ki Waingaro. — James Heperi me Mipi Tangihaere ki Te Kuiti. — Tirua Tukiri me Koroheke Heketanga ki Otorohanga. — George Stockman me Wanihi Tangihaere ki Aria. — Awe Whare Ponga me he hoa mana e rapu ki Wairoa. — Ahikaka Puru me Tapahia Te Wheki ki Whatawhata. — Horace Forbes me Peter Whatu ki Horotiu.
Wiki Tuatoru.
John Paki me Paekaka Rauroha ki Makomako. — Tom Reti me Peter Rauroha ki Parawera. — Tani Wetere me Robert Tauira ki Mata- kowhai. — Rangi and Betty Tetana Te Hira ki Frankton. — Niho Rangi- awha me Hori Maihi ki Aramiro. — Tame Horotini me Papa Maihi ki Raglan. — Howard Osborne me Victor Osborne ki Hospital Hill, Tau- marunui. — Ngaha Rotana me Pehi Tarawhiti ki Waingaro. — Rei Tuhua me Mapu Martin ki Morrinsville. — Dave Ormsby me Harry Marshall ki Taupiri. — John Apiti and companion of his own choosing to Tauhei.
Wiki Tuawha.
Percy Rowe and Ray Osborne to Owhango. — Charlie Marshall and family to Mahoenui. — Joseph Berryman me Joe Kingi ki Ngaruawahia. — Keti me Thomas Amoketi ki Whatawhata. — George Mate and com- panion to Otorohanga. — Here Tangihaere me Darcey Tangihaere ki Piopio. — Wm. Mannering and companion to Parawera. — Kare Martin me Rore Paki ki Hoeotainui. — Fred Rawiri and family ki Puketapu. — Jury W. Huriwhenua and family ki Pukekohe. — James Paki me Wm. Paki ki New Brighton.
Ki nga Kai-kauwhau. — la Hurae haere ki nga wahi kua karangatia nei koutou kia haere. I a Akuhata haere ano, engari ki nga wahi e hiahiatia ana e koutou ki te kauwhau.
Tukua mai a koutou ripoata o enei haerenga — ara, nga "week-end" mission reports. Koutou kahore e ripoata mai ana i te paunga o ia marama ka tuhia ki roto i nga pukapuka ripoata o te Takiwa — "kahore ano i haere ki te whakatutuki i te karanga haere ki te kauwhau."
BOUND VOLUME OF " TE KARERE," 1940
A limited number of bound volumes of the 1940 issue of Te Karere is now available. Place your orders as soon as pos- sible with Te Karere, Box 72, Auckland. Price 8/-.
Hurae, 1941 TE KARERE 715
Mahi Kura Hapati
RATAPU TUATAHI
Whakaaturanga: Upoko 3. "Te Takanga atu me te Tukunga iho." Tikanga 2. — E whakapono ana matou tera e whiua nga tangata mo o ratou hara ake, e hara mo to Arama haranga.
To te tangata herekoretanga. — Ko te Hahi e whakaako ana e tino rite ana hoki ki ta te karaipiture i roto i nga mea katoa kua pai nei te Matua ki te whakawhiwhi ki te tangata. Kua hoatu kia ia te mana ki te whiriwhiri i tana e pai ai, ko te mea pai, ko te mea kino ranei i tenei oranga, ki te whakarongo, ki te takahi ranei i ta te Atua whaka- haunga.
E tino hapai ana hoki te Atua i tenei tikanga i te mea Nana ano i hoatu ki te tangata. I roto hoki i Ana mahi katoa ki te tangata, kua waiho e Ia kei te tangata ano te whiriwhiri, kaore hoki e akina e Ia kei a ratou ano te tikanga ki te mahi i ta ratou e pai ai i.raro i te whakahaere me te tohutohu a Tona Matua. He pono, kua hoatu whakahaunga Ia, kua whakaritea e Ia he ture me nga oati atu, ka manaakitia ina puritia, ka whiua hoki ina kore e whakarite, otira i roto i enei mea katoa kaore te tangata e herea ana kei ia ia ano te tikanga ki te whakarite. I tenei ahua e rite ana ia ki nga anahera, otira, ina paiheretia ia e ia ano ki nga here o te hara kua makere i a ia tona mana kaha ki te whakahaere i te taha ki te tinana me te wairua. Kei ia ia ano hoki te mutunga mai o te kaha ki te takahi i nga ture o te ora, nga hiahiatanga o te ao me nga whakahaunga a te Atua mo nga mea whaka-te-tinana whaka-te-wairua hoki, i te mea me ngohe- ngohe ia ki ana whakaritenga. I tetahi ahua e uhia ana e ia ki runga ano ia ia nga whiu mo te takahi ture; i tetahi ahua ka whiwhi i nga manaakitanga me te tapiritanga mai o te wateatanga mo te hunga e aru ana i te ngohengohe ki te hapai i nga ture. Te ngohengohe ki nga ture he wahi nui no te tangata herekore. Ko te tangata hara e wehi ana i te ture no te mea nana ano e kore ai e whiwhi, e homaingia, e hara hoki na te ture, he tiaki ke nei ia ia i roto i tona herekoretanga, engari na tona hoariritanga ki te ture. Nga Patai:
1. He aha te mea nui i whakawhiwhia e te Atua ki te tangata i pera tonu me ta te karaipiture?
2. I roto i a te Atua whakahaunga he aha Tana tikanga mo te tangata?
3. I tehea ahua i rite ai te tangata ki nga anahera?
4. He aha te tukunga iho ki te tangata ngohengohe ki nga ture?
RATAPU TUARUA
Whakaaturanga: Te Haranga me tona tukunga iho.
Te wahi nui tonu o te mahi tika, he wahi ano hoki whakaaro Atua, e pehi ana i nga whakaaro, me whiwhi te tangata i te oati. Ka atua ia mo ana mahi pai ka whakatumangia ranei ia i te whiu ka pa mai ina mahi i nga mahi kino, ino kore e taea e ia ake te whakarite. E hara hoki i ta te Atua tikanga kia akina te tangata ki te main pai fad te ata tukua mai ranei e Ia nga mana kino hej aki i Ana tamariki kia main kino. I nga ra o Erene i mua i te tangata tuatahi he mea whakatakoto he whakahaunga me te ture, me te whakamarama atu o te whiu e pa mai ina takahia taua ture. E Kore rawa hoki eputa te tika mehemea
kaore ia i whiwhi ki le (ikan.ua kei ia ia ano te whiriwhiri ki te mea i tana e pai ai. "Otiia kei ia koe te tikanga ki te whiriwhiri nioti ake. kua hoatu na hoki kia koe, engari kia mahara kua rahuitia tena e Ahau." E ai ta le Ariki t;i \r Atua kia Arnina. .Mo Ana whakahaere ki tenei peteriaka tuatahi o te iwi, i mea te Ariki i enei ra : "Nana Naku
716 TE KARERE Hurae, 1941
ake ano i whakaae kia riro ano ia hei kai whakahaere tikangamona ake ano." Nga Patai:
1. He aha te wahi nui tonu o te mahi tika?
2. Pehea te ahua o Arama ia ia i te kaari o Erene?
RATAPU TUATORU Whakaaturanga: Te Takanga Atu. Upoko 3.
I te wa i hoatu ai te tuakana a Kaina me tona teina me Apera i a raua whakahere, ka riri te tuakana i te mea kaore i paingia tana whakahere. Katahi te Ariki ka korero kia Kaina, a ka whakamata ki te ako ia ia he huanga ka aru i roto i ana mahi mo te kino mo te pai ranei.
Nga Patai:
1. Ko wai te mea kaore i paingia tana whakahere?
RATAPU TUAWHA
Whakaaturanga: Mo te mohiotanga ki te pai ki te kino.
Te mohiotanga ki te pai ki te kino i hanga te Atua e ahei ana hei whakapiki i Ana tamariki a ko te whiwhinga ki tenei mohiotanga ma roto ano i nga mea e pa ana e kitea iho ana e te tangata te rere- ketanga o te mea pai i to te kino. Noreira i whakanohia ai te tangata ki runga ki te whenua i waenganui i te mana o te pai me te kino me te mohiotanga ki nga mea e taiawhio nei i a ia me te whakaaro tua- rangi i tupu ake i roto ia ia kia whiriwhiri i tana e pai ai. Nga kupu a te poropiti a Rihai e tino marama ana. "Noreira, kua waiho iho e te Ariki, e te Atua ma te tangata tana ake tikanga, otira, kihai i taea e ia te mahi i runga i tana ake me i kore ia i kumea e tenei taha e tera taha ranei." No reira he mea herekore nga tangata ki te ritenga o te kikokiko, a e homai ana ano kia ratou nga mea katoa e tika ana ma te tangata. A kei ia ratou te tikanga mo te whiriwhiri i te tikanga herekore me te oranga-tonutanga ma roto i te mahi takawaenga nui mo nga tangata katoa, mo te whiriwhiri ranei i te hereherenga me te mate, e rite ana ki te hereheretanga me te kaha o te rewara, no te mea e rapu ana ia i nga tangata katoa kia pouri ratou kia pera me ia ano. Nga Patai:
1. He aha i noho ai hei whakapiki ake i te tangata tona mohio- tanga ki te pai ki te kino?
2. He aha i whakanohia ai te tangata ki runga ki te whenua?
OVERSEAS
Here is an example of what "we" like to receive in the way of good news. Quoting: "Enclosed please find currency $1.00 to renew our subscription to your fine magazine. We have enjoyed it very much. Our son Delbert Curtis is now in training in the army at San Luis, California. His number was drawn before he was released from his mission in California enabling him to only spend a few days with us. His cheerful spirit and strong testimony of the Gospel gained through his mission under the guidance of President Cowley was a source of happiness to us and repaid us for any sacrifice we may have made for him. May the Lord bless Brother Cowley and his good family and those of you who are helping in any way to further this great work." (Sgd.) Mr. and Mrs. A. L. Curtis, Payson, etc.
Elder Baumgartner also writes about the happenings back home. Of interest is the fact that he, Richard Lambert, Franklin Aldous, Gerald Langton, Geo. Biesinger and Garn Henderson travelled 740 miles in 12 hours, from Salt Lake to California, to join Elders Simpson, Bigler, Later and Dastrup to put on a Maori programme at a British benefit entertainment arranged under the patronage of the New Zealand Executive on the coast. People certainly enjoyed every bit of the programme. President Cowley received expressions of appreciation from the President of the organization responsible for the entertainment, who is a former New Zealander, ever grateful for the contribution of the American New Zealanders in their willing aid and assistance to raise funds for the cause.
Next month, if we are still in the publishing business, we will try to bring you more up-to-date news of the doings here and abroad.
Hurae, 1941
TE KARERE
717
The Passing of Pres. Rulon S. Wells
Elder Wells, Senior President of First Council of Seventy, dies May 7th, 1941.
Tributes paid at funeral services by President David O. McKay, President Rudger Clawson and President Rufus K. Hardy. Message of respect from President Heber J. Grant, read by President J. Reuben Clark, Jr. The New Zealand Mission of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints associates itself with the Church generally, and particularly, in mourning the loss of President Wells. We add particularly, with a sense of humbleness and re- gret that he has passed on, leaving in this mission a contribution to the faith and testimony of the Saints contained in the Hurae 1938 and succeed- ing issues of "Te Karere" entitled "My Testi- mony of the Gospel."
Speakers at the funeral services described his life as "he fought the good fight, finished his course and kept the faith." President Hardy in his remarks expressed thankfulness at the con- tacts with such a man: "We assemble here to-day to pay homage to one of God's choice sons — a real gentleman." Continuing on he says, "I know him as being proud, but not haughty, brave, but not foolhardy, wise, and with his great wisdom humility equal to that of a child." Elder Antoine R. Ivins of the First Council of Seventy, at sea, bound for Canal Zone, wirelessed a message of sympathy which was read by President Clark; Elder Samuel O. Bennoin of the First Council of Seventy offered the invocation at the funeral service ; Elder John H. Taylor offered the benediction and Elder Richard L. Evans dedicated the grave, both of the First Council of Seventy.
Elder R. S. Wells
NGA MATENGA
Tukumana Te Taniwha Reihana
— I te 28 o Maehe, 1941, ka mate to matou matua ki Waimangu, Clevedon, i waenganui i te nui o ona iwi o Hauraki, Tamaki, Ngati Haua me era atu hapu o Waikato i mine mai ki te tangi.
Ko Tukumana te Timuaki Peka tuarua o te Peka o Kiri Kiri i te tau 1896 a i te tau 1888 ka uru mai ia ki roto i te Hahi. E nuku atu i te 80 ona tau i tona mate- nga. Na Toke Watene, Timuaki o te Takiwa o Hauraki i whakahaere te karakia whakamutunga, a nana ano hoki i whakatapu te run.
Raira Careless. — I te 13 0 nga ra o Maehe 1941, ka mate to matou tuakana, whaea, a Raira Careless o te Peka o Omahu, Hau- raki. I hui ana whanaunga katoa ki te tangihanga mona. He wa- hine e mohio tiuitia ana i konei a
i Amerika hoki, no temea kei reira, kei Hiona, tona tamahine me etahi o ona mokopuna. I tae a Timuaki Kauri, Charles E. Billman mo Hori Watene o Akarana ki te whakamaharatanga niutun.ua kia ia.
Iraia Palmer. — I te 20 o Popu- ere, 1941, ka mate a Iraia Palmer ki te Hohipera o Whangarei. Ho tangata aroha tenei. Ko ia hoki to Timuaki o te Peka o Whana- naki, takiwa o Whangarei. No te Greal Harrier tenei tangata mo tana whanau, a mo tlga tan o rna
kua pahure ake aei, ko Whana-
naki to marao noho o tona whanau
katoa.
Ponui Hemi Nikora. — I to 7 0
Aperira ka mate a Ponui Nikora ki Kupata, Hauraki. !•: '.mi ona tan. No to Peka o Te Aroha tenei kaumatua. Na Tiki Reihana i whakatapu te ma.
718
TE KARERE
Hurae, 1941
AMERICA
"A Chosen Land of the Lord "
From the beginning even to the end of the
Earth.
By President J. Reuben. Clark, Jr.
Of the First Presidency
Concerning Zion and its Destiny and Liberty and its Price
(Continued from page 690)
Editor's Note. — With this issue we bring you the completion of President Clark's address to the j REUBEN Clark Jr Youth of the Church given June 9th, 1940. Fol- lowing the course of events in the life of to-day we are better able to appreciate the inspirational thoughts given us by a servant of God.
LOCAL SELF-GOVERNMENT
Under this plan which the Lord established, we have a dual juris- diction— State and Federal. The Federal Government may do only what we the people have authorised it to do; if it does more, it is guilty of usurpation. The people have reserved to themselves or to their State governments every right and power they have not dele- gated to the Federal government, which must always look to the Con- stitution and its amendments to find its rights, for it has none other. This system puts the great bulk of our daily life activities in the hands of our own neighbours who know us and our surroundings, and not in the hands of a bureaucrat in a far away national capitol, who, to all intents and purposes, is an alien to us and our affairs. This plan gives us the largest possible measure of local self-government. Liberty will never depart from us while we have local self-government controlling and directing matters pertaining to our personal liberties and to the security of our private property; it will not abide with us if we shall lose this local self-government.
EQUALITY OF MEN The Lord's plan so given us was founded on the universal truths "that all men are created equal, that they are endowed by their Creator with certain inalienable rights, that among these are life, liberty, and the pursuit of happiness."
FREEDOM OF SPEECH, PRESS, CONSCIENCE The inspired plan provides that we might write what we wish and send to our friends, without danger of being gaoled; that we might speak our minds unrestrained, free likewise from any such danger; that we might print the truth and our comment thereon, without let or hindrance, provided in all cases we were not libelling or slandering our fellow-citizens. These rights are fundamental to freedom, and to a society of freemen. They are flouted by governments not estab- lished under the Lord's plan.
DUE PROCESS OF LAW Under His plan we rely, as we rely on the coming of day, upon the security that comes from the principle that government shall not
Hurae, 1941 TE KARERE 719
"deprive any person of life, liberty, or property, without due process of law; nor deny to any person within its jurisdiction the equal pro- tection of the laws." Yet none of these things is sacred in other countries. There, men go to bed at night seemingly secure in the fruits of long labours and awaken in the morning shorn of the savings of a lifetime, taken to enrich some favourite of government; there, men are ruthlessly cast into prison, having committed no offence other than, by some careless word or act, to have offended the sensibilities of some petty official. These things are happening where God's system is not in force.
Since under the Lord's plan He must be served by the people under the penalty of otherwise being swept off, there must be in the land com- plete freedom of worship, and so the Lord set up His plan that men might follow and worship Him. Under His plan it is not possible for some government official to come into our Sunday Schools, or our Mutuals, or our Relief Societies, or our Sacrament meetings, and tell us what we may say, or prescribe what we may teach. This guarantees to us our most precious gift. Yet this kind of supervision, direction, and control is being exercised in other countries to-day where these God-given rights of men are being trampled underfoot.
OUR ALLEGIANCE
God provided that in this land of liberty, our political allegiance shall run not to individuals, that is, to government officials, no matter how great or how small they may be. Under His plan our allegiance and the only allegiance we owe as citizens or denizens of the United States, runs to our inspired Constitution which God Himself set up. So runs the oath of office of those who participate in government. A certain loyalty we do owe to the office which a man holds, but even here we owe, just by reason of our citizenship, no loyalty to the man himself. In other countries it is to the individual that allegiance runs. This principle of allegiance to the Constitution is basic to our freedom. It is one of the great principles that distinguishes this "land of liberty" from other countries.
Thus God added to His priceless blessings to us.
ENCROACHMENTS UPON FREE INSTITUTIONS
I wish to say with all the earnestness I possess that when you youth and maidens see any curtailment of these liberties I have named, when you see government invading any of these realms of freedom which we have under our Constitution, you will know that they are putting shackles on your liberty, and that tyranny is creeping upon you, no matter who curtails these liberties or who invades these realms, and no matter what the reason and excuse therefor may be.
In the whole history of God's dealing with men. He has never urged, counselled, nor advised any nation or people to set up auto- cracies, tyrannies, despotisms, or dictatorships. His prophet pleaded with ancient Israel not to crown a king. ( 1 Samuel S.) He lias always condemned that which takes away man's free agency. This is His way. You may judge every proposal for human government by this principle.
THE RESTORATION
But the same visions which showed t<> N'ephi I ho age of the (.en- tiles on this promised land, also showed God'fl purposes for the usher- ing in of the last dispensation, for the le eMahli. hment of His Church in the last days.
How could the people Of "the chosen land of the Lord," serve .Jesus, "the Cod of this land," if Ihey did not have His statutes with them, and yet, if they did not serve Him they were to he swept off.
720 TE KARERE Hurae, 1941
God's eternal justice required that Christ's Gospel should be known that men might live it. So after our fathers had fully established their new government, after they had again fought the mother coun- try and made secure their independence, the Father and the Son appeared to the young boy praying in the woods and told him of the work he was to do in bringing back to earth not only the fullness of Christ's Gospel in its simplicity and purity, but also in restoring to the world God's Holy Priesthood. In the due order of the Lord, the Gospel was revealed and the Priesthood bestowed through the instrumentality of the young Prophet.
God thus provided that the Gentiles of this land should have the truth they were to live. He was moving forward again on His ap- pointed way. He was setting up "a land of liberty" not only, but He was revealing His truth also.
He had now given us the greatest blessing, and without price to the nation, however heavy the toll to this people.
BLESSINGS FOR WHOLE HEMISPHERE
Clearly, if the people of this land, this whole land of America, all of it, must serve Jesus Christ, "the God of the land," or be swept off, and this is the very gist of all and every blessing promised for, and every judgment uttered against this land, then God must so provide that men in all the Americas could serve Him. The era of the Gentiles must be an era of freedom of worship throughout the hemisphere else Zion could not be established. This was God's plan and must be brought about.
But our Revolution and Constitution had brought their blessings of freedom and liberty to the people of the United States only. The great territorial bulk of the hemisphere was still in bondage ; still unprepared to take part in our God-given destiny.
FREEING SPANISH AMERICA
Then in the early decades of the last century, both before and after Joseph Smith's First Vision, God moved upon the other peoples, one by one, to assert and win their independence, and as fast as they won it, they one by one — I am speaking with historical accuracy — set up their new governmental systems in the framework of our Con- stitution, sometimes in the first instance, practically copying it word for word. Different juridical traditions have led them to develop their governmental systems along diverging lines from ours, but in great principles their fundamental document is a replica of our God-given instrument. Thus the hemisphere — Zion in its full area — was becom- ing "a land of liberty."
MONROE DOCTRINE
As these nations began to throw off their foreign yokes, a Euro- pean alliance was planned to help hold them in subjection to their European over-lords. Then came our great Monroe Doctrine which placed us of the United States squarely behind the efforts of Latin- America to gain freedom and against those European states who would thwart it.
God again moved us forward towards the destiny He has planned for us. He was preserving the blessings He had given to us.
BRITISH NORTH AMERICA ACT
This work for all the Americas (except a few small areas) was completed in 1867 when the great British North America Act brought to a united Canada a status of practical independence and almost com- plete local automony.
Hurae, 1941 TE KARERE 721
OUR LEADERSHIP
If I have made clear the course of events to this point, it is appar- ent that in the era of the Gentiles, it has been the United States that has always been called to carry forward the banner of human liberty and religious freedom.
HUMAN SLAVERY
But there was amongst us here a heinous sin of which we must cleanse ourselves — I mean human slavery, the curse of every people and of every civilization that has ever harboured it. God moved the hearts of men to its extinction. It cost the lives of a million of our fathers. But sin and iniquity always exact their penalty. The mar- tyred Lincoln, the Great Emancipator, visioned the underlying principle of God's justice when he said in his Second Inaugural:
Fondly do we hope — fervently do we pray — that this scourge of war may speedily pass away. Yet, if God wills that it continue until all the wealth piled by the bondsman's tzvo hundred fifty years of unrequited toil shall be sunk, and until every drop of blood drawn with the lash shall be paid by another drawn with the szvord, as ivas said three thousand years ago, so still it must be said, "The judgments of the Lord are true and righteous altogether."
Human slavery passed. All men within the United States were free.
Thus God had almost finished His fashioning of this land to meet His purposes, to make of this a land of liberty and a place where God may be worshipped without let or hindrance. He had bestowed upon us all the essentials needed to earn His fullest blessings.
THE SOUTH SEA COMMONWEALTHS
Furthermore, this leaven of local self-government, of division of independent governmental functions, of realms of freedom and liberty beyond the reach of government, is working in the far-off corners of the earth. The' commonwealths of the South Seas, basically framed along the lines set up by our Constitution, are bringing other lands to enjoy our blessings.
OUR DESTINY
And this is the mission and the destiny of America, of Zion, de- creed thousands of years ago, for, I repeat, Isaiah declared: "Out of Zion shall go forth the law, and the word of the Lord from Jerusalem." (Isaiah 2:3.)
And this destiny of ours is to come not through bloody conquests of war and the oppression and enslavement of our fellow-beings, but by conquests of peace and the persuasion of righteous example and Christian endeavour.
Thus far God has wrought out His plan. He will carry it through — with us, if we are faithful, if we work not iniquity, if we repent our sins; but if we shall fail Him, as did the Jareditea and the Nephites of old, then He will work it through with some other people. For the divine edict has gone forth, and God will not be laughed at, nor mocked, nor thwarted.
TO YOUTH
I appeal to you youth and maidens of the Church, o\' (lie Nation
— in these great, and vital matters of free government "keep thy
father's commandment and forsake not the law of thy mother." Sold
fast, to the blessings which God has provided for you. Yours is not the task to gain them, they arc hero; y<>urs is the part of cherishing
t hem.
722 TE KARERE Hurae, 1941
We, your fathers and mothers, have brought to you some woes; they have been largely an incident of our progress and prosperity which you have fully shared; they have resulted in most part from our failure fully to observe God's commandments, fully to live the Gospel plan. Be ye not as weak as we have been. In our aging years we admit our failings, we repent our sins; we confess them to you, and humbly and with all the power we possess we beseech you not to repeat our follies, not to duplicate our transgressions, because we of the Gentile era live under the God-declared law of this land as fully as did the ancient inhabitants hereof.
THE JUDGMENT AND BLESSING TO US
Moroni, a thousand years after the arrival of the Nephites and a thousand years before the era of the Gentiles, with a full knowledge of the fate of the Jaredites and the Nephites, for he had either read, witnessed, recorded, or transcribed the full and terrible record, looked down to the day of the Gentiles on this land and declared:
And this comet h unto you, O ye Gentiles, that ye may know the decrees of God — that ye may repent, and not continue in your iniquities until the full- ness come, that ye may not bring down the fullness of the wrath of God upon you as as the inhabitants of the land have hitherto done.
Behold, this is a choice land, and whatsoever nation shall possess it shall be free from bondage, and from captivity, and from all other nations under heaven, if they will but serve the God of the land, who is Jesus Christ, who hath been manifested by the things which we have written. (Ether 2: 11,12.)
OUR HOPE
Thus there comes to us as a healing balm to our fears and dreads in this war-commotioned world, that great benediction of the ancient prophet who had read so much and had seen so fully what iniquity brought to this land, and what blessings followed the living of the divine commands.
Listen at last to what Nephi of old said of an American Zion that kept the laws of God:
And all the nations that fight against Zion, and that distress her, shall be as a dream of a night vision; yea, it shall be unto them, even as unto a hungry man which dreameth, and behold he eateth but he awaketh and his soul is empty ; or like unto a thirsty man which dreameth, and behold he drinketh but he awaketh and behold he is faint, and his soul hath appetite; yea, even so shall the multitude of all the nations be that fight against Mount Zion. (2 Nephi 27: 3.)
Should you ask, what can the youth of the Church do to make this blessing secure, the youth of a handful of people amongst a many- millioned multitude, I will reply: If the youth of this Church and if the Church membership shall serve God and Jesus Christ, who is the God of this land, if they shall serve Him fully in spirit and in truth — and I ask you to remember this is the price demanded for the blessing promised — there is no righteous achievement which they may not reach.
Furthermore, if we be fully righteous we shall stand before the Lord as did Abraham of old, when he pleaded for Sodom and Gomorrah which had been doomed for destruction because of their wickedness.
"Wilt thou also," said Abraham to the Lord, "destroy the righteous with the wicked?" Would you, asked Abraham, destroy the cities if fifty righteous would be destroyed also? No, said the Lord, I will spare the place if there are fifty righteous there.
Then Abraham began bargaining with the Lord; would He destroy it if there were forty-five righteous, then forty, then thirty, then twenty and finally ten, and the Lord said He would not destroy it if there were ten righteous. But ten could not be found. Only Lot and his family — four in all — were found worthy of succour and they were
Hurae, 1941 TE KARERE 723
warned by an angel to flee before the fiery destruction came, and an angel delivered them. (Genesis 19 and 19.)
This same great law of the saving power of a leavening righte- ousness was declared by Jesus, when He spoke of the last days and their terrors and devastation:
And except those days shoirid be shortened, there should no flesh be saved; but for the elect's sake (Matt. 24:22) whom he hath chosen, he hath shortened the days. (Mark 13: 20.)
Thus if we, the youth and the parents of the Church, shall become fully righteous, may we not be the "ten" in this great land to save it? May we not be the elect, chosen of the Lord, to shorten the days of God's vengeance?
So to live that this might be, is clearly our duty and our responsi- bility also.
I thank the Lord for this great body of workers with the youth of the Church. I thank them for their valiant service of the past. I cannot overstate your duties and your responsibilities for the future. I pray that God will bless you in your labours that you may be able to reach the hearts of the children of this people and to guide and direct them in the way which God would have them go.
OUR PRAYER
And may God bless this nation of ours, keep out of our hearts the hate that is ruling so much of the civilized world. May God pre- serve our liberties and keep us in the land of our inheritance, main- tain our free institutions, preserve our Constitution. May we, His chosen people, be instrumental in preserving America, which may God bless, I ask in the name of Jesus. Amen.
A Day of Warning
This is a day of warning and not a day of many words, for I , the Lord, am not to be mocked in the last days. (Doc. & Cov. 63: 85.)
Since the date upon which the foregoing' statement was given in a revelation through Joseph Smith, the Prophet (August, 1831), many additional warnings have been given to the people through Church leaders.
In view of conditions in the world to-day, it is well for Latter- day Saints to consider seriously the advice and admonitions which have been given, and to prepare themselves against the time when the prophecies will be fulfilled. From an article by Elder Joseph Fielding Smith in the Deseret News Church Section, February 10. 1940, the following quotations have been taken:
I 'resident Joseph Smith said :
Look to the Presidency and receive instruction. Ever] man who is afraid, eovct<ms, will be taken in a snare. The time is soon coming, when no man will have am peace bul in Zion and her stakes. . . .
These things are at our doors. The) will follow the Saints of God from city to city. Satan will rage, and the spirit of the devil is now enraged I know not how goon these things will take place; bu1 with a view of them, shall I cry peace? No I I will lift up my voice and testifj to them. How
long you will have g I crops, and the famine be Kept off, I do not know ;
when the he tree leaves, know then that summer is nigh at hand.
724 TE KARERE Hurae, 1941
President Brigham Young gave this warning:
Do you think there is calamity abroad now among the people ? . . . All we have yet heard and all we have experienced is scarcely a preface to the sermon that is going to be preached. When the testimony of the Elders ceases to be given, and the Lord says to them, "come home ; I will now preach My own sermons to the nations of the earth," all you now know can scarcely be called a preface to the sermon that will be preached with fire and sword, tempests, earthquake, hail, rain, thunders and lightnings, and fearful destruction.
President Jedediah M. Grant added this comment:
Consequently, when we see nation stirred up against nation, and on the other hand see other nations exerting a powerful influence to bring about negotiations of peace, shall we say they can bring it about? Do we expect they can stay the outward course of war? The Prophet of God has spoken it all, and we expect to see the work go on — and see all things fulfilled as the pro- phets have declared by the spirit of prophecy in them.
President John Taylor's statement :
Were we surprised when the last terrible war took place here in the United States ? No ! Good Latter-day Saints were not, for they had been told about it. Joseph Smith had told them where it would start, that it should be a ter- rible time of bloodshed and that it should start in South Carolina. But I tell you to-day the end is not yet. You will see worse things than that, for God will lay His hand upon the nations, and they will feel it more terribly than ever they have done before ; there will be more bloodshed, more ruin, more devastation than ever they have seen it before. Write it down ! You will see it come to pass, it is only just starting in.
President Wilf ord Woodruff, more recently, said :
I heard the Prophet Joseph bear his testimony to these events that would transpire in the earth. . . . We cannot draw a veil over the events that await this generation. No man that is inspired by the Spirit and power of God can close his ears, his eyes, or his lips to these things.
The warnings from the Lord, Himself, are clear. He says :
The Lord's scourge shall pass over by night and by day, and the report thereof shall vex all people ; yea, it shall not be stayed until the Lord come ; for the indignation of the Lord is kindled against their abominations and all their wicked works.
But the promise has been made to Zion and the pure in heart, that they shall escape if they "observe to do all things whatsoever I (the Lord) have commanded."
The Doctrine and Covenants (45:38-41) reads:
Even so it shall be in that day when they shall see all these things, then shall they know that the hour is nigh. And it shall come to pass that he that feareth Me shall be looking forth for the great day of the Lord to come, even for the signs of the coming of the Son of Man. And they shall see signs and wonders, for they shall be shown forth in the heavens above, and in the earth beneath. And they shall behold blood, and fire, and vapours of smoke.
The Bible (St. Luke 21 : 36) gives this admonition:
Watch ye therefore, and pray always, that ye may be accounted worthy to escape all these things that shall come to pass, and to stand before the Son of Man.
All Latter-day Saints should give heed to the counsel of the ser- vants of the Lord. We should prepare ourselves by observing the teachings of the Gospel and the commandments of the Lord, by re- fraining from evil practices, by observing our prayers, and by show- ing brotherly love in our dealings with each other.
Hurae, 1941
TE KARERE
725
Wm. R. Burge
To-day's Heritage
By William R. Burge
I suppose we have all felt our longing for free- dom from "the sin that doth so easily beset us," for peace, for better conditions, well up more intensely during recent weeks. This is a natural reaction when we survey the conditions constantly presented to us. Indeed the heritage of the years, the por- tion for which those hardy souls endured so much during centuries, all seem to be in danger of de- struction; and as we turn to our radios and papers, we might feel that not only our national inheritance is threatened, but that personal hope that we all cherish of a new world, upright and cleaner life, either here or hereafter, is also being sorely buf- feted. We each of us have nursed this hope all our lives. It has been a comfort to us, when things have gone against us, and it seemed to burn more brightly because of our adversity. It takes a different form in our individual conception, but it is based on our religion, the expectation and realisation of a hap- pier life runs right through our doctrines. It is with feelings of pro- found thanksgiving to our God that we can turn to the scriptures and read therein the true state of the man of God despite material evidence to the contrary.
Every chapter in the Testaments is replete with promises and assurances of God's constant nearness to man. Every chapter proves to us that only God triumphs over all; that God is the originator and dispenser of all good; that it is only God's plan which is being worked out in the world, and no other. It follows that God being what he is « — without shadow or turning — he can do no other than give to man all ultimate good. The man who has his heart stayed by a sure abiding- conviction of his relationship as the son of God, is also sure of his inheritance of peace and plenty, that the unfolding of God's plan can bring good to him. He is not swayed by the thoughts of war or the results of war, he is not lead by fears, ignorance, censorship or man- formulated creeds. His happiness and destiny is secure in the Most High and he is content that his Father's ideas should be worked out for the good of all mankind including himself. He is a man of peace — at peace.
It can be seen that a man may be at peace in the midst of war. Wo. peace of God can remain with him, his security founded upon his understanding of his divine sonship. Peace is not the cessation oi' hostilities. It is the letting go of all that tends to disturb or disrupt our harmony. It is the casting out of fear, jealousy, petty likes and dislikes and a closer acceptance of honesty, unselfishness, purity and love. As we accept and express these qualities we draw into a closer union with all that is .u'<><>d. The state of peace brings healing t<> our- selves and others, wisdom to our thoughts and acts, love and co-opera- tion in our relations with others. It gives us an abiding faith in the present power of God and in the ultimate recognition of and obedience to God by all mankind.
So our heritage to-day, which others would have us believe is so besmirched and puerile, is for us an accomplished fact an ever-ready
staff. Renewal of strength and inspiration for each day is to he found in the scriptures. The power which broughl Daniel from the din <>f
lions, which restored Bight, hearing, Btraightened limbs, raised the dead,
which proved the supplier of the widow's needs, is not dead; is not lost, hut. is a constant source of endless inspiration. A.B the light or
726 TE KARERE Hurae, 1941
realization that God is man's life fills one's heart, the sense of self- pity, of fear of the future, can be shed. We see man's oneness with God whose wish is for good to man, and we can claim our heritage as the sons of God. We need not wait for the future for this portion of peace and happiness. Time does not enter into God's conception of life since good is infinite, boundless, knowing neither race nor creed. Let us grasp our God-given dominion (for God gave us dominion over all things) to secure our share of happiness. More, it is our bounden duty to do this that we may be of service to our fellow-man, who like ourselves, is struggling along paths where all familiar landmarks have disappeared, all former standards lost.
Don't let you and I just wish and pray that God will do something. That attitude savours of the preacher's favourite illustration of drown- ing within reach of a lifebelt and wishing that the lifebelt would help us. It will and God will, but we must first make the effort ourselves to be calmer, confident and of good cheer. Then we can assume our true inheritance as heirs of God.
REPORTS AND SIX-PENNY FUNDS
Branches throughout the Mission that are late with reports, etc.. are again reminded to forward them IMMEDIATELY. Refer back to last issue of Te Karere for any further reference regarding reports and six-penny funds. The Sunday Schools that have reported so far, June 16th, 1941, are: —
First Quarter. — Auckland, Peterehema, Mataraua, Wanganui, Kaikohe, Whangaruru, Wairoa Hauraki.
Second Quarter. — Taumarunui, Wanganui, Waipawa, Matako- whai, Whatawha.ta, Whangaruru, Te Hauke, Rahui, Tokomaru Bay. The percentage of contributors to the Six-penny Fund is very small. The total membership of the Branch should be the contribu- tors to this fund.
District Presidents are here asked to attend to the Sunday School work in your districts, contact your District Superintendency and either urge them to work or see that some- one is entrusted with this important work who
will not hide their light under a bushel of ?
Branch Presidents are as responsible for the Sunday School work within the Branch as is the local Superintendency. Co-operation and not laziness is what's needed. Due to the fact that in most Branches the first Sunday of the month is used conjointly with the Branch the amount of time the Sunday Schools have been taking is very short, we are only printing the three remaining Sundays' Lessons. Use your time in some worthwhile discussion or review some of the material already used. Next month we hope to give you something quite definite to be done in ALL Classes during one Sunday a month.
K. HARRIS, Secretary.
Pioneer Day at Korongata, Hast- ings, July 26th and 27th, 1941. All cor- dially invited. Mis- sion President will attend. Come with your beards. Spe- cial prize offered.
Hurae, 1941 TE KARERE 727
SUNDAY SCHOOL
Theme —
"OUR HOMES AND CHAPELS SHALL BE BEAUTIFUL" "For Zion must increase in beauty and in Holiness; her borders must be enlarged; her stakes must be strengthened ; yea verily I say unto you. Zion must arise and put on her beautiful garments."
(Doctrine & Covenants 82: 14.)
SACRAMENT GEM I come to Thee all penitent,
I feel Thy love for me. Dear Saviour, in this Sacrament
I do remember Thee.
CONCERT RECITATION Proverbs 9: 9-10.
"Give instruction to a wise man, and he will be the wiser ; teach a just man, and he will increase in learning. The fear of the Lord is the beginning of wisdom ; and the knowledge of the holy is under- standing."
KORERO A NGAKAU
Nga Whakatauki 9: 9-10.
"Hoatu te mohio ki te tangata whakaaronui, a ka neke ake ona whakaaro ; whakaakona te tangata tika, a ka maha ake ana kupu mohio. Te timatanga o te whakaaro nui ko te wehi kia Ihowa ; te matauranga, ko te mohio ki te Mea Tapu."
HYMNS
"Nay, Speak No 111" Page 88
"Kia Mahara Tonu ka" Wharangi 73
LESSONS
KINDERGARTEN (4 and 5 years oJ
1. "Who's On The Lord's Side." Exodus 32 and 34. "Objective Do what is right. Lei the consequence follow."
2. "A Temple hi The Desert" Exodus 35 to 40. "Objective God blesses - ho reverently worship I lim."
3. "Two Against Ten." Numbers [3 and 1-4. "Objective Gour; and truthful people are honoured bj (i<>d and Mm."
PRIMARY (6, 7, 8 and 9 years oi
1. "Elisha Restores a Utile Lad to Life." 11 Kings A. 18 38, "Objective The Lord blesses the faithful who believe in I lim."
728 TE KARERE Hurae, 1941
2. "And a Little Child Shall Lead Them." 11 Kings 5: 1-19. "Objective- Great blessings come from a child's faith."
3. "Gchazi Punished." 11 Kings 5:20-27. "Objective — Blessings follow obedience to the words of God's servants."
CHURCH HISTORY (10 and 11 years of age). Book of Mormon.
INTERMEDIATE (12, 13, 14 and 15 years of age).
1. "At the Well of Sychar." John 4:1-42. "Objective— To teach that the Gospel is for all who will accept it."
2. "Driven From Nazareth." Matthew 13:54-58; Luke 4:16-30; Mark 6:1-6. "Objective — To help students guard against accepting false doctrine from strangers and rejecting the truth that is spoken by their own associates."
3. "The Draught of Fishes." Luke 5: 1-11 ; Mark 1 : 16-20. "Objective — To emphasize the fact that the blessings of the Lord come only through obedi- ence to Him."
A. & B. DEPARTMENTS (16, 17, 18 and 19 years of age).
1. "Adam and Eve Driven From the Garden of Eden." Genesis 3 : 7-21. Problems — Why were our first parents driven from the Garden of Eden? Was this a curse, or a blessing to mankind? Why? Why was the flaming sword placed to guard the way? What were the causes for joy and sorrow of Adam and Eve ?
2. Discuss this lesson using refrences found in Articles of Faith, chapter 2, and Jesus the Christ, chapter 3.
3. "The Story of Cain and Abel." Genesis 4: 1-16. Problems — Why was Abel's offering more acceptable than Cain's ? How did Cain accept his sen- tence ? Did Cain repent ?
C. & D. DEPARTMENTS (20 to 25 years of age).
1. "Baptism of Jesus Christ in the Jordan River." Matthew 3:13-17; Mark 1:9-11; Luke 3:21-23. Problems — How did Christ meet John's objec- tion to baptize Him ? What two incidents show that Jesus was the Messiah ? What evidence have we that John was looking for such a witness as the one referred to in problem 2?
2. "The Temptations." Matthew 4:1-11; Mark 1:12-13; Luke 4:1-13. Problems — Show that these temptations of Jesus are in a way a summary of all the temptations that will ever come to man. Show how Satan is still adhering to the plan he proposed in the council in heaven. When are we justi- fied in claiming God's miraculous intervention in our behalf ? Show by refer- ence to Christ's temptation that God provides a way of escape from every temptation (see Cor. 10:13). How was it possible for Christ to behold all the kingdoms of the world?
3. Continue on with the above lesson.
ADULT GOSPEL DOCTRINE (for all others not assigned).
1. "The Division of the Hebrew Nation" B.C. 975-955. 1 Kings 12 to 14; 11 Chronicles 10 to 12.
2. "The Northern Kingdom from Jeroboam to Ahab" B.C. 955-918. 1 Kings 15, 16:1-28; 11 Chronicles 12 to 16.
3. "The Era of Elijah" B.C. 918-915. 1 Kings 17 to 19; 11 Chronicles 18:1-9.
MAORI CLASS— as printed.
Hurae, 1941
TE KARERE
729
PRIMARY
A SUGGESTION FOR TEACHERS
One there was
Known throughout the ages
And over all the world . . .
The Great Teacher,
Who leads forever to the light.
His name I bear.
Oh, wondrous thought
That challenges my highest, best.
I am a teacher.
— Caroline S. Woodruff.
MEMORY GEM I would not hurt a living thing,
However great or small, The beasts that graze, the birds that sing, Our Father made them all.
LESSONS:
FIRST WEEK
Objective:
We may be with Jesus when He comes again by obedience to His teachings.
Lesson Story:
AT THE SEA OF GALILEE
(John 21: 1, 14)
To-day we are going to hear another story about Jesus, before He went back to heaven.
Seven disciples of Christ were together one evening on the shore of the Sea of Tiberias, Galilee. They were Peter, Thomas, Nath- aniel, James, John and two others.
Peter said to his fellow-apostles, "I go fishing" ; and the others re- plied, "We also go with you."
Without delay they wont into the boat and put off. Night is the best time for fishing, but all that night they caught nothing. Every time they cast the net over the side of the boat and drew it in it was empty. They did not catch a single fish.
When early morning came, dis- appointed and discouraged, they
drew near the land. They saw, in
the faint light of the dawn, a man standing on the shore, He seemed to be waiting for them. He hailed
them and asked: "Children, have
ye any meat?" They answered, "No." It was Jesus who spoke to them. But the disciples knew not that it was He.
He called to them again, say- ing: "Cast the net on the right side of the ship, and ye shall find." They obeyed and in a moment the net was so full of fish they were scarcely able to draw it in.
At once they remembered that other remarkable draught of fishes when Jesus was with them. Then John, whom Jesus loved, whis- pered to Peter, "It is the Lord."
Peter answered nothing, but hastily fastened his fisher's coat around him and sprang into the sea and swam to shore. He wanted to be the first to greet Jesus.
The boat was only a short dis- tance from land. In a few min- utes all the disciples were with their Lord. No one asked "Who art Thou" — because now they all knew it was Jesus.
On the shore they saw a fire of coals, with fish broiling on it, and some bread lying near. Jesus said, "Bring of the fish ye have now caught." Instantly Peter started up, and with his strong arm helped drag the net ashore. When counted, they found that there were a hundred and fifty-three great fishes in it. "And for all there were so many, yet was not the net broken."
Then Jesus said, "Come and dine." He divided and passed the bread and fish to each. We are not told in the Bible that Jesus ate with the disciples at this time.
When the meal was finished. Jesus talked to them. He told them to love one another and help one another.
This was the third time Jesus showed Himself to His disciples,
after that He was risen from flu1 dead."
JESUS LAST MESSAGE AND THE ASCENSION
( Matt. US) Once more .lesus eame to His disciples in Jerusalem. He knew t hat He scon niuM leave t hem. He
730
TE KARERE
Hurae, 1941
told them the same things many times. Once more He said to them, "Go ye into all the world and preach the gospel to every creature? That meant that they were to go everywhere. They were to tell all people about Jesus and what good things He taught. He promised the disciples He would be with them always, even unto the end of the world.
As He talked to them He led them "as far as to Bethany." "Then He lifted up His hands, and blessed them; and while He yet spake, He rose from their midst, and they looked upon Him until a cloud received Him out of sight."
It is not strange that they could not look away from the sky and continued to gaze with the hope that they might have one more glimpse of Him who had so blessed them. While they stood gazing up- ward, two personages clothed in white spoke this glorious promise: "Ye men of Galilee, why stand ye gazing up into heaven? This same Jesus, which is taken up from you into heaven, shall so come in like manner as ye have seen Him go into heaven."
After praying in silence the Apostles returned with great joy to Jerusalem, there to await the coming of the Comforter (ex- plain) which Jesus had promised them. Then they would be ready to do the work He had given them. Conversation After the Story:
Jesus had left them. Why were they happy? What had He pro- mised? (They knew it was true "That He would be with us al- way.") Jesus is near us though we cannot see Him. He loves us and takes care of us. He wants us to be kind and love other peo- ple. What other promise did Jesus give us? Only people who are good will know Him and be ready to meet Him. What can we do in order to be good enough to be with Jesus when He comes again?
SECOND WEEK
Objective:
Help to keep the home safe that it may be a place where all may be happy.
Suggestions for Teaching:
The common dangers in the home can be overcome in a large measure by education. Children should be trained early to guard against accidents. This lesson, if properly prepared and given, should help the children to safe- guard themselves and others against being hurt.
In every home there is much work to do. What happens when everyone in the family works to- gether? We all want happy homes. Isn't it fun to help make them so? Jesus taught us a very beautiful way to work together. He said to love one another, to help one another, and if we do, everyone will be happy.
To-day let us talk about how we can keep from getting hurt in our homes. When someone gets hurt that makes everyone unhappy, doesn't it?
Let us talk a few minutes about these. (Hold up a pair of scis- sors.) What are they for? Do you ever use scissors? What do you cut? It's lots of fun to cut out pictures, isn't it? Who knows how to carry a pair of scissors pro- perly? Show us please, Mary. Why did Mary carry them with the points down? Tell us another good reason. John, please carry the scissors properly and tell us the two good reasons why you carry them so. (Other children may be asked to demonstrate and tell reasons.)
Peggy, please hand the scissors to me. Why did you close them first? Why did Peggy offer me this end (indicate)?
Let other children demonstrate the polite way to pass the scissors, and tell why.
Can you think of another thing that is sharp that should be car- ried with the point down? (De- monstrate handing a knife to an- other.) Why is it polite to offer the handle? Why is it safe?
A few days ago a little girl was washing the knives and forks and cut her finger. This is the safe way to wash and dry a knife. (Teacher demonstrate.) When you help mother set the table, how do
Hurae, 1941
TE KARERE
731
you place the knife by the plate? (Always with the sharp edge to- ward the plate.)
If we break a glass, why should we pick up the pieces immediately? How should we pick them up? What should we do with them? Yes, they should be thrown away but in a safe manner, how-ever, so the man who collects the garbage won't get cut.
Here is a good way to handle glass. Put the pieces in a tin can with paper, and press the lid of the can back in place. The lid of an empty can should always be pressed into place to prevent cuts. (Have articles in class and demon- strate so the children will get a clear idea what you mean.)
Lesson Story:
MARJORIE AND HER FRIENDS
One day as Marjorie was hurry- ing along the street on her way to the grocer's, she tripped and fell over a small hoop she had stepped on.
"My!" she exclaimed, as she got up. "It's a good thing I wasn't on my way home with the eggs mother sent me for."
As she walked along, Marjorie noticed broken milk bottles and jars, and plenty of old tin cans along the fences and on edges of vacant lots. This set her thinking of a plan.
The next day at recess she told her plan to a number of her play- mates. She told them all about her fall and then went on: "Why can't we help to make our town safe and clean? To-morrow is Saturday. What do you all say?"
"Hurrah! Of course we can!" They all said at one time.
One of the boys was made the general and each promised to do his bit.
The next morning at 9 o'clock, about ten boys and girls met at the bridge and set to work.
They picked up the pieces of f'ass and put them in the tin cans and pressed the lids in place. These they put in one big pile,
By noon the task was finished.
"Oh, look!" exclaimed Marjorie.
"There is Bob's father with his truck to haul everything away for us."
It was a fine thing they had done, and it was a happy half-day they all had together.
— Adapted.
Conversation After the Story:
Ask the following and let the children tell you the right answer: The point of the scissors should be held up or down when they are being carried? The blade or the handle of a knife should be offered to a person?
Ask similar questions on other points made in the lesson.
For the Children to do:
Here is a good way to protect the points of scissors or sharp knives. Let the children decorate corks and take them home for mother to use.
THIRD WEEK
Objective:
To help the child to love and enjoy the beautiful in poetry.
Suggestions for Teaching:
"Poetry is music in words." — Fuller.
"He who has tuned his ear to catch the sound of words needs never tie bells on his toes to have music wherever he goes."
Children love poetry. They will listen to the same poem again and again. The poems suggested for this period are for sheer enjoy- ment. They should either be mem- orized by the teacher or read aloud a sufficient number of times to warrant being read well to the class. Introduce each poem. Pic- tures will be useful.
Poetry for children is a special kind of poetry. It is written for them not about them.
Lesson Approach:
Let several children say poems
they have learned at home or in class. Talk with them ahont lovely
stories they know. Sometime
people tell stories in pootry. I A t I hem say some of the nursery
732
TE KARERE
Hurae, 1941
rhymes, and you'll discover that each tells a story. To-day you are going to hear some beautiful poems. If you like them we'll hear them again sometime.
Poems:
THE COMING OF SPRING
There's something in the air That's new and sweet and rare — A scent of summer things, A whirr as if of wings.
There's something, too, that's new In the colour of the blue That's in the morning sky, Before the sun is high.
And though on plain and hill 'Tis winter, winter still, There's something seems to say That winter's had its day.
And all this changing tint, This whispering stir and hint Of bud and bloom and wing, Is the coming of the spring.
— Nora Perry.
THE TOAD The toad is a garden helper With eyes so round and bright. He takes his sleep in the daytime And works for us at night.
— Laura B. Young.
APRIL SHOWERS A little cloudlet in the sky Was lonesome and began to cry, And every place it dropped a tear A flower started up, my dear.
— Mary Rose.
THE SWING
How do you like to go up in a
swing, Up in the air so blue? Oh, I do think it the pleasantest
thing Ever a child can do. Up in the air and over the wall, Till I can see so wide, Rivers and trees and cattle and all Over the country side —
Till I look down on the garden
green, Down on the roof so brown — Up in the air I go flying again, Up in the air and down!
— Robt. Louis Stevenson.
TULIPS
Standing just like soldiers;
In a row, Standing just like soldiers;
So they grow. Holding up their petals
Like a cup, For the summer sun
To fill them up. — James T. Harrity, Jr.
THE DANDELION
I saw a little dandelion With a head of gold, Trying to outshine the sun, That little flower bold. I saw a little dandelion At the close of day, And do you know, that
dandelion's Head had turned grey.
— Mary Rose.
THE CHICKENS
Said the first little chicken
With a queer little squirm: "I wish I could find
A fat little worm.' Said the next little chicken
With an odd little shrug: "I wish I could find
A fat little bug!" Said the third little chicken,
With a small sigh of grief: "I wish I could find
A green little leaf!" Said the fourth little chicken,
With a faint little moan: "I wish I could find
A wee gravel stone!" "Now see here!" said the mother,
From the green garden patch, "If you want any breakfast,
Just come here and scratch."
— Selected.
Hurae, 1941
TE KARERE
733
LADY MOON
Lady Moon, Lady Moon, where are you roving? "Over the sea." Lady Moon, Lady Moon, whom are you loving? "AH that love me."
Are you not tired with rolling, and
never
Resting to sleep? Why look so pale and so sad, as forever
Wishing to weep?
Ask me not this, little child, if you love me You are too bold, I must obey my dear Father above me, And do as I'm told.
Lady Moon, Lady Moon, where are you roving? "Over the sea.' Lady Moon, Lady Moon, whom are you loving? "All who love me."
Conversation:
Which poem should you like me to read again? (Let several child- ren choose, and read the favourite ones again.)
FOURTH WEEK
Objective:
To give the children a happy time and help them to be courte- ous and kind to each other.
Suggestions for Teaching:
During this hour of happy asso- ciations many of the most valuable lessons are incidentally learned. Shyness and self-consciousness are overcome; other qualities such as courage, confidence, co-operation, and fair plav are wholesomely stimulated. — V.P.W.
This period can only accomplish its purpose when the teacher is well prepared with the games and dances to be played and has the hour well planned. Have you ever stopped to think that a noisy play hour may be the result <>f poor preparation and planning? A play leader of long experience says that she has found it helpful t<> have
her programme written on a ca^d and pinned to her dress where she can refer to it.
Suggestive Game:
"Skating Away." (Music, "Here We Go Round the Mulberry Bush."
SKATING AWAY
There were two couples a-skating
away, Skating, a-skating, a-skating away; There were two couples a-skating
away, So early in the morning.
The ice gave away and they all
fell in. They all, they all, they all fell in; The ice gave away and they all
fell in. So early in the morning.
The old swing out and the new
swing in; The old swing out and the new
swing in; The old swing out and the new
swing in; So early in the morning.
Formation. — Players join hands in a single circle. Two couples step into the centre to start the game.
Action. — (1) Couples in the centre form a right-hand star. (The two men join right hands, the girls join right hands above the men and at right angles.) While everyone sings the first verse, they skip to the right. At the same time players in the circle skip counter-clockwise.
(2) Two couples in the centre change to left hands and skip in the opposite direction, and the circle also reverses direction.
(3) Each player in tin- centre selects a new player from the circle. Swinging with both hands twice around in place, they retire
to the circle and the four new ones remain in the Centre for tin- next round. ( On third verse, play- ers in circle stand still and clap.)
Story:
One selected.
734
TE KARERE
Hurae, 1941
Mutual Improvement Association
Cooking for Hui Tau, arranged by Heni Tengaio Adults:
FRUIT CAKE (for Overseas) 1 lb. Butter, 1 lb. Flour, 1 lb. Sugar, 10 Eggs, 2 wineglasses Brandy, Nutmeg, Cloves, Mall and mixed Spice to taste, 2 lbs. Raisins and Currants.
Cream the butter and the sugar, add eggs one at a time, beating well after each egg has been added. Stir in the dry ingredients and lastly add the fruit and brandy. Bake in a moderate oven for five or six hours. This cake will keep for a year.
BANANA CHUTNEY
3 lbs. Apples, 2 lbs. Bananas,
1 lb preserved Ginger, 1 lb Raisins,
2 J pints Vinegar, I oz. Cayenne,
1 lb. Salt, II lbs. Onions, II lbs. Brown Sugar.
Chop up ingredients, put every- thing in pan and boil for 2 hours.
QUINCE CONSERVE
10 large Quinces cut into pieces,
3 quarts of cold water. Boil until it jellies.
Gleaner Girls:
CHOCOLATE AND WALNUT CAKE
4 ozs. light brown Sugar, 3 ozs. Butter, 6 ozs. Flour, 2 Eggs, 2 tea- spoons Cocoa, 8 tablespoons Milk,
2 teaspoons Baking Powder, J cup Walnuts.
Beat sugar and butter to a cream, add eggs one at a time, giv- ing the mixture a good beating, stir in other ingredients and cook in greased tin for half hour.
Icing. — 1 cup Icing Sugar, 2 tea- spoons Cocoa, few drops Vanilla, 1 cup Walnuts.
PRESERVED RHUBARB Boil for 20 minutes a syrup of sugar and water in quantities of 1 cup sugar to 1 cup water. Place rhubarbs in preserving jars and pack tight; put in oven long enough to heat jars thoroughly. When heated, pour in the syrup
after allowing 20 minutes for boil- ing, fill the jars up, screw down at once and stand them on their lids until cold and make sure they are airtight.
BANANA JAM 12 large Bananas, 4 Lemons, 6 Oranges, Sugar. Large, coarse bananas not too ripe should be used, and the little slices should remain whole. Put into rather thin rounds. To each pound of sliced bananas add S lb. of sugar, the strained juice and pulp of the oranges and lemons. Boil slowly for three-quarters of an hour.
Junior Girls:
GOOD SPONGE CAKE 4 Eggs, 1 teacup Sugar, 1 teacup Flour, 1 oz. Butter, 1 teaspoon Baking Powder. Melt butter, beat in with sugar and eggs till light and frothy. Stir in flour and pow- der. Bake in flat dish quickly. Turn out on damp towel or paper with icing sugar sprinkled over it, roll at once. (Can undo roll when cool and spread jam or filling in it, does not crack then.)
YO-YO 3
6 ozs. Flour, 2 ozs. Custard Powder, 2 ozs. Icing Sugar, 1 tea- spoon Baking Powder, i lb Butter. Cream butter and sugar, add other ingredients. Roll into balls and press with a fork, put together with butter icing.
Bee-Hive: GEMS
3 ozs. Butter, 2 ozs. Sugar, i teaspoon Soda dissolved in 5 tablespoons Milk, 1 small cup Flour, 1 teaspoon Cream of Tar- tar, 1 Egg. Cream butter and sugar well, add egg then milk and soda and lastly flour and salt. Bake them in gem irons.
FUDGE 2 cups Sugar, | cup Milk, 1 tablespoon Butter, 1 tablespoon Cocoa. Boil about 10 minutes or until it becomes thick, take off fire and beat well until it is very thick. Pour out into buttered dish.
Hurae, 1941
TE KARERE
735
NEWS FROM THE FIELD
AUCKLAND DISTRICT Reported by Rona V. Attenborough
"Zion is growing; Hurrah! Hurrah! and we don't mean maybe, for the popu- lation of this fair city has been in- creased to the extent of two, during the last week or ten days. First of all, Monday morning, June 2, heralded the birth of a son and heir to Mr. and Mrs. Alex. Wishart of this branch. But wait a minute, not to be otudone by this, Mr. and Mrs. Pat Rei announced the birth of their daughter, on Monday, June 9. Both mothers and children are doing fine, and we tender our congratulations and best wishes to parents of both infants. We also wish to report the fine progress of Miss Kellani Harris. My! my! what a Primary we are going to have — some day.
The enthusiasm with which some folks are working on the Church Welfare Plan leaves almost nothing to be desired. Take the Auckland Branch Intermediate Sunday School class for instance. On Sunday morning after Sunday School, heads get together, pencils speed over the paper, plans are made, and — PRESTO! — on Saturday last, June 7, did we have fun, in the form of a social gathering held at the home of Mr. Reid (father of Bro. Ivan Reid). Folks who did not come missed a whale of a lot of fun Altogether, with donations from some who couldn't make it, we cleared close to £2 — and that's not all, what we are not going to do, but there — the rest of it is still in the bag. But we are going to it, and believe me when I say we like it. We are not the only ones, though Our Brothers and Sisters of the Onehunga Branch have gone to work in a big way — clearing sections, planting crops, etc., and they are all in on it and enjoying it too.
It seems difficult to believe that at some moment of the day a very large smile, and behind it, Bro. Hepa Meha, will not present itself at the door of the Chapel here. Hepa, we miss you, but wherever you are we wish you all that you would wish for yourself, and may you be back very soon. In the mean- time, we are looking after Mabel for you and she is doing fine.
Another <>f the Saints from this Branch will booh be departing for overseas. He is Bro. Ernest Montague (Monty), who has been in Narrow Neck Territ trial Camp since July last year, but who has now been transferred to Papakura Camp. We have not seen very much of Monty becau e of hie duties In the arm: bul
we assure him of our love and be I wishes am! pray I hat he will be pro- tected and returned safely to I ho e h< loves. That is A-a-all !
MANAWATU
Reported by Polly Wi Nm.i
The Districl Prei Idencj hi
made Its presence fell In visit to littl
known places where Saints might be.
Brother and Sister Peneamine Wi Neera visited the Plimmerton members during the past month and report that the Gos- pel is still paramount in their lives.
President George Katene of the Pori- rua Branch has been an inmate of the Wellington Hospital for some weeks, and according to reports should be home with his people very soon. His young daugh- ter, Tiripa, who has for years suffered from poisoning in the right leg from an accident while attending school, is now able to move on crutches. Doctors at one stage in her recovery declared her permanently unable to use her leg; so far we have much to be grateful for, which shows what determination and hard work together with faithful prayers can do.
In total disregard for Wellington usual weather, the Victory Queen Carnival ter- minated its drive to attain its quota, £100,000, had a wonderful day to show- off the impressive and entertaining pro- cession as the "grand opening" on Febru- ary 28th. Of special interest was the participation of the Ngati-Poneke Maori Club. This group aboard a 5 -ton lorry appropriately bedecked with traditional regalia of ponga, fern, etc., presented a grand spectacle embodying the age-old traditions of courage, grace, beauty and honour that so many of our "boys" are giving their lives for in a foreign land. We are endeavouring to keep the faith with our "boys."
To the Victory Queen Carnival we say "thank you!" Thank you for the moral urge not to falter, but to stand strong and true, remain steadfast and help to give England the "tools to finish the
MAHIA DISTRICT Reported by Elsie Loader
District officials report attendance at all church meetings for the past months since Hui Tau very good. Officers of organizations are diligently attending to their duties. Of particular notice is the Nuhaka Branch Sunday School which has increased its attendance to 80 per cent. of total branch membership, which is in- deed a very high percentage when we learn that there are over -100 people in the branch.
The local missionaries report part in very fine meetings wherever they
have visited. Taka Toroaiwhit i was hon- ourably released from his positions in the M.I. A. and Sunday School of Nuhaka as a result of consenting to go on ■ '•year" mi [on His final field of labour is Indefinite at present but hopes to be able to labour in N gapuh I \ e> enini in in honour was attended i>y the Nuhaka Saints, where appropriate pre- sentations were made by the Ml. A. and
Branch Mr and Mr I' Nathan of
Kopuav hara1 R m, "Bill," at
pre tent I rainii over<
■ i s new com ert • t he Church
Appointment
t< acher In I h< ■ hool . Hem j
« in. ty, Mu Ben lamin r.M.M.I.A
i i k \ri:ki.
Hurae, l'Ml
taira. tad Cuius, Uor : Rai
tar in Y \\ M 1 A . Mi!. tary ; Kanvi I
in Relief Society. Hen] I honourably released from I
\-hl.y
.'. alana, Ropiha I
bell and Reginald Thompson vi- llained .!•
POVERTY BAY DISTRICT Reported by Kangahina Matenga and
Phil Aspinall April ISth, 1941, marked anothei in the journey through life for Hinei- triwai after ■ prolonged ill' I which time
she spent in hospitals, covering approxi- mately t\V(> |
Whakahe Matenga of the District Superintendence of Sunday Schools in
i- now at the Waipukurau Sanatorium, alter spending a fev. in the Cook Hospital. Gisborne, Buffering from pleurisy. We wish him well and
pray that he will soon return to his family well and able to brink' joy and happily about him The only
two Sunday Schooll f<>r the district of
•o report ar. Tol Hay and Kahui. What's wrong with the others 7
WAIKATO DISTRICT Reported by Doug Whatu and Dave Ormsby Refreshed and very much on the go ar.- the affairs of the district wit!
dent Henri Marshall superintending. A lull !'.'• :.■.' was held at the
home of Sister Whatu, April 20th, die-
fOr till- p IO- NS oik of the district. B way. we sincerely hope Hr<>. Tom Reti ia -till strong in the faith boa roml Kia l.aha.
The I'uketapu Branch announ* •
appointment ol
of th. i: ; Vipiki
Wilson, A
• Uora and Secretary, and I'irihira Himiona Treasurer.
Norman Sc-.tt. brother to E. \ I formerly of th< Branch,
and now resident in Huntly, ia no the for • H
• on December 1940, was or. lamed a Priest by Pn
i ! '
the Sunday Schools of Wairoa and Tau-
whare ai ted for in the km>w-
rving his com
April 16th, ing of Hemi
from dropsy. May 10th beloved
ter of Brothei \hikaka Puru,
her parents at Cambridge.
HAURAKI DISTRICT
Reported by Joe Kohu znd
William Ormsby
M.,..'n complimentary comment and publicit] i by the Judes Pla-
I men commandfd by
Chsrlii platoon commander
and .lames K.diu as Sergeant, in their
adjudged the most advanced group la the B Plent]
The M.I. A. act i\ it ies n
appropriately terminated, which Included
. Ing t.. Ruth Tawa and Sella
Tawa m th.- v w mi a and to Ronnie
Tarawa and Dialtoa Tawa la th. ,> M
Ml \ for besl attendance. Th.- ehoir
doit bit hen ■ ■: there.
and was prominent in a farewell to troops
leaving for overseas where Mr. Doidgct
Ml'., accorded the choir much to be proud of. David and I»
■ tertained by t he m i |
Well before lea\llu' for oversea- oil the
evening of June 6th, 1041, where the
hall was pa.k.d t,> ,-.
The Church Welfare Plan r. c.ntl.. in- augurated in this V;
much activity smong our people. Bro. Hohepa Wharekura
SldenCJ recently visited
this matter, and we are pleased to an- nounce t hat much i Here
is also an early word for
that we ar.- hoping ' ' Ime in
September; plan- ar.- already under way for the event, which • coin-
cide with our Cold and Green Hall.
Mother's Day. at 8.80 a.m.. Eileen Ormsby. daughter of brother and i). c. Ormsbj of Te
Tuna, passed away.
In her leaving
all feel her lo
pel our vri. :
• 1 by the joy Jgj
that should I" ■
Eileen was called or,
m th<
Hauraki district in
t ransferred Poveri trict. Brant h
will mi
much a
I tost faithful I
-iv. and inspire- — M ^ ,
E.leen Ormsby
conducted by William Ore
May 12th. Internment was at the -day Saint c- •■ :<ra.
HAWKE'S BAY DISTRICT By Dan Williams April 2nd, 1 '.» II . marked
the body of Meafou Pinal Tupuivi
•.. it • last rest in • place in t he
1 net ery after
h. Id i' direction of
: nf. ar. ..f t be Heretaungs B Presidency, and th.- meeting at the Koro-
■ ..f th.' Heretauni Southon. M.afou is survived '
Wife and three children, two of wh [<
l>einu ordained b Bringhurst, Septemb. i
Chronology of|Church History
December 23 — Joseph Smith, Jr., was born in Sharon, Windsor County, Vermont, U.S.A.
1820
Early in the Spring of this year he had his first vision. Two glorious personages appeared to him. One called him by name, and, pointing to the other, said, "This is My beloved Son, hear Him."
1823
September 21 — The Angel Moroni appeared to Joseph Smith, Jr., and made known to him the existence of certain metal plates containing an ancient record.
September 22 — Joseph Smith, Jr., first visited the spot on the hill Cumorah, where the plates were buried, and obtained a view of them.
1824
September 22 — Joseph Smith, Jr., again visited the hill Cumorah and saw the plates. This visit was re- peated on the same day of the year, for two sub- sequent years.
1827
January 18 — Joseph Smith, Jr., married Emma Hale.
September 22 — The heavenly messenger, Moroni, delivered to Joseph Smith, Jr., the plates of the Book of Mor- mon, and Urim and Thummim with which to trans- late them.
December — Owing to persecution, Joseph Smith, )v.. re- moved from New York State to Harmony, Penn- sylvania. During this and the following month, he translated some of the characters of the Hook of Mormon.
H^^S^^Hs^^
7
Are We Supporting
TE KARERE
^^^^"^£^\^^S^£^^^^^^^\^^fS^£^
Te Karere
Established in 1907 W
Wahanga 35 Akuhata, 1941 Nama 8 %
Matthew Cowley Tumuaki Mihana
Kelly Harris Etita
Eru T. Kupa Kaiwhakamaori
Waimate Anaru Kaiwhakamaori
"Ko tenei Pepa i whakatapua hex hapai ake i te iwi Maori ki roto i nga ivhakaaro-nui.'
"Te Karere" is published monthly by the New Zealand Mission of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, and is printed by TE KARERE PRESS, No. 2 Scotia Place, Upper Queen Street, Auckland, C.l, N.Z. Subscription Rates: 3/- per six months; 5/- per year; £1 for five years; £2/10/- for life. (United States Cur- rency: $1.00 per year; $4.00 for five years; $10.00 for life.)
Address Correspondence, Box 72, Auckland, C.l, New Zealand.
CONTENTS
I Editorial — Page j They Twain 744
| Special Features —
Welfare Plan Covers
The 1 1 1th Annual Conference 746
United Order in Ohio 748
Latter-day Saint Singing, by William Brosnan 751
Hi Mihana Ta Tatou, na Pte. Ringa B. Herewini 756
Hui Pariha i Tu Ki Manaia — Taranaki, na Tenia P. Kewene .... 7S7
Church Features —
Sunday School 752
( renealogy 7S{)
Kai-Kauwhau Mo Pei Whairangi 760
M.I. A. Sewing 760
News from the Field 761
744
II K VRERE
Akuhata, 1"41
Editorial . . .
I I) RoMNE\
THEY TWAIN
"'I want 1" go far, tar awa\
Int" a distant land. But darkest night would be each day
I fnless 1 held \ > >nr hand.
I want t<> sci- a people new, Some unknown race my choice,
But I should wish my journey through Unless I heard your voice.
I want adventuring I
Bold deeds I'd like- to do.
But deep within my heart I know I'd rather stay with you."
Sister O. I). Romney passed away on June 13th. President Romney, not to be deprived of the companionship which had inspired him for more than ?7 years, joined her only three days later. As in life so in death "they twain shall be one" Marriage did not terminate the courtship of these two, and down through the years their companionship intensified their love, and every experience was punctuated with romance. When the end came the devotion of the woman and the constancy of the man had so welded their souls that then- two hearts could not heat except as one
President and Sister Romne) were devoted, not only to each other, but also to then- family, their friends and their Church. All other interests were secondary to these institutions. President Romney applied himself to the utmost to lie business interests, which were many, hut never did he hesitate to s{-t aide all his personal affairs when the Church calico! for his services. In V>\\ he was called to
New Zealand Mission. He brought him his wife and family and all served as missionaries until 1914. It was during the incumb 'residenl Romne)
that the M.A.C. was built at Korongata. It was typical of
Akuhata, 1941
TE KARERE
745
Sister E. P. Romney
the Romney life and character that in the construction of the buildings of this institution only the best and most durable materials were used.
President and Sister Romney loved | the New Zealand Mission. In the years which have passed since their return home their interest in the Mis- sion never diminished. To the New Zealanders who have emigrated to America, they were always considerate friends.
Their mission to New Zealand was the beginning, if not the continuation, of a series of "honeymoons" which they enjoyed together at regular intervals down through the years, and which have now been carried over into eternity. They loved the adven- ture and romance of travel and together they saw the world. To them the business of living was even more important than the complete consecration of one' life to business.
In their posterity they found that happiness which passeth all understanding. They were proud ; justifiably proud, of the twenty-two children and grandchildren born to them. The children and several of the grandchildren have served as missionaries in various parts of the world, and never were President and Sister Romney so proud as when one or more of their children or grandchildren were serving the Church in a missionary capacity.
The Romney name is indissolubly connected with the New Zealand Mission. To the members of the Family who survive their noble parents and grandparents — 1 'resident and Sister Orson D. Romney — the New Zealand Mission extends "Aroha Nui" in their bereavement.
Mai i hi w l n\\ ii \.
1 I. KARERE
Akuluta. 1(>41
The 111th Annual Conference
Each Genera] Conference of the Church is alike in many ts and different in some respects from all others. Therefore, it we can point out the differences we shall largely have described the characteristics of the whole for those members of the Church who arc familiar with tin- general proceedings. Some of the dis- tinguishing features of tin- 111th Annual Conference, held in Sal; Lake City, April 4, 5. and 6, 1941, stand out clearly to all who witnessed these im- pressive c\ ents.
First, the return of President Grant to active conference participation, with
hi> unforgettable testimony at the open-
— ion. gave the whole conference
a deeply impressive character. This was
followed by his vigorous declaration at
the General Priesthood meeting Saturday evening, April 5. in the Tabernacle, and his closing statement of equal vigour and
conviction at the final session, Sunday afternoon. April 6.
Another high point of interest .'it the conference was the appointment of Elder Harold B. Lee, Managing Director of the Church Welfare Plan, to fill the vacancy in the Quorum of the Twelve Apostle- caused by the death of Elder Reed Smoot.
Five other appointments of newly-created designation came wholly as a surprise to the Church, when, on Sunday morning, dur- ing the sustaining of the general authorities, and general officers of the Church. President Clark announced:
In the past history of tin- Church, especially in President Brig- ham Y"oung's time, it was found necessary for the First Presidency or the Twelve, or both, to call brethren, frequently designated as counsellors, to help carry on their assigned work in the Church.
The rapid growth of the Church in recent times, the constantly
increasing establishment of new wards and -takes, the ever-widening
phical area covered by wards and stakes, the steadily pressing
ty for increasing our missions in numbers and efficiency that
the Gospel may he brought to all men. the continual multiplying of
Church interests and activities calling for more rigid and frequent
ation, supervision, and direction, .all have built up an apostolic
service of the greatest magnitude.
The First Presidency and Twelve feel that to meet adequately their great responsibilities and to carry on efficiently this service for the Lord, they should have some help.
I beb J. Grant
Akuhata, 1941 TE KARERE 747
Accordingly it has been decided to appoint assistants to the Twelve, who shall be High Priests, who shall be set apart to act under the direction of the Twelve in the performance of such work as the First Presidency and the Twelve may place upon them.
There will be no fixed number of these assistants. Their num- ber will be increased or otherwise from time to time as the necessity of carrying on the Lord's work seems to dictate to be wise.
It is proposed that we sustain as assistants to the Twelve, the following named High Priests, who will labour under the supervision and direction of the First Presidency and of the Twelve:
Marion G. Romney, president of Bonneville Stake.
Thomas E. McKay, former president of Ogden Stake and act- ing president of the European Mission.
Clifford E. Young, president of the Alpine Stake.
Alma Sonne, president of Cache Stake.
Nicholas G. Smith, president of North-western States Mission.
— Improvement Era.
MISSION SECRETARY TO RETURN HOME
Brother George Watene, a former member of the Mission Sunday School Superintendency and Counsellor and Secretary in the Hauraki District Presidency was called by President Cowley to assist in the Mission Office after the Elders left, at end of October, 1940. In his work as Mission Secretary, Brother Watene has done much to en- able the Mission to carry on under exceptional circumstances. His release from this responsible position becomes effective July 31, 1941.
The father of a young family having lost their mother, Sister Watene, September 21, 1940, Brother Watene's presence and companionship is sorely needed with his loved ones, especially dur- ing the winter months, the time when the dairy farmer's ability to successfully surmount difficul- ties of the season and period is known. George Watene
"Te Karere" and the Mission generally sin- cerely wish Brother Watene and his brave little family the choicest blessings of the Lord.
BOUND VOLUME OF " TE KARERE," 1940
A limited number of bound volumes of the L940 issue of j Te Karere is now available. Place your orders as soon as pos- sible with Te Karere, Box 72, Auckland. Price 8
II KARERE
Akuhata, I •Ml
United Order in Ohio
• R< ad Sections 51, 5 I )
1. The Situation: It will Ik- recalled that the Saint- in New
York State moved t<» Ohio in the spring of 1881, in three different companies. "On our arrival it wa> advised that the ColesvilU Branch remain together, ami go to a neighbouring town called Thou.;. a man by the name of Copely bad a considerable tract of land there.
which he offered to let the Saint- occupy. Consequently a i d upon, and we commenced work in good faith."
This was said of the Colesville Branch, hut it was true also of the other two groups that came from New York. Only, it was not S3
dvised that they remain together. In the counsel given to the
Colesville eompany of aboul sixty persons there was not a lit''.
ment. on the part of the Prophet as well as of the Saints.
people, in addition t<> being among the first convert! to the Church,
had rendered Joseph Smith some help in the year- before. This was true especially of the Knight family. Thompson was a township rather than a town.
"The Saints from the State of New York began to come," says the Prophet in his
tory," "and it seemed necessary to settle them. Therefore, at the solicitation of Bishop Part- ridge, I inquired, and received the following" revelation. Then follows Bection 51.
Edward Partridge, a- we may r< call, had just been appointed Presiding Bishop of the
Church. Ordinarily the settlement of the-" oncoming Saints would not have proved diffi- cult, hut they had been promised that, when they gathered to the new home, they would be given the Law of the Church at that place. "There I will give unto you my Law. and you shall he endowed with
power from on high." This was the beginning of the gathering in this dispensation. 11 is not difficult to imagine the feelings
York Saints under these circumstances. The mysterious refer* course, was to the Law of Consecration, later to be amplified.
2. Plurality in Unity: Two essential errors are made l»y mankind.
One is that there is a section called "Time" and another section called
• :ty." The truth is that we are living in eternity now. Another
error is the division into the "Material" and the "Spiritual." In the
Df God "all things are spiritual." He gives no commandments to
us for time merely. One's attitude toward the law- of God would
. different from what it now is if one applied this idea in daily
affairs. "It wad frae mony a blunder free 08, an' foolish notion."
In at least three dispensations the Lord has revealed this Law of the Gospel to His people. This is probably because it is generally the "material" that generates most of man's selfish acts in our world.
This Law was given to Enoch, the seventh from Adam. It was in effect among his people in the City of Enoch for 365 years, at the end of which period the Lord took the City, before the Flood. "They were of one heart, we are told, and one mind, and dwelt in righteous- ness; and there was no poor among them." Thus we have what has been called "the Order of Enoch" or the "United Order."
The ancient Nephites, too, had this Law of Consecration. It was in effect among them for about one hundred and fifty years. "The
Auckland Aaronic Priesthood
under the leadership of Harold \nd Winiata Smiler provided an <\r- cellent concert enter' tainment in //•■ la ml Chapel, Tuesday, July s. 1941, which Hsiastically re- ceived, in nds in aid of Chapel alterations to benefit Welfare flan.
Akuhata, 1941 TE KARERE 749
people were converted unto the Lord, upon all the face of the land, both Nephites and Lamanites, and there were no contentions and dis- putations among them, and every man did deal justly one with another. And they had all things common among them; therefore there were not rich and poor, bond and free, but they were all made free, and partakers of the heavenly gift."
In the Christian dispensation, across the sea in Palestine, the Law of Consecration was put into practice among the Saints. "They con- tinued steadfastly in the Apostles' doctrine and fellowship. . . . And all that believed were together, and had all things common; and they sold their possessions and goods, and parted them to all men, as every man had need."
It was this Law of the Gospel, this Law of Consecration, the Order of Enoch, or United Order that was revealed as a "privilege" to the Colesville Branch at Thompson.
3. Principles of This Order: The Law of Consecration operated accordingly to some very definite ideas, which are given in the Releva- tion (section 51). They are as follows:
(a) Each head of a family in this group of Saints at Thompson was required to deed over to the Presiding Bishop, as the representative of the Church or community, all his property. A deed made the trans- fer legal, so that in case of dispute there could not be a law suit by either party.
(b) After this deed had been executed, the Bishop then, as the agent of the community, deeded back to the head of the family such goods and implements of production as were deemed necessary in order to carry on the process of making a living. It might be less than he had turned in or it might be more than that. This deed, too, made the transaction legal.
(c) In case of rebellion against the Order or of transgression against the Church or community, if it were such as required expulsion or withdrawal from the Order, the head of a family might properly take with him out of the group whatever had been deeded to him, but not anything else, even if he had originally deeded to the Order more than that.
(d) If, during any particular year, any member of the Order earned more than he needed to keep himself and his dependents, he turned everything in excess of this amount to the agent, who kept it in the Storehouse, erected for this purpose. This was, if necessary, dispersed for the benefit of the Order. The agent drew on this for his services, since he devoted all his time to the community.
(e) The underlying principle of the assignment to each head of a family was the principle of "need." For instance, a man with a large family would necessarily require more for his living than a man with a small family. And then, too, assignments would differ with the busi- ness of each man in the Order. A storekeeper would need more capital than one who taught school.
4. Motivating Force in the Order: More than one attempt has been made in the history of the world to establish an "ideal order, and many books have been written on the subject. It is not possible here to even outline such "utopias." One thing, however, may be said about them: Other than those endeavours mentioned above, they have all lacked the essential element of success — religion.
When it comes to what we call material things, selfishness becomes very prominent. This selfishness (perhaps we should say Belf -inter est), is due to the nature of a social order based on Individualism. People must live. Not only must they live now, hut they must live when they get to the non-productive ago ami when they arc Incapacitated for
• from . lucklam I
vhiie visiting
Saints in the Island. They left Auckland on Thursday evening, loth July, by tin- Limited. A little over three months ago saw them there the first time si nee the leaving of the
IT. KARERI Akuhata, 1941
work. This requires thai they earn more than if they did not has.- to provide against sickness and <>l<l age. Probably if sickness and old age were taken care of, selfishness, or self-interest, would not be so mani- The United Order takes care of these contingencies. Bin elf-
interest, is not the ideal condition. What element can be introduced into human life to
modify or eliminate this element of
The answer is, Love, and Love only — love
Of one another and love of God. The reply Of Jesus to the lawyer still hold.-. "Thou Shalt love the I.ord thy Cod with all thy heart, and with all thy soul, and with all thy strength, and with all thy mind; and thy neighbour as thyself."
was at the core of the Restored Goa-
Del, a.- He was of tin- Gospel in the Christian
dispensation. The Colesville Branch had al- ready made two kinds of sacrifice in order to
gather with the Saints in Ohio. First, they had Bold their property in their home town at much less than it was worth. Newel Knight tells us this. And then, second, they suffered the ill will of their fellow-townsmen <>n account of their having joined
the New Movement. "Having made the best arrangements we could
for our journey." says Knight, "we bade adieu to all we held dear on
this earth." They, with others, did this because of religion, and they
red the United Order from tlie same motive.
Love, after hunger, is the strongest motive in mom Not only is
this true of the love of a man and a woman for each other and the parents and children for one another, hut it is true also of the love of men and women for God. Indeed, the love of C
been known to over-ride all other loves. But the Gospel requin
we love our neighbour as ourself. (Not more, mark, hut only as much.)
5. Breaking Up of the Order: While the Colesville Branch had
been told t<» establish the Order as a "privflei . of its mem-
bers, notably Leman Copely and Ezra Thayre, did not regard it as
such. According to section 54, tin- "covenant" was broken. Confusion followed. Newel Knight called on the Prophet, who was in Kirtland. .hat should he done. A revelation explained the situation, in which Knight was told what to do.
t, he was assured that the revelation was from Je
rd, Alpha and Omega, Him who was crucified for the sins of the world.
Dnd, Newel was informed that he should "stand fast in the
office" to which he had been appointed. He was the leader of the
Colesville Branch, who looked to him for guidance under the Presiding
hp.
Third, he was instructed to take the Colesville Saints and "flee to
Missouri, lest your enemies come upon you." A statement had been
made to the Ohio Saints, through the Prophet, that "Zi«.n" was in Mis- souri. "We now undei Newel Knight, "that this (Ohio) Ol the land of our inheritance, hut that Missouri was the place chosen for the gathering (d* the Church, and several were called to lead the way to that Sti
ordingly, soon after the June Conference of the Church, the Thompson group, under the leadership of Newel Knight, went to Jackson county.
Akuhata,1941 TE KARERE 751
Latter-day Saint Singing
By William Brosnan
"For the song of the righteous is a prayer unto vie . . ." (D. & C.)
The Latter-day Saints of to-day have inherited a wealth of beauti- ful and inspiring hymns. Most of us know that many of these were composed under unusual and stirring conditions. Some tell the tale of outstanding incidents in the early history of the Church. Others disclose the deep and grateful feelings of a reverent people to the God they worshipped.
Do these same deep sentiments exist in our song worship of to-day?
Are the attributes of truly sincere gratitude, praise and reverence still manifest when we unite in song?
When we consider our singing in the perspective of what it should be, we must confess that we have vast room for improvement. Do you think that Latter-day Saints are fully aware of the peculiar oppor- tunities existing, to really unite as one in heartfelt worship, set to music? Or is it that a great many merely regard the singing of hymns as a convenient "fill-in"? Perhaps we are all prone to become too mechanical. It's a pity, because we lose half the blessings that might be ours.
How many of us really look at the words — do we see them just as words, or as thoughts and ideas? Are our Sacramental songs sung with a delicate refinement of softness and reverence? Do we sing our joyful hymns of praise and worship with vigour and abandon? Or is all our singing bellowed in exactly the same strain. Does cor- rect tempo mean anything to us, or do we weary ourselves and our listeners, too, with the same monotonous drag?
Choristers and organists, the responsibility rests with you. The right shade of expression, the exact time, the exact degree of volume — are the ingredients of good music which must be portioned out by you.
Before a new hymn is brought before a congregation, it should be painstakingly studied at home. Try a hymn different ways. Be critical — don't be afraid to experiment and you will notice improve- ment in no time. Another thing, be tactful in conducting song exercise. NEVER correct an audience outside the allotted practice period — many visitors may be in the audience. It is essential to have not only the attention of the congregation, but also the goodwill. Congregations please try and co-operate with your choristor or organist. Nothing- is so discouraging as the indifference and lack of support on your part. Even if you're not quite in the mood to burst into song, please try lor the benefit of the others. Indifference is contagious. So is enthusiasm.
Another thing: Do you have to keep repeating the same songs every Sunday?
Leaders of meetings, you can have too much of a good thing. This applies to some of our most popular hymns. Many intelligent and otherwise willing singers are bored before they start, mainly because they have the same old musical dish served up so often.
Within the covers of our song hooks are wonderful hymns and Stirring music. Exploit what's Wet ween the covers. That's what they are there for.
I I K UlERE Alrahata, 1541
SUNDAY SCHOOL
Theme —
"OUR HOMES AND CHAPELS SH U I BE BEAU! 11
"For Zion must increase in beauty ami in Holiness; her borders must he enlarged; her stakes must be strengthened} yea verily I say
you. /ion must arise ami put on her beautiful garments"
I I )... trine 8 Covenants 82 : 14.)
SACRAMENT GEM I [elp us, ( > ( Sod, to realize
The great atoning sacrifice : The gift of Thy Belo> ed Son,
The Prince of I ,ife, the I [oly ( »nr
CONCERT RECITATION
Romans 12: 21 .
"Be ii"i overcome of evil, but overcome evil with good."
KORERO A NGAKAU Roma 12: 21.
hinga 1n,;c i te kino, engari kia hinga te Kino i tou pai."
HYMNS FOR PRACTICE
• Hoa, Arahina Wharai
• •. song that has never been sung in your branch
SUNDAY SCHOOLS — LESSON WORK. ETC.
Will all SuikI Superintem ■•• the following
instructions regarding REPORTS and Classwork.
ALL REPORTS are the direct responsibility of the Superintend- ency of the Branch, Branch Presidency and District Superintendence; by this h Superintendences mu i reports out
on time. Branch Presidencies Ml'ST ••<■ that their Superintendences attend to these reports on time. District Superintendencies have the same responsibility as the Branch Presidencies for all the Schools within the district. When these people fail, then the condemnation belongs to the District Priesthood Presidencies — it is their duty to
iel plan is adhered to.
H< re are the reports to hand for 1941: — First Quarter: Auckland, para, Wairoa Hauraki, Whangaruru, Kaikohe, Peterehema, Mata- anui. Second Quarter: Auckland, Horotiu, Te Hapara, Whangara, Te Karaka, Ohalri, Tautoro, Opoutama, Tokomam Bay, Rahui, Te Hauke, Whangaruru, Whatawhata, Matakowhai, Waipawa, Wanganui, Taumarnnui, Maromaku, Awarua. Whangarei, Waikare, Takahiwai, Wairoa, Hauraki.
Akuhata, 1941
TE KARERE
753
1829
May 15, Joseph Smith, Jr., and Oliver Cowdrey lucre ordained to the Aaronic Priesthood by John the Baptist. They also baptized each other.
In the latter part of this month or in the following month of June they were ordained to the Melchisc- dek Priesthood by Peter, James and John. In this month (June) a revela- tion was given to Joseph Smith, Jr., making knozvn the calling of the Twelve Apostles in these last days.
Six-Penny Funds Received. — 1941 period ending May: Te Hauke, Wm. Ed- wards and family, Taumarunui, Maketu, Waipawa, Matakowhai, Whatawhata, Toko- maru Bay, Rahui, Te Hapara, Ohaki, Auck- land, Maromaku, Kaikou, Tautoro, Opahi, Whananaki, Ruatangata, Tamaki H.B. Under instructions from the new Super- intendent of Mission Sunday Schools, Superintendents will please follow as closely as possible the following: — Your Statistical Report Form begins with numerals 1, 2, and so on to 22. Where a School has a Maori Class, put 12A, below 12, and insert Maori Class; don't change any of the other numbers or names. Where you are combining some of the classes don't put the number according to age in their proper classes, put them all together to correspond with classes bracketed; for in- stance, you have three children Kindergar- ten age and four Primary, if you want to combine them, bracket Kinder- garten and Primary and put your total of seven to correspond with the name you want for your class, either Primary or Kindergarten, and so on. The suggested age grouping for the Mission Sunday Schools will be : Cradle Roll — Time of blessing until 3. Kindergarten — 4 and 5. Prim- ary— 6 to 9. Church History — 10 to 11. A Department — 12 to 15.
B Department 16 to 19. C Department 20 to 25. Gospel Doctrine
All others not assigned. Maori Class — Maori members not already assigned. REMEMBER: Arrange your classes for the best of your School, endeavouring as much as possible to follow the outlined lessons, and most IMPORTANT in your reports fill in the number of your actual classes and not just to fill in every item on the report form.
At the top of the report forms under "Instructions" you are in- structed to fill in TWO forms, one for the District and one for your- self. The Instruction is out, and is here again for all to see — "Fill out reports in triplicate (three copies), one to be sent immediately to the Secretary Mission Sunday Schools, Box 72, Auckland, C.l, one to your District Superintendency, and the other for your own and Branch Presidency use.
The Third Quarterly Reports are due at the end of this month — AUGUST. Let's have every Sunday School in the Mission report be- fore 20th September, 1941. Here's a job for the District President, District Superintendent, and Branch President and Superintendent to see that each of you will be held blameless. You have all been letting someone else do your work for you. As far as Sunday School records are concerned, each of you has a definite responsibility — don't SHIRK it as in the past.
LESSONS
KINDERGARTEN. (Arrange your material given here to cover the month.) Thoughts for teachers: "Unselfishness, Loving and Giving."
"The Birth of Christ." (Luke 1, 2; Matt. 1.)
"Visit of the Shepherds." (Luke 2.)
"Visit of the Wise Men." (Luke 2.)
"Flight into Egypt." (Matt. 2.)
754 IK KARERE Akuhata, 1941
PRIMARY. (Arrange your l< iver the whole month.)
"Our First Parents." (Gen. 2. j MOM! 1.1
Thought: "Penalty follows the breaking of God'i law-."
"Offerings Unto the Lord." (Gen. 4j Moses 5.)
Thought: "The Lord permits us to prove our love for Bina through sacrifice."
"Biggest Rain Storm in the World." (Gen. 7. g,
Thought: "The Lord fulfils His promises alike to the good and to the evil."
CHURCH BISTORT— "Book of Mormon."
A and B DEPARTMENTS. (Arrange lessons to cover wh.de month.)
"The Man Who Walked With God." (Gen. Bj II. h. 1 1 j .hide 1 | 1.,.
Problems: How do von account for Enoch's companionship with God 00 years? What do you understand hy Enoch's translation as
related in Heb. 11:5. Who will come with the Lord according to
Enoch's prophecy?
"The Faithful Teacher." (Cen. .",, C, 7, 8, 9, Pi Mem<: What WSJ
the result of Noah's preaching? Distinguish between expr. of God" and "Sons of Men"? What was God's promise to Noah? Con- trast the curse upon Ham through Canaan with the blessing Shem and Japheth? How might Noah be referred to as the Becond Adam?
c DEPARTMENT. (Arrange lessons to cover whole month.)
"John the Baptist as a Witness at Bethabara. ' (John 1 ; D. & C. 27.) Problems: Why did the Jews who visited John ask if he was Elias (Elijah)?
"Beginnings of the Manifestations of Power through Jesus Christ."
(John 2. > Problems: Name the men who accepted the man Jesus as the promised Messiah, How did our Saviour know Nfathanael before
they met? Explain why Christ refer- to Himself as "Son of Man." GOSPEL DOCTRINE. (Arrange lessons to rover whole month.)
"Wars of Ahab and Ben-Hadad" (B.C. 901). (1 Kinus. 20.)
"The Close of Ahab's Reign." (1 Kings, 21. 22; 2 Chr.m. 1-.) "Wars of Jehoshaphat." (2 Kings, 1. 2; 2 Clinm. 19, 20.)
.MAORI CLASS—
RATAPU TUATAHI
MO TE HARA. Totahi at u aim o nga poropitl Xiwhai i ana korero mo te hunga kua mate i mea: "Kia kokoti ai ratou i 0 ratou utu e rite ana ki a ratou mahi ahakoa pai ahakoa ranei kino, kia kokoti ai i te hari man tonu, i te pouri mau tonu ranei. e rite ana id wairua i whakarongo ai ratou. ahakoa wairua pai. wairua kino ranei."
A Hamuera he Ramana i huri ki te whakapono, i tau hoki ki runga
kia ia to wairua 0 Dga poropitl i whakatupato i .ma hoa i te ahua e whai ake nci: "Tena mahara, mahara e aku teina ko te tangata 6 mate ana. 6 mate ko ia ake; ko te tangata e mahi he ana e m.-atia ana kia ia aim, ta to mea hoki e watea ana koutou o tukua ana kia koutou te tikanga mo te mahi mo koutou ake; ina hoki kua hoatu e te Atua kia koutou he matauranga a Nana ano koutou i mea hei herekore.
Nga Patai:
1. Pehea te korero a tetahi poropiti o nga Xiwhai mo nga mano mano kua mate?
_'. He aha te mea nui i homai e te Atua ki te tangata?
Akuhata, 1941 TE KARERE 755
RATAPU TUARUA
MO RUTIPA ME TE HEREKORETANGA. I te wa e wananga ana i te rangi mo nga tauira hanga i te whenua whakanohonoho tangata hoki ki runga i whai a Rutipa ki te raupatu i te herekoretanga a te tangata, ma roto atu i te whiwhi mana ki te aki i nga uri tangata kia whakarite i tana i pai ai, me te oati atu ki te Matua ma taua ahua ka ahei ia ki te hoko mai i nga tangata katoa, e kore rawa hoki tetahi e ngaro. Ko tenei whakaaturanga kahore i paingia, a ko ta te Matua i whakaaro tuatahi ai — "ma runga i te tauira o te ata tono atu me nga whakahaere tika me te manawanui ki te pehi i nga whaka- aro taikoha o nga hunga o te whenua me te waiho atu ia ratou i runga i te herekore ki te whiriwhiri i ta ratou ake" — i whakaaetia tenei e te ropu e wananga ana, a ko Ia e huaina nei ko te Tama Kotahi i Whiri- whiriia ko Ia te tino mea hei raroto atu e tutuki ai te whakaaetanga.
Nga Patai:
1. Ko wai a Rutipa?
2. He aha te mahi a te runanga i huihui ki te rangi?
3. Na wai te tauira i whakaaetia hei mahi?
4. Ko wai i whiriwhiriia hei whakatutuki i te tauira pai nei?
RATAPU TUATORU
TA TE TANGATA WHAKAUTU. Te whakautu ki te tangata mo ana ake mahi e rite pu ana ki tona herekoretanga, kei aia ano te whakaaro mo ona ake. Te tino tutukitanga o nga mahi pai he hari, te tukunga iho o nga mea kino he pouritanga; ko enei mea e aru ana i nga tangata katoa i roto i to ratou oranga he mea na nga ture kahore nei e taea te whakatuapeka. Tera he tauira o te whakataunga kua oti noa atu te whakatakoto e te Atua, e karangatia ai tena me tena tangata ki te whakautu mo ana mahi, e hara hoki mo nga mahi anake engari mo ana kupu ano a tae atu ki nga whakaaro o tona ngakau. "Na, ko Taku kupu tenei kia koutou, me korero e nga tangata, i te ra whakawa te tikanga o nga kupu pokanoa katoa e puaki ia ratou. Ko a te Ariki ake kupu enei: "Kaua hoki e whakaaro a he kino i roto io koutou ngakau ki tona hoa ki tona hoa, kaua ano e arohaina te oati teka, no te mea e kinongia ana enei mea katoa e Ahau, e ai ta Ihowa." A Hoani Whakakitenga i whakawhiwhia kia ako i roto kitenga i etahi o nga mea e kitea ana ka pa i te ra whakamutunga, i tuhia e ia "I kite ano ahau i te hunga mate, i te hunga ririki, i te hunga nui, e tu ana i te aroaro o te Atua, na kua whakatuwheratia nga pukapuka kua whakatuwheratia hoki tetahi atu pukapuka, ara o te ora. Kei nga mea hoki i tuhituhia ki aua pukapuka te whakawa mo te hunga mate, he mea whakarite tonu ki a ratou mahi."
Nga Patai:
1. He aha i whai koanga ai te tangata?
2. He aha te tauira o te whakawhakanga?
3. He aha nga pukapuka i kitea nei e Hoani?
RATAPU TUAWHA
MO TE WHAKAWAKANGA. Kahore te whakaritenga i te whaka-
wakanga mo te tangata e mahia i nga wa katoa i nuiri tat a iho i te whakataunga, nga mahi pa hoki kahore etahi i whakautua tonu i taua wa, a ko tenei ahua kei runga tonu i to to Atua niatauran.ua, mea hoki kihai i penei, ko te tirohanga i ton ahua one tou tu mo to whakamatau i te whakapono mo ona ahua hoki to tangata i tukua mai noi ki tenei oranga ka tino whakarapopototia to wa mona i to mea ko to tuturu-
II K MvlK'l Akuhata. 1941
o nga hiahiatanga ngahau, nga mamaetanga ranei ma nga mea
e Diahia ana i tana ua e whakaatu tona v. hakawhirinakitan^a Id tenei
ki tera ranei o enei mea. Noreira ko be whakaritenga o te arhaka- wakanga i nekehia, kia whai talma ai tena tangata, tenei tangata ki
te whakaatu i aia. Te tangata tika kia tipu nui haere tumi atu
te tika, te tangata hara kia whai taima ai mo te ripeneta me te whaka- piki haere ake ia ia. Be iti nga ara, i hohoro tona te whakawhe i taua wa ano, ara te horo o te putanga mai o nga manaakitanga, t<- horo ranei o nga whin mo nga mahi he. Ko taua whakawakanga anake taua wa mo te tangata tera atu ano ranei tetahi atu kahore he tikanga. lie iti nga tnponotanga penei i poto i nga whakahaeretanga ■ • ia.
Nga Patai:
1. E whakatutukitia ana ranei te whakawakanga mo te tangata
i taua wa aim i mahia ai?
2. He aha te he o te horo o te arhakamahinga i te whakawnakanga?
3. Ina whiua te tangata i taua wa ano 0 te mahi he, whiua am.
ranei i tera o te whakawakanga?
Hi Mihana Ta Tatou
Pte. Ringa B. Herewini, Maori Batallion
iwi tena koutou. Tona aim koutou i raro i nga whakahaere
te Kawanatanga o Niu Tireni nei, a i roto hoki i te rongo mura-
o-te-ahi — o-te-po e tangi mai nei i tera taha o te ao. Kia ora mai
ano koutou. Tenei ahau tetahi o a koutou mokai hoia e ako ana i
Papakura te tuku atu nei i enei korero kia koutou.
I • 3 o Hepetema 1939 ka uru te Emepaia o [ngarangi ki roto i te a, ka haere o tatou boa tamariki ano hoki i runga i to karanga
a to ture. Ka wohe atu ratmi, toe mai ko tatou hoi iwi mo te
kaenga (kainga). E tv iwi, ia tatou e mahue nei kei to aha tatou? Koia nei to putake o enei kupu.
Aku lioa. taku iwi Maori, e aku teina, tuakana i roto i to RongO- pai, kua uru ra to iwi .Maori ki into i to hohonutanga <> tenei pakanga nui. Kua reiv nga toto aroha. toto whakarongo, toto whakapono, toto maia, toto Maori ki nga whenua ko. Kei to pikau o tatou boa, tama- riki, teina, tuakana. tunc, matua hoki. i tetahi pikaunga nui kia man tonu to tatou herekoretanga kia taea ai «• tatou te mahi ki to tangata
ki te Atua hoki i ta tatou e pai ai. Kei te mohio tatou ki nga take
nui e tarewa ana i runga i to taunga o tenei pakanga. Kei to pehea
o tatou whakaaro mo enei mea. Kei to aha tatou?
Ho mihana kua mahue kia atOU. Tuatahi. he tono i roto i te pono me te humane ki te Matua i te Rang] kia manaakitia te tika, kia whiwhi kaha te taua, kia aroha hoki kia tatou kei muri nei e manako ana kia hoki mai aim o tatou hoia. no te mea ko la anake te "kakahu ora" mo o tatou hoia i roto itenei pakanga kino. Tuarua, mahia n^a mahi o te Rongopai kia tino rite ia tatou. ia tatou e noho pani nei i "kaumatua" me 0 tatou hoa arolia kei to pakanga. Whaka-
ki nga tonutohn a nga Timuakitanga <> runga ake ia koutou.
Tuatoru, ko to hapai i nga ture 0 t<' whenua i raro i to tatou Kawana- Tautokona nga kohikohi me nga ahua mahi katoa hei hapai i ar effort." Ko tenei te mihana ma tatou katoa. Whakatan^ata ia tatou kia
kaha.
Kia ora mai ra koutou katoa.
Akuhata, 1941 TE KARERE 757
Hui Pariha i Tu Ki Manaia -Taranaki
14 me 15 o Hune, 1941
Na Tema P. Kewene
Ko ia nei tetahi hui tino pai rawa atu. I reira hoki etahi tangata rangatira, ara ko te kingi o Whanganui nei Te Morehu Takarangi me tetahi o nga tino rangatira o Taranaki ara a Te Rangi-i-huuna Ropi- hana. Na raua etahi korero nunui i whakatakoto ki taua marae, e pa ana ki tetahi poropititanga mo tenei Hui Pariha. Ko taua poropiti- tanga na tetahi rangatira ko Te Kahu-pukoro te ingoa, ka rua tekau pea nga tau o tona matenga atu ka irimai nei i reira, na tenei Hui Pariha ka tutuki, ko te whakaturanga ote Tumuakitanga ote Takiwa o Taranaki. Ko Tukino Hakopa, te Tumuaki Takiwa, ko Turaki Manu te Kaunihera tuatahi, ko Wi Katene, te Kaunihera tuarua, ko Elder Stinson te Hekeretari o taua Takiwa. Noreira, i puta i konei etahi mea whakamiharo mo to Rongopai ete Hunga-tapu, mehemea he whaka- manamana nou kaore hoki e taea te pewhea itemea e tu ana koe i runga ite kororia ate Rungarawa.
I timatangia taua Hui ite po ote Rahoroi ki nga mahi ate Parai- mere raua ko te Miutara. E rua hoki nga wild o etahi kotiro no te peka o Porirua, ko Sister Ami Katene me Sister Polly Wineera, e ako ana i nga taitamariki ki etahi mahi ngahau, a i roto i aua mahi ngahau ko etahi waiata e penei ana me te whakaahua nei te koreromai i runga ite ahuatanga whakaatu ite whakarihariha o tenei mea ote harihari korero a ngau-tuaraa. E whakaatumai ana ite ahua ote harihari korero, ite tuunga ote mata i mamae ai te tangata e ngaua atu raka ite tuara. Te kiteatanga he tito noa iho taua korero raka, mete matenga ite whakama ote wahine nana i timata taua harihari korero. Heoi ko tenei putake e haere ana i runga ite korero a Paora te Apotoro e ki nei "Ko te arero ia e kore e taea te whakararata." Noreira e Hui-atawhai ma puta noa tenei mihana, he rehana nui -tenei kia tatou, ko tetahi o ana ingoa "he paihana," noreira e aku tuahine, rangatira hoki kia tupato, kia kaha hoki kia tatou, na te Atua te mahi.
Ite 9 karaka ite ata ote Ratapu, ka tu ko te Hui Tohungatanga, me te Hui Atawhai. Heoi kaore i riromai i ahau te ripoata ote Hui Atawhai, engari to te Hui Tohungatanga i reira hoki ahau, na Tumuaki Peka Turaki Manu i whakahaere. He mea whakatuwhera ki te himene 104 "Koutou katoa ra." Na mane Taurau te inoi.
Ko nga tangata i tu ki te korero.
1. Tukino Hakopa.
2. Wi Katene.
3. Pourewa Mokena.
4. Taka Toroiwhiti.
5. Tumuaki Matiu Kauri.
Ehoama kapai ano ra nga mahi a te Tumuaki, ngotongoto ana ki te whatu-manawa, he oti. Heoi, i whakamutua ki te himene 57 "E te Atua whakamutua" na Wi Katene te inoi.
Ite 11.0 onga haora ka tu te Kura Hapati, hemea whakapuare ki te himene 72 "Kia hari tatou." Na Taka Toroiwhiti te inoi.
Ka mutu te korero ote Hakarameta me te Korero-a-ngakau kat alii ka karangatia ki te korero, a
1. Tema P. Kewene.
2. Sister Waitokorau Tamihana te Aweawe.
3. Hori Hooro (o Tauranga).
4. Tumuaki Kauri.
758 TE KARER] Akuhata. 1941
l:« L2.80 Ka tu te Karakia Whakapapa. Na Tenia P. Kewene i whakahaere. Kaore a Te A.0 \\ 'irihana i ahei ki te haere Id tenei hui
aoreira ka tukua e ia a Bro. Kewene hei mea i ana mahi i reira. Heoi ko tenei karakia he mea whakahaere ano I raro ite Tumualritanga Whakapapa o Bro. Tuati Meha, ko ia tonu i tetahi pito ote tepu k<» Rawiri Kaniau i tetahi taha o Bro. Kewene. Ko etahi wahi nunui i roto i tenei karakia ko nga patapatai a: — 1. \\'i Katene.
'2. Turaki Manu.
:;. Tukino Hakopa. No nga whakautu i nga patai a enei tangata. ka whakamiharo rawa nga iwi o Taranaki ki to marama ote whika a to Atua ite ahua- tanga mo taua mo te tangata e ora tonu ai ngai tana mo ake ake
Amino.
[te - 0 nga haora ka tei to Karakia Kauwhau. na Tumuaki I'oka Turaki Manu i whakahaere.
Nga tangata i karangatia ki te kauwhau ko: —
1. Mane Taurau — Tumaki Takiwa 0 Manawatu mo Wairarapa.
2. Rawiri Kamau. Katahi ia ka haere ki tetahi hui hui poroporoaki na to Tairawhiti ki o ratOU tamariki e haere ana ki to pakanga i tawahi Ho maha nga minita nunui 0 tona hahi o tena hahi ara 0 Qga hahi katoa. I reira hoki te Pihopa o Aotearoa. Ka tu tetahi tangata no to hahi Mihinare ko Hori Tupaea ko tana korero he penei me te tangi ki tetahi .Minita ki te Pihopa tonu ranei hei manaaki
i nga tamariki o haere nei ki to whawhai ara kia kore ai pea e whara ite pakanga. Katahi ka taria to whakautu kaore rawa i taea, katahi
ka tu mai ko tetahi Roia ka patai mehemea
ranei toia, tetahi minita e whai mana ana ia
ki to manaaki. Ka tu atu ko Rawiri Kaniau
ka kii atu ae ko ia. Ka titiromai to Roia nei
kia Rawij-i Kaniau, ka mutu ka titiro ki nga
tantrata o mohio ana ia ko to Atua tonu to
rite. Ina ra hoki ko wai ano ki runga atu
ito pihopa, ka monomono ki to kata, katahi ka karan.u'amai to Roia nei
kia Rawiri Kaniau, i ahumai i whoa tou mana. Katahi ka hoatu tonu
atu e Rawiri Kamau to whakahokomai o tana tohungatanga mai ia
Te Karaiti, kia Pita ma. ratou kia Bohepa Mete raua ko Oriwa Kautere
ka heke iho ai kia ia kia Rawiri Kamau. To Hun.u'a-tapu. ho wahi kotalii
aoa tenei korero i roto i nga korero papai o tenei hui.
i'uati Moha. Ka papai hoki nga kororo a tenei ranirat ira.
1. Te Morehu Takarangi o Putiki. Wanganui, ko ia tetahi o nga rangatira <» tenei motu, e rite ana tenei tangata he kingi tonu ia. Bngari he tangata tino whakapapaku ia ia kei runga i tenei tangata te nohoa- • kupu a to Tumuaki "Kia Ngawari." Kei te mohio tatou te tapu ki tone i korero. noroira me manaaki tenei tangata tino to tatou Matua ito rangi. 5. Te Rangi-i-huna Ropihana ko ia nei tetahi o nga tangata ranga- tira o Taranaki ake. Nana etahi tino niihi nunui mo nga iwi i eke ki o Taranaki. ka mutu koi a ia to kete kororo a <» tatou tupuna. I konei ka tu a Tumuaki Kauri ka panuimai tetahi reta kia ia he mea haina na to Archbishop ote Hahi Ingarrangi, nato Pihopa ote Katorika, natc Kaiwhakahaore o etahi atu hahi. Ko te reta nei he mea mai kia panuitia kei roto tata i nga ra nei ka tu tetahi Hui ma nga kai-arahi o nga hahi katoa ote motu nei, kia whakatikatikangia te ahua-
Poratene Edwards ami Tuihaia Edwards of Korongata arc the frond parents of an- Other dauuhtcr, honi to them June II, VII.
Mary Edwards, the " beauty competition winner" acknowied m March issue of "Te Karcrc." spent two
luckland
with the "three Har-
>>s'." I wonder if she enjoyed herself' I wonder I
Akuhata, 1941 TE KARERE 759
tanga me te karakia ki te Atua. Ko te take, katahi ano ratou ka kite e he ana ta ratou whakakaupapatanga. Noreira, itemea e he ana, heoi ano tona rongoa me tahuri ratou nga kai-arahi o aua hahi ki te whakatikatika.
Ite 7 karaka ko te huihui whakamutunga o taua Hui Pariha. Ko te wahi tuatahi ite Hui Atawhai, na Sister Waitokorau i whakahaere. Ka mutu te himene tuatahi me te inoi whakapuare, ka tu ko te Tumuaki tonu ote Hui Atawhai o Manaia ki te korero ara ko Sister Kaaro Turaki Manu. I muri i tena he waiata na Sister Polly Wineera. I muri i tena he waiata rongopai na Pourewa Mokena, Sister Kaaro Turaki Manu, me Sister Damon. Tino pai ta ratou waiata, ki toku mahara ka paahi ratou i etahi whakataetae nunui. I muri i tena ka tu ko Sister Tarati Matewai. He wahine mohio tenei ki te korero. I muri i tena ka tu ko Sister Kauri ka korero ia i tetahi mahi mo te heihei e tino roa ai ratou e kite ana ite maramatanga ko te take kia maha ai nga haora ite rangi kotahi e tahuri ana ki te ketuketu ko te take kia noho ai ki te rua me te toru whanautanga heeki ite rangi kotahi ara kia eke ki te tino whaipainga o tenei mahi ote atawhai tikaokao, me peratahi hoki tatou kia maha nga mahi papai e oti ia tatou ite rangi kotahi. Ki ahau nei he matauranga tino nui tenei.
Ite 8 karaka ka riro ite Tohungatanga te karakia ka karangatia hoki e Tumuaki Kauri a Tuati Meha ki te uiui i nga ahuatanga me nga mahi o roto ite Tohungatanga, heoi na runga i nga patapatai me nga whakautuutu ka tino pai rawa atu tena hui. Noreira, kua kite ahau ko ia tenei tetahi mea tino pai mo roto i nga Hui Pariha katoa. Ma tena ahua e whai mahi ai te katoa, e kite ai hoki te rawaho ite tino ote ataahuatanga o to taonga ete Hunga-tapu.
No tenei wahi i runga ano i nga korero ate Tumuaki katahi ka whakapangia nga tangata ote Tumuakitanga Takiwa o Taranaki i whakaaturia ake ite timatanga ote ripoata nei.
Etehi kupu tino nunui i rongo ahau i roto ite whakapanga o Tumuaki Takiwa Tukino Hakopa i roto i nga kupu manaaki ate Tumu- aki Mihana i penei, "e Brother Tukino Hakopa, kei mea koe ko koe anake te Tumuakitanga Takiwa o Taranaki engari ko koutou tokotoru ara ko koe me o Kaunihera e rua noreira i roto i nga mea katoa me ata whakariterite e koutou tokotoru." Ehoa ma, he akoranga tino nui kei roto i enei korero. Ko te take ka pa tenei akoranga ki nga tumuakitanga katoa, ahakoa he tumuakitanga takiwa, he tumuakitanga peka, he tumuakitanga hui atawhai, he tumuakitanga miutara, etahi atu tumuakitanga ranej, ka tino u nga kupu nei.
GENEALOGY
By Tcao Wirihana THE WAY TO PERFECTION Cottage Meetings for August.
Aug. 7 — Lesson 1, "The Way to Perfection."
21 — Lesson 3, 'The Inheritance of Greatest Worth." 14 — Lesson 2, "Between Two Curtains." 28 — Lesson 4, "Organized Intelligences." Kei te tino puhoi te Mahi Whakapapa, ahakoa ta, kei te nui nga whakapawera i enei ra. Kia noho mahara ki to hunga mate kei to talari mai ratou i tua o to Arai kia malua o ratou ingoa i te Temepara.
Whakatauki: "Muri malii mauri-ora, mauri mangoro niauri mate."
Tohungotanga mm
kui tu ki Kail 27 <> I /(•/>«'/.•;>/</. Haiti mat kouion nga kau kauwhau ki te ripoata. Haere mat hoki koutou nuiu (/)/(/ ; ti
Tohungotanga.
i l. KARERE Akuhata, 1941
KAI-KAUWHAU Mo I'KI WHAIRANG1
Wiki Tuarua me te wiki Tuarima o Akuhata. — Hohepa Heperi nic
Hemi Witehira Id nfatauri Bay me Takahue. Hare Nehua me Pita
Nehua Id Kaikohe. Boorj Ruwhiu me Hare Herewini Id Waimamaku.
Nopera Otene me Ngakete Otene Id Waihou.
Mahuika Otene me Jamea Joyce Id Panguru.
Haua Witehira me Tetauahika Witehira Id
Utakura.
Wiki Tuatoru o Akuhata me te wiki tua- rua o Hepetema. — Hirini Heremaia I
Alui Wihongi ki Ngawha. Pita Heperi me Himi Hapeta ki Rftangamuka. Haua Witehira me Tetauahika Witehira ki Utakura. Kawa Erueti me .Mick Heremaia ki Ifataraua. Hi- rini Wikaira me Wiremu Ngakuru ki Waima.
Wiki tuawha o Akuhata me te wiki tuatoru o Hepetema. — 1 1 • • < > r i
Ruwhiu nu' Hare Herewini ki Whirinaki. Mahuika Otene me Jamei
Joyce ki Panguru. Kawa Krueti me .Mick Heremaia ki (Haua. Wite- hira Wihongi me Tom Heremaia ki Ifataraua.
Kia kaha koutou ki te whakarite i enei karangatanga. Haere mai ki to tatou Tohungata ki te ripoata ia koutou mihana.
M.I.A. SEWING
(Arranged by Una Thompson)
Knitting;, Knitting, Knitting with a prayer In every row. Knitting
and Balaclavas, singing as w< Women of the M.I.A., what are you doing for the BOYS
What could be better than knitting for a Church project after
which the articles could be given for patriotic pun
Por L942 Hui Tau we want loo per cent, entries in the following:
cks in khaki or navy. GLEANERS.— Mittens and Balaclavas in khaki and navy.
JUNIORS.— Scarves in khaki or navy.
r
In accord with a request from President Matthew Cowley. President Rufus K. Hardy, of the First Council of Seventy
former Now Zealand Mis-ion President, sent by "air mail" a Copy of the programme conducted at the funeral for President
0. D. Romney.
Quoting President Hardy —
elude by Marion Lyon. Singing was furnished by the White Chapel Quartette, who furnished three numbers. Invocation was offered by Elder T. S. Tingey, a returned mis- sionary from New Zealand. The first speaker was Mr. R. c. Wilson. S' nior Vice-Presidenl of the First National Bank, fol- lowed by II. J. Halton, George J. Cannon, and Rufus K. Hardy. The benediction was pronounced by Bishop Joseph L. Wirthlin of tlie Presiding Bishopric. The services were conducted by Brother Orville Fox of the Bishopric of the South 20th Ward, and the grave in the Salt Lake City Cemetery was dedicated by John Russell.
In attendance at this funeral were such old-timers as Mere Whaanga, George Romney, Dr. Heber, J. Sears, Heber K. Aldous, Louis J. Hoagland and Benjamin Hollingsworth."
Akuhata, 1941
TE KARERE
761
NEWS FROM THE FIELD
SOUTH ISLAND
Reported by Sisters Beatrice Dalziel and
Ruby Thomspon
Although still missing the Zion Elders, the Dunedin Branch is endeavouring to do their best. Meetings are well sus- tained and we feel that we are going forward.
Owing to the black-out and overtime war work, our M.I. A. has not been able to hold regular meetings as heretofor. Every third Sunday, however, under the control of our president, Sister Eve Pur- vis, the M.I. A. give addresses at the evening meeting, which are appreciated by all who attend.
Sunday, June 8, was a special day, when our youngest Sunday School mem- ber, little Myra Coburn, bravely entered the waters of baptism and became a real Latter-day Saint.
Sister Jane Eleanor, widow of Brother Chris Harvey of Athol, Central Otago, passed through the same ordinance. Through her late husband, we feel that we have known Sister Harvey for a long time. It was a joy to welcome both these new members.
We send our heartiest congratulations to Brother and Sister Perriton of Christ- church on the birth of their little son.
To Brother Luxford Peeti Walker we offer our heartiest welcome to Dunedin and look forward to a lot of fine work from him. Brother Don Ross, who has long been connected with our Church and Sunday School work, has, owing to in- different health, had to resign as Church Secretary, and Sister Eve Purvis has been appointed in his stead.
We are sorry to report that Brother Fred (Snow) Wright is reported missing in Greece, our sympathy goes out to his parents, sister and brother. We also wish to extend our sympathy to all readers and Church members who have lost loved ones in the present conflict.
Away with the first echelon are three of our male members, which leaves with us brother Enoka McDonald, who is at present a student at "Technical College." His sporting activities are but carrying on the traditions of his family. He cap- tains the first rowing team of the Col- lege, is a member of the Firsl XV. foot- ball team and captains the Second XI. cricket team.
The picture "Brigham Young" is being released here shortly, and we hope to have very favourable comment's upon it.
WAIRAU DISTRICT Reported by Sister Huitau Elkington
President Tun Ruruku has been visit- ing in Marlborough for three wee! among the Saints. He reports favour- abl on tiic condil ion of ( he pe >ple. Olive Elkington 1 1 ippolil e, who ii in al Helen's, Wellington, spent two
w<cks on vacation with her parents. Aim.-. Kawharu of the Madaen M.l A.
Presidency was instrumental iii the for-
mation of the first Maori hockey team (women) in Nelson, with Mrs Hiwi Davis as captain. This team is really making a fine name for itself.
Bob Hippolite and Tony Walker have been posted as missing from operations in Greece. Sympathy and condolences are extended to loved ones. Mr. A. G. Gosling of Pleasant Point, Timaru, has returned from Fiji and spent some time in Madsen. Brother and Sister James Elkington are pleased to announce the engagement of their daughter, Hariata Rangikauia, to Albert George Gosling of Pleasant Point.
MANAWATU DISTRICT Reported by Polly WiNeera
Last month an evening was held to farewell two more of the "lads," Tiori Daymond and Ngaro Solomon, who al- ready has a brother serving with the Middle East Forces. Suitable presenta- tions were made. A great deal of excite- ment was caused when the news was told of the marriage of Tiori Daymond to Edna Te Hiko of Porirua, which took place last month.
A letter has been received by the parents of Sergt. George Katene, Jnr., in which he writes of the "boys in Greece and Crete," and tells in a most interest- ing manner of their many experiences in this Great War. George, who was reported wounded and in hospital, is now fit and well and out of hospital.
On the week-end of 5th and 6th July Sister Paeroa Wi Neera visited the Wai- rarapa District to attend a Hui Atawhai Board Meeting.
HAWKE'S BAY DISTRICT Reported by John T. Meha
With his excellent sense of humour, President Cowley made himself very popular at the "Twenty-first" birthday party held at the Oddfellows' Hall. Dan- nevirke, in honour of Manahi Nitania Paewai, only son of Brother Nireaha and Apikara Paewai. Among the assembled guests were Mr. E. N. Hogben, princi- pal of the Dannevirke High School, and his entire staff, and Mr. McDonald, mem- ber of the Education Board. Mr. Hog ben, in reviewing Nitama's career a1 school, paid tribute to his teachings and training received as a Patter-day Saint,
commenting very favourably on the hon- our and distinction attained hy N i I :i ma upon being the fir8l Maori Head Prefect Of the School.
Tin Tamaki Branch Hui Atawhai are working zealous lj at the Church Welfare Plan. As an addition to the assembly hall thej have erected a storehouse which thej hope to fill before very long.
Piftec n member ; of the Tamaki
\ \v mi. a. who have i ii Btudyina foi
t he annua] home nui ii ■■ exarainat Ion
uccessBful in at taining i 00 per cent
pa ins marks, ent ii lino I hem to a Home
TE KARERE Akul.ata. 1941
. .■ a v • ■« »«i old hak.i
form of 1 benefit nprecendented
: Kirl>. which was highly com- Goodwill, Allen, D ler and
ipoa by local eothoi itting on. v.
feel ur-
OVERSEAS end hakas. If
Reported by Sybil Duckworth >"" u:i"' '" ,m,i :i ll" "f N< m Zealand
and brother, I
t hat he baa errii ''<i In ■ fa . end li plenty glad to iee land Iwil] on
Fter baking end sweltering In the your marria t, K.-.i-
i haven'1 wasted dington, Wallace, Radd and i
much. Hep. and trutl y..u ere Mir. you bfl
enjoying yoor new lift-. wish of your friend- "down and
two globe trottei Our si >ping report* r
Jackman and Jeanne Porteous, have non Wrid< tatlon and Is alao do*
commenced their studies at the Brigham ing ebool ••« fen gallons,
Ybnng Uniyersity, and from all reports Elder Wride. w*e could do with them,
are doing fine. How's the Creative Dane- Elders Aldous and Hendersoen we hope
injf, Jeanne. Thej report Zion Is • Naval Air Corj
thing th< to be and they Utah National Guard Unit has also
really appreciate all that has been done shanghaid Elders Curtis and
for them by the Saints. Their good Congratulations, too, Elder Crandall an
ire sent to all their friends in winnil hip to Harvard I'ni-
New Zealand ami they often Vet home- v. r
LATE NEWS— Sunday School
Reports: First Quarter Kiri Kiri-Omahu. Nuhaka. Gladstone, Ana. I'uk. Hahoenui, Whatawhata, Te Awamutu, Matakowbai. Second Quarter — Kiri Kiri- Omahu. Kohunui. Te Awamutu. Puke Tapu. Nuhaka. Six Penny Fund Gladstone, Kohnnui, Kiri Kiri-Omahu.
JUST HAPPENED
Monday, July 21, 1941
"Unto us this day, a son is bom ..." is pleasantly applicable to the Ifeha family throughout the world.
Before noon, Sister Mabel Ifeha gave birth to a seven-pound baby boy — the "son and heir" — thus bringing to fruition the hope of "L.A.C." II. M. Meha of the R.N.Z.A.F.. training in Canada.
"Te Karere" convoys congratulations and extends the hand of
welcome and fellowship to the new arrival. May he too be accorded m due time the tribute we now extend to his father, Hepa — "Well and faithfully done ..." my friend.
I **
: a prolonged illness. Sister Tangihaere Barclay, a
indefatiguable Church worker of the Tamaki Branch H.B.,
d away on the morning of May Huh. 1941, at the Danne-
♦ virke Public Hospital. She is BUrvived by her husband. Bro. Frank Barclay, one son and seven daughters. The last rites
were under the supervision of Brother YViremu Mihaere of the { i Tamaki Branch Presidency. Her burial took place at the Taho- ♦
raiti Cemetery.
Aroha and sympathy are extended to the family she loved I and reared. Her one desire was to serve God. Her hopes for all associated with her were to Serve Him also. I I
ATTENTION, ALL CONTRIBUTORS! Your co-operation is needed. Kindly send in your material for publication before the 5th of each month. By complying with this, you will greatly assist the Editor in his endeavours to give you "Te Karere" on time, and with something worthwhile.
m §
€ KAR€R€
Wahanga 35 Hepetema, 1941 Nama 9
Septembw 22 ...arks one hundred and fourteenth year since Book of Mormon records given to the custody of the world!
Our President
More than three years ago, Presi- dent Matthew Cowlej with his wife and daughter arrived in this land to guide and direct this Mission of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints. As President of the Mission, every thought and action has been serve to the best of his ability his Church and God. It is needless to tell oi hi> work among the Saints in the land. Having been here during the Great War of 1914-18 as a missionary, his grasp of the problems and conditions now extant, and his ability and strength of spirit and health enabling the proper discharge of his obligations arc better appreciated.
During this present term, more than sixty missionaries from Zion have laboured under him at one time. Nearly twelve months ago Zion Elders were recalled. 'The preach- ing of the Gospel in this land was suddenly disrupted. The work of the Church devolved upon local administration. So Far the Saints have rallied to the standards; however, their work has in the main been with already organized Branches and Districts. The task of proselyting has not been theirs. To our Mission President, his wife, Sister Elva Cowley, and their daughter Jewel, that task has been borne. < Hnerous as the administrative obligations have been, "our Presi- dents)" have brought the Gospel's message to as many, it" not more hearts than during the last year with the Elders. This is not in any way belittling tin- momentous and eternal accomplishments attributed to our "Kaninatnai S )". It points OUt the magnitude and thoroughness of the work our modern pioneers an- doing. Their strength- spiritually, mentally and physicall) is being expended exclusivel) to the task of ser- vice. The wonderful thing about it all is tin- fact that they arc- being invited to speak to large concourses of people upon the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints.
President Cowley spoke for more than two hours on one occasion to a group, covering the beginning of the Church in this day. It thrilled me personally to hear him tell just what he told that audience. It made me feel I was being converted to the truth of the Gospel's message and purpose ( Continued Inside Back I
ic ti mm mm m n mm mm m n jra jftflt jr #l Jtt m. so. m. so.
\^v.
I Te Karere I
Wahanga 35
Established in 1907 Hepetema, 1941
Nama 9
^^^^i^fi-^^-l^^-^^^f^^^^i^^^i
Matthew Cowley Kelly Harris Eru T. Kupa Waimate Anaru
Tumuaki Mihana Etita
Kaiwhakamaori Kaiwhakamaori
"Ko tenei Pepa i whakatapua hei hapai ake i te iwi Maori hi roto i nga whakaaro-nui.'
"Te Karere" is published monthly by the New Zealand Mission of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, and is printed by TE KARERE PRESS, No. 2 Scotia Place, Upper Queen Street, Auckland, C.l, N.Z. Subscription Rates: 3/- per six months; 5/- per year; £1 for five years; £2/10/- for life. (United States Cur- rency: $1.00 per year; $4.00 for five years; $10.00 for life.)
Address Correspondence, Box 72, Auckland, C.l, New Zealand.
CONTENTS
Editorial — Page
Teach Tithing in September 768
Special Features —
Nga Rongo Korero o Te Whawhai 770
Church Welfare 771
j Why the Blessings ? 773
j Etahi o Nga Whakaaro i Mau 775
I Church Features —
j Notice to All Primary Officers 774
j Nga Matenga 777
! Genealogy 777
Mutual Improvement Association 77$
Sunday School 77<->
I 'ritnary 783
News from the Field 788
II KARERE
rlepetema, I'M l
Editorial
TEACH TITHING IN SEPTEMBER
In every home and in every chapel of the New Zealand Mission the principle of tithing should be discussed along with the other principles of the Gospel. We cannot exclude the I. aw ni" Tithing from the Gospel and still claim that we have tin- Fullness thereof. Too many of us attempt to love
tlu- l.<»rd on the instalment plan. We obey only those prin- ciples which are Convenient for lis to obey and expect to
receive the same returns for this partial obedience as do those who "love the Lord with all their might, mind and strength."
"'What does the ("lunch do with the tithing?" i> a ()nes-
tion that is frequently asked. The question is generally asked 1>\ those who do not pay tithes, and then- is an im- plication that the- money is not being used for the benefit of the members of the Church and for the building of the Kingdom of ( iod in the earth.
To satisfy the curiosity of the non-tithe-payer and for the information of all, then- follows the Financial Statemenl of the Church for the year 1939. The statement for the year 1940 has not yet been received but was published, as usual. at the April Conference of this year.
THE EXPENDITURES BY THE CHURCH FOR THE YEAR 1939
Stake and Ward Purposes —
For the erection of meeting-houses and for Ward
and Stake maintenance expenses . . £463,307 K o
Missionary Work
For the maintenance and - peration of all tin- Mis- -l. -us and t'<T the erection of places «'t' worship and "thrr buildings in the Missions .. .. £351,381 is <> Education —
Expended for the maintenance of Church school
system £240,424 10 0
Temples —
Expended for the maintenance and operati
Temples £71,837 2 0
I [ospitals
Expended for tin- erection and improvement of
hospital buildings £4,554 is o
■ For direct aid in the care of the worthy poor and other charitable purposes, including hospital treatment £128,994 is 0
Total .. £1,260,500 14 0
Hepetema, 1941
TE KARERE
769
which has been taken from the tithes and other Church funds and re- turned by the Trustee-in-Trust to the Saints for the maintenance and operation of the Stakes and Wards, Mission activities, for the mainten- ance and operation of Church schools and Temples, for hospital build- ings and relief assistance.
At the April Conference of the year 1940, President J. Reuben Clark, in referring to the finances of the Church, spoke as follows : —
We have felt that it was important that the Church should live within its income, not only for itself as a Church, but for an example to the community, the state, the nation, and to the individual members themselves.
Such a course of the Church involves problems which are not incident to civil administration, which is primarily dependent upon taxes that can be accurately forecast. Therefore there are in govern- mental activities few occasions when an unbalanced budget — that is when more is spent than is taken in — is not created by some deliberate act.
With the Church the matter is wholly different. Over the last four years approximately 87% of the total Church income has been the tithing. This being a purely voluntary contribution, its amount cannot be accurately forecast. Its volume depends wholly upon the faithfulness of the people. Thus, where the governmental agencies have relative certainty in income, the Church has uncertainty.
The only money the Church has is what has been saved out of the tithing you have given it in the past and the tithing you are now giving it, and approximately 87% of the total annual income comes from you from year to year.
We, the Authorities of the Church, must therefore be extremely careful as to our commitments, else we shall find ourselves, as wc have occasionally in the past, spending more than our income.
Because of the turmoil existing in the world and be- cause of an apparent disintegration of the financial structure of the nations of the earth, the people of God should look to Him for security. In no uncertain terms He has admon- ished us to honour Him with our substance ; to pay our tithes and offerings that we may be numbered among His people upon the earth. To be numbered among the people of God in these uncertain times is to find security.
During the month of September teaeb the Law of Tith- ing in your homes, your Primaries, your Mutuals, your Sun- day Schools, your Priesthood quorums and your Sacrament
meetings. Above all pay your Tithes. Invest now in the
economic plan of the Lord.
A I A I I II IV ( n\\ LEY.
II". KARERE Hepetema, 1«M1
EDITOR'S NOTE:
Sister Edith Pryer, now of Hamilton, is very well known to many people, particularly the missionaries who have returned to Zion. Of particular memory arc ti • of her travels with
President and Sister w la throughout the Dominion, and her
very generous Christmas presents of "A Big Christms
the Elders, which came regularly t<> Headquarters at each
Yuletide.
Sister Fryer will always be remembered by all who have known her, both here and abroad. Her influence for good baa always been an outstanding characteristic of her fine spirit and nature. President Cowley has mentioned to me that "she
of the most spiritual pakeha women I have ever met." 'To this
I heartily B|
The little message Bhe lias kindly sent t<» "Te Karen
very indicative of her spirit and standing in the Church and life.
"The life of a Latter-day Saint has much \o do with COHVersi tin- outside world. If we live as we Profess, example becomes the best medium of preaching the Gospel of L'hnst. This can be shown iii our homes, when we meet people not belonging to the Church who may be noticing things about us, without our knowledge, by the lives we lire. By the Holy Spirit -within us. we are able to show to the WOrl I
mankind. 1 his we do sincerely and truthfully only by the way we lire, even as Christ did — by example. Example and action and not long faces arc needed now."
Nga Kongo Korero o Te Whawhai
\'.\ Paepae Witehula
Kua ahua whakata inaianei te [ngarihi i te whawhai kia Tiamana i te urunga mai o Ruhia ki te pakanga, Kua ahua maha nga wiki inaianei o te whawhai a Tiamana raua ko Ruhia. E kii ana DgS whakaaturanga e 7 miriona te nui o nga tangata e pakanga ana, he nui hoki te mate 0 tetahi taha me tetahi taha. Ko te korero a Hitara
i te tuatahi, LO nga ra ka mutu te wahi kia Ruhia, otira kua maha
n^a wiki e kaha ana a Ruhia. te ahua m i i paoro ia ki te hoa uaua.
Kua mate ia Ruhia anake i tenei wa poto nuku atu i te kotahi miri- ona nga hoia o Tiamana. ko ona tata ki te hawhe miriona. Ko nga mea pakanga a Tiamana kua ram ia Ruhia e •*! mam- (tanks) 'l') ran
ere-rangi, o Ruhia e 19 ran nga mea rere-rangi, e 22 raa nga
(tanks). Kahore i pau te marama 0 ta raua whawhaitan^a kua hanga tiriti a Ruhia raua ko Engarangi, kaua e mutu tetahi te whawhai kia Tiamana, ma te whakaae ra ano 0 tetahi ki tetahi ara. a Engarangi kia Ruhia, kia mate ra ano a Tiamana.
Ka nui te hemanawa 0 Hitara, kua tonoa kia hopukia tana tino hoa ake. a Koringi (Goering) i te kore e han^ai o te hikoi i tana i hiahia ai. Kua tae mai tana tono kia Hapani kia whakaaroaro engari kua pa he raru ki te Kawanatanga <> tera iwi. Kua wehewehea noreira kahore e matauria ka huri pehea.
Kaati mo tenei wa.
Hepetema, 1941 TE KARERE 771
Church Welfare
By A. Dudley Amadio
As most of us are aware, our President inaugu- rated and appointed leaders for the Church Welfare Programme at the last Hui Tau. While many of us knew of this "plan"; had some knowledge of its suc- cess in the stakes of Zion; and possibly anticipated the introduction of the "plan" here, none had ex- plored its potentialities in New Zealand, either for the present or the future. Speaking generally, the Welfare Programme was regarded as a glorified way of helping the poor and needy — badly needed no doubt in America, but in this country with its Social Elder Amadio Security legislation, not especially necessary at the moment. That our Father in Heaven was guiding President Cowley when he introduced this work I have no doubt. That we may and do need its benefits more than the Saints in Zion, I am firmly convinced.
The Mission Director of the Programme, Brother Wi Pere Amaru, has suggested that we do two things as a start in this great work. The first — "that we pay our tithes and fast offerings regularly," and the second — "that we make our homes and chapels more beautiful." The payment of tithes and offerings has long been commanded of God. Adam and his sons presented offerings at the command of God. I believe that most of us are cognizant of the daily blessings obtainable through adherence to the law of tithing, but I doubt if we all fully realise the value of the future blessings in store for those who are faithful in their keeping of this law. Malachi 3: 10-12 says: "Bring ye all the tithes into the storehouse that there may be meat in mine house, and prove me now herewith, saith the Lord of Hosts, if I will not open you the windows of heaven and pour you out a blessing that there shall not be room enough to receive it. And I will rebuke the devourer for your sakes, and he shall not destroy the fruits of your ground; neither shall your vine cast her fruit before the time in the field, saith the Lord of Hosts. And all nations shall call you blessed; for ye shall be a delightsome land, saith the Lord of Hosts." If you have read this passage attentivey, you will find a multitude of blessings therein. The promises made by the Lord through Malachi to the saints of his day are just as effective to the saints of this era, as many of our people are able to testify. Among the things revealed to Joseph Smith upon the subject of tithing are the following passages from the Doctrine and Covenants 64: 23 — " . . . and verily it is a day of sacrifice and the day of tithing for my people; for he that is tithed shall not be burned at His coming." In 85:4-5, speaking of those who do not pay tithing, the Lord says — " . . . neither is their genealogy to be kept, or to be had where it may be found on any of the records, or history of the Church; their names of the children written in the book of the Law of God, saith the Lord of Hosts." In subsequent verses of the same sec- tion, the Lord explains that those whose names are not writ ton in the book of the law shall have no inheritance among the Saints. In these passages, blessings enough are promised to induce anyone to obey the law, but I think these promises are only a beginning <>f the things the Lord has in store for us.
In the early days of the Church, tithing was not the financial law. A higher law, that of consecration, of Order of Enoch, was given to our people. In short, it consisted of having all things in common.
772 ll K \KI RE Hepetema, 1941
t hiit there would be no rich or i r. This timl law, and
will again be Had during the millenium. As tl
er law. that of tithing as a schoolmaster to teach the way to the higher law. The law • secretion has never been abrogated, but is, so the revelation t\ "... not required at tin- time . . . ." It should be plainly and* that the non-tithe payer shall not be given the opportunity to live the law of consecration. If we cannot live the leaser law, we certainly the higher law. It' this be the trend of the Welfare Programme, so far as tithing is concerned, let us make hast to obey, so that we shall not be like
Let us new see where the Instruction to make our homes and more beautiful will lead us. The gospel of Christ is to give us life and that more abundantly. The whole tenor of the command- Is toward the end of making as more comfortable hero and i distressing fact that a large portion of our people
are living in homes, to say the least, are overcrowded and unhealthy. If our people will combine together and repair their own homes and
the homos of their brethren, paint and generally beautiful them, they
will certainly make a direct Contribution to the health and comfort of
the people.
It has been found in Zion, when the Priesthood work together on
projects of this kind, and do it humbly, a -pi lit of appreciation of One another's talents is obtained, and that oftentimes ill-feelings are dis- pelled. The beautification of homes Is only a beginning. I read that -•hood often help to put farms and businesses "ii a
more productive ba8i8. As these improvements in homos, farms, chapcN and bu PS carried out. our self-respect will he raised; our
will be improved; our debts will gradually be paid — then we
shall be free from the bondage and better able to worship the Lord.
To be able to U'vd and clothe our needy In the difficult times ahead.
we must pay our fast offering and put our storehouses In order. The
an collect and repair clothes, linen and furniture. In
they will be able to conserve fruit and vegetables, i
I have heard it said by some of our leading brethren that there are no needy among the saints of their districts. This may or may not be so, but this I do know,— there Is not any district in this Mission in which there are no saints whose standard of living cannot be con- Biderably raised. While it is impossible to foresee all the uses to which we will put our homes, storehouses and offerings, I believe they will be used in a manner we have never before thought of. It seems feasible that if war comes to this land and our cities are bombed, our homes
and Storehouses will serve to comfort the unfortunate. Full store- house- and cupboards are s necessity for the future.
accomplish only what I've just related would of itself .i the introduction of the Welfare Programme, but I believe the Lord has than this in mind. Our people generally are of the House of Israel and they have been promised that they will he gathered in the
days. Most of the prophecies and promises have been fulfilled in a natural manner. Our beautifying campaign should give our homes a more ready market value to provide for this gathering, and parting. Results subsequent to the execution of this programme, we will have
d how to work with our neighbour without jealousy or COVetOUS-
H ntly upon our arrival at the land of our inheritance we will he fit to establish the Order of Enoch.
In conclusion, I believe tithing to be the primary of the school for the Order of Enoch, and the Welfare Programme proper the semondary phase of instruction for the Order.
Hepetema, 1941 TE KARERE 773
Why the Blessings ?
By George Watene
Blessings are Heavenly Father's Gifts, Given to man as the Lord seemeth fit. For every man that dwelleth on earth, God poureth blessings from his birth.
We are all God's children, and because of this truth, we are all entitled to receive blessings from Our Father in Heaven. The first command- ment given to man was to multiply and replenish the earth, and because Adam obeyed this very George Watene important commandment, the world was blessed with children patterned after the image of God, and was due to receive gifts and blessings by reason of their obedience. God opened up the Book of Life, and commenced to write down the history of His blessings for each and every one of His children here upon the earth. Man was commanded to keep record of God's dealings with him ever since creation. For example : "Moreover, thou son of man, take thee one stick, and write upon it for Judah and for the children of Israel, his companions: then take another stick, and write upon it for Joseph, the stick of Ephraim, and for all the house of Israel, his companions. And join them one to another into one stick; they shall become one in thine hand." (Ezekiel 37: 16, 17.) These two sticks represent prophecy concerning the coming forth of the Bible and the Book of Mormon. Read them carefully, and they will show you the pre-existence or first estate of man ; his earthly or second estate existence; his existence or third estate after death: and you will find further the blessings that followed and will follow in each of these estates of man's existence.
God did not pour out his blessings through these books alone, nor through his prophets, but He did bless his people also through other worthy men, who unconsciously fulfilled certain laws of God. Hence we sense the value of vision, of obedience as expressed in Solomon's Proverb 29:18 — "Where there is no vision, the people perish; but he that keepeth the law, happy is he." Hence we appreciate the law of obedience these men must have observed, when they were caught up in the realms of spiritual affinity for something they were searching, for the mutual benefit of man.
Can we fully realise the trials, tribulations , persecutions suffered by these great inventors, scientists, who are so numerous to mention in their search for truth? Do we appreciate them enough, when they starved, because of lowly circumstances; when they burnt the mid- night oil, because they had great faith in their convictions and in their theories; when they even sacrificed their lives, because they knew the work they are doing is not for their personal gain, but for the welfare and service of humanity? Can you show me an example of father and mother who do not love their children, and do not express added joy when their children obey them? Show me reason why God should not bless these worthy men — scientists, inventors, writers, philosophers, other benefactors of humanity, whose unconscious aits reached the doors of Heaven and unlocked its very windows, because o\' their service, sacrifice, and love for their fellow-men. "Praise God from whom all blessings flow" is a fitting tribute to the memory of these inspired men, whose immortal lives arc forever written "on the sands of time."
77 A TE KARERE Hepetema, 1(M1
We, as Latter-day Saints, have everything to be grateful for be- sides the comforts of living, travel, education, progression in all its full- ness as enjoyed throughout the whole world. We have a Gospel that teaches the Word of Wisdom — a commandment revealed through the Prophet Joseph Smith for the benefit of health to our bodies; the law of tithing — instituted of the Lord as far back as Abraham for the purpose of enhancing the spirit of giving; the law of Fast Offerings — similar in degree to offerings required of Adam, wherein we go with- out a meal on first Sunday of each month and contribute its value for the help of our worthy poor; then this year, we have the Welfare Programme, wherein we are required to store sufficient food for a year or two for times of famine that are to come, especially following the aftermath of war. Then in reviewing the Bible, Book of Mormon, together with Doctrine and ovenants, we have a Gospel that embraces ordinances revealed therein for our temporal and eternal salvation, and also numerous blessings then why, oh why the blessings.
There is a law irrevocably decreed in Heaven, before the foundations of the world, upon which all blessings are predicated : And when we obtain any bless- ing from Cod, it is by obedience to that lay upon which it is predicated. ( Doctrine and Covenants 130:20, 21.)
NOTICE TO ALL PRIMARY OFFICERS
Re PRIMARY REPORTS
There seems to be much misunderstanding in connection with the new report forms, and while this is only natural, we want I the matter straightened out with the least possible delay so that Primary work in New Zealand will be in full accord with thai done in Zion and other parts of the world.
FIRSTLY, the Branch Monthly Report, which is WHITE, is filled in each month by the Branch Secretary and forwarded without delay to the District Secretary. This white form is the only one with which the Branch is concerned.
SECONDLY, the District Monthly report, which is YELL< >W, is made out from the Branch reports received each month and is kept by the District Secretary, and
THIRDLY, the District Quarterly Report, which is BLUE, is made out from the three District Monthhly Reports which will have accumulated over the quarter. This District Quarterly Report is the only one which is sent to the Primary Secretary, as it is the one which contains the full account of the work accomplished by the Primaries in each District over the quarter.
We do not want either the white or the yellow forms sent to us — these are for your own special reference and record. The only one that concerns us is the Blue report from the District Secretary.
We hope that this will clear up any doubts and that you who have been lax will co-operate to the fullest degree, and that you who have been co-operating so splendidly will continue to do so.
—THE MISSION PRIMARY BOARD.
Hepetema, 1941
TE KARERE
775
Etahi o Nga Whakaaro i Mau
XA WIREMU TAKANA, PAKEKE, KUA MATE (Te mutiinga)
Xa te Etita. — Kei roto i nga Karere o Maehe, Aperira me Hunc o tenei tau nga t'nnatanga o enei korero hei whakaarotanga ma tatou.
Ma i boki atu ia ki reira ia tau, ia tau, mo nga tau e wha, me te tutaki ano ki a ia, i aua tau e wha, o taua poropiti Maori ona- mata. No reira, i homai ai nga papa ki a ia. Xa, ka timata te whakamaori i reira a ia ; me tetahi tangata he awhina i a ia ki te tuhituhi, i a ia e whakamaori ana.
I homai aua papa i te tau 1827 i te marama o Hepetema, te 22-o nga ra. Ko te whakamaoritanga, he mea ra, na te homaitanga o te Wairua Tapu a te Atua ma roto i etahi kohatu e rua e kiia nei e te Pakeha, he Urimi he Tumimi, e rite ana pea, ki nga kohatu i roto i te whare Wananga, ki te Huka-a-tai, me te Rehumoana nga whatu o o tatou tupuna.
Na, ka haere te whakamaoritanga, a, taea noatia te marama o
Mei 1829. I a ia e whakamaori ana i aua papa ka tae ki tetahi kupu
penei na, "Kua whakamanatia ahau e Ihu Karaiti, ka iriiria koe e
an i runga i te ingoa o te Matua, o te Tama, o te Wairua Tapu,
Amine." Xa tenei kupu, na te mana ra, ka tino
oho tona ngakau ; kaore hoki ia i tino marama
he aha tenei mea te mana, a hiahia tonu raua
kia mohio ki te putake o taua korero i pera
ai, ara, "mana." XTa, i haere atu raua, i te
awatea tonu a te ra, ki tetahi wahi motu ke,
inoi ai ki te Matua ma runga i taua take ara.
te mana. \a, ka puta mai a Eioani Kai Iriiri.
ki a raua. ka whakapa takitahi ona ringa ki
^^A*% I runga i o raua mahunga me te hoatu i te Tohu-
P' **>/■•.: I ngatanga a Arona ki a raua. kei reira te mana
|H| e ahei ai i a raua te iriiri nnnaki hei inuru-
H I nga liara. No taua \va ano. ka whakahau atu
a lloani Kai Iriiri i a raua kia iriiri raua, tetahi
i tetahi, hei murunga i <> raua hara ake. Xa.
heoi ano. i te mutunga <> tenei, ka haere tonu
whakamaoritanga. Xa. i te marama o Hune Ka
haere mai ano a Pita ratou ko Hemi ko rloani, hoatu Ki a raua te
mana <> Ihu Karaiti e karangatia nei te Tohungatanga <> Merekehe-
reke, he mea na te whakapakanga o o ratou ringaringa ki runga ki <>
raua mahunga.
No reira raua i wlnwhi ai ki te mana mo te hom itanga 0 te
Wairua Tapu, ma roto i te whakapakanga ringaringa. Kahore he mn nga marama i muri ka oti te perehi o te whakamaoritanga o taua
W'lKI.M I T.\ KA NA
ta raua nrihi o \v
776 TE KARERE Hepetcma, 1941
pukapuka. No te ono o nga ra o Aperira, i te tau 1830, i whaka- tungia te Hahi, ko nga mema i tana ra, e ono tangata.
\a. mehemea i tika te homaitanga o tana Tohungatanga Tapu a te Atua ki te tangata, ka whai nga tohu, ara, te mana whakaora, me nga mana katoa i whakaaria mai e tc Karaiti i mua, tera noa ake ka hiritia i roto i te ngakau o ia tangata ka oti nei te iriiri, me te whakapa ringaringa, hei homai te tino kaha o te Wairua Tapu o te Atua. Ko ia tonu te take, i tupu ake te 1 1 alii. a. e naere nei ki nga wahi katoa o te ao. E whakaatu ana nga tangata kua urn ki roto. ae, ko ia ano tenei, ko te Hahi tika tenei o te Atua. no tc- mea, kua tino whai mai nga tohu o te mana o te Atua ki nga tangata e whaka- pono ana.
Xa. E tc iwi. Kei roto i taua pukapuka e kiia nei. te Puka- puka o Moromona, te tino maramatanga o nga tikanga katoa o te Atua. E tautoko ana tenei pukapuka i te Paipera, a, e tautoko ana hoki te Paipera i tenei pukapuka. Otira. ko te tino taonga nui o taua pukapuka, kei reira nga kupu whakaari nui mo te iwi Maori. Kei reira, e whakamarama ana i te wahi i puta mai ai nga Maori, ara, te peheatanga i hono atu ai te iwi Maori ki a Hohepa. Kei reira ano hoki te whakaaturanga, tera ka puta mai tenei pukapuka i roto i te ringa o tetahi tangata o nga Tauiwi, a mana, ara. ma ratou ia e kawe atu ki nga uri o Hohepa e noho marara nei ki nga moutere o te moana.
Xa. e ki ana te poropiti Maori onamata mo te wa ka tae atu tenei pukapuka ki nga morehu o te whare o Iharaira. TT. Niwhai, 30- te 4 , me te 5, me te 6 o nga rarangi.
"4. Katahi te toenga o o tatou uri ka moliio ki a tatou, ki te putahga mai o tatou i roto i Hiruharama. ki a ratou ano hoki he uri no nga Hurai.
"5. A ka whakapuakina te Kongo Pai o Ihu Karaiti i roto i a ratou ; no reira, ka whakamohiotia ano ratou ki te mohiotanga ki o ratou matua, ki te matauranga ano hoki i matau ai o ratou matua ki a Ihu Karaiti.
"6. Ko reira hari ai o ratou ngakau: no te mea ka mohio ratou ki tenei he manaakitanga ki a ratou na te ringaringa o te Atua : ka timata ka marere iho enei unahi pouriuri i o ratou kanohi : a e kore e maha nga whakatupuranga i roto i a ratou e pahemo kua riro ratou hei iwi kiritea, e painga ana."
Heoi ra, E te iwi. Kua tae mai enei tangata ki te motu nei. He nui nga kupu poropiti o 0 matou matua Maori i puta i mua i a ratou, e tino homai ana ki a tatou i nga tohu o tenei iwi i whakaritea nei e te Atua, hei kawe atu ki te whare o Iharaira te mana me te ora o o tatou matua. XTa, e haere ana ratou ki nga motu katoa, kahore he tono, kahore he utu. Kei te hanga ratou inaianei he Temepara Tapu kei Hawaiki. (Kua oti.)
Kati ake i kone.i Kua whakahokia te patai nei. Kei te tino mohio matou katoa. ki te mea ka hiahia pono te tangata kia mohio, e tika ana ranei tenei, ka homai e te Atua ki a ia taua. mohiotanga ki
Hepetema, 1941 TE KARERE 777
te mea ka rapu te tangata i runga i te ngakau inoi. Me tenei ano, e niohio ana matou ka nui te kaha o te Rewera ki te ki, ki nga tangata katoa, "Ehara tenei, e kore e taea ranei." Otira, E te iwi, kei konei te kaha me te niana e taea ai e tatou te whakaroa i to tatou noho i tenei ao, e hari ai, e koa ai o tatou ngakau, a, kei konei ano te ora mo te wa e tutaki ano tatou ki to tatou Matua Ora Tonu i te Rangi.
Xa, ma te Atua tatou katoa e whakakaha, e whakamarama,
Xa to koutou teina i roto i a te Karaiti,
XA WIREMU TAKANA.
NGA MATENGA
URUPAINA KATI AIURUPARA.
Kua mate a Urupaina Ka.ti Murupara o te Peka o Kerepehi. Takiwa o Hauraki i te 1 o nga ra o Hurae, 1941, ki te hohipera o Thames. Ko tana tinana i ma.ungia mai ki te Hoe-o-tainui takoto ai. XTo te 3 o nga ra ka tapukena tana tinana i raro i te whakahaere o Tatana Arona.
Haere ra e tama, haere i runga i nga kupu whakarite. Xa Ihowa i homai, na Ana ano i tango atu.
— Xa H. Houctana i ripoota. HORA MOKEXA.
Xo te 4 o Hurae ka moe a Hora Mokena i te moenga roa. He wahine hoki e arohatia ana e nga kaumatua e kauwhau ana i rut" i Taranaki.
Na Taka Toroaiwhiti i ropoata. HARIATA IIAIKA.
I mate a Hariaia Haika o te Peka o Ngawha i te ra i mnri mai te whanau tanga o tana peepi i te 3 o nga ra o Hune, 1941. He tino aroha tona matenga. Kei muri nei ko tona hoa tane a Nfgareta Haika me a raua tama-riki e ono. Haere ra e h<>a. Haere.
Na Hinehou Nchua i rop
! GENEALOGY
i By I eao W ii< i ii a \ \
THE WAV TO PERFECTION I Cottage Meetings for September.
Sop. 1 Lesson 5, "The Way of Life."
I ,, 11 — Lesson 6, "lYr mortal Preparation."
IS — Lesson 7, "Appointment of Lim
25 — Lesson 8, "These I will make my Rulers."
♦ E nga ropu main whakapapa o ia peka o ia peka whaka i haeretia nga po Taite. Te -M Hepetema me wehe te nei ra
I hei whakamaharatanga ki \r Propiti Elohepa Mete, me if
• homaitanga kia ia e '<• A.nahera e Moronai nga papa koura t (K(,l<l plates) o to pukapuka a Iforomona.
i Slogan: "Ko to kororia o to Atua ko to mataun
!
77* TE KARERE Hepetetaa, ll>41
Mutual Improvement Association
CIRCULAR Greetings to M.I. A. Officers.
The purpose of the Mutual [mprovement Association is to help establish in the hearts of the people of the Church, and of interested non-members, a testimony of the truth of the Restored Gospel of Jesus Christ— especially as expressed in their daily lives — thai is, to help make true Latter-day Saints of them, and to bring tin's about by providing, in the Spirit of the Gospel, means, guidance, and direction for developing the native talents of the members and for satisfying their natural desires for recreational, cultural and religious activities.
To impress upon all our activities the divinely inspired M.I.A. purposes may not always be easy; but in achieving it fully, or in part, the organization will render its greatest service. Indeed its very existence depends upon its so doing. To join with all agencies [in- human betterment without relinquishing this high purpose, offers a stirring challenge to the best efforts of M.I.A. leaders; as the officers are thus charged with the responsibility of leadership in recreation for the entire Church above Primary age, operating, of course, under the direction of the Priesthood, it behoves all officers to enter upon their duties with a determination to serve as long as possible, as it is through the continued service of faithful officers that the organization is most benefitted — again serve with all your might.
With these thoughts uppermost in our minds, we ask of you, "Is your Association functioning?"
Owing to the monthly reports not being sent in to us regularly. we feel that many branch organizations are dormant; and so we beg of you officers to get together immediately and discuss your problems with a view of becoming active once more.
All branches should send in their monthly reports; instead only seven are doing so at present — 1 from the Hauraki District. 1 from the Bay of Islands, 3 from Hawke's Bay, and 2 from Whangarei.
Re Gold and Green Balls. — Tt is the desire of the Board that they be carried out as usual, endeavouring always to maintain their usual high standard. However, the nett profits are to be divided as follows: One-third sent to the Board's Office; one-third to aid Patriotic Purposes; one-third retained in the Branches.
N.B. — Please send the dates of your balls as soon as possible to Sister Una Tamihana. Box 61, Dannevirke.
In conclusion we wish to remind you to take care in advertising so as not to mislead the people that the proceeds of your balls arc- all for Patriotic purposes.
Kia Kuita — Kia Toa — Kia Ora Katoa.
, Most sincerely,
July 16, 1941. MUTUAL BOARD.
Hepetema, 1941 TE KARERE 779
SUNDAY SCHOOL
Theme —
"OUR HOMES AND CHAPELS SHALL BE BEAUTIFUL" j "For Zion must increase in beauty and in Holiness; her borders J must be enlarged; her stakes must be strengthened ; yea verily I say unto you. Zion must arise and put on her beautiful garments."
— Doctrine & Covenants 82 : 14.
SACRAMENT GEM The law was broken, Jesus died
That justice might be satisfied. That man might not remain the slave,
Of death, of hell, or of the grave.
CONCERT RECITATION " . . As for me and my house, we will serve the Lord."
KORERO A NGAKAU "... Ko ahau ia me toku whare, ka mahi matou ki a Ihowa."
HYMNS
For both Maori and Pakeha — learn two new opening hymns.
N.B. — Is it si range that no text has been given with the Concert Recitation? If it is strange, then it is an opportunity for you to find and read. This much is given — from Old Testament.
— S.S. Superintendent. j
REMEMBER ?
Third Quarterly Reports to be posted BEFORE September 20th, 1941. Read pages 752 and 753 of August, 1941, issue of "Te Karere" for reference.
IMPORTANT!
All Sunday Schools throughout the Mission will please follow out- lined lessons as printed in "Te Karere." Schools already complying are commended for their desire to conform to the suggested thought. All Schools are asked to use lessons printed as from September 7th. L941. District Superintendents and Mission Board members are directly responsible for this instruction being carried out.
REPORTS.
For tic Firsl Quarter of this year, L8 Sunday Schools reported. For the Second Quarter of tins year. :;i Sunday Schools reported.
All Homo or Subsidiary Sunday School8 (Schools organized in
homes or localities imt are part of :m organized Branch) are
to forward immediately to their parent body (organi : Branch of
which they arc 8 part) a completed report not later than FIVE days
after the last Sunday in each quarter. This report will be checked
by the parent body for "L.D.S. Population" to eliminate duplication.
780 TE KARERE Hepetema, 1941
and sent back immediately, after which the Home or Subsidiary School will fill out TWO other forms, sending one to the Mission Secretary, Sunday School, Box 72, Auckland; one to the District Superintendency and the other for their own use.
Every Sunday School that has so far been organized must send in a report.
To bring our Schools reporting up to date — First Quarter, Koro- ngata; Second Quarter, Korongata, Heretaunga, Huria. This makes the total: First Quarter, 18; Second Quarter, 31.
Sixpenny Funds received since last "Karere" are from — Korongata, Heretaunga, Te Horo, Huria, Nuhaka and Puketapu.
Sunday School Mis- sion Superintendency
and Board Members named by /'resident Cowley at Korongata, July 27, 1941: Superin- tendency — Kelly Har- ris, Joseph Hay, lint T. Kitpa. Board Mem- bers — Sydney Craw- ford, Rakaipaka Puriri and Joseph R. Tengaio.
LESSONS
KINDERGARTEN. Thoughts for teachers: "Obedience." (Arrange your lesson material to cover the month.) "Joseph and His family Return to Their Own Country." (Matt. 2.)
"Childhood of Jesus." (Luke 2.) PRIMARY. (Lessons to cover month.)
"A Strange Attempt to Reach Heaven.'' (Gen. 9.)
Thought: "Boasting is a dangerous thing and not pleasing to the Lord.)
"A Youth of Chaldea." (Gen. 12, 13. Pearl of Gt. Price, Abraham 1,2.)
Thought: "Obedience brings the blessings of the Lord." "A Child of Promise." (Gen. 17, 18, 19.) Thought: "Any blessing is possible with the Lord."
CHURCH HISTORY— Book of Mormon.
A and B DEPARTMENTS (Lessons to cover month).
"People United in Folly." (Gen. 11; Matt. 6.)
Problems: What is the proper way to get into heaven? Did the Lord oppose unity or purpose? Conditions after the flood.
"The Father of Nations." (Gen. 11, 12.)
Problems: What kind of parental influence did Abraham live under while in Chaldea? Why did the Lord call Abraham? Quote the bless- ings given to Abraham?
C DEPARTMENT (Lessons to cover month).
"At Jerusalem — Attending the Feast of the Passover." (John 2, 3.) Problems: How do you account for the fact that Jesus, a young despised Galilean, could cleanse the temple without help? What were the prevailing interests of the Jewish rulers as illustrated in the events of this lesson? What excuse did the Jews have for being in the Temple doing their trading? What must they do with the temple and with themselves to become fit for the kingdom of God? What does it mean to be "born again"?
"At Jacob's Well and at Sychar." (John 4). Problems: Give thr e good reasons why the woman of Samaria was amazed when spoken to by Christ? Cite examples in this lesson in which Christ shows that He is divine and that He is human?
GOSPEL DOCTRINE (Lessons to cover month).
"Era of Elisha." (B.C. 895.) (11 Kings 2, 3, 4.)
"The Siege of Samaria." (B.C. 894-892.) (11 Kings 5, 6, 7.)
"The Accession of Jehu." (B.C. 884.) (11 Kings 8, 9, 10.)
Hepetema, 1941 TE KARERE 781
MAORI CLASS—
RATAPU TUATAHI
Mo te WHAKAWAKANGA. Kei a Ihu Karaiti te mana ki te whakawa i te tangata, e whakahaeretia e la tenei kia rite ano hei tatu- tanga pai mo ana mea katoa, ko aua mea nei ano hoki ko a Tona Matua e pai ana. Kua tuhituhia e Hoani nga kupu a te Karaiti — "E kore hoki te Matua e whakawa i tetahi, engari kua tukua e la nga whakawa katoa ki te Tama, kia rite ai te whakahonore a nga tangata katoa i te Tama ki ta ratou whakahonore i te Matua, ki te kahore tetahi e whaka- honore i te Tama e whakakahore ano ia i te honore mo te Matua nana nei Ia i tono mai." A ia Pita e whakamarama ana i te Rongonai ki te tangata whakapono o nga Tuiwi kia Koroniria e mea ana mo Ihu Karaiti ara: "Ko Ia ta te Atua i whakarite ai hei kai-whakawa mo nga tangata ora, mo nga tangata mate." Mo te mate mo te hunga kino kua takoto mai mo te ra whakawa he maha nga poropiti kua whai whakaaturanga a me te Timuaki o nga kai whakawa o taua whakawa- kanga whakawehi kua homai he whakaaturanga nana ake nga kupu ano te marama me te u e kore e taea te karo. Ko nga wairua katoa e karangatia ana ki te whakaatu i te tika o nga whakaaturanga mo ona me te whakaae ki te whakataunga mo ana mahi. Nga kupu a te Ariki me a ona poropiti e tino marama ana. E hara ia i te kai whaka- pai kanohi, a ko te whakatuara ki tetahi, e poka ke ana i to tika e tau hou ana ia ki tera ahua. Ki tenei whakawakanga ko te hunga tutu ripeneta kore anake e ahei kia wehi. Ki te hunga tika ia he koanga. Nga Patai:
1. Kei a wai te mana mo te whakawakanga o nga tangata katoa?
2. E pehea ana hoki tana whakataunga?
3. He aha i riro ai mana e whakawa?
RATAPU TUARUA
MO TE HARA. He aha te ahua o te hara? Mo tenei patai koia tenei te whakautu a Hoani te Apotoro. 'Te tangata e mea ana i te hara, he takahi tana i te ture; he takahi hoki te hara i te ture." I roto i te reo tuatahi o nga whakaaturanga o te Paipera, he maha nga kupu i huaina mo ta tatou kupu kotahi mo te hara, otira, katoa enei kupu kotahi ano te tatunga atu o nga tikanga ara he pokanga ketanga i ta te Atua i pai ai. I te mea ko te Atua te toputan.ua o nga mea tika katoa, ko taua pokanga ketanga he whakakahore i nga tikanga mo te haere whakamua he whakamaunga atu ki nga meatanga e tika atu hei ki te tapokotanga. Ko te hara ahakoa ko tehea ahua. te kore e whakarite i nga mea e ahei ana kia whakaritea ko te whakarite ranei i nga mahi kahore nei e whakaaetia kia mahia, ko taua ahua te aupiki- tanga 0 to te tangata wairua, i te mea ko te huarahi tika e maro atu ana ki te oranga tonutanga, waihoki ko te hara e kukuuio aua ki to pouritanga o te matenga tuarua. Ko te hara he mea whakamohio mai ki te ao e Hatana; otira, na to Atua to whakaaot anga ki to tangata kia tukua kia tutaki ki te hara, to mohiotanga ki te rereketanga o te kino me to pai he mea kite i te tutukitanga atu ki aua mea.
Nga Patai:
1. He alia te whakautu a llnani mo tonoi lie aha to hara'.'
-. Ki ta nga korero karaipiture he aha te tino tatutanga o tenei
mea 0 te hara'.'
RATAPU TUATORU
M() TE HARA A\<>. Te tikanga mo te kupu hara i rungi tirohanga matauranga, he tututanga i te ture i ranga i tenei I ko te hara he whakamahinga i runga i te mohio i te kore mohi<
782 TE KARERE Hepetema, 1(M1
E tino marama ana hoki i runga i nga whakaakoranga karaipitun* mo i tga pikaunga ma te tangata, i runga hoki i te tika tuturu o te Atua, ara i roto i ona haranga i roto ranei i ana mahi tika. Ka whakawakia te tangata i runga ano i te kaha o tona mohio me te ngohengohe ki nga ture. Ki te tangata kaore nei ano kia whakamohiotia ki nga ture o runga, ko te whakamahinga o aua ture e kore e pa nui kia ia. Ko nga hara hoki i mahia i runga i te kore mohio — ara, mo nga ture i tututia i runga i te kuare, he takawaenga he mea whakarite mai ; ko te ripekatanga o te Karaiti; a ko nga mahi o te hara i runga i tenei ahua kaore e pa te whakawakanga kia ratou, otira, e hoatu he wahi kia ratou hei akonga, hei whakaaetanga hoki hei whakakahore ranei i te Rongopai.
Nga Patai:
1. He aha te tikanga o te kupu i runga i te tirohanga matauranga?
2. Ka peheatia te whakawakanga i te tangata?
3. He aha te wahi i hoatu ki te hunga takahi ture i runga i te kuaretanga?
RATAPU TUAWHA
MO TE HARA ANO. I whakaakona e Hakopa tenei whaka- akoranga. "Noreira kua homai e ia he ture, a ki te kahore he ture i homai ki tetahi, kahore ano hoki he whiunga, a ki te mea kahore he whiunga, kahore ano hoki he whakahenga; a ki te kahore he whaka- henga, ka whai tikanga nga mahi tohu a te Mea Tapu O Iharaira ki runga kia ratou, he mea na te houhanga a rongo ; no te mea ka whaka- orangia hoki ratou e tona mana, ma te whakamarietanga hoki e whaka- rite nga tono a tona tika ki nga tangata katoa kihai nei i hoatu taku ture ma ratou, a e whakaorangia ratou i taua tarakona nanakia, i te mate raua ko te reinga, me te rewera me te roto ahi whakariki, koia te whakamamaetanga mutunga kore; a ka whakahokia ano ratou ki taua Atua nana ratou i whai manawa ai, koia nei te mea Tapu o Iharaira. Ina poka ke ka tapiritia mai e te poropiti: "Otira aue te mate mo te tangata e hoatu nei te ture kia ia, ae ra, mo te tangata kei a ia nei nga ture katoa a te Atua, penei me tatou, a takahia ana e ia, me te maumau ano i nga ra o tona oranga, he tu wehi rawa hoki tona. E tino pa tuturu ana tenei ki nga whakaakoranga a Paora ki te hunga o Roma. "Te hunga hoki i hara ture kore, ka ngaro ture kore ano hoki ; me te hunga i hara i runga i te ture, kei te ture ano he whakahe mo ratou. A ko nga kupu o nga karaipiture o naianei e pera ana ano te tututanga, no te mea, kua kiia mai kia tatou, i roto i nga whakakitenga ki te Hahi i enei wa, ara i roto i nga mea kua whiwhi ki nga manaakitanga mo te hokonga a te Karaiti, ko ratou ko nga mea "i mate ture kore," ka uru mai ki enei te hunga mohoao (heathen), kua whakaaria mai nei kua hokona ratou me te kupu tapiritia mai "A ko reira ora ai nga iwi Atua kore, me te hunga kaore i matau ki te ture ka whiwhi wahi ratou i roto ite aranga tuatahi, ko te wahi mana hoki mo ratou.
Nga Patai:
1. Pehea te ahua mehemea kahore i homai he ture?
2. Pehea te kupu whakaari mai mo te hunga mohoao?
Mission heads of Sunday School, Y.M.M.I.A., Y.W.M.I.A., j J Relief Society, and Primary, named by Mission Supervisor of
I Church Vv elf are Programme, Elder Wi Pere Amaru, at Korongata j
J Pioneer Celebrations, July 27th, 1941, as members of Mission j
♦ Council directing Welfare Programme. »
Hepetema, 1941 TE KARERE 783
PRIMARY
MEMORY GEM "Love your enemies, do good to them that hate you."
LESSONS:
FIRST WEEK
FAITH AND TRUST IN GOD Objective:
To find out that God will care for us if we put our trust in Him. Suggestions for Teaching:
The test of the love of God is keeping His commandments. It becomes our duty then as teachers, to early direct the children to increase their faith by doing good things.
A WOMAN'S FAITH (Text: Matt. 9:20-22; Mark 5:25-34)
One day Jesus was on his way to Capernaum to heal a little girl who was very ill.
As He started through the crowd, many people came forward to speak to Him or to ask Him questions. Every moment of delay made the worried father more anxious. He felt that if Jesus did not arrive at his home soon it would be too late.
In the crowd there was a poor woman who was so ill that she had given up hope of ever being well again. She had spent all her money for doctors, but instead of getting better she was worse, and had now become very, very poor.
She had heard of Jesus and the people who had been healed by Him. Even though she had often been near by when He had performed a miracle, she did not have the courage to go up to Him and ask Him to make her well. When she saw how kindly He smiled at Jairus, she longed more than ever to be healed.
"Perhaps," she thought, "He will never notice me in all this crowd. If I can touch His clothes, I shall be whole."
So she quietly crept nearer and nearer, and at last managed to reach out her hand and touch His clothes. That very moment she felt strong and well again. Trembling with excitement, she tried to slip back into the crowd. But Jesus turned quickly and, looking round, he said, "Who touched me?"
The disciples were surprised that He should ask such a question. The crowd was so great that there were many people touching Him almost all the time. But Jesus knew that the touch of the woman was different from the pressure of the crowd, for she had touched Him with a prayer in her heart that she would be healed and had trusted that He could heal her.
The frightened woman fell down before Him and told Him her
story.
Then JeSUS said to her, "Thy faith hath made thee whole. Go in peace."
SECOND WEEK
Objective:
To give the children an hour of joyous sell' expression. Suggestions for Teaching:
"Everyone, from the King's son downwards, should learn to <\^ something finely and thoroughly with his hands." Ruskin,
784 TE KARERE Hepctema, 1(M1
"Every child is known by his doings, whether his work be fine and whether it be right."
Sometimes we get in a hurry and are careless and the result is not very nice work. Sometimes we get weary before a task is completed and miss the joy of a task well-done.
People judge us by what we do and say.
Story:
SALLY'S CLEAN APRON
A lady wanted a trusty little girl to help her take care of her baby. Nobody could recommend one, and she did not know where to look for the right kind of girl. One day she was passing along the street and saw a little girl with a clean apron holding a baby. She was sitting in the door way of a small house.
'That is the very girl I should like to take care of my baby," said the lady. She stopped and asked the girl for her mother.
"Mother has gone to work," was the reply. "Father is dead and mother has to work."
"Should you like to come and take care of my baby sometimes?" asked the lady.
"I should like to help my mother in some way."
The lady, more pleased than ever, called to see her mother; and the end was that the little girl was to go several days a week to care for the lady's baby.
The lady found what she expected to find — that the neat appear- ance of the girl showed that her mind was clean and orderly, too. She had no careless habits; she folded and put things away carefully and was neat in all that she did. The lady smiles when she says "Sally's recommendation was her clean apron."
THIRD WEEK
JOSEPH AND HIS BROTHERS
Objective:
In order to please the Lord we must have a forgiving spirit. Suggestions for Teaching:
How dull my pupils seemed
The day that I forgot To look at them with kindly eyes and smile. And yet, on other days
When I was glad and matched My zest for life with theirs, they seemed so bright!
— Marie Hays Spence. Lesson Approach
Fill a small glass bottle with wheat and another with corn. Pass to the children and let them look at them. What is it? Show picture of a wheat field, or a corn field, or both if possible.
To-day we are going to hear how the grain that Joseph stored in Egypt helped his brothers. First, I'll tell you part of our last week's story again.
Lesson Story:
BROTHERS GO TO EGYPT
Remember, Joseph lived in Egypt — far, far away from his father and brothers. He could not go home, much as he wished to, so h"e did the very best he could there. He worked hard, and Heavenly Father blessed him so that he grew to be a good and wise man.
He was as wise that even Pharaoh, the king of Egypt, heard about him. And when Pharaoh was in trouble he sent for Joseph. Heavenly
Hepetema, 1941 TE KARERE 785
Father caused Pharaoh to have two strange dreams. He knew that they must mean something, but none of his wise men could tell him the mean- ing of them. For days Pharaoh was greatly troubled. Then one day he sent for Joseph. Joseph stood before the king and listened to his dreams.
"Both of your dreams mean the same," said Joseph. "For seven years there will be plenty of food throughout the land of Egypt. Then seven years of famine will follow. During the seven good years, food and grain must be stored up so that the people will not starve during the years when the corn will not grow."
"That will be a wise thing to do," said the king. Whom did the king choose to gather up and store the grain during the seven years of plenty?
Joseph was very busy after that. He had big store houses or granaries buiilt in which to store the grain. He had the farmers plant all the corn and wheat they could. Then when the grain was ripe he had them store what they did not need in the granaries. For seven years everybody worked hard. Heavenly Father sent sunshine and rain and the grain grew plentifully.
Then there came a time when the seeds that were planted could not grow for the sun was hot and no rain fell. The people were hungry. Joseph opened the granaries and sold them food.
Far away from Egypt in Joseph's old home there was no food. His father and brothers were hungry. Jacob said to his sons, "I have heard there is corn in Egypt. Go down and buy so we will not die of hunger." So ten of the sons took donkeys and started for Egypt to buy food. Jacob would not let Benjamin go. He was afraid some harm might come to the boy, and kept him at home.
The ten brothers went to Joseph to buy corn. They did not know that this great man was their brother whom they had sold so many years before.
When they came into the large room where Joseph was, they bowed down before him. When Joseph saw them he knew who they were, and thought of his dream. Do you remember it? His dream had come true. Joseph did not let his brothers know that he knew them. He might have sent them away without food to punish them for their unkindness to him when he was a boy. But what do you suppose he did? Of course, he forgave them. Before he gave them corn to take home, he asked them where they came from. They said that they came from Caanan to buy corn. Joseph pretended not to believe them and said, "Ye are spies." "Oh, no," they said, "we are brothers. There were twelve of us; one Benjamin is with our father, and one is not."
Joseph longed to see Benjamin again for he loved him. He said, "I shall keep one of you here. The others may go back with the corn, When you come again you must bring Benjamin with you. If yen do (his, then I shall believe that what you have said is true."
The brothers were sad. Joseph was sad, too. His eyes Ailed with tears. He went away from them and wept. After awhile he talked with his brothers again. He chose Simeon to stay and told the others to get ready for their journey. Thm he told his servant to till his brother's sacks with coin, and on top of the corn to put the money
they had paid for it.
After the long journey, the nine brothers reached homo. They
told their father all that had happened --how the great ruler would
not believe them; how he had kept Simeon in Egypt and had said that they must m>t c<nnc again to buy com unless they brouj hi Benjamin with them. And when they opened thru- sacks of corn what did they
find They kmwv that the corn was a present and they Could not under- stand.
TE ECARERE Hepetema, 1941
We must wait for the next story about Joseph to know what hap- pened the next time the brothers went to Egypt to buy corn.
Conversation After the Story:
How did Joseph treat his brothers when he had a chance to "gel even" with them? Jesus said, "Love your enemies, do good to them that hate you." If we remember this story, how will we treat our playmates when they are unkind to us? (Teacher give examples.)
FOURTH WEEK
THE POWER OF PRAYER Objective:
The prayer of faith brings comfort, help and protection. Suggestions for Teaching:
One of the greatest needs of the world to-day is more faith in our Heavenly Father and a greater willingness to seek His divine guid- ance through prayer. The teachers' attitude and spirit will do much to impress the truth of this lesson.
Lesson Story:
NOT ALONE
Andy stepped out of the little one-room house with the dirt floor and stood watching the sun go down. This was the hardest part of the day for him, to have it grow dark and to be alone out on this big, lone- some ranch. Of course he wouldn't have admitted it to anybody. Far from it. But still for a boy of eleven to stay alone on the ranch to take care of the stock was pretty much of a job and he was looking forward to the time when his brother would be better and Dad could come back and be with him.
He'd felt proud the way Dad had looked at him when he said he would stay and take care of the ranch. That ranch was a very im- portant place. There were eight big teams that they used on the con- tracts that Dad took from time to time, and then there was a cow to milk, chickens to take care of, and then somebody had to keep watch and drive out the cattle that were all around the place and kept getting in the grain and corn.
They had just finished dinner, the day before yesterday, and were coming out of the house when a messenger came galloping up.
"Mr. Andrews, your youngest son is very ill with diphtheria. Your vife wants you to come to town at once. Unless there is a turn for the setter he won't last long."
"I'll have to get some one to stay with the stock and keep any strays from getting in the field. I'll ride over to the Gonzalas' place and see if one of their men will come over."
Andy was surprised to hear Dad say that. He'd heard him say before that he didn't like those people on the place for they usually carried off enough things to make them rather unsatisfactory. Nello must be pretty sick.
"Maybe I could stay with the place." Andy had said, a little sur- prised to hear himself say it.
"I'm afraid that would be a little too much for you, Son," said his did. "This is quite a lonesome place, you know, and there's lots to be done. I'd better go get a man, I guess. You might stay with one of them and kinda help watch things."
"But, Father, I don't like to stay with the Mexicans. They smoke in the house and I can't understand them and they talk about me and laugh. I can stay aione. Honest I can. I can grain the horses and
Hepetema, 1941 TE KARERE 787
milk the cow and with old Tip to help I can drive any old cows out of the corn if they get in."
"All right, Son. Go bring the horses up and put them in the corral so I can saddle Flash. I'll let the stirrups out and — " It was the way Dad had looked at him then that made Andy feel good inside. "Hurry. I must get started."
Andy hadn't said much as his father rode off. He didn't dare to. Just kissed him goodbye and stood watching him until he galloped out of sight a mile and a half away. That was more than two days ago and so far he'd kept things going fine. But now it was almost night again and he'd have to drive the horses to the big springs for water.
He liked that job. The horses seemed to, also; especially when they weren't working, like now. They'd gallop along and pretend to kick and bite at each other, and old Tip would run along and bark playfully at them. It was just a mile to the big springs and he some- times wished that he had to take them oftener than twice a day.
The big springs were funny. Some called them hot springs but they weren't hot. Just warm. Just right for swimming, and when some other kids were there they had a lot of fun. But Dad didn't want him to swim in them when he was alone.
Dad had said that they were really holes in an underground lake. That the lake was all over under the ground and was covered with a layer of lime rock. Anyway all the ropes they had tied together with a rock on the end wouldn't touch the bottom, so they were pretty deep. And you could take a stick and poke it back under the edge of those springs and the stick wouldn't touch anything. They didn't do much diving in the springs because if a fellow came up back under that wall it would be just too bad.
Andy galloped along easily after the horses. He liked to watch Dad's favourite team. Two big mules, Bill and Tom. They stood fourteen hands high and Dad said they could do more work than two ordinary teams of horses. Bill's long ears looked like they were loose the way they wobbled back and forth as he walked.
When they got nearly to the springs the horses all began to gallop harder because the days were hot and they were all thirsty. Old Tom and Bill arrived at the big spring and were drinking, but evidently they weren't through playing. Bill .nipped at Tom and Tom jerked back and he must have slipped. Anyway Andy heard a big splash, and the next instant Tom was out in that big spring swimming around and trying to climb out. But every time he put his feet on the bank where there was a low place, his hind feet went under the bank and he'd splash under all over.
Andy stood watching him for a minute. It was easy to see he couldn't keep that up long. Pretty soon he'd tire out and go under, then Dad's favourite team would be broken up. Andy didn't even have a rope. And it was nearly dark. The nearest help was the Mexican houses about three miles away and something told him that that would be too long a wait even if they would come and help him.
Well, maybe if he made this saddle horse go as fast as he could, he could get to the house and get a rope and maybe help a little.
The next instant he was in the saddle and tiding full speed. A hundred yards away he stopped and looked kirk. II, -till could Bee old Tom BWimming around. He jumped on the horse and. holding the reins over One arm, he dropped on his knees,
"Please, Father in Heaven, don't lot old Tom drown. Help me
to know what to do to gel him out. Ami please don't let him drown
'cause I want to take | I 'air ofthingSlintll Dad gets kirk."
He jumped to his feet ;ind in fifteen muni!, kirk
from the house with a rope. It was getting darker. He rode fast
788
TE KARERE
Hepetema, \l)A\
and straight to the big spring, llv'd get a rope on the mule's Qeck and then tie it if he could so he wouldn't go under and then go for help.
And then he was so startled he almost fell off the horse. For there right in the road was old Tom. He was still very wot, but he was grazing along as if nothing had happened. Andy jumped off his horse and knelt down again. He was so thankful that it felt like his heart came right up in his throat and he had to keep blinking his eyes.
When he got in sight of the house there was a light. He raced gladly to welcome Dad. He gave him a big hug and was turning away to put the horses in the pasture when Dad said, "Well how do you like staying alone, Andy? Nello is a lot better."
"It wasn't bad, Father, because I found out that I wasn't as much alone as I thought."
Then he told about old Tom.
Conversation After the Story:
Are our prayers always answered? Let us see why?
NEWS FROM THE FIELD
AUCKLAND DISTRICT
The news is not so much, but still it is Rood stuff. President Cowley and his jrood wife have been "doing the town in fine style" lately. Why, just to-night, after returning from a meeting of the English Speaking Union, they both were very pleased to have been able to accept the invitation to attend. According to Sister Cowley — "Why President was right up there with all the high society, etc." — there was former Mayor Sir Ernest Davis, His Grace former Archbishop Averill of the Church of England, who, by the way, introduced Mr. Matthew Cowley as the speaker of the e-vening, Canon Coats, Mr. Eady, Mr. Groeninger (American Consul), and many others.
The Auckland Branch Singing Mothers made their first public appearance at a Branch Concert held in the Chapel, Queen Street, promoted by Brothers Harold Stokes and Walter Smith in aid of Branch funds. The concert was the result of "repeat request" of a concert held about a month previously. Takings were indeed very gratifying. The Relief Society of the Branch were responsible by way of a "Bazaar" in adding to the patriotic funds account the amount of £30. This is indeed a fine effort and was thankfully received and appreciated by the Patriotic Council. It is also worthy of mention that the Branch Re- lief Society is a really active and grow- ing organization Keep it up.
Peter A. Smith of Whakaki was bap- tized by Kelly Harris at Auckland Sun- day, August 3rd, 1941, and President Cowley voiced the confirmation.
WAIKATO DISTRICT
Reported by Dave Ormsby and
Douglas Whatu
In the past quarter the number of
meetings held throughout the District
have increased in value spiritually and
otherwise. Sunday School meetings are
held regularly in all of the regularly organized Branches. Because of the cen- sus carried out so far, much contact has been made with the Saints. The work of visiting with the Saints is an import- ant work that is being carried out every- where, and special mention is made of the work accomplished by brother Howard Osborne and his associates in Taumarunui in holding meetings and visiting the people.
The District Presidency is looking to all branches to respond to the call to work more sincerely and diligently in their various organizations. What's hap- pened to the Sunday Schools in this dis- trict?
We are gratified at the marked im- provement in the condition of Maisie Turinui who has been an inmate of the Waikato Hospital for the past two years, the major portion of which she has been bed-ridden. The fact that she is now able to walk must be attributed to her strong faith, irrespective of the advances made to her from other sources.
Brother and Sister John Paki announce with pride and unbridled joy the birth of "another girl," which makes the ninth of a family of 11. Congratulations. But my, are they all going to be nurses. John?
By the way, all Branch Whakapapa boards, send in the accounts of your work. We would be pleased to hear from SEVEN Boards instead of just THREE.
We hope that Brother Stockman's family will recover very quickly from the physical ailments now bothering them. Kia kaha e hoa ma
MAHIA DISTRICT
Reported by Elsie Loader
Reporter's apologies for the omission
of news from this district for the August
issue, however here we are again.
Appointments. — Y.W.MI.A.: Heni Te- ngaio, 1st Counsellor; Ira Mataira, 2nd Counsellor; Rangi Tengaio, teacher of
Hepetema, 1941
TE KARERE
789
Junior Girls. Welfare Officer: Tuati
Whaanga for Nuhaka. Deacons: Tahinga Winiana, Ropiha Campbell and Reginald Solomon. Baptisms: Jimmy Harete Smith (8), son of Dave and Ripeka Smith of Tahaenui ; Te Hirata Watene, daughter of Maehe and Rumatiki Watene of Waima- rama by Lester Harris. Births: Ngatua- hine 0. Wai Kingi, daughter of Sonny Kingi of Tahaenui.; Tuati Egypt Smith, son of Patricia and Willie Smith of Whakaki.
Preparations are well in hand for the Gold and Green Ball — Queen candidates being Miss Joan Kireka (Camp Queen) and Miss Ira Mataira (Nuhaka Queen). Sid Kamau's orchestra from Korongata, Hastings, will be playing for the Ball. A very successful evening is anticipated.
We regret to hear that Pte. Poneke Te Kauru, son of Hohepa and Heni Te Kauru, is now a prisoner of war. Pte. Tom Waerea is safe, well and happy. Brothers Riki and Cleo Smith, George Pomana and Tom Mahanga are training at Papakura. Quite a number of our Mutual members are patiently waiting to enter camp, having already been medi- cally passed.
The Nuhaka football team were again successful in winning the senior cham- pionships and are scheduled to play the winning team of the Napier-Hastings competitions. Brothers Eru and Joseph R. Tengaio, with Sisters Milly and Rangi Tengaio, were visitors to the Pioneer Day Celebrations held at Korongata July 27th and 28th. Hearty congratulations are ex- tended to Joseph R. Tengaio upon his annointment to the Mission Sunday School Board. Kia kaha brother.
The last week of July has brought much sorrow to Saints and friends in Nuhaka, there being three deaths in one week July 26th, Sister Mihi Whaanga Toroaiwhiti (77), daughter of Mere and Hirini Whaanga and mother of Presi- dent Hirini Christy, passed away peace- fully after having been confined to her bed for nearly four months. The same day, Mary (7), daughter of William and Api Ropitini, died, preceding her brother Henry who died on the 27th; four other members of this family are inmates of
the Wairoa Hospital. Funeral service for Mary Ropitini was held in the I'reshy-
terian Chapel on Sunday, conducted by
Rev. Lawton. Bro. William Christy was
privileged to speak at this service. Henry's last rites were conducted in the I..D.S. Chapel with Rev. Lawton con- ducting a verv [nspiril i lc< , Sis- ter Mihi's funeral service CODlSie I im-
mediately following I he meet ins eon- ducted by Rev. Lawton. Bro Tamahau ii.ii onga, assist, d by Eru Tei Walker an. I William Christy, were in charge of thi ei i Ice, durins which Te Wai I [aronga conl ribut ed ■ < teal tol • . a ml i he Bins Ins. Mot her i ndered a r in . i ii . addre e w< e given bj Eru Tengaio and William < Ihri 1 1 Heart \ sympathy from ail are extended to the relatives of the d< cea • d ■•• hil» ■■ -
and prayers are Tor the speed) r- ■
..I Mi., tour little Ropitini childn n no* in ho pital
Thu
HAURAKI DISTRICT Reported by Rose Watene
Hui Parihi held at Kiri Kiri,
Thames, May 17 and 18, was very suc- cessful June 15 marked the passing of James Watene, elder brother to George and son of Pirimona Watene. The pass- ing of brother Murupara is announced in the Maori notices in this issue.
Sister Anne Whatu Young is grieved at the loss of her 5-months baby boy on July 22. The baby was buried at the Totara Cemetery.
August 2nd, 1941, was the occasion of the 83rd birthday celebrations for Sister Payne of Thames and her twin sister, Mrs. Fisher, which took the form of a party at the home of Sister Payne, where a very large gathering joined in the en- joyable spirit of the occasion.
MANAWATU BRANCH Reported by Polly WiNeera
The newly-organized Branch at Awa- puni, Palmerston North, seems to be do- ing fine, and has only recently been visited by members on the District Pre- sidency and also the Relief Society. Sis- ter Paeroa WiNeera also visited the Wel- lington Relief Society and reports that one of the finest Branches of the District are carrying on their work there.
Member of the Relief Society of the Porirua Branch packed and sent 13 par- cels to the boys from this Branch now serving with the Middle East Forces overseas, on July 30th
Sister Emily Mark, of the Madsen Branch, is now in our midst. Welcome Emily, now that you are one of us (we hear that you are here permanently) ; we expect big things from you. What is Madsen's loss is surely our gain.
On August 1st a party was held by the family of Leo I'arata to honour him on his loth birthday. Friends and rela- tives gathered there to wisli him the best.
HAWKE'S BAY Reported by John T. Meha
Brother Taylor Mihaore is at present
labouring in the Taranaki Districl with Brother Take Toroaiwhiti, where they
are doing some tine work.
Takerei Ihaia is tin- name given to the
"ii Lorn to brother and i .< , r Cliarl.
Solomon of Wandermere, Opapa
.i able comment w as made in t he i . • • I .nice concernins the series of pat riot Ic funct Ion ■ hi id under t hi aus- ■ i the Tapairu
of Waipawa. Of particular men, ion was
H,. ■ Black-out Hail. Worth:
and
on the com- mittee. Who ar .■ ;il ,. t he Btromol . I
irer. •rh.- winner of th<
which
.•ni u 1 1. i.i ., • i Rakaipaka I'm i in competitor In a fold of twentj Ri
i entitled t,. tl,.. iptcial pi i . offered bj
7"|,
II. KARERE
Hepetema, 1941
President Cow h y. Bven if Ha hail not w.n lu- deserved ■ prise for genera] ap- pearance, as his heard was grown with a view to catching the eye. How aboul it. girla ?
TARANAKI DISTRICT Reported by Zena M. Stent The Cribfa family living up the river (Wanganui) were visited by Presidents Tukino Hakopa and Wi Katene of the District Presidency on July 6th, 1941. Sister Cribb has been ill, her recovery is gradual and sure. We hope and pray for your full measure of strength and happi- ness, Sister Cribb. Sister Katene has also been ill lately, and due to the adminis- trations of the Priesthood is now up and about again. The Wanganui Branch is on the rise, particularly financially. We hope that all things will work out for the best always.
Missionaries, Brothers Mihaere report having i the north and south Taranaki, which includes Waitara, New Plymouth, Parihaka, Opunake and Manaia. The Primary Presidency of the Manaia Branch has been released and a new one set up. Honourably released were Sis- ters Martha Morgan, Rita Nuku, Bessie Daymond and Alice Manu. New appoint- ments were Sisters Rita Nuku (Pres.), Bessie Daymond and Doris Manu, coun- sellors, and Caroline Manu secretary. The vacancy in the Relief Society was filled by Sister Martha Morgan, necessi- tated by the death of the Sister Ihipera Henare.
The District Toroaiwhiti and
'isited Saints
OVERSEAS Reported by Polly WiNeera
Eunice I) Smith, daughter of Mr... and
Sister Weston .1. Smith, formerly of Pal- merston North, now of Preston, Idaho.
was married to Rohert Lewis Heesley, a former missionary of New Zealand, by President Quinney in the Logan Temple. Elder Be< Bley has been appointed to the permanent staff of the Union Pacific Rail- ways. It seems as though this young married couple found little else to d i the day after their marriage except plan. six thousand tomato plants in a two-acre lot which his father made over to them. Their home is in Ogden, Utah.
We have to congratulate the following Elders On their recent marriagi s : Elders Westenskow, Price, Taylor, Richard Lam- bert and Kirkland, who is now in the clothing business in Salt Lake. We have to congratulate, also, the following for being such proud daddies: Elders Parker. Hutchinson, Pendleton and Cannon Lam- bert, who is running a large Auto Park called "Evergreen." It is outfitted with fancy water fountains and in the small lakes which he has made he has bred a large number of ducks which float on the water all day long, and this sight seems to be quite effective in the heart of a busy city.
Elder Mason has been called to the United States Army, where he will serve Uncle Sam for two years.
Weston J. Smith also reports that Stanley Pentecost, formerly of Palmer- ston North, is a very prosperous person over in the land of Zion.
Whangarei District Hui Pariha to be held at Mokau, October 25th and 26th, 1941. A cordial invitation is extended to all.
— Wiremu Kingi Rapata Morore H. Piripi Wiremu Pita Pita Reihana Pene GRATITUDE.
Sincere appreciation and thankfulness is extended to Tetana Te Hira of Whatawahata, and to Louis Lanfear of Hastings for their kind thoughts and assistance. — Kelly Harris.
M.I.A. Dance to be held in the Huntly Town Hall on October 2nd. George Brown Regent Dance Band.
SPECIAL:
GOLD AND GREEN BALL—Judea, Friday, 26th Sep- tember. 1941. This event commences the HUI PARIHA of the Hauraki District to he held at Judea, Saturday and Sunday. 27th and 28th September, 1941. Everyone is cordially invited to attend these functions.
Roy Matthews /'ranch President.
-Mr -?k -Mf "m -iff "W W "W itf"ttr ttt"2tr "ttf W ttf W Ttf W Ttf V ~ttf V Ttf
(Continued from Inside Front Cover.)
again. At the Auckland Travel Club, his talks have all been requests on some phase pertinent to Mormonism, its doctrines and principles. The Church Welfare Programme has re- ceived much commendation from the numerous audiences hearing of it and its purpose. The last gathering addressed by President was August 7th, 1941, convened under the auspices of the Auckland Women's Luncheon Club, and again here, the Gospel was preached.
Sister Cowley in her talks to the various women's organizations — "Higher /; Thought Temple," "Y.W.C.A.," "Travel I Club," etc, has told of Church Welfare <f
Programme and other vital topics pertain- BJRki*. I
ing to the Gospel. All of these privileges A tm&^k *J*k have been requested of them, and their values can never be assessed too highly, for the responsibility of preaching the Gospel is as high as the highest in the sight of God.
Jewel Cowley is to be commended very highly for her consistent work with her small group of primary children that meet with her every Saturday morn- ing. Her task is by no means easy. Presi- dency organizations before her have given up the work in despair at the lack of sup- port from parents and children. Persistent efforts, however, have rewarded Jewel with a small but loyal group of children who have attended regularly for months past. In humbleness and with a prayerful heart this is written, more than ever mind- ful of the onerous tasks that are ours. Thankful to our President, his wife and ' daughter in 'heir shouldering lor and with US onr obligations. Tena koutOU. Trna koutOU.
Although the time is past, Te Karere and the Mission wish to he associated in extending congratulations and best wishes lo President and Sister ('<>wle\ on the occasion of their wedding anniversary, celebrated in Dunedin July 13th, and also the besl wishes to President on his birthday, August 2nd.
— Kl'I.I.Y 1 1 tRIS.
m mm mm mm rarti m rti mm mm mm rr ti mm mm mm m
Te Karere I
Established in 1907 Wahanga 35 Noema, 1941 Nama 11
Matthew Cowley Tumuaki Mihana
Kelly Harris Etita
Eru T. Kupa Kaiwhakamaori
Waimate Anaru Kaiwhakamaori
"Ko tenet Pepa i whakatapua hex hapai ake i te iwi Maori hi roto i nga whakaaro-nui.'
"Te Karere" is published monthly by the New Zealand Mission of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, and is printed by THE BUSINESS PRINTING WORKS LTD., 55 Albert Street, Auckland, CI, N.Z. Subscription Rates: 3/- per six months; 5/- per year; £1 for five years; £2/10/- for life. (United States Cur- rency: $1.00 per year; $4.00 for five years; $10.00 for life.)
Address Correspondence, Box 72, Auckland, C.l, New Zealand.
CONTENTS
Editorial — Page
Our November Prophets 824
Special Features —
Ko Te Hokinga Tuarua Mai O Te Karaiti 826
Young New Zealand Missionaries 829
Te Ngakau Mahaki 831
The (all of The Shepherd 832
Church Features —
( renealog} 828
\kn I [aerenga 830
Sundaj Scln.nl 836
Primary 839
Matenga
News from the Field 846
Sundaj S« hool Reports
824 TE KARERE Noema, 1941
Editorial . . .
OUR NOVEMBER PROPHETS
The month of November is the birth month of three of the seven presidents of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter- day Saints. John Taylor, the first of the three, was horn on November 1. L808, in Westmoreland County, England. Of the seven presidents he is the only one who was horn beyond the present boundaries of the United States. In his early youth in England he became a Methodist preacher and his proselyting service for the Methodist cause continued after the removal of his family to Canada in the year 1832. His constant search for truth convinced him that the doctrines of Methodism did not square with Holy Writ so that when the message of the Restoration came to him he recognized in it "The Power of God unto Salvation." He was baptized, con- firmed and ordained an Elder in the Church in the year 1836. From that date until his death on July 25, 1887, his life was surrendered completely to the will of God.
That spirit which impels men to lay down their lives for their fellows kept him at the side of the Prophet Joseph Smith while he was incarcerated in the Carthage Gaol, and only a miracle saved him from the bullets of the murderers. The shadow of martyrdom which the death of the Prophet cast about him was never lifted. His love for the Prophet Joseph, his loyalty to Brigham Young, his devotion to his family and his obedience to eternal truths exposed his life to the hatred of assassins, to the hazards of pioneering in the wilderness, to the persecutions incident to missionary activities, to the unscrupulous chicanery of politicians, and to the unwarrantable cruelty of Government officials. Against this background of martyrdom the brilliance of his soul and the majesty of his character stand out in dazzling relief.
Joseph F. Smith, the sixth President of the Church and the second of the three, was born November 13, 1838, at Far West, Caldwell County, Missouri. At the time of his birth and at the place where he was born persecution against the Saints was so vicious that it seemed as if the gates of Hell would prevail against the Church of God. Mob violence drove innocent men from the sanctity of their homes to prison dungeons. Innocent victims of these outrageous out- laws were dragged before courts, which had respect for neither justice nor legal proceedure, and charged with the
Noema, 1941
TE KARERE
825
foulest offences against the peace and dignity of the foulest fiends that ever besmirched the frontiers of freedom. Among these victims was Hyrum Smith, the father of the future President. He was hailed before the court and condemned to be shot. From such an untimely end he was spared ; but not for long. On June 27, 1844, Hyrum died, with his brother the Prophet, from the powder and ball of assassins.
The trials and hazards of pioneering which John Taylor experienced as a mature man, Joseph F. Smith passed through in infancy, childhood and early youth. At the age of ten he drove two yoke of oxen across the plains. At the age of fifteen he was ordained an Elder and called to the Hawaiian Islands as a missionary. The responsibilities of manhood were so crowded upon him in his tender years that he was denied much of that freedom of motion to which youth is entitled.
Upon the death of Lorenzo Snow, he succeeded by call and by ordination to the Presidency. He was the first of the Presidents to be born within the Church. His qualities of leadership directed by the Divine Will commanded the respect and admiration of all men. As peace came to a war- torn world the mortal eyes of this noble mar. of God were closed against a world which had been both cruel and kind to him. He died November 19, 1918.
Heber J. Grant, the seventh and present leader of the Church, and the third of our November Prophets, was born in Salt Lake City on the twenty-second day of November, 1856. Just as John Taylor was the first of the Presidents to be born in a foreign land and Joseph F. Smith the first to be born within the Church, so President Granl is the first to have been born in the valley of the Great Salt Lake. Like Joseph F. Smith he was reared by a noble mother, the father having died soon after the birth of the son. For more than sixty years he has held positions of great responsibility in the Church. En October, 1882, he was called by revelation to President John Taylor to fill a vacancy in the Quorum of Twelve Apostles; and since November, 1918, he has been the revered President of the Church. He has builded solidly and permanently upon the foundation laid h\ the Prophet Joseph Smith. That which he sets his hand to do he does with all his might. In all dealings with his fellow men, both within and without the Church, he is the soul of honour and righteousness.
M \ 1 1 ii i w Cowley.
826 TE KARERE Nbema, 1941
Ko Te Hokinga Tuarua Mai O Te Karaiti
Na Erata M. W. Mi n
He kape cud korero no te taanga o Hune, 19, 1918, o "Te Karere" i te wa ko Nitama Ramapata, Tinui- aki Mihana, ko Hori R. Kowhira, Etita.
E /v ana ki enei wa nga kupu nei.
"E mohio ana hoki ahau kei te ora toku kai hoko, a i nga wa i muri nei ka tu ki runga ki te whenua; a ahakoa i muri i toku kiri ka pau tenei tinana, ka titiro ano ahau i roto ano i toku Erata M //' Mutt kikokiko ki te Atua. E titiro ano ahau ki a ia,
ahau nei ano; ma oku kanohi, e kore ano e waiho ma te tangata ke e matakitaki atu ; pau rawa oku whatumanawa i roto i a au." (Hopa 19:25-27.)
O nga mahi nui katoa meake ka puta mai, ko tenei: ko te hokinga mai o te Karaiti ki te whenua. I mohio tonu a Hopa i nga wa o muri nei, ka tu Ia ki runga ki te whenua. I te mea he maha nga Karaipiture e tautoko ana i tenei take, kei te titiro nga hahi Karaitiana katoa i nga tohu, ara i nga pakanga me nga rongo pakanga, nga ru whenua me nga mate uruta, ki te tini o nga wahi, me era atu tohu i whakaaturia e te Karaiti i mua i Tona kakenga ki te rangi, otira kahore ratou e marama ana ki enei mea e toru. Tuatahi, nga poropititanga kia tutuki i mua i Tona taenga mai; tuarua, ka pehea ranei Tona hokinga mai; tuatoru, ka hoki mai Ia ki whea, ki a wai ranei.
Mo te take tuatahi e penei ana te korero a Pita, "A ka tonoa e ia a Ihu Karaiti i kauwhautia nei ki a koutou i mua: kua takoto nei te tikanga kia noho ia ki te rangi, kia tae mai ra ano nga wa o te whakahokinga mai o nga mea katoa, o ta te Atua i korerotia e nga mangai o ana poropiti tapu katoa, o te timatanga ra ano o te ao." (Nga Mahi 3: 20-21.) Na, he aha etahi mea kia whakahokia mai i mua i Tona hokinga mai, no te mea kua takoto te tikanga kia noho Ia ki te rangi kia tae mai ra ano taua wa? Me titiro tatou ki te korero a Paora ki te hunga o Teharonika. "Na, he mea tenei na matou ki a koutou, e aku teina, mo te taenga mai o to tatou Ariki o Ihu Karaiti . . . kei tinihangatia i tetahi mea e te tangata, e kore hoki e tae wawe mai kia matua tae mai te takanga atu; kia whakakitea mai ano hoki te tangata o te hara, te tama o te whakangaromanga." Katahi ka mohio tatou e kore hoki Ia e tae wawe mai kia matua tae mai te takanga atu, no reira ka marama tatou ka noho Ia ki te rangi kia tae mai ra ano te wa o te whakahokinga mai o te Rongo-pai i taka atu. Me tenei ano i kite a Hoani Whakakitenga i tetahi anahera e rere ana i waenganui o te rangi, kei a ia te Rongo-pai mau tonu hei kauwhau mana ki nga iwi katoa e noho ana i te whenua. Mana, ara ma taua anahera te Rongopai e whakahoki i mua i te hokinga mai o te Karaiti ki te whenua.
Ka tukua mai hoki e te Atua tetahi karere kia whakapaia te huarahi mo Tona taenga tuarua mai; kia rite hoki ki Tona taenga tuatahi mai. Ko Hoani Kai-iriiri te tangata nana Tona huarahi i whakakatika. Na Maraki tenei poropititanga, "Tenei te unga atu nei e ahau taku karere, mana e whakapai te ara i mua i a au, a kitea rawatia ake kua tae te Ariki, e rapua nei e koutou, ki tona temepara,
Noema, 1941
TE KARERE
827
te anahera o te kawenata, ta koutou e ngakau nui na: nana, tera ia ka tae atu, e ai ta Ihowa o nga mano. A ko wai e u i te ra e tae ai ia? ko wai hoki e tu, ina puta? e rite ana hoki ia ki te ahi a te kai tahi para, ki te horoi a te kai horoi: ka noho ano ia, ka rite ki te kai tahi para, ki te kai whakapai hiriwa, a ka whakapaia e ia nga tama a Riwai, ka whakahemokia to ratou para, ano he koura, he hiriwa: kia tapaea ai e ratou he whakahere ki a Ihowa i runga i te tika. Ko reira te whakahere a Hura raua ko Hiruharama rekaina ai e Ihowa, ka rite ki nga ra o mua, ki nga tau onamata." Mo Tona taenga tuarua mai tenei poropititanga, no te mea i Tona taenga tuatahi mai i whanau mai Ia i runga i te ahua o nga peepi katoa. Engari ko wai e tu i Tona taenga mai? "e rite ana hoki ia ki te ahi a te kai tahi para, ki te horoi a te kai-horoi."
Nga poropititanga mo te kohikohinga o Tana Hunga Tapu i nga ra whakamutunga, "I rongo ano ahau i tetahi atu reo i te rangi, e mea ana, puta mai koutou i roto i a ia, e toku iwi, kei uru tahi koutou ki ona hara, kei pangia koutou e ona whiu." (Nga Whakakitenga 18:4.)
Me te rima tekau o nga waiata a Rawiri te
6 i rima o nga rangi, "Huihuia mai ki a au
HUI PARI HA O k toku hunga tapu, te hunga i whakarite ka- wenata ki a au i runga i te patunga tapu." Na, e mohio ana tatou ko enei mea katoa he poropititanga mo nga ra o muri nei, aia mo nga wa e ki ana a Paora, "Ka whaka-
HUI PARI HA O j WAIKATO.—Ka tu ki \ Puke Tapu, Iluntly a te J 22 me te 23 o Noema, i 1941. Taerc mai e nga \ .
iwi, e ng a hapu. Haere j kitea mai ano e ia ki a tatou taua pa i mai ki te zvhakarongo ki \ ngaro ra, mo te tikanga, ina rite nga wa, kia huihuia nga mea katoa i roto i a te Karaiti; nga mea i te rangi me nga mea i te whenua, i roto ano i a ia." Ka tonoa hoki e te Atua a Iraia Poropiti i mua i te taenga mai o te ra nui, te ra whakama- taku o te Ariki, mana e whakatahuri nga ngakau o nga matua ki nga tamariki me nga ngakau o nga tamariki ki nga matua. Kei haere mai ia, patua rawa te whenua ki te kanga. (Titiro Maraki 4: 5-6.) E ki ana a Ihaia Poropiti, i nga ra whakamu- tunga ka whakaputaina ta Ihowa whare i roto i te tihi o nga maunga, a ka re re nga iwi ki reira. "Ka whakaarahia ano hold e Ia he kara ki nga iwi tawhiti; ka whio- whio ano ki a ratou ki te pito o te whenua. Nana, hohoro tonu, kakama tonu, ta ratou haere mai." (Ihaia 5:26.) E te Hunga Tupu me nga hoa aroha katoa e penei ana etahi 0 nga mea kia matua puta mai, a ka hoki mai a Ilui Karaiti ki te whenua. E kiia ana <• te IIun.ua Tapu <> n.ua ra 0 muri nei, kua whakahokia mai to RongO-pai) kua rere taua anahera i kitea e Iloani W'hak.ikit en.ua : kua puta mai hoki te Kareiv a te Atua. kia whakapaia e ia te huarahi mo te Karaiti; kua tae mai a Iraia Poropiti ki te wheua, me te homai ano hoki i nga kii mo te mahi i nga whakapapa o nga matua kua ngaro
ki te po, kia mahia nga tikan.ua 0 te Kongo- pai hej whakakapi im> ratOU. No reira, kua whakatahuri nga n.uakau 0 nga matua ki a
ratou tamariki, ara ki a tatou, kia whiwhi hoki ratou i tenei mea te oranga tonutanga. Kei hoki mai te Karaiti, a petua rawa te whenua
ki te whenua ki te kanga. Kei waenganui i a tatOU tetahi '■
inaianei ko Erata Etuihi Sokarana tona ingoa. K«> tana mahi he kimi whakapapa «> nga tupuna kua ngaro atu; no reira kua whakatahuri
nga ngakau 0 nga tamariki ki nga matua; kei te huihui Imki te llunua
Tapu ki roto ki te tihi o nga maunga. Kei te titiro tonu nga iwi o
nga korero a "Kauri" to $ Timuaki.
A te 12 o nga haoro o \ te 22, ka tu he huihuinga j mo nga Apiha me nga I Kai-whakaako o te Kura | liapati i raro i te whaka- J haere o te Timuakitanga i Mihana. Timuaki Peka j era atu e hiahia ana ki te I ako nga mahi mo te ] Kura liapati haere mai. J
Henare Maiho, j Timuaki Takiwa. !
Matiu Kauri, i,
Tim ua ki Mihana. j
828
TE KARERE
Noema, 1941
tawhiti ki te kara kua whakaarahia e te Atua me te whiowhio ano ki a ratou kia puta mai ratou i roto i a ia, kei uru tahi ratou ki ona hara, kei pangia ratou e ona whiu, "No te mea ko te Ariki pu ano e heke iho i te rangi me te karanga ano, me te reo o te tino anahera, me te tetere a te Atua; a ko te hunga kua mate i roto i a te Karaiti e ara ki mua." (1 Teharonika 4: 16.) "Ka whakaritea he whakawa mo nga tangata katoa," a, "ka riri hoki te hunga karakia kore katoa." Ko reira wehewehea ai e Ia Ana hipi i nga koti, ara te hunga kua akiritia e ratou nga tikanga o Tana Rongo-pai. Ka tino ohorere ratou i Tona taenga mai i te haora e moe ana ratou. No reira e te iwi ma, kia mataara tonu tatou, kia whakaki hoki tatou i o tatou rama, kia rite mo te taenga mai o te tane marena hou. E ki ana te Karaiti, "kia mata- ara rapea koutou, e kore hoki koutou e mohio ki te ra, ki te haora e puta mai ai te Tama a te tangata." Oho ake e katoa, rongo mai ki tenei ki, kua tata te ra, ae ra, kei nga kuwaha. "Ki te whakama hoki tetahi ki a au me aku korero, i tenei whakatupuranga puremu, hara; ka whakama ano te Tama a te tangata ki a ia, ina haere mai i runga i te kororia o tona Matua, ratou ko nga anahera tapu." (Maka 8:38.)
I te wa o Tona kakenga ki runga, ka tu nga apotoro e titiro mata- tau atu ana ki te rangi, a tokorua nga anahera e tu ana i to ratou taha, e mea ana, "E nga tangata o Kariri, he aha ta koutou e tu mata- kitaki atu na ki te rangi? Ko tena Ihu kua tangohia atu na i a kou- tou ki te rangi, ka pera ano tona haerenga mai me ia i tirohia atu na e koutou e haere ana ki te rangi." Katahi ka mohio tatou ka hoki mai taua Ihu ano, taua tinana i kake atu nei. Ka hoki mai ki Tana teme- para, ka kingi tahi Ia me te hunga tika. Ko te hunga ka whai wahi i roto i te aranga tuatahi, ko ratou kua kite i Ona ara tika, kua ngohe- ngohe hoki ki Ana tikanga, a ka kingi tahi ratou me Ia kotahi mano tau. (Tirohia nga Whakakitenga, te rua tekau o nga upoko.) A, ko reira ka kite tahi tatou me Hopa i to tatou Kaihoko, ahakoa, i muri i enei kiri ka pau enei tinana ka titiro atu ano tatou i roto ano i o tatou kikokiko ki te Atua. Ma o tatou kanohi tonu e kite ai.
GENEALOGY
By Tcao Wirihana
THE WAY TO PERFECTION Cottage Meetings for November.
Nov. 6 — Lesson 11, Early-day Succession in the Priesthood." 13 — Lesson 12, "Ancient Books of Rememberance." 20 — Lesson 13, "The Covenant of the Lord with
Abraham." 27 — Lesson 14, "Thy Seed shall be like unto these." Slogan. — "Ko te kororia ote Atua ko te Matauranga." Nga ripoata o ia takiwa o ia takiwa kaore ano kia tae mai ki te tari o te Mihana. E nga Timuaki-takiwa o te Mihana whaka-korikori i nga mahi whakapapa me nga ripoata. Kua tae mai te reta mai o Hiona a te Timuakitanga o te Hahi mo te nei take.
All Genealogical Reports should be sent to the Mission Office before the end of this month.
Noema, 1941 TE KARERE 829
"Young New Zealand Mission aries"
PORTRAYAL OF MAORI LORE
Remembrances of Maori Aroha By former Associate Editor
Elder Barry T. Wride
The 22nd day of October, 1941, celebrates the first anniversary of the departure of the Zion Elders from this Mission. Since their leaving, reports of their activities both spiritually and otherwise have been received from lime to time. The accompanying article by one of "them" and about them is particularly pleasant coming at this time, and Te Karere is privileged to remember them. — Ed.
The Mission spirit and the love for the New Zealand people have by no means been relegated to the memories of a dim past in the minds of the returned missionaries. Those of us who have returned during the past three years carry impressions of Maoriaom's contribu- tions throughout the country. Wherever we have gone, New Zealand and Maoriland have been distinctive features of our presence and welcome.
When the last of the Elders returned in November, 1940, a com- plete organization was set up to keep us in the mission spirit and to carry forth in the work we had been in for the past two and three years. Meetings are held fortnightly where a little business transpires after which mission experiences are related, songs in the Maori tongue are sung, and other action songs and hakas are entered into for our entertainment. We have received much commendation and pra the work of exhibiting the arts and culture of the Maori people to the clubs and different organizations in and around Salt Lake City.
Early in June, six of our group went to California to put on a show for the British War Relief. The troupe was met by th ■ Elders resident in California before continuing to the Riviera Country Club in Hollywood, where they received much praise and the good wishes of the British and New Zealand Consuls, particularly so after the per- formance which was so enthusiastically acclaimed by all. The ( heartily thanked the troupe for their patriotic contribution on behalf of their countrymen, the Maoris, and their nation the British, and in particular was this mentioned in view of the fact thai travelled and were billeted at no expense to the War Relief (carrying on the mission custom of paying their own way).
In the latter part of -June we gave our show in the Hotel Utah for the Intermountain Credit Men's annual banquet. Here we were privi- leged to meet Jonnie Peterson, a Hawaiian Hand lender, who invited us to put on a (il'teen-ininute programme in Bingham, where he and his hand were entertaining; here again we were acclaimed enthusi- astically and royally.
July 24th marked another verj pleasanl trip for the troupe, which at (his time consisted of Elders Langton, Lambert, Wallace, gaitner, Wride, Addous, Henderson, Evans and Ramsaj when w< called to put on the floor shew at the Pioneer Day celebrations croft, Idaho. The celebrations committee as ociated with form sion President Alvin T. Man-han of Grace, Idaho, made representing a "Whare Raupo" and stockade. We rode the float in full native dress and gave the spectators a real thrill with the Maori and hakas. in the evening we again entertained for forty minufc
hakas, action sole.-:, .\Ia<oi games and a Whai Kotero.
830 TE KARERE Noema, 1941
Apart from the entertainments we have given throughout the coun- try, we have been to many of the branches in Zion, taking the entire
Sacrament Meeting programmes, conduct- -»,»,»»«,»»».»,,»«»»
ing, praying, singing and speaking in the f pidZ Wilinrd V ?m."*fc 1
Maori tongue. Presenting to these people • / , ' ,llt''li Ly)»"th ' the love the Saints of New Zealand hold ,s ^tcmaUy pleased I to an- in their hearts for them. '//'""/' the. ***/! ™ «
We, 'The Young New Zealand Mission- %\ 3 £?;*■* ^f^T aries," will continue to carry that great ™e. h^y /rc"' L **S aroha in our hearts for the people of New f»{ *»%".*> 194L a"(
Zealand which possessed our souls while | f^ !'V 7^ Y among you. We feel that through our lab- We, ^°fr U!chl !,,jt t*' ours here we are able to transmit to the set*e{ )y Af'k,ara J "£
people of Zion the "aroha nui," culture, j "" frfe". EXdfT S™\h arts and customs we learned from you le%* £ u Pt™*™*';
pe0ple y I Te Karere joins with
May we all ever be prayerful, may | your frU^f Elder Smith,
we be humble, may we ever be mindful of j ^^fj^ y°" and yo'"'S
the evils and the dangers that exist around j^
us, and may we strive to live the Gospel.
The time may soon come again, that the New Zealand Mission be again
open to the missionaries.
We all send our love and best wishes to the Saints and friends there. May the Lord bless each and every one of you is our constant prayer.
AKU HAERENGA
Xa Tukino Hakopa, Timuaki o Taranaki
I te wehenga i ahau hei Timuaki mo te Pariha o Taranaki ka timata taku haere ki te torotoro i taku Hunga Tapu, a ki nga Hui Pariha o etahi atu Takiwa hoki.
Ka haere maua ko Taka ki Puke Rangiora, ki Bell Block, Waitara, Manama, Wanganui, a atu i konei ka haere ahau ki Korongata ki te Hui Paiania, a i ahau i reira e mahi whakapapa ana ki te taha o Rawiri Kamau he maha nga aitua, ara nga matenga i pa ki reira. Atu i kona ka haere ahau ki te Hui Pariha o Mahia i tu ki Nuhaka, a hoki mai ano ki taku Takiwa.
Kei te pai te Hunga Tapu o Taranaki. I tino torotoro, noho hoki ahau ki waenganui ia ratou katoa, ae ra i kite kite ahau ia ratou.
KAI KAUWHAU MO TE PEI WHAIRANGI
Hohepa Heperi me Hemi W. Witehira ki Matauri wiki 5 o Noema, Takahue wiki 3 o Tihema.
Kawana Erueti me Miki Heremaia ki Mataraua wiki 3 o Noema me te wiki 3 o Tihema ano hoki.
Ngatihaua Witehira me Tauahika Witehira ki Whirinaki wiki 2 O Noema, Kaikohe wiki 2 o Tihema.
Hare Nehua me James Joyce ki Mangamuka wiki 3 o Noema me te wiki 3 o Tihema ano hoki.
Kerei Otene me Paikaraihe Otene ki Waihou wiki 2 O Noema me te wiki 2 o Tihema ano hoki.
Manga Tau me Witehira WiHongi ki Ngawha wiki 3 O Noema me te wiki 3 o Tihema ano hoki.
Pita Heperi me Eru Patone Heperi ki Utakura wiki 2 o Noema me Tihema.
Eru Kupa me Nopera Otene ki Waimamaku wiki 1 o Tihema.
Kia kaha ki te whakarite i enei karangatanga. Haere mai ki to tatou Tohungatanga ka tu ki Kaikohe a te 27 o Tihema. Haere mai koutou nga Kai Kauwhau ki te ripoata. Haere mai hoki koutou katoa e mau ana i te Tohungatanga.
Noema, 1941 TE KARERE 831
"Te Ngakau Mahaki"
Na Tukotahi Tirua Ranana
HE MIHI. — Tena koe, te tinana e pikau nei i te ahuatanga o o tatou aiiua e hinga mai na i kona, e king a atu nei i konei. Tenei ano tetahi man e pakawe atu, kia rongo ai ona karanga maha puta noa ki nga hvi o Ngati-Maraeroa.
I te ata o te 24 o Hepetema ka wehe atu te wairua o ta matou tamaiti, mokopuna a David Tahau, e 13 ona tau. I whakahonoretia tona David Tahau tinana mate ki te kainga o tona matua, Te
Hoeroa Tahau, Hastings. Te ra muri mai ka tukuna atu tona tinana ki te kopu o te whenua. Nga whakahaere katoa mo te ahuatanga o tenei tamaiti i te wa ia ia e oke ana taeno- atia ki te manaakitanga o tona rua i raro katoa i te whakahaere o te Timuakitanga o te Peka o Heretaunga — President James Southon. Nui atu nga korero nunui, nga korero hohonu e pa ana mo tenei tama- iti. Ma koutou e whakaronga mai.
I whanau mai tenei tamaiti me tona mate utonga — (Hole in the Heart). Kua korero nga rata kahore ia e ora roa.
Kia mohio mai koutou, ko te whanau o tenei tamaiti e hara ke i te Hunga Tapu, cngari i nga ra o tona tamarikitanga, kaha atu ia ki te haere ki nga huihuinga Hunga Tapu — Paraimere, Hui Atawhai, Kura Hapati. Tekau ma toru ona tau ka puta tetahi maramatanga kia ia, ka whakapa atu ia i tona whakaaro ki tona matua: "I know this is the true Church of Gcd and I want to be baptized so that I'll be clean and pure." Ko nra korero enei a te tamaiti nei ki tona matua. I ahua ohorere te prpa i te putanga atu o tenei whakaaro i te mangai
0 te paku o ana tamariki. I whakaae ia kia uru tona tamaiti ki roto nga wai o te iriirnga. I taua wa ano ka hoatungia te mana o te Tohungatanga o Arona, ara te wahi e pa ana ki nga mahi Rikona kia David Tahau.
E rua marama i muri mai ka tangohia tona wairua e te Kai-hanga.
1 mua atu o tenei kotahi wiki ia e takoto, e oke ana. I tae atu nga Kaumatua ki te whakawahi ki te Hinu Tapu. I tona ra whakamu- tunga ka mea ake ia: "Oh, it's better for me to go on, than to suffer in this world like thic."
I runga i tona ngakau marama ka moe iho ona whatu.
Haere ra e tama, kua oti noa atu te taunaha mai he mahi man, e kore e tino roa ka puawai o tapuae i tenei ao. Ahakoa i mate tama- riki koe, ko koe te "Matamua" mo o tuakana, matua, tae atu ki o tipuna. Mahia mai nga mahi i tua o te arai, ma matou hoi takahi atu i tenei RO tangotango, kia tutuki ra ano tatou ki roto i nga whare tapu a te Atua.
Na Elder Tukotahi T. Randell i whakahaere nga whakaritenga mo te nehunga, Nui atu nga mihi aroha i tae mai ki te kiri-mate na nga hoa Maori tae atu ki nga noa Pakeha. Na to Timuald Takiwa — Eriata Nopera i whakatapu tona rua i to nrupa Hastings Cemetery,
E whai ake nei to whakapapa o tenei "Matamua."
Ko Mawakonui, ko Mawakotoa, ko .M.iwakolaupo, ko
Tuwharetoa, ko Rongomaipatuiwi, ko Taniwha, ko Wai kari. ko Pakira, l^<> Tutemahuta (tuatahi), ko Te R kapipi, ko Tutemahuta (tuarua), ko Tuatara, ko Riki, ko Ngawaka, ko Tahau, ko Paora, ko Te Hon, .a ko David Tahau I dec taaed ) .
TE KARERE Noema, 1941
The Call of The Shepherd
"Come Out of Her, My People." — The Dispersion of Israel has
for its complement the Gathering- of Israel; the prophets who predicted the one likewise foretelling the other. The Saviour's personal visits to the various branches of the Israelitish race, before or after His resurrection, were prophetic of a general restoration of the Lord's people to their ancient lands, and the folding of the scattered sheep into one great flock, with him as the Shepherd over all.
Prophecies of the Gathering. — The more notable of the Hebrew prophecies pertaining to the Gathering are as here given :
Isaiah: "And He shall set up an ensign for the nations, and shall assemble the outcasts of Israel, and gather together the dispersed of Judah from the four corners of the earth." . . .
"They shall fly upon the shoulders of the Philistines toward the West." . . .
"And there shall be an highway for the remnant of his people, which shall be left, from Assyria; like as it was to Israel in the day that he came up out of the land of Egypt."*
Jeremiah. — "I will take you one of a city, and two of a family, and I will bring you to Zion." . . .
"Therefore, behold, the days come, saith the Lord, that it shall no more be said. The Lord liveth, that brought up the children of Israel out of the land of Egypt;
"But, the Lord liveth that brought up the children of Israel from the land of the north, and from all the lands whither he had driven them ; and I will bring them again into their land that I gave unto their fathers.
"Behold, I will send for many fishers, said the Lord, and they shall fish them; and after will I send for many hunters, and they shall hunt them from every mountain, and from every hill, and out of the holes of the rocks." . . .
"Behold, I will bring them from the north country, and gather them from the coasts of the earth. . . .
"For I am a father to Israel, and Ephraim is my first born.
"Hear the word of the Lord, O ye nations, and declare it in the isles afar off, and say, He that scattered Israel will gather him, and keep him, as a shepherd doth his flock."
Jesus Christ. — "And again this gospel of the kingdom shall be preached in all the world, for a witness unto all nations, and then shall the end come, or the destruction of the wicked."
"And He shall send his angels with a great sound of a trumpet, and they shall gather together his elect from the four winds, from one end of heaven to the other."
The Saviour also predicted to the Nephites the gathering of the House of Israel; and John the Revelator forsaw the same event in his great vision on Patmos.
*Isa. 11 : 12, 14, 16. See also 5: 26 ; 35 : 10 ; 43: 5, 6. The same Prophet declares:
'And it shall come to pass in the last days, that the mountain of the Lord's house shall be established in the top of the mountains and shall be exalted above the hills : and all nations shall flow unto it.
"And many people shall go and say, Come ye, and let us pro up to the mountain of the Lord, to the house of the God of Jacob; and he will teach us of his ways, and we will walk in his paths: for out of Zion shall go forth the law; and the word of the Lord from Jerusalem." (Isa. 2:2,3.)
This prophecy, however, seems to refer, not so much to a gathering of Israel, as to an Israel already gathered, unto whom the nations will come to learn the ways of the Lord.
Noema, 1941 TE KARERE 833
The Realization. — How marvellously and how rapidly these pre- dictions are being fulfilled, the history of the past hundred years plainly tells. The Angel with the Everlasting Gospel has flown from heaven to earth, and the message borne by him is being preached ''again" in all the world, as a final witness to the nations.
Isaiah's reference to the setting up of an Ensign for Israel's gather- ing finds its fulfilment in the restoration of the Gospel and the Priest- hood, and in the organization of the Church of Christ in this dispensa- tion. Then and there was raised a rallying standard for the sons and daughters of Ephraim, the first scions of Jacob's household to be "born again," to embrace the ancient faith in modern times — the first of the broken off branches of Israel's "olive tree" to be "grafted in again" and bear good fruit.
Keys of the Gathering Restored. — Before there could be a com- plete gathering of the chosen people, the Keys of the Gathering had to be restored. Accordingly, when the time was ripe, they were con- ferred upon the founder of the Latter-day Church. Moses, who held those keys at the time of the Exodus from Egypt, was the messenger who now restored them. The place of restoration was the Kirtland Temple ; the time, April, 1836. Joseph Smith and Oliver Cowdery testify that "the veil" was taken from their minds, and they "saw the Lord," even Jehovah, who proclaimed to them his identity with the Saviour of Mankind. The record then continues:
"After this vision closed, the heavens were again opened unto us, and Moses appeared before us, and committed upon us the keys of the gathering of Israel from the four parts of the earth, and the lead- ing of the ten tribes from the land of the north."
First Latter-day Saints. — Then began the great work for which these keys had been restored. All preceding it was but preparatory. "Mormonism's" first converts had been made in the region where the Church arose — the farming districts of Western New York and Northern Pennsylvania. But Kirtland, Ohio, was the cradle of the Kingdom. There a Temple was built, and the Priesthood more per- fectly organized, preliminary to the sending of the Gospel to foreign nations, and the gathering Qf scattered Israel to the Land of Zion. Up to the summer of 1837 the "fishers of men" were busy only in the United States and in Canada. Now they crossed over to the British Isles, and later to the continent of Europe. Instant and marvellous was their success. In parts of England — notably Lancashire and Here- fordshire— whole villages and congregations were swept into the Church by the unlettered yet divinely empowered Apostles of the new dispensation.
Earliest Immigrants. — A small Company of Latter-day Saints, num- bering bul forty-one -the first to "gather" from abroad — sailed on the ship "Britannia" from Lievrpool for New York, in June, L840. They woe bound for Nauvoo, Illinois. Bach succeeding year ended its quota to the fast-growing nucleus of the Saviour's kingdom, Thus was set in motion the mighty tide of immigration which, swelling the numbers of the Saints in the Mississippi Valley, eventually peopled with the skilled mechanici and hardy yeomanry of Great Britain, Scandinivia and other European countries, the mountains and valleys of the Great We t.
The Impelling Motive. How different the motives impelling these people, from the motives generally imputed to them! It was not for gold and silver, flocks and nerds, nor any of "the good things of this world," that they forsook home and country *»d "gathered" to the Land of Zion. it was not to better their temporal condition, that they abandoned comforl and in Bome cases affluence, crossed the stormy ocean, dragged rickety hand-cart over parching plains and sno* capt
834 TE KARERE Noema, 1941
mountains, to settle in a barren wilderness and endure hardships and privations innumerable, while redeeming the wastes and dotting it with cities, farms and vineyards. It was for God and his Kingdom — noth- ing less; and it was the love of Truth that inspired and impelled them.
Character of the Saints. — Utah's early settlers were stigmatized as ignorant and malicious. It was ignorance or malice that so stigmatized them. "Scum of the earth," "off-scourings of civilization," were some of the pet names bestowed upon them by their enemies. How utterly unjust these epithets, how grotesquely misapplied, everyone must know who has any knowledge of the facts. In reality, they were among the best men and women of their time. Many of them were descended from the Pilgrims and the Patriots who founded this nation, and in their veins, as Children of the Covenant, flowed the blood of priests and kings, illustrious through a thousand generations.*
Not slaves, but free men and free women, founded the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints. They were of the sheep that knew the Shepherd's voice, and when put to the test, they showed "the mettle of their pasture."
"One of a City and Two of a Family." — Jeremiah's prediction was uttered at a time when families (tribes) were much larger than they now are — large enough for one tribe to fill several cities. Other- wise, the prophet might have changed his wording to read: "One of a family and two of a city." Phrased either way, the forcast has been literally fulfilled in the painful and pathetic experiences of many Latter- day Saints, including women and children, turned out-of-door by parents or guardians, for daring to be "one of a city" or "two of a family," in identifying themselves with a people everywhere "spoken against."
"The Shoulders of the Philistines." — This phrase translates itself into the facilities for far and rapid transportation owned and operated by the Gentiles, but utilized by the God of Jacob in bringing his people from foreign snores, and up into the tops of "the high mountains of Israel." "They shall fly upon the shoulders of the Philistines toward the West." When Isaiah wrote those words, he was gazing with pro- phetic eye upon this very period. He beheld the ships and railroads of the Gentiles, likewise the Land of Zion, now occupied by the Gen- tiles, but formerely peopled by the Nephites (Joseph and Judah) and included in the lands that God gave to their forefathers. Israel needs the help of the Gentiles — their wealth, their power, their wonderful insight into and command over material things, their intelligence and skill in manipulating temporalities. How, without the children of Japheth, could the children of Jacob be gathered out from the nations?
The Lost Tribes. — It is maintained by some that the lost tribes of Israel — those carried into captivity about 725 B.C. — are no longer a distinct people; that they exist only in a scattered condition, mixed with the nations among which they were taken by their captors, the conquering Assyrians. If this be true, and those tribes were not intact at the time Joseph and Oliver received the keys of the gathering, why did they make so pointed a reference to "the leading of the ten tribes from the land of the north?" This, too, after a general allusion to "the gathering of Israel from the four parts of the earth." What need to particularize as to the Ten Tribes, if they were no longer a dis-
♦Talent and genius, brain and brawn, from every part of tbe world came in the early immigrants to Salt Lake Valley — farmers, labourers, tradesmen, mechanics, merchants, manufacturers and business men, with a liberal sprinkling of artists, musicians, writers and other professional people. "In their degree the pick and flower of England," was the comment passed upon a ship's company of "Mormon" emigrants, by Charles Dickens, the great English author, in his sketch "The Uncommercial Traveller," published in 1863.
Noema, 1941 TE KARERE 835
tinct people? And why do our Articles of Faith give those tribes a special mention.*
The Highway." — Isaiah's reference to the "Highway" points directly to the lost tribes, respecting whose return from "The North Country," his fellow-prophet, Jeremiah, promises an event that shall so far eclipse in scope and grandeur Israel's exodus from Egypt, that the latter will no more be mentioned.
Joseph the Seer must have had the same thing in mind when he wrote: "And they who are in the north countries shall come in remem- brance before the Lord, and their prophets shall hear his voice, and shall no longer stay themselves, and they shall smite the rocks and the ice shall flow down at their presence, and an highway shall be cast up in the midst of the great deep."
Already he had foretold the removal of the Latter-day Saints to the Rocky Mountains — then a desolate, uninhabited region — and was evidently pondering that thought when he further declared: "And in the barren deserts there shall come forth pools of living water; and the parched ground shall no longer be a thirsty land."
Ephraim and the Returning Tribes. — It was Ephraim who lifted the Ensign for the Gathering. It is to Ephraim that the returning tribes will "bring forth their rich treasures," receiving from him their spiritual blessings. "And the boundaries of the everlasting hills shall tremble at their presence."
Judah and Jerusalem. — The same prophecy mentions the tribe of Judah, whose gathering place, however, is not the Land of Zion, not the New Jerusalem, but Jerusalem of old, yet to be rebuilt upon a scale of magnificence paralleled only by the splendour of her sister city and twin capital of Christ's Kingdom.*
Even as the Waters. — Hear, 0 Israel! Children of Jacob! The night of dispersion is past. The day of gathering has dawned. The tempests that broke above the heads of your ancestors have spent their fury, and the clouds have parted and are rolling away. The barren ground, refreshed by the fearful visitation, has brought forth abund- antly, and a ripened harvest awaits the reaper's cycle. The revivifying rains, having fulfilled their mission, must now return to the whence they were taken. Such is the meaning, the symbolism, of the scattering and gathering of Israel.
•Th<- fad that Arctic explorers have found no such people at the North Pole
where some theori ts have persisted in placing them due- not prove thai the
"Ten Tribes" have IqbI their Identity, it was tradition, not revelation, that located
then at the North Pole. "The north country. l'he land of the north." these are
lie- criptural de Ignations of their unknown abode. All the rest is inference. Those
tril.es could still he intad. and JTel much of their blood he found among the northern
nation , Borne of the pilgrims i hi ea ilj have mixed with the people encountered
bj them while Journeying toward then- ultimate destination; ami thai Ephraim did
,. mix, H" ea I he Prophet < t : 9 > dech
♦Isa. 2 ■. :l In April L840, Or on Hyde and John B. Page, both \\-> ties, were
-■lit from Illinois on a ml to Pah bine, to bit the soii, thai
mlghl deparl and the was be opened for th< re toratioi to their ancient
homeland. John E. Page faltered and fell bj the way,
[on On the 24th of October, 1841, from the summll of the Mount of iverl oking Jeru alem, he offered t., the God oi I »n1 and eloquent
pra] i i In behalf of hi do* a I rodden people. He bl< might ono more become fruitful, and thai Judah might n Elder Hyde afterwards predicted thai the British nation would [n (he redemption of Pale tin< fulfilled during th« \
iv, idem Georgi I Smith wenl with ■ party from Bait eated the Holy Land for the return oi the h ■■■ and the rebulldlm
ACKNOWLEDGMENT. Sitter Cowley b plea ed to Tamaki, H.B., Branch Primarj for their contribution of B8 towards \ he Primary Fund fo I on publ cat ione,
836 TE KARERE Noema, 1941
SUNDAY SCHOOL
Theme —
"OUR HOMES AND CHAPELS SHALL BE BEAUTIFUL"
"For Zion must increase in beauty and in Holiness; her borders must be enlarged; her stakes must be strengthened; yea verily I say unto you. Zion must arise and put on her beautiful garments."
— Doctrine & Covenants 82 : 14.
SACRAMENT GEM "Let not the heart be sad at trials here,
But sense how e'en the Saviour suffered ill ; He bore the cruel thorn, the galling spear,
To glorify His Father's holy will."
CONCERT RECITATION Mark 8: 38.
"Whosoever therefore shall be ashamed of me and of my words in this adulterous and sinful generation: of him also shall the Son of man be ashamed, when He cometh in the glory of His Father with the holy angels."
KORERO A NGAKAU Maaka 8:38.
"Ki te whakama hoki tetahi ki ahau, ki aku korero, i tenei whaka- tupuranga puremu, kino ; ka whakama ano te Tama a te tangata ki a ia, ina haere mai i runga i te kororia o Tona Matua, ratou ko nga anahera tapu."
SONG PRACTICE
"The Uord is My Shepherd" Page 212
"He Hepara Toku" Wharangi 2
LESSONS
KINDERGARTEN. Thought: Helpfulness. "The First Miracle." (John 2) "Feeding the Five Thousand." (Matt. 14) Miraculous Draught of Fishes." (Luke 5)
PRIMARY.
"Sold by his Brothers." (Gen 37)) Thought: "God protects those
who love Him and trust Him." "A Hebrew becomes Governor of Egypt." (Gen. 39, 40, 41)
Thought: "Faithfulness will be rewarded." "A Feast by Governor Joseph." (Gen. 42, 43) Thought: "The Lord
moves in a wonderful way."
CHURCH HISTORY— Book of Mormon.
Noema, 1941 TE KARERE 837
A and B DEPARTMENTS.
"The Story of Abraham — His life at Bethel." (Gen. 18,19) What to look for — Abraham's friendly association with divine mes- sengers. The reason for the destruction of Sodom and Gomorrah. Abraham's plea for the cities. Problems: Why wasn't the city of Zoar destroyed as were the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah? How did mar- riage among strangers cause the destruction of Lot's family?
"His Testing in Offering Isaac." (Gen. 22) What to look for: Abraham's great love for Isaac. Abraham's obedience. Problems: About how old was Isaac at the time of the sacrifice? What blessing did the angel of the Lord give Abraham after he had offered the ram as a sacrifice?
C and D DEPARTMENTS.
"At the Sea of Galilee, in Capernum, and in other Cities of Galilee." (Luke 4 and 5; Matt. 1 and 8; Mark 4) Problems: What two incidents indicate that the first four men called to the ministry believed implicitly in Jesus? Why did the evil spirits know more about the divinity of Jesus than did the people among whom He was working? Why did people wait until sundown to bring their sick to Jesus? What incident shows the dependence of Jesus on God even at a time of great success? What did the law demand of a cured leper?
GOSPEL DOCTRINE.
"The End of the Kingdom of Israel." (11 Kings 15-17)
"The Lost Tribes and Modern Revelation." (Deut. 30; Jer. 3, 16,
31; and any other relevant information from the Bible and Church literature.) "The Reign of Hezekiah." (11 Kings 18-20; 11 Chron. 29-32)
MAORI CLASS.
RATAPU TUATAHI
MO TE WHIU MO TE HARA. I te mea kua pa ki te nuinga te he o te whakaakoranga, e hara nei i ta te karaipiture e he ana hold, ara, mo te mamaetanga mutunga kore, e rite mai ana mo ia tangata hara. QOreira kihai ano te hahi ki aata whakaturia i tenei 0 nga wa, ka tukua mai e te Ariki he whakakitenga ma roto mai i te poropiti ia Eiohepa Mete, e pa ana mo tenei take, i nga korerotanga e whai ake nei. — "A he pono, me tino ripeneta nga tangata katoa, me mamae ranei, no te mea ko Ahau ko te Atua, kaore <>ku mutunga, no reira e kore Au c whakakore nga whakawa e whakataua ai e Ahau. erangi ka putt atu he aue, he tangihanga, he nhunga me te teteatanga o nga niho, ae
ra, ki te hun.ua e kitca ana ki toku ringa maui, ahakoa 'a. kaore i tuhi-
lulia. kaore he mutunga o tenei whakamamaetanga e rangi kua oti i«' tuhituhi, In- mamaetanga mutunga, mutunga kore. A tenei hold kua oti !<■ tuhituhi he whakawakanga mutunga kore No te mea he mutunga kore Ahau. a ko t<- whiunga e hoatu ai e Toku ringa, he whiunga mutunga kore, no t«' mea ko "Mutunga kore Toku I Noreira, ko ta te Atua whiunga he whiunga mutunga kore. he whiunga mutunga kore ;i te Atua whiunga."
Nga Patai:
l. He aha t«' whakaakoranga he I pa nui ki te katoa'.'
:'. h'apua c ina ake nga patai.
RATAPU TUARUA
\1' i II VI \\\. lie maha nga wa i aim atu ai lira kortlD I
kaihanga o )<■ kino i waenganui i te ta i tena ko i;
ko te hoa riri, me te kai whakatutuki ki te Ariki. ko te rai i poke, e kiia nei ano ko te Etewera, ko Perehepura, niha o nga Rewera, ko te whakangaromanga ko Periara, Ko nga kupu
838 TE KARERE Noema, 1941
karanganoa ara, te tarakona, te nakahi — i eke ki runga kia Hatana i te wa o tona takanga atu. Na te kupu whakakite mai ka mohio tatou ko Hatana i mua, he anahera no te maramatanga, e mohiotia ana i taua wa ko Rutiwha, te tama o te ata, engari na ona hiahia whakahirahira i mea ai ia kia riro ia ia te kororia me te mana o te Matua, e whiwhi ai ka whakahaeretia e ia tona take he me hoko katoa mai nga hunga o te ao i runga i te tikanga aki, te korenga i whakaaetia o tona take ka riro nana i arahi he ropu tahuri atu ki te Matua me te Tama whawhai ai, kumea atu ana e ia te wahi tuatoru o te rangi ki tenei ropu whaka- rongo kore ki te Atua. Nga Patai:
1. Ko wai etahi o nga ingoa o te kai mahi o te kino?
2. No tehea wa i mau ai te ingoa tarakona, nakahi ranei ki runga ia ia?
3. He aha tona turanga i mua atu o tona takanga?
RATAPU TUATORU
MO HATANA. Ko enei wairua whakakakake he mea pei mai i te rangi, mai ra ano kua aru tonu i te tokonga ake o ratou whakaaro tai- kaha ki te rapu he tangata hei arahanga ma ratou ki roto ki te pouri- tanga kia rite ki to ratou ake ahua, ko ratou ko te Rewera me ona anahera. Ko te mana kei ia koe ano tou ake whakaaro i puritia i tau- tokona hoki i runga i te whawhai o te rangi, i kauparea atu hoki te aheitanga o te whakahaere i tenei mahi rewera e tapoko atu ai ki te po ; ko te kaha ia o enei wairua tikanga heke ki te whakawai me te totohe e tino whakahaeretia kahatia ana. I whakawaitia a Iwi e Hatana kia takahi i te ture a te Atua; Nana ano hoki i whakamohio atu kia Kaina te tikanga kohuru e whai taonga ai ia i noho nei ia he kai kohuru no tona teina. Nga Patai:
1. I peheatia nga wairua whakakakake ki te Atua?
2. No nahea i timata ai a ratou tikanga taikaha?
3. Pehea te ahua o te tikanga kei ia koe ake te mana mou ake whakaaro?
4. He aha te mana kei te mau i enei wairua taikaha?
RATAPU TUAWHA
MO HATANA. E whakahaeretia ana e Hatana tona mana ki runga i nga wairua kua poke nei i ana tikanga taikaha; Ko ia te tua- tahi o nga anahera i peia mai, me te kai pehi ki te he o ratou kua taka atu nei i tenei oranga. E rapu ana ia ki te whakararu me te arai atu i te tangata i nga mahi pai, i runga i tona whakawai kia hara; i te whakahaere ranei kia pangia ia e te mate, kia hemo tonu atu ranei. Otira i roto i enei wThakahaere kino e kore e hipa atu i te nui o te he o te tangata tona mana, i runga ranei i te matauranga o te Atua e ahei ana kia pera; i nga wa katoa tera hoki e whakakorea tona mana e te mana kaha ake o te Atua. Ae ra, ahakoa te whakamahinga rapu utu e taea te whakatuapeka hei whakatutuki i a te Atua mahi. E ai ta nga karaipiture kia tatou e whakaatu tuturu ana ko te wa o to Hatana mana kua tatauria. Ko te mate mona kua whakataua, a hei ta te Ariki ake wa e tino whakakorea ai tona mana. Ka hereaia i te wa o te kingitanga mo te mano tau, a i muri atu i te mano tau o te rongomau ka tukua ano ia mo tetahi wa poto, a muri atu ka tino kore mana ia me tona kaha i runga i nga tamariki a te Atua, ka tino hatepea atu. Nga Patai:
1. Ko wai e whakahere ana i te hunga kua poke, kua taka atu hoki i tenei oranga?
2. Pehea nga ahua e rapua ana e te Rewera hei whakapa ki fce tangata?
Noema, 1941 TE KARERE 839
PRIMARY
MEMORY GEM "Love your enemies, do good to them that hate you."
FIRST WEEK To the Teacher:
It is not easy to be a Primary teacher, but it is a glorious privi- lege. There are four important requirements for a teacher in this work. Faith, love, preparation and application. All that she gives of these she has, and the more she gives the more she has.
A LITTLE GIRL LEARNED IN HER HOME TO HAVE FAITH Text: II. Kings 5: 10.
Objective: Faith in God is necessary to obtain His blessings. Song: "Jesus Unto Thee I Pray." Lesson Story:
Long ago there lived in a village near Samaria the capital of Israel, a little Jewish maid of such great faith that a story is written about her in the Bible. We think she must have been beautiful and we know that she was kind and loving. The mother of this little girl loved her very dearly so she showed her how to find the gift that would bring her the greatest happiness in life. Do you know what the gift was that this good mother wanted her child to find? It was the gift of faith. So she talked to her often about the Father in Heaven, His power and His goodness.
As you know, in the land of the Bible, most of the houses have rooms built upon the roof far above the hot plains, even above the tree tops. And in these rooms, with only the night sky for a covering, the people spend most of their evenings.
So in the warm summer evenings this little girl would sit with her mother in this room on the housetop and together they would look up at the stars, which seemed so near to them, and talk about many things. And the mother would often tell her child about the God of Israel who made Heaven and Earth, the sun, the moon and th<
"My child," she said, "it was God, the Father of all, who ci the moon and stars for us and the earth and the sun that warms it. That is why we must never forget Him, nor tail to pray to Him night and morning and thank Him for all our blessings. And. must ever remember thai it was Jehovah who led our people, I from the cruel bondage of the Egyptians and brought us to this lovely land, this land of Promise."
"But mother," the little maid asked, opening her dark eyea wide,
"why do we have enemies today which our God doea m-t -la;.
know armies come over from Syria and fight our soldiers and kill many
and some are carried aw ay ca|>l 11
"Yes, l know, my child," the mother answered, "but our people have not alwaya obeyed God. They d«> m-t always trust in Him as i mild, hut we mv rve Him, For you and me there la
no happine i except In I he Loi d1 way."
Then one da) the Syrian oldiex came down from the north with their horsea and their chariots. And the sold rael were not
strong enough to drive them back and so they came far Into the land of Israel, even to the village near Samaria, where the little H
maid dwelt with h. r father and mother and th< "ine o\
the children of the village, and among them the little maid whose mother had so carefully taught her. ii wa the custom In those days to cany the e captive children to the slave market and sail them as to anyone w ho a I bed to buy them.
<s-i I TE KARERE Etoema, 1941
Now it chanced that a great captain of the king's army, Naaman, saw this little maid and took her into his own home to wait upon his wife. Naaman was a great man and a brave man. The king loved and honoured him. He had riches and a fine house and many servants, but he was sad, for he had a disease called leprosy.
His wife was sad also and she would often sit and weep, for she knew there was no cure for her husband. The little captive maid had come to love her mistress and she felt sorry to see her grieve. She felt in her heart that she knew how Naaman could be cured of his sickness.
"I am sorry that you weep," the little maid said to her mistress one day. "I, too, am sad because of the master's illness; but I know there is one — who can heal him."
"How could that be," her mistress answered; "hath you master not been to all the great physicians throughout the land?"
"I know, mistress, but He of whom I speak can even make the dead to live. I know because my mother told me," the little maid said in her quiet but earnest way.
The mistress thought many times of the words of the little maid. Then one day she called her husband to her and said, "My lord, the little captive maid that is of Israel doth speak of a Prophet of her God that can heal one of leprosy. He dwells in the city of Samaria."
Naaman went to the king and told him what the little maid of Samaria had said. The king loved Naaman, and when he heard the story he answered, "Go, and I will send a letter to the King of Israel."
"And Naaman departed and took with him ten talents of silver and six thousand pieces of gold and ten changes of raiment" for gifts to the king. The king's letter said: "I have sent Naaman, my servant, to thee that thou mayest recover him of his leprosy."
When the king read the letter he said: "Am I God to kill and to make alive that this man doth send to me to recover a man of his leprosy? And he rent his clothes, for he thought the King of Syria sought a quarrel with him and he feared his people were not strong enough to withstand the Syrian hosts.
"When Elisha the man of God heard how the king rent his clothes, he sent to the king and said: 'Wherefore hast thou rent thy clothes? Let him come now to me and he shall know that there is a Prophet in Israel.' "
So Naaman came with his horses and with his chariot and stood at the door of the house of Elisha. And Elisha sent a messenger unto him saying: "Go wash in Jordan seven times and thy flesh shall come again to thee, and thou shalt be clean."
"But Naaman was wroth, and went away, and said, 'Behold, I thought, He will surely come out to me, and stand, and call on the name of the Lord his God, and strike his hands over the place, and recover the leper. Are not the rivers of Damascus better than all the rivers of Israel? May I not wash in them and be clean? So he went away in a rage.' "
But one of his servants came to him and said, "My father, if the prophet had bid thee do some great thing, wouldst thou not have done it? How much rather then, when he saith to thee 'Wash and be clean.' "
Naaman listened to the advice of his servant, and, going to the river, he "dipped himself seven times in Jordan, according to the saying: of the man of God; and his flesh came again like unto the flesh of a little child, and he was clean. Then he returned to the man of God, he and all his company, and came and stood before him; and he said, 'Behold, now I know that there is no God in all the earth, but in Israel.' "
Naaman offered Elisha the rich gifts which he had brought, but Elisha refused saying, "Go in peace." So Naman departed to his own country.
Noema, 1941 TE KARERE 841
SECOND WEEK TRUST IN GOD BRINGS JOY Objective: The Lord blesses those who believe and trust in Him. To the Teacher:
Blessed is that man that maketh the Lord his trust. Psalms 40: 4. Story: Lost and Found.
"Therese, it is so dark, I am afraid!" sobbed little Gretchen.
"Let's sit down and rest," suggested Hans. I'm so tired."
"We shall surely see the light very soon," said Therese bravely ; but we will rest a little if thou art tired.
So the older sister sat down on the grass and took Gretchen on her lap, while Hans nestled close to her side.
They had come out to gather wild flowers, and had wandered so far into the woods that when Therese said they must go home, they looked in vain for the path by which they had come. While they were trying to find the way home, it grew so dark that the little ones were frightened, and even ten-year-old Therese had hard work to keep the tears from her voice as she tried to comfort them.
"We never shall find our home," said Hans, gloomily.
"0 Therese, shall we never again see the dear mother?" wailed Gretchen.
"Yes, little one, thou shalt see her; never fear. Thou hast for- gotten, Hans, that the dear Lord takes care of us. Let us ask Him to show us the way. Mother says that He always hears."
"Will He send a shining one to take us home, as He did to Peter when he was in prison?" asked Hans, eagerly.
"I should like to see a shining one," said Gretchen, clasping her fat little hands. "Ask him, Therese."
So three little heads bowed, and three pairs of small hands were clasped as Therese prayed: "Dear Lord Jesus, we have lost our way. and the mother will be so afraid about us. Please send an angel to take us home."
"Will the sky open and let the angel through?" asked Han-, gat- ing up into the darkn<
"Perhaps we shall riol see the angel," said Therese. "Moth< i
that they arc often near, but people do not see them, now."
Just then the faint tinkle of a bell broke the Bilence of tin- forest. "Are the shining ones coming?" asked Little Gretchen in an awed
Voice.
Tinkle, tinkle, came the sound of the bell, nearer and nearer.
"Thai's our old Brownie!" exclaimed Bans.
And sure enough, there was their own old cow coming toward
them through the woods.
"She will know the way home; we will follow her!" cried Th<
springing up.
"Hut where i> the angel?" a-ked (jrelch.n. anxiously. !
helped her along the dark path.
They followed the old co* till they recognised an n\i\ familiar
path; and there indeed was the light from the Cottage, and their mother at the door.
-Hut i did war I mini' one," aid in i. < }ret< ; i n, ■
ate her bread and milk. "Did the dear Lord foi rid one.
niol her? Perhap t hey were all t <><> bu
"No, little one," answered the mother, softly stroking the vellow curls; "the Lord Ji thou couldsl le-t see him. Twa he that led Brownie t<> ti .
K aided the poor bet I afely home. Remember that th< Lord always eai •
842 TE KARERE Noema, 1941
THIRD WEEK
Text: Matt. 19:16-30; Mark 10:17-31; Luke 18:18-30. Objective:
To help the boys and girls to realize the responsibilities of making right choices; for on the right kind of choice both success and happi- ness depend.
Prayer: One of the boys. Lesson Story: The Rich Young Man.
Jesus and his disciples were travelling southward from Galilee to- ward Jesusalem. What a wonderful journey for the disciples for all along the journey were experiences to build their faith.
As they passed along the street a strange thing happened. Usually those who came to Jesus were poor; but on this day a rich young ruler ran out to greet the Master; a young man already made famous by his strict compliance with the letter of the law and his great riches. When he reached Jesus he knelt at His feet. "Good Master," he cried, "what good thing shall I do, that I may have eternal life?"
Jesus looked upon him with tender eyes of sympathy and under- standing as he replied in the gentle way in which He always spoke: "Why do you call me good? There is none good but one, that is God; but if you would enter into life keep the commandments."
The young man did not expect to hear this. He thought that some other great thing would be asked, so in surprise he said: "Which commandments do you mean?" "Thou knowest the commandments," said Jesus, "Thou shalt not steal. Thou shalt not kill. Thou shalt love thy neighbour as thyself."
With satisfaction to himself the young ruler looked frankly into the eyes of the Great Master and answered, "All these things have I kept from my youth up." There must have been in his heart a con- sciousness of failure in something because he added, "What lack I yet."
Jesus was now filled with compassion and beholding him loved him and with firm tenderness said: "If thou will be perfect, go and sell that thou hast, and give to the poor, and thou shalt have treasure in heaven." Then He added, "and come follow me." But when the young man heard the saying he went away sorrowful; for he was very rich.
Conversation After the Story:
Show the picture of the Rich Young Ruler. Have the children discuss with you the words, "he was very sorrowful." Why does hap- piness depend so much on the right choice. Have the class name for you some of the things in their everyday lives about which they must make a choice, such as between duty and pleasure. (Use specific illustrations.) Story: Jack Decides.
Jack had done something that was wrong. His father had found out about it that morning and Jack had been worried and afraid all day. He had been puzzled too, because his father had asked him to go for a ride, and he wondered more than ever. His father had said nothing about where they were going but talked of other things. At last they reached the city which was about twenty miles from their home, but instead of going down to the business district, as they usually did, his father turned, went up a long winding hill and stopped outside some huge gates which were set in a great stone wall.
Jack's heart almost stopped beating. He knew this was the peni- tentiary or the "pen," as it was commonly called. They had passed it a number of times but they had never stopped before. He knew that this was the place where "bad men" were kept. For one wild moment he thought that his father had brought him here for the thing that he had done.
Ncema, 1941 TE KARERE 843
His father seemed to know what he was thinking because he put his arm around Jack's shoulders and said, "It's all right, Jack. I'm going in here for just a few minutes, do you want to come in with me or would you rather wait here in the car?"
Jack's voice trembled a little as he said, "I'll wait here, father."
As he was waiting a car drove up, and three men go out of it. Jack noticed that one of the men had handcuffs on his wrists.
After a few minutes Jack's father came out and they drove off to the city. This time they stopped in front of a big building. Jack had seen this building many times before. On the big plate-glass doors it said "First National Bank."
"Come on Jack," his father said. They went in together and in a few minutes they went through a door marked "James Graham, President." Here Jack's father made him acquainted with a tall man with smiling blue eyes. This was Mr. Graham, but Jack noticed that his father called him "Jim."
On the way home Jack's father told Jack a story. It was about three boys ; a boy named "Jim," who was now the president of the First National Bank and a boy named "Frank," who had been in the penitentiary for five long years, and himself, when he was a boy. He told how they played together when they were boys and some of the things they did as they became older.
When the story was finished, Jack thought for a little while then he said, "Father, I'm going to try to be like you and Mr. Graham."
Why do you suppose Jack's Father took him to these places?
Our Father in Heaven has given us something to help us choose the right thing to do. Discuss conscience. What happens when we con- tinue to disobey our conscience? How does obeying our conscience make us stronger. What are some of the ways that help us to know the right from the wrong. Why can mother help us to decide what is right and what is wrong? Why does prayer help you to decide when in doubt?
Read from the Bible, James 1 : 5.
"If any of you lack wisdom, let him ask of God, that giveth to all men liberally, and upbraideth not; and it shall be given him." Let the children memorize part of it.
FOURTH WEEK
Objective:
To make the child realize the importance of a bright, happy, smil- ing luce. To the Teacher:
Stress the fad thai a smile is appreciated i»y everyone. A child can contribute much by cultivating ;i cheerful disposition in-trad of
frowning and pouting.
Teach the Bong "You Can Smile," from the .M.I. A. Song Book.
TWO LITTLE SMILES For the Lesson on Our Faces
Once there were two little iinle- that wanted t<> fad a home.
One day they av ;i bright an binj hou e and aid, "Thl looks like ;i rood place. Let1 trj tin one." So in they wren! and were very happy to find 'wo little boys, Bobbie and rater. 0n< jumped into each boy' face. You bould have leen i everyone was, even the boj ,
When mother called. '"Hurry hoy., eoine down to hi.:! away.*' they an wend. "All right, mother," and came with BUCfa Milling
that mot her tniled I "".
844 TE KARERE Noema, 1941
When they went out to play, the neighbour boys said, "What's happened? Something nice?" Peter and Bobbie answered, "Some- thing nice is always happening." Then all the boys laughed.
There was something funny about those smiles. Who ever saw them, smiled back. Even their dog wagged his tail and jumped up and barked when the boys looked at him. It seemed as though there were smiles everywhere just because those two boys smiled.
One day Peter said, "Bobbie, I'm going to quit smiling."
"Why?" asked Bobbie. "Don't you like to smile?" "Oh, I guess I like it all right, but I'm tired of hearing everyone say, 'What a happy little boy! You're always smiling.' "
And Peter stopped smiling and began to frown. It was really very hard though. A smile would start to pull up the corners of his mouth and he would have to stop it quickly and pull the corners down again. Just think of the smile that was shut up in Peter's face. It tried and tried to get out but Peter wouldn't let it. Then one day Peter opened his mouth and out popped the smile and ran over to Bobbie. Just then Bobbie smiled and Peter's smile jumped right in beside Bobbie's smile.
"I'm coming to live with you," said Peter's smile. "I can't stand it with Peter any longer. He keeps me locked up all the time. I'm glad I got out to-day. I was getting so thin I was afraid I'd die."
"But how can we both live here?" asked Bobbie's smile.
"Let's try for a while," said Peter's smile. "Then maybe I can find another home."
Now this was hard for Bobbie. With two smiles he must keep smiling all the time. When he tried to talk to anyone he smiled, then smiled again instead of saying anything. Some people thought he was laughing at them, but of course we know he wasn't.
Wherever Peter went, he kept the frown on his face. Boys came to play with him, took one look at his face, then went over to play with Bobbie. Their dog came running and wagging his tail, looked at Peter's face, then down went his tail between his legs and he walked over to Bobbie.
Worst of all, though, was when Aunt Mayme brought little Jimmie. He couldn't talk, but he loved to play with Peter and Bobbie. The boys were always trying to see which one Jimmie liked the best.
Peter ran over to him and really tried to smile but he had kept the corners of his mouth down so long that they wouldn't come up. Baby Jimmie gave one good look at Peter then he puckered his little mouth and began to cry.
Bobbie ran to him and said, "Don't cry, Jimmie. Peter isn't really cross, he just doesn't want to smile." Then Bobbie smiled and smiled until baby Jimmie smiled, and then laughed out loud.
"Oh what shall I do?" asked Peter. "I really can't smile any more. I'm sick of frowning. Nobody likes frowns. I wish I could smile again."
"Hurray!" called Peter's smile. "Now I can go to my own home," and in he jumped into Peter's mouth. Peter laughed out loud.
"See, Bobbie. I can smile after all," said Peter. "I am never going to get tired of smiling again."
So the two boys played with cousin Jimmie all day, and Peter didn't once frown.
HUI PARIHA. — The Waikato District invites your attendance at Huntly, November 22 and 23, 1941. Come before noon on Satur- day. Sunday School workers throughout the district are asked to meet at NOON on Saturday in a Sunday School Officers' and Teachers' Meeting under the direction of Kelly Harris.
Noema, 1941 TE KARERE 845
NGA MATENGA
HAUHAU MAPI.
I mate a Hauhau Mapi i te 30 o nga ra o Hune 1941 ia ia ko 19 ona tau. Itae mai a Rahiri Harris, a naana ia i manaaki i mua atu o tona moenga. Haere e tama. Haere i roto i te Ariki.
— Na Kura Anaru i ripoata. TANGIWHARAU MANUIRIRANGI.
He mokopuna tuatahi na Turake Manuirirangi raua ko Tuhitia Hikaka. Tona pakeke e rua marama. Ona matua ko Kapua Manu- ririrangi me Willis Katene. No te 10 o nga ra ka tukua atu tana tinana ki te kopu o te whenua ki te kaenga tuturu.
Haere e te mokai iti rawa. Na te Matua koe i homai na Ana ano koe i tango atu. Heoi i muri nei he aroha he roimata te hoa. Haere i runga i te waka a o Tupuna, ma matou e haere atu.
— Na Taka Toroaiwhiti i ripoata. TE AUE WIRIHANA.
I mate i te 20 o Akuhata 1941. He wahine kaha tenei ki nga mahi o te Hahi. I a ia i mate e 35 ona tau. Ona hapu, ko Ngatitu, Ngatitai me Ngatikahungunu. Ona matua ko Katene raua ko Poutu Pene Kupa. No te 23 o nga ra ka nehua tana tinana i raro i te whakahaere o Elder E. A. C. Scott a na Kio Tarawhiti i whakatapu te rua.
— Na Riringi Huki Ponga i ripoata. POKAIA ROTANA.
I te 3 o Hurae 1941 ka mate a Pokaia Rotana. Ona tau e 24. He tamaiti kaha hoki tenei i roto i nga mahi o te Rongopai. He Rikona ia o te Peka o Puketapu. Na Ngaha Rotana i whakahaere te nehunga.
— Na Riringi Huki Ponga i ripoata. RUIHA WAEREA.
He tamahine tenei na Hemi Waerea raua ko Hana o te takiwa o Nuhaka. I mate ia ki Korongata i te 28 o Akuhata, 1941, he mate manawa. Ko nga hapu o tenei wahine — Ngati-Rakaipaka. Ngati-Tu- wharetoa, a e uru ana ona whakapapa ki roto i nga waka katoa. Ona tau e 78. He mema ia no te Hui Atawhai o Korongata nei
— Na Rawiri Kamau i ripoata, HONETERI PAERATA HAPI.
I mate ia i te 4 0 nga ra o Hepetema L941 ki Korongata ia ia 6 7 1 nei ona tau. He timuaki tau hit*, ia no tenei Peka o Korongata i te
tau L904. Ko tana mate be tuku-toto. E '20 tau ia e kapo ana tae QOa mai ki tenei w a <» tana hemonga. I\<> ana hapu ko Ngati-Rakai- paka, Ngati-Poporo, Ngati-Tuwharetoa. Kei te ore ona tamariki e torn, »• iua nga tane, kotahi (<• tnea wahine. <>na mokopuna e 36, e i nga tnea tuarua, hui katoa n». Ko tona matua ko Hapi Ngakao, tona whaea Ifare Werahiko.
— Na Rawiri Kamau i ripoata, LORRAINE MAKo KARIPA.
He tamaiti tenei na Paki karipa raua k<> Rupi Uanin... tau ka mate nei ia i te 7 «> Oga I :i 0 Hepetema, 1941. Nuku atu i te
:» marama ia <■ takoto ana i te hohipera.
Mihi mai. tatu-i mai «■ nga matua nm nga whana .
— Na Rawiri Kamau i rfp
HONORIA w ERBT \.
I mate tenei wahine i te L8 - Hepetema 1941. lie wahine tenei arohaina «• ona matua, e tona hoa tane me ana karanga mahi ana tamariki, mokopuna hoki. Haere ra Honoria. h
— Na Tukinoa Hako]
846 TE KARERE Noema, 1941
NEWS FROM THE FIELD
" Farewell to Trainees Going to Camp"
By Rawiri M. Kamau
Editor's Note. — The Editor takes full responsibility for the publishing of this article as written, not be- cause of its apparent grammatical and other journal- istic as zuell as aesthetic discrepancies, but to portray Rawiri Kaniau, familiarly known as "Maraki." He is proud, generous, humorous and enthusiastic. He\ is honest and courageous. His effort here is really remarkable and is definitely typical of the old man. "Over one hundred of our Maori stalwarts from all parts, as far as Ngatiporou, Gisborne, Mahia, Nuhaka, Whakaki, Wairoa, Mohaka me Heretaunga, were farewelled by a crowd of over 500. Before 12.30 a.m. the railway station was crowded with spectators. Rawiri Kamau The Hastings Silver Band led the H.B.
soldiers in the procession to the depot to meet the express train from Napier five minutes before its arrival. They halted along the platform, then the train slowed down, and stopped. Aboard were 78 Maori soldiers from the East Coast. Just then Sid. D. Kamau, with his smart set of fourteen players, played the fare- well medley, "Bless 'Em All," in waltz time. The echo of the tune struck the hearts of all that were present and just about set them waltzing the main street, and the cheers from everywhere — a great reception. The Mayor of Hastings Town, Mr. Rainbow, honoured Mr. S. D. Kamau.
The wording of the song is given here: "Bless 'em All. Bless 'em All. The long and the short and the tall. Bless all sergeant and double V.O. ones, Bless all the corporals and their blinkin sons, Cause we're saying goodbye to them all. When back to their blighty they crawl, You'll get no promotion this side of the ocean, So cheer my lads, Bless 'em All."
Second part of song in foxtrot time: "So wear a great big smile and sing a song when things go wrong. When it's raining don't com- plain for the sun will shine again. Just put those little worries on the shelf and start right in to-day, To wear a great big smile and sing a song and brush your troubles away." This ended, the farewell train moved, all the soldiers' encore sounded everywhere — great day of aroha nui.
OVERSEAS NEWS Co.; Milton Baumgartner, Royal Baking
wwat twttv apt? nniMr Co- ' Milton Ramsey, salesman; W. W. WHAT THEY ARE DOING Goodwill, Phil. Peterson, Lloyd J. Allen, Author's Note. — If any of the mission- J. Taylor Later, Jarvis Keddington are aries are omitted in this article it is due all in airplane factories; Mark Wheeler, to lack of information on hand. c. S. Johnston, with the Coca-Cola Co. ; Married List. — Elders Richard Lam- Richard Lambert, credit manager and bert, A. Harper Wallace, Glen L. Rudd, salesman; Frank K. Aldous, Manager Im- W. E. Smith, Lamont F. Toronto, Charles perial Oil Co. ; Garn S. Henderson, em- H. Felt, Wilford W. Goodwill, Claude D. ployee Imperial Oil Co.; Haven R. Burn- Kirkland, D. V. Taylor, L. Garn Dastrup, ington, rail road; Robert E. Crandall, Mark Wheeler, Gleyre Frederickson, C. S. rail road; Vincent Haslam, bank; Lamont Johnston, G. P. Langton, Jarvis Ked- F. Toronto Insurance; Claude D. Kirk- dington. land, Sears Roebuck Co.; Robert Card- Army Life. — Elders Warren S. Ottley, well, auto salesman ; David M. Evans, C. Burnett Mason, George R. Biesinger, Barry T. Wride, service station lee-sees Mark J. Udy. A. Bonner Fitzgerald. and operators ; William Grange, J. C.
Occupations. — Elders A. Harper Wal- Penny Co. lace, Utah Poultry; Glen L. Rudd, Utah Engagements. — Elders Frank K. Aid- Poultry; Gerald P. Langton, J C. Penny ous and Garn S. Henderson.
Noema, 1941
TE KARERE
847
MANAWATU DISTRICT Reported by Polly Wi Neera
Greetings! It has been officially an- nounced that Sergt. George Katene, Jnr., has been decorated with a Military Medal for gallantry in the Greek campaign.
Bro. Len Nehua of Ngapuhi, who was a member of the advance party to board the troopship for overseas service, from Papakura, spent time off with his friend Petra Ropata at the home of Petra's re- latives, in Wellington.
We would remind listeners, who find it possible, to listen in to Station 2ZB Wel- lington every Sunday morning at 11 o'clock. A special broadcast of the Taber- nacle choir has been arranged for the Commercial Broadcasting Stations in New Zealand. The choir with its 300 voices is conducted by J. Spencer Cornwall with Dr. Frank W. Asper at the organ, and the spoken words are by Richard L. Evans. Don't miss hearing this fine broadcast of music, which comes to you from the Cross-Roads of the West, Salt Lake City.
Among the number of visitors to our Branch at Porirua during the past month were: Bro. Parata Pirihi of the Welling- ton Branch; Taylor Mihaere of Danne- virke, now employed in the Land and In- come Tax Dept., Wellington; Bro. Smiler of Gisborne, now employed on the staff of Woolworths Ltd. in the capital city.
In the 2YD Sports Club session on Thursday night, 25th September, the fol- lowing broadcast was heard: "This com- ing Saturday N.Z. University will be playing Wellington representatives in a Rugby final. N.Z. University halfback will be M.N. Paewai, a nephew of Lou Paewai of All Black fame.. Paewai is definitely Otago's No. 1 halfback, and
after week he lias turned oi football. . . . Playing for University 'A' in the final against Zingari-Richmond Ias1 Saturday, lie was the outstanding player on the field and scored His usual try. . . " Nitama was a member of the New Zea- land Universitj team which played Wel- lington the following Saturday. I had the privilege of b
on board th< convoy "I.eander" when she
arrived in Wellington for the first time, and of being a vrftnese to the welcome
ber "i" th( Poneke Club. The Hon. Mr. Paikea pr< - i n u [1 h a korowal i Maori chieftain' • loak > on behalf of the Maori race; tl ; I ended
by t he Ad in
< >nc< again Bro Peneamin< v. d« hi no .oi hly visit o 1 1 punl Branch, Palmer ton North, and re«
MAHIA DISTRICT
RCPOI ted hy ! lie I n.ldel
turima
! i irinia and familj V
tl,.-, mi. all tho ■ o Byd-
•i, gift and
tnd guide him i in family1 and frlem
Word h:, | other
Pont | Te Kaui u, m ho n i wounded In
i ed up b) I he Qi , man Red
Cross, and was flown to a hospital in Greece, and is now a prisoner of war in Germany. Bro. Ponty reports that he is well treated, and wishes to be re- membered to all.
We are proud to announce that another group of our Nuhaka boys have left for Papakura Camp, including Benjamin Christy, Tilly Whaanga, John Smith, Stan Smith, Edgar Smith, George Haronga, Rajah Karangaroa. Bro. Tuehu Smith now has four sons in camp, Cleo is a cor- poral, while Riki has been transferred to Trentham, where we understand he is to be given the rank of 2nd Lieutenant. Congratulations boys! Nuhaka is proud of you all.
Bro. Jerry Orikena (overseas) is the proud daddy of a bouncing baby boy, while Bro. Peter and Sister Kui Campbell are equally proud of their new son.
Mrs. Mary Pilmer Matawai has been visiting relatives in Nuhaka. First time her husband Joe knew what a good cook he is, and how.
Our Relief Society Sisters have for- warded about twenty parcels to the boys overseas; besides this they are v, tive in their other duties of the Relief Society.
Bro Stuart Whaanga is doing his ut- most to promote the Church Welfare pro- gramme in this Branch, the results thus far are not too encouraging, but kia kaha Brother, Nuhaka always comes to light in good time.
HAURAKI DISTRICT
Reported by Wm. Ormsby and
Francie Greening
Following the Hui Pariha at Huria.
September 2(;th and liTth. the District
Presidency along with the Sunday School
Superintendency have been busy visiting. At t lie home of Brother Re
Maketu, Saints from Rotorua. Te Puke
and Wairoa gathered, where the follow- ing were carried out : Baptisms \\ 'aika- riri Hoko, Berepia Hohaia, Alvia Tauma- loto, Omarumutu Palamalu, ValihV
\pril Palamalu, and i: by Elder Wharekura Blessiaga Turns- nua Deies Palamalu. by Elder T. Ormsby, Charlen 1 1 iru* aka by
Elder I
by Elder Wl
Rang! Hap. (a to Diana Tarawa of Huria
at Maketu by Elder Wharekura, October
Mh. mil.
Satin L6th, l '.» 1 1 . marked
• in Whan kui
ter of Elder H tnd his
dear u te, of the Horohoro
Branch Tin nether
ii be in death iddened
with thi nd bve. I"
he family of Brof I ■
and abide In the hope h,
i
little daughter.
u UKATO DI3TRH l
Ray oi tad i>v Joka w Amti and
i » ,\ i, t>, m, b) nual Qold and Ore< n Ball Id In the n i the mo
848
TE KARERE
Noema, 1941
sponsors. (Sister Una Thompson has advised that this is also the most suc- cessful, financially, throughout the Mis- sion for this year.) Thanks and praise for this wonderful climax of Mutual effort is due to the local officers and Hunga Tapu, Sister Una Thompson and the Huria Missionary party who were very materially assisted by the local towns- people.
After retiring on the night of 23rd August, Sister Tamati Amoketi of Wai- ngaro was suddenly awakened one night to find her home in flames. The tragedy did not physically injure seriously any of the occupants.
The Waingaro Branch is improving in activities and is creating an interest among members to foster the work of the Lord. Keep it up.
Hamilton has obtained a hall for their Church meetings. All who may be in- terested in these Sunday gatherings are asked to communicate with Brother Myers, Sister Fryer, or Superintendent Horace Forbes as to time of meetings, etc.
August 28th marked the parting of Polly Hopa, beloved daughter of Sister Eliza Whatu Apiti of Frankton, which occurred at the Public Hospital, Hamil- ton. Deceased was buried at the Hamil- ton East Cemetery, with Bro. Douglas Whatu Apiti directing the services and John Apiti dedicated the grave.
MAROMAKU BRANCH Reported by Lois Going
Bro. Raymond Going of the Maromaku Branch is now in the Air Force, sta- tioned at Hobsonville, training for over- seas service. Bro. Stanley Hay, who has already served in territorial training, has since been called in the last overseas ballot.
HAWKE'S BAY DISTRICT
The Gold and Green Ball held at Aotea House, Tamaki, August 27th, was another outstanding event. Miss Emaraina Ta- kerei was crowned queen of the Gold and Green Ball of 1941 by President Cowley. Wi Larkin's orchestra from Palmerston North played spirited music for the evening.
At last! Sister Rangi Wilson and her family have finally caught up with Bro. Teao. From reliable sources information is to hand that the happy couple and their welcome children have sustained themselves at Mangere, Auckland. (I warned you, Joe!)
TARANAKI DISTRICT
Reported by Zena M. Stent and
Taka Toroaiwhiti
Brother (Pte.) Henry Robinson of Wanganui visited the home folks for probably the last time before embarking for overseas service. Many farewells were held in his honour. It is with heavy hearts that we bid farewell to Brother Robinson.
President Hakopa and Bro. Toroaiwhiti are doing much that is good in the northern part of the district, and we are expecting them any time now.
Sister Katene, after a very long and serious illness, is back on her feet again, and her presence at the meetings is cer- tainly appreciated.
Mick Stinson never sc-ems to know
exactly where he belongs, as we think he belongs right here with us. He is here
lor a while at any rale, and do we need him ?
The Manaia people under the direction of the local M.I. A. Presidency have held Farewells for their soldier members. A very creditable affair was held in honour of Sapper l'uhi Kei.
Cottage and regular Branch meetings are being held in the Manaia area of the district, under the guidance of President Turake Manu. Brother Taylor Mihaere, who has been labouring in this district., is now in Wellington.
WAIRAU DISTRICT Reported by Huitau Elkington Brother Turi Ruruku, who has been ill in the Nelson Hospital, has fully recov- ered and is now visiting in Shannon. Sister Lucy Taylor, also an inmate of the Nelson Hospital, is improving markedly. Brother Martin Taylor is the proud father of a baby daughter. Brother and Sister Ben Hippolite are happy at the reunion with their infant son.
The Wakatu Maori Women's hockey team was successful in winning the Nel- son Molar Cup.
Members of the Madsen Relief Society are busy helping the Red Cross of the French Pass district to knit comfys for the boys overseas.
Esther Elkington and her infant son Herbert Elkington of Nelson, family of Sam Elkington were for two weeks the guests of Sister and Bro. James Elking- ton.
Sam Elkington, who is in the Sig- nallers Corps at Papakura training camp was for a few days at home on special leave.
A farewell social and dance was held in the French Pass schoolroom for Bro. Arthur Elkington, Q.M.S. and Pte. Amara Hope. Mr. Leon, who presented gifts of money from the people, expressed words of praise and admiration for the part pakeha and Maori are doing together overseas. In response, Arthur Elking- ton said, "I am going to join those of my kin who are already in the front line. Those of you who remain behind are the supporters of us in the front line, with- out you we cannot succeed. So put all your efforts to your work on your lands and help the boys in front." Applause. A very favourable report was received from Herbert Elkington, who is with the Middle East Forces overseas, of his box- ing bout. In his own words: "It was an inter-division championship fought in a N.Z. Division Base Camp, and my oppon- ent was an artillery man who was an amateur champ, back in N.Z., with 6 wins to his credit and one win on board ship. Well, we had three 2-minutes. The first round my second said to me, 'You fight your own battle.' Well, I did, and did pretty good, too. In the second round he told me to blast hell out of my man. Well, I did. In the third and last round I slugged into him and the fighting was most strenuous. I had blackened one of his eyes and pumped his nose so much that his face was covered in blood. I don't know how it came about, but I came out of it unmarked, but I was so
Xoema, 1941
TE KARERE
849
done up I could hardly walk. Both of us were half carried out of the ring. Anyway, after we finished our fight and went back to our corners the referee declared me winner on points."
Herbert also mentions that he has met many of his Ngatitoa tribesmen, and George Katene is his Camp S.M.
Much sorrow was felt by the people of Madsen at the death of Rangikapua, infant son of Bro. Rangi and Sister Lucy Elkington. Funeral service was held in the Madsen Hall under the direction of Turi Ruruku.
A Home Guard Committee was organ- ized at French Pass and Bro. James R. Elkington was elected Secretary.
The Home Guard is now functioning under the capable leadership of Mr. John Kawharu.
AUCKLAND DISTRICT
The Mangere Branch held a very suc- cessful Branch Conference commencing Friday, October 10th, until the 12th. The activities of this "Hui Peka" were a credit to the district. Their Gold and Green Social, sponsored by the M.I. A., was well attended on Friday night, and on Saturday evening the Conference pro- per commenced with the Primary child- ren, followed by the M.I. A. Sunday morning Priesthood and Relief Society meetings were held before Sunday School, which was well attended. The afternoon session found the hall packed to enjoy the spirit prompted by those present and particularly the speakers. President Cow- ley was present at all meetings, and his talks of the Gospel were well received as they filled all with the inspiration to worship God with our lives.
The Auckland Branch is pleased to welcome Brother Don Robs of Dunedin.
Don is an acquisition to any community.
Ear the presiding brethren have
D.01 lei any "grass grow under their
f.-ei" because Don now heads the talented "Children's choir" comprising the pupils of the Sunday School from the "A" De- partment to the Primary. This choir made 11 1 debul at t be Relief So hei.i in the chapel. Thursday, October
16th! They and their Nader were the
'Mine.
Em llj Mark of Porirua and
Mad • ' I or two With the
Cowley's at the Mission Home, prior to leaving for summer work in H.B.
Brother Douglas Fraser, a recent con- vert to the Church and a generous sup- porter of all Branch activities, lost his father, who passed away suddenly on Saturday, October 11th, 1941. We asso- ciate ourselves with all who have been actuated by this sudden cause of grief to extend consolation and condolence to Douglas and his mother, Mrs. Fraser.
Ernie Cormier, now of the R.N.Z.A.F., formerly a member of the M.I. A. and a staunch supporter of its activities locally and at Hui Taus, was seen to advantage in his uniform when he visited the Saints while in the city. Another Air Force member of our Branch is Mateen Jensen, now L.A.C. who is unfortunately in hospital suffering from a foot ailment. L.A.C. Jensen is scheduled to attend Levin Training School early this month. His brother, Carl B., now in a territorial camp, won fame for the name of Jensen when he scored above the CO. in a re- cent "target shoot."
Miss Kere M. Morris (Meha clan), now residing with the President and his familv at Headquarters, has just com- pleted her musical examinations at the University, the complete results of which will not be to hand until some time in the early part of the New Year. Miss Morris feels confident that the important ones at least will show creditable if not outstanding effort. Her life is a busy one. with school and teaching some 40 or more pupils, etc.
Brother William Brosnan now dons the
uniform and insignia of the "Coastal De-
I'nit." stationed across the hay.
From the look of things, Bill is looking
better and BO is his dear wife. Joyce. Their frequent attendance at Church
should be an incentive to all
and sundry that newly weds are still happy. be happier, and are
doing their bit to make others happy. (Observe ye Harris', Rei's and \ A m. ha's. i
B, who will marts
,t Auckland, October H.'.th. with
• i Cowley officiating, was bap-
k.iiv Harris on October 22nd,
1941. The happy COUple will reside at their horn,' at Koval Oak.
THINGS AM >NEY C \.VT BUY M-mic, can't buy a clear conscience square dealing is the price
Money can't buy happiness happiness is a mental attitude and (•in- ma\ be as happy in a cottage as in a mansion,
Money can't bu) sunsets, songs of wild birds and the music of the wind in the trees th< <• are as free as the air we breathe.
Mone) can't buy inward peao the result of a con-
sti uctive philosoph) of li Ee.
Money can't buj charactei character is what we are when we are alone w ith our elves in the dai k.
— The Associated Dispatcher.
850 TE KARERE Noema, 1941
SUNDAY SCHOOL REPORTS
The First Quarter begins — December, January and February.
The Second Quarter begins— March, April and May.
The Third Quarter begins — June, July and August.
The Final Quarter begins — September, October and November. Send Final Quarterly Reports by December 20th. Reports on Hand —
Third Quarter, 1941. — Auckland District — Tamaki and Man- ge iw Hawker's Bay — Korongata, Te Hauke and Heretaunga. Wai~ vara pa — Kohunui, Rangiotu and Gladstone. Waikato — Kopuku, Hoeotainui. Mahoenui, Horotiu, Whatawhata, Taumarunui, Puke- tapu, Maukoro, Te Awamutu, Matakowhai. Mahia — Opoutama and Xuhaka. Wairau — Madsen. Poverty Bay — Kopua, Muriwai, Te Hapara, Tokomaru Bay. Hauraki — Iluria, Wairoa, Te Puke Home, Horo Horo. Taranaki — Wanganui. Ngapuhi — Ruatangata, Manga- muka, Ngawha, Maromaku, Opahi, Tautoro, Awarna and Mataraua. Total X umber of Schools Reported — 38.
Branches whose names do not appear on this report cannot blame the District Superintendencies for failure to report. Each Sunday School has been, and is still, asked to forward ONE copy of their TRIPLICATE report to the Mission Sunday School, Box 72, Auck- land ; then send ONE to the District and KEEP the other ONE for own use.
SIX PENNY FUND RECEIVED
Period 1939.— Gladstone 9/-.
Period Ending 1940.— Tamaki (Auckland), 8/6; Mangere 6/6; Te Hauke £1; Mangamuka £1; Waimamaku 10/-; Peterehema 3/-. Total £3/17/-/
First Half-yearly Period, 1941.— H.B.: Te Hauke, £1/2/-, Waipawa 8/-, Win. Edwards and family 4/-, Tamaki £2/17/-, Korongata £2/10/-, Heretaunga 7/6. Waikato: Matakowhai 10/-, Puketapu £1, Hoeotainui £1/19/-, Aria 18/, Taumarunui 6/-, Horotiu completed for vear 11/-, Whatawhata completed for year 12/-. Hauraki: Maketu 3/-, Tahawai 10/-, Ohaki 4/6, Kirikiri- Omahu 12/-, Huria 16/6, Wairoa £1/6/-, Te Puke Home 5/6. Povcrtx Bay. Tokomaru Bay 14/-. Rahui 5/-, Te Hapara £1/16/-. Auckland: Auckland £1/3/-. Ngapuhi: Maromaku 15/6, Kaikou 10/-, Tautoro 16/5, Opahi 8/-, Whananaki 2/6, Ruatangata 17/6, Te Horo £2/3/6, Waiomio £1/1/-, Whangarei 3/-. Wairarapa: Gladstone 14/-, Kohunui £1/1/-, Rangiotu 10/-. Mahia: Nuhaka £2/14/-. Opoutama complete for year £1/12/-. Total £33/8/11.
REMEMBER.— The final Quarterly Report is due the last Sundav of November, 1941, and so is the Last of your SIX PENNY FUND.
I €HAR€R€
"<&$&
Wahanga 35
Tihema, 1941
Nama 12
I'lS
P-$t
f
<•>
®
SPECIFICATIONS
iu will build a wall about That hate cannot get through, That will turn back distrust and doubt. They need not trouble you.
It' you will build a little fence
To keep all hard words in, You will receive this recompense —
To keep the friends you win.
[f you will build yourself a gate Through which Love only goes,
will be the friends who wait; Disarmed will be your foes.
If you will cut a window view
From which the eye can see Only the beautiful and true,
How fair the world will be!
— Clarence Edwin Flynn in New York Times.
®^8&$&tS$&'<
®
Te Karere
Wahanga 35
Established in 1907 Tihema, 1941
Nama 12
Zt&->Z&>&F>&F>£&>&&>£&>Z&i <£&>£
Matthew Cowley Kelly Harris Eru T. Kupa Waimate Anaru
Tumuaki Mihana Etita
Kaiwhakamaori Kaiwhakamaori
"Ko tenei Pepa i whakatapua hei hapai ake i te iwi Maori ki roto i nga whakaaro-nui.'
"Te Karere" is published monthly by the New Zealand Mission of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, and is printed by THE BUSINESS PRINTING WORKS LTD., 55 Albert Street, Auckland, CI, N.Z. Subscription Bates: I - per six months; 5/- per year; £1 for five years; £2/10/- for life. (United States Cur- rency: $1.00 per year; $4.00 for five years; $10.00 for life.)
Address Correspondence, Box 72, Auckland, C.l, New Zealand.
|
CONTENTS |
||
|
Editorial — |
||
|
P< ace on Earth |
856 |
|
|
Special Features — |
||
|
858 |
||
|
Marj 1 [annah Wadham |
||
|
\\ li.it 1 Know of the Mormons |
. . . 861 |
|
|
K;i Whakatuwheratia Nga Urupa \ K |
AJce Ano |
Te |
|
1 1 unga Mate |
||
|
\\l,.-,t Should a Man's Religion Do For H |
||
|
Church Features |
||
|
Mush For Sa< i amenl Sei \ i< i |
||
|
Relief So< iet) ' entennial , , |
||
|
Sunda) S< hool |
||
|
Primal j |
||
|
News From the Field |
TE KARERE Tihema, 1941
Ottortal • • .
PEACE ON EARTH
The Following editorial is from the facile pen of the late Elsie Talmage Brandley, who, prior to her passing in 1935, was Associate Editor of the Improvement Era.
Christmas is on its joyous, holly-bedecked way. Every thought is turned towards the great holiday of the world: the day which commemorates the birth of the Saviour. In the rush and struggle of every-day life, the ideals of Jesus help its to make the decisions and choose the path which lead to happiness and salvation, if we but take the time to make them a part of our philosophy of living. And if we do not consciously sit down to ponder on the meaning of the truths He taught during the brief three years of His ministry, there is still power in them which makes them a part of us, even though an undefined part.
The world to-day is different from the world of even a century ago. The materialistic attitude of many people has resulted in such an abundance of things to be wanted, and such a feverish attempt to secure them for ourselves, that calm tranquility is a characteristic more frequently envied in others than possessed by the average girl and boy. Hours of thoughtful contemplation of life and its meaning are crowded out by the innumerable interruptions and diver- sions which appear continuously all day long, and so the joy of understanding life as well as living it is diminished.
During the Christmas holidays there might be a few moments in which to think, or talk about the real things of existence. Shows, automobiles, dances, and fine clothes are not the greatest blessings to be attained, but sometimes in the effort to secure them, we leave ourselves no time to place real values upon the real things. Gifts for Christmas
Tihema, 1941
TE KARERE
857
are selected with a mental comparison, and an unvoiced idea of what will be given in return ; the shepherd.- and the wise men expected nothing in return tor their gifts that first Christmas.
The youth of the Church constitutes a tremendous power. You are the ones whose responsibility it is to in- sure the faith and unwavering trust in the Gospel which is your heritage. At Christmas time — on Christmas Day, it no other time is promising — take a few minutes with your- self to find out what preparation of soul and mind you are making to earn- on. The future of the Church depends upon you; the great gifts which have been in the "family" for a century are yours to preserve, untarnished. And so, on the very eve of the new century of "Mormonism' 'take inventory, and see that you understand the stock, and know what your part is in its preservation. May a clearer under- standing of its incomparable value to you, individually, and to the generations to follow, be yours this Christmas-tide.
CHRISTMAS GREETINGS To the Elders who have laboured in the W\\ Zealand Mission; to the stalwart nun who preside over the districts and branches; to the noble women who direel the Relief Society ; to the officers and teachers of all auxiliar) organisa- : to the men in uniform, at home or overseas; to all Church members, both European and Mann, both weak and strong; to <>uv many friends; t<i everyone, everywhere, we send our greetings and "aroha nui."
May tin- Light which -till shines so brightl) in what i^ still left ol .'in erstwhile Christian world, continue t-> illumin
an- nui w.i, mi, uf the difficulties whi<
1/,/,','/;, .
858
TE KARERE
Tihema, 1(M1
Sister Cowley
"GREETINGS"
WOMEN'S AUXILIARY ORGANIZATIONS By Sister Elva T. ( 'owley
As we approach the anniversary of the birth of our Lord and Saviour we find the agents of death and destruction still rampant in the world. The youth of nations is devoting its intelligence and skill to the methods of taking human life, of sinking ships, bombing cities, burning homes, rain- in- shell upon innocent women and children- — yet the beautiful simplicity of the story of the Nativity of Christ as told by Luke in the gospels will continue to grip the imagination and touch the hearts of countless millions the world over. The Christmas hells still echo those sacred words. "Fear not, for behold I bring you good tidings of great joy, which shall he to all people. For unto you is horn this day in the city of David a Saviour which is Christ the Lord."
The spirit of hope, peace, spiritual love, of divine forgiveness and of life everlasting symbolized in these words can never die. For, although mankind is doing his best to destroy the basic struc- ture upon which Christianity is built, truth and righteousness will triumph. Jesus said, "I am the light of the world, he that follbweth me shall not walk in darkness, but shall have the light of life." The promise in these words and all others spoken by the Master will be fulfilled. Already there is a sign. So many things which sinned unimportant have now become important in the universal struggle for life and liberty. There is a universal pity for those bowed down by misfortune. Every appeal for aid meets a quick response. The rich and poor are rubbing shoulders and experiencing a common suffering. The spirit of brotherhood is being planted in the hearts of men. The process may be slow and the way long, but God's promises will be fulfilled if we will do our part.
Men may create their "isms," exalt the state, destroy churches and human life, but that divine quality in man, which is eternal, will eventually rise out of the fog to adapt itself to God's Plan.
Those in the world who question the authenticity of that beauti- ful story of the birth and resurrection of Christ and His Church must still admit its influence for good in the lives of men. As one critic has said, "It has made life livable for millions of harried souls. It has taken rich and poor, learned and ignorant, white, red. yellow and black ; it has taken them all and tried to show them a way to salvation. To all in pain it has held a balm — to all in distress it has offered peace. To every man without distinction it has said, ''Jesus died for you !" To every human creature on earth it has
Tihema, 1941
TE KARERE
859
said, "You too can be saved." And therein lies Christianity's highest virtue. It has helped make the weak strong and the dejected happy. It has stilled the fear that howls in man's breast, and crushed the unrest that gnaws at his soul. In a word, "It has worked — in a measure."
At this of all seasons when we should turn our thoughts and hearts to the Great Nazarene, I desire to extend you sin- cerest greetings for a Joyous Yuletide. May we also remember that the real Christmas lies in the echo of this promise. "I am the resurrection and the life; he that believeth in Me, though he were dead, yet shall he live. And whosoever liveth and believeth in Me shall never die." John 11:25-26.
May the Lord bless you in your efforts to keep Mis commandments and promote lli- work in this mission. It is my con- stant desire- that the Latter-day Saints be
APPRECIATION' I Sister Rona Attenbor-
I ough has been honorably
J released as Secretary of
I the Mission Primary As-
[ sociation. She has rcn-
! dered faithful service and
♦ has been devoted to the
J Primary cause for several
I years. She has the love
j and respect of all who
j know her, and zve will
I always be indebted to her
j for the contribution she
\ has made to the New \
j Zealand Mission Primary
Association, and for the
service she continues to
give in other departments j
of the Church.
— Mission Primary j Presidency.
first and foremost in the spreading of the Gospel of Peace, of Goodwill and Brotherhood to all mankind. Also that each individual life be a sermon and a witness of the Divinity of Christ and His Gospel.
"To-day well lived makes every yesterday a dream of happiness, and (-very morroow a 'vision of hope."
Brigham Young said :
Compiled by Heber (J. Hale
(From his public addresses as recorded in the "Journal of Discourses." The volume mid page arc indicated after each quotation; as also the year
in which uttered.)
Man ma) propose, bul God will dispose. 13:308 (1870),
* * *
In m\ youth I was called an infidel, ami I was an infidel. What
t". I In Bible? No, t<» false creeds, and to professing without pos-
e in-. ... I ask the infidel world what the) can give in exchange
i"i the faith I have in fesus ( hrist and the religion I believe in and
practice. 13:215, 219 I 1870).
I am prepared to prov< i rom all the facts that that now exi i in all branch* of human affairs, that unioi and that divi ion is weakn< and confusion. 13:267 (187<
TE KARERE
Tihema. 1(M1
Mary Hannah Wadham
In the passing of Mary Hannah Wadham at the Masterton Hos- pital on October 20th the Church lost one of its noble women; one whose every act was motivated by the Gospel of Jesus Christ. As
she closed her eyeS to mortality she was conscious of an impending awakening in another sphere of activity and progress. Her under- standing of eternal values robbed death of its Sting and so to her it was but another adventure along the pathway of life everlasting. As a wife, mother and saint she measured up to every virtue of those sacred appointments. She was small in physical stature but her vitality was prodigious and her personality fairly beamed with kindness and joy. She loved beauty in both nature and humanity and she never side- stepped an opportunity to con- tribute to that beauty. Her home and environs were immaculate. There was ever a spiritual atmo- sphere in her home which was uplifting, and her presence sanc- tified her surroundings.
Because of distance she had little opportunity to affiliate with organized branches of the Church, but this did not deprive her of the blessings of religious devotion. She worshipped in her home and wherever she went she lived in the strictest compliance with the principles of her faith.
In 1939 she went, with her two daughters. Ivy and Mary, to the Hawaiian Islands, and there in the beautiful Temple of Laie she was sealed for eternity to her good husband, who had preceeded her in death. This was the greatest joy of her life. During her final illness she expressed a desire to recover so that she might return again to tin- Temple and render more vicarious service for her kith and kin. This unfinished business she has now left to her children, and this work as they carry it on will bring their wonderful mother close to them and assure them that she still lives.
The Wadham home at Masterton was always a sanctuary for the Missionaries and they were as welcome as if they were members of the family. Hundreds of Elders will for ever bless the memory of this wonderful mother.
The funeral services were conducted at the home in Masterton and at the graveside. President Cowley, assisted by Elder A. D. Amadio, had charge of the service. President Cowley and Mr. Maxted, a friend for many years, spoke at the home and paid tribute
Mary Hannah Wadham and her dau- ghters Ivy and Mary (from right).
Tihema, 1941 TE KARERE 861
to Sister Wadham's beautiful character and her reputation in the community as a pioneer, neighbour and citizen. Elder Amadio delivered an appropriate scriptural discourse at the grave. Friends and neigbhours of every walk of life attended to pay their last respects, and the many letters, telegrams and floral offerings were conclusive evidence that she was not only widely known but also loved by everyone who knew her.
Sister Wadham is survived by a son, E. C. Wadham of Carter- ton, and two daughters, Mary, a beloved member of the Auckland Branch, and Airs. Ivy Emery, who was not only a devoted daughter but also a constant companion and "pal" to her mother. She was predeceased by her husband, Mr. Edward Wadham, 23 years ago.
What I Know of the Mormons
Ernie Cormier, originally from Canada, and late of Auckland, is now with the Overseas Services in the Air Force in his homeland.. .Although a non- Mormon, Ernie was as jealous of Mormon activities as any Elder during his association with the Church. He will be particularly remembered for his presence at most of the Hut Taus during his three years association, which has only been terminated in this land because of the war. Good luck, Ernie. Many happy landings. — Ed.
This is a belated but nevertheless sincere expression of my grati- tude to President Cowley and the good people of the Mormon Church in New Zealand for the kindnesses, courtesies and friendships extended to me for three years.
It has been more than a mere pleasure to be associated with the Latter-day Saints. It has been a real education in religion to see a sincere effort in your teachings and every-day life to really practise the ideal Christian religion as originally intended by the One True Teacher.
I am proud to be numbered among the many boosters and friends of the Mormons in New Zealand and will make it a point acquainted with Mormons wherever they may be in parts of the world where my occupation will take me.
I can sincerely say that the Elders I have known are just about the finest hoys it has been my good fortune to associate with, and if my luck is good I pray I shall meet many more. I shall make every effort to personally contact that very finest of fellows. Hepa Bfeha, as I know f shall benefit from his company as I have benefited in the past.
In closing I wish to extend my Bincerest wishes that the Latter-day Saints enjoy every hlessing that their efforts t<> teach Christianity meet with every success possible.
I am grateful indeed for having experienced the pleasures and
goodwill and fellowship of the Hui Taus. and may they urow and gTOW until everyone in New Zealand will want to attend.
A Well wisher.
ERNIE CORMIER
|
BOU |
XI) |
VOLUME |
()I< |
"TE |
KARERE/' l |
•11 |
|
\ limited It- K or ere is possible w ill) |
number of now availa /,• Karere, |
bound volumes <> ble. Place youi '. \iiiklan. |
the 1941 orders as . I'm- 8 |
isSUC «>t" soon as |
862
TE KARERE
Tihema, 1(M1
Pres. Matthew Cowley
KA WHAKATUWHERATIA NGA URUPA A KA ORA AKE ANO TE HUNGA MATE
He whakamaoritanga o stain o nga tuhituhinga a Erata Hani li. Taramete, Apotoro (kua mate). Ko Erata Matin Kauri tc kai-whakdmaori ia ia i konei i mau.—Etita.
"He aha koutou te whakapono ai, tera ka whakaarahia ake e te Atua te hunga mate?" (Nga Mahi a nga Apotoro 26:8.) Koia ta Paora patai ki a Kingi Akaripa i a ia e here- here ana, a e whakawakia ana ia i tona aroaro. Kua pahemo i taua i taua wa nga tau e toru tekau i muri i te aranga ake o to tatou Ariki i te mate, a i te tukinotia tonutia hoki te Hunga Tapu me nga Apotoro i aua wa, he mea na te pumau tonu o to ratou whakapono ki te Ripe- katanga me te Aranga mai o te Karaiti. Ko te iwi mohio, ko nga Haruku, kahore tahi o ratou whakaponotanga, he tika te Aranga mai i te mate, a ahakoa i mea o ratou hoa-tautohe, ara nga Parihi, he tika tonu, ko nga tangata anake i whakapono kua ara mai te Karaiti i te mate, ko te hunga kua meinga nei ratou he Karaitiana, he mea na te whakapono me te ripenetatanga.
E tautokongia ana e nga Tuhituhinga Tapu, ko te Wairua o Ihu Karaiti i whakahokia mai i te ao wairua ki roto ki taua tinana ano i takoto nei i roto i te urupa. I te awatea tonu o taua Ratapu e kore- rotia ake nei kei roto i nga Tuhituhinga, i kite a Meri Makarini i a la me etahi atu i whakaaetia kia whawha ki Ona waewae. A i te ahiahi ka tu Ia i waenganui i nga Apotoro me te whakamarie i o ratou ngakau wehi; na Ana kupu: "Tirohia oku ringa me oku wae- wae, ko ahau ano ia: whawhatia ahau, kia kite ai koutou; kahore hoki i te wairua kikokiko, wheua ranei, me oku e kitea nei e koutou. (Ruka 24: 39.)
Na te mau tonu o nga puta me nga nawe ki te tinana ka mohio ratou koia ko taua tinana nei ano o te Ariki i a Ia e ora ana i wae- nganui i a ratou. Otiia kia tino tatu ai nga ngakau o aua hunga kia mohio ai hoki ratou ehara Ia i te atarangi noa iho, engari he tinana ora Tona, ka mea Ia, "He kai ranei ta koutou i konei?" A mauria mai ana e ratou he ika me etahi atu kai, "a kainga ana e Ia i o ratou aroaro."
Ko te Karaiti te matamua o nga tangata katoa i whakakotahitia nei o ratou wairua ki nga tinana, a puta ake i roto i nga urupa he tangata ora; no reira e kiia ana ko Ia, "hei matamua mo te hunga kua moe," me "te whanau matamua i roto i te hunga mate," me tenei ano, "ko ia nei te putanga matamua o te hunga mate." (1 Koriniti 15:20; Korohe 1:18; Kitenga 1:5.) He nui, he marama hoki nga korerotanga o onamata mo te whai wikitoria o te Kaihoko o te ao, i runga i te mate. Kei te pera tonu hoki te whakamarama a nga Karaipiture, tera ka ara mai ano nga tangata katoa kua mate i runga i te whenua.
E rua nga whakaarahanga i te mate e whakamaramatia ana; ko te aranga tuatahi tetahi me te aranga whakamutunga, ara ko te aranga mai o te hunga tika me te aranga mai o te hunga kino. Me whakarongo ki nga kupu a te Karaiti pu ake mo to ratou aranga mai: "Meake ka puta te wa, e rongo ai i Tona reo nga tangata katoa i roto i nga urupa, a ka puta mai; ko nga kai mahi o te pai ki te aranga
Tihema, 1941
TE KARERE
863
Hui Pariha ka tu ki Tamaki, II. B., a te 24 me 25 o nga ra o Hanu- ere, 1942. He powhiri tenci ki te katoa kia haere mai ki to tatou Hid. Tera
Rdhiri Harris.
Timuaki Peka. Eriata No per a,
Timuaki Takiwa. Matin Kauri,
Timuaki Miliaua.
o te whakaoranga; a ko nga kai mahi o te kino ki te aranga o te whaka- wakanga." (Hoani 5 : 28-29.)
I timata te aranga tuatahi i taua aranga mai o Ihu Karaiti, a ka haere tonu a muri iho. Ina hoki ko enei kupu e kiia nei: "Tuwhera noa hoki nga urupa; a he maha nga tinana i ara mai o te hunga tapu kua moe; a puta ake ana i nga urupa i muri iho o tona aranga mai, haere ana ki roto ki te pa tapu, he tokomaha hoki te hunga i kitea ai ratou." (Matiu 27: 52-53.) Ka tutuki te aranga mai o te hunga tika ina hoki mai te Ariki i runga i te kororia, otira kua tau te ritenga kia ara ratou rite tonu ki o ratou ake ahua; e ki ana a Paora, "Ko tenei kua ara a te Karaiti i te mate, kua waiho hei matamua mo te hunga kua moe. Na te tangata nei hoki te mate, waihoki na te tangata te aranga o te hunga mate. I roto hoki i a Arama ka mate katoa nga tangata, wai- j hoki i roto i a te Karaiti ka whakaorangia pea etahi take nunui e pa katoatia. Qtiia tenei, tenei, i tona ake tu- ranga; ko te Karaiti te matamua; muri iho . ko te hunga o te Karaiti i tona haerenga j korero. Haere Mai. Haere I maL„ (1 Koriniti i5:20-23.)
Ka timata te kingitanga o te Karaiti mo te kotahi mano tau hei whakawhiti- tanga mo te hunga tika i te mate ki te ora, e penei ana te korero mo ratou : "Hari tonu, tapu tonu te tangata he wahi nei tona i te aranga tuatahi: e kore te ma- tenga tuarua e whai mana ki a ratou; engari he tohunga ratou ma te Atua, ma te Karaiti hoki, a kotahi mano nga tau e kingi tahi ai ratou me ia." (Kitenga 20:6) Ma te hunga kino e penei ana: "A kihai i ora ake te toe- nga o nga tupapaku, a taha noa nga tau kotahi mano." ( Kitenga 20: 5. ) Kia mataara, kia marama ake hoki te ngakau mo Tona hokin.ua mai me Tana wehewehe i te whakaarahan.ua o te hunga tika me to hunga he, kua mea te Ariki i roto i to whakakiton.ua i enei fa o muri nei; "whakarongo koutou, no te mea, nana, kua tata mai to ra nui a to Ariki. No to una kei to haere mai to ra o puaki mai ai to reo 0 to Ariki; ngaueue ai hoki nga rangi, o wiri ai to whonua me to tetere a te Atua o roa, o kaha tona tangi, mo to mea atu ki nga iwi e moe ana. c koutou, e te Hunga Tapu, maranga, ara ake hoki: e te hunga hara
e tioho, kia tuaruatia fa aim taku karan.ua." (Akoran.ua m<
Kawenata 43: L7-18.)
Kei te kaha hoki to whakainarama i roto i te Pukapuka a M
mona mo to aranga mai o nga tangata katoa: "Na, ho mate ano
o karangatia nei ko to mate o to tiana; a ma to matenga <• to Karaiti
c wcuctc nga here o tenei mate o to tinana. kia whakaarahia ai te
katoa i tenei mate 0 to tinana; a ko to wanna raua ko to tinana ka
w hakakotahil ia ano ki tona alma; ka whakahokia ko to iwi, I
pona, ki tona wahi tika, ki tona wahi tika. am- to nioa koi a tatou
nei inaianei, a ka kawea tatou kia tu ki to araaro o to Ann, ko reira
tatOU mataii ai mo tatou o inatau noi inaianoi, a koi a tatou ho n.uakau
mahara rawa ki o tatou ho katoa. Na, ka puta mai tenei whakah
mo to katoa. mo to kau mat ua. mo to t a i t a mariki. mo to horo. mo to
here-kore, mo !.• tane, mo to hunga ho, mo to hunga tika; .-i e kore
o rite ki to nui o totahi makawo .. ratOU mahunva to una 6 ngaTO, hooi ka whakahohia katoatia ano nga noa K i tona wahi <• nto ai. uio to nioa inaianoi, ara i lot,, i to tinana. a kaw.a :ina whakatuna ana ki '•
aro o to nohoanga whakawa o to Karaiti to Tama ^ to Atua. to Ifatua. o to Wanna Tapu, ko in nei ho kotahi. ho Atua ora tonu. kia whakawakia,
kia rite K i a ratou main, ahakoa pal, ahakoa kino."' lAianu 11: I
864 TE KARERE Tihema, 1941
What Should a Man's Religion Do for Him?
By Elder Barry T. U'ndc
It has been one year since the missionaries were called from New Zealand. We have been rather neglectful in sending news and articles to "Te Karere." I am writing this article in the form of a speech to you.
My Brothers, Sisters and friends, we live in trying times, Chris- tianity is on trial. Whole nations have reflected it and the whole world seems to be divided on its value as a saving force.
Religion is the great conservator of all the forces that make righte- ousness and peace in the world, the source of solace and comfort for the distressed; of inspiration and power for those who battle for
E justice and truth in the earth. When the pres- sure of want is removed, when opulence and in- dependence come to men, they are prone to forget God and regard religion only as a refuge for the poor. Wherever or whenever the major- ity of mankind do this, they rob it of its potency, the forces of social decay set in and the whole moves backward. This is the verdict of the centuries. The fate of the world rests upon faith in its Creator, morality centres in religion, and with- out its saving influences democracy cannot sur- vive. True religion should make a definite con- tribution to the lives of all who live it — the strong and the weak. None is beyond the need of its beneficient influences. Elder Wride To come directly to the question, "What
should a Man's Religion do for Him?" Here listed, in my judgment are a few of the things a satisfactory religion should supply. First, it should give rational and satisfactory answers to one's spiritual and religious questions, of which there are many: (1) Is there a Creator? (2) What is He like? (3) What is my actual relationship to Him? (4) Why am I here? (5) Do I really live after death, if so, what do I do in that estate? (6) How will my life here influence my life hereafter? Mormonism answers these and the many other questions that confront us.
IS THERE A CREATOR? The Latter-day Saints bear to the world the message and assurance that in this dispensation God has revealed Himself, also that God lives and is the creator of the heavens and earth and all that is in them, that He is a glorified perfected and exalted personality with an identity as definite as man's. We also affirm that man in this latter-day has not only heard His voice but has looked upon His face and felt the radiance and power of His divine personality. He is our Heavenly Father; we are His children made in His image.
WHY AM I HERE? We are not here as a result of chance, but for a wise and glorious purpose. We believe in the great doctrine of eternal progression, we lived before we were born and we will live after we die. We came as spirits from a pre-existent world into mor- tality to conquer the problems of a mortal life and prepare for a higher and better world. We believe that the spirit of man is im- mortal and eternal and at death it goes to the paradise of God, where it remains until the resurrection, when it will be united with the resurrected and immortal body. This union constitutes the immortal soul of man. We do live after death.
Tibema, 1941 TE KARERE 865
HOW WILL MY LIFE HERE INFLUENCE MY LIFE HERE- AFTER? We affirm that all mankind is saved through the grace of God, but exaltation and glory rest upon individual achievement. In Joseph Smith's writings we find, "What ever principle of intelligence we attain unto in this life, it will rise with us in the resurrection. If one man, by his diligence, attains more knowledge than another he will have so much the advantage in the world to come. Man is saved no faster than he gains knowledge. It is impossible for a man to be saved in ignorance."
Mormonism affirms that family ties may be renewed and sanctified in the world to come. Husband will be with wife, children with their parents, and family with family. The most comforting doctrine ever preached is that little children are inno- .,,.,,.,..,„,»,,.,»_»»,_,.,_._« cent and will be saved regardless of bap- |
tism. Upon what progress we make in \ ['/''"lcru ,2V. """•' * this world is with what measure we will be j ^"^*£* ~5* V* ' •
judged. j thc R-X-Z-A.l-., tratmng
We 'believe that a man's religion should I "} Canada, spent several
give a satisfactory answer to these and £a-v* u'!!h -V ? o , i ~:~:i j..- u.-j. •.*. _i u j. ! Sister David 'A. Smith of
the Canadian Mission, and writes that lie was most
similar questions, but it should do more » than answer his spiritual questions. It j should give him greater powers than those !
with which he is naturally endowed. In ! «*?«?"« «• W9~ the past ages by the exercise of faith in j ""^on-home spin there God, through humility and supplication J whtch was1 ^"'.^0' thc men have wrought powerfully for righte- J s°",c ^ he enjoyed in ousness. They have been divinely sus- Ne™ *™land; . tained and "inspired from on high. The TJ Karere "n'"l's lts
names of all the men of God are not re- "cadc!'s *° "?*' .'° "'"' corded in Holy Writ, many are written on W '" *he Services. An the pages of history. ""/''"'-v '',' th" °^ce1 \e'
Leaders, inventors, men such as Edison, 9ardt1* the address of the Lincoln, and many other such men, have ! V?™™ '',"'" lwlU rece%Vt
had this power in their work. This divine \J^ . . .„*
aid is not only limited to people of public — — — —
renown. The humblest soul living in this earth may be sustained by the spirit of Christ.
There is another great power that man can have, that is the power of the Holy Ghost. The Holy Ghost is conferred upon the repentent and baptized believer. Its mission is to be a special help to all who receive it. The power of the Holy Ghost makes men greater than
themselves and increases their wisdom; it gives them faith, hope and charity. This is the peculiar and precious gift which the restored
Gospel offers to all who will obey its precepts and conform to its requirements. The Holy Ghost can be bestowed upon men only by
the power of the priesthood of Cod \\C as mormons hold that priest- hood; it was restored in this dispensation in the Bpring o[' L829 upon the heads of .Joseph Smith ami Oliver Oowdery. by John the Baptist
and by the ancient Prophets, Peter, .lames ami John.
Moioioiii. in declares that man belongl to a race Of deities, that he has within him the potentialities of Godhood, that h< p
embryo all the faculties ami attributes that shine in glorious perfection
in Dirty. Clothed with the authority and DOWSr Of tin- priesthood it i^
the privilege of every man t«. develop his Intellect and spirituality to the point where elements ami the universe arc at his will.
Mormonism regard) man* welfare at the chief concern ^( the world. The earth wai created for his dwelling-place ami he e here with his own free agency to choo s good or evil, The *
confers upon him the power of choice, and la\ - QDOn him the r<
TE KARERE Tihema, 1<M1
bility with divine assistance of working out his own destiny. The best test for a religion is the importance which it attaches to man, the place it gives him, in life.
A religion that is effective must he practical, and must cover one's daily life; it must motivate men in all that he does. It should inspire men to business achievement, to cultural growth, and to social advance- ment. Mormonism recognizes and directs these incentives and aspira- tions; it teaches man how to live every day, how to take care of his body that he may be healthy, and how to fit into society. We believe that we were sent into an unfinished world to co-operate with our creator in making it beautiful. Mormonism teaches man to develop every power God has given him so that he may gain knowledge from whatever he undertakes to accomplish.
There are at least five fundamental things that a satisfactory religion should do for one: (1) It should answer his religious questions. (2) Supply sound standards by which he can best live. (3) Give to him greater powers than those with which he is naturally endowed. (4) Provide him with incentives for personal achievement. (5) Make his life full, happy, abundant and inspiring to others. Added to all of this, rising above it, permeating man's thinking, filling his days with power and purpose must be the impelling conviction in his soul that God lives. This conviction rests upon a settled faith in Him, in His matchless goodness, and unfailing love for mankind. It is upon this rock that the religion of the Latter-day Saints rests. May I ask, are you receiving these benefits by helping your religion to help you? Work diligently in these times, remember God, and may the time come once again that we may meet each other.
GENEALOGY
By Teao Wirihana THE WAY TO PERFECTION Cottage Meetings for December:
!Dec. 4 — Lesson Review from chapters 1 to 7. 11 — Lesson Reviewr from chapters 8 to 14. Slogan: "Ko te kororia ote Atua ko te Matauranga." He mihi atu ki te Mihana kua tae tenei ki te marama whakamutunga o te tau. Aha koa ona maemaetanga me ona i pouritanga kaore e mutu te karanga ate Manu nei a Te Karere Huihui a mai o koutou whakapapa ko nga ra te nei o te whaka- | pawera, kua kino te moana-nui-a-kiwa, inga mea whaka mate ♦ ate hoariri. He aha ra te mea mo te Tauhou kua ngaro e tahi o tatau ki tua o te arai ki te kauwhau i te rongopai ki te hunga- 1 mate e mate mai nei ite pae ote pakanga.
Life is dual: the body and the spirit, the real and the ideal, the loaf and the song. There is the everyday practical you that must be fed and clothed and sheltered; there is the spiritual you that rises on the wings of inspiration to commune with the Most High. There is the you, who, like Martha of old, is "cumbed with much serving"; and the you, who, like Mary, takes time to sit at the Master's feet to be taught of Him.
— Leila Marler Hog gun.
Tihema, 1941 TEvKARERE 867
Music for Sacrament Service
THOUGHTS AND SUGGESTIONS By Alfred M. Durham
The question concerning proper music during the administration of the Sacrament in our Church is one which should receive more care- ful consideration than is sometimes given.
During this sacred period, all that is done should tend to make one conscious of the purpose for which the Sacrament was instituted, namely, the Sacrifice and Atonement of the Saviour of the world, and His injunction to worthily partake of these sacred emblems in remem- brance of Him.
Anything which detracts from this purpose is not only out of place, but is a positive hindrance to the proper observance of this most important part of our worship.
As far as possible, everything connected with the service should be impersonal. For example, if the choir sings a number, it should be done without ''show," either by the chorister or choir members; and preferably the members should remain seated during the rendition. Solos, either vocal or instrumental, should in most cases be avoided, for the simple reason that the attention of the congregation is more often focused upon the performer than upon the message he may try to give through music.
Organ music, if properly played and wisely selected, seems to be best suited for use during the passing of the Sacrament.
Many organists do net properly sense the need of making suitable selections for this purpose. If music is used which has a title, or is accompanied with words, in either case the selection should be in har- mony with the service. It should then he played with a quiet etVective- ness which will inspire the listener to centre his thoughts on the pur- pose of the Sacrament.
Many beautiful compositions are written . of a thought provoking] contemplative mood, which are wholly unsuited in this COnn'e
they arc associated with secular ideas, and lead away, rather than to the objective.
The names of some of these frequently n-ed are as follow*-: List's "Uroai. i of Love"; "Drink to .Me Only With Thine Eyes"; "Al; at Thy Sweel Voice, from "Samson and Delilah"; "Nevin "The Swan"; "Prayer?1 from "Hansel and Gretel"; "Juanita";
"id"; BrahmH "Lullaby"; "Sweet and Low" and others of this type. (Imo, i music2 5fes, bul i I for a Sacrament service; b< the text and thoughl lead far. far away from the desired trend during the passing of the bread and water.
v beautiful hymns may be used to good effect by pr< Cation ami arrangement, a few of which arc here suggested: "N My Cod to Thee"; "A Po< r Wayfaring Man of Grief"; Humble Birth"; "How Greal the Wi dom and the I Soul, Arise"; "< >h It Is Wonderful"; "Reverently and Meekly [ "Behold the Cicat Redeemer Die." Thee are found either in the "De i ret Sunday School Songs/' or "The Latter-day Saint Hyi
The "Schreiner" Organ Boole is in every ward of the Church, from t kit Mm ce :i few number are h< • uitable Sacrament Music; "Supplication" Schreiner; "When Tl Near" Bach . he Lord*' Mend<
"< mr i:< de< mer and < tar Lord" Schrein* i I Sacred Head Once Wounded" Bach-Schreiner. The above men! hymn and election will enrich the period while the Sai heme admini tered.
TE KARERE Tihema, 1941
Relief Society Centennial
By Sister Elva T. Cowley
The 17th of March marks the Centennial of the Women's Relief Society of the Church of Latter-day Saints. One hundred years ago the Prophet Joseph Smith, with eighteen women, organized this Society for charitahle purposes. From that small beginning the organization has grown and developed until it has become national and international in scope and influence.
At the close of 1937, when the membership was approximately 75.0CO, a campaign was launched for a Church-wide increase of 25.000 additional members, in order to bring the enrolment to 100,000 by 1942. Only a few months remain before the goal must be reached. What are you doing in the support of this drive?
For the past two years the general board has been thinking, planning, and writing to make this Centennial a great event in the history of the Relief Society throughout the Church. It therefore has been recommended that all wards and branches plan some special programme to commemorate this anniversary. In view of this request I take this opportunity to remind the branches in the mission to make plans and preparations now, for the 17th March. Celebrations might be held in each branch separately, or conjointly in the districts.
You could use the historical part of the Relief Society handbook, old minute books and historical records as background material for dramas, stories, recitations, etc., as well as biographical sketches of the pioneers of the Society in the Mission. The singing mothers should be outstanding in their feature on this programme. It would be advisable, therefore, to choose suit- able songs now and practise them at regular weekly meetings in order to be well prepared.
For some years past the General Board has conducted a Memo- rial Prize Poem Contest. In as much as the women of New Zealand to my knowledge have never participated, I would like to suggest that wre have a Centennial Poem and short story contest of our own. The theme of the poem and short story shall be Relief Society Cen- tennial, or something to that effect. The poem should not exceed more than thirty lines or the story 2,000 words. The contest to be open to anyone, young or old. We would welcome the literary efforts of "Relief Society Fathers and Sons."
Acknowledgment.—
Thanks and appreciation to the Korongata Branch Primary for their contri- bution of £3 to the Prim- iary Fund. The Tatnaki Branch Primary, H.B., I should not be satisfied with their inability to sub- j scribe to the Mission ♦ Primary Fund, but are J urged to redouble their ! efforts and remit to the \ Mission Office an amount J that will cover the exist- 0 ing obligation.
Tihema, 1941 TE KARERE 869
If this suggestion is approved of by the branches the competi- tions should be handed to the committee in charge of the celebrations not later than the first week in March so they can be used in the various programmes. Then if you will send in your poems and stories to the headquarters a selection will be made for publication in the "Te Karere," and prizes will be awarded to the winners. So do your best.
The General Board also recommended the planting of R.S. Centennial memorial trees on the church grounds. Xot only will they add beauty to the grounds, but they will be a living monument to R.S. throughout the years. A tree deep rooted in the earth with its numerous branches stretched invitingly to all mankind typifies the noble purpose and service of the Relief Society. This sugges- tion for the year, to make our "homes chapels and maraes beautiful."
A Centennial tree adorning the grounds of our Chapels or even on the gardens would stand as a living testimony of our faith in the cause of this great organization.
Let us not forget our Church Welfare nor our Hui Tan hand work. The First Presidency of the Church is constantly urging- the Saints to have enough clothing and food on hand for a year in advance.
May we all CO-Operate and make this Centennial an occasion to be remembered by old and young in the Mission throughout the years. May our Society grow and progress in its educational as well as its charitable activities to the memory of the great Founder, the Prophet Joseph Smith.
NEW SECRETARY APPOINTED
Elder Kelly Harris has been appointed Secretary of the \( w Zealand Mission as from the 6th day of November. Be will continue as Editor of "Te Karere" and also as President and Secretary of the Mission Sunday Schools. Until other plans are effected he will also handle the secretarial work of the Mission Primaries. All communications pertaining to work in these respective organizations should be addressed to him, I ask for him your faith and prayers and your assistance in • ■very repsect. The efficiency of his office depends upon the support he receives from the di trid secretaries of the respec tive organizations, if there are any whose time, or la interest, will not permit of efficient service ai district taries of the auxiliary organizations, I am asking you to i Immediately so that maj be appointed who will
carry on and co-operate with our ne* Mission Sen
M \TI I1KW COW I IN .
dent
870 TE KARERE Tihema, 1941
SUNDAY SCHOOL
I Th j
"OUR HOMES AND CHAPELS SHALL BE BEAUTIFUL" j
"For Zion must increase' in beauty and in Holiness; her borders J must be enlarged; her stakes must be strengthened; yea -eerily I say unto you. Zion must arise and put on her beautiful garments."
—Doctrine & Covenants 82: 14. J
SACRAMENT GEM
'Tis sweet to sing the matchless love Of Him Who left I lis home above, And came to earth — () wondrous plan — To suffer, bleed and die for man.
CONCERT RECITATION James I: 26.
"If any man among you seem to be religious, and bridleth not his tongue, hut deceiveth his own heart, this man's religion is vain."
KORERO A NGAKAU Menu 1:26.
"Ki te mea he ahua karakia to tetahi i roto ia koutou, ki te kore e parairetia e ia tona arero, he tinihanga hoki nona ki tona ngafcau, he mauniou karakia tana."
SUGGESTED HYMNS FOR SINGING PRACTICES
"The Lord is My Light" Page 106
rE Kore Ahau e Mataku Xoa" Wharangi 62
SUPERINTENDENTS:
The third Sunday in December is Christmas Sunday and we sug- gest you take the initiative to arrange a suitable Sunday School Pro- gramme. Have a very well prepared programme. Use the time as you see best to portray the "Christ Theme" to your people.
RE HUI PEKA PROGRAMMES:
The responsibility for your Sunday School programmes when- ever there is a HUI PEKA (Branch Conference) belong to the Branch President and his Superintendent, always, however, with the knowledge that due deference and respect be given to the District and Mission Sunday School authorities if the}- wish to participate. Any information or assistance in preparation of the programme desired of the higher Sunday School organizations will be gladly given.
Tihema, 1941 TE KARERE 871
RE HUI PARIHA PROGRAM MRS:
The District Presidency and Superintendency are responsible for these programmes and they may prepare their activities without any waiting for a programme from the Mission Sunday School. Due respect is to be accorded Mission officers and Board members. Arrangements must be made for suitable time for instructional work during the Conference, which will be carried out by the District officers with the assistance of any Mission worker present.
There are several Districts who fail to prepare proper pro- grammes. If you have anything to do at all affecting Sunday Schools, please try and have it well prepared. Begin your meeting on time.
REPORTS :
The last quarterly report is due 20th December, 1941. Please try and get your reports mailed before the above date. Every Home and Branch Sunday School that has been organized under the direction of the Priesthood in the Xew Zealand Minimi is asked to send in a report. All Priesthood authorities throughout this Mission who were responsible for the organization of Sunday Schools whether Home or Branch, are asked to visit those said Sunday Schools and see that a REPORT is made.
Reports are made out in Triplicate. One to the Mission Secre- tary, Box 72, Auckland; one to the District Officers, and the other one lor Branch use. Look up past issues of Te Karere for the
-ary added information regarding your Reports.
SIX-PENNY FUND:
With this last report should come the second "Six-penny Fund" -allotment. There are no "envelopes" for your contributions. Branches are asked to record the names of contributors on their roll books. There is a special column in the rolls for this purpose.
All Sunday Schools are asked to prepare to commence the New Year of 1942 the First Sunday of December, L941. Hiis means thai your rolls must be redrafted; and a word t»> Branch Presidents, if you are to make any changes in your Sunday School Superin- tendents u would be for tbe best of your School if the change be effected at die beginning of the year. Roll books are available at tin- Mission Office at 2 per copy (English). These books are not die same as have Used in the past, but are of local manu Eacture and therefore do nol have the \\ ritti
old one-, have. I lie books have a place for cwrythii.
SEND i.\ v< m k "SIX n:\.\Y rwds."
i il difficulties encountered in In
abilil mi ill,- ( Inn, li Id I,,, •, i ,|s o'| Mormon."
tins issue will bring you something we hope will prove .1 satisfaction t«. the Saint .
872 TE KARERE Tihema, 1941
REMEMBER, even- Sunday School officer and teacher cannot expect to carry on the Sunday School work without YV Karcrc. Sub- scribe now !
Brother Charles E. Billman of the Auckland Branch has been given the right whereever he goes in the Mission to seek out those officers and teachers of the Sunday Schools he may he privileged to attend, who are without Te Kareres and endeavour to have them subscribe.
LESSONS
KINDERGARTEN. Thought: "The Re-awakening." "Raising the Widow's Son at Nain." (Luke 7) "Raising of Lazarus." (John 11) "Raising of Jarius' Daughter." (Matt. 9 and Luke 8)
PRIMARY.
"The Long Lost Son." (Gen. 44 and 46) Thought: "The Lord
helps a loving, dutiful son, He over-rules evil for good." "Saved by a Princess." (Exodus 2) Thought: "The Lord can
save." "A Mighty Leader for God's People." (Exodus 11 to 15) Thought:.
"The Lord uses Humble People for great Things."
CHURCH HISTORY
"Lehi Leaves Jerusalem." (1 Nephi 1: 1-20 and 2: 1-8) Thought: "Obedience." Facts: The Lord tells Lehi that Jerusalem will be destroyed. Lehi prophesies. The Jews seek his life. Lehi's family commanded to flee. They leave much wealth and depart into a wilderness.
"The Liahona." (1 Nephi 16:9-16, 26-33) Thought: "Faith." Facts: Lehi finds the Liahona — the spindles point the way to travel — they work according to faith.
"Building of the Ship." (1 Nephi 17:5-17 and 18:1-9) Thought: "Knowledge can be obtained by faith, as also by study. Facts: The command to build a ship — Nephi digs ore — he makes tools — opposed by his brothers — he completes the work.
A and B DEPARTMENTS.
"The Story of Isaac." (Gen. 17:15-22, 21:1-12, 22:1-18, 24 to 27) What to look for: Isaac fore-announced; the promise of his life. Incidents in his youthful life. How he secured a wife. His preference of sons.
NOTE. — Consider the consistency of prayer in Gen. 24 and dis- cuss the importance of the great care needed in selecting a companion. The happiness and success of parents depend upon the perpetuation of a noble lineage. (Gen. 26:34-35, 27:46, and 28:1-5) Note also in the story of the sacrifice that God does not command Abraham to slay Isaac, but to present him as an offering on the altar. There is no justification in this story for human sacrifices as has been alleged.
C and D DEPARTMENTS.
"At Jerusalem Attending the Feast of the Passover." (John 5) Problems: What evidence do you find that Jesus was not yet well known in Jerusalem? Did Jesus believe that sickness is sometimes due to sin? What proof did Jesus give for His divinity? For what evi- dence did He hold them responsible?
Arrange for some discussions on New Testament Scripture as it affects present-day happenings, etc.
Tihema, 1941 TE KARERE 873
GOSPEL DOCTRINE.
"Isaiah, the Prophet of Judah. (Is. 1 to 6) "Isaiah's Prophecies of Immanuel." (Is. 7 to 12)
"Isaiah's Prophecies of the Last Days." (Is. 2:1-4; 18:1-7;
29: 2-4, 11 to 14, 18 to 24, 35: 1-10; 45 to 48 and 65: 17-25)
MAORI CLASS.
RATAPU TUATAHI
TE TAKANGA ATU O 0 TATOU MATUA TUATAHI I ERENE.
Ko te hanganga o te tangata kia rite ki te ahua o tona Matua Wairua, te Atua, he karaunatanga no nga mea katoa i kitea i te hanganga o te ao. Hei whakanui mo te whakanohanga o te tangata tuatahi he mea ata whakarite mai e te Kaihanga he wahi tino pai o te whenua, he mea whakapaipai ki nga mea ataahua o runga i te whenua hei whakakoa i te ngakau o tona "kainoho." Ka whakatokia e Ihowa e te Atua tetahi kaari ki Erene ki te taha ki te rawhiti, a whakanohia iho ki reira te tangata i hanga e la. Muri tata iho i te nohanga o te tangata ki te whenua ka hanga e te Ariki he hoa, he kai awhina mona i mea hoki ia e kore e pai kia noho te tangata koia anake. Noreira te tane me te wahine, a Arama me tana wahine me Iwi ka whakanohia ki te kaari. Kua meatia raua hei rangatira mo nga ika o te moana, mo te manu hoki o te rangi, a mo nga mea ora katoa hoki e ngokingoki ana i runga i te whenua. I te taha o tenei mana nui i whakapiria mai etahi whakahau. Ko te mea tuatahi nui rawa hoki: "Kia hua kia tini kia kapi te whenua, kia mate hoki ona tara ia korua; kia kaua raua e kai kia kaua ranei e pa ki te hua o tetahi rakau, te rakau o te matau- ranga ki te pai ki te kino e tupu ana i waenganui pu o te kaari : otira o era atu hua rakau katoa e ahei ana raua ki te kai." Ko Qga kupu a te Atua mo tenei whakahau me te whiu ina takahia e penei ana. "A ka whakahau te Ariki te Atua i te tangata ka mea — kainga noatia nga hua o nga rakau katoa o te kaari ko te rakau ia o te matauranga ki te kino kaua e kai i ona hua; otiia kei a koe te tikanga ki te whiriwhiri mou ake, kua hoatu na hoki kia koe, engari kia mahara kua rahuitia tena e Ahau no te mea i te ra ano e kai ai koe i tetahi 0 ona hua ka mate rawa koe."
Nga Patai:
1. 0 nga mea katoa i te han.uun.ua 0 te ao, he aha te mea nui
rawa'.'
'2. lie aha te mea i whakaritea hei whakanui mo te tangata?
3. !!•' aha i han^aia ai te wahine".'
4. He aha Qga whakahau ki te tane raua ko to wahine?
RATAPU TUARUA
TE MURERE 0 HATANA. I muri tata Iho I te whakahau ■ te At u a kia [wi raua k<» Arama, ka puta mai he whakawa\nga hei takahi i taua whakahaunga. Ka whakatata mai a Hatana ia ia ki mua
ia Iwi i roto i te kauri, u ka korero mai ma te tl • nukalu. ka
in la mo nga whakahau a te Atua mo te rakau o te matauranga ki te pai Id te km". I whakahokia <• iwi kahore <■ whakaaetia kin uiu ki te hua o te rakau, ka mute rawa ina totohe. Ka tnhuri u Hatana Id te maminga I te wahine, ki \<- raupatu hoki i te kupu ■ te Atua me te
mea aim e kOM to mate o |>a mai i muri iho i to takahanea «• taua
tikanga ■ te Atua; otira, i tetahi ahua. Id te maatia <• raua ta te Atua
i kihai ra i kai kia 1 1 1 • ■ ; 1 1 ia. k;i nlr raua ko tona tane ki Qga Atua. ka
mohio ki te pai nc te kino. i enel korero tonu ka riro te wahine;
874 TE KARERE Tihema, 1941
a i tona hiahia kia whiwhi ia i nga painga i whakaaturia ra e Batana ha takahia e ia te whakahau a Ihowa B kain.ua ake te hua o te rakau rahui. Kahore ia i wehi i te kino i te mea kahore ano ia i mohio noa ki te kino. Na, ka korerotia e ia kia Arama tana i mea ai, me te tohe at u kia kai ano ia i te hua o te rakau.
Nga Patai:
1. I te mea kua puta nei nga tohutohu mai a te Atua kia Iwi raua ko Arama he aha te mea i tupono?
2. He aha nga kupu whakapati a Hatana ki te wahine?
3. He aha te wahi korero a Hatana i ahuareka atu ki te wahine?
4. He aha te wahine i kore ai e wehi ki te kino i taua wa?
RATAPU TUATORU
TO ARAMA WAHI I ROTO I TE TAKAHANGA O TE KUPU. Kua kite iho a Arama e kore e ahei ia ki te whakarite i nga whakahau e rua a te Atua. He mea whakahau mai raua ko tona wahine kia hua kia tini, kia kapi te whenua. Kihai ano a Arama kia taka atu ki te ahua o te kikokiko engari ia a Iwi, a e kore e pai ta raua noho tahi ina pera te ahua, e kore hoki e mana te whakahau ra "kia hua." Ina hoki whakarongo ia ki ta Iwi ka takahia e ia tetahi o nga whakahau. Noreira i ata takahia e ia i runga i te mohiotanga, a kai ana ano i te hua o te rakau e ea ai ia ia te whakahau tuatahi, te mea nui rawa. I te mea i ata whakaritea e Arama tenei ahua i runga i te mohiotanga e tautokoria ana e nga karaipiture. I nga tuhituhinga a Paora kia Timoti, e whakamarama ana i mea: 'kihai ano hoki a Arama i tini- hangatia, ko te wahine ia i tinihangatia, a takahi ana i te ture.' Te poropiti a Rihai, ia ia e whakamarama ana i nga karaipiture ki ana tama, ka mea 'I taka ai a Arama kia puta ai he tangata, a i puta nga tangata kia whiwhi ai ratou ki te koa.'
Nga Patai:
1. Pehea ta Arama whiriwhiringa i te mea kua pa nei a Iwi ki te hua o te rakau?
2. I te mea kihai ano nei a Arama kia kai i te hua o te rakau rahui a ko Iwi kua pa whakamaramatia o raua ahua?
3. I taea ranei a Arama te tinihanga e te Rewera, kei hea hoki o te karaipiture te kore whakamarama mo tenei?
RATAPU TUAWHA
TE RAKAU O TE ORA. Tera ano tetahi atu rakau tino pai nei ona hua, i roto i te kaari o Erene; ona hua e whakawhiwhi ana i te oranga ki nga mea e kai ana. Ia Arama raua ko Iwi e noho ana i roto i te harakoretanga, kahore hoki te mate i te pa kia raua, kaore tenei rakau i araia ia raua otira i te mea kua hara nei hoki raua, i te mea hoki inaianei kua pa te whakataunga a te Atua, ka pa te mate kia raua, na e ahei ana kia kore e whawha raua ki te rakau o te ora. Noreira, ka peia atu raua i te kaari a he kerapima me te hoari mumura e tiaki i te huarahi atu, kei hoki atu te tangata ki te Atua i roto i tona ahua kaore ano kia whakahoua.
Nga Patai:
1. He rakau atu ranei i waho atu o te mea mo te mohiotanga ki te kino me te pai?
2. He aha i whakaturia ai he anahera hei tiaki i tenei rakau?
3. He aha raua i peia ai i te kaari o Erene?
Tihema, 1941 TE KARERE 875
PRIMARY
LESSONS:
FIRST WEEK
THE SUN IS GOD'S GIFT TO US Objective:
Let us be grateful for the sun — God's gift to give us light and life.
Prayer:
One of the older children of the group may now be able to say the prayer without help.
Approach:
Talk with the children about the beautiful gardens they have seen ; about trees, flowers, and birds. Let them repeat the gem:
All things bright and beautiful,
All creatures great and small, All things wise and wonderful, The Lord, God, made them all. Story:
Long, long ago Heavenly Father made this beautiful world we live in. The very first story in the Bible tells how the world was made. The first thing Heavenly Father made was light and darkness so that we would have daytime and nighttime. What makes it light in da\ - time? What makes it light at night? Can we see the sun all the time? Where does it go at nighttime? (Illustrate with a ball to represent the earth and a small ball as the sun to show how the sun gives daytime to some while others have nighttime.) Tell me the things the sun does for us. It gives us light to see the beautiful things around us doesn't it?
Do you know that it does even more than that? Everything that
I ets its colour from the sun. Eave you ever lifted a hoard and
found the grass under it pale yellow and sickly Looking? Ask your
mother to let you plant a bean and put it in a dark closet. If you give i' water it will grow, hut the leaves and stalk will he almost white and look sickly. Then if you put it in the sunlight, the stalk and haves will turn green, and the plant will grow strong and beautiful.
So you Bee the sun sends his colour fairies to make the trees and grass green. What colour do the sunshine fairies make the roses, the butter-
eups and viol it nice that the great, round sun makes the
earth so hea lit 1 1 n 1 for US to enjoy? It not only gives lovely colours to the flowers and trees, hut it help them to gTOW. Whom else do you think it helps? It keeps the animals Btrong and well, the horses,
dogs and cats and all other animals.
It helps people, too — grown people and little children. Doesn't
it make you happy to play out in the bright ■un-liiiio and wouldn't it he hard if tin- un COUld not be e< n and we had rainy days all t hi" time?
What el e does tie sun do he ides •.i\nie w light and helpii to crow'.' Some da\ it i cold in tin- morning, but aft in the BUnshine for a little while you get warm. Isn't thai
we can as I he un keep u a ai
<>n whom doe ti"' on shine.' Does It shine on jual a few people and leave <'\ «i \ one el e In t he dark and cold? little girl who ha been naughts to-day, I will not shine on hei "I don't like tin farmer, I will not nine and make his wheat •.■■ The lun trie to make the whole world bright, and warm and bea
*7<< TE KARERE Tihcma, 1941
Whom shall we say "thank you" to for the sun? Let us te1! Heavenly Father in our prayers how much we like the sun and the sunshine.
Teacher may use the following. It is an old song. If you know the tune, sing it two or three times slowly and the children will join in with you. Actions may be suited to the words: —
Good morning, merry sunshine,
Why did you wake so soon? You scare away the little stars,
And shine away the moon. I saw you go to sleep last night,
Before I ceased my playing. How did you get way over there,
And where have you been staying? I never go to sleep, dear child,
I just go round to see The little children in the east,
Who rise and watch for me.
Story:
Ruth was going on an errand for her mother.
"It looks like rain," said mother. "Don't you think you had better take an umbrella, Ruth?"
"Yes," said Ruth, and when it rained she was glad she had taken one. "How does God make it rain?" Ruth asked her father when she returned to the house.
"He does not do it alone," father answered. "God has made many helpers. The sun is one of His helpers. The sun warms the water and it goes up in the sky and forms clouds."
"Wind helps make rain, too," said father. "It blows the clouds in the same way that it blows your sailboat. The wind drives it along the sky until it strikes some cold air. Then the little drops of water in the clouds get so heavy that they fall."
"They fall on the flowers and the grass," said Ruth, "and that is why they are so fresh and beautiful."
"Yes," said father, "and that is why we say, 'Praise ye the Lord, who covereth the heavens with clouds, who prepareth rain for the earth.' "
"Oh, look!" said Ruth, "the sun is shining again. I love the bright sunshine. I love to play outdoors when the sun is shining. It seems to shine brighter after a rain."
"Yes," said father, "the sunshine brings us daylight. It makes us glad and happy. Mother says sunshine is like God's love, because it is everywhere and it makes everyone happy."
SECOND WEEK
BROTHERS AND SISTERS Objective:
To help the children to love and to be kind to their brothers and sisters.
Prayer:
In concert, led by the teacher.
Approach:
I read a story one day that made me very happy. It said: A little girl was walking down the street. She was carrying her little brother who was really much too heavy for her. A lady met her. She felt
Tihema, 1941 TE KARERE 877
sorry for her and wanted very much to help her, "Let me carry the baby," she said, "he is too heavy for you to carry."
"No, thank you," replied the little girl, "he isn't too heavy, he is my brother."
Why do you think she thought he wasn't heavy? Do you love your little brother? Do you love your sister? Do you tell her so some- times?
Here is a poem about a boy who had a very little brother. It says:
I am a sister of him
And he is my brother, He is too little for us
To talk to each other.
So every morning I show him
My doll and my book, But every morning he still is
Too little to look.
(The teacher may here tell any experience of seeing children kind and helpful to each other.)
Story:
TWO SISTERS
Janet and Margie were two sisters who helped each other and played together every day. Janet was eight but Margie was just five and was a rolly-polly little girl. She was a good sister and liked to help Janet. One night Janet was taking her dolls to bed. She had five in her arms and couldn't turn the light on.
"Wait a minute," said Margie. "I'll turn it on for you." She couldn't reach the switch so she pushed a chair to tin- wall, climbed up and on went the light.
One day when Janet and Margie went to school, the sun was -bill- ing, but when they started home the wind was blowing. "Woo-oo," went the wind, and both girls buttoned their coats up tight. Soon .Mr. Wind came harder. "Woo-oo, woo-oo," lie said, blowing right into their faces.
"That hurts my cheeks and nose." said Margie.
"It goes right through my coat," said Janet. "Let's try walking backward-.''
They tried that a little way hut Man-ie stumbled.
"Oh dear!" she cried, "we can't gel home."
"Yes we can," .aid Janet. "Come. I'll take your hand."
Then Air. Wind became tierce. "Woo-OO, woo,... w .." he
shrieked. lie pushed so hard that Margie's little feet just couldn't gO, and she began to cry. -Janet felt like crying too, but >he thought,
"I mustn't. I must get Margie home." So he said "No* just duck
your head like this so the wind won't hit yOUI lac 10 hard. So.
nearly to tie- corner. When we turn up the in \t Btreet mnyhc the wind
won't be o trong."
So they went on. one Btep, then another, then another, until they reached the corner. The wind wa n't nearly bo bad en that block,
and then, they Were home.
Mother had them it l>.\ a nice warm lire and -a\e them warm
milk to drink. Soon they were feeling fine aj
"I wonder," aid Margie, "what the other children did. the
that don't ha\e a i ter like Janet I" help Ihem home'."'
(Show picture of children helping each other and direct the children1 attention t" what hould be aid when h< them.)
878 TE KARERE Tihentt, 1941
Here is another story of how a big sister helped:
Gladys lived in a big house in a big city. She had a little brother and sister. She loved them very much and was very kind to them.
One day when Gladys had been on an errand for her mother she heard sounds coming from the playroom. She ran to the dour and there were her brother and sister, each pulling on the arm of a doll.
"I want it!" cried little Brother.
"It's mine, and I want it," cried little Sister.
Just then little Brother gave a hard jerk and the poor doll's arm came right off. Both Brother and Sister fell to the floor.
Gladys said, "Oh, dear me, what is the matter?" Then both Brother and Sister tried to talk at once.
"Let's see if we can find something else for little Brother to play with," said Gladys. So they hunted about until little Brother found a ball. Then Gladys sat down and sewed the arm on the doll, just as it had been before, and the two children played together again and were as happy as could be. Have you a big sister or a big brother? Tell how they help you. What do you say to them when they helo you?
Game:
Let the children dramatize being big brother or sister. Help the children to remember to say "thank you."
Cut pictures of brothers and sisters and paste them in their scrap- books. Do not expect perfect work but encourage the children to do their best.
THIRD WEEK
OUR EYES Objective:
To help the children to appreciate their eyes as a precious gift of our Heavenly Father.
Prayer:
To get the children in the right attitude for prayer the following is suggestive: —
What shall we thank Heavenly Father for? What did we say "Thank You" for last Primary day? Let a child find a picture that tells what he is thankful for. Another child may remember that we thanked Heavenly Father for our fathers and mothers, too. When the children are ready, the children repeating the words after her.
Approach:
This simple exercise, with the hands may help to get the boys and girls in listening position.
Open, shut, open, shut,
Give a little clap; Open, shut, open, shut,
Fold them in your lap.
Now, will you all look at me for a moment? I can see lovely blue eyes and brown eyes. Heavenly Father has blessed everyone of you with bright, sparkling eyes. What has He given them to you for? Let us name some of the things our eyes help us to see. Our Heavenly Father made all the beautiful things we can see, and He gave us our eyes to see them.
Teacher may repeat the following poem. The children know the first stanza, let them say it, and then the teacher may continue.
Tihema, 1941 TE KARERE 879
ALL THINGS BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL
All things bright and beautiful,
All creatures great and small, All things wise and wonderful,
The Lord God made them all.
Each little flower that opens,
Each little bird that sings, He made their glowing colours,
He made their tiny wings.
The cold wind in the winter,
The pleasant summer sun, The ripe fruits in the garden,
He made them every one.
He gave us eyes to see them,
And lips that we might tell How great is God our Father
Who has made all things well.
Game:
Place several pictures around the room, let the children look at them. Have them close their eyes while you take one away. Have one child tell which one is missing. This may be repeated several times.
Have all the children close their eyes. How would you feel if you were like that every day? Do you know there are some people who cannot see all the beautiful things we can see? They are blind. What do blind people have to help them go about? Talk briefly about the "white cane" used by the blind. Tell also about the "seeing eye" dogs that have been so helpful to the blind. Tell the following story:
THE BROOM MAN
Mary and Fred were going to the library for a story book. Mother said, "You may go by yourselves it' you will watch the lights. A red light moans Stand and Wait. A green li.u'ht moans Cross the street Carefully. Can you remember?"
"Yes, we will remember, a rod lighl means Stand and Wait, and
a green light means Cross the street Carefully. And away they went
down the side walk.
"Let's play a game," said Mary. "Try who can Bee the most things. I see some lords."
•| ee them eating seeds on the lawn," said Fred.
"I see them fly away," said Mary,
"I see a red r«.se in that garden," saiil Fred.
"I see a red light that says Stand and Wail." -anl Mary.
So they waited, and Fred aid. "l Bee a man coming down the
street."
"I see he is earryin- omething on hi h.oilder." -aid Mary. I'
broom . It* ;i broom man. He i carrying a white cane too. i should think a bundle of brooms on his shoulder would be enough without a
tut, in the other hand."
Fred was watching him too. "He I pattinj the fane around on
the sidewalk in trout of hun. I wonder w hy he d06fl that'."*
"o Fred!" aid Mary, "I do believe the man Is blind. Look he
is feeling the walk to ee whore to top."
880 TE KARERE Tihema, 1(M1
In the street the light had gone red, and green, and red again, but Mary and Fred did not see it. They watched until the man came up close to them. Then they knew that he was blind. When he stopped at the crossing, Fred said, "May we help you across the street ' "
"Yes, thank you," the man answered. I can't see the lights."
Fred took the man's arm and they all three crossed together. Then the broom man thanked them and went on, tapping the walk in front of him.
Fred said, "Let's close our eyes and try how it feels to walk without seeing."
They both closed their eyes and took a few steps. They bumped into each other and stubbed their toes.
"O, how thankful I am for my eyes!" said Mary as she opened them and the children walked into the library.
"So am I," said Fred. "When I say my prayers to-night I am going to thank Heavenly Father especially for my eyes."
FOURTH WEEK
To Teacher: Review last week's lesson. Impress children again with importance of taking care of their eyes.
Story:
THE BLIND MAN BY THE ROADSIDE
A long, long time ago in a country far away there lived a man who was blind. He had never seen his mother or father. He had never seen a flower or a tree. He had never seen the blue sky or the beautiful sunlight. The world was all darkness to him. He had never worked because no one had ever taught him to use his fingers. So day after day he sat by the roadside begging for money.
One day Jesus passed that way on his way from the temple. He saw the blind man and wanted to help him. Jesus did not have any money to give him, but he gave the man something worth ever so much more than money. Do you know what it was? This is what Jesus did. He took some clay from the ground and moistened it, and put it very gently on the blind man's eyes.
Then He said, "Go wash in the Pool of Siloam."
The blind man knew where the pool was and did as Jesus told him. He had to feel his way very slowly with his cane. After he had washed the clay from his eyes what do you think happened? He could see!
He saw the birds and flowers and the green grass. He saw his neighbours.
The neighbours and those who had known him before did not know him now. Some asked who he was, and he told them that he was the one who begged by the roadside.
"How were thine eyes opened?" they asked.
He answered, "A man that is called Jesus made clay and put on my eyes, and then told me to wash in the Pool of Siloam. I went and washed as he told me and I can see."
Then he left the neighbours, for he wanted to see his father and mother. Can you think how glad he was to see them?
All the people who had seen the blind man wondered at the things Jesus had done.
Song:
One the children choose. Prayer:
By one of the boys.
Tihema, 1941
TE KARERE
881
NEWS FROM THE FIELD
MANAWATU DISTRICT By Polly Wi Neera
Greetings ! Here we are again, report- ing the activities of this District for the past month.
On the week-end of the 11th October, Bro. and Sister Peneamine Wi Neera of Porirua and Bro. Parata Pirihi of Wellington, visited the McDonald family of Hokio Beach, Levin. This was the first occasion on which this Branch had been visited for many years, and the result was that Bros. Adam and Tuiti McDonald together with their families gathered together to listen to rhe mes- sage that these brethren carried to them — about 50 members of the McDonald family were present at the meetings. A very successful time was spent with them and the gospel is still paramount ill their lives.
Sister Wi Neera also visited the Wel- lington Branch Relief Society and spent a very enjoyable afternoon with the sis- ters there and the work is going for- ward under the guidance of t^e officers and members.
Private Ritchie Tatana of Auckland and Waikato. now serving with the Maori Battalion in the Middle East, sends rigs hack, per medium of "Te Karere," to all his friends in the North island. lie reports that he is well and that the land of the I'haroahs is all thai
i d it to be.
Sister YViki Katei f the I'orirua
Branch is kepi very busy now, taking pupils in the Capita] City who intend sitting for Elementary and Intermediate
On Monday nights she
tld Wednesday nights I [ome N ui-sine.. Bach
I . -".II pupils
ho pita] hip arrived in
arrying invalided soldiers of the
\ / I !.F. from t he Middle Baal ; among them were numbered nine of the Maori Battalion. The Sydney Streel Hall, Wel- lington ally for ins t he Maori boj '>n such occa- lons. On i he Friday morning, people had gathered there from all part- of the to assist in the preparations. At ii 80 a.m. i hi boj arrh ed mid I he i in ir people and to I he crj
I lis Mai te \\ al ■ I" rend. |
m< mi.. in Poneke Club, led
by Mr:;. Oka llek.ta. A | I he I., |
t hen place a nd th<
rho a. -ted ■
ii, t heir "v. n language and i hen called on the Hon P. 1 Paikei who, on behalf of th. Maori people welcomed th<
to i ti.it relative and homeland.
01 her ,,. :,l . '
. Hoi Mi I ..i Di renc<
puhii l ii poral v.
i to at know ledge th<
1 1 nded I h< m" bj I b< pi sviou pi
n-
i hi
brothers, fathers and relatives over there have no need to fear while they are under the care of Colonel Ditmer, their leader, a man well respected and one whose words are held in high esteem by the boys. . . ." Private P. W. Kohere of East Cape also replied by saying that there was no doubt about the manner in which the Maori Batallion were being looked after. They were given the finest care by their superior officers and leaders. He mentioned the name of Brigadier Har- gest. Both these lads spoke in their own language and Mr. M. R. Jones, Secretary to the Native Minister, acted as trans- lator. The other boys who returned were Pte. W. Larkins te Awe-Awe, of Rangi- otu, Palmerston North; Pte. H. Eria, Paki Paki, H.B.; Pte. H. Mano and P. Mare, Whangarei, North Auckland: Pte. W. A. Kenny, Picton, South Island; Pte. H. Rangi Hika, Whakatane; Pte. P. Mau- heni. Rangitukia.
This is your District Correspondent signing off, but before doing BO, I. to- gether with the Saints of the District, would like to greet you one and all by wishing you a Merry Christmas and a Happy New Year:
HAWKE'S BAY DISTRICT By Olive Edwards and Patu Wairama Korongata M.I. A. held their annual Gold and Gre< n Ball in I he Assembly Ball, Hastings, September 19th, Mary Tahau representing the Gleaners
Was crowned Queen of th.' Hall. The
newly organized orchestra under tin di- rection of Syd Kamau was considered a vers attractive combination a- a draw
for the Ball. Mission officer 8 present:
■it Wi Duncan and his counsellors.
Richard Marsh and Kru TengaiO and Sis-
i. i ii in I am of the Ybum w omen's
i i icy.
August 28th Peter Bdwards entered
military trainiuc camp at Pain
North for l"
trainin Guard duties.
Tiie M.I. A. of tie > Branch
ended 11 rk v. it h much
mi the minds
of everyone ' he tine pun of •■..
I mn .nil..,,.' i I,. in' im:,'
I i I ;i« aid. d
\ ice in at t ending n
rj function held t-- a fund
ant hoi v
tell.. \
Mi I
i
Kami. II
i :
882
TE KARRRK
Tihema, 1941
w;is collected from the many stalls, etc. The children were wonderful in their <i i s - play of mass marching and drill.
The Chapel Committee is working on the "beautification of the grounds" and are also working on the erection of the M.A.C. Memorial Gate. Information to hand discloses that grounds about the Chapel are in potatoes. We mean, pota- toes have been sown in the grounds about the Chapel and the funds derived from the sale of potatoes will go into the cost of the beautification, etc.
The Te Hauke Branch M.I. A. an- nounces another successful M.I. A. Gold and Green Ball. The success of this great event is due to the wonderful co- operative spirit among the officers and the people of the community. The finan- cial figures touched the century mark. Very good indeed. Keep it up. The crowning ceremony was performed by District President of the M.I.A., Peter Edwards, and the winning Queen candi- date was Miss W. Thompson of Puke- hou, and her attendant Princesses were Misses Delia Tutaki, Ada Hapuku and Maureen Hedley. Two orchestras were in attendance. Mita Carter's combina- tion accompanied by Syd Kamau and his orchestra supplying the extras.
The Korongata people, through the Chapel Committee, are desirous of ex- tending to Mr C. Tahau of Hastings their thanks and appreciation for his contribution to the beautification pro- ject of the "posts" which add very much indeed to the beauty of the Chapel grounds.
AUCKLAND DISTRICT Reported by Ivan P. Reid
The sisters of the Relief Society showed the Branch just what could be done when they conducted the Evening Service in the Chapel, November 2nd. The programme was well prepared and many of the sisters took active part, including Sister Birgette Purcell (nee Jensen), who gave a very inspiring ad- dress, and it was good to hear her sweet soprano voice again as she sang the solo in "Jesus I My Cross Have Taken," ac- companied by the Singing Mothers. Sis- ter Cameron gave a review of the work accomplished by the Society during the past year, which was indeed a credit to them. Bro. Billman of the Branch Pre- sidency reports that the sisters are work- ing every spare moment making goods for their forthcoming Bazaar on Friday. November 21st, and if it is anything like their last one we are then assured of its success.
21st Birthday Greetings this month go out to L.A.C. Mateen Jensen, and live- wire of the Mangere Branch, Mabel Kewene. 'Te Karere' congratulates them and wishes many happy returns. Mateen who has been in hospital with foot ail- ment was discharged from hospital treat- ment in time to celebrate the event at his home on November 1st. He is ex- pected to return to Levin in the near future to undergo further intensive train- ing and studies. Mabel will celebrate her cominer-of-age with a party at the For- resters' Hall, Onehunga, on Friday, No- vember 14th, and we know she will have
:i good time with her many friends. i From first-hand information the party waa outstanding in entertainment and elegance. I
One thing about this war — everyone gets a uniform. Hepa Meha, Mateen Jen- ><ii. Krnie Cormier, Krnie Montague, Matt Chote, Bertel Jensen, Hill Brosnan, Dea I'.illman all have one, and now Ros- si r Perrott has one. A nice blue one with birds on each shoulder and lnass buttona down the front. Yes, Rosser is in the Air Force. Although he volun- teered last year, Rosser only left for training at Levin on November 10th to train as a pilot, and with him goes our good wishes for happy landings and prayers for his safety. He is a man we will miss in the Branch.
Under graduate Win Smiler of Gis- borne, who has been attending Auckland University, finished his exams for the year, and has since returned home. In the five months between courses. Win intends to do some shearing, etc. But when one goes another comes, and this time it's Fritz Kru^er, formerly of the Wellington Branch, who has just re- turned to Auckland after two years in Rarotontra Fritz intends to stay in Auck- land for some time before leaving.
Visitors to the Mission Secretary's office cannot miss seeing the notice that now hangs on the wall above President Cowley's desk. President tells me that no one takes any notice of it: those who read it cannot fail to get it's meaning. The sign reads: "Quiet Please, Genius at Work."
The Auckland Choral Society may sign up tenor Don Ross to take the lead in their Christmas presentation of Handel's Messiah. This is not definite as yet, but we hope it will become a reality. Don had one week in which to learn his en- tire part as the audition waa scheduled for a specific time. One of Don's big ambitions is to sing with the Salt Lake le Choir in America.
NEWS FLASH— AMERICA. A cab] ■ d Bazel Smith of Auckland, for- merly of Palmerston North, of the death of his mother and the injury of his father, Brother and Sister Weston J. Smith, who left New Zealand some tirro ago to make their home in Zion. We join in sympathy with the loved ones at this sudden and sad parting.
TARANAKI DISTRICT Reported by Zena M. Stent
October 19th reminds us of the visit of Turake Manu of the District Presi- dency and Taka Toroaiwhiti, Missionary to Wanjranui. President Hakopa was unable to be present as he was called away to a tangi. Even so, in the after- noon at Bro. Wi Katene's home a meet- ing of the Presidency was held, at which a report of the District was given. We feel that with this meeting of the Presi- (l< ncy thintrs will be run even more smoothly in the District than in the past.
An Addition to the Overseas News. — Married — Elder Beesley to Eunice D. Smith, formerly of Palmerston North. Occupations — Elder Beesley, railroad; Elder Loy W. Watts, ferrying planes to England; Elder Delbert Curtis, army.
BRANCH PRESIDENTS AND TE KARERE AGENTS
Subscribers will notice that where they are in a community we have sent their issues to an * which was made necessary because of the high of paper and also at a request from the Government to curtail as far as is possible the necessary use of paper. It also serves a better purpose in the that 'agents' with the full co-operation of sub- scribers and particularly Branch Presidents ma able to follow up subscribers whose subscripl have lapsed and actually be a mean sonal
contact in the matter of securing subscrib*
Branch Presidents are asked to i act with the 'agents' printed on this page, and w] there are no 'agents' Branch Presidents quested to act in that capacity as it affects the mem-
of his Branch — in a particular manner apply to all Officers and Teachers of Sunda; ; and Primaries. A drive should ; direction of each Branch Pr<
is a home in his Branch.
reporter and '
AGENTS as at present : —
Auckland, Branch Presidency; Onehun^a, ataiti; Pipiwai P.O., Ben Armstrong; Awarua R.M.D., Patrick WiHongi; Kaikohe Box 23, I iii-u; Kawhai P.O., John I'aki; Huntly \\
Ngaha Rotana, Whatawhata P.O., Tu] Manunui, Howard Osborne; Kopu Thami Watene; Korongata, Takap; 0
H.B., Patu Wairama; Waipawa Box 58, R< Meha; Opoutama, H.B., Enu Nuhaka P.O.,
William Christy; Kopuawhara No. 3 Camp, » lotte N. ] : Tologa Bay.
Judea, Tauranga, James Kohu.
®
<§>
" THERE IS A LAW"
By IK A J. .MARK HAM
All good things in this life and in eternity are governed by law. The quickest and surest way to reach any desired goal is to disdover
and live in harmony with the laws that govern the attainment of that goal.
There is a law, irrevocably decreed in heaven before the foundations of this world, upon which all blessings
arc predict I
And when we obtain any blessing from God, it is by obedience to that law upon which it is previa — D. & C. 130: 20-21.
This fundamental philosophy of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints appeals to thinking men and women of all lands. Many good people are anxious to develop and grow in mind and spirit. They find in this philosophy a fundamental law of growth. It explains nothing else can the remarkable progress that is made by people who have been converted to the true Gospel of Jesus Christ.
Laws were not placed on earth to test the fidelity of man but to give him a fundarm •: basis of growth and development. Eternal laws cannot be changed. Obedience to eternal laws and living in harmony with them brings the re- quired change in man. It is a doctrine of p tive activity wherein the individual progn fastest who goes "from perfection to perfec- tion" by complete obedience to spiritual laws.
®
<S>